1 [the text had dots under many e, o z and zz which I cannot ...
1 [the text had dots under many e, o z and zz which I cannot ...
1 [the text had dots under many e, o z and zz which I cannot ...
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
[The <strong>text</strong> <strong>had</strong> <strong>dots</strong> <strong>under</strong> <strong>many</strong> "e, o z <strong>and</strong> <strong>zz</strong>" <strong>which</strong> I <strong>cannot</strong><br />
reproduce. They are often foot-noted]<br />
AN ITALIAN CONVERSATION GRAMMAR COMPRISING THE<br />
MOST IMPORTANT RULES OF ITALIAN GRAMMAR , WITH<br />
NUMEROUS EXAMPLES AND EXERCISES THEREON,<br />
ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES, HINTS ON ITALIAN<br />
VERSIFICATION, AND EXTRACTS IN ITALIAN POETRY,<br />
FOLLOWED BY A SHORT GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION .<br />
ALSO AN ENGLISH-ITALIAN AND ITALIAN-ENGLISH<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
Throughout this Grammar <strong>the</strong> tonic accent on words is marked<br />
in darker type , <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> proper pronunciations of <strong>the</strong> letters " E,"<br />
"O," "S," <strong>and</strong> "Z," are indicated .<br />
BY N. PERINI, F.R.A.S.,<br />
Professor of Italian at King's College, London, <strong>and</strong> at <strong>the</strong> Royal<br />
College of Music, <strong>and</strong> at University College, Bristol, <strong>and</strong> Italian<br />
Examiner to <strong>the</strong> University of London, <strong>the</strong> Victoria University,<br />
Manchester, <strong>the</strong> Civil Service Commissioners, <strong>the</strong> Staff College,<br />
<strong>the</strong> Royal Military Academy , Woolwich, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> Society of Arts.<br />
FOURTH EDITION-CAREFULLY REVISED.<br />
LIBRAIRIE HACHETTE & CIE -<br />
LONDON: 18, KING WILLIAM STREET, CHARING CROSS, W.C.<br />
PARIS: 79, BOULEVARD SAINT-GERMAIN .<br />
BOSTON, U.S. : CARL SCHOENHOF.<br />
1895.<br />
[ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.]<br />
DEDICATED, BY PERMISSION , TO<br />
LORD TENNYSON, POET LAUREATE.<br />
D.C.L., F.R.S., &c.<br />
PREFACE . (v)<br />
IN bringing before <strong>the</strong> public this grammar, <strong>which</strong> is arranged in<br />
a way different from that generally adopted, I feel it incumbent on<br />
me to offer a few words of explanation .<br />
I have throughout adhered to <strong>the</strong> deductive method, that is, I do<br />
not set any exercise before <strong>the</strong> student, except on points<br />
previously explained. I have always regarded as mischievous <strong>the</strong><br />
system of setting exercises beyond <strong>the</strong> knowledge of <strong>the</strong> student,<br />
<strong>and</strong> in <strong>which</strong> one-half of <strong>the</strong> words are translated ; <strong>the</strong>se may be<br />
called exercises in writing, ra<strong>the</strong>r than exercises on grammar,<br />
<strong>and</strong> in doing <strong>the</strong>m <strong>the</strong> student often loses sight of <strong>the</strong> very points<br />
<strong>the</strong> grammarian wishes to elucidate .<br />
1
I have made <strong>the</strong> verb <strong>the</strong> framework of <strong>the</strong> whole grammar, as it<br />
is impossible to form a sentence without it. I have also discarded<br />
<strong>the</strong> usual method of separating Accidence from Syntax, for it<br />
seems to me that such a separation has no existence in reality ;<br />
I have combined <strong>the</strong> two parts, <strong>and</strong> gradually introduced <strong>the</strong><br />
Syntax as I thought its knowledge would be required by <strong>the</strong><br />
student.<br />
Being convinced, as most people now are, that <strong>the</strong> best way of<br />
learning a foreign language is to translate into it from one's own<br />
language , I have added to this grammar a Short Guide to Italian<br />
Composition, comprising extracts in English prose, with notes to<br />
facilitate <strong>the</strong>ir translation into Italian. I have also given some<br />
hints on Italian versification, <strong>and</strong> extracts in Italian Poetry, so<br />
that <strong>the</strong> student may, at an early stage , learn how to read, <strong>and</strong>, if<br />
so disposed, commit to memory some of <strong>the</strong><br />
(vi). PREFACE .<br />
finest verses in <strong>the</strong> Italian language , <strong>and</strong> thus acquire a correct<br />
Italian accent. I have supplemented <strong>the</strong> whole with Vocabularies,<br />
<strong>which</strong> will enable <strong>the</strong> student not only to dispense with any o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
book for <strong>the</strong> first lessons, but to find without loss of time <strong>the</strong> word<br />
he wants.<br />
The meaning of <strong>the</strong> letters in darker type , <strong>which</strong> will be found in<br />
<strong>many</strong> Italian words throughout this grammar, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> directions<br />
for <strong>the</strong> proper pronunciations of <strong>the</strong> letters " E," " O," " S," <strong>and</strong> " Z,"<br />
<strong>which</strong> is a very important feature in my book , are given in rules<br />
5, 9, 48, 53, <strong>and</strong> 63.<br />
I hope that <strong>the</strong> improvements I have made in my book will<br />
increase <strong>the</strong> favour I have already received from my colleagues<br />
<strong>and</strong> from <strong>the</strong> public, <strong>and</strong> for <strong>which</strong> I am very grateful .<br />
N. PERINI.<br />
KING'S COLLEGE , LONDON.<br />
November , 1895.<br />
TABLE OF CONTENTS. (vii)<br />
INTRODUCTION Page 1<br />
The Alphabet.<br />
Pronunciation of <strong>the</strong> Vowels.<br />
Pronunciation of <strong>the</strong> Consonants .<br />
Rules for Dividing Words into Syllables.<br />
On <strong>the</strong> Pronunciation of Words.<br />
2
The Written Accent .<br />
The Apostrophe.<br />
Use of Capital Letters .<br />
On Reading <strong>and</strong> Speaking Italian .<br />
Reading Exercises .<br />
LESSON<br />
I. On <strong>the</strong> Definite Article 13<br />
On <strong>the</strong> Prepositions , "Di," "A," "Da" 14<br />
II. On <strong>the</strong> Verb, "Avere ," to have 16<br />
III . On <strong>the</strong> Modes of Addressing People in Italian 19<br />
On <strong>the</strong> Interrogative <strong>and</strong> Negative Forms of Verbs ... 20<br />
IV. On <strong>the</strong> Partitive Article 22<br />
On <strong>the</strong> Indefinite Article 23<br />
V. On <strong>the</strong> Verb " Essere ," to be 25<br />
On <strong>the</strong> Verb " Essere ," with " Ci," <strong>and</strong> " VI " 27<br />
VI. On <strong>the</strong> Verbs .'. 28<br />
On <strong>the</strong> First Conjugation in "Are" 29<br />
VII. On <strong>the</strong> Personal Pronouns 34<br />
On <strong>the</strong> Conjunctive Personal Pronouns 35<br />
On <strong>the</strong> Disjunctive Personal Pronouns 38<br />
VIII . On <strong>the</strong> Double Conjunctive Pronouns 40<br />
IX. On <strong>the</strong> Words, "Ci," "Vi,"<strong>and</strong> "Ne" 43<br />
X. On <strong>the</strong> Second Conjugation in " Ere " 46<br />
XI. On <strong>the</strong> Third Conjugation in " Ire" 50<br />
XII. On Verbs conjugated Passively 54<br />
XIII. On <strong>the</strong> Neuter Verbs 56<br />
XIV. On <strong>the</strong> Reflective <strong>and</strong> Reciprocal Verbs 59<br />
XV. On <strong>the</strong> Impersonal Verbs 62<br />
XVI. On <strong>the</strong> Impersonal Verbs expressive of <strong>the</strong> State of <strong>the</strong><br />
Wea<strong>the</strong>r 65<br />
XVII. On <strong>the</strong> Irregular Verbs 66<br />
XVIII. On <strong>the</strong> Use of <strong>the</strong> Definite <strong>and</strong> Partitive Articles ... 93<br />
XIX. On <strong>the</strong> Use of <strong>the</strong> Indefinite Article 97<br />
XX. On <strong>the</strong> Gender <strong>and</strong> Number of Nouns 99<br />
XXI. On <strong>the</strong> Compound Nouns 109<br />
XXII. On <strong>the</strong> Italian Suffixes 111<br />
On <strong>the</strong> Collective Nouns 113<br />
(viii). CONTENTS.<br />
LESSON<br />
XXIII. On Qualitative Adjectives 115<br />
3
On "Bello," " Gr<strong>and</strong>e ," " Buono," " Santo," " Tutto," " Me<strong>zz</strong>o," " Ogni,"<br />
"Altro," " Molto," "Tanto," &c. 117<br />
XXIV. On <strong>the</strong> Formation of Adverbs 122<br />
On <strong>the</strong> Degrees of Comparison ... ... ... ... 123<br />
XXV. On <strong>the</strong> Numeral Adjectives 128<br />
XXVI. On <strong>the</strong> Possessive Adjectives 132<br />
On <strong>the</strong> Possessive Pronouns... ... ... ... ... 136<br />
XXVII. On <strong>the</strong> Demonstrative Adjectives 138<br />
On <strong>the</strong> Demonstrative Pronouns 140<br />
On <strong>the</strong> Demonstrative Personal Pronouns ... ... 141<br />
XXVIII. On <strong>the</strong> Relative Pronouns 143<br />
XXIX. On <strong>the</strong> Indefinite Pronouns 147<br />
On " Niente ," " Nulla," " Quanto," <strong>and</strong> " Per Quanto" ... 152<br />
XXX. On <strong>the</strong> Infinitive Mood 154<br />
XXXI. On <strong>the</strong> Indicative Mood 156<br />
XXXII. On <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood, <strong>and</strong> "Se" 161<br />
XXXIII. On <strong>the</strong> Form <strong>and</strong> Use of Passive Verbs 168<br />
XXXIV. On " Volere ," " Dovere ," " Potere ," <strong>and</strong> " Sapere " ... 171<br />
XXXV. On <strong>the</strong> Negation 173<br />
XXXVI. On <strong>the</strong> Past Participle 176<br />
XXXVII. On <strong>the</strong> Verbs "Avere ," " Essere ," " Andare," " Dare," " Fare ,"<br />
"Stare," " Sapere," " Tenere," " Volere," <strong>and</strong> " Venire " used<br />
idiomatically ... ... ... 179<br />
XXXVIII. On <strong>the</strong> Adverbs 190<br />
On <strong>the</strong> Words "Onde," "Bene ," <strong>and</strong> " Pure" 196<br />
XXXIX. On <strong>the</strong> Prepositions 198<br />
XL. On <strong>the</strong> Complements of Verbs ... ... ... ... 205<br />
XLI. On <strong>the</strong> Conjunctions <strong>and</strong> Interjections 209<br />
Transposition of Words in Italian Sentences 212<br />
Italian Idioms <strong>and</strong> Sayings 213<br />
Italian Proverbs ... ... ... ... ... ... 215<br />
English-Italian Dialogues 216<br />
Titles <strong>and</strong> Expressions used in Italian Letters 222<br />
A Guide to Italian Composition ... ... ... ... 224<br />
Italian Poetry 235<br />
English-Italian Vocabulary ... ... ... ... ... 246<br />
Italian -English Vocabulary 259<br />
ITALIAN GRAMMAR . 1<br />
INTRODUCTION<br />
ON THE PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING OF THE ITALIAN<br />
LANGUAGE<br />
4
THE ALPHABET<br />
1. The Italian Alphabet consists of <strong>the</strong> following twenty-one<br />
letters :<br />
A, B, C, D. E, F, G, H. I, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, Z. 1<br />
A, E, I, O. U, are vowels, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r letters are consonants .<br />
2. The Italian language is very nearly pronounced as it is written.<br />
There are no real diphthongs in Italian .<br />
PRONUNCIATION OF THE VOWELS .<br />
3. A is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> a, in artist . Ex. "amara ," bitter .<br />
4. E has two different sounds ; one like that of <strong>the</strong> e in <strong>the</strong><br />
English word emigrant. Ex. ; " pena," punishment, " fedele,"<br />
faithful; <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r a broad sound, like that of <strong>the</strong> a in <strong>the</strong> English<br />
word gate . Ex. "balestra ," cross-bow, "bella," beautiful .<br />
5. Throughout this grammar a dot is placed <strong>under</strong> <strong>the</strong> letter e,<br />
thus e, when it has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> a in <strong>the</strong> English word<br />
gate .<br />
6. 1 The Letters, K, W, X, Y, are not made use of in spelling<br />
Italian words.<br />
The letter J was formerly used in spelling <strong>many</strong> Italian words, but<br />
it is now generally discarded ; <strong>the</strong> letter i, <strong>which</strong> has very nearly<br />
<strong>the</strong> same sound as j (see rule 7), being used instead .<br />
ON PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING . 2<br />
7. I is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> ee, in eel. Ex. " vita " life .<br />
8. O has two different sounds ; one like that of <strong>the</strong> o, in <strong>the</strong><br />
English word vote; as "fiore ," flower, " colpo," blow, " molto," much;<br />
<strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r like that of <strong>the</strong> o in <strong>the</strong> English word orphan. Ex. " oro,"1<br />
gold, "Corpo," body, "tosto," soon.<br />
9. Throughout this grammar a dot is placed <strong>under</strong> <strong>the</strong> letter o,<br />
thus o, when it has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> v in <strong>the</strong> English word<br />
orphan.<br />
10. U is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> oo, in <strong>the</strong> English word moon. Ex. "<br />
uno," one, "universo ," universe , "volume ," volume .<br />
PRONUNCIATION OF THE CONSONANTS.<br />
11. The consonants B, D, F, 2 L, M, N, P, R 3 T, 4 <strong>and</strong> V, are<br />
pronounced in <strong>the</strong> same manner as in English.<br />
PRONUNCIATION OF THE LETTER C.<br />
5
C, followed by A, O, or U, has a hard sound.<br />
12. CA is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> ca, in cart. Ex. " capo," head.<br />
13. CO is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> co, in comet . Ex. "Colombo," dove.<br />
14. CU is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> cu, in cuckoo. Ex. " cura," cure .<br />
C, followed by E or I, has a soft sound.<br />
15. CE is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> cha, in chase . Ex. " cena ," supper.<br />
16. CI is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> chi, in chip. Ex. "cibo," food.<br />
H hardens <strong>the</strong> sound of C before E <strong>and</strong> I.<br />
17. CHE is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> ca, in cake . Ex. " cheto ," quiet .<br />
18. CHI is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> kee, in keep . Ex. " chiave ," key.<br />
PRONUNCIATION OF SCE, AND SCI.<br />
19. SCE is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> sha, in shape. Ex. " scena ," scene .<br />
20. SCI is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> shee , in sheep. Ex. " sciame ,"<br />
swarm.<br />
21. 1 When <strong>the</strong>re are two or three o's in a word, <strong>the</strong> second <strong>and</strong><br />
third always have <strong>the</strong> same sound as <strong>the</strong> first. Ex. " oro" gold,<br />
"cronologia ," chronology.<br />
22. 2 The Italians always substitute f for ph, in words derived<br />
from <strong>the</strong> Greek . Ex. " filosofia ," philosophy.<br />
23. 3 Notice that <strong>the</strong> " r," is pronounced much more emphatically<br />
in Italian than in English. Ex. " burro," butter.<br />
24. 4 Notice that in Italian <strong>the</strong> vowel u is never pronounced like<br />
<strong>the</strong> u in <strong>the</strong> English word union, but always like <strong>the</strong> two o's, in<br />
<strong>the</strong> English word moon.<br />
ON PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING . 3<br />
PRONUNCIATION OF THE LETTER G.<br />
G, followed by A, O, or U, is pronounced hard.<br />
25. GA is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> ga, in garden. Ex. " gabbia," cage .<br />
26. GO is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> go, in goblet. Ex. "gola," throat.<br />
27. GU is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> goo, in goose. Ex. " gufo," owl.<br />
G, followed by E or I, has a soft sound.<br />
28. GE is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> ge, in gem. Ex. " gente ," people.<br />
29. GI 1 is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> gi, in gin. Ex. " giro," turn.<br />
H, hardens <strong>the</strong> sound of G before E <strong>and</strong> I.<br />
30. GHE is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> ga, in gate . Ex. " leghe ," leagues .<br />
31. GHI is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> gi, in gimlet . Ex. "laghi ," lakes .<br />
6
PRONUNCIATION OF GLI.<br />
32. GLI is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> illi , in postillion. Ex. " giglio ," lily.<br />
33. Notice, however, that "gli" is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> gli, in<br />
glimmer, in <strong>the</strong> words " Anglia," Engl<strong>and</strong>, " anglicano," Anglican, "<br />
geroglifico," hieroglyphic, hieroglyphical, " negligenza,"<br />
negligence , <strong>and</strong> in <strong>the</strong> verb " negligere ," to neglect .<br />
PRONUNCIATION OF GN.<br />
34. GN is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> gn, in design . Ex. " agnello ," lamb.<br />
ON THE LETTER H.<br />
35. H has no sound by itself, <strong>and</strong> may be considered as an<br />
auxiliary letter .<br />
36. The principal use of <strong>the</strong> letter H in Italian is, as already<br />
explained in rules 17, 18, 30, 31, to give to <strong>the</strong> letters c <strong>and</strong> g a<br />
hard sound, when <strong>the</strong>y are followed by e or i.<br />
37. H is also used at <strong>the</strong> beginning of <strong>the</strong> words "ho," I have, "hai,"<br />
thou hast, " ha," he has, <strong>and</strong> "hanno," <strong>the</strong>y have; in <strong>which</strong> words<br />
<strong>the</strong> h is retained only to distinguish <strong>the</strong>m from " o," meaning or, "<br />
ai," to <strong>the</strong>, "a," to or at, <strong>and</strong> " anno" year. The h is fur<strong>the</strong>r used in<br />
<strong>the</strong> interjections " ah ! " "oh ! " " ahi ! " " ehi !"<br />
38. 1 The student should pay great attention to <strong>the</strong> pronunciation<br />
of <strong>the</strong> letters c <strong>and</strong> g, <strong>and</strong> to bear well in mind that <strong>the</strong> i serves<br />
only to soften <strong>the</strong> sound of c, <strong>and</strong> s, in <strong>the</strong> syllables " cia," " cio,"<br />
"ciu," " già," " gio," <strong>and</strong> " giù," <strong>which</strong> must be pronounced as one,<br />
<strong>and</strong> not as two syllables. Ex. " ciarlare " to chat, " ciotto," pebble, "<br />
ciuffo," lock of hair , " giallo," yellow, " giorno," day, " maggiore , "<br />
ON PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING . 4<br />
PRONUNCIATION OF QUA, QUE, QUI, <strong>and</strong> QUO.<br />
39. QUA 1 is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> qua, in quality. Ex." quadra,<br />
"picture .<br />
40. QUE is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> que, in question. Ex. "questo," this<br />
1<br />
41. QUI is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> qui, in quick . Ex. "quinto," fifth.<br />
42. QUO is pronounced like <strong>the</strong> quo, in quotation. Ex. " quota,"<br />
share .<br />
PRONUNCIATION OF THE LETTER S.<br />
7
43. S has two different sounds ; a sharp hissing sound, <strong>and</strong> a soft<br />
one.<br />
44. S, at <strong>the</strong> beginning of a word, <strong>and</strong> followed by a vowel, has a<br />
hard sound, like <strong>the</strong> S in <strong>the</strong> English word spirit . Ex. "sito," site .<br />
45. S, at <strong>the</strong> beginning of a word, <strong>and</strong> followed by one of <strong>the</strong><br />
consonants c, f, p, q, t, has a hard sound, like <strong>the</strong> s in <strong>the</strong> English<br />
word spirit. Ex. " scanno," bench, " sforzo," effort, " spia," spy "<br />
squadrone," squadron, " storpio," lame .<br />
46. S, at <strong>the</strong> beginning of a word, <strong>and</strong> followed by one of <strong>the</strong><br />
consonants b, d, g, I, m, n, r, v, has a soft sound, like <strong>the</strong> s in <strong>the</strong><br />
English word rose. Ex. " sbaglio," mistake, " sdegno," disdain, "il<br />
sgabello," stool, " sleale," disloyal, " smalto," enamel, " snello,"<br />
nimble , "sregolato ," disorderly, " svelare ," to unveil .<br />
47. S, between two vowels, has, as a rule , <strong>the</strong> soft sound of <strong>the</strong> s<br />
in <strong>the</strong> English word rose. Ex. " sposo," bridegroom, " chiesa,"<br />
church ; but this rule has numerous exceptions .<br />
48. Throughout this grammar a dot is placed <strong>under</strong> <strong>the</strong> s, thus s,<br />
when it has <strong>the</strong> soft sound of <strong>the</strong> s in <strong>the</strong> English word rose.<br />
49. When <strong>the</strong> s is doubled it always has a hard, hissing sound. Ex.<br />
" rarissimo ," very rare .<br />
PRONUNCIATION OF THE LETTERS Z AND ZZ.<br />
50. Z has two sounds ; one sharp, like that of <strong>the</strong> ts in <strong>the</strong> English<br />
word wits. Ex. " zampa," paw, " zio," uncle , " amicizia," friendship, "<br />
prudenza," prudence; <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r sound like that of <strong>the</strong> letter z in<br />
<strong>the</strong> English word zeal. Ex. "zelo," zeal, "garzone ," youth, waiter .<br />
51. 1 Notice that <strong>the</strong> letter q, in Italian , is always followed by .u<br />
ON PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING . 5<br />
52. ZZ have two different sounds ; one like that of <strong>the</strong> ts in <strong>the</strong><br />
English word wits. Ex. " pia<strong>zz</strong>a," square , " belle<strong>zz</strong>a," beauty, "<br />
pre<strong>zz</strong>o," price , " no<strong>zz</strong>e ," wedding, " me<strong>zz</strong>o," over-ripe; <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
sound like that of <strong>the</strong> <strong>zz</strong> in <strong>the</strong> English word mu<strong>zz</strong>le . Ex. "<br />
do<strong>zz</strong>ina," dozen, " ori<strong>zz</strong>onte ," horizon, " ga<strong>zz</strong>a," magpie, " ga<strong>zz</strong>etta,"<br />
gazette , " me<strong>zz</strong>o," 1 middle, means , half.<br />
53. Throughout this grammar a dot is placed <strong>under</strong> <strong>the</strong> 2, thus z,<br />
when it has <strong>the</strong> soft sound of <strong>the</strong> z in <strong>the</strong> English word zeal; <strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>dots</strong> are placed <strong>under</strong> <strong>the</strong> two <strong>zz</strong>, thus <strong>zz</strong>, when <strong>the</strong>y have <strong>the</strong> soft<br />
sound of <strong>the</strong> <strong>zz</strong> in <strong>the</strong> English word mu<strong>zz</strong>le .<br />
8
RULES FOR DIVIDING WORDS INTO SYLLABLES .<br />
54. (i) One or two consonants at <strong>the</strong> beginning of a word, followed<br />
by one, two, or even three vowels, form a syllable . Ex. "ve-de-re,"<br />
to see, "pre-ga-re," to pray, " fie-le," gall, " quie -to," quiet, " scuo-<br />
la," school.<br />
Except when <strong>the</strong> stress of <strong>the</strong> voice, or what is called <strong>the</strong> " Tonic<br />
Accent," falls upon one of <strong>the</strong> vowels ; in that case that vowel<br />
marks <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> syllable. Ex. "Di-o," God, " mi-o," my.<br />
55. (ii) A consonant between two vowels makes a syllable with <strong>the</strong><br />
second vowel. Ex. " a-mi-co," friend , " o-no-re," honour.<br />
56. (iii) When two consonants are in <strong>the</strong> middle of a word, one of<br />
<strong>the</strong>m makes a syllable with <strong>the</strong> preceding, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r with <strong>the</strong><br />
following vowel. Ex. " al-ber-go," inn, " ac-cen-to," accent. But if<br />
<strong>the</strong> second of <strong>the</strong> two consonants is ei<strong>the</strong>r l, m, n, or r, <strong>the</strong> two<br />
consonants are united to <strong>the</strong> following vowel. Ex. " mi- glio," mile , "<br />
sti-gma," stigma, " cam-pa-gna," country, " ve-dre-mo," we shall<br />
see.<br />
57. (iv) When <strong>the</strong>re are three consonants in <strong>the</strong> middle of a word,<br />
<strong>the</strong> first of <strong>the</strong>m makes a syllable with <strong>the</strong> preceding, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> two<br />
o<strong>the</strong>rs with <strong>the</strong> following vowel. Ex. "om-bra," s<strong>had</strong>e, s<strong>had</strong>ow,<br />
"sem-pre " always.<br />
58. (v) The consonant s, with any o<strong>the</strong>r consonants <strong>which</strong> may<br />
follow it, always form a syllable with <strong>the</strong> following vowel. Ex. " que-<br />
sto," this, " a-spet-to," aspect, " v o-stro," your. Except in compound<br />
words. Ex. " dis-a-gio," discomfort, " dis-giun-ge-re," to unconnect,<br />
&c.<br />
1 Notice that <strong>the</strong> sound of <strong>the</strong> e in " me<strong>zz</strong>o," meaning middle ,<br />
means , half, is broad.<br />
ON PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING . 6<br />
ON THE PRONUNCIATION OF WORDS.<br />
" PAROLE PIANE," flat words.<br />
59. In pronouncing most Italian words <strong>the</strong> stress of <strong>the</strong> voice, or<br />
what is called <strong>the</strong> " Tonic Accent " falls upon <strong>the</strong> penultimate, or<br />
last syllable but one. Ex. " prato," (<strong>the</strong> stress on <strong>the</strong> a) meadow, "<br />
felice," (<strong>the</strong> stress on <strong>the</strong> i ) happy, " parlare ," (<strong>the</strong> stress on <strong>the</strong><br />
second a) to speak , " finivamo," (<strong>the</strong> stress on <strong>the</strong> a) we were<br />
finishing, " castello," (<strong>the</strong> stress on <strong>the</strong> e <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> first l castle.<br />
These words are called "parole piane ," flat words.<br />
9
" PAROLE SDRUCCIOLE ," slippery words.<br />
60. In some words (perhaps one out of every eighteen) <strong>the</strong> tonic<br />
accent falls on <strong>the</strong> ante -penultimate, that is to say, on <strong>the</strong> last<br />
syllable but two. Ex.<br />
" tavola," table , " carcere ," prison, " docile," docile, " vendere," to<br />
sell, " compravano," <strong>the</strong>y were buying, " altissimo," very high.<br />
These words are called "parole sdrucciole ," slippery words.<br />
" PAROLE BISDRUCCIOLE," very slippery words.<br />
61. In about eighty words (third persons plural of verbs of <strong>the</strong> first<br />
conjugation, see rule 176) <strong>the</strong> tonic accent falls upon <strong>the</strong> last<br />
syllable but three . Ex.<br />
" terminano," <strong>the</strong>y end, " rotolano," (21) <strong>the</strong>y roll. These words are<br />
called "parole bisdrucciole," very slippery words 1<br />
" PAROLE TRONCHE," curtailed words.<br />
62. There are besides <strong>the</strong> " parole piane ," " sdrucciole," <strong>and</strong> "<br />
bisdrucciole," some words <strong>which</strong> have lost <strong>the</strong> final syllable , <strong>and</strong><br />
are <strong>the</strong>refore called " parole tronche," curtailed words. The tonic<br />
accent in <strong>the</strong>se words falls upon <strong>the</strong> last vowel, <strong>which</strong> is always,<br />
marked by <strong>the</strong> grave accent ( v ), <strong>and</strong> is strongly pronounced. Ex.<br />
"carità " (caritade ), charity , " credè " (credeo ), he believed ,<br />
" finì " (finio ), he finished , " parlò " (parloe), he spoke,<br />
" virtù " (virtude ),. virtue .<br />
VERY IMPORTANT RULE.<br />
63. The way adopted to indicate <strong>the</strong> " Tonic Accent," through-out<br />
this grammar is this : IN ALL THE " PAROLE SDRUCCIOLE " <strong>and</strong> "<br />
BlSDRUCCIOLE," THE LETTER OR LETTERS UPON WHICH THE<br />
STRESS OF THE VOICE SHOULD FALL ARE PRINTED IN DARKER<br />
TYPE.<br />
No difference is made in <strong>the</strong> type on " parole piane ," <strong>and</strong> "<br />
tronche ."<br />
64. 1 It is to be observed that <strong>the</strong> tonic accent in verbs never<br />
changes its place when a pronoun, or pronouns are joined to it, so<br />
that a " parola piana," by taking a pronoun after it, becomes "<br />
sdrucciola," <strong>and</strong> when two pronouns are joined to it, it becomes<br />
"bisdrucciola." Ex. " vendete," sell, " vendetelo," sell it, "<br />
vendetemelo ," sell it to me.<br />
ON PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING . 7<br />
10
THE WRITTEN ACCENT.<br />
65. There is only one written accent in Italian orthography,<br />
namely <strong>the</strong> grave accent, marked thus ( x ), <strong>and</strong> <strong>which</strong> is written<br />
on <strong>the</strong> final vowel of <strong>the</strong> " parole tronche " (curtailed words),<br />
<strong>which</strong> have been explained in rule 62, such as " carità," 1<br />
charity, " credè ," he believed, " finì," he finished, " parlò," he<br />
spoke, "virtù ," virtue .<br />
66. The grave accent is also written on <strong>the</strong> words " più," more ,<br />
"può," he or she can, "già," already, of course , "giù," down, below,<br />
to prevent <strong>the</strong>m being mispronounced .<br />
67. Notice that <strong>the</strong>re is no need of writing <strong>the</strong> accent on mono-<br />
syllabic words, such as "re," king, "fu," (he) was, " su," on or upon ;<br />
except however on <strong>the</strong> following monosyllables, to distinguish<br />
<strong>the</strong>m from o<strong>the</strong>rs spelt in <strong>the</strong> same manner, but written without<br />
accent , <strong>and</strong> <strong>which</strong> have a different meaning .<br />
È means (he) is, E means <strong>and</strong>.<br />
DÀ means (he) gives , DA means from, by, &c.<br />
Dì means day, DI means of. Di' means say (thou.)<br />
LÀ means <strong>the</strong>re , LA means <strong>the</strong>, (art.), <strong>and</strong> her, it, ( pron.)<br />
Lì means <strong>the</strong>re , LI means <strong>the</strong>m , (conj. pron.)<br />
NÈ means nei<strong>the</strong>r <strong>and</strong> nor, NE means of it, us, to us, (pron.)<br />
SÈ means one's self, (conj. pron.) SE means if.<br />
Sì (short for così) means yes, si means one's self, (conj. pron.)<br />
TÈ means tea, TE means <strong>the</strong>e , (conj. pron.) '<br />
68. The grave accent is also used in <strong>the</strong> following words <strong>and</strong> a few<br />
o<strong>the</strong>rs to indicate where <strong>the</strong> stress of <strong>the</strong> voice should be laid in<br />
pronouncing <strong>the</strong>m :<br />
ÀNCORA means anchor, ANCÒRA means again , still, yet.<br />
BÀLIA, (f.), means nurse , BALÌA, (m.), means magistrate , power.<br />
CÀNONE, means canon, rule , CANÒNE, means big dog.<br />
CÙPIDO, means greedy , CUPIDO, means Cupid.<br />
TÈNDINE means tendon, TENDÌNE means curtains .<br />
69. 1 The vowels over <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong> grave accent is placed must be<br />
pronounced with a broad, emphatic sound.<br />
ON PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING . 8<br />
THE APOSTROPHE.<br />
70. The apostrophe ( ' ) in Italian takes <strong>the</strong> place of a final vowel,<br />
preceding a word beginning with ano<strong>the</strong>r vowel. Ex.<br />
11
" l'albero," instead of "lo albero," <strong>the</strong> tree, " l'anima," instead of "<br />
la anima," <strong>the</strong> soul, " gl'insetti," instead of " gli insetti," <strong>the</strong><br />
insects, una " bell' opera," instead of una " bella opera," a fine<br />
work , un " gr<strong>and</strong>'uomo," instead of un " gr<strong>and</strong>e Uomo," a great<br />
man.<br />
71. In a few words <strong>the</strong> apostrophe takes <strong>the</strong> place of a syllable. Ex.<br />
" un Po'," instead of " un Poco," a little, " me'," instead of "<br />
meglio," better, "vo'," instead of "voglio," I will, "to'," instead of "<br />
togli," take , " di'," instead of " dici," say.<br />
72. It is to be observed that in poetry <strong>the</strong> apostrophe is sometimes<br />
placed before a consonant, in <strong>the</strong> place of a vowel <strong>which</strong> has been<br />
left out. Ex<br />
." E'l sospirar dell' aura infra le fronde."<br />
instead of<br />
" E il sospirar della aura infra le fronde."<br />
And <strong>the</strong> sighing of <strong>the</strong> breeze among <strong>the</strong> trees .(Petrarca .)<br />
73. All Italian words except " il," <strong>the</strong>, "un," a or an, "in," in, " per,"<br />
for, through, " con," with, " non," not, end with one of <strong>the</strong> vowels a,<br />
e, i, o, u, <strong>and</strong> this vowel indicates <strong>the</strong> gender, number, <strong>and</strong> verbal<br />
inflection of words. 1<br />
USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS .<br />
74. In Italian <strong>the</strong> names of <strong>the</strong> months, <strong>the</strong> names of <strong>the</strong> days of<br />
<strong>the</strong> week, <strong>and</strong> adjectives begin with a small letter, when not at<br />
<strong>the</strong> commencement of a sentence . Ex<br />
Mi m<strong>and</strong>o la grammatica francese lunedì.<br />
He sent me <strong>the</strong> French grammar on Monday.<br />
75 1 Besides <strong>the</strong> words given above (in rule 73), <strong>which</strong> always end<br />
with a consonant, <strong>the</strong> Italians suppress <strong>the</strong> last vowel, or syllable ,<br />
in <strong>many</strong> words, to avoid <strong>the</strong> monotony <strong>which</strong> would be produced by<br />
<strong>the</strong> use of too <strong>many</strong> ending vowels, so that <strong>the</strong>y use "bel," instead<br />
of " bello," beautiful, " gran," instead of " gr<strong>and</strong>e," great, tall, large ,<br />
"san," instead of " santo," saint, holy, " buon," instead of " buono,"<br />
good. They also suppress <strong>the</strong> final vowel in <strong>many</strong> words,<br />
especially in <strong>the</strong> infinitive of verbs. Ex. " Aver avuto," instead of "<br />
Avere avuto," to have <strong>had</strong>, " Parlar francese ," instead of " Parlare<br />
francese ," to speak French. There is no rule for <strong>the</strong>se<br />
curtailments ; <strong>the</strong> judgment <strong>and</strong> ear decide .<br />
ON PRONUNCIATION. 9<br />
12
ON READING AND SPEAKING ITALIAN.<br />
76. Now that <strong>the</strong> student is in possession of <strong>the</strong> rules for <strong>the</strong><br />
pronunciation of Italian words, he should read aloud to his<br />
teacher, <strong>and</strong> by himself. As far as reading goes, <strong>the</strong> Italian<br />
language is most attractive ; it offers no serious difficulty to <strong>the</strong><br />
English student, who, <strong>under</strong> <strong>the</strong> guidance of an able teacher can,<br />
after two or three hours' practice, read it far better than an<br />
Italian could possibly know how to read English after as <strong>many</strong><br />
weeks' or months' practice .<br />
77. In reading <strong>and</strong> speaking Italian, great care must be taken to<br />
UTTER THE DOUBLE CONSONANTS bb, cc, dd, &c., DISTINCTLY ;<br />
after having pronounced <strong>the</strong> first of <strong>the</strong> two consonants, <strong>the</strong> voice<br />
is kept lingering for a short while, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r consonant,<br />
with its accompanying vowel, is pronounced. Ex. " avreb...be," he<br />
would have, " ec...citare," to excite (<strong>the</strong> cc sound like <strong>the</strong> chi, in<br />
chicory, because <strong>the</strong> cc are followed by i), " Zoc...colo," s<strong>and</strong>al (<strong>the</strong><br />
cc sound like kk, because <strong>the</strong> cc are followed by 0), "ad...dio,"<br />
good-bye, " ef. ..ficace ," efficacious, " corag...gio," courage , "<br />
bel...lo," beautiful, "fum...mo," we were, " saran...no," <strong>the</strong>y will be,<br />
" cop...pa," nape of <strong>the</strong> neck, "tor...re," tower, " bonis...simo," very<br />
good, "dot. ..to," learned, "bev...vi," / drank, " delicatez...za,"<br />
delicacy .<br />
78. The student must also be very careful NOT TO PRONOUNCE<br />
THE WORDS SEPARATELY, but RATHER TO LET THEM RUN INTO<br />
ONE ANOTHER, except, of course , when <strong>the</strong>y are divided by<br />
punctuation .<br />
79. The student must also remember that, although <strong>the</strong> ending<br />
vowels indicate <strong>the</strong> gender, number, <strong>and</strong> verbal inflection of<br />
Italian words, yet, IN READING AND SPEAKING, THE LAST<br />
SYLLABLE OF WORDS MUST BE PRONOUNCED SOFTLY,<br />
LOWERING THE VOICE, EXCEPT WHEN THE LAST VOWEL is<br />
ACCENTED ; in this latter case all <strong>the</strong> stress of <strong>the</strong> voice must be<br />
laid on <strong>the</strong> accented vowel, without however leaving any pause<br />
between it <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> word <strong>which</strong> follows. Ex.<br />
" Parlerò a Carlo, è gli (32) dirò la verità," I shall speak to Charles,<br />
<strong>and</strong> will tell him <strong>the</strong> truth. Which must be pronounced as if it<br />
were written thus: " ParleròaCarlo , eglidiròlaverità ."<br />
13
80. It is characteristic of <strong>the</strong> Italians to express a great deal more<br />
emphasis than <strong>the</strong> English in pronouncing phrases in <strong>the</strong><br />
interrogative <strong>and</strong> exclamative forms. Ex.<br />
Ha Carlo portato il mio libro ? 1<br />
Has Charles brought my book ?<br />
Che bel cavallo ! 2<br />
What a beautiful horse !<br />
1 The voice must be gradually raised from <strong>the</strong> first to <strong>the</strong> last<br />
word in this phrase.<br />
2 The emphasis must be increased from <strong>the</strong> first to <strong>the</strong> last word<br />
in this phrase.<br />
10 READING EXERCISES .<br />
READING EXERCISES .<br />
EXERCISE I. ( ON CA, CO, AND CU.)<br />
Carlo (12) ha (35) trovato il libro nella (77) mia camera (63).<br />
Charles has found <strong>the</strong> book in my room.<br />
Ho sempre (5) creduto che fosse italiano . È (69) vestito come<br />
mio nipote.(13)<br />
I always thought that he was an Italian . He is dressed like<br />
my nephew .<br />
Vostro (9) padre non ha cura (14) della sua salute ,<br />
Your fa<strong>the</strong>r does not take care of his health .<br />
La sua tema di mostrarmi il suo tema è ridicola .<br />
His fear of showing me his exercise is ridiculous .<br />
Ci sono quasi venti nomi di diversi venti .<br />
There are nearly twenty names of different winds.<br />
Hanno fatto un buca nella porta del foro<br />
They have made a hole in <strong>the</strong> door of <strong>the</strong> Foro.<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>o diede il suo voto il Senato era quasi Voto (21).<br />
Forum. When he gave his vote <strong>the</strong> Senate was almost<br />
empty.<br />
EXERCISE II. ( ON CE AND CI.)<br />
Tua sorella 1 ha una bella voce (15) di soprano. Si, tu dici (16)<br />
Your sister has a fine soprano voice . Yes, you say<br />
la verità (69). Il fanciullo era nascosto (21) nell' armadio . Enrico<br />
<strong>the</strong> truth. The child was hidden in <strong>the</strong> cupboard. Henry<br />
14
è un uomo 2 di buona natura . Hanno portato la mia cena ? (80)<br />
is a good-natured man. Have <strong>the</strong>y brought my supper ?<br />
No, non ancòra. Ora il cielo è sereno . Mi piace tanto respirare<br />
No, not yet. Now <strong>the</strong> sky is bright. I am very fond of breathing<br />
l'aria della mattina . Nell' autunno (2) l'aurora non è mai molto<br />
<strong>the</strong> morning air. In autumn <strong>the</strong> dawn is never very<br />
lucente . Ella comincio (79) a parlare con una certa autorità .<br />
bright. She began to speak with a certain authority .<br />
EXERCISE III. ( ON CHE, CHI, SCE AND SCI.)<br />
Che (17) bel libro ! (80) Di chi (18) è ? Veramente non saprei<br />
What a fine book ! Whose is it ? Really I <strong>cannot</strong><br />
dirlo ; ma credo che sia di Odoardo. Le antiche cronache<br />
say ; but I believe it belongs to Edward. Ancient chronicles give<br />
istruiscono molto. Il Vostro fanciullo non ha più (69) paura del<br />
much instruction . Your child is no longer afraid of<br />
mio cane . Dov' è la chiave (18) della mia camera ? Il facchino<br />
my dog. Where is <strong>the</strong> key of my room ? The porter<br />
l'ha attaccata al chiodo. Mio fratello ha veduto tutte le principali<br />
has hung it on <strong>the</strong> nail . My bro<strong>the</strong>r has seen all <strong>the</strong> principal<br />
città dell' Europa. La Maria ha scelto (19) un bel colore. Antonio<br />
cities of Europe. Mary has chosen a beautiful colour. Anthony<br />
sciupa (20) tutti i suoi abiti . C'erano cento uomini nella miseria .<br />
spoils all his clo<strong>the</strong>s . There were a hundred men in poverty.<br />
1 Notice that, in nouns <strong>and</strong> qualificative adjectives, <strong>the</strong> e followed<br />
by two ll (ello, ella, elli, elle), has always <strong>the</strong> broad sound of a in<br />
<strong>the</strong> word gate .<br />
2 Notice that <strong>the</strong> o preceded by a u has always <strong>the</strong> broad sound of<br />
o in <strong>the</strong> word orphan.<br />
READING EXERCISES . 11<br />
EXERCISE IV. ( ON GA, GO, GU, GE, GI, GHE,)<br />
Il gatto (25) guarda (27) sempre la gabbia dell' uccello . io ho<br />
The cat is always looking at <strong>the</strong> bird's cage . I have<br />
male alla gola (26). Il generale (28) è un uomo giusto (29) ;<br />
a sore throat. The general is a just man ; he<br />
comprò le ghette (30), è le pago una ghinea (31). La geografia<br />
bought <strong>the</strong> gaiters <strong>and</strong> paid a guinea for <strong>the</strong>m . Geography<br />
15
e la cronologia (21) sono gli (32) occhi della storia . Guglielmo è<br />
<strong>and</strong> chronology are <strong>the</strong> eyes of history . William is<br />
<strong>and</strong>ato nel giardino a Cogliere dei fieri . Che bel giglio ! (80).<br />
gone into <strong>the</strong> garden to ga<strong>the</strong>r flowers. What a beautiful lily !<br />
Ciò accadde al tempo degli dei falsi e bugiardi. Il Lago Maggiore .<br />
That happened at <strong>the</strong> time of <strong>the</strong> false <strong>and</strong> lying gods. Lago<br />
Maggiore .<br />
EXERCISE V. (ON GN, QUA, QUE, QUI, AND QUO.)<br />
I miei fratelli hanno viaggiato in Italia e in Francia durante i<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>rs travelled in Italy <strong>and</strong> France during <strong>the</strong> months<br />
mesi di maggio , giugno (34) e luglio. Il postiglione fu molto<br />
of May, June <strong>and</strong> July- The postilion was<br />
negligente (33) verso la mia famiglia . Chi può sciogliere il<br />
very negligent towards my family . Who can untie <strong>the</strong><br />
nodo ? (80). lo ; ecco l'ho già sciolto. Voglio del caffè di buona<br />
knot ? I ; see I have already untied it. I want some coffee of a good<br />
qualità (39). Giuseppe ed io siamo stati alla campagna ; abbiamo<br />
quality. Joseph <strong>and</strong> I have been in <strong>the</strong> country ; we walked<br />
camminato tre leghe (30). Questa (40) è la quinta (41) questione<br />
three leagues . This is <strong>the</strong> fifth quarrel<br />
che i miei fratelli hanno avuta insieme. Un sogno di buon<br />
augurio .<br />
that my bro<strong>the</strong>rs have <strong>had</strong> toge<strong>the</strong>r . A dream of good omen .<br />
EXERCISE VI. (ON THE LETTER S.)<br />
Questa signora (44) ha molto spirito. Abbiamo udito uno<br />
This lady is very witty. We have heard<br />
squillo (45) di tromba. Allo sbocco (40) del fiume l'acqua è molto<br />
a trumpet peal. At <strong>the</strong> outlet of <strong>the</strong> river <strong>the</strong> water is very<br />
turbata. Suo suocero ha mostrato troppo sdegno (46) ; ciò è uno<br />
muddy. Your fa<strong>the</strong>r -in-law has shown too much anger ; that is a<br />
sbaglio (46). Il prato era smaltato (46) di fiori . Questo giovinotto 1<br />
mistake . v This meadow was full of flowers. This young man is<br />
e svelto (46). È venuto a dirmi che ha disegnato il suo quadro.<br />
active . He came to tell me that he has drawn his picture .<br />
Non è lecito di susurrare in compagnia . Tutto l'edificio risonava 2<br />
16
It is not proper to whisper in company. The whole building<br />
resounded<br />
di applausi. Stefano ha disigillato 2 la mia lettera .<br />
with applause. Stephen has unsealed my letter .<br />
1 Notice that an o followed by two tt (otto, otta, otti , otte ), has<br />
always <strong>the</strong> broad sound of o in <strong>the</strong> word orphan.<br />
2 Notice that an s preceded by ri, meaning again, <strong>and</strong> di,<br />
meaning un, has <strong>the</strong> hard sound of s in <strong>the</strong> word spirit .<br />
12 READING EXERCISES .<br />
EXERCISE VII. (ON THE S, SHARP.)<br />
Che cosa c'è ? La casa del pievano è incendiata . Il riso rallegra .<br />
What is it ? The parson's house is on fire . Laughter cheers .<br />
Mi piace il riso. Ho desiderio di vederlo . Non è così facile di<br />
I like rice . I wish to see him. It is not so easy<br />
punirlo. La Giovanna portava una vesta di raso. Egli è molto<br />
to punish him. Joan wore a satin dress. He is very<br />
geloso. 1 La sua gelosia 1 gli sarà fatale . Questo Inglese 2 ha<br />
jealous . His jealousy will be fatal to him. This Englishman has<br />
sposato una Francese 2 Abbiamo fatte molte spese . 3<br />
married a Frenchwoman. We have incurred a great deal of<br />
expense .<br />
EXERCISE VIII. (ON THE Z, AND ZZ, SHARP.)<br />
Vo altiero della sua amicizia (50,53) per me. La belle<strong>zz</strong>a (52, 53)<br />
I am proud of his friendship for me. The beauty<br />
della natura . Non vanno mai in carro<strong>zz</strong>a. Ho comprato quattro<br />
of nature . They never go in a carriage . I have bought four<br />
fa<strong>zz</strong>oletti da naso. Ammiro la sua presenza di spirito è la sua<br />
pocket-h<strong>and</strong>kerchiefs . I admire his presence of mind <strong>and</strong><br />
costanza. Ho incontrato mio zio nella pia<strong>zz</strong>a di San Marco ; mi<br />
constancy . I met my uncle in <strong>the</strong> Square of Saint Mark ; he<br />
ha dato quattro biglietti per le " No<strong>zz</strong>e di Figaro." Cameriere ,<br />
gave me four tickets for <strong>the</strong> "No<strong>zz</strong>e di Figaro." Waiter ,<br />
portatemi una ta<strong>zz</strong>a di caffe nero , la zuccheriera , e una scatola di<br />
bring me a cup of black coffee , <strong>the</strong> sugar-basin, <strong>and</strong> a box of<br />
zolfanelli . Che scherzo ! Non Voglio questa pera perché è me<strong>zz</strong>a .<br />
17
matches. What a joke ! I will not have this pear because it is<br />
over-ripe.<br />
EXERCISE IX. (ON THE Z, AND ZZ, SOFT.)<br />
La Signorina Bianchini ha una bellissima voce di me<strong>zz</strong>o-soprano.<br />
Miss Bianchini has a beautiful light soprano voice .<br />
" Nel me<strong>zz</strong>o (53) del cammin di nostra vita " (Dante ). La rappre-<br />
Midway <strong>the</strong> journey of our life . The repre -<br />
sentazione dell' opera "La Ga<strong>zz</strong>a Ladra " del Rossini durò due ore<br />
sentation of <strong>the</strong> opera "La Ga<strong>zz</strong>a Ladra" of Rossini, lasted two<br />
hours <strong>and</strong><br />
e me<strong>zz</strong>o. " I Promessi Sposi " del Manzoni (53) è un bellissimo<br />
a - half. "The Betro<strong>the</strong>d," of Manzoni is a very beautiful<br />
romanzo. Egli ha scelto una magnifica statua di bronzo.<br />
novel . He has chosen a magnificent bronze statue .<br />
Quest' Uomo è molto bi<strong>zz</strong>arre e ro<strong>zz</strong>o ; non ha il menomo zelo per<br />
il<br />
This man is very eccentric <strong>and</strong> rude ; he has not <strong>the</strong> slightest<br />
zeal for<br />
suo lavoro. L'ori<strong>zz</strong>onte era del colore a<strong>zz</strong>urro del più puro zaffiro.<br />
his work . The horizon was of <strong>the</strong> azure colour of <strong>the</strong> purest<br />
sapphire.<br />
1 Notice that <strong>the</strong> s in adjectives ending in oso, <strong>and</strong> words derived<br />
from <strong>the</strong>m , is sharp, like <strong>the</strong> s in <strong>the</strong> word spirit .<br />
2 Notice that <strong>the</strong> s in adjectives indicating nationality, ending in<br />
ese, is sharp, like <strong>the</strong> s in <strong>the</strong> word spirit, except in " Francese,"<br />
French , <strong>and</strong> " Lucchese ," Lucchese .<br />
3 Notice that <strong>the</strong> s in nouns ending in esa, ese, is sharp, like <strong>the</strong><br />
s in <strong>the</strong> word spirit, except in <strong>the</strong> words " chiesa," church, "<br />
Agnese ," Agnes , <strong>and</strong> a few o<strong>the</strong>rs .<br />
ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 13<br />
LESSON I.<br />
1. ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.<br />
81. The definite article The is translated into Italian by "il" in <strong>the</strong><br />
singular, <strong>and</strong> "i" in <strong>the</strong> plural, before masculine nouns beginning<br />
with a consonant . Ex.<br />
" Il libro," 1 <strong>the</strong> book, " i libri," <strong>the</strong> books.<br />
18
82. The is translated by " lo " in <strong>the</strong> singular, <strong>and</strong> " gli " in <strong>the</strong><br />
plural, before masculine nouns 2 beginning with an s followed by<br />
ano<strong>the</strong>r consonant , or with a z. Ex.<br />
Lo sperone ,3 <strong>the</strong> spur, gli speroni , <strong>the</strong> spurs.<br />
Lo zingaro , <strong>the</strong> gipsy, gli zingari , <strong>the</strong> gipsies .<br />
83. The is translated by "lo," 4 or ra<strong>the</strong>r " l' " in <strong>the</strong> singular, <strong>and</strong> "<br />
gli " 5 in <strong>the</strong> plural, before masculine nouns 2 beginning with a<br />
vowel ; <strong>the</strong> " i" of "gli " may be replaced by an apostrophe before a<br />
noun 2 beginning with an " i." Ex.<br />
L'albero, 6 <strong>the</strong> tree , gli alberi , <strong>the</strong> trees .<br />
L'idolo, <strong>the</strong> idol, gl' idoli, <strong>the</strong> idols.<br />
84. The is translated by " la" in <strong>the</strong> singular, <strong>and</strong> "le" in <strong>the</strong><br />
plural, before feminine nouns 2 beginning with a consonant. If<br />
<strong>the</strong> feminine nounf begins with a vowel, <strong>the</strong> a in " la " is<br />
suppressed <strong>and</strong> replaced by an apostrophe ; <strong>the</strong> e in " le " may be<br />
replaced by an apostrophe before a nounf beginning with e. Ex.<br />
La penna, 7 <strong>the</strong> pen, le penne , <strong>the</strong> pens.<br />
L' anima , <strong>the</strong> soul, le anime , <strong>the</strong> souls.<br />
L' elegia 8 <strong>the</strong> elegy , I'elegie , <strong>the</strong> elegies .<br />
85. 1 There are only two genders in Italian, masculine <strong>and</strong><br />
feminine . Nearly all nouns ending in o are masculine, <strong>and</strong> form<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir plural by changing o into i.<br />
2 Also before adjectives ; as it is a question of euphony.<br />
86. 3 Nouns ending in e are of both genders, <strong>and</strong> form <strong>the</strong>ir plural<br />
by changing e into i.<br />
87.4 The only words before <strong>which</strong> " lo " is used for <strong>the</strong> sake of<br />
euphony instead of "il " are " più" <strong>and</strong> " meno," in <strong>the</strong> expressions<br />
"per lo più," for <strong>the</strong> most part, <strong>and</strong> " per lo meno ," at least .<br />
88. 5 The only word before <strong>which</strong> " gli," " degli," " agli ,"&c. , are<br />
used for <strong>the</strong> sake of euphony instead of " i," " dei," "ai," &c., is "<br />
dei" gods. Ex.<br />
" Al tempo degli dei falsi e bugiardi." (Dante ).<br />
During <strong>the</strong> time of <strong>the</strong> false <strong>and</strong> lying gods.<br />
6 See rule 63, to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> meaning of <strong>the</strong> letters in <strong>the</strong><br />
darker type.<br />
19
89. 7 Most nouns ending in a are feminine , <strong>and</strong> form <strong>the</strong>ir plural<br />
by changing <strong>the</strong> a into i.<br />
8 An e, dotted thus e, has a broad sound, like <strong>the</strong> a in gate .<br />
14 ON THE PREPOSITIONS " DI," "A," "DA."<br />
2. ON THE PREPOSITIONS " DI," "A," "DA."<br />
THE PREPOSITION "DI."<br />
90. The preposition " di " corresponds to <strong>the</strong> preposition of. Ex.<br />
Il padrone di questa casa. The master of this house .<br />
Il regno di Spagna. The kingdom of Spain.<br />
Il duomo di Milano . The ca<strong>the</strong>dral of Milan .<br />
91. " D'," instead of " di," is used before words beginning with an i<br />
; when <strong>the</strong> word begins with any o<strong>the</strong>r vowel ei<strong>the</strong>r " di " or " d' "<br />
may be used. Ex.<br />
Il regno d' Italia . The kingdom of Italy.<br />
92. The English possessive case , expressed by 's, as Peter's book ,<br />
is rendered in Italian by inverting <strong>the</strong> position of <strong>the</strong> two words,<br />
<strong>and</strong> placing <strong>the</strong> preposition " di," between <strong>the</strong>m . Ex.<br />
" Il libro di Pietro ." " Peter's book."<br />
THE PREPOSITION "A."<br />
93. The preposition " a " corresponds to <strong>the</strong> prepositions to <strong>and</strong> at.<br />
Ex.<br />
Vado a Parigi . I am going to Paris .<br />
Ho parlato a Carlo. I have spoken to Charles .<br />
Mio padre è a casa. My fa<strong>the</strong>r is at home .<br />
94. " Ad" may be used instead of " a," before a word beginning with<br />
a vowel, especially before an a. Ex.<br />
Sono stato ad Atene . I have been to A<strong>the</strong>ns .<br />
THE PREPOSITION " DA."<br />
95. The preposition " da " is used in <strong>the</strong> sense of from. Ex.<br />
Vengo da Firenze . I come from Florence .<br />
96. The a of " da " is never replaced by an apostrophe in Italian<br />
prose. Ex.<br />
È partito da Edimburgo. He has left Edinburgh.<br />
97. The preposition " da " is also used in <strong>the</strong> sense of by, when<br />
preceded by a past participle . Ex.<br />
20
Egli è stimato da tutti. He is esteemed by everybody.<br />
98. The preposition " da " is also used in <strong>the</strong> sense of fit for, like<br />
a.- 1 Ex.<br />
Carta da scrivere . Writing paper.<br />
Egli combatte (69) da eroe . He fought like a hero .<br />
1 The preposition "da" has also o<strong>the</strong>r meanings <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
student will find explained fur<strong>the</strong>r on, pages 201 <strong>and</strong> 202.<br />
ON THE PREPOSITIONS " DI," " A," " DA," ETC. 15<br />
99. When " di," " a," " da," <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> prepositions " in," in, " con,"<br />
with, "per," for, " su," on, <strong>and</strong> " fra " or " tra," among, between, are<br />
followed by <strong>the</strong> articles " il," " lo," "la," "l'," " i," " gli," " le," <strong>the</strong> two<br />
words are contracted as shown in <strong>the</strong> subjoined table :<br />
100.<br />
Di il into |del, <strong>and</strong> |di i |into |dei, 1 of <strong>the</strong>.<br />
A il |al, |a i |ai, to <strong>the</strong>.<br />
Da il |dal, |da i |dai from <strong>the</strong><br />
21<br />
by <strong>the</strong>.<br />
In il |nel, |in i |nei, in <strong>the</strong>.<br />
Con il |col, |con i |coi, with <strong>the</strong>.<br />
Per il |pel, |per i |pei, for <strong>the</strong>.<br />
Su il |sul, |su i |sui, on <strong>the</strong>.<br />
Fra il |fral, |fra i |frai , among <strong>the</strong>.<br />
101.<br />
Di lo dello, ,, di gli degli, of <strong>the</strong>.<br />
A lo allo, a gli agli, to <strong>the</strong>.<br />
Da lo ,, dallo, ,, da gli dagli , from , <strong>the</strong><br />
In lo ,, nello, ,, in gli negli, in <strong>the</strong>, &c.<br />
102<br />
Di la ,, della, ,, di le ,, delle, of <strong>the</strong>.<br />
A la alla, ale alle, to <strong>the</strong>.<br />
In la ,, nella, ,, in le ,, nelle, in <strong>the</strong>, &c.<br />
103.<br />
Di l' dell,' di gli degli, of <strong>the</strong>.<br />
Al' all,' a gli agli, to <strong>the</strong>, &c.<br />
VOCABULARY.
il libro, <strong>the</strong> book. il giardino, <strong>the</strong> garden.<br />
il tema, 2 <strong>the</strong> exercise. L'albero, <strong>the</strong> tree.<br />
La tavola, <strong>the</strong> table. il ramo, <strong>the</strong> branch.<br />
La donna, <strong>the</strong> woman. il pane, <strong>the</strong> bread.<br />
il raga<strong>zz</strong>o, <strong>the</strong> boy. L' uccello, <strong>the</strong> bird.<br />
La raga<strong>zz</strong>a, <strong>the</strong> girl. La gabbia, <strong>the</strong> cage.<br />
EXERCISE I 3<br />
The boy's (92) book . The girl's exercise. The branch of <strong>the</strong> tree.<br />
The woman in <strong>the</strong> garden. The bird in <strong>the</strong> cage . The woman with<br />
<strong>the</strong> bread. The book on <strong>the</strong> table . The birds (85) among <strong>the</strong><br />
branches of <strong>the</strong> trees . In <strong>the</strong> boys' gardens<br />
1 Instead of "dei," "ai," "dai,"&c., " de'," "a'," " da'," are often used.<br />
104. 2 There are only a few nouns masculine ending in a ; <strong>the</strong>y<br />
form <strong>the</strong>ir plural in i. See rule 397.<br />
3 For <strong>the</strong> numeral adjectives see page 128.<br />
16 ON THE VERB "AVERE."<br />
LESSON II.<br />
ON THE VERB "AVERE," TO HAVE.<br />
INFINITIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . PAST.<br />
Avere avuto, to have <strong>had</strong>. Avere, to have.<br />
GERUND. 1 PAST PARTICIPLE PAST GERUND<br />
Avendo,2 having. Avuto, <strong>had</strong>. Avendo avuto, having<br />
INDICATIVE MOOD.<br />
22<br />
<strong>had</strong>.<br />
PRESENT IMPERFECT PAST DEFINITE<br />
I have &c. I <strong>had</strong> &c. I <strong>had</strong> &c.<br />
Io ho,3 Avevo, 5 Ebbi,<br />
Tu hai, Avevi, Avesti,<br />
Egli, or esso, | ha Aveva ; 6 Ebbe ;<br />
Ella, or essa,4<br />
Noi abbiamo, Avevamo, Avemmo,<br />
Voi avete, Avevate, Aveste,<br />
Eglino, or essi, | hanno Avevano. 6 Ebbero.
Elleno, or esse, |<br />
105 1 The Gerund in Italian always remains invariable. Besides<br />
a Gerund, most Italian verbs have a Present Participle, ending in<br />
" ente ," <strong>and</strong> " end," or in " ante ," <strong>and</strong> "anti ." Ex.<br />
"Una finestra avente carta, invece di vetri " (Pellico). A window<br />
<strong>which</strong> <strong>had</strong> paper, instead of glass. But as this form of <strong>the</strong> verb is<br />
seldom used, it is not given in <strong>the</strong> verbal paradigms, in this<br />
grammar .<br />
2 The e, dotted thus e, has a broad sound, like <strong>the</strong> a in gate .<br />
106. 3 As <strong>the</strong> termination of <strong>the</strong> verb is sufficient to indicate <strong>the</strong><br />
person <strong>and</strong> number of <strong>the</strong> subject in <strong>the</strong> sentence , <strong>the</strong> personal<br />
pronouns, used as subjects, are not expressed in Italian, except<br />
(a) to avoid ambiguity, (6) when two or more pronouns (used as<br />
subjects), are employed in <strong>the</strong> same sentence , (c) when a<br />
particular stress is to be laid on <strong>the</strong> pronoun ; so <strong>the</strong> Italian for " I<br />
have <strong>the</strong> book," is simply " Ho il libro."<br />
107.4 "Egli ," " ella," " eglino," " elleno," are used only in speaking of<br />
persons, whilst "esso," " essa," " essi," " esse ," are employed with<br />
reference to persons, animals <strong>and</strong> things. " Eglino" <strong>and</strong> " elleno"<br />
are becoming obsolete; " essi" <strong>and</strong> " esse " being used instead of<br />
<strong>the</strong>m .<br />
108. 5 Both <strong>the</strong> first <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> third persons singular of <strong>the</strong><br />
Imperfect Indicative, of all verbs, formerly ended in , but now <strong>the</strong><br />
general tendency of Italian writers is to make <strong>the</strong> termination of<br />
<strong>the</strong> first person in o, <strong>and</strong> that of <strong>the</strong> third in a ; by this means it<br />
is easier to mark <strong>the</strong> distinction between <strong>the</strong> first, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> third<br />
person singular , without <strong>the</strong> aid of <strong>the</strong> personal pronouns.<br />
109. 6 The letter v in <strong>the</strong> third persons of <strong>the</strong> Imperfect<br />
Indicative of all verbs, except those of <strong>the</strong> first conjugation, is<br />
often omitted . Ex.<br />
" avea ," " aveano ."<br />
ON THE VERB " AVERE." 17<br />
PAST INDEFINITE. PLUPERFECT. PAST ANTERIOR.<br />
Ho avuto,-a-i-e &c. 1 Avevo avuto, &c. Ebbi avuto, &c.<br />
I have <strong>had</strong>, &c. I <strong>had</strong> <strong>had</strong>, &=c. I <strong>had</strong> <strong>had</strong>, &c.<br />
FUTURE. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE MOOD.<br />
I shall have &c. I should have &c. Have (thou)&c.<br />
23
Avrò, Avrei, No first pers<br />
Avrai, Avresti, Abbi,<br />
Avrà ; Avrebbe ; Abbia ;<br />
Avremo, Avremmo, Abbiamo,<br />
Avrete, Avreste, Abbiate,<br />
Avranno. Avrebbero. 2 Abbiano.<br />
FUTURE<br />
ANTERIOR.<br />
CONDITIONAL PAST. The Past of <strong>the</strong><br />
24<br />
Imperative is<br />
Avrò avuto, &c. Avrei avuto, &c. seldom used.<br />
I shall have <strong>had</strong>, &c. I should have <strong>had</strong>, &c.<br />
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT. IMPERFECT.<br />
That I may have &c. That (or if) I might have &c.<br />
Che io abbia, Che or se 3 io avessi,<br />
Che tu abbia, Che or se tu avessi,<br />
Che egli/essi abbia ; Che or se egli/ella avesse '<br />
Che abbiamo, Che or se avessimo,<br />
Che abbiate, Che or se aveste,<br />
Che essi/esse abbiano Che or se essi/esse avessero.<br />
PAST. PLUPERFECT .<br />
Che i o abbia avuto, &c. Che or se io avessi avuto, &c.<br />
That I may have <strong>had</strong>, &c. That or if I might have <strong>had</strong>, &c.<br />
110. 1 The Past Participle in Italian is variable ; it ends in o,<br />
when it is used in connection with a noun masculine singular ;<br />
in a for <strong>the</strong> feminine singular ; in z for <strong>the</strong> masculine plural ; <strong>and</strong><br />
in e for <strong>the</strong> feminine plural. The rules for <strong>the</strong> Past Participle are<br />
given fur<strong>the</strong>r on. For <strong>the</strong> present <strong>the</strong> student <strong>had</strong> better to leave<br />
it invariable , in o.<br />
111. 2 In poetry " avrìa" is often used instead of " avrei" <strong>and</strong><br />
"avrebbe," <strong>and</strong> " avriano " instead of " avrebbero."<br />
112. 3 The Italian conditional conjunction " se," if, when it<br />
precedes a verb used in <strong>the</strong> present or past tense , is followed by<br />
<strong>the</strong> Imperfect Subjunctive (followed by <strong>the</strong> Conditional Present),<br />
or by <strong>the</strong> Pluperfect Subjunctive (followed by <strong>the</strong> Conditional Past).<br />
Ex.
Se io avessi del denaro, avrei degli amici .<br />
If I <strong>had</strong> money , I should have friends .<br />
Se io avessi avuto del danaro, avrei avuto degli amici .<br />
If I <strong>had</strong> <strong>had</strong> money , I should have <strong>had</strong> friends .<br />
18 ON THE VERB "AVERE."<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
Carlo, Charles. Maria, 1 Mary.<br />
Elisabetta, Elizabeth. Guglielmo, 2 William.<br />
Enrico, Henry. Giovanni, 3 John.<br />
La lezione, <strong>the</strong> lesson. il dizionario, <strong>the</strong> dictionary.<br />
La penna, <strong>the</strong> pen.<br />
La matita, 4 <strong>the</strong> pencil.<br />
La lettera, 5 <strong>the</strong> letter. il pennello, <strong>the</strong> paint-brush.<br />
La carta, <strong>the</strong> paper. L' Uomo, <strong>the</strong> man.<br />
il calamaio, <strong>the</strong> ink-st<strong>and</strong>. Gli uomini, <strong>the</strong> men.<br />
La lavagna, <strong>the</strong> slate. La chiave, <strong>the</strong> key.<br />
il temperino, <strong>the</strong> penknife. La casa, <strong>the</strong> house,<br />
E, <strong>and</strong>. Oggi, to-day. Sotto, <strong>under</strong>. Anche, also.<br />
ieri, yesterday Già, already. Domani, to-morrow.<br />
La grammatica, <strong>the</strong> grammar.<br />
Lo (82) scrittoio, <strong>the</strong> writing-desk<br />
Accanto a, by <strong>the</strong> side of. Vicino a, near to.<br />
EXERCISE II.<br />
I (106) have <strong>the</strong> dictionary. Charles has <strong>the</strong> paper. Mary <strong>had</strong> (Imp.<br />
Ind.) <strong>the</strong> pen; she <strong>had</strong> also <strong>the</strong> grammar. We <strong>had</strong> Henry's (92)<br />
writing-desk. William <strong>and</strong> John have <strong>the</strong> ink-st<strong>and</strong>. Yesterday<br />
Elizabeth <strong>had</strong> (Imp. Ind.) <strong>the</strong> letter <strong>and</strong> 6 <strong>the</strong> penknife ; she <strong>had</strong><br />
already <strong>had</strong> ( Pluperf. Ind.) <strong>the</strong> books. 7 I shall have <strong>the</strong> lesson to-<br />
morrow. William <strong>and</strong> Charles will have <strong>the</strong> slate <strong>and</strong> 8 ink-st<strong>and</strong>.<br />
The man has <strong>the</strong> key of <strong>the</strong> (102) house . The men have <strong>had</strong> ( Past<br />
Ind.) <strong>the</strong> books from (95, 96) Henry. We have John's paint-brushes<br />
in <strong>the</strong> (101) writing -desk, <strong>under</strong> <strong>the</strong> table. 8<br />
113. 1 In speaking of women <strong>the</strong> Italians often put <strong>the</strong> definite<br />
article before <strong>the</strong>ir names . Ex. " La Maria ."<br />
2 An e, dotted thus e, has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> a in <strong>the</strong> word<br />
gate .<br />
25
3 An o, dotted thus o, has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> o in <strong>the</strong> word<br />
orphan.<br />
4 Ano<strong>the</strong>r word frequently used in Italian for pencil is " lapis "<br />
(<strong>the</strong> s pronounced), written <strong>the</strong> same in <strong>the</strong> singular as in <strong>the</strong><br />
plural.<br />
5 See rule 63, to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> meaning of <strong>the</strong> letters in <strong>the</strong><br />
darker type.<br />
114.6 Ed, instead of e, may be used before a word beginning with<br />
a vowel, for <strong>the</strong> sake of euphony. Ex.<br />
" Carlo ed io. "<br />
Charles <strong>and</strong> I.<br />
7 This word was given in <strong>the</strong> previous Vocabulary, <strong>and</strong>, with all<br />
<strong>the</strong> words <strong>which</strong> occur in <strong>the</strong> exercises, is contained in <strong>the</strong><br />
General Vocabulary at <strong>the</strong> end of this grammar .<br />
115. 8 In Italian <strong>the</strong> definite article must be repeated before each<br />
noun.<br />
ON THE MODES OF ADDRESSING PEOPLE IN ITALIAN. 19<br />
LESSON III.<br />
ON THE MODES OF ADDRESSING PEOPLE IN ITALIAN.<br />
116. The Italians have three ways of addressing one ano<strong>the</strong>r;<br />
<strong>the</strong>y employ <strong>the</strong> second person singular, " Tu," thou, or <strong>the</strong><br />
second person plural, " Voi," you, or <strong>the</strong> third person singular,<br />
feminine , " Ella," she.<br />
117. The second person singular, " tu," is used by parents when<br />
<strong>the</strong>y speak to <strong>the</strong>ir children, <strong>and</strong> when husb<strong>and</strong> <strong>and</strong> wife ,<br />
bro<strong>the</strong>rs <strong>and</strong> sisters speak to one ano<strong>the</strong>r. This form is used also<br />
when speaking to very intimate friends . Ex.<br />
Amo la tua conversazione .<br />
I like your (thy) conversation .<br />
118. In Italian " tu " is fur<strong>the</strong>r used, as thou is in English, in<br />
poetry, <strong>and</strong> sometimes to express anger or scorn towards <strong>the</strong><br />
person addressed.<br />
119. The second person plural " voi," is used by ladies <strong>and</strong><br />
gentlemen towards <strong>the</strong>ir inferiors. It is also employed in<br />
commerce . Ex.<br />
Voi parlate troppo.<br />
You speak too much.<br />
26
120. But when <strong>the</strong> Italians wish to show respect to <strong>the</strong> person<br />
<strong>the</strong>y address (whe<strong>the</strong>r man or woman) instead of " voi," you, <strong>the</strong>y<br />
use <strong>the</strong> third person singular feminine , " ella," she, <strong>which</strong><br />
pronoun in that case st<strong>and</strong>s for " Vostra Signoria " (your Lordship,<br />
or Ladyship).<br />
The words spoken are supposed to be addressed to <strong>the</strong> title <strong>and</strong><br />
not to <strong>the</strong> person. Ex.<br />
" Ella ha il temperino," instead of " Voi avete il temperino."1 You<br />
have <strong>the</strong> penknife .<br />
121. In speaking to more than one person " loro," or " elleno" (see<br />
rule 107), <strong>the</strong>y, <strong>which</strong> st<strong>and</strong> for " le Vostre Signorie," or " for<br />
Signori ," or " for Signore " (your Lordships, or Ladyships), are<br />
used. 1<br />
122. In writing <strong>the</strong> exercises in this grammar, <strong>the</strong> student is<br />
strongly advised to write as <strong>many</strong> sentences as he can in <strong>the</strong><br />
three forms ; that is, in <strong>the</strong> second <strong>and</strong> third persons singular,<br />
<strong>and</strong> in <strong>the</strong> second person plural, as explained in rules 117, 119,<br />
<strong>and</strong> 120, thus :<br />
Hai (tu) tuo<br />
Ha ella m<strong>and</strong>ate il suo quadro all' esposizione ?<br />
Avete (voi) Vostro<br />
Have you sent your picture to <strong>the</strong> exhibition ?<br />
123 1 All <strong>the</strong> words in sentences employed in connection with "<br />
Ella ," " Lei " <strong>and</strong> " Loro " should have <strong>the</strong> feminine inflection, but<br />
<strong>many</strong> people , ignoring <strong>the</strong> pronouns (" Ella ," " Lei " <strong>and</strong> " Loro' ? ")<br />
give to words <strong>the</strong> masculine or feminine inflection, according as<br />
<strong>the</strong>y speak to a woman or a man, to women or men. Ex.<br />
To a woman : " È Ella stata invitata al ballo ? " |Have you<br />
To a man : " È Ella stato invitato al ballo?" | been<br />
To women : " Sono Loro state invitate al ballo ? " |invited to<br />
To men : " Sono Loro stati invitati al ballo? " |<strong>the</strong> ball ?<br />
20 ON THE INTERROGATIVE AND NEGATIVE FORMS OF<br />
VERBS.<br />
ON THE INTERROGATIVE AND NEGATIVE<br />
FORMS OF VERBS.<br />
124. In Italian, a verb is conjugated interrogatively, simply by<br />
placing <strong>the</strong> mark of interrogation after it ; 1 <strong>and</strong>, in speaking, by<br />
raising <strong>the</strong> voice towards <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> sentence . 2 Ex.<br />
27
Avete il libro di Guglielmo ?<br />
Have you William's book ?<br />
125. A verb is conjugated negatively, by placing <strong>the</strong> negative<br />
particle " non " before it. Ex.<br />
Carlo non ha l' oriuolo.<br />
Charles has not <strong>the</strong> watch.<br />
126. It is very important to notice that in Italian <strong>the</strong> Present of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Infinitive is used instead of <strong>the</strong> second person singular of <strong>the</strong><br />
Imperative Mood, when <strong>the</strong> verb is used negatively . Ex.<br />
Non avere il cappello. |Do not (thou) have <strong>the</strong> hat.<br />
Non abbiate il cappello. |Do not (you) have <strong>the</strong> hat.<br />
Non abbiate il cappello. |<br />
127. A verb is conjugated interrogatively-negatively, by placing<br />
<strong>the</strong> negative particle " non " before it, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> mark of<br />
interrogation at <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> sentence ; in speaking <strong>the</strong> voice<br />
must be raised towards <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> sentence . Ex.<br />
ha ella il libro di Carlo ?<br />
Have you not Charles' book ?<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
Il cappello <strong>the</strong> hat. La sciarpa <strong>the</strong> scarf.<br />
Il cappellino <strong>the</strong> bonnet. Il giornale <strong>the</strong> newspaper.<br />
L' abito 3 <strong>the</strong> coat. La vesta <strong>the</strong> dress.<br />
Il danaro <strong>the</strong> money. Si yes.<br />
Ma but. O...O ei<strong>the</strong>r... or.<br />
No no. Qu<strong>and</strong>o when.<br />
Il franc obollo <strong>the</strong> postage-stamp.<br />
Non (verb) nè...nè nei<strong>the</strong>r... nor.<br />
EXERCISE III.<br />
William has Henry's (92) coat. Has Elizabeth <strong>the</strong> money ? Yes. We<br />
(106) have nei<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong> newspaper nor <strong>the</strong> postage stamp. Have<br />
you (122, a) Charles' grammar ? No, I have not (125) <strong>the</strong> books.<br />
When shall we have (124) <strong>the</strong> dictionary ? To-day or to-morrow.<br />
Do 4 not have (126) <strong>the</strong> bonnet, but have <strong>the</strong> dress.<br />
1 A personal pronoun is sometimes required to avoid ambiguity.<br />
Ex.<br />
" Ha egli il libro ? "<br />
Has he <strong>the</strong> book ?<br />
28
2 When an interrogative sentence begins with an interrogative<br />
pronoun or an adverb, <strong>the</strong> tone of <strong>the</strong> voice in Italian is much <strong>the</strong><br />
same as in English. Ex.<br />
" Perché non venne ieri ? "<br />
Why did you not come yesterday ?<br />
3 See rule 63, in order to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> meaning of <strong>the</strong> letters<br />
in <strong>the</strong> darker type.<br />
128. 4 The auxiliaries do, does, did, are not translated into<br />
Italian .<br />
ON THE INTERROGATIVE AND NEGATIVE FORMS OF VERBS.<br />
21<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
Mio padre, my 1 fa<strong>the</strong>r. il loro nipote 2, <strong>the</strong>ir nephew.<br />
Mia madre, my mo<strong>the</strong>r. il signore, <strong>the</strong> gentleman,<br />
Tuo fratello, thy bro<strong>the</strong>r. La signora, <strong>the</strong> lady.<br />
Tua sorella. thy sister. il mio: 3 scolare, my pupil.<br />
Suo figlio, his or her<br />
son.<br />
il tempo, <strong>the</strong> time.<br />
Nostro cugino, our cousin. La canzone, <strong>the</strong> song.<br />
Vostro zio, your uncle. L'inchiostro. <strong>the</strong> ink.<br />
Gennaio, January Maggio, May Settembre, September<br />
Febbraio, February Giugno, June Ottobre, October<br />
Marzo, March Luglio, July Novembre, November<br />
Aprile, April Agosto, August, Dicembre, December<br />
Eccolo,| here he is, Eccoli, m. | |Prima di, before.<br />
3 |here it is, |here <strong>the</strong>y are| Dopo, after .<br />
Eccola, |here she is. Eccole, f.| |Mentre , whilst .<br />
EXERCISE IV.<br />
My sister has <strong>the</strong> ink-st<strong>and</strong>, but she has not (125) <strong>the</strong> ink.<br />
Charles has my (131) money. My bro<strong>the</strong>r has Henry's song. The<br />
woman <strong>had</strong> (Imp. Ind.) my mo<strong>the</strong>r's dress. We <strong>had</strong> already <strong>had</strong><br />
(Pluperf. Ind.) our (129) uncle's letter. Have you (122, 124) <strong>the</strong><br />
postage -stamp, for <strong>the</strong> (100) newspaper ? Yes, here it is. Have you<br />
William's exercises (104) ? Yes, here <strong>the</strong>y are. Has John my<br />
pupil's pens (100, 131) ? Yes, here <strong>the</strong>y are. I shall have (<strong>the</strong>)<br />
time for my lesson to-day. Their (130) nephew shall have my coat<br />
29
<strong>and</strong> 4 hat after May. 5 We shall not have my fa<strong>the</strong>r's writing desk<br />
before to-morrow. We should have <strong>had</strong> <strong>the</strong> ink.<br />
129. 1 My, thy, his, her, our, your, are translated by " mio," " tuo,"<br />
" suo," " nostro," " vostro;" "mia," " tua," "sua," "nostra," " vostra,"<br />
before names of kindred in <strong>the</strong> singular . Ex.<br />
" mio padre," my fa<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
130. 2 But before "loro" <strong>and</strong> when <strong>the</strong> names of kindred are in <strong>the</strong><br />
plural, <strong>the</strong> article is used. Ex.<br />
" Il loro nipote," <strong>the</strong>ir nephew . " I miei fratelli ," my bro<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />
131. 3 Before any nouns but names of kindred, my, thy, his, her,<br />
our, your, are translated in <strong>the</strong> singular by " il mio," " il tuo," "il<br />
suo," "il nostro," &c., <strong>and</strong> in <strong>the</strong> plural by " i miei," " i tuoi ," " i<br />
suoi," "I nostri ," " i vostri ," "I loro." Ex.<br />
" Il mio scolare ,"<br />
my pupil.<br />
132.4 "Mio," "tuo,"&c., "il mio," "il tuo,"&c., must be repeated<br />
before each noun, when <strong>the</strong>re are several. " Ecco qui mia madre<br />
e mia sorella ," here are my mo<strong>the</strong>r <strong>and</strong> sister .<br />
5 See rule 74.<br />
22 ON THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE.<br />
LESSON IV.<br />
ON THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE.<br />
133. The partitive articles some <strong>and</strong> any, are translated into<br />
Italian by " del," " dello," " della," to express quantity . Ex.<br />
Ho comprato della carta e dell' inchiostro .<br />
I have bought some paper <strong>and</strong> ink.<br />
134. The partitive articles some <strong>and</strong> any are translated by"dei,"<br />
" degli," " delle," to express number . Ex.<br />
Gli m<strong>and</strong>ai degli abiti francesi 1 e delle armi inglesi .<br />
I sent him some French clo<strong>the</strong>s <strong>and</strong> English arms .<br />
135. When some means a limited number, 2 it is translated<br />
ei<strong>the</strong>r by " qualche ," <strong>which</strong> is invariable, <strong>and</strong> is followed by a<br />
noun in <strong>the</strong> singular, or by " alcuno," <strong>which</strong> agrees in gender <strong>and</strong><br />
number with <strong>the</strong> noun to <strong>which</strong> it refers . Ex.<br />
Vado a comprare qualche libro spagnuolo.<br />
I am going to buy some (a few), Spanish books.<br />
30
Non aveva seco che alcuni amici .<br />
He only <strong>had</strong> with him some (a few) friends .<br />
136. The partitive articles " del," " dello," " della," " qualche ," "<br />
alcuno," " alcuni," " alcune," must be repeated before each noun,<br />
when <strong>the</strong>re are several . Ex.<br />
Ho comprato della carta e dei libri.<br />
I have bought some paper <strong>and</strong> books.<br />
137. When some <strong>and</strong> any are omitted, or could be omitted in<br />
English, <strong>the</strong> partitive articles are omitted, or could be omitted in<br />
Italian . Ex.<br />
V'erano uomini , donne , e persino fanciulli .<br />
There were men, women , <strong>and</strong> even children .<br />
Ho veduto in Inghilterra cavalli bellissimi .<br />
I have seen in Engl<strong>and</strong> very fine horses .<br />
138. When in a sentence <strong>the</strong>re is <strong>the</strong> partitive article " del," "<br />
della," &c., in a subsequent sentence referring to it, in Italian,<br />
<strong>the</strong> partitive article must be represented by <strong>the</strong> pronoun " ne,"<br />
some , of it, of <strong>the</strong>m ; <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> verb must be repeated in full. Ex.<br />
Ha, or ha ella del denaro ?<br />
Have you any money ?<br />
Si, ne ho.<br />
Yes, I have .<br />
Avremo dell' acqua ?<br />
Shall we have some water ?<br />
Si, ne avremo .<br />
Yes, we shall.<br />
1 An s dotted thus s, has <strong>the</strong> soft sound of <strong>the</strong> s in <strong>the</strong> word rose.<br />
I39- 2 But when <strong>the</strong> number is very limited (few, a few] some is<br />
translated by " pochi," m., or " poche," f. Ex.<br />
Egli aveva pochi amici .<br />
He <strong>had</strong> few friends .<br />
ON THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 23<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
L'oro (21), gold L'acciaio, steel Il lottone, brass<br />
L' argento, silver Il ferro, iron Lo stagno, tin<br />
Il platino, platinum Il rame, copper Il piombo, lead<br />
31
EXERCISE V.<br />
I have some (133) silver. Has your bro<strong>the</strong>r any iron ? Yes; he has<br />
some iron, (136) copper, <strong>and</strong> brass. Mary <strong>had</strong> (Imp. Ind.) some<br />
paper, but she <strong>had</strong> not any pens. Charles has nei<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong><br />
grammar, nor <strong>the</strong> dictionary. My fa<strong>the</strong>r has some money. We<br />
have not any ink. Have we any postage -stamps? Yes, we have<br />
(138). Yesterday we <strong>had</strong> (Imp. Ind.) my uncle's dictionary. Have<br />
you (124) any pencils ? No, I have not any. Henry <strong>and</strong> William<br />
have money , but John has not any (138).<br />
ON THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE.<br />
140. The indefinite article a or an is translated into Italian by "<br />
un," 1 before a masculine noun beginning ei<strong>the</strong>r with a<br />
consonant or a vowel. Ex.<br />
Un giorno felice .<br />
A happy day.<br />
Un Uomo amabile .<br />
An amiable man.<br />
141. The indefinite article a or an is translated by " uno " before a<br />
masculine noun beginning with an 5 followed by ano<strong>the</strong>r<br />
consonant , or with a z. Ex.<br />
Uno scolare diligente .<br />
A diligent pupil.<br />
Uno zio ricchissimo .<br />
A very rich uncle .<br />
142. The indefinite article a or an is translated by " una," before a<br />
feminine noun beginning with a consonant . Ex.<br />
Una signora francese .<br />
A French lady.<br />
143. The indefinite article a or an is translated by " un'," before a<br />
feminine noun beginning with a vowel. Ex.<br />
Un' anima sensibile .<br />
A sensitive soul.<br />
144. When in a sentence <strong>the</strong>re is an indefinite article, " un,"<br />
"uno," &c., in a subsequent sentence referring to it, <strong>the</strong><br />
indefinite article preceded by <strong>the</strong> pronoun "ne" (of <strong>the</strong>m), must be<br />
repeated, if <strong>the</strong> answer be in <strong>the</strong> affirmative ; but if <strong>the</strong> answer<br />
32
e negative " ne " only is expressed ; " uno " <strong>and</strong> " una " being<br />
omitted . Ex.<br />
Ha ella un dizionario ?<br />
Have you a dictionary ?<br />
Si, ne h o uno. No, non ne ho.<br />
Yes I have . No, I have not.<br />
145. 1 But when a or an are numeral adjectives <strong>the</strong>y are<br />
translated by " uno " or " una." Ex.<br />
Ella ha due libri, ma io non ne ho che uno.<br />
You have two books, but I have but one.<br />
ON THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 24<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
L'aria , 1 air. La luce, light. il fuoco,2 fire.<br />
L'acqua, water. il fumo, <strong>the</strong> smoke, il vento, 3 <strong>the</strong> wind.<br />
Un sec olo, a century. Lunedì, (69) Monday.<br />
Un anno, a year. Martedì, Tuesday.<br />
Un mese, a month. Merc oledì, Wednesday.<br />
Una settimana a week, Giovedì Thursday.<br />
Un giorno, di, a day. Venerdì, Friday.<br />
Un' ora, an hour, Sabato Saturday.<br />
Un minuto, a minute. Domenica,. Sunday<br />
Una chiesa. a church, Una stanza, a room,<br />
Un pala<strong>zz</strong>o, a palace, Una camera, a room,<br />
Una strada, a street. La sedia, <strong>the</strong> chair.<br />
Perché ? why Perché, because.<br />
Mai ? ever ? No, mai, giammai, never.<br />
Non (verb) mai, never. Spesso, sovente, often.<br />
Sempre, always. Subito, at once.<br />
Fra Poco, very soon.<br />
EXERCISE VI.<br />
Mary has a pencil. We have a writing-desk. Have you (124) ever<br />
<strong>had</strong> a lesson from my (131) master 4 ? Never. Charles has never<br />
<strong>had</strong> a penknife . When shall I have my dictionary ? Very soon, on<br />
5 Friday, or Saturday (74). To-morrow Elizabeth will have a dress,<br />
<strong>and</strong> Mary will have a bonnet. Henry shall not have my bro<strong>the</strong>r's<br />
slate . Shall we not (127) have some water ? Yes, we shall (138).<br />
William, do not (126) have (thou) any (133) fire in your (thy) room<br />
33
to-day. He <strong>had</strong> (Imp. Ind.) his book on 6 a chair, in my cousin's<br />
garden. We shall have <strong>the</strong> book at once.<br />
1 See rule 63, in order to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> meaning of <strong>the</strong> letters<br />
in <strong>the</strong> darker type.<br />
2 Notice that an o preceded by a u has always <strong>the</strong> broad sound of<br />
<strong>the</strong> o in <strong>the</strong> word orphan.<br />
3 An e, dotted thus e, has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> a in <strong>the</strong> word<br />
gate .<br />
146. 4 Master is translated into Italian by " maestro," when it<br />
means a teacher, <strong>and</strong> by " padrone ," when it means a master (an<br />
owner).<br />
147. 5 On is not translated into Italian before Monday, Tuesday,<br />
&c., nor before any name of time . Ex. " Il primo gennaio," On <strong>the</strong><br />
first of January .<br />
148. 6 The preposition " su," on, upon, takes an r (" sur "), before a<br />
vowel, for <strong>the</strong> sake of euphony. Ex.<br />
L'ho trovato sur una tavola.<br />
I found it on a table.<br />
ON THE VERB "ESSERE ." 25<br />
LESSON V.<br />
THE VERB "ESSERE ," TO BE.<br />
INFINITIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . PAST.<br />
Essere, to be. Essere stato, 1 to have been.<br />
GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST GERUND.<br />
Essendo, being. Stato-a-i-e, been. Essendo stato,<br />
INDICATIVE<br />
MOOD.<br />
PRESENT<br />
IMPERFECT.<br />
34<br />
having been.<br />
PAST DEFINITE.<br />
I am &c. I was &c. I was &c.<br />
Sono, Ero, 3 Fui,<br />
Sei, Eri, Fosti,<br />
È'; (69) Era ; Fu;<br />
Siamo, 2 Eravamo, Fummo,<br />
Siete, Eravate, Foste,<br />
Sono. Erano. Furono.
PAST INDEFINITE. PLUPERFECT. PAST ANTERIOR.<br />
Sono stato, &c. Ero stato, &c. Fui stato, &c.<br />
I have been, &c. I <strong>had</strong> been, &c. I <strong>had</strong> been, &c.<br />
FUTURE. CONDITIONAL . IMPERATIVE<br />
MOOD.<br />
I shall be &c. I should be &c. Be (thou) &c.<br />
Sarò, Sarei, . No first person.<br />
Sarai, Saresti, Sii,<br />
Sarà ; Sarebbe ; Sia ;<br />
Saremo, Saremmo, Siamo,<br />
Sarete, Sareste, Siate,<br />
Saranno. Sarebbero. Siano.<br />
FUTURE<br />
ANTERIOR.<br />
CONDITIONAL PAST. The Past of <strong>the</strong><br />
Sarò stato, &c. Sarei stato, &c. Imperative is<br />
I shall have been,<br />
&c.<br />
I should have been,<br />
&c.<br />
35<br />
seldom used.<br />
149. 1 Notice that <strong>the</strong> compound tenses of " essere," are formed<br />
by using <strong>the</strong> same verb as auxiliary, or that its past participle<br />
"stato," is variable . Ex.<br />
Sono stato, or stata (no) a Parigi . I have been to Paris .<br />
150.2 The following forms are often used in poetry : " semo,"<br />
instead of "siamo, " sete," instead of " siete," "fue," instead of " fu,"<br />
" furo," instead of " furono, "fia," instead of "sarà," " fiano," or "<br />
fieno," instead of "saranno," " saria, instead of "sarei" <strong>and</strong> "<br />
sarebbe," " sariano," instead of " sarebbero," " fora, instead of<br />
"sarebbe" <strong>and</strong> " sarebbero," "sie," instead of "sia," <strong>and</strong> "sieno"<br />
instead of "siano ."<br />
3 Or "era"; see rule 108.<br />
26 ON THE VERB " ESSERE ."<br />
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . IMPERFECT.<br />
That I may be &c. That I might be &c.<br />
Che io sia, Che / se(0112) io fossi,
Che tu sia, Che / se tu fossi,<br />
Che egli/essa sia ; Che egli/essa fosse;<br />
Che siamo, Che / se fossimo,<br />
Che siate, Che / se foste,<br />
Che essi/esse siano, Che essi/esse fossero.<br />
PAST PLUPERFECT.<br />
Che i o sia state, &c. Che / se i o fossi stato, &c.<br />
That I may have been &c. That I might have been, &c.<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
Buono, 1 good. Uno, 1.<br />
Primo a, I. Felice, 1 happy.<br />
Due, 2. Secondo a, II.<br />
Gr<strong>and</strong>e, tall, large. Tre, 3-<br />
Terzo a, III, Piccolo, small, little.<br />
Quattro, 4- Quarto a, IV.<br />
Bello, beautiful, fine. Cinque, 5-<br />
Quinto a, V. Orgoglioso, proud.<br />
Sei, 6. Sesto a, VI.<br />
Dove, where Dentro, within Lontano, far Cotesto,2 that<br />
Qui, here Fuori, without Questo, this Quello,3 that<br />
EXERCISE VII.<br />
John is tall, but his bro<strong>the</strong>r Charles is little. This church is<br />
beautiful. Where is Elizabeth ? She (106, a ) is here . These tables<br />
are small, but <strong>the</strong>y are good. Where are Henry <strong>and</strong> John ? They<br />
are not (125) here ; <strong>the</strong>y are in our uncle's garden. Where shall<br />
we be on (147) Thursday? We shall be in our (100, 129) cousin's<br />
room . Where have you been (124, 149) ? I have been in my<br />
bro<strong>the</strong>r's room . Will you be here on Wednesday ? Yes ; I shall be<br />
ei<strong>the</strong>r here , or at my sister's house . Where are my pens ? They<br />
are in that (152) writing desk. Be (122) good, William, <strong>and</strong> you will<br />
be happy. Do (128, 122, 126) not be proud.<br />
151. 1 Adjectives agree in gender <strong>and</strong> number with <strong>the</strong> nouns<br />
<strong>the</strong>y qualify ; those ending in o, change <strong>the</strong> o into a for <strong>the</strong><br />
feminine , <strong>and</strong> form <strong>the</strong>ir masculine plural by changing o into i,<br />
<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir feminine plural by changing a into e, as " buono," "<br />
buona," " buoni," " buone." Adjectives ending in e do not change for<br />
36
<strong>the</strong> feminine ; <strong>the</strong> plural for both genders is formed by changing<br />
<strong>the</strong> e into an i ; as " felice ," " felici ."<br />
152. 2 "Cotesto," " cotesta," &c., mean that, near <strong>the</strong> person<br />
spoken to.<br />
153- 3 " Quello," "quella," c., mean thai , distant from <strong>the</strong> speaker ,<br />
<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> person addressed.<br />
ON THE VERB " ESSERE .' 27<br />
THE VERB "ESSERE ," WITH CI " AND "VI."<br />
154. The verb " Essere " is very often employed as an impersonal<br />
verb, with <strong>the</strong> adverbs " ci " <strong>and</strong> " vi." 1<br />
INFINITIVE PRESENT. |Esserci, or esservi, to be <strong>the</strong>re or in<br />
it, &c.<br />
MOOD. PAST. |Esserci stato, to have been <strong>the</strong>re,<br />
&c.<br />
GERUND. |Essendoci, being <strong>the</strong>re, &c.<br />
PAST GER. |Essendoci stato, having been <strong>the</strong>re,<br />
&c.<br />
INDICATIVE PRESENT. |C'è, or v'è, <strong>the</strong>re is, or <strong>the</strong>re is in it,<br />
&c.<br />
MOOD. |Ci sono, or vi sono, <strong>the</strong>re are, &c.<br />
IMPERFECT |C' era, or v' era, <strong>the</strong>re was, &c.<br />
.<br />
|C' erano, or v' erano, <strong>the</strong>re were,<br />
PAST<br />
INDEF.<br />
&c.<br />
|C' è stato, or stata, <strong>the</strong>re has been,<br />
&c.<br />
|Ci sono stati, or state, <strong>the</strong>re have<br />
been, &c.<br />
FUTURE. |Ci or vi sarà, |<strong>the</strong>re will be, &c.<br />
|Ci or vi saranno, |<br />
CONDITION- |Ci or vi sarebbe, |<strong>the</strong>re would<br />
be, &c.<br />
-AL MOOD. |Ci or vi sarebbero|<br />
INTERROGATIVELY. NEGATIVELY.<br />
C' è or v' è ? is <strong>the</strong>re ? &c. Non c' è or v' è, <strong>the</strong>re is not, &c.<br />
Ci or vi sono ? are <strong>the</strong>re ?<br />
&c.<br />
Non ci or vi sono, <strong>the</strong>re are not, &c.<br />
37
VOCABULARY.<br />
Il castello, <strong>the</strong> castle, Il salotto <strong>the</strong> parlour,<br />
La torre, <strong>the</strong> tower. Il fanciullo, <strong>the</strong> child.<br />
il medesimo, <strong>the</strong> same. Poco, (21) a little.<br />
Troppo, too much. Lo stesso, <strong>the</strong> same.<br />
Molto, very, much. Troppo poco, too little.<br />
EXERCISE VIII.<br />
Charles is <strong>the</strong> first, I. (106 b) am <strong>the</strong> second, <strong>and</strong> Elizabeth is <strong>the</strong><br />
third. My bro<strong>the</strong>r's house is too large . Where is Mary ? She is in<br />
my sister's room . Is <strong>the</strong>re a man in <strong>the</strong> street ? Yes ; <strong>the</strong>re is a<br />
man <strong>and</strong> a child. . Is <strong>the</strong>re a table in our parlour ? No ; <strong>the</strong>re are<br />
three chairs, but <strong>the</strong>re is no (125) table . There was a small<br />
inkst<strong>and</strong> in my uncle's room . There is too much ink in this pen.<br />
Is <strong>the</strong>re a pencil in my bro<strong>the</strong>r's writing-desk ? No, <strong>the</strong>re are<br />
three pens <strong>and</strong> some paper. There will be a book for <strong>the</strong> pupil, <strong>and</strong><br />
a writing -desk for <strong>the</strong> master (146).<br />
1 " Ci " means here <strong>and</strong> in it, " vi " means <strong>the</strong>re <strong>and</strong> in it, but <strong>the</strong><br />
two words are used indiscriminately ; "ci " is used oftener than "<br />
vi."<br />
28 ON THE VERBS.<br />
LESSON VI.<br />
ON THE VERBS.<br />
155. Verbs are of five kinds ; Active ,1 Passive, Neuter,<br />
Pronominal, <strong>and</strong> Impersonal ; besides <strong>the</strong> two Auxiliaries, " Avere<br />
" <strong>and</strong> " Essere ,"2 3 <strong>which</strong> have already been given .<br />
156. Verbs are ei<strong>the</strong>r Regular , Irregular , or Defective .4<br />
157. Italian regular verbs are generally classified into three<br />
conjugations, <strong>which</strong> are distinguished by <strong>the</strong> termination of <strong>the</strong><br />
Present of <strong>the</strong> Infinitive Mood.<br />
The first ends in ARE, as COMPRARE, to buy.5<br />
The second ,, ERE, as CREDERE, to believe .6<br />
The third ,, IRE, as FINIRE, to finish 7<br />
158. 1 Active Verbs are ei<strong>the</strong>r Active Transitive , or Active<br />
Intransitive .<br />
38
159. An Active Transitive Verb is a verb expressing an action<br />
<strong>which</strong> passes to <strong>the</strong> object in <strong>the</strong> sentence , without <strong>the</strong> help of a<br />
preposition. In <strong>the</strong> phrase " Giovanni ha comprato il libro," John<br />
bought <strong>the</strong> book , " Giovanni " is <strong>the</strong> subject, "ha comprato " is <strong>the</strong><br />
verb, active transitive , <strong>and</strong> " il libro " is <strong>the</strong> object, called direct<br />
object.<br />
160. An Active Intransitive Verb is a verb expressing an action<br />
<strong>which</strong> passes to <strong>the</strong> object in <strong>the</strong> sentence through a preposition.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> phrase, " Maria ha parlato a Carlo," Mary spoke to Charles,<br />
"Maria" is <strong>the</strong> subject, "ha parlato," <strong>the</strong> verb, active intransitive,<br />
<strong>and</strong> "a Carlo" is <strong>the</strong> object, in this case called indirect object.<br />
161. 2 "Avere " is really an active transitive verb, <strong>and</strong> " Essere " is<br />
really a neuter verb, but <strong>the</strong>y are generally called auxiliary verbs,<br />
because <strong>the</strong> compound tenses of all o<strong>the</strong>r verbs are formed with<br />
<strong>the</strong> help of ei<strong>the</strong>r of <strong>the</strong>m .<br />
3 See rule 63, in order to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> meaning of <strong>the</strong> letters<br />
in <strong>the</strong> darker type.<br />
4 Page 66 <strong>and</strong> following contain all <strong>the</strong> important irregular <strong>and</strong><br />
defective verbs used in <strong>the</strong> Italian language , arranged<br />
alphabetically .<br />
162. 5 There are altoge<strong>the</strong>r about 7,000 verbs in Italian, of <strong>which</strong><br />
6,000 are of <strong>the</strong> first conjugation, <strong>and</strong> are all regular, like "<br />
comprare ," to buy, except three : " Andare," to go ; " Dare," to give ;<br />
<strong>and</strong> " Stare ," to stay, to be in health , to dwell, <strong>and</strong> to remain .<br />
163. 6 The second conjugation includes 500 verbs, of <strong>which</strong> only<br />
60 are regular : of <strong>the</strong> 440 irregular, 60 end in " ere," long, ( Parole<br />
piane , like " temere," to fear), <strong>and</strong> 380 in " ere," short ; ( Parole<br />
sdrucciole , like " Credere ," to believe ).<br />
164. 7 There are 500 verbs of <strong>the</strong> third conjugation, in " ire ; " of<br />
<strong>the</strong>se 430 are regular, conjugated ei<strong>the</strong>r like " Finire," to finish<br />
(390 of <strong>the</strong>m), or like " Servire," to serve (40 of <strong>the</strong>m) ; 70 are<br />
irregular .<br />
ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN "ARE." 29<br />
ON THE CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS.<br />
MODEL OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN "ARE."<br />
"COMPRARE ," TO BUY.<br />
INFINITIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . PAST.<br />
39
Compr are, 1 to buy. Aver 2 compr ato, to have<br />
40<br />
bought.<br />
GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST GERUND.<br />
Compr <strong>and</strong>o, 3 Compr ato-a-i-e, 4 Avendo compr ato,<br />
buying. bought. having bought.<br />
INDICATIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT. IMPERFECT. PAST DEFINITE.<br />
I buy &c. I bought &c. I bought &c.<br />
Compr o, Compr avo, 5 Compr ai,<br />
Compr i, Compr avi, Compr asti,<br />
Compr a ; Compr ava ; Compr ò ;<br />
Compr iamo, Compr avamo, Compr ammo,<br />
Compr ate, Compr avate, Compr aste,<br />
Compr ano. Compr avano. Compr arono 6<br />
PAST INDEFINITE. PLUPERFECT. PAST ANTERIOR.<br />
Ho comprato, &c. Avevo comprato, &c. Ebbi comprato, &c.<br />
I have bought, &c. I <strong>had</strong> bought, &c. I <strong>had</strong> bought, &c.<br />
165. 1 A verb consists of two parts ; <strong>the</strong> root <strong>which</strong> is invariable,<br />
<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> termination, <strong>which</strong> varies to indicate mood, tense ,<br />
person <strong>and</strong> number. In <strong>the</strong> verb "comprare ," " compr " is <strong>the</strong> root,<br />
<strong>and</strong> " are " <strong>the</strong> termination .<br />
166. 2 The compound tenses of all active verbs are formed with "<br />
avere ."<br />
3 The Present Participle of " comprare " (see rule 105) is "<br />
comprante . " seldom used. The Pres. Part, of "parlare " is "<br />
parlante ," of " amare ," " amante," <strong>and</strong> so of all <strong>the</strong> verbs of <strong>the</strong><br />
first conjugation .<br />
167. 4 The Past Participle of active transitive verbs remains<br />
invariable, that is to say it ends in o, when <strong>the</strong> direct object in<br />
<strong>the</strong> sentence follows it. Ex. " Ho comprato tre libri. " I have bought<br />
three books. But when <strong>the</strong> direct object precedes <strong>the</strong> past<br />
participle, <strong>the</strong> latter is variable . Ex. " Ecco i libri che ho comprati."<br />
Here are <strong>the</strong> books I have bought.
168. The Past Participle of active intransitive verbs always<br />
remains invariable . Ex.<br />
" Ci hanno parlato. "<br />
They spoke to us.<br />
5 Or " comprava ; " see rule 108.<br />
169. 6 In poetry " compràro " is often used instead of " comprarono<br />
; " in <strong>the</strong> same way "parlàro," instead of " parlarono," <strong>the</strong>y spoke , "<br />
<strong>and</strong>àro," instead of " <strong>and</strong>arono," <strong>the</strong>y went, etc.<br />
ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN " ARE " 30<br />
FUTURE. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE<br />
MOOD.<br />
I shall buy, &c. I should buy, &c. Buy (thou) &c.<br />
Compr erò, Compr erei, 1 No first person.<br />
Compr erai, Compr eresti, Compr a,<br />
Compr erà ; Compr erebbe ; Compr i ;<br />
Compr eremo, Compr eremmo, Compr iamo,<br />
Compr erete, Compr ereste, Compr ate,<br />
Compr eranno. Compr erebbero. Compr ino.<br />
FUTURE<br />
CONDITIONAL The Past of <strong>the</strong><br />
ANTERIOR.<br />
PAST.<br />
Avrò comprato, &c. Avrei comprato, &c. Imperative is<br />
I shall have bought,<br />
&c.<br />
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.<br />
I should have<br />
bought, &c.<br />
PRESENT. IMPERFECT.<br />
That I may buy &c. That I might buy &c.<br />
41<br />
seldom used.<br />
Che io compr i, Che or se io compr assi,<br />
Che tu compr i, Che or se tu compr assi,<br />
Che egli/essa compr i; Che or se egli/essa compr asse ;<br />
Che compr iamo, Che or se compr assimo,<br />
Che compr iate, Che or se compr aste,<br />
Che essi/esse compr ino. Che or se essi/esse compr assero.<br />
PAST. PLUPERFECT.<br />
Che io abbia comprato, &c. Che or se io avessi comprato,<br />
&c.<br />
That I may have bought, &c. That I might have bought, &c.<br />
IMPORTANT REMARKS .
170. Verbs ending in "care ," <strong>and</strong> " gare ," as " peccare," to sin, <strong>and</strong> "<br />
pregare," to pray, require an h after <strong>the</strong> c <strong>and</strong> g, when followed by<br />
e or i, because <strong>the</strong> c <strong>and</strong> g are to be pronounced hard throughout<br />
<strong>the</strong> conjugation. Ex. " pecco," " pecchi," " pecca," " pecchiamo,"<br />
&c.; " prego," " preghi ," " prega," " preghiamo ," &c.<br />
171. Verbs ending in " ciare " <strong>and</strong> " giare ," as " scacciare," to drive<br />
away, <strong>and</strong> " mangiare," to eat, drop <strong>the</strong> i before ano<strong>the</strong>r i, or an e,<br />
as " scaccerò ," &c. ; " mangerei ," &c.<br />
172. Verbs ending in " iare ," as "odiare ," to hate , retain <strong>the</strong> i in<br />
<strong>the</strong> root when <strong>the</strong> termination is marked by one i only. Ex. " odio,"<br />
" odii," "odia," " odiamo," &c.<br />
173. Verbs ending in " gnare," as " regnare," to reign, omit <strong>the</strong> i of<br />
<strong>the</strong> termination of <strong>the</strong> first person plural of <strong>the</strong> Present<br />
Indicative . Ex. " regno ," " regni ," "regna ," " regnamo ," &c.<br />
174. 1 In poetry " compreria " is often used instead of "<br />
comprerei," <strong>and</strong> " comprerebbe ," <strong>and</strong> " compreriano " instead of "<br />
comprerebbero " ; in <strong>the</strong> same way " parleria," instead of "<br />
parlerei " <strong>and</strong> " parlerebbe ," &c.<br />
ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN " ARE." 31<br />
REGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.<br />
Alloggiare , to lodge. Licenziare, to dismiss.<br />
Amare, to love, to like. Migli orare, to improve.<br />
Augurare, 1 to augur, to<br />
wish.<br />
42<br />
Minacciare, to threaten.<br />
Baciare, to kiss. Mirare, to gaze, to look at.<br />
Ballare, to dance. Pesare, to weigh.<br />
Biasimare,<br />
1<br />
to blame. Portare, to carry.<br />
Caricare, 1 to load. Predicare, 1 to preach.<br />
Cercare, to look for. Privare, to deprive.<br />
Coniugare,<br />
1<br />
to conjugate. Raccontare, to relate.<br />
Dispre<strong>zz</strong>are, to despise. Rispettare, to respect.<br />
Disputare, 1 to dispute. Rubare, to steal.<br />
Evitare, 1 to avoid. Scappare, to escape.<br />
Fumare, to smoke. Scherzare, to joke.<br />
Giudicare, 1 to judge. Spaventare, to frighten.<br />
Guadagnare<br />
,<br />
to earn. Sperare, to hope.<br />
Guardare, to look. Stampare, to print.
Guastare, to spoil. Stimare, to esteem.<br />
Imparare, to learn. Stracciare, to tear.<br />
Ingannare, to deceive. Tagliare, to cut.<br />
Mendicare,<br />
1<br />
to beg. Trascurare, to neglect.<br />
Meritare, 1 to merit. Volare, to fly.<br />
175. The following verbs, <strong>and</strong> about thirty more , have two past<br />
participles ; a long one, <strong>which</strong> expresses an action, <strong>and</strong> an<br />
abbreviated one, <strong>which</strong> is a kind of adjective :<br />
Participles<br />
Adattare , to adapt. adattato, <strong>and</strong> adatto.<br />
Adornare, to adorn. adornato, <strong>and</strong> adorno.<br />
Avve<strong>zz</strong>are , to accustom . avve<strong>zz</strong>ato , <strong>and</strong> avve<strong>zz</strong>o.<br />
Caricare , to load. caricato , <strong>and</strong> carico .<br />
Saziare , to satiate , satisfy . saziato , <strong>and</strong> sazio.<br />
Svegliare , to wake up. svegliato , <strong>and</strong> sveglio . Ex.<br />
Ho caricato il mio schi oppo.<br />
I have loaded my gun.<br />
Il mio schi oppo è carico .<br />
My gun is loaded.<br />
176. 1 The " Tonic Accent " in all <strong>the</strong> regular verbs of <strong>the</strong> first<br />
conjugation is <strong>the</strong> same as in " Comprare ," but in <strong>the</strong> verbs in<br />
<strong>the</strong> list above , marked with an asterisk (*/1), <strong>and</strong> in about<br />
seventy more , <strong>the</strong> three persons in <strong>the</strong> singular of <strong>the</strong> Present<br />
Indicative, Imperative, <strong>and</strong> Subjunctive are " sdrucciole," <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
third persons plural of <strong>the</strong> same tenses are " bisdrucciole ." Ex.<br />
Auguro, auguri , augura ;<br />
Auguriamo , augurate , augurano .<br />
ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN " ARE." 32<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
L' Inghilterra , Engl<strong>and</strong>. Inglese, Englishman,<br />
La Francia, France. Francese,<br />
(48)<br />
43<br />
English.<br />
Frenchman,<br />
French.<br />
La Germania, Ger<strong>many</strong>. Tedesco. German.<br />
L' Italia,. Italy. Italiano, Italian.<br />
La Spagna, Spain. Spagnuolo, Spaniard, Spanish.
La situazione <strong>the</strong> situation.<br />
La porta, l'uscio, <strong>the</strong> gate, door.<br />
Questa città, this town, city.<br />
La lingua, tongue, <strong>the</strong> language.<br />
Facile, easy, Politico, political,<br />
Difficile, difficult. Commerciale, commercial.<br />
NOTE. In this <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> following exercises <strong>the</strong> verbs are given in<br />
<strong>the</strong> Present of <strong>the</strong> Infinitive Mood ; it is left to <strong>the</strong> student to put<br />
<strong>the</strong>m in <strong>the</strong> proper mood, tense , number , <strong>and</strong> person.<br />
EXERCISE IX.<br />
I do (128) not (125) find (a) <strong>the</strong> Italian 1 language difficult. William<br />
speaks (b) French, 2 but does not speak German. I am buying 3<br />
some (134) books for my bro<strong>the</strong>r. I blame (c) my sister, because<br />
she was listening (d) at <strong>the</strong> door. Shall you (117 122) vote (e) to-<br />
morrow ? Yes. John found 4 this letter on (148) a chair, in my<br />
bro<strong>the</strong>r's room . I have sent (f) Henry's Spanish grammar to my<br />
mo<strong>the</strong>r. Charles always 5 studies (g) in our uncle's garden. We<br />
admire (h) <strong>the</strong> situation of this town. I have left (i) William's book<br />
on my writing-desk. Elizabeth will play, (j) I (106, b) shall sing, (k)<br />
<strong>and</strong> Charles will draw (1).<br />
(a) Trovare . (b) Parlare. (c) Biasimare . (d) Ascoltare. (e) Votare . (f)<br />
M<strong>and</strong>are . (g) Studiare. (h) Ammirare . (i) Lasciare . (j) Suonare. (k)<br />
Cantare . (1) Disegnare .<br />
177. 1 Adjectives indicating shape, colour, <strong>and</strong> nationality are put<br />
after <strong>the</strong> noun <strong>the</strong>y qualify, in Italian. Ex. La lingua italiana. The<br />
Italian language .<br />
178. 2 English, French, &c., meaning <strong>the</strong> English, <strong>the</strong> French<br />
language , &c., are also translated by " l' inglese," " il francese ,"<br />
&c., or " la lingua inglese ," " la lingua francese ," &c.<br />
179- 3 The English expressions "I am buying," " She was<br />
listening," " I shall be writing," &c. , are translated into Italian as<br />
if <strong>the</strong>y were " I buy," "she listened " (Imp. Ind.), "I shall write ," &c.<br />
180. 4 Translate as if it were "has found," because, in Italian,<br />
when <strong>the</strong> time at <strong>which</strong> an action occurred is not stated, <strong>the</strong> verb<br />
must be put in <strong>the</strong> Past Indefinite .<br />
44
181. 5 " Sempre ," always, <strong>and</strong> " mai," ever, never, are generally<br />
placed after <strong>the</strong> verb.<br />
ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN "ARE." 33<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
L' Europa, Europe Europeo, 1 European<br />
L' America, America Americano, American<br />
La Scozia, Scotl<strong>and</strong> Sco<strong>zz</strong>ese, Scotchman, Scotch<br />
L' Irl<strong>and</strong>a, Irel<strong>and</strong> Irl<strong>and</strong>ese, Irishman, Irish<br />
La sottoveste, <strong>the</strong> waistcoat ieri sera, 2 last night<br />
Il mondo, <strong>the</strong> world Un quadro, a picture<br />
Una scoperta, a discovery La larghe<strong>zz</strong>a, <strong>the</strong> breadth<br />
Una rivoluzione, a revolution La lunghe<strong>zz</strong>a, <strong>the</strong> length<br />
La riunione, <strong>the</strong> meeting Una ciliegia, a cherry<br />
Una regola, a rule Dell' uva, some grapes<br />
Il pianoforte, <strong>the</strong> pianoforte Del vino, some wine<br />
Questa mattina, this morning Dell' acquavite, some br<strong>and</strong>y<br />
EXERCISE X.<br />
I have bought two Italian (177) books, one (145) for Henry, <strong>and</strong> one<br />
for William. You (106 b) were dining (179) (a), whilst I was<br />
studying. Mary will embroider (b) a waistcoat for my fa<strong>the</strong>r. The<br />
discovery of (<strong>the</strong>) America caused (c) (Past Def.) a revolution in<br />
<strong>the</strong> commercial world. When I entered (d) 3 <strong>the</strong> room he was<br />
working (e). Did you speak (Past Def.) at <strong>the</strong> meeting last night ?<br />
No, I did not (125) speak (Past Def.). I shall explain (f) (170) this<br />
rule this evening. I shall have built (g) my house before October<br />
(74). Measure (h) (122) <strong>the</strong> length <strong>and</strong> (115) breadth of this room ,<br />
before 4 buying <strong>the</strong> pianoforte . We shall preserve (i) <strong>the</strong>se<br />
cherries with (in <strong>the</strong>) br<strong>and</strong>y. If (112) I <strong>had</strong> money, I would buy<br />
this picture .<br />
(a) Pranzare . (b) Ricamare . (c) Cagionare . (d) Entrare. (e) Lavorare .<br />
(f) Spiegare . (g) Fabbricare. '(h) Misurare . (i) Conservare .<br />
1 Notice that in <strong>the</strong> terminations " eo," "ea," "ei," <strong>and</strong> " ee " <strong>the</strong> e<br />
has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of a in <strong>the</strong> word gate .<br />
182. 2 "Sera" means evening. " ieri sera" means yesterday<br />
evening. Last night, meaning <strong>the</strong> night time , is translated by<br />
"Questa notte," or "La notte passata."<br />
183. 3 " Entrare," to enter, is a neuter verb, <strong>and</strong> is always followed<br />
by " in." Ex.<br />
45
Entrai nel teatro alle sei.<br />
I entered <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>atre at six o'clock.<br />
184.4 All prepositions (except " dopo," after,) in Italian are followed<br />
by <strong>the</strong> Infinitive Present , or Past. Ex.<br />
Prima di <strong>and</strong>are a Parigi .<br />
Before going to Paris .<br />
Prima di aver parlato.<br />
Before having spoken.<br />
185. The preposition "dopo," after, is always followed by <strong>the</strong> Past of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Infinitive . Ex.<br />
Partirò dopo aver parlato.<br />
I shall start after having spoken.<br />
34 ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.<br />
LESSON VII.<br />
ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.<br />
PERSONAL PRONOUNS USED AS SUBJECTS 1 OF VERBS.<br />
186. The personal pronouns are translated into Italian as follows :<br />
Io, I Noi, We<br />
Tu, Thou Voi, You<br />
Egli, Ei, or Esso. He, it 2 . m. Essi or Eglino, |<br />
Ella or Essa, She, it, you (120). f. Esse or Elleno, |They you (121)'<br />
187. The pronouns "egli," " ella," " eglino," <strong>and</strong> " elleno," are used<br />
only in speaking of persons, whilst "esso," " essa," " essi," <strong>and</strong> "<br />
esse ," are often employed with reference to persons, animals, <strong>and</strong><br />
things, <strong>and</strong> are used both as <strong>the</strong> subjects <strong>and</strong> objects of verbs. "<br />
Eglino " <strong>and</strong> " elleno " are becoming obsolete ; " essi " <strong>and</strong> " esse "<br />
being used instead of <strong>the</strong>m . Ex.<br />
Egli parla francese .<br />
He speaks French .<br />
Ei non sapeva che fare del pane che gli gettavo . (Pellico .)<br />
He did not know what to do with <strong>the</strong> bread I threw him.<br />
Essi <strong>and</strong>arono a Parigi .<br />
They went to Paris .<br />
188. As <strong>the</strong> termination of <strong>the</strong> verb, in Italian , is sufficient to<br />
indicate <strong>the</strong> person <strong>and</strong> number of <strong>the</strong> subject in <strong>the</strong> sentence ,<br />
<strong>the</strong> personal pronouns, " Io," " Tu," " Egli," &c., are not expressed ,<br />
46
except (a) when two or more nouns or pronouns are used as<br />
subjects in <strong>the</strong> same sentence ; (b) in <strong>the</strong> present <strong>and</strong> imperfect<br />
tenses of <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood, to avoid ambiguity ; (c] when a<br />
particular stress is laid on <strong>the</strong> pronoun. Ex.<br />
Mentre io scrivo questa lettera , voi preparerete i miei<br />
bauli.<br />
Whilst I write this letter , you will prepare my trunks .<br />
Se i o parlassi , sarei ruinato .<br />
If I spoke, I should be ruined .<br />
io parlo qu<strong>and</strong>o bisogna.<br />
I do speak when it is needful .<br />
189. The personal pronouns " io," " tu," " egli," &c., are sometimes<br />
accompanied by " stesso," " stessa," or " medesimo," " medesima,"<br />
&c., self, to express emphasis . Ex.<br />
L' ho scritto io stesso (or medesimo ),<br />
I wrote it myself .<br />
190. 1 A noun, or pronoun is called <strong>the</strong> subject of a verb when it<br />
represents <strong>the</strong> person or thing <strong>which</strong> does, or receives <strong>the</strong> action<br />
expressed by <strong>the</strong> verb. Ex.<br />
Pietro agisce bene ; egli è stimato .<br />
Peter acts well ; he is esteemed .<br />
In <strong>which</strong> sentence " Pietro " is <strong>the</strong> subject of " agisce," <strong>and</strong> " egli "<br />
of " è stimato ."<br />
191. 2 There is no neuter gender in Italian ; <strong>the</strong>refore <strong>the</strong><br />
pronoun it must be translated into Italian by a masculine or<br />
feminine pronoun.<br />
ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 35<br />
PERSONAL PRONOUNS USED AS OBJECTS OF VERBS.<br />
THE CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.<br />
192. When <strong>the</strong>re is only one pronoun used as a direct, 1 or as an<br />
indirect 2 object, in <strong>the</strong> same sentence , <strong>the</strong> English pronouns<br />
me, <strong>the</strong>e , him, etc., <strong>and</strong> to me, to <strong>the</strong>e , to him, etc., are<br />
translated as follows :<br />
DIRECT OBJECTS. INDIRECT OBJECTS.<br />
Mi, me. |Mi, to me.<br />
Ti, <strong>the</strong>e . |Ti, to <strong>the</strong>e .<br />
Lo / esso, him or it (191). |Gli, to him.<br />
47
La / essa , her, you (120) or it. |Le, to her, you or it.<br />
Si, | (himself , herself , |Si,. |(to himself , to herself ,<br />
|(itself or <strong>the</strong>mselves . |(to itself or to <strong>the</strong>mselves .<br />
Ci or ne, 3 us. |Ci or ne, 3 to us.<br />
Vi,you. |Vi, to you.<br />
Li / essi , <strong>the</strong>m , mas. |(A) Loro / gli, 4 to <strong>the</strong>m , mas.<br />
Le / esse , <strong>the</strong>m , Fem. |(A) Loro / le, to <strong>the</strong>m , Fem.<br />
THE CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS PLACED BEFORE<br />
THE VERB.<br />
193. The pronouns given above ARE, AS A RULE, PLACED BEFORE<br />
THE VERB. Ex.<br />
Egli mi parlo con rispetto .<br />
He spoke to me with respect .<br />
Non ci hanno mai invitati .<br />
They never invited us.<br />
Gli parlerò domani. 5<br />
I shall speak to him to-morrow.<br />
194. 1 A noun, or pronoun is called <strong>the</strong> direct object of a verb<br />
when it represents <strong>the</strong> person, or thing <strong>which</strong> receives <strong>the</strong><br />
action of <strong>the</strong> verb directly, that is, without passing through a<br />
preposition . Ex.<br />
Egli chiamò Carlo e me.<br />
He called Charles <strong>and</strong> me.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> sentence above " Carlo " <strong>and</strong> " me " are <strong>the</strong> direct objects of<br />
"chiamo ."<br />
2 A noun, or pronoun is called <strong>the</strong> indirect object of a verb when it<br />
represents <strong>the</strong> person, or thing <strong>which</strong> receives <strong>the</strong> action of <strong>the</strong><br />
verb indirectly , that is, through a preposition . Ex.<br />
" Egli mi parlò,"<br />
he spoke to me.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> sentence above " mi" (a me) is <strong>the</strong> indirect complement of<br />
" parlò."<br />
195 3 " Ne " is sometimes used instead of " ci," tis, <strong>and</strong> to us. Ex.<br />
L' amicizia tua ne piace . (Tasso.)<br />
Your friendship pleases (to) us.<br />
196.4 Notice that instead of "a loro," or " loro," in modern Italian,<br />
"gli" (mas.), <strong>and</strong> " le " (fem.), are often used. Ex.<br />
48
Non gli (or le) presterei del denaro.<br />
I would not lend <strong>the</strong>m money .<br />
197. 5 In <strong>many</strong> cases in <strong>which</strong>, according to rule 193, <strong>the</strong><br />
conjunctive personal pronoun ought to precede <strong>the</strong> verb, it is<br />
placed after it, <strong>and</strong> joined to it, to give force to <strong>the</strong> language . If <strong>the</strong><br />
verb ends with an accented vowel, as " m<strong>and</strong>ò," he or she sent,<br />
<strong>the</strong> consonant of <strong>the</strong> pronoun, except <strong>the</strong> g of "gli," is doubled, <strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> accent suppressed. Ex.<br />
Essa guardavami sovente .<br />
She often looked at me.<br />
Egli m<strong>and</strong>ommi a Milano .<br />
He sent me to Milan .<br />
N.B. It is much better for <strong>the</strong> beginner to follow rule 193.<br />
36 ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.<br />
THE CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS PLACED AFTER<br />
THE VERB.<br />
198. The conjunctive pronouns " mi," " ti," " gli," &c., ARE PLACED<br />
AFTER THE VERB, AND JOINED TO IT (that is why <strong>the</strong>y are called<br />
Conjunctive Pronouns), when <strong>the</strong>y are used with verbs in <strong>the</strong><br />
Infinitive , used Affirmatively 1 ; in <strong>which</strong> case <strong>the</strong> final " e " of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Infinitive is dropped. Ex.<br />
Mio padre desidera di m<strong>and</strong>armi a Venezia .<br />
My fa<strong>the</strong>r desires to send me to Venice .<br />
199. The conjunctive pronouns " mi," " ti," " gli," &c., are placed<br />
after <strong>the</strong> Gerund, used Affirmatively , 1 <strong>and</strong> joined to it. Ex.<br />
Essa lo calmo parl<strong>and</strong>ogli con molta bontà.<br />
She calmed him by speaking to him very kindly.<br />
200. The conjunctive pronouns " mi," " ti," " gli," &c., are placed<br />
after <strong>the</strong> Past Gerund, <strong>and</strong> joined to it ; in <strong>which</strong> case <strong>the</strong><br />
auxiliary, " avendo " or " essendo," is omitted, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> Past<br />
Participle alone is expressed , <strong>and</strong> is variable . 2 Ex.<br />
Pagatimi (used instead of avendomi pagato) i libri, <strong>and</strong>ò via.<br />
Having paid me for <strong>the</strong> book, he went away,<br />
Adagiatasi (essend osi 3 adagiata ) sulla sedia , essa narrò le<br />
sue avventure .<br />
Having seated herself on <strong>the</strong> chair , she narrated her<br />
adventures .<br />
49
201. The conjunctive pronouns "mi," " ti," "gli," &c., are placed<br />
after <strong>the</strong> second person singular, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> first <strong>and</strong> second<br />
persons plural of <strong>the</strong> Imperative, used affirmatively 4 , <strong>and</strong> are<br />
joined to <strong>the</strong>m . Ex.<br />
Parlami ora caro fratello .<br />
Speak to me now, dear bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
M<strong>and</strong>ateci 5 un ma<strong>zz</strong>o di fiori .<br />
Send us a bunch of flowers.<br />
202. 1 When <strong>the</strong> Infinitive (see rule 126) <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> Gerund are<br />
preceded by a negative, <strong>the</strong> pronouns are sometimes put before<br />
<strong>the</strong> verb. Ex.<br />
Non ti scordar di me.<br />
Do not forget me.<br />
Non gli piacendo la stanza.<br />
As he did not like <strong>the</strong> room.<br />
203. 2 Notice that this rule of leaving out " avendo " or " essendo "<br />
in <strong>the</strong> Past Gerund holds good whe<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong>re is a pronoun or not.<br />
Ex.<br />
Comprato (avendo comprato) il cavallo, <strong>and</strong>o via.<br />
Having bought <strong>the</strong> horse , he went away.<br />
204. 3 Notice that in <strong>the</strong> compound tenses of reflective verbs (see<br />
page 59). " essere " is used.<br />
205. 4 When <strong>the</strong> Imperative is used negatively, <strong>the</strong> Conjunctive<br />
Pronouns precede <strong>the</strong> verbs, according to rule 193. Ex.<br />
Non mi parlare ora, caro fratello .<br />
Do not speak to me now, dear bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
206. 5 Here <strong>the</strong> student is reminded that, instead of "voi," you,<br />
<strong>the</strong> Italians very often use " Ella ," your Lordship or Ladyship (see<br />
rule 120) ; in <strong>which</strong> case <strong>the</strong> pronouns precede <strong>the</strong> verbs,<br />
according to rule 193. Ex.<br />
Ci m<strong>and</strong>i un ma<strong>zz</strong>o di fiori .<br />
Send us a bunch of flowers.<br />
37 ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
Londra, London. Parigi, Paris. Roma, Rome.<br />
Firenze, Florence. Glasgovia, Glasgow. Dublino, Dublin.<br />
50
Napoli, Naples. Venezia, Venice. Genova, Genoa.<br />
Federico, Frederick. Giorgio, George. Odoardo, Edward.<br />
Giacomo, James. Filippo, Philip. Giuseppe, Joseph.<br />
Luigia, Louisa. Francesca, Frances. Il caffe, coffee.<br />
Il tè, tea. Il latte, milk. La crema, cream.<br />
Il butirro, butter. L'olio, oil. Lo zucchero, sugar.<br />
L' aceto, vinegar.<br />
La cioccolata, chocolate. Margherita, Margaret.<br />
EXERCISE XI<br />
Where did you (120, 122) buy ( have you bought) this coffee ? I<br />
bought it (192, 193) in 1 London. Does (128) Edward speak Italian<br />
? Yes, he does. 2 Where did you study (have you studied) <strong>the</strong><br />
French language ? I studied (have studied) it in France. Has<br />
Louisa sent to- day's newspaper to my fa<strong>the</strong>r ? Yes ; she sent (has<br />
sent) it this morning. Charles always speaks to me (193) when he<br />
meets (a) me. My fa<strong>the</strong>r taught (b) us yesterday, <strong>and</strong> will teach us<br />
to-day. My mo<strong>the</strong>r never (non. . . mai, 181) sends us (193) here . I<br />
shall not speak to him (193) to-day. Have you bought any sugar ?<br />
Yes, I have (138, 208). George has made me (193) a present of (c)<br />
some Italian books. If (112) <strong>the</strong>y <strong>had</strong> any (133) money, <strong>the</strong>y would<br />
send (to) him some tea <strong>and</strong> (136), bread.<br />
(a) Incontrare . (b) Insegnare . (c) Regalare (to make a present of).<br />
207. 1 The prepositions in <strong>and</strong> to are translated into Italian by<br />
"a," before <strong>the</strong> name of a town, <strong>and</strong> by " in " before <strong>the</strong> name of a<br />
continent , an empire , a kingdom , a duchy, or a province . Ex.<br />
Andò a Parigi , in Francia .<br />
He went to Paris , in France .<br />
208. 2 In answering a question, <strong>the</strong> verb contained in <strong>the</strong><br />
question, <strong>and</strong> not merely <strong>the</strong> translation of " I do," "he does," " it<br />
does," " I have," " he did," " I will," &c., must be expressed in <strong>the</strong><br />
answer, in Italian, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> verb must be in <strong>the</strong> same tense as in<br />
<strong>the</strong> question ; <strong>and</strong> if <strong>the</strong>re is a noun in <strong>the</strong> question, that noun<br />
also must be represented in <strong>the</strong> answer by a pronoun, agreeing<br />
in gender <strong>and</strong> number with <strong>the</strong> noun it represents . Ex.<br />
Giovanni , parla il tedesco ? Si, lo parla.<br />
Does John speak German ? Yes, he does.<br />
51
209. The above rule holds good also when "I do," " I did," " I have,"<br />
&c., have reference to a previous verb in <strong>the</strong> sentence . Ex.<br />
Avevo promesso di portare il mio oriuolo, e l' ho portato.<br />
I <strong>had</strong> promised to bring my watch, <strong>and</strong> I have brought it.<br />
38 ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.<br />
THE DISJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.<br />
210. When in <strong>the</strong> same sentence <strong>the</strong>re are more than one direct<br />
(195) or more than one indirect (196) objects, relating to different<br />
persons or things, or when <strong>the</strong>y desire to lay a particular stress<br />
on <strong>the</strong> object in <strong>the</strong> sentence , <strong>the</strong> Italians place <strong>the</strong> following<br />
personal pronouns after <strong>the</strong> verb, but not joined to it that is why<br />
<strong>the</strong>y are called Disjunctive Personal Pronouns.<br />
DIRECT OBJECTS (195). INDIRECT OBJECTS (196).<br />
Me, me. A me, to me.<br />
Te, <strong>the</strong>e . A te, to <strong>the</strong>e .<br />
Lui / esso, him or it (191)- A lui or a esso, to him or it.<br />
Lei / essa , her, you or it. A lei / a essa , to her, you or it.<br />
Sè |himself , herself , . A se., |to himself , herself .<br />
|itself or <strong>the</strong>mselves . |To itself or <strong>the</strong>mselves .<br />
Noi, us. A noi, to us.<br />
Voi, you. A voi, to you.<br />
Loro / essi , <strong>the</strong>m , mas. (A) loro / a essi , to <strong>the</strong>m , mas.<br />
Loro / esse , <strong>the</strong>m , Fem. (A) loro / a esse , to <strong>the</strong>m , Fem.<br />
EXAMPLES .<br />
Il generale parlò a me, ma non parlò a mio nipote.<br />
The general spoke to me, but he did not speak to my<br />
nephew .<br />
Parlo a Lei, Signore ; perché non mi risponde ?<br />
I speak to you, Sir ; why do you not answer me ?<br />
211. Notice that in <strong>the</strong> case explained in rule 210, "gli" <strong>and</strong> " le "<br />
(see rule 196) could not be used instead of " a loro." Ex.<br />
M<strong>and</strong>erò un libro a lui, e a loro m<strong>and</strong>erò del denaro.<br />
I shall send him a book, <strong>and</strong> some money to <strong>the</strong>m .<br />
212. Notice that not only " a " to, but all <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r prepositions "<br />
di," of, " do," from , " con," with, " per," for, through, &c., are used to<br />
52
form <strong>the</strong> indirect objects of verbs, but, as <strong>the</strong>y always follow <strong>the</strong><br />
verb, <strong>the</strong>y offer no difficulty to <strong>the</strong> student. Ex.<br />
Carlo parlerà per me. 1<br />
Charles will speak for me.<br />
Vuol ella venir con me ? 2<br />
Will you come with me ?<br />
Parti con loro. 3<br />
He went away with <strong>the</strong>m .<br />
213. 1 Instead of "per me," "per te," "per lui," <strong>and</strong> "per lei,"&c., <strong>the</strong><br />
conjunctive forms " mi," "ti," "gli," <strong>and</strong> " le," &c., are used with<br />
such verbs as " fare ," to do, to make, " fabbricare ," to build, "<br />
dipingere ," to faint, &c., when <strong>the</strong> sentence contains also a direct<br />
object. Ex.<br />
Gli (per lui) fabbricarono una casa.<br />
They built him (for him) a house .<br />
214. 2 "Meco," " teco," " seco," are sometimes used instead of "con<br />
me," " con te," "con se." Ex. Vuol ella venir meco ? Will you come<br />
with me?<br />
215. 3 Formerly <strong>the</strong> pronoun " esso," ( invariable) was sometimes<br />
used pleonastically before " lui," " lei," " loro." Ex.<br />
Andai con essoloro (D'Azeglio ).<br />
I went along with <strong>the</strong>m .<br />
39 ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
Il marmo , marble . La pietra, stone. Il mattone, brick.<br />
Il legno, wood. Il cristallo, crystal. Il vetro, glass.<br />
Paolo, Paul. Andrea, Andrew. Stefano, Stephen.<br />
Carlotta,<br />
Charlotte.<br />
Antonio, Anthony. Maddalena, Madeline.<br />
La statua, <strong>the</strong> statue. il fa<strong>zz</strong>oletto, <strong>the</strong><br />
53<br />
h<strong>and</strong>kerchief,<br />
La testa, <strong>the</strong> head. Uno (141) specchio a looking-glass,<br />
Gli occhi, <strong>the</strong> eyes. Un leggio, a reading-desk,<br />
I capelli, <strong>the</strong> hair. Carta sugante, blotting-paper,<br />
il braccio, <strong>the</strong> arm. Ceralacca, sealing-wax.<br />
La mano, <strong>the</strong> h<strong>and</strong>. Un acquarello, a water-colour,<br />
il dito, <strong>the</strong> finger. Mio suocero, my fa<strong>the</strong>r-in-law,<br />
il piede, 1 <strong>the</strong> foot. Mia cognata, my sister-in-law,
L'anello, <strong>the</strong> ring. Vostro genero, your son-in-law.<br />
EXERCISE XII.<br />
I condemned (a) (Past Def.) him, <strong>and</strong> I pardoned (b) my (129)<br />
bro<strong>the</strong>r. Paul always (181) speaks of himself (212). Charlotte (113)<br />
spoke to me (210), but she did not speak to my (130) sisters. I<br />
speak to you (210) ; why do (128) you not answer ? You never pay<br />
attention (c) to me. He always speaks of me, but I never speak of<br />
him. They sent (Past Def.) a reading-desk to me (210), <strong>and</strong> a<br />
marble statue to my (146) master. Stephen will speak for me.<br />
They built him (213) a marble palace. Madeline has sent a gold<br />
ring to William, <strong>and</strong> a small water-colour to my sister-in-law. She<br />
sent (180) also a beautiful looking-glass to my sister. I shall place<br />
(d) <strong>the</strong> picture before her. 3<br />
(a) Condannare . (b) Perdonare a. (c) Badare a. 2 (d) Posare<br />
1 Notice that <strong>the</strong> e in <strong>the</strong> diphthong ie (except in <strong>the</strong> suffixes<br />
"etto," &c.), has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of a in <strong>the</strong> word gate .<br />
216. 2 " Badare " is always followed by a disjunctive personal<br />
pronoun. Ex.<br />
Badate a me.<br />
Pay attention to me.<br />
You could not say "Badatemi ."<br />
217. 3 When <strong>the</strong> prepositions "davanti ," " dinanzi," " innanzi,"<br />
before, " didietro, " " dietro," behind, " incontro," against, " sopra,"<br />
"disopra," on, upon, above , " sotto," " disotto," <strong>under</strong>, below, are<br />
used with a conjunctive personal pronoun, <strong>the</strong>y are placed at <strong>the</strong><br />
end of <strong>the</strong> phrase. Ex.<br />
Gli <strong>and</strong>ò incontro .<br />
He went against him.<br />
40 ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.<br />
LESSON VIII.<br />
ON DOUBLE CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS.<br />
218. When two conjunctive pronouns are governed by <strong>the</strong> same<br />
verb, <strong>and</strong> one is a " direct " <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r an " indirect object," <strong>the</strong><br />
" indirect " precedes <strong>the</strong> " direct object," <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> i of " mi," " ti," "<br />
ci," " vi," is changed into e. When <strong>the</strong>se pronouns come before <strong>the</strong><br />
verb, <strong>the</strong>y are written separately, but when <strong>the</strong>y are placed after<br />
<strong>the</strong> verb, <strong>the</strong>y are written toge<strong>the</strong>r , <strong>and</strong> joined to it. Ex.<br />
54
Me lo presto Guglielmo .<br />
William lent it to me.<br />
Me li ha comprati mio zio.<br />
My uncle bought <strong>the</strong>m for me.<br />
Egli vuol vendercelo oggi.<br />
He will sell it to us to-day.<br />
Me lo, or mel 1 disse ieri sera .<br />
He told it to me last night .<br />
(Dammelo , |<br />
See rule 201. Me lo dia, | Give it to me.<br />
(Datemelo , |<br />
219. When <strong>the</strong> pronoun " gli," to him, is followed by <strong>the</strong> pronouns "<br />
lo," " la," " li," " le," <strong>and</strong> " ne," instead of changing <strong>the</strong> final i into<br />
e, like <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r conjunctive pronouns (see rule 218), it takes an<br />
e after <strong>the</strong> final i, <strong>and</strong> forms one word with <strong>the</strong> relative pronoun.<br />
Ex.<br />
Glielo presterò , ma non posso darglielo . 2<br />
I will lend it to him, but I <strong>cannot</strong> give it to him.<br />
Mi ha promesso di m<strong>and</strong>arglieli questa sera . 3<br />
He promised that he would send <strong>the</strong>m to him this evening .<br />
|M<strong>and</strong>aglielo , 2 |<br />
See rule 201. - | Glielo m<strong>and</strong>i 2 | -Send it to him.<br />
|M<strong>and</strong>ateglielo , 2 |<br />
220. Notice that, for <strong>the</strong> sake of euphony, " glie " is also used for<br />
<strong>the</strong> feminine instead of " le," when followed by " lo," " la," "li," " le,"<br />
<strong>and</strong> " ne." Ex.<br />
Maria desiderava i fiori , ed io glieli ho m<strong>and</strong>ati . 2<br />
Mary wished for <strong>the</strong> flowers, <strong>and</strong> I sent <strong>the</strong>m to her.<br />
221. In Italian an answer must contain <strong>the</strong> noun expressed in<br />
<strong>the</strong> question, or a pronoun in its stead, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> verb must be<br />
repeated in <strong>the</strong> answer . Ex.<br />
Ha ella presola mia ombrella ?<br />
Have you taken my umbrella ?<br />
No, non l'ho presa.<br />
No, I have not.<br />
55
222. 1 "Mel," " tel," "cel," " vel," are often used instead of " me lo," "<br />
te lo," "celo," "velo."<br />
223. 2 It is important to notice that " gli" in this sentence might<br />
mean ei<strong>the</strong>r to him, or to her (<strong>and</strong> consequently to you, see rule<br />
120), or to <strong>the</strong>m (see rule 211) ; but <strong>the</strong> sense of <strong>the</strong> sentence , in<br />
<strong>the</strong> con<strong>text</strong>, always helps to clear up <strong>the</strong> ambiguity .<br />
ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 41<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
Dio, Iddio, God. Il sole, <strong>the</strong> sun.<br />
Il cielo , Heaven : <strong>the</strong> sky. La luna, <strong>the</strong> moon.<br />
La terra , <strong>the</strong> earth . Le stelle , <strong>the</strong> stars.<br />
Mio caro amico , my dear friend ,<br />
Il giorno di nascita , <strong>the</strong> birthday,<br />
Questo pericolo this danger.<br />
Un regalo , a present ,<br />
Un album, an album,<br />
il popolo, <strong>the</strong> people,<br />
Ora, adesso, now. Volontieri , willingly .<br />
EXERCISE XIII.<br />
Speak to me (201) now, because I shall not have time to- morrow.<br />
He was speaking (179) to his master (146) when you called (a)<br />
(Past Def.) him. When will you send her (192, 193) <strong>the</strong> pictures ? I<br />
will send <strong>the</strong>m to her (219, 220) this evening. Do not forget(b)<br />
(125, 126). Will 1 you help (c) me, (192) my dear friend ? Yes,<br />
willingly, I will not ab<strong>and</strong>on (d) you in this danger. Will (224) you<br />
lend (e) me your penknife ? Yes, I will (208). Shall you send him a<br />
present for his birthday ? Yes, I shall send him an album. I have<br />
brought (f) Henry's books to 2 show (g) <strong>the</strong>m to you (122, 218).<br />
They ordered (h) him to (226) speak to <strong>the</strong> people.<br />
(a) Chiamare . (b) Dimenticare . (c) Aiutare . (d) Abb<strong>and</strong>onare.<br />
(e) Prestare . (f) Portare . (g) Mostrare . (h) Com<strong>and</strong>are .<br />
224. 1 When will, would, shall <strong>and</strong> should are distinct verbs of<br />
<strong>the</strong>mselves (not mere auxiliaries) <strong>the</strong>y are translated into Italian<br />
by " Volere " or " Dovere ." Ex.<br />
Vuol' ella darmi una rosa ?<br />
Will you give me a rose ?<br />
N.B. The Present Indicative of " volere ," to be willing, should be<br />
studied at once ; it is given on page 91 .<br />
56
225. 2 When <strong>the</strong> preposition to means in order to, it is translated<br />
into Italian by " per " or " onde." Ex.<br />
Sono venuto per (/ onde) parlarle .<br />
I have come to speak to you.<br />
226. The verbal prefix to is translated into Italian by " di," when it<br />
is preceded by an adjective, or a past participle (except " pronto,"<br />
ready, " disposto," disposed, " prono," inclined, " preparato,"<br />
prepared], <strong>and</strong> a verb expressing an idea of rest or state . Ex.<br />
Sono decisi di <strong>and</strong>are a Venezia .<br />
They have decided to go to Venice .<br />
227. The verbal prefix to is translated into Italian by " a," when it<br />
is preceded by a verb expressing motion, or " pronto," " disposto," "<br />
prono," <strong>and</strong> " preparato." Ex.<br />
Venga a trovarmi fra due mesi .<br />
Come to see me in two months' time .<br />
42 ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.<br />
FURTHER REMARKS ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.<br />
228. " E' " is sometimes used instead of " egli," " esso," <strong>and</strong> " essi."<br />
Ex.<br />
Picchia anche lì e aspetta, e poteva aspettare .<br />
He also knocks <strong>the</strong>re <strong>and</strong> waits , (Manz.) <strong>and</strong> he might wait.<br />
Cortesemente dom<strong>and</strong>ò chi,è' fossero. (Boccaccio.)<br />
Courteously he asked who <strong>the</strong>y were .<br />
229. " Desso," " dessa," " dessi ," " desse ," are elegantly used<br />
instead of "esso," " essa," &c., with <strong>the</strong> verbs "essere," <strong>and</strong><br />
"parere ." Ex.<br />
Quegli è desso ; lo conosco.<br />
It is he ; I know him.<br />
230. " Egli ," or simply " gli," <strong>and</strong> " e' " are sometimes used as<br />
"ripieni," that is pleonastically ; <strong>the</strong>y correspond to <strong>the</strong> English<br />
neuter pronoun it. Ex.<br />
E s' egli è ver che tua potenza sia nel cielo . (Petrarca .)<br />
And if it be true that thy power is in heaven .<br />
E' risica d' essere una giornata peggio di ieri . (Manz.)<br />
It risks to be a day worse than yesterday .<br />
57
231. Instead of <strong>the</strong> subjective pronouns " io," " tu," " egli," " ella," "<br />
essi," <strong>and</strong> " esse ," <strong>the</strong> objective pronouns " me," " te," " lui," "lei,"<br />
<strong>and</strong> " loro" are used after <strong>the</strong> words "ma," but, " anche," also, "<br />
come ," " siccome," as, " quanto," as much as, " nemmeno," not<br />
even, &c., for <strong>the</strong> sake of euphony, <strong>and</strong> in o<strong>the</strong>r cases solely for<br />
<strong>the</strong> purpose of giving more prominence to <strong>the</strong> pronoun. Ex.<br />
Ma Lei non mi scrive mai.<br />
But you never write to me.<br />
Si levo anche lui il cappello.<br />
He also took off his hat.<br />
Lei è ricca , ma i o son povero.<br />
You are rich , but I am poor.<br />
Le parole che dicon loro vanno via e spariscono. (Manz.)<br />
The words <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong>y say fly away <strong>and</strong> disappear.<br />
232. Sometimes, in <strong>the</strong> colloquial style, " la," <strong>and</strong> " le," are used<br />
instead of " ella " <strong>and</strong> " esse ." Ex.<br />
La c' è ; l' ho trovata ! (Manz.)<br />
She is <strong>the</strong>re ; I found her !<br />
Le son tutte qui. (Manz.)<br />
They are all here .<br />
233. When several verbs govern <strong>the</strong> same pronouns, <strong>the</strong> latter<br />
are generally repeated with each verb. Ex.<br />
Gli 1 amiamo e gli 1 stimiamo .<br />
We love <strong>and</strong> esteem <strong>the</strong>m .<br />
234. " Non lo " is often contracted into " nol." Ex.<br />
Egli nol disse a nessuno .<br />
He did not tell it to anybody.<br />
235. " Il" in poetry, is sometimes used instead of "lo." Ex.<br />
Oimè ! bene il conosco. (Tas.)<br />
Alas ! I know him well.<br />
236. Notice that before a verb beginning with a vowel, or an .r<br />
followed by ano<strong>the</strong>r consonant , " gli " is used instead of " li."<br />
ON THE WORDS " CI," "VI," AND " NE." 43<br />
LESSON IX.<br />
ON THE WORDS " CI," " VI," AND " NE."<br />
58
237. Besides being used as conjunctive personal pronouns (see<br />
rules 192, 197), " ci," " vi," <strong>and</strong> " ne," are used as relative<br />
pronouns, <strong>and</strong> as adverbs.<br />
238. " Ci " <strong>and</strong> " vi," used as relative pronouns, signify of it, of<br />
<strong>the</strong>m ; about it, about <strong>the</strong>m; to it, to <strong>the</strong>m; for it, for <strong>the</strong>m; in it,<br />
in <strong>the</strong>m . Ex.<br />
Non indovinerei , se ci pensassi un anno.<br />
I could not guess it, if I thought a year about it.<br />
Questo quadro mi va a genio ; ci ho fatto fare una bella<br />
cornice .<br />
I like this picture very much ; I have <strong>had</strong> a fine frame<br />
made for it.<br />
Ci ho dato una mano di vernice .<br />
I have given it a coat of varnish .<br />
239. When " ci " <strong>and</strong> " vi " are used as adverbs, <strong>the</strong>y always refer<br />
to an antecedent ; "ci" means here , <strong>and</strong> " vi " means <strong>the</strong>re . 1 Ex.<br />
Francesco viene qui tutte le mattine , e ci sta fino alle otto<br />
della sera .<br />
Francis comes here every morning , <strong>and</strong> stays till eight<br />
o'clock in <strong>the</strong> evening .<br />
Non sono mai stato in Italia , ma faccio i conti d'<strong>and</strong>arvi<br />
questa primavera .<br />
I have never been to Italy, but I intend to go <strong>the</strong>re this<br />
Spring.<br />
240. " Ne," used as a relative pronoun, means some , any, of it, of<br />
<strong>the</strong>m; concerning (or about) him, her, it; for it, for <strong>the</strong>m, from it,<br />
from <strong>the</strong>m. As stated already (rule 138) in an answer, " ne " must<br />
always be expressed in Italian (although some , any, of it, of <strong>the</strong>m,<br />
&c., are seldom expressed in English), <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> verb, in <strong>the</strong><br />
answer , must also be expressed in full. Ex.<br />
Ha ella per caso qualche libro italiano da prestarmi ?<br />
Have you perchance any Italian books to lend me ?<br />
Si, ne ho due o tre, e glieli presterò volontieri .<br />
Yes, I have two or three , <strong>which</strong> I shall be very glad to lend<br />
you.<br />
Sono certo che le piace la musica , perché ne parla sempre .<br />
59
I am certain that you are fond of music , for you are always<br />
speaking about it.<br />
Vado ai bagni di mare ogni anno, e ne derive sempre molto<br />
bene .<br />
I go to <strong>the</strong> sea- side to ba<strong>the</strong> every year , <strong>and</strong> I always de-<br />
rive great benefit from it.<br />
241. 1 For <strong>the</strong> sake of euphony " ci " is sometimes used instead of<br />
" vi." Ex.<br />
Andateci , e vi troverete Carlo.<br />
Go <strong>the</strong>re , <strong>and</strong> you will find Charles .<br />
44 ON THE WORDS " CI," " VI," AND " NE."<br />
242. When " ne " is used as an adverb, it means <strong>the</strong>nce . Ex.<br />
Sono stato a Parigi ; ne vengo appunto.<br />
I have been to Paris ; I have just returned from <strong>the</strong>re .<br />
243. When "ci," " vi," <strong>and</strong> "ne,"'are used as relative pronouns, <strong>and</strong><br />
as adverbs, <strong>the</strong>y occupy <strong>the</strong> same position with regard to <strong>the</strong> verb<br />
as when <strong>the</strong>y are conjunctive personal pronouns (see rules 192-<br />
201) <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> i of " ci," " vi," is changed into e (218) when " lo," "<br />
la," " li," " le," <strong>and</strong> " ne," follow <strong>the</strong>m . Ex.<br />
Egli va sovente al teatro , e vi mena seco sua sorella .<br />
He often goes to <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>atre <strong>and</strong> takes his sister with him.<br />
Mia zia aveva dei biglietti , e me ne diede tre.<br />
My aunt <strong>had</strong> some tickets , <strong>and</strong> she gave me three .<br />
Non l' ho mai condotto a casa nostra ; ma ho promesso di<br />
condurcelo.<br />
I <strong>had</strong> never taken him to our house , but I have promised to<br />
do so.<br />
ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS USED REFLECTIVELY .<br />
244. We have seen (rule 189) that when myself, thyself, &c., are<br />
used merely to express emphasis, or to indicate discrimination,<br />
<strong>the</strong>y are translated by " stesso," " stessa," &c., or "medesimo,"<br />
"medesima," &c. ; but when <strong>the</strong>se pronouns are used as<br />
Reflective Pronouns, <strong>the</strong>y are expressed by "mi," "ti," "si;" " ci," "<br />
vi," "si," <strong>and</strong> are subject to all <strong>the</strong> rules given above , concerning<br />
<strong>the</strong> personal pronouns. Ex.<br />
Non mi vesto mai prima delle dieci .<br />
I never dress before ten o'clock.<br />
60
Preparati , / preparatevi , / si prepari subito.<br />
Get ready without losing a minute .<br />
Raccolse i panni di suo fratello , e se ne vesti .<br />
He took up his bro<strong>the</strong>r's clo<strong>the</strong>s , <strong>and</strong> dressed himself in<br />
<strong>the</strong>m .<br />
" Ecco," behold, USED WITH PERSONAL AND RELATIVE<br />
PRONOUNS.<br />
245. When a conjunctive pronoun, personal or relative, is used<br />
with <strong>the</strong> word " ecco," behold, 1 here is, <strong>the</strong>re is, this is, <strong>the</strong>se<br />
are, here are, <strong>the</strong>re are, it must be placed after it, <strong>and</strong> joined to it<br />
; as "ecc omi ," "ecc oti," " ecc oci," " eccoli ," " ecc ole," "ecc one ." 2 Ex.<br />
Eccomi . Eccoci pronti.<br />
Here I am. Here we are ready.<br />
Se ama le incisioni , ecc one qui delle bellissime .<br />
If you are fond of engravings , here are some beautiful ones.<br />
246. 1 Sometimes " ecco " is followed by two pronouns. Ex.<br />
Eccoteli umiliati .<br />
Here <strong>the</strong>y are humbled.<br />
247. 2 Sometimes " ecco " is rendered more graphic by adding to<br />
it <strong>the</strong> adverbs " qui," here , <strong>and</strong> " la," <strong>the</strong>re. Ex. " Eccolo la." There<br />
he is.<br />
45 ON THE WORDS " CI," " VI," AND " NE."<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
Un orologio (21) a clock.<br />
Alla campagna , into <strong>the</strong> country,<br />
Casa di campagna country house .<br />
Un porta-lapis a pencil -case .<br />
Questo paese , this country. il mio oriuolo, my watch.<br />
Una rosa, 1 a rose. il frutto, <strong>the</strong> fruit.<br />
Questo<br />
canestro<br />
this basket . Un ombrello, an umbrella .<br />
Un errore , a fault. Un ombrellino , a parasol.<br />
Uno sbaglio, a mistake . Alla posta, to <strong>the</strong> post.<br />
Rosso, red. Verde, green.<br />
Bianco, white , Turchino , blue<br />
Giallo, yellow. Nero, black,<br />
61
EXERCISE XIV.<br />
I have brought my exercise to (225) show it to you (122, 218) ; you<br />
will find few (139) faults in it (238). Henry has brought (167) us<br />
(192, 193) a basket of roses. I should not have spoken to her, if I<br />
<strong>had</strong> thought (a) of 2 it (238). Before speaking to us, (210) speak to<br />
my fa<strong>the</strong>r. He was speaking to us, (179, 192, 193) when <strong>the</strong>y<br />
called (Past Def.) him into <strong>the</strong> garden. Have you an English watch<br />
? Yes, I have (144). If I <strong>had</strong> thought of it, I should never have lent<br />
him my pencil-case . When will you take (b) <strong>the</strong>se letters (89) to<br />
<strong>the</strong> post ? I will take <strong>the</strong>m (<strong>the</strong>re) (239, 243) at once, if you will<br />
(224) lend me your umbrella. Have you spoken to William ? No, I<br />
have not, (208) but I will speak to him when 4 I have time . Why<br />
did (128) you burn (c) (Past Indef.) that (152) letter? I burnt it (167)<br />
by 4 mistake. Have you paid (d) for 5 your parasol ? No, but I will<br />
pay for it when Henry returns (e).<br />
(a) Pensare . (b) Portare . (c) Abbruciare . (d) Pagare . (e) Ritornare .<br />
1 An s dotted thus s, has <strong>the</strong> soft sound of <strong>the</strong> s in <strong>the</strong> word rose.<br />
248. 2 To think of is translated by " pensare a." " Pensare di,"<br />
means to have an opinion about. Ex.<br />
Che pensa di questo poema?<br />
What do you think of this poem ?<br />
249. 3 A verb preceded by <strong>the</strong> adverbs when, as soon as, &c.,<br />
indicates a future time ; <strong>the</strong>refore <strong>the</strong> future , <strong>and</strong> not <strong>the</strong><br />
present tense , must be used in Italian . Ex.<br />
Scriverò qu<strong>and</strong>o avrò il tempo.<br />
I shall write when I have time .<br />
250.4 When a common noun begins with an s, followed by ano<strong>the</strong>r<br />
consonant, <strong>and</strong> is preceded by " per," by, through, "in," in, into, "<br />
con," : with, <strong>and</strong> "non," no, not, an i is put before <strong>the</strong> s for <strong>the</strong><br />
sake of euphony ; as " Per isbaglio ," by mistake .<br />
251. 5 For is not translated into Italian, after <strong>the</strong> active verbs to<br />
pay, to buy, to sell , to ask, to look, to wait, to wish.<br />
46 ON THE SECOND CONJUGATION IN " ERE."<br />
LESSON X.<br />
MODEL OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION IN "ERE."<br />
"CREDERE ," TO BELIEVE .<br />
62
"CREDERE ," TO BELIEVE .<br />
INFINITIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . PAST.<br />
Cred ere, to believe . Aver Cred uto, to have<br />
63<br />
believed .<br />
GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST GERUND.<br />
Cred endo, 1 Cred uto-a-i-e, Avendo Cred uto,<br />
believing . believed . having believed .<br />
INDICATIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . IMPERFECT . PAST DEFINITE.<br />
I believe &c. I believed &c. I believed &c.<br />
Cred o, Cred evo, 5 Cred ei, or etti<br />
Cred i, Cred evi, Cred esti,<br />
Cred e ; Cred eva ; Cred è or ette<br />
Cred iamo, Cred evamo, Cred emmo,<br />
Cred ete, Cred evate, Cred este,<br />
Cred ono. Cred evano. Cred erono or ettero<br />
PAST INDEFINITE. PLUPERFECT. PAST ANTERIOR.<br />
Ho Creduto, &c. Avevo Creduto, &c. Ebbi Creduto, &c.<br />
I have believed, &c. I <strong>had</strong> believed, &c. I <strong>had</strong> believed, &c.<br />
FUTURE. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE<br />
MOOD.<br />
I shall believe, &c. I should believe, &c. Believe (thou) &c.<br />
Cred erò, Cred erei, 1 No first person.<br />
Cred erai, Cred eresti, Cred i,<br />
Cred erà ; Cred erebbe ; Cred a<br />
Cred eremo, Cred eremmo, Cred iamo,<br />
Cred erete, Cred ereste, Cred ete,<br />
Cred eranno. Cred erebbero. Cred ino.<br />
FUTURE<br />
CONDITIONAL The Past of <strong>the</strong><br />
ANTERIOR.<br />
PAST.<br />
Avrò Creduto, &c. Avrei Creduto, &c. Imperative is<br />
I shall have<br />
believed, &c.<br />
I should have<br />
believed, &c.<br />
seldom used.<br />
1 Notice that <strong>the</strong> e in <strong>the</strong> gerundial termination endo, has always<br />
<strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> a in <strong>the</strong> word gate .
ON THE SECOND CONJUGATION IN " ERE." 47<br />
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.<br />
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . IMPERFECT .<br />
That I may believe &c. That or if I might believe &c.<br />
Che io Cred a, Che or se (112) io Cred essi,<br />
Che tu Cred a, Che or se tu Cred essi,<br />
Che egli/essa Cred a; Che or se egli/essa Cred esse ;<br />
Che Cred iamo, Che or se Cred essimo,<br />
Che Cred iate, Che or se Cred este,<br />
Che essi/esse Cred ano. Che or se essi/esse Cred essero.<br />
PAST. PLUPERFECT.<br />
Che io abbia Creduto, &c. Che or se i o avessi Creduto, &c.<br />
That I may have believed, &c. That or if I might have believed,<br />
POETICAL FORMS .<br />
252. In poetry "crederia" is often used instead of " crederei," <strong>and</strong> "<br />
crederebbe " <strong>and</strong> " crederiano" instead of " crederebbero " ; in <strong>the</strong><br />
same way " temeria ," instead of " temerei " <strong>and</strong> " temerebbe ," &c.<br />
253. In poetry " credèro " is often used instead of " crederono " ; in<br />
64<br />
&c.<br />
<strong>the</strong> same way " temèro " instead of " temerono ," &c.<br />
REGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION.<br />
Assistere , (a) to assist . Precedere , 1 to precede .<br />
Cedere , 1 to yield. Premere , 1 to press.<br />
Dipendere , to depend. Procedere , to proceed.<br />
Eccedere , 1 to exceed . Resistere , (e) to resist .<br />
Fendere , (b) to split. Ricevere , 1 to receive .<br />
Fremere , 1 to rage . Risolvere , (f) to resolve .<br />
Gemere , to groan. Sp<strong>and</strong>ere , 1 to shed.<br />
Godere , to enjoy. Splendere , to shine .<br />
Mescere , (c) to pour out. Temere , to fear .<br />
Pascere , (d) to feed. Vendere , to sell .<br />
254. 1 Those verbs in <strong>the</strong> above list, marked thus, (1) form <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
Past Definite ei<strong>the</strong>r in ei, or in etti ; as " cedei," or " cedetti ," "<br />
cedesti ," " cedè ," or " cedette " ; " cedemmo," " cedeste ," " cederono,"<br />
or " cedettero ." But all <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>rs have only <strong>the</strong> termination ei.
(a) The Past Participle of " Assistere " is " assistito ."<br />
(b) " Fendere " is "fesso."<br />
(c) " Mescere " is " mesciuto ."<br />
(d) " Pascere " is " pasciuto."<br />
(e) " Resistere " is " resistito ."<br />
(f) " Risolve -re" is " risoluto."<br />
48 ON THE SECOND CONJUGATION IN "ERE."<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
il generale , <strong>the</strong> general . La vista , <strong>the</strong> sight .<br />
il colonello, <strong>the</strong> colonel. il Natale , Christmas .<br />
Un soldato, a soldier. La Pasqua, Easter.<br />
Un Ordine, an order. il medico , <strong>the</strong> doctor.<br />
Una forte<strong>zz</strong>a, a fortress . Questo dono, this gift.<br />
il presidio, <strong>the</strong> garrison . La sua salute , his health .<br />
Un cannone , a cannon . La confidenza , confidence .<br />
Un fucile , a gun. Qual pegno di, as a mark of.<br />
il campanello, <strong>the</strong> bell. Una volta, once.<br />
La folia, calca, <strong>the</strong> crowd. Due volte, twice.<br />
Signore |Mr Signora | Mrs. |Signorina ,| Miss.<br />
EXERCISE XV.<br />
|Sir. |Madam. | Madam.<br />
I receive (a) letters from Mr. 1 James. The soldiers have received<br />
<strong>the</strong> general's order. My sister enjoys (b) good health in this<br />
country. He groans (c) at <strong>the</strong> sight of <strong>the</strong> doctor. Receive (122) this<br />
gift as a mark of my confidence. Believe me, (201, 122) general, 2<br />
we shall beat (d) <strong>the</strong>m (236). Who (chi) is knocking at (e) (179) <strong>the</strong><br />
door? Charles; he has already knocked twice, <strong>and</strong> rang (f) <strong>the</strong> bell.<br />
The cannon beat down (g) (180) <strong>the</strong> fortress. I have received a<br />
letter from my fa<strong>the</strong>r ; he thinks (h) (che) that he will be in<br />
London before Christmas. I have sold (i) my (131) country-house<br />
to Mr. John. Yesterday he lost (j) his umbrella in <strong>the</strong> crowd. We<br />
have resolved (k) to yield (l) to him (198).<br />
(a) Ricevere . (b) Godere . (c) Gemere. (d) Sconfiggere. (e) Battere, or<br />
Bussare a. (f) Suonare. (g) Buttar giù. (h) Credere, (i) Vendere. (j)<br />
Perdere . (k) Risolvere di. (l) Cedere a.<br />
255. 1 In speaking or writing to people , <strong>the</strong> words Mr., Sir, are<br />
translated by " Signore " (plural " Signori "), Mrs. , Madam , by "<br />
Signora " (plural " Signore "), Miss, by " Signorina" (plural<br />
65
"Signorine.") But in speaking or writing about persons, Mr., Sir,<br />
&c., are translated by "il Signore ," " i Signori ," " la Signora," " la<br />
Signorina," " le Signorine," "le Signore ." When "Signore " is<br />
followed by <strong>the</strong> name of <strong>the</strong> person referred to, <strong>the</strong> e is omitted.<br />
Ex.<br />
Il Signor John ha ricevuto una lettera dalla Signora James .<br />
Mr. John has received a letter from Mrs. James .<br />
I Signori John sono amici delle Signorine James .<br />
Messrs . John are friends of <strong>the</strong> Misses James .<br />
256. 2 The Italians, out of politeness, use <strong>the</strong> words Signor <strong>and</strong><br />
Signora before titles, dignities, <strong>and</strong> names of rank, when <strong>the</strong>y<br />
address a person equal or superior to <strong>the</strong>mselves . Ex.<br />
" Caro Signor Marchese ,"<br />
Dear Marquis .<br />
49 ON THE SECOND CONJUGATION IN " ERE."<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
il fiore , 1 <strong>the</strong> flower. Questa capra, this goat.<br />
Una fragola, a strawberry. La montagna , <strong>the</strong> mountain .<br />
Questo<br />
bicchiere<br />
this glass. La notizia , <strong>the</strong> news .<br />
La mia volontà, my will. La belle<strong>zz</strong>a, <strong>the</strong> beauty.<br />
Fortificazioni , f. entrenchment<br />
s.<br />
il tumulto, <strong>the</strong> turmoil . il suo<br />
66<br />
La fresche<strong>zz</strong>a , <strong>the</strong> freshness .<br />
successo ,<br />
il mio pensiero , my thought. Un' impresa , an<br />
his success .<br />
<strong>under</strong>taking<br />
Contento , glad. Insieme , toge<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
Valorosamente , bravely. Tutto, everything .<br />
Quietamente , quietly . Ad onta di, in spite of.<br />
Che cosa ? what ? Per piacere, if you please.<br />
EXERCISE XVI.<br />
What does (128) this woman sell ? She sells (134-137), fruit<br />
(fruits) <strong>and</strong> flowers ; yesterday she sold me some beautiful roses,<br />
<strong>and</strong> some good strawberries. Who will succeed 2 him (192, 193) in<br />
<strong>the</strong> business ? 3 I think (I believe ) 4 his bro<strong>the</strong>r Edward will<br />
succeed him. He <strong>and</strong> his sister have left London, <strong>and</strong> are<br />
enjoying <strong>the</strong> beauty of <strong>the</strong> country, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> freshness of <strong>the</strong> air.<br />
She shudders (a) at <strong>the</strong> thought of meeting (b) (184, 198) him. Do
you believe <strong>the</strong> news (260) he told us ? (c) No, I do not believe it<br />
(193). It does not depend upon (d) my sister. The French fought (e)<br />
bravely, within <strong>the</strong> (102) entrenchments. The goats browse (f)<br />
quietly on <strong>the</strong> mountains in spite of <strong>the</strong> turmoil of (<strong>the</strong>) men<br />
(uomini). I shall never forget (g) <strong>the</strong> happy days (260) we have<br />
enjoyed (167) toge<strong>the</strong>r. Everything will depend upon <strong>the</strong> success<br />
of <strong>the</strong> <strong>under</strong>taking. Shall I pour you out (to pour out) (h) a glass of<br />
wine , Mr. John ? Yes, if you please .<br />
(a) Fremere. (b) Incontrare. (c) Raccontare . (d) Dipendere da. (e)<br />
Combattere . (f) Pascere . (g) Dimenticare . (h) Mescere a.<br />
257. 1 Nouns ending in e, in <strong>the</strong> singular, form <strong>the</strong>ir plural by<br />
changing <strong>the</strong> e into i ; as " il fiore ," plural " i fiori ."<br />
258. 2 When to succeed means to take <strong>the</strong> place of, it is<br />
translated by " Succedere a ; " but when it means to be<br />
successful , it is translated by " Riuscire ."<br />
259- 3 Business is translated by "Affare ," or " Affari ," when it<br />
means concern , affairs ; but it is translated by " Negozio ," when it<br />
means shop, trade.<br />
260. 4 In Italian <strong>the</strong> conjunction "che," that, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> relative<br />
pronoun " che," or " il quale," &c., that, or <strong>which</strong> <strong>cannot</strong> be<br />
omitted before <strong>the</strong> personal pronoun. Ex.<br />
Credo ch' egli sia a Vienna .<br />
I believe (that) he is in Vienna .<br />
Le notizie che ci ha recate .<br />
The news (that) he brought us.<br />
ON THE THIRD CONJUGATION IN " IRE." 50<br />
LESSON XI.<br />
MODEL OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION IN "IRE."<br />
"FINIRE," TO FINISH.<br />
INFINITIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . PAST.<br />
Fin ire, to finish . Aver Fin ito, to have finished .<br />
GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST GERUND.<br />
Fin endo, 1 Fin ito-a-i-e, Avendo Fin ito,<br />
finishing. finished. having finished.<br />
67
INDICATIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT. IMPERFECT. PAST DEFINITE.<br />
I finish &c. I finished &c. I finished &c.<br />
Fin isco, Fin ivo, Fin ii,<br />
Fin isci, Fin ivi, Fin isti,<br />
Fin isce ; Fin iva ; Fin ì 1<br />
Fin iamo, Fin ivamo, Fin immo,<br />
Fin ite, Fin ivate, Fin iste,<br />
Fin iscono. Fin ivano. Fin irono 1<br />
PAST INDEFINITE. PLUPERFECT. PAST ANTERIOR.<br />
Ho Finito, &c. Avevo Finito, &c. Ebbi Finito, &c.<br />
I have finished, &c. I <strong>had</strong> finished, &c. I <strong>had</strong> finished, &c.<br />
FUTURE. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE<br />
MOOD.<br />
I shall finish, &c. I should finish, &c. Finish (thou) &c.<br />
Fin irò, Fin irei, 1 No first person.<br />
Fin irai, Fin iresti, Fin i,<br />
Fin irà ; Fin irebbe ; 1 Fin a<br />
Fin iremo, Fin iremmo, Fin iamo,<br />
Fin irete, Fin ireste, Fin ite,<br />
Fin iranno. Fin irebbero. Fin ino.<br />
FUTURE<br />
CONDITIONAL The Past of <strong>the</strong><br />
ANTERIOR.<br />
PAST.<br />
Avrò Finito, &c. Avrei Finito, &c. Imperative is<br />
I shall have<br />
finished, &c.<br />
I should have<br />
finished, &c.<br />
68<br />
seldom used.<br />
261. 1 In poetry "finìo" is sometimes used instead of " finì,"<br />
"finiro" instead of "finirono," " finiria," instead of "finirei" <strong>and</strong><br />
"finirebbe " <strong>and</strong> "finiriano ," instead of " finirebbero ."<br />
ON THE THIRD CONJUGATION IN "IRE." 51<br />
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . IMPERFECT .<br />
That I may finish &c. That or if I might finish &c.<br />
Che io 1 fin isca, Che or se (112) io fin issi,<br />
Che tu fin isca, Che or se tu fin issi,<br />
Che egli/essa fin isca; Che or se egli/essa fin isse ;<br />
Che fin iamo, Che or se fin issimo,<br />
Che fin iate, Che or se fin iste,
Che essi/esse fin iscano. Che or se essi/esse fin issero.<br />
PAST. PLUPERFECT.<br />
Che io abbia Finito, &c. Che or se i o avessi Finito, &c.<br />
That I may have finished, &c. That or if I might have finished,<br />
69<br />
&c.<br />
LIST OF VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE " FINIRE."<br />
Abbellire , to embellish . Indebolire , to weaken .<br />
Abolire, to abolish. Inferocire , to become<br />
ferocious .<br />
Aderire , to adhere . Inghiottire , to swallow.<br />
Agire , to act. Inorgoglire , to become proud.<br />
Apparire, to appear. Intenerire , to touch, move .<br />
Ardire , to dare. Invaghire , to enchant , charm .<br />
Arrossire , to blush. Marcire , to rot.<br />
Colpire , to strike . Munire , to furnish .<br />
Condire , to season . Patire , to suffer.<br />
Conferire , to confer . Profferire , to proffer.<br />
Differire , to differ, delay. Progredire , to progress.<br />
Digerire , to digest. Proibire , to prohibit.<br />
Eseguire , to execute . Pulire , to clean .<br />
Esibire, to offer. Riverire , to reverence .<br />
Garantire to guarantee . Sbigottire , to disconcert .<br />
Guarire , to cure . Schernire , to despise .<br />
Impallidire , to turn pale. Sparire , to disappear.<br />
Impaurire , to frighten . Starnutire , to sneeze .<br />
Impa<strong>zz</strong>ire , to become mad. Stupire , to astonish .<br />
Impedire , to hinder . Suggerire , to suggest .<br />
Incivilire , to civilise,<br />
polish.<br />
Svanire , to vanish .<br />
1 An o, dotted thus o, has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> o in <strong>the</strong> word<br />
orphan.<br />
52 ON THE THIRD CONJUGATION IN "IRE."<br />
ON VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE "SERVIRE," TO SERVE.<br />
262. As already stated in rule 164, most verbs in "ire" (390 out of<br />
500) are conjugated regularly like " Finire." But <strong>the</strong>re are a few<br />
(about 40) <strong>which</strong> are conjugated like " Servire ," to serve .
These differ from " Finire " in <strong>the</strong> Present Indicative, Imperative,<br />
<strong>and</strong> in <strong>the</strong> Present Subjunctive , as is shown in <strong>the</strong> appended<br />
paradigm :<br />
INDICATIVE IMPERATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE<br />
MOOD. MOOD. MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . --- PRESENT .<br />
I serve &c. Serve (thou) &c. That I may serve &c.<br />
Serv o, No ist per. Che io serv a,<br />
Serv i, Serv i, Che tu serv a,<br />
Serv e ; Serv a ; Che egli/essa serv a ;<br />
Serv iamo, Serv iamo, Che serv iamo,<br />
Serv ite, Serv ite, Che serv iate,<br />
Serv ono. Serv ano. Che essi/esse serv ano.<br />
THE FOLLOWING VERBS ARE CONJUGATED LIKE " SERVIRE."<br />
Consentire , to consent . Sentire , to hear , to feel ,<br />
Divertire , to amuse . Soffrire , to suffer.<br />
Investire , to invest . Sovvertire , to subvert.<br />
Partire , 1 to depart. Tossire , to cough.<br />
Seguire , to follow. Vestire , to dress.<br />
REMARKS ON SOME PREFIXES USED IN ITALIAN.<br />
263. The prefix " dis," or simply " s," often means <strong>the</strong> undoing <strong>the</strong><br />
action expressed by <strong>the</strong> verb to <strong>which</strong> it is joined, or <strong>the</strong><br />
nullifying <strong>the</strong> quality expressed by <strong>the</strong> noun or adjective before<br />
<strong>which</strong> it is placed; as " disarmare," to disarm, " disfare ," or "<br />
sfare ," to undo, " disordine ," disorder, " svantaggio," disadvantage,<br />
" disutile ," useless .<br />
264. The prefix " ri " often means a repetition of <strong>the</strong> action<br />
expressed by <strong>the</strong> verb to <strong>which</strong> it is joined ; as " ribolire ," to boil<br />
again , " ridire ," to say again .<br />
265. The prefix " stra " means <strong>the</strong> overdoing <strong>the</strong> action expressed<br />
by <strong>the</strong> verb to <strong>which</strong> it is joined, or <strong>the</strong> exaggerating <strong>the</strong> quality<br />
expressed by <strong>the</strong> noun or adjective before <strong>which</strong> it is placed ; as "<br />
strafare ," to overdo, " stracuocere ," to overcook, " straccarico,"<br />
overloaded.<br />
1 Partire , meaning to divide, is conjugated like " finire ."<br />
53 ON THE THIRD CONJUGATION IN " IRE."<br />
70
VOCABULARY.<br />
Un bosco, a wood. Una scienza a science .<br />
Una sorgente , a spring. La scuola, <strong>the</strong> school.<br />
Il mio dovere , my duty. La finestra , <strong>the</strong> window.<br />
il piacere , <strong>the</strong> pleasure . La mia condotta my conduct.<br />
L' animo , <strong>the</strong> mind. La mattina , <strong>the</strong> morning .<br />
L' anima , <strong>the</strong> soul. Una legge , a law.<br />
La Notte, <strong>the</strong> night . La fragranza , <strong>the</strong> fragrance ,<br />
Nuovo, new. Dolce, sweet ,<br />
Caldo, warm, Vecchio , old.<br />
Amaro, bitter . Freddo, cold.<br />
Questa fanciulla , this girl.<br />
Un fiume , a river (large )<br />
Questa famiglia , this family .<br />
La sera , <strong>the</strong> evening , night .<br />
Severamente , severely .<br />
Probabilmente , probably<br />
EXERCISE XVII.<br />
They punish (a) him (192, 193) too severely. He has enriched (b)<br />
(<strong>the</strong>) science with 1 new discoveries. Does this boy <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> (c)<br />
Italian ? Yes he <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong>s it (192, 193) but he does not speak<br />
it. Will you have finished before to- morrow ? Probably I shall (208).<br />
I shall finish this exercise before (184) going to school. He always<br />
(181) fulfils (d) his duty. They will never betray (e) us. He will<br />
inform (f) my family of my conduct. Yesterday my sister was<br />
sewing (g) (Past Def.) from (<strong>the</strong>) morning to (<strong>the</strong>) night. The<br />
singing 2 of <strong>the</strong> birds, <strong>the</strong> murmuring (h) of <strong>the</strong> springs, <strong>the</strong><br />
fragrance of <strong>the</strong> flowers contribute (i) to <strong>the</strong> pleasures of <strong>the</strong><br />
mind. He will obey (j) <strong>the</strong> laws of this country. We shall start (k)<br />
for <strong>the</strong> country on (147, 74) Thursday.<br />
(a) Punire . 3 (b) Arricchire. 3 (c) Capire. 3 (d) Adempire. (e)<br />
Tradire . 3 (f) Istruire . 3 (g) Cucire. (h) Mormorare . (i) Contribuire.<br />
3 (j) Obbedire a. 3 (k) Partire .<br />
266. 1 " With," preceded by a past particle, is translated by " di," of,<br />
except when it means in company with, or by means of; <strong>the</strong>n it is<br />
translated by " con." Ex.<br />
" Uno scettro adorno di gioie ."<br />
71
A sceptre adorned with jewels .<br />
267. 2 To translate into Italian <strong>the</strong> English expressions " <strong>the</strong><br />
singing of <strong>the</strong> birds," "<strong>the</strong> murmuring of <strong>the</strong> springs," &c., <strong>the</strong><br />
verb must be employed in <strong>the</strong> present of <strong>the</strong> Infinitive Mood; or<br />
<strong>the</strong> participle , "singing ," &c., must be changed into a noun. Ex.<br />
Il cantare , / il canto degli uccelli mi diletta oltremodo.<br />
The singing of birds delights me immensely .<br />
3 This verb is conjugated like " Finire ;" see page 50.<br />
54 ON VERBS CONJUGATED PASSIVELY.<br />
LESSON XII.<br />
ON VERBS USED PASSIVELY.<br />
268. A verb used passively expresses an action received by <strong>the</strong><br />
subject in <strong>the</strong> sentence . The passive voice, in Italian, is formed<br />
by using <strong>the</strong> auxiliary " essere," followed by <strong>the</strong> past participle of<br />
<strong>the</strong> verb to be expressed passively. The past participle always<br />
agrees with <strong>the</strong> subject in <strong>the</strong> sentence . Ex.<br />
I suoi fratelli sono stimati .<br />
His bro<strong>the</strong>rs are esteemed .<br />
"STIMARE ," TO ESTEEM . CONJUGATED PASSIVELY.<br />
INFINITIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . PAST.<br />
Essere stimato -a Essere stato stimato<br />
To be esteemed To have been esteemed<br />
GERUND. PAST<br />
PARTICIPLE.<br />
PAST GERUND.<br />
Essendo stimato-a-i- Stimato-a-i-e, Essendo stato<br />
e,<br />
72<br />
stimato<br />
being esteemed esteemed. having been<br />
INDICATIVE MOOD.<br />
esteemed.<br />
PRESENT. IMPERFECT. PAST DEFINITE.<br />
I am esteemed &c. I was esteemed &c. I was esteemed &c.<br />
Sono Stimato-a , Ero Stimato-a , Fui Stimato-a ,<br />
Sei Stimato-a , Eri Stimato-a , Fosti Stimato-a ,<br />
È Stimato-a ; Era Stimato-a ; Fu Stimato-a ;<br />
Siamo Stimato-e , Eravamo Stimato-e , Fummo Stimato-e ,
Siete Stimato-a-i-e , Eravate Foste Stimato-a-i-e ,<br />
Sono Stimati-e . Erano Stimati-e . Furono Stimati-e<br />
PAST INDEFINITE. PLUPERFECT. PAST ANTERIOR.<br />
Sono stato stimato, Ero stato stimato, Fui stato stimato,<br />
&c.<br />
I have been<br />
esteemed, &c.<br />
&c.<br />
I <strong>had</strong> been<br />
esteemed, &c.<br />
73<br />
&c.<br />
I <strong>had</strong> been<br />
esteemed, &c.<br />
FUTURE. CONDITIONAL.<br />
I shall be esteemed, &c. I should be esteemed, &c.<br />
Sarò Stimato-a , Sarei Stimato-a , 1<br />
Sarai Stimato-a , Saresti Stimato-a ,<br />
Sarà Stimato-a ; Sarebbe Stimato-a ;<br />
Saremo Stimati-e , Saremmo Stimati-e ,<br />
Sarete Stimato-a-i-e , Sareste Stimato-a-i-e ,<br />
Saranno Stimati-e . Sarebbero Stimati-e .<br />
FUTURE ANTERIOR. CONDITIONAL PAST.<br />
Sarò stato stimato, &c. Sarei stato stimato, &c.<br />
I shall have been esteemed, &c. I should have been esteemed,<br />
1 An e, dotted thus e, has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> a in <strong>the</strong> word<br />
gate .<br />
&c.<br />
ON VERBS CONJUGATED PASSIVELY. 55<br />
IMPERATIVE MOOD<br />
SINGULAR PLURAL<br />
No first person Siamo stimati -e<br />
Sii Stimato-a be (thou) esteemed,<br />
&c.<br />
Siate stimato -a-i-e<br />
Sii Stimato -a Siano stimati -e<br />
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . IMPERFECT .<br />
That I may be esteemed &c. That I might be esteemed &c.<br />
Che io sia stimato-a , Che or se(112) io fossi stimato-a ,<br />
Che tu sia stimato-a , Che or se tu fossi stimato-a ,<br />
Che egli/essa sia stimato-a<br />
;<br />
Che or se egli/essa fosse stimato-a<br />
Che siamo stimati-e , Che or se fossimo stimati-e ,<br />
Che siate stimato-a-i-e , Che or se foste stimato-a-i-e ,<br />
;<br />
Che essi/esse siano Che or se essi/esse fossero
stimati-e . stimati-e .<br />
PAST. PLUPERFECT.<br />
Che io sia stato stimato,<br />
&c.<br />
That I may have been<br />
esteemed, &c.<br />
VOCABULARY<br />
Che or se i o fossi stato stimato, &c.<br />
That I might have been esteemed,<br />
&c.<br />
Il re, <strong>the</strong> king Una battaglia, a battle<br />
La regina , <strong>the</strong> queen Un ballo, a ball (party)<br />
Un principe , a prince Un invito , an invitation<br />
Tutti , tutte, all, everybody Parecchi -e, several , <strong>many</strong><br />
EXERCISE XVIII.<br />
She is loved (a) 1 <strong>and</strong> esteemed (b) by 2 everybody. The city of<br />
Rome has been sacked (c) several times. Have you (122) been<br />
invited (d) to <strong>the</strong> ball ? No, but I expect (e) an invitation. His son<br />
<strong>and</strong> his bro<strong>the</strong>r were wounded (f) (Past Definite, passive form ) in<br />
<strong>the</strong> battle . Margaret would have been blamed by my mo<strong>the</strong>r, if<br />
(112) she <strong>had</strong> spoken. Will <strong>the</strong>se ladies be presented (g) (269) to<br />
<strong>the</strong> Queen by <strong>the</strong> Prince ? I believe <strong>the</strong>y will. 3 We should be<br />
despised (h) if we ab<strong>and</strong>oned him (192, 193) in this danger.<br />
(a) Amare . (b) Stimare. (c) Saccheggiare . (d) Invitare. (e)<br />
Aspettare . (f) Ferire . (g) Presentare . (h) Dispre<strong>zz</strong>are .<br />
269. 1 The past participle of verbs used passively is variable . Ex.<br />
" Ella è amata . "<br />
She is loved.<br />
270. 2 The preposition by, preceded by a past participle, is<br />
translated into " da," in Italian . Ex. "<br />
Egli è ammirato da tutti."<br />
He is admired by everybody.<br />
271. 3 The English expressions I believe he is , I believe <strong>the</strong>y are,<br />
I think so, are elegantly translated into Italian by " Credo di si."<br />
And I believe <strong>the</strong>y are not, I do not think so, are translated by "<br />
Credo di no."<br />
ON NEUTER VERBS. 56<br />
LESSON XIII.<br />
ON NEUTER VERBS.<br />
74
272. A neuter verb, properly speaking, is a verb <strong>which</strong> is nei<strong>the</strong>r<br />
active nor passive ; in that case " essere," to be, is <strong>the</strong> only real<br />
neuter verb ; but any active verb <strong>which</strong> can be used without any<br />
object (direct or indirect ) is, in Italian , called a neuter verb. Ex.<br />
Abbiamo riso. 1<br />
We laughed.<br />
THE NEUTER VERB " NUOTARE," TO SWIM .<br />
INFINITIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . PAST.<br />
Nuotare , to swim . Aver 2 nuotato, to have swum.<br />
GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST GERUND.<br />
Nuot<strong>and</strong>o, 1 Nuotato Avendo nuotato,<br />
swimming . swum. having swum.<br />
INDICATIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . IMPERFECT . PAST DEFINITE.<br />
I swim &c. I swam &c. I swam &c.<br />
Nuoto, Nuotavo, 5 Nuotai ,<br />
Nuoti, Nuotavi , Nuotasti ,<br />
Nuota ; Nuotava ; Nuotò ;<br />
Nuotiamo , Nuotavamo , Nuotammo ,<br />
Nuotate , Nuotavate , Nuotaste ,<br />
Nuotano. Nuotavano. Nuotarono 6<br />
PAST INDEFINITE. PLUPERFECT . PAST ANTERIOR.<br />
Ho nuotato, &c. Avevo nuotato, &c. Ebbi nuotato, &c.<br />
I have swum, &c. I <strong>had</strong> swum, &c. I <strong>had</strong> swum, &c.<br />
273. 1 Notice that <strong>the</strong> past participle of neuter verbs, conjugated<br />
with " avere ," always remains invariable .<br />
2 The Present Participle is "nuotante ."<br />
3 Or " nuotava ; " see rule 108.<br />
ON NEUTER VERBS. 57<br />
IMPERATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.<br />
MOOD. PRESENT . IMPERFECT .<br />
Swim (thou) &c. That I may swim &c. That I might swim &c.<br />
No first person. Che io nuoti, Che or se io nuotassi,<br />
Nuota, Che tu nuoti, Che or se tu nuotassi,<br />
Nuoti ; Che egli/essa nuoti; Che or se egli/essa nuotasse<br />
75<br />
;
Nuotiamo, Che nuotiamo, Che or se nuotassimo,<br />
Nuotate, Che nuotiate, Che or se nuotaste,<br />
Nuotino. Che essi/esse<br />
nuotino.<br />
76<br />
Che or se essi/esse<br />
nuotassero.<br />
PAST. PLUPERFECT.<br />
Che io abbia nuotato, &c. Che or se i o avessi nuotato, &c.<br />
That I may have swum, &c. That I might have swum, &c.<br />
274. There are about 600 neuter verbs in <strong>the</strong> Italian language ,<br />
upwards of 550 of <strong>which</strong> require " Avere " for auxiliary . Ex.<br />
Abbiamo dormito fino alle nove.<br />
We slept till nine o'clock.<br />
For <strong>the</strong> auxiliaries used with <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r 50 see rules 275, <strong>and</strong> 276.<br />
LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL NEUTER VERBS WHICH ARE<br />
CONJUGATED WITH " AVERE."<br />
Camminare , to walk Regnare , to reign<br />
Dormire , to sleep Ridere , to laugh<br />
Gridare , to cry Sbadigliare , to yawn<br />
Passeggiare , to take a walk Tacere , to be silent<br />
Piangere , to weep Tossire , to cough<br />
Pranzare , to dine Viaggiare , to travel<br />
275. The following eighteen neuter verbs require " essere " for<br />
auxiliary , because <strong>the</strong>y indicate a state , ra<strong>the</strong>r than an action<br />
Andare, to go Partire , to depart<br />
Apparire, to appear Perire , to perish<br />
Arrivare , to arrive Pervenire , to arrive at<br />
Cadere , to fall Restare , to remain ,<br />
Divenire , to become Rimanere,to remain ,<br />
Entrare, to enter Sorgere , to rise<br />
Giungere , to arrive Sortire , to go out<br />
Morire , to die Uscire , to go out<br />
Nascere , to be born Venire , to come<br />
EXAMPLES .<br />
Sono <strong>and</strong>ati alla campagna .<br />
They have gone into <strong>the</strong> country.<br />
Sono divenute ricchissime .<br />
They have become very rich .
1? Notice that o preceded by u has always <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> o<br />
in <strong>the</strong> word orphan.<br />
58 ON NEUTER VERBS.<br />
276. There are 32 neuter verbs, like " Salire," to ascend, "<br />
Scendere ," to descend, " Fuggire," to escape, " Passare ," to pass,<br />
<strong>which</strong> require ei<strong>the</strong>r " avere," or " essere " as auxiliary ; " avere "<br />
when an action is expressed, " essere," when a state is denoted.<br />
Ex.<br />
Abbiamo salito il monte .<br />
We ascended <strong>the</strong> mountain .<br />
Andrea è salito sulla torre.<br />
Andrew is on <strong>the</strong> tower.<br />
La cattiva stagione è passata.<br />
The bad season is passed.<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
Il tempo, <strong>the</strong> wea<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
La sua bontà, (69) his kindness . Una prigione , a prison,<br />
Questo ponte, this bridge, Questo parco, this park,<br />
Una pecora, a sheep . La stagione , <strong>the</strong> season .<br />
La primavera , Spring. L' estate , (f.), Summer.<br />
L' autunno, Autumn . L' inverno , Winter .<br />
Questa instituzione , this institution .<br />
Su, sopra, upon, over. Molti, <strong>many</strong><br />
Molto, much, very . Molte, <strong>many</strong><br />
Qualcosa, something Abbastanza, enough<br />
EXERCISE XIX.<br />
We have travelled (a) (274, 273) much. I have passed (276) over<br />
<strong>the</strong> bridge with my bro<strong>the</strong>r. It was a beautiful sight in <strong>the</strong> park ,<br />
<strong>the</strong> sheep were browsing, (b) (179) <strong>the</strong> goats were skipping about,<br />
(c) <strong>the</strong> birds were warbling, (d) <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> children were playing (e).<br />
This institution has been established (f) 1 <strong>the</strong>se five years. Has<br />
your sister arrived ? (275). Yes, she has (208). He escaped (180,<br />
276) from his prison by 2 jumping (g) from a window. He slept<br />
(274) whilst we were working (Past Indef.). We lived (h) (180) three<br />
years in America, <strong>and</strong> received much kindness from <strong>the</strong><br />
Americans . Do not (126, 122) travel this winter .<br />
(a) Viaggiare. (b) Pascere. (c) Saltellare. (d) Cantare. (e) Giuocare .<br />
(f) Stabilire . (g) Saltare . (h) Dimorare .<br />
77
277. 1 When <strong>the</strong> verb expresses an action (or a state ) <strong>which</strong> has<br />
lasted for some time past, <strong>and</strong> is still lasting, it must be put in<br />
<strong>the</strong> Present Indicative in one of <strong>the</strong> two following ways :<br />
Dimoro in questa casa da cinque anni, or | I have been living in<br />
this Sono cinque anni che dimoro in questa casa. | house <strong>the</strong>se<br />
five years .<br />
278. 2 The Italian Gerund is never preceded by any preposition ;<br />
instead of <strong>the</strong> Gerund <strong>the</strong> present of <strong>the</strong> Infinitive , with a<br />
preposition , may be used. Ex.<br />
Salt<strong>and</strong>o., / col saltare da una finestra .<br />
By jumping from a window.<br />
59 ON THE REFLECTIVE AND RECIPROCAL VERBS.<br />
LESSON XIV.<br />
ON THE REFLECTIVE AND RECIPROCAL VERBS.<br />
279. A reflective verb is a verb <strong>the</strong> action of <strong>which</strong> reacts upon its<br />
subject, <strong>and</strong> a reciprocal verb is a verb <strong>the</strong> action of <strong>which</strong> is<br />
reciprocated between two, or several persons, or things .<br />
280. The compound tenses of reflective <strong>and</strong> reciprocal verbs are<br />
formed with <strong>the</strong> auxiliary " Essere ." Ex.<br />
Francesco si è vestito .<br />
Francis has dressed himself .<br />
THE VERB " LODARSI," TO PRAISE ONES-SELF .<br />
INFINITIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . PAST.<br />
Lodarsi, Essersi Lodato,<br />
to praise one's self. to have praised one's self.<br />
GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST GERUND.<br />
Lod<strong>and</strong>osi, Lodatosi Essendosi Lodato,<br />
praising one's self. having praised<br />
INDICATIVE MOOD.<br />
himself .<br />
78<br />
having praised one's<br />
self.<br />
PRESENT . IMPERFECT . PAST DEFINITE.<br />
I praise myself &c. I praised myself &c. I praised myself &c.<br />
mi lodo, mi lodavo, 1 mi lodai,<br />
ti lodi, ti lodavi, ti lodasti,<br />
si loda ; si lodava ; si lodò ;<br />
ci lodiamo, ci lodavamo, ci lodammo,<br />
vi lodate, vi lodavate, vi lodaste,
si lodano. si lodavano. si lodarono 6<br />
PAST INDEFINITE. PLUPERFECT. PAST ANTERIOR.<br />
mi sono lodato, &c. mi ero lodato, &c. mi fui lodato, &c.<br />
I have praised<br />
myself , &c.<br />
I <strong>had</strong> praised myself<br />
, &c.<br />
79<br />
I <strong>had</strong> praised myself<br />
, &c.<br />
FUTURE. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE<br />
MOOD.<br />
I shall praise myself, I should praise Praise thyself &c.<br />
&c.<br />
myself, &c.<br />
mi loderò, mi loderei, no first person.<br />
ti loderai, ti loderesti, lodati,<br />
si loderà ; si loderebbe ; si lodi ;<br />
ci loderemo, ci loderemmo, lodiamoci,<br />
vi loderete, vi lodereste, lodatevi,<br />
si loderanno. si loderebbero. si lodino.<br />
FUTURE<br />
CONDITIONAL The Past of <strong>the</strong><br />
ANTERIOR.<br />
PAST.<br />
mi sarà lodato, &c. mi sarei lodato, &c. imperative is<br />
I shall have bought,<br />
&c.<br />
1 Or " lodava;" see rule 108.<br />
I should have<br />
bought, &c.<br />
seldom used.<br />
60 ON THE REFLECTIVE AND RECIPROCAL VERBS.<br />
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . IMPERFECT .<br />
That I may praise myself<br />
&c.<br />
That I might praise myself &c.<br />
che io mi lodi, che or se io mi lodassi,<br />
che tu ti lodi, che or se tu ti lodassi,<br />
che egli/essa si lodi; che or se egli/essa si lodasse ;<br />
che ci lodiamo, che or se ci lodassimo,<br />
che vi lodiate, che or se vi lodaste,<br />
che essi/esse si lodino. che or se essi/esse si lodassero.<br />
PAST. PLUPERFECT.<br />
che io mi sia lodato, &c. che or se i o mi fossi lodato, &c.<br />
That I may have praised myself,<br />
&c.<br />
That I might have praised<br />
myself, &c.
281. Notice that " lodarsi " might mean to praise one's-self, or to<br />
praise one ano<strong>the</strong>r ; hence <strong>many</strong> verbs may be used, in <strong>the</strong><br />
plural, ei<strong>the</strong>r reflectively or reciprocally .<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
L'assemblea , <strong>the</strong> assembly . A mia spesa, at my expense .<br />
Il preparative , <strong>the</strong> preparation . L' elezione , <strong>the</strong> election .<br />
Lo spirito, wit, <strong>the</strong> mind. Il sapere , learning .<br />
L'imprudenza , imprudence . Un bastimento , a ship<br />
vascello , una nave , a ship Una barca, a bark,<br />
Questa canzone , this song, La chitarra , <strong>the</strong> guitar .<br />
Ogni, every , each . Alle sei, at six o'clock.<br />
A me<strong>zz</strong>ogiorno , at noon.<br />
EXERCISE XX.<br />
I presented myself (a) to <strong>the</strong> (103) assembly. He was arming<br />
himself (b) for <strong>the</strong> battle . Elizabeth praises herself too much.<br />
These two men always praise one ano<strong>the</strong>r (281). The king<br />
surrounded himself (c) (Past Def.) with (266) soldiers. She sang<br />
two Spanish (177, 74) songs, accompanying herself (d) with <strong>the</strong><br />
guitar. Are <strong>the</strong> children dressing <strong>the</strong>mselves ? (e) (244). No, <strong>the</strong>y<br />
are not (208). When I entered (183) <strong>the</strong> room , <strong>the</strong>y were busying<br />
<strong>the</strong>mselves (f) with <strong>the</strong> preparations for <strong>the</strong> election. He has (280)<br />
enriched himself (g) at my expense . They praise <strong>the</strong>mselves too<br />
much.<br />
(a) Presentarsi. (b) Armarsi. (c) Circondarsi. (d) Accom- pagnarsi .<br />
(e) Vestirsi .1 (f) Affaccendarsi . (g) Arricchirsi .2<br />
1 This verb is conjugated like " Servire ; " see page 52.<br />
2 This verb is conjugated like " Finire ; " see page 50.<br />
ON THE REFLECTIVE AND RECIPROCAL VERBS. 61<br />
282. The Following Verbs, And A Few More, Are Reflective In<br />
Italian And Not Reflective In English .<br />
Accorgersi<br />
di/che, 1<br />
Avvedersi<br />
di/che, 1<br />
to perceive . Dimenticarsi , to forget,<br />
to perceive . Scordarsi di, to forget,<br />
Dolersi di, 1 to grieve at. Fidarsi di, to trust.<br />
Addormentarsi<br />
,<br />
to fall asleep . imbarcarsi , to embark .<br />
Affrettarsi di, to hasten, Impadronirsi to seize.<br />
80
81<br />
di, 2<br />
Sbrigarsi, to hasten, Spicciarsi, to make haste.<br />
Infastidirsi di,<br />
2<br />
Ingegnarsi, to get weary, to endeavour.<br />
Alzarsi, to rise. Ingerirsi di, to meddle with.<br />
Levarsi, to rise. Innamorarsi<br />
Ammogliarsi, a man to<br />
marry (a<br />
woman).<br />
Maritarsi, a woman to<br />
marry (a man).<br />
di,<br />
Annoiarsi, to get tired. Maravigliarsi<br />
Appoggiarsi a, to lean<br />
Approssimarsi<br />
a,<br />
against.<br />
to fall in love<br />
with.<br />
Lagnarsi di, to complain of.<br />
Lamentarsi di, to complain of.<br />
di,<br />
to wonder at.<br />
Offendersi di, to take offence<br />
at.<br />
to approach. Opporsi a, 1 to oppose.<br />
Accostarsi a, to approach. Pascersi di, to feed upon.<br />
Avvicinarsi a, to approach. Pentirsi di, 2 to repent.<br />
Arrendersi, to surrender. Querelarsi, |to complain.<br />
Astenersi, 1 to abstain. |to dispute.<br />
Attristarsi di, to get sad at. Rallegrarsi di, to rejoice at.<br />
Avanzarsi, to advance. Rammentarsi<br />
Avve<strong>zz</strong>arsi a, to get<br />
accustomed.<br />
di,<br />
to recollect.<br />
Ricordarsi di, to remember.<br />
Avviarsi, to set out. Riposarsi a, to rest.<br />
Bagnarsi, to ba<strong>the</strong>, to get<br />
Compiacersi<br />
di, 1<br />
Congratularsi<br />
di,<br />
wet.<br />
to take<br />
pleasure in.<br />
to congratulate<br />
upon.<br />
Contentarsi di, to be satisfied<br />
with.<br />
Rompersi, 1 to get broken.<br />
Sbagliarsi, to mistake.<br />
Sentirsi bene.<br />
3<br />
Sentirsi male,<br />
3<br />
to feel well.<br />
to feel unwell.<br />
Crucciarsi di, | Svegliarsi, to awake.<br />
Adirarsi di, |to get angry Vantarsi di, to boast of.<br />
Arrabbiarsi di, |with. Vestirsi, 3 to dress.<br />
Dilettarsi di, to delight in,<br />
with.<br />
Vergognarsi di, to be ashamed<br />
of.
EXERCISE XXI.<br />
I rise every morning at six o'clock. Do you remember Charles'<br />
birthday ? Yes, I do (208). They embarked (Past Def.) in an English<br />
ship. I shall remember to bring my mo<strong>the</strong>r's umbrella. He has not<br />
repented of his imprudence. Children, make haste, we shall start<br />
(partire) at noon. She does not feel well to-day.<br />
1 This is an irregular verb ; its irregular forms will be given<br />
far<strong>the</strong>r on.<br />
2 This verb is conjugated like " Finire ; " see page 50.<br />
3 This verb is conjugated like " Servire ; " see page 52.<br />
62 ON IMPERSONAL VERBS.<br />
LESSON XV.<br />
IMPERSONAL VERBS.<br />
283. In Italian, Impersonal Verbs, like " Bastare ," to suffice, are<br />
used in <strong>the</strong> third person, both in <strong>the</strong> singular <strong>and</strong> plural, <strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong>ir compound tenses are formed with " Essere ." Ex.<br />
Questo denaro basta.<br />
This money suffices .<br />
Questi libri basteranno .<br />
These books will suffice .<br />
THE IMPERSONAL VERB "BASTARE," TO SUFFICE .<br />
INFINITIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . PAST.<br />
Bastare , to suffice . Essere bastato, to have sufficed.<br />
GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST GERUND.<br />
Bast<strong>and</strong>o, 1<br />
sufficing .<br />
INDICATIVE MOOD.<br />
Bastato, sufficed. Essendo bastato,<br />
82<br />
having sufficed.<br />
PRESENT . IMPERFECT . PAST DEFINITE.<br />
Basta, it 2 suffices ; Bastava, it sufficed ; Bastò, it sufficed ;<br />
Bastano, <strong>the</strong>y<br />
suffice .<br />
Bastavano, <strong>the</strong>y<br />
sufficed.<br />
Bastarono, <strong>the</strong>y<br />
sufficed.
PAST INDEFINITE. PLUPERFECT .<br />
È bastato, Sono bastati, Era bastato, Erano bastati,<br />
It has sufficed. They have<br />
sufficed.<br />
83<br />
It <strong>had</strong> sufficed. They <strong>had</strong><br />
sufficed.<br />
FUTURE. CONDITIONAL PRESENT .<br />
Basterà , it will suffice ; Basterebbe , it would suffice ;<br />
Basteranno , <strong>the</strong>y will suffice . Basterebbero, <strong>the</strong>y would<br />
suffice .<br />
FUTURE ANTERIOR. CONDITIONAL PAST.<br />
Sarà bastato, Sarebbe bastato,<br />
It will have sufficed. It would have sufficed.<br />
Saranno bastati, Sarebbero bastati,<br />
They will have sufficed. They would have sufficed.<br />
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.<br />
PRESENT . IMPERFECT .<br />
Che basti, Che bastasse , that it might suffice ;<br />
That it may suffice . Che bastassero, that <strong>the</strong>y might<br />
Che bastino, Se<br />
bastasse ,<br />
suffice<br />
if it sufficed ;<br />
That <strong>the</strong>y may suffice . Se bastassero , if <strong>the</strong>y sufficed.<br />
PAST. PLUPERFECT .<br />
Che sia bastato, Che fosse bastato, that it might have<br />
That it may have<br />
sufficed.<br />
sufficed<br />
Che fossero bastati, that <strong>the</strong>y might have<br />
sufficed;<br />
Che siano bastati, Se fosse bastato, if it <strong>had</strong> sufficed ;<br />
That <strong>the</strong>y may have<br />
sufficed.<br />
Se fossero bastati, if <strong>the</strong>y <strong>had</strong> sufficed.<br />
1 The Present Participle of " bastare " is " bastante ," plural "<br />
bastanti ."<br />
284. 2 The pronoun it is not translated into Italian .<br />
ON IMPERSONAL VERBS. 63
285. The following Impersonal Verbs are of <strong>the</strong> first regular<br />
conjugation, like " bastare ." Arrivare , to happen. Capitare , to<br />
happen. Bisognare , to be necessary . Sembrare , to seem .<br />
286. The following Impersonal Verbs are of <strong>the</strong> second <strong>and</strong> third<br />
conjugation , <strong>and</strong> irregular :<br />
Accadere , 1 |to happen. Occorrere ,4 |to happen, to want.<br />
Avvenire , 2 | |to be needful .<br />
Convenire , 3 to. be useful . |Parere ,5 to appear.<br />
EXAMPLES .<br />
Ciò accade sovente .<br />
That often happens.<br />
Accadono strane cose.<br />
Strange things happen.<br />
287. The Impersonal Verbs given above (used in <strong>the</strong> third person<br />
singular) govern a verb in <strong>the</strong> Present of <strong>the</strong> Infinitive to express<br />
an action <strong>which</strong> does not refer to any person in particular ; but<br />
<strong>the</strong>y govern a verb in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood (Present or Imperfect)<br />
preceded by <strong>the</strong> conjunction " che," that, when <strong>the</strong> action<br />
expressed by <strong>the</strong> verb has reference to some person or persons.<br />
Ex.<br />
Bisogna parlare .<br />
It is necessary to speak .<br />
Bisogna che io parli.<br />
It is necessary that I should speak .<br />
288. The Impersonal Verbs given in <strong>the</strong> above rules, 285 <strong>and</strong> 286,<br />
are very often used with <strong>the</strong> conjunctive personal pronouns " mi,"<br />
to me, " ti," to <strong>the</strong>e , " gli," to him, &c., as shown in <strong>the</strong> paradigm<br />
appended to this rule , <strong>and</strong> are followed ei<strong>the</strong>r by a noun, or a verb<br />
in <strong>the</strong> Present of <strong>the</strong> Infinitive .<br />
|Mi accade it happens to me.<br />
|Ti accade " <strong>the</strong>e .<br />
INDICATIVE |Gli accade " him.<br />
MOOD. |Le accade " her, to it,<br />
PRESENT . |Ci accade " us.<br />
|Vi accade " you.<br />
84<br />
" or to you (sing .)<br />
|Accade (a) loro " <strong>the</strong>m ,<br />
" or to you (plur.)
EXAMPLES .<br />
Mi accade sovente d' incontrarlo .<br />
It often happens that I meet him.<br />
Che cosa le occorre , Signora ?<br />
What do you want, Madam ?<br />
Mi occorrono dei guanti .<br />
I want some gloves.<br />
1 The Past Def. is " accadde." Fut. " accadrà." Cond. " accadrebbe."<br />
2 The Past Part, is " avvenuto." Pres. Ind. " avviene." Past Def. "<br />
avvenne." Fut. " avverrà." Cond. " avverrebbe ." Pres. Subj. " che<br />
avvenga ."<br />
3 Past Part, is " convenuto." Pres. Ind. " conviene. " Past Def. "<br />
convenne ." Fut. " converrà." Cond. " converebbe." Pres. Subj. " che<br />
convenga ."<br />
4 The Past Part, is "occorso." Past Def. " occorse ."<br />
5 The Past Part, is " parso." Past Def. "parse " or "parve ." Fut. "<br />
parrà." Cond. "parrebbe." Pres . Subj. "che paia."<br />
64 ON IMPERSONAL VERBS.<br />
289. The following Impersonal Verbs of <strong>the</strong> three conjugations,<br />
mostly irregular, are also very often used with <strong>the</strong> conjunctive<br />
personal pronouns " mi," to me, " ti," to <strong>the</strong>e , " gli," to him, &c.,<br />
<strong>and</strong> are followed ei<strong>the</strong>r by a noun or by a verb in <strong>the</strong> Present of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Infinitive :<br />
Abbisognare, to be in want of. Piacere , 3 to please , to like .<br />
Tardare , to long for. Dispiacere ,4 to displease .<br />
Calere ,1 to care about. Premere , to have at heart .<br />
Dolere ,2 to ache . Rincrescere ,5 to be sorry for.<br />
EXAMPLES .<br />
Mi abbisognano dei libri.<br />
I am in want of books.<br />
Gli tarda di veder l' Italia .<br />
He longs to see Italy.<br />
Mi preme la sua salute .<br />
I am anxious about your health .<br />
Le rincresce di partire .<br />
85
She is sorry to go away.<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
Una tragedia , a tragedy. Un romanzo, a novel .<br />
Una commedia , a comedy. il suo motivo, his motive .<br />
Sapiente , wise . Correttamente , correctly .<br />
Prudentemente , prudently. Quanto ? quanta ? how much ?<br />
Quanti ? quante ? how <strong>many</strong> ? Non ancora, not yet.<br />
EXERCISE XXII.<br />
I must (a) (287) sell (b) my horse before Saturday. What (che cosa,<br />
mas.) do you (122, 193) want (c) ? I want some Italian books. How<br />
<strong>many</strong> do you want (of <strong>the</strong>m) ? (240). I want three (of <strong>the</strong>m) ;<br />
Alfieri's tragedies, Goldoni's comedies, <strong>and</strong> a good Italian novel. It<br />
is not necessary (c) to be very wise to (225) guess (d) his motive .<br />
How do you like (e) (289) this palace ? I do not like it much. It is<br />
not enough (f) to speak correctly, it is also necessary (a) to speak<br />
prudently. It appears (g) that you have not attended (h) to <strong>the</strong><br />
business (259). No, not yet. I have at heart (i) your success .<br />
(a) Bisognare . (b) Vendere. (c) Occorrere . (d) Indovinare. (e)<br />
Piacere . (f) Bastare . (g) Parere . (h) Accudire a. (i) Premere .<br />
1 The Past Def. is " mi calse ." Pres . Subj. " che mi caglia ."<br />
2 The Pres. Ind. is "mi duole ." Past Def. "mi dolse ." Fut. "mi<br />
dorrà." Cond. " mi dorrebbe." Pres . Subj. " che mi doglia."<br />
3 The Past Part, is "piaciuto." Past Def. "piacque." Pres. Subj. "che<br />
piaccia . "<br />
4 The Past Part, is "dispiaciuto." Past Def. " dispiacque ." Pres,<br />
Subj. "che dispiaccia ."<br />
5 The Past Part, is " rincresciuto." Past Def. "rincrebbe." Pres.<br />
Subj. "che mi rincresca ."<br />
ON IMPERSONAL VERBS. 65<br />
LESSON XVI.<br />
IMPERSONAL VERBS EXPRESSIVE OF THE STATE OF THE<br />
WEATHER<br />
290. The following Impersonal Verbs expressive of <strong>the</strong> state of <strong>the</strong><br />
wea<strong>the</strong>r are used only in <strong>the</strong> third person singular, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
compound tenses are formed ei<strong>the</strong>r with " Essere " or " Avere ."<br />
Piovigginare , to dri<strong>zz</strong>le. Tuonare , to th<strong>under</strong>.<br />
Nevicare , to snow. Balenare , to lighten<br />
86
Gr<strong>and</strong>inare , to hail . Lampeggiare |<br />
Gelare , to freeze . Albeggiare , to dawn.<br />
Digelare , to thaw. Annottare , to grow dark.<br />
291. The only verb of this class of <strong>the</strong> second conjugation is "<br />
Piovere," to rain, <strong>and</strong> it is irregular only in <strong>the</strong> Past Definite,<br />
<strong>which</strong> is "piovve ," it rained .<br />
EXAMPLES .<br />
Pioviggina , it dri<strong>zz</strong>les. Nevicava , it snowed.<br />
Gr<strong>and</strong>ina , it hails . È tuonato, it has th<strong>under</strong>ed .<br />
Digelerà , it will thaw. Se piovesse , if it rained .<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
La pioggia, <strong>the</strong> rain , il lampo, <strong>the</strong> lightning .<br />
La neve , <strong>the</strong> snow, il baleno, <strong>the</strong> lightning .<br />
il ghiaccio , <strong>the</strong> ice. il pattino, <strong>the</strong> skate ,<br />
La gr<strong>and</strong>ine , <strong>the</strong> hail , il lago, <strong>the</strong> lake ,<br />
La nebbia, <strong>the</strong> fog. il contadino, <strong>the</strong> peasant .<br />
Straordinario , extraordinary , Terribilmente , awfully,<br />
Durante , during. Niente , nothing ,<br />
Ecco tutto, that is all. Non è vero ? is it not so ?<br />
EXERCISE XXIII.<br />
Does it (284) rain now? No, it does not (208). It has been raining<br />
during <strong>the</strong> night. The wind blows (a). In my country it never (181)<br />
snows. The th<strong>under</strong> re-echoed (b) awfully. The lake is frozen. The<br />
peasants will sell <strong>the</strong> ice in <strong>the</strong> town. If (112) I <strong>had</strong> skates I would<br />
skate (c). It is getting dark , we must (285, 288) return to <strong>the</strong><br />
castle. What (che cosa, mas.) has happened (d) ? Nothing (of)<br />
extraordinary ; it snows, that is all. Has anything (qualche cosa,<br />
mas.) happened (d) to George ? Nothing ; he is in <strong>the</strong> garden<br />
playing 1 with William .<br />
(a) Soffiare . (b) Rimbombare . (c) Pattinare . (d) Accadere .<br />
292. 1 When <strong>the</strong> present participles speaking, playing, &c., are<br />
used separately from <strong>the</strong>ir auxiliary, I am, He is, He was, I shall<br />
be, &c., <strong>the</strong>y are translated by <strong>the</strong> simple tenses (" parlo," "<br />
giuocava ," &c.) preceded by <strong>the</strong> conjunction " che." Ex.<br />
Luigi è nel suo studio che lavora.<br />
Louis is in his studio working .<br />
66 ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS.<br />
87
LESSON XVII.<br />
ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS.<br />
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ALL THE IMPORTANT IRREGULAR,<br />
AND DEFECTIVE VERBS USED IN THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE.<br />
293. The student is strongly advised to learn by heart, first of all,<br />
<strong>the</strong> verbs <strong>which</strong> in <strong>the</strong> following list are preceded by two asterisks<br />
( ** ) ; this will enable him to write easily <strong>the</strong> exercises on <strong>the</strong><br />
irregular verbs. Afterwards he should learn those preceded by one<br />
asterisk (*) ; leaving those not marked to <strong>the</strong> last.<br />
294. Only <strong>the</strong> irregular forms of <strong>the</strong> verbs are given. The rest of<br />
<strong>the</strong> verbs is conjugated according to <strong>the</strong> regular paradigms ; those<br />
ending in " are " are conjugated like " Comprare " (see page 29);<br />
those ending in "ere" are conjugated like "Credere" 1 (see page<br />
46) ; <strong>and</strong> those ending in " ire " are conjugated ei<strong>the</strong>r like "<br />
Finire " (see page 50) or like " Servire " (see page 52), as will be<br />
stated in <strong>the</strong> foot-notes .<br />
A<br />
** Accendere , to light . Past Part, acceso .<br />
PAST DEFINITE. 2<br />
Accesi Accend emmo<br />
Accend esti 3 Accend este<br />
Accese ;4 . Accesero<br />
Accadere , to happen (Imper. 286). Past Def. accadde, &c. Fut.<br />
accadrà, &c. 5<br />
Accingersi , to prepare one's-self. Past Part, accinto si (200). Past<br />
Def. mi accinsi , &c. 5<br />
Accludere , to enclose . Past Part, accluso. Past Def. acclusi , &c.<br />
1 See rule 63, in order to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> meaning of <strong>the</strong> letters<br />
in <strong>the</strong> darker type.<br />
VERY IMPORTANT NOTE.<br />
295. 2 It is most important to notice that most of <strong>the</strong> Italian<br />
irregular verbs are, like "accendere," irregular only in <strong>the</strong> Past<br />
Participle, <strong>and</strong> in <strong>the</strong> Past Definite, <strong>and</strong> that of <strong>the</strong> six persons in<br />
a Past Definite, only three can be irregular : <strong>the</strong> first person<br />
singular, <strong>which</strong> always ends in i, <strong>the</strong> third person singular,<br />
<strong>which</strong> always ends in e, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> third person plural, <strong>which</strong> always<br />
ends in era ; so that, one of <strong>the</strong> three persons being known, <strong>the</strong><br />
o<strong>the</strong>rs are known, as a matter of course .<br />
88
3 An e, dotted thus e, has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> a in <strong>the</strong> word<br />
gate .<br />
296.4 Notice that <strong>the</strong> third person singular of an irregular Past<br />
Definite is never accented .<br />
5 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 67<br />
** Accogliere (bene ), to receive (kindly). Past Part. accolto. Pres.<br />
Ind. accolgo, accogli, accoglie ; accogliamo, accogliete, accolgono.<br />
Past Def. accolsi , accogliesti, accolse ; accogliemmo, accoglieste,<br />
accolsero. Imperative, accogli, accolga ; accogliamo, accogliete,<br />
accolgano. Pres . Subj. che io accolga, &c.<br />
Accorgersi, to perceive. Past Part, accortosi . Past Def. mi accorsi,<br />
&c.1<br />
Accorrere , to run to. Past Part, accorso. Past Def. accorsi , &c. 1<br />
Accrescere, to augment. Past Part, accresciuto. Past Def.<br />
accrebbi, &c.<br />
**: Addurre , to bring forth, to allege , is contracted from "<br />
Adducere ," <strong>and</strong> is, <strong>the</strong>refore, conjugated thus : Ger. Adducendo.<br />
Pres. Ind. adduco, adduci , adduce ; adduciamo, adducete,<br />
adducono. Imp. Ind. adducevo, &c.<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, addotto. Past Def. addussi ,<br />
adducesti, 2 addusse , &c. Fut. addurrò (69), addurrai , addurrà ;<br />
addurremo, addurrete, addurranno. Cond. addurrei, addurresti ,<br />
addurrebbe ; addurremmo, addurreste , addurrebbero.3<br />
** Adempire (or adempiere ), to perform, to fulfil. Pres. Ind.<br />
adempio, adempi, adempie, &c. Imperative, adempi, adempia, &c.<br />
Pres . Subj. che io adempia , &c.<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
La serva , <strong>the</strong> woman-servant Una ragione , a reason<br />
La lampada, <strong>the</strong> lamp Una scusa, an excuse<br />
Raramente , seldom Però, but still, however<br />
EXERCISE XXIV.<br />
Where is <strong>the</strong> servant ? She is in <strong>the</strong> parlour lighting (292) <strong>the</strong><br />
fire. Yesterday morning I lit my (131) lamp at six o'clock. Your<br />
uncle received me well (Past Def.). What (che) reason did he<br />
allege ? (has he alleged ?) He did not allege any reason. He<br />
seldom fulfils his duty. But still he will adduce good excuses .<br />
89
1 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
2 Notice that <strong>the</strong> regular forms of <strong>the</strong> Past Definite (295), namely,<br />
<strong>the</strong> second person singular, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> first <strong>and</strong> second persons<br />
plural, are derived from <strong>the</strong> root (165) of <strong>the</strong> Present Infinitive in<br />
its full form, " Adduc ere."<br />
3 Notice that <strong>the</strong> Conditional always follows <strong>the</strong> Future in its<br />
irregularities .<br />
68 ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS.<br />
** Affliggere , to afflict . Past Part, afflitto. Past Def. afflissi , &c.<br />
** Aggiungere , to add. Past Part, aggiunto . Past Def. aggiunsi , &c.,<br />
** Alludere , to allude. Past Part, alluso.1 Past Def. allusi , &c.<br />
Ammettere , to admit. Past Part, ammesso . Past Def. ammisi , &c.<br />
** Andare, to go. Ger. <strong>and</strong><strong>and</strong>o. Pres. Ind. vado, or vo, vai, va ;<br />
<strong>and</strong>iamo, <strong>and</strong>ate, vanno. Fut. <strong>and</strong>erò (or <strong>and</strong>rò), &c. Imperative,<br />
va, vada ; <strong>and</strong>iamo , <strong>and</strong>ate, vadano. Pres . Subj. che io vada, &c.<br />
Anteporre, to prefer, is contracted from " Anteponere." See "<br />
Porre."<br />
Apparire,3 to appear. Past Part, apparso. Past Def. apparvi (or<br />
apparii), &c. 2<br />
** Appartenere, to belong. Pres. Ind. appartengo, appartieni ,<br />
appartiene ; apparteniamo, appartenete, appartengono. Past Def.<br />
appartenni, &c. Fut. apparterrò, &c. Cond. apparterrei, &c. 4<br />
Imperative, appartieni , appartenga, &c. Pres. Subj. che io<br />
appartenga, &c.<br />
Appendere, to hang up. Past Part, appeso. Past Def. appesi, &c.<br />
Apprendere , 5 to learn . Past. Part, appreso. Past Def. appresi, &c.<br />
** Aprire , 6 to open. Past. Part, aperto.<br />
Ardere , to burn. Past. Part. arso. Past Def. arsi , &c.<br />
Arrendersi, to surrender. Past. Part, arreso. Past. Def. mi arresi,<br />
&c.<br />
Arridere , to smile . Past. Part, arriso . Past. Def. arrisi , &c.<br />
*Ascendere , to ascend. Past. Part, asceso . Past. Def. ascesi , &c..<br />
Ascondere , to hide . Past Part, ascoso. Past Def. Ascosì, &c.<br />
Ascrivere , to ascribe . Past Part, ascritto . Past Def. ascrissi , &c.<br />
90
*Assalire, to assail, to assault. Pres. Ind. assalgo, assali, assale ;<br />
assagliamo, assalite , assalgono. Past. Def. assalsi (or assalii), &c.<br />
Imperative, assali, assalga, assagliamo, &c. Pres. Subj. che io<br />
assalga , &c.<br />
*Assistere , to assist . Past Part, assistito .<br />
Assolvere , to absolve. Past Part, assolto (or assoluto).<br />
Assorbere (or assorbire ), to absorb. Past Part, assorto.<br />
1 An s, dotted thus s, has <strong>the</strong> soft sound of <strong>the</strong> s in <strong>the</strong> word rose.<br />
2 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
3 In <strong>the</strong> regular forms it is conjugated like " Finire . "<br />
4 Notice that <strong>the</strong> Conditional always follows <strong>the</strong> Future in its<br />
irregularities .<br />
297. 5 Apprendere means to learn (a fact) ; to learn (a lesson, a<br />
language ) is translated by " Imparare ."<br />
6 In <strong>the</strong> regular forms it is conjugated like " Servire ."<br />
ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 69<br />
Assumere , to assume . Past Part, assunto. Past Def, assunsi , &c.<br />
Astenersi , to abstain . See " Tenere ."<br />
Attorcere , to twist. Past Part, attorto. Past Def. attorsi, &c.<br />
*Attrarre , to attract, is contracted from " Attraere." Ger.<br />
Attraendo. Past Part, attratto. Pres. Ind. attraggo, attrai, attrae ;<br />
attraiamo (or attraggiamo), attraete, attraggono. Imp. Ind.<br />
attraevo, &c. Past Def. attrassi , attraesti , &c. Fut. attrarrò, &c.<br />
Cond. attrarrei, &c. Imperative, attrai, attragga ; attraiamo,<br />
attraete , attraggano . Imp. Subj. che i o attraessi , &c.<br />
Avvedersi, to perceive. Past Part, avvedutosi. Past Def. mi avvidi ,<br />
&c.<br />
Avvenire , to happen (Imper . 286). Past Def. mi avvenne , &c. [sic]<br />
Avvincere , to bind. Past Part, avvinto . Past Def. avvinsi , &c.<br />
Avvolgere , to wrap round. Past Part. avvolto. Past Def. avvolsi, &c.<br />
B<br />
Benedire, to bless, is contracted from " Benedicere," <strong>and</strong> is,<br />
<strong>the</strong>refore, conjugated thus : Ger. benedicendo. Pres. Ind.<br />
benedico , benedici , &c.<br />
91
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, benedetto. Past Def. benedissi,<br />
&c.<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
Un cavallo, a horse Questo gatto, this cat<br />
Il mio cane , my dog L' anno passato, last year<br />
Fino, until Fino a, as far as<br />
Verso, towards<br />
EXERCISE XXV.<br />
Where are you (122) going (179) ? I am going to Paris. Do not (126,<br />
122) go now; wait until <strong>the</strong> autumn <strong>and</strong> we will go ( <strong>the</strong>re) (239)<br />
toge<strong>the</strong>r. We went <strong>the</strong>re last year. If (112) you went <strong>the</strong>re (239)<br />
now you would meet my fa<strong>the</strong>r-in-law. This dog belongs to my<br />
bro<strong>the</strong>r-in-law. The door is open (269). They pride <strong>the</strong>mselves on<br />
1 <strong>the</strong>ir wit, <strong>and</strong> (on <strong>the</strong>ir ) learning .<br />
298. 1 The preposition on (" su," " sopra,") is never translated<br />
literally in Italian except when it is taken in a literal sense ; as, "<br />
Sulla tavola." On <strong>the</strong> table . As explained in rule 147, before a<br />
name of time on is not translated at all. Sometimes, however, on<br />
is translated into Italian by ano<strong>the</strong>r preposition . Ex.<br />
S' inorgogliscono del loro spirito.<br />
They pride <strong>the</strong>mselves on <strong>the</strong>ir wit.<br />
Parlai in quell' occasione .<br />
I spoke on that occasion .<br />
A condizione ch' ella canti .<br />
On condition that you sing .<br />
Parlò di un affare d' importanza .<br />
He spoke on a matter of importance .<br />
70 ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS.<br />
** Bere , to drink , is contracted from " Bevere," <strong>and</strong> is, <strong>the</strong>refore,<br />
conjugated thus: Ger. bevendo. Pres . Ind. bevo, &c.<br />
Its irregular forms are: Past Def. bevvi , &c. Fut. berrò, &c.<br />
C<br />
** Cadere , to fall. Past Def. caddi, &c. Fut cadrò, &c. 1<br />
Calere, to care for ( Imper. 289) is only used in <strong>the</strong> following<br />
tenses : Pres. Ind. mi cale , &c. Imp. Ind. mi caleva, &c. Past Def.<br />
mi calse, &c. Pres. Subj. che mi caglia, &c. Imp. Subj. che mi<br />
calesse , &c.<br />
92
** Chiedere, to ask. Past Part, chiesto. Pres. Ind. chiedo (or<br />
chieggo), chiedi , &c. Past Def. chiesi, &c. Imperative, chiedi ,<br />
chieda (or chiegga ), &c. Pres . Subj. che i o chieda (or chiegga ), &c.<br />
** Chiudere, to shut, to shut up. Past Part, chiuso. Past Def.<br />
chiusi , &c.<br />
Cingere , to gird. Past Part, cinto. Past Def. cinsi , &c.<br />
Cingersi , to prepare one's -self. Conjugated like "Cingere ."<br />
** Cogliere (contracted into " Corre "), to ga<strong>the</strong>r. Past Part. Colto.<br />
Pres. Ind. colgo, Cogli, Coglie; Cogliamo, Cogliete, colgono. Past<br />
Def. Colsi, &c. Fut. Coglierò (or corrò), &c. Imperative, cogli, colga<br />
; Cogliamo , &c. Pres . Subj. che io Colga, &c.<br />
*Commettere, to commit. Past Part, commesso. Past Def.<br />
commisi , &c.<br />
Commuovere, 2 to affect, to move . Past Part, commosso. Pret. Ind.<br />
commossi , &c.<br />
Comparire , 3 to appear suddenly. Past Part, comparso. Past Def.<br />
comparvi , &c. 1<br />
Compiacere, to comply with, to please . Past Part, compiaciuto.<br />
Pres. Ind. compiaccio, compiaci, compiace ; compiacciamo,<br />
compiacete , compiacciono. Past Def. Compiacqui, &c. Imperative,<br />
compiaci , compiaccia ; compiacciamo , compiacete , compiacciano .<br />
Compiacersi di, to take delight in, is conjugated like "<br />
Compiacere ."<br />
1 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
2 When in <strong>the</strong> verb "Commuovere," <strong>the</strong> tonic accent does not fall<br />
on <strong>the</strong> second o, <strong>the</strong> letter u may be omitted; " commovendo," "<br />
commoviamo ," "commovero " instead of " commuovendo ," &c.<br />
3 In <strong>the</strong> regular forms it is conjugated like " Finire ."<br />
ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 71<br />
*Compiangere, to pity, to lament. Past Part, compianto. Past Def.<br />
compiansi , &c. Pres . Subj. che io compianga , &c.<br />
Compire (or compiere), to fulfil, to complete. Pres. Ind. compio,<br />
compi , compie , &c. Imperative, compi , compia, &c. Pres. Subj. che<br />
io compia, &c.<br />
93
** Comporre, to compose , is contracted from " Componere," <strong>and</strong> is,<br />
<strong>the</strong>refore, conjugated thus : Ger. componendo. Imp. Ind.<br />
componevo, &c.<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, composto. Pres. Ind. compongo,<br />
componi , compone ; componiamo, componete, compongono. Past<br />
Def. composi , &c. Fut. comporrò, &c. Imperative, componi ,<br />
componga, &c. Pres . Subj. che io componga, &c.<br />
*Comprendere, to comprehend, to contain, to impress. Past Part,<br />
compreso. Past Def. compresi , &c.<br />
Comprimere, to compress. Past Part, compresso. Past Def.<br />
compressi , &c.<br />
*Compromettere, to compromise . Past Part, compromesso. Past<br />
Def. compromisi (or compromessi ), &c.<br />
Compungere , to grieve . Past Part. Compunto. Past Def. compunsi,<br />
&c.<br />
*Conchiudere , to conclude . Past Part, conchiuso. Past Def.<br />
conchiusi , &c.<br />
Concludere , to conclude . Past Part, concluso. Past Def. conclusi,<br />
&c.<br />
*Concorrere, to concur, to compete . Past Part, concorso. Past Def.<br />
concorsi , &c.<br />
EXERCISE XXVI.<br />
I always drink coffee in <strong>the</strong> morning <strong>and</strong> tea in <strong>the</strong> evening.<br />
What do <strong>the</strong> Italians drink ? They drink wine. If (112) I <strong>had</strong> money<br />
I should always drink good wine. Henry has fallen from <strong>the</strong> chair.<br />
Who (chi) has shut <strong>the</strong> door? I ; I shut it (180, 193) because all <strong>the</strong><br />
windows are open (269). Where is Charles ? He is in <strong>the</strong> garden<br />
ga<strong>the</strong>ring (292) flowers for his sister. When I entered (183) <strong>the</strong><br />
room <strong>the</strong>y were composing a letter. I have just 1 composed an<br />
Italian song. Ga<strong>the</strong>r (122) some flowers for me (213).<br />
299. 1 I have just is translated into Italian by " ho appunto."<br />
72 ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS.<br />
Condiscendere, to condescend. Past Part, condisceso. Past Def.<br />
condiscesi , &c.<br />
** Condurre, to lead, is contracted from " Conducere," <strong>and</strong> is<br />
<strong>the</strong>refore conjugated thus : Ger. conducendo. Pres. Ind. conduce ,<br />
&c.<br />
94
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, condotto. Past Def. condussi ,<br />
&c. Fut. condurrò, &c.<br />
** Confondere , to confound, to confuse . Past Part, confuso. Past<br />
Def. confusi , &c.<br />
Congiungere , to join. Past Part, congiunto. Past Def. congiunsi,<br />
&c.<br />
Connettere , to connect. Past Part, connesso. Past Def. connessi,<br />
&c.<br />
** Conoscere, to know, to be acquainted with (through <strong>the</strong><br />
senses ). Past Part, conosciuto. Past Def. conobbi, &c.<br />
* Consistere , to consist (Imper . 284). Past Part, consistito . 1<br />
Costruire,. 2 to construct . Past Part, costrutto (or costruito). Past<br />
Def. costrussi , &c.<br />
Contendere , to quarrel . Past Part, conteso . Past Def. contesi , &c.<br />
** Contenere , to contain. Pres. Ind. contengo, contieni, contiene ;<br />
conteniamo, contenete, contengono. Past Def. Contenni, &c. Fut.<br />
conterrò, &c. Imperative, contieni, contenga ; conteniamo, &c.<br />
Pres . Subj. che io contenga , &c.<br />
*Contradire , to contradict, is abbreviated from " Contradicere,"<br />
<strong>and</strong> is, <strong>the</strong>refore, conjugated thus : Ger. contradicendo. Pres. Ind.<br />
contradico, contradici , &c.<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, contradetto. Past Def.<br />
contradissi , &c.<br />
Contrapporre , to oppose , is contracted from " Contrapponere ." See<br />
" Porre."<br />
*Contrarre , to contract, is contracted from " Contraere ." See<br />
"Trarre ."<br />
** Convenire, to suit, (286) to agree upon, to meet by<br />
appointment. Past. Part, convenuto. Pres. Ind. convengo,<br />
convieni, conviene ; conveniamo, convenite, convengono. Past.<br />
Def. convenni, &c. Fut. converrò, &c. Imperative, convieni,<br />
convenga , conveniamo , &c. Pres . Subj. che i o convenga , &c. 1<br />
1 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
2 In <strong>the</strong> regular forms it is conjugated like " Finire ."<br />
ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 73<br />
95
*Convincere, to convince. Past Part, convinto. Past Def. convinsi,<br />
&c.<br />
** Coprire , 1 to cover . Past Part, coperto.<br />
** Correggere, to correct. Past Part, corretto. Past Def. corressi,<br />
&c.<br />
** Correre , to run. Past Part, corso. Past Def. corsi, &c. 2<br />
*Corrispondere , to correspond. Past Part, corrisposto. Past Def.<br />
corrisposi , &c.<br />
Corrodere , to corrode. Past Part, corroso. Past Def. corrosi, &c.<br />
*Corrompere , to corrupt. Past Part, corrotto. Past Def. corruppi, &c.<br />
Costringere , to constrain. Past Part, costretto. Past Def. costrinsi,<br />
&c.<br />
*Crescere , to grow. Past Part, cresciuto. Past Def. crebbi , &c. 2<br />
*Cucire, to sew. Pres. Ind. cucio, cuci , cuce , &c. Imperative, cuci ,<br />
cucia , &c. Pres . Subj. che io cucia , &c.<br />
** Cuocere, to cook . Past Part. Cotto. Pres. Ind. cuocio, &c. Past<br />
Def. cossi, &c.<br />
D<br />
** Dare, to give. Ger. d<strong>and</strong>o. Past Part. dato. Pres. Ind. do, dai, dà ;<br />
diamo, date , danno. Past Def. diedi (or detti), desti, diede (dìe or<br />
dette) ; demmo, deste , diedero (or dettero). Fut. darò, &c.<br />
Imperative, da, dia ; diamo, date , diano. Pres. Subj. che i o dia, &c.<br />
Imperf . Subj. che io dessi , &c.<br />
Decadere , to decay. See " Cadere ."<br />
EXERCISE XXVII.<br />
I conducted (Past Def.) <strong>the</strong>m (mas. 193) into <strong>the</strong> (102) house . I do<br />
not know my uncle's friend. If (112) I knew that lady, I would<br />
speak to her (193). The castle contains <strong>many</strong> good pictures. I<br />
always cover <strong>the</strong> bird's cage (in) <strong>the</strong> evening. I corrected (Past<br />
Def.) his exercises yesterday, <strong>and</strong> I shall correct George's<br />
exercises to- morrow morning. When I met (Past Def.) him he was<br />
running (179) towards <strong>the</strong> church. Why did you give him (why<br />
have you given him) (193, 122) your dictionary ? I gave (Past Def.)<br />
it (to) him (219) because he asked (dom<strong>and</strong>are a) me for it (218,<br />
251). Give him (201) a watch. I desire to take (condurre) him 3 to<br />
school.<br />
96
1 In <strong>the</strong> regular forms it is conjugated like " Servire ."<br />
2 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
3 When personal pronouns are joined to verbs in <strong>the</strong> infinitive<br />
(198) ending in rre, <strong>the</strong> re is omitted .<br />
74 ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS.<br />
** Decidere , to decide . Past Part, deciso. Past Def. decisi , &c.<br />
*Dedurre , to deduce , to deduct, is contracted from " Deducere ,"<br />
<strong>and</strong> is, <strong>the</strong>refore, conjugated thus : Ger. deducendo. Pres. Ind.<br />
deduce, &c.<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, dedotto. Past Def. dedussi , &c.<br />
Fut. dedurrò, &c.<br />
*Deludere , to delude. Past Part, deluso. Past Def. delusi , &c.<br />
*Deporre, to depose, is contracted from "Deponere ." See " Porre."<br />
Deprimere , to depress. Past Part, depresso. Past Def. depressi , &c.<br />
*Deridere , to deride . Past Part, deriso. Past Def. derisi , &c.<br />
**Descrivere, to describe . Past Part, descritto. Past Def. descrissi,<br />
&c.<br />
Detrarre , to detract, is contracted from " Detraere ." See " Trarre ."<br />
** Difendere , to defend. Past Part, difeso. Past Def. difesi , &c.<br />
Diffondere , to squ<strong>and</strong>er, to spread out. Past Part, diffuse. Past Def.<br />
diffusi, &c.<br />
** Dipingere , to paint. Past Part, dipinto. Past Def. dipinsi , &c.<br />
** Dire , to tell, to say, is contracted from " Dicere," <strong>and</strong> is,<br />
<strong>the</strong>refore, conjugated thus: Ger. dicendo. Pres. Ind. dico, dici, dice<br />
; diciamo , dite, dicono.<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, detto. Past Def. dissi, dicesti ,<br />
disse ; dicemmo, diceste , dissero. Fut. dirò, &c. Imperative, di',<br />
dica ; diciamo , dite, dicano. Pres . Subj. che i o dica, &c.<br />
*Dirigere , to direct . Past Part, diretto. Past Def. diressi , &c.<br />
*Discendere , to descend. Past Part, disceso . Past Def. discesi , &c.<br />
*Discorrere , to speak , to discourse . Past Part, discorso. Past Def.<br />
discorsi , &c.<br />
*Discutere , to discuss. Past Part, discusso. Past Def. discussi , &c.<br />
Disdire , (263) to deny, to be unbecoming Conjugated like " Dire ."<br />
97
Disdirsi , 1 (263) to unsay.<br />
Dispergere , to disperse . Past Part, disperse . Pret. Ind. dispersi ,<br />
&c.<br />
** Dispiacere a, (263, 289) to displease. Past Part, dispiaciuto.<br />
Pres. Ind. dispiaccio, dispiaci, dispiace ; dispiacciamo, dispiacete,<br />
dispiacciono. Past Def. dispiacqui , &c. Imperative, dispiaci,<br />
dispiaccia ; dispiacciamo, dispiacete. dispiacciano. Pres. Subj.<br />
che i o dispiaccia , &c.<br />
1 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 75<br />
** Disporre, to dispose, is contracted from " Disponere ," <strong>and</strong> is,<br />
<strong>the</strong>refore, conjugated thus : Ger. disponendo. Imp. Ind. disponevo,<br />
&c.<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, disposto. Pres. Ind. dispongo,<br />
disponi, dispone ; disponiamo, disponete , dispongono. Fut.<br />
disporrò, &c. Past Def. disposi, &c. Imperative, disponi, disponga,<br />
&c. Pres . Subj. che io disponga, &c.<br />
Dissolvere , to dissolve . Past Part, dissolto (or dissoluto).<br />
Dissuadere, to dissuade. Past Part, dissuaso. Past Def. dissuasi,<br />
&c.<br />
Distendere, to extend, to stretch out. Past Part, disteso. Past Def.<br />
distesi , &c.<br />
*Distinguere, to distinguish. Past Part, distinto. Past Def. distinsi,<br />
&c.<br />
Distogliere (contracted into " Distorre ") to divert from . See "<br />
Togliere ."<br />
Distrarre , to distract. See " Trarre ."<br />
*Distruggere , to destroy. Past Part, distrutto. Past Def. distrussi,<br />
&c.<br />
** Divenire , to become . Past Part, divenuto. Pres. Ind. divengo,<br />
divieni, diviene ; diveniamo, divenite, divengono. Past Def.<br />
divenni, &c. Fut. diverrò, &c. Imperative, divieni, divenga ;<br />
diveniamo , &c. Pres . Subj. che io divenga , &c. 1<br />
** Dividere , to divide. Past Part, diviso. Past Def. divisi , &c.<br />
EXERCISE XXVIII.<br />
98
I have decided to travel during <strong>the</strong> winter. They defended (Past<br />
Def.) me bravely. He described (Past Def.) <strong>the</strong> town correctly. He<br />
desired 2 (Past Def.) me to paint (for) him (213) a picture . She<br />
always tells <strong>the</strong> truth, <strong>and</strong> yet nobody believes (to) her (193). I will<br />
tell it to him (219) again this evening. If I told her what you have<br />
said, she would get cross (adirarsi ). He disposes of his money<br />
wisely. Frederick became (Past Def.) rich in three years. Divide<br />
<strong>the</strong>se strawberries between you <strong>and</strong> Elizabeth.<br />
1 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with "Essere ."<br />
300. 2 When to desire means to wish, it is translated by "<br />
Desiderare ." Ex.<br />
Desidera di <strong>and</strong>are alla campagna .<br />
He wishes to go into <strong>the</strong> country.<br />
301. When to desire means to ask, to beg, it is translated by "<br />
Pregare " or "Dire ." Ex.<br />
Mi pregò d' assistere alla ceremonia .<br />
He desired me to be present at <strong>the</strong> ceremony .<br />
302. When to desire means to comm<strong>and</strong>, it is translated by "<br />
Com<strong>and</strong>are . " Ex.<br />
Mi com<strong>and</strong>ò di partir subito.<br />
He desired me to leave at once.<br />
76 ON' THE IRREGULAR VERBS.<br />
*Dolere, to ache. Past Part, doluto. Pres. Ind. dolgo, duoli , duole ;<br />
dogliamo, delete , dolgono. Past Def. dolsi , &c. Fut. doglierò (or<br />
dorrò), &c. Pres . Subj. che io dolga, &c.<br />
** Dolersi , to complain, is conjugated like " Dolere," but it is used<br />
also in <strong>the</strong> Imperative : du oliti, si dolga ; dogliamoci, doletevi, si<br />
dolgano. 1<br />
** Dovere, to owe, to be obliged. Past Part. dovuto. Pres. Ind. Devo<br />
2 (debbo, or deggio), devi, deve (or dee); dobbiamo, dovete, devono<br />
(or debbono). Fut. dovrò, &c. Pres. Subj. che i o debba (or deggia),<br />
che tu debba, ch' egli debba; che dobbiamo, che, dobbiate , che<br />
debbano (or deggiano ).<br />
E<br />
*Eleggere , to elect . Past Part, eletto . Pres . Ind. elessi , &c.<br />
Emergere , to emerge . Past Part emerso . Past Def. emersi , &c.<br />
99
Erigere , to erect . Past Part, eretto . Past Def. eressi , &c.<br />
*Escludere, to exclude . Past Part, escluso . Past Def. esclusi , &c.<br />
Esigere , to exact . Past Part, esatto .<br />
Espellere , to expel. Past Part, espulso. Past Def. espulsi , &c.<br />
** Esporre, to expose, is contracted from " Esponere."<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, esposto. Pres. Ind. espongo,<br />
esponi , espone ; esponiamo, esponete , espongono. Past Def.<br />
esposi, &c. Fut. esporrò, &c. Imperative, esponi , esponga, &c.<br />
Pres . Subj. che i o esponga, &c.<br />
*Esprimere, to express. Past Part, espresso. Past Def. espressi,<br />
&c.<br />
*Estendere , to extend. Past Part, esteso . Past Def. estesi , &c.<br />
*Estinguere, to extinguish. Past Part, estinto. Past Def. estinsi,<br />
&c.<br />
*Estrarre, to extract , is contracted from " Estraere ." See " Trarre ."<br />
F<br />
** Fare , to do, to make, is contracted from "Facere ," <strong>and</strong> is<br />
<strong>the</strong>refore conjugated thus : Ger. facendo. Imp. Ind. facevo , &c.<br />
Its irregular forms are: Past Part, fatto. Pres. Ind. faccio or fo, fai,<br />
fa ; facciamo, fate, fanno. Past Def. feci, facesti, fece ; facemmo,<br />
faceste, fecero. Fut. farò, &c. Imperative, fa, faccia ; facciamo,<br />
fate, facciano. Pres. Subj. che io faccia, &c. Imp. Subj. che i o<br />
facessi , &c.<br />
1 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with "Essere ."<br />
2 " Devo," " devi," " deve ," &c., mean also I must, you must, he<br />
must, &c.<br />
ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 77<br />
Fendere , to split. Past Part, fesso.<br />
*Fingere , to feign . Past Part, finto. Past Def. finsi , &c.<br />
*Fondere, to melt . Past Part. fuso. Past Def. fusi, &c.<br />
Frammettere , to interpose . Past Part, frammesso. Past Def.<br />
frammisi , &c.<br />
Frangere , to break . Past Part, franto. Past Def. fransi , &c.<br />
Friggere , to fry. Past Part, fritto. Past Def. frissi , &c.<br />
100
G<br />
Giacere , to lie down. Past Part, giaciuto . Past Def. giacqui , &c.<br />
** Giungere , to arrive . Past Part, giunto. Past Def. giunsi , &c. 1<br />
I<br />
Illudere , to delude. Past Part, illuso. Past Def. illusi , &c.<br />
Immergere, to immerge. Past Part, immerso. Past Def. immersi,<br />
&c.<br />
*Imporre , to impose , is contracted from " Imponere ." See " Porre."<br />
*Imprimere , to impress. Past Part, impresso. Past Def. impressi ,<br />
&c.<br />
*Incidere , to engrave . Past Part, inciso . Past Def. incisi , &c.<br />
*Includere , to include . Past Part, incluso . Past Def. inclusi , &c.<br />
*Incorrere , to incur . Past Part, incorso . Past Def. incorsi , &c.<br />
Increscere, to be sorry, to be weary (Impersonal), Past Part,<br />
incresciuto . Past Def. increbbe , &c.<br />
** Indurre , to induce , is contracted from " Inducere ," <strong>and</strong> is,<br />
<strong>the</strong>refore, conjugated thus : Ger. inducendo. Pres. Ind. induce ,<br />
&c.<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, indotto. Past Def. indussi, &c.<br />
Fut, indurrò, &c.<br />
Infondere , to infuse . Past Part, infuso. Past Def. infusi , &c.<br />
Inscrivere, to inscribe. Past Part, inscritto. Past Def. inscrissi,<br />
&c.<br />
Insistere , to insist . Past Part, insistito .<br />
EXERCISE XXIX.<br />
James complains of your conduct. I am obliged to go to Paris to<br />
buy some presents for my cousin Margaret. We owe (to) him some<br />
money for <strong>the</strong> house he built for us (213). If (112) I were obliged to<br />
(226) speak before this crowd of people , it would displease me very<br />
much. What (che cosa) are you doing (179) now, Louisa ? I am<br />
making a bonnet for Charlotte. Yesterday I made a waistcoat for<br />
Frederick . I shall induce Charles to go to Scotl<strong>and</strong>.<br />
1 The compound forms of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
78 ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS.<br />
*Intendere , to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong>. Past Part, inteso . Past Def. intesi , &c.<br />
101
Interporre , to interpose , is contracted from " Interponere." See<br />
"Porre."<br />
*Interrompere , to interrupt. Past Part, interrotto. Past Def.<br />
interruppi , &c.<br />
*Intraprendere, to <strong>under</strong>take. Past Part, intrapreso. Past Def.<br />
intrapresi , &c.<br />
** Introdurre , to introduce , is contracted from " Introducere ," <strong>and</strong><br />
is <strong>the</strong>refore conjugated thus: Ger. introducendo. Pres. Ind.<br />
introduce , &c.<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, introdotto. Past Def. introdussi,<br />
&c. Fut. introdurrò, &c.<br />
*Intrudere , to intrude . Past Part, intruso . Past Def. intrusi , &c.<br />
*Invadere , to invade . Past Part, invaso . Past Def. invasi , &c.<br />
*Involgere, to involve , to wrap in. Past Part, involto. Past Def.<br />
inv olsi, &c.<br />
Istruire , 1 to instruct . Past Def. istrussi , &c.<br />
L<br />
Ledere , to offend. Past Part. leso. Past Def. lesi , &c.<br />
** Leggere , to read. Past Part, letto. Past Def. lessi , &c.<br />
M<br />
Maledire , to curse , is contracted from " Maledicere ." See " Dire ."<br />
*Mantenere, to maintain. Pres. Ind. mantengo, mantieni,<br />
mantiene ; manteniamo, mantenete, mantengono. Past Def.<br />
mantenni, &c. Fut. manterrò, &c. Imperative, mantieni,<br />
mantenga ; manteniamo , &c. Pres . Subj. che io mantenga , &c.<br />
** Mettere , to put. Past Part, messo . Past Def. misi (or messi ), &c.<br />
*Mordere , to bite. Past Part. morso. Past Def. morsi , &c.<br />
*Morire, to die. Past Part, morto. Pres. Ind. muoio, muori , muore ;<br />
moriamo, morite, muoiono (or muorono). Fut. morirò (or morrò ),<br />
&c. Imperative, muori , muoia ; moriamo, morite, muoiano. Pres.<br />
Subj. che i o muoia , &c. 1<br />
Mungere , to milk . Past Part, munto. Past Def. munsi , &c.<br />
Muovere 2 to move . Past Part, mosso. Past Def. mossi, movesti,<br />
&c.<br />
1 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
102
2 When in <strong>the</strong> verb " Muovere " <strong>the</strong> tonic accent does not fall on<br />
<strong>the</strong> o, <strong>the</strong> letter u may be omitted; as "movendo," " moviamo," "<br />
moverò ," instead of " muovendo,"&c.<br />
ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 79<br />
N<br />
** Nascere , to be bom. Past Part. nato. Past Def. nacqui , 1 &c.<br />
**Nascondere , to hide . Past Part, nascosto (or nascoso). Past Def.<br />
nascosi , &c.<br />
*Negligere , to neglect . Past Part, negletto . Past Def. neglessi , &c.<br />
Nuocere , 2 to hurt. Past Part, nociuto. Past Def. nocqui, &c.<br />
O<br />
Occorrere , to be in need of, to happen (Imper. 286). Past Part,<br />
occorso. Past Def. occorse . 1<br />
** Offendere , to offend. Past Part, offeso. Past Def. offesi , &c.<br />
**Offrire 3 to offer. Past Part, offerto. Past Def. offersi (or offrii ), &c.<br />
*Ommettere , to omit . Past Part, ommesso . Past Def. ommisi , &c.<br />
**Opporre , to oppose , is contracted from " Opponere," <strong>and</strong> is,<br />
<strong>the</strong>refore, conjugated thus : Ger. opponendo. Imp. Ind. opponevo,<br />
&c.<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part. opposto. Pres. Ind. oppongo,<br />
opponi, oppone ; opponiamo, opponete , oppongono. Past Def. opposi ,<br />
&c. Fut. opporrò, &c. Imperative, opponi, opponga ; &c. Pres. Subj.<br />
che i o opponga, &c.<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
Una satira , a satire Questa elezione , this election<br />
Una cornice , a frame La mia patria, my native l<strong>and</strong><br />
EXERCISE XXX.<br />
Has your bro<strong>the</strong>r read " La Gerusalemme Liberata ? " Yes, he has<br />
(208) ; <strong>and</strong> he is now reading (179) " L' Orl<strong>and</strong>o Furioso." Do not<br />
read satires, you will learn little from (in) <strong>the</strong>m (238). Louisa<br />
always (181) puts her books on my table . Here is <strong>the</strong> picture ; put<br />
a frame to it (238). Charles was born in Engl<strong>and</strong>. Dante was born<br />
4 in Florence in <strong>the</strong> (103) year 1265. Do not offend Henry ; he will<br />
not pardon you. I oppose his election because he does not love his<br />
native l<strong>and</strong>.<br />
1 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
103
2 When in <strong>the</strong> verb "Nuocere " <strong>the</strong> tonic accent does not fall on<br />
<strong>the</strong> o, <strong>the</strong> letter u maybe omitted ; as " nocendo," " nociamo," "<br />
nocerò," instead of " nuocendo," &c.<br />
3 In <strong>the</strong> regular forms it is conjugated like " Servire ."<br />
303. 4 I was born , thou wast born , &c., must be translated by "<br />
sono nato,"" sei nato," &c. , when we speak of persons still living;<br />
but by "nacque ," " nacquero ," when speaking of persons dead.<br />
80 ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS.<br />
Opporsi, to oppose, is conjugated like " Opporre." 1<br />
*Opprimere , to oppress. Past Part. oppresso. Past Def. oppressi, &c.<br />
** Ottenere , to obtain. Pres. Ind. ottengo, ottieni, ottiene ;<br />
otteniamo, ottenete , ottengono. Past Def. ottenni, &c. Fut. otterrò,<br />
&c. Imperative, ottieni, ottenga ; otteniamo, &c. Pres. Subj. che i o<br />
ottenga , &c.<br />
P<br />
** Parere, to appear. Past Part, parso. Pres. Ind. paio, pari , pare ;<br />
paiamo, parete , paiono. Past Def. parsi (or parvi ), &c. Fut. parrò,<br />
&c. Imperative, pari , paia ; paiamo, parete , paiano. Pres. Subj.<br />
che i o paia, &c. 1<br />
Pendere , to hang up, to incline . Past Part. peso. Past Def. pesi, &c.<br />
Percorrere , to go over. Past Part, percorso. Past Def. percorsi , &c.<br />
*Percuotere 2 to strike. Past Part. percosso. Past Def. percossi,<br />
&c.<br />
** Permettere, to permit. Past Part, permesso. Past Def. permisi,<br />
&c.<br />
Persistere , to persist . Past Part, persistito .<br />
*Persuadere , to persuade. Past Part, persuaso. Past Def.<br />
persuasi ,&c.<br />
**Piacere a, to please . Past Part, piaciuto. Pres. Ind. piaccio, piaci ,<br />
piace ; piacciamo, piacete, piacciono. Past Def. piacqui, &c.<br />
Imperative, piaci , piaccia ; piacciamo, &c. Pres. Subj. che i o<br />
piaccia , &c.<br />
** Piangere , to weep. Past Part, pianto. Past Def. piansi , &c.<br />
Pingere , 3 to paint. Past Part, pinto. Past Def. pinsi , &c.<br />
*Piovere , to rain (Imper . 291). Past Part. piovuto. Past Def.<br />
104
*Porgere , to present , to h<strong>and</strong>. Past Part, porto. Past Def. Porsi, &c.<br />
** Porre, to put, is contracted from " Ponere ," <strong>and</strong> is <strong>the</strong>refore<br />
conjugated thus : Ger. ponendo. Imp. Ind. ponevo, &c.<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, posto. Pres. Ind. pongo, poni,<br />
pone ; poniamo, ponete, pongono. Past Def. posi , &c. Fut. porrò, &c.<br />
Imperative , poni, ponga, &c. Pres . Subj. che i o ponga, &c.<br />
Posporre , to postpone, is contracted from " Posponere ." See "<br />
Porre."<br />
1 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
2 When in <strong>the</strong> verb " Percuotere " <strong>the</strong> tonic accent does not fall on<br />
<strong>the</strong> o, <strong>the</strong> letter u may be omitted ; as " percotendo," "<br />
percotiamo ," " percoterò ," instead of " percuotendo," &c.<br />
3 In verbs ending in " angere," " engere," " ingere," <strong>and</strong> " ungere,"<br />
<strong>the</strong> n is sometimes placed after <strong>the</strong> g. Ex. " Egli piagne ," he<br />
weeps, instead of " Egli piange ."<br />
ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 81<br />
*Possedere , to possess. Past Part, posseduto. Pres. Ind. possiedo<br />
(or posseggo), possiedi, possiede ; possediamo, possedete ,<br />
possiedono (or posseggono). Imperative , possiedi,<br />
possegga, &c. Pres . Subj. che io possegga, &c.<br />
** Potere, to be able . Pres. Ind. posso, puoi , può ; possiamo, potete,<br />
possono. Fut. Potrò, &c. Pres . Subj. che i o possa, &c.<br />
Precorrete , to forerun . Past Part, precorso. Past Def. precorsi , &c.<br />
*Predire , to predict, is contracted from " Predicere ." See " Dire ."<br />
Prefiggere , to prefix. Past Part, prefisso. Past Def. prefissi , &c.<br />
Premettere , to place before. See " Mettere ."<br />
** Prendere , to take . Past Part, preso. Past Def. presi , &c.<br />
Preporre , to prefer , is contracted from " Preponere ." See " Porre."<br />
*Prescrivere, to prescribe. Past Part, prescritto. Past Def.<br />
prescrissi , &c.<br />
Presumere, to presume . Past Part, presunto. Past Def. presunsi,<br />
&c.<br />
*Pretendere , to claim . Past Part, preteso . Past Def. pretesi , &c.<br />
*Prevalere , to prevail . See " Valere ."<br />
105
Prevedere , to foresee . See " Vedere ."<br />
** Pr odurre , to produce , is contracted from " Producere ," <strong>and</strong> is<br />
<strong>the</strong>refore conjugated thus : Ger. producendo. Pres. Ind. produce ,<br />
&c.<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, prodotto. Past Def. produssi , &c.<br />
Fut. produrrò, &c. Imperative, produci produca, &c. Pres. Subj. che<br />
io produca, &c.<br />
EXERCISE XXXI.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r always obtains what (ciò che) he desires (300).<br />
They appear rich, but <strong>the</strong>y are very poor. The king permitted<br />
(Past Def.) (to) us to enter (183) <strong>the</strong> city. When <strong>the</strong>y heard (Past<br />
Def.) <strong>the</strong> news, <strong>the</strong>y wept. I put ( Past Def.) <strong>the</strong> ring on your table .<br />
If (112) I could 1 induce William to go 2 with us, I should be<br />
happy. He could (potere ) (Past Def.) not answer my question . 3<br />
304. 1 When "I could" means "I might" it is translated by " Potere ."<br />
305. 2 When to go is used in <strong>the</strong> sense of to accompany, it is<br />
translated not by " Andare," but by " Accompagnare " to<br />
accompany, or " Venire ," to come . Ex.<br />
Vuol'ella venire in Italia con me?<br />
Will you go to Italy with me?<br />
306.3 When question means argument, it is translated into<br />
Italian by " Questione ;" when it means dispute , it is translated by<br />
" Lite"; but when it means inquiry, it is translated by " Dom<strong>and</strong>a,"<br />
" Interrogazione ," " Quesito."<br />
82 ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS.<br />
Profondere, to dissipate . Past Part, profuso. Past Def. profusi, &c.<br />
** Pr omettere, to promise. Past Part, promesso. Past Def. promisi,<br />
&c.<br />
Pr omuovere, 1 to promote . Past Part, promosso. Past Def.<br />
promossi, &c.<br />
** Pr oporre, to propose , is contracted from " Proponere ." See "<br />
Porre."<br />
Prorompere, to break forth. Past Part, prorotto. Past Def. proruppi,<br />
&c.<br />
Pr oscrivere, to proscribe . Past Part, proscritto. Past Def.<br />
proscrissi , &c.<br />
106
**Proteggere , to protect. Past Part, protetto. Past Def. protessi , &c.<br />
*Provvedere , to provide. See " Vedere ."<br />
Protrarre, to protract, is contracted from " Protraere." See "<br />
Trarre ."<br />
Pungere , to prick. Past Part, punto. Past Def. punsi, &c.<br />
R<br />
** Raccogliere , to pick up, to collect. Past Part. raccolto. Pres. Ind.<br />
raccolgo, raccogli, raccoglie ; raccogliamo, raccogliete, raccolgono.<br />
Past Def. raccolsi, &c. Fut. Raccoglierò, (or raccorrò), &c.<br />
Imperative , raccogli, raccolga, &c. Pres . Subj. che io raccolga, &c.<br />
Radere , to shave . Past Part. raso. Past Def. rasi , &c.<br />
Raggiungere, to overtake . Past Part, raggiunto. Past Def.<br />
raggiunsi , &c.<br />
Redimere , to redeem . Past Part, redento . Past Def. redensi , &c.<br />
Reggere , to rule , to support. Past Part, retto. Past Def. ressi , &c.<br />
** Rendere , to render, to restore . Past Part. reso. Past Def. resi,<br />
&c.<br />
Reprimere , to repress . Past Part, represso . Past Def. repressi , &c.<br />
Ricomporre , to compose again, is contracted from " Ricomponere."<br />
See " Porre."<br />
** Riconoscere , to recognise . See " Conoscere ."<br />
Ricorrere , to have recourse. Past Part, ricorso. Past Def. ricorsi ,<br />
&c.<br />
** Ridere , to laugh. Past Part. riso. Past Def. risi , &c.<br />
Ridire , (264) to repeat , is contracted from " Ridicere ." See " Dire . "<br />
1 When in <strong>the</strong> verb " Promuovere" <strong>the</strong> tonic accent does not fall<br />
on <strong>the</strong> o, <strong>the</strong> letter u may be omitted ; as " promovendo," "<br />
promoviamo ," "promoverò," instead of " promuovendo," &c.<br />
ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 83<br />
** Ridurre , to reduce , is contracted from " Riducere ," <strong>and</strong> is,<br />
<strong>the</strong>refore , conjugated thus: Ger.riducendo. Pres . Ind. riduco, &c.<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, ridotto. Past Def. ridussi , &c.<br />
Fut. ridurrò, &c.<br />
** Rimanere , to remain. Past Part, rimasto (or rimaso). Pres. Ind.<br />
rimango, rimani, rimane ; rimaniamo, rimanete, rimangono.<br />
107
Past Def. rimasi, &c. Fut. rimarrò, &c. Imperative, rimani,<br />
rimanga , &c. Pres . Subj. che io rimanga , &c. 1<br />
Rinchiudere, to shut up. Past Part, rinchiuso. Past Def. rinchiusi ,<br />
&c.<br />
*Rincrescere , to weary, to vex (as an impersonal verb, to be sorry<br />
for ; see rule 289). Past Part, rincresciuto . Past Def. rincrebbi , &c.<br />
Riprendere, to take back , to correct. Past Part, ripreso. Past Def.<br />
ripresi , &c.<br />
*Riscuotere , 2 to receive in payment, to exact. Past Part.<br />
Riscosso. Past Def. riscossi , &c.<br />
Risorgere , to rise again . Past Part, risorto. Past Def. risorsi , &c.<br />
** Rispondere , to answer . Past Part, risposto. Past Def. risposi, &c.<br />
Ritorcere, to twist, to wring. Past Part. ritorto. Past Def. ritorsi,<br />
&c.<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
La stravaganza , <strong>the</strong> extravagance Il nemico , <strong>the</strong> enemy<br />
Il travestimento , <strong>the</strong> disguise La povertà, poverty<br />
Ebbene ! Well ! Contro, incontro , against Indietro , behind<br />
EXERCISE XXXII.<br />
Do you not remember that you promised (180) to give me (198)<br />
your (131) dog ? Yes, <strong>and</strong> I will give it to you (218-220) on (147)<br />
Saturday. Man proposes, God disposes. We shall protect him (193)<br />
against all his enemies. I shall restore to him <strong>the</strong> paint-brushes<br />
(260) he lent (Past Def.) (to) me last week. In spite of his disguise<br />
she recognised (Past Def.) him at once. His extravagance will<br />
soon reduce him to (<strong>the</strong>) poverty. Why did you remain (Past Def.)<br />
behind yesterday ? I remained behind to (225) see if I could<br />
induce Frederick to go (305) with us. He answered (Past Def.) very<br />
prudently.<br />
1 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
2 When in <strong>the</strong> verb " Riscuotere " <strong>the</strong> tonic accent does not fall on<br />
<strong>the</strong> o, <strong>the</strong> letter u may be omitted; as " riscotendo," " riscotiamo,"<br />
" riscoterò ," instead of " riscuotendo ," &c.<br />
84 ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS.<br />
Ritrarre , to draw out, to portray. See " Trarre ."<br />
** Riuscire (or Riescire ) to succeed. Past Part, riuscito. Pres. Ind.<br />
riesco, riesci, riesce ; riusciamo (or riesciamo), riuscite,<br />
108
iescono. Imperative, riesci, riesca ; riusciamo, riuscite,<br />
riescano . Pres . Subj. che io riesca , &c.1<br />
Rivolgere, to turn over, to revolve . Past Part. rivolto. Past Def.<br />
rivolsi , &c.<br />
Rivolgersi , to direct one's -self to, is conjugated like " Rivolgere ."<br />
Rodere, to gnaw. Past Part. roso. Past Def. rosi, &c.<br />
** Rompere , to break . Past Part, rotto. Past Def. ruppi , &c.<br />
Rompersi , to get broken, is conjugated like " Rompere ." 1 S<br />
** Salire, to ascend. Pres. Ind. salgo, sali , sale ; sagliamo, salite ,<br />
salgono. Past Def. salsi (or salii ), &c. Imperative, sali , saiga ;<br />
sagliamo , &c. Pres . Subj. che io saiga , &c.<br />
** Sapere, to know (through <strong>the</strong> mind). Past Part, saputo. Pres.<br />
Ind. so, sai, sa ; sappiamo, sapete , sanno. Past Def. seppi, &c. Fut.<br />
saprò, &c. Imperative, sappi , sappia ; sappiamo, sappiate, 2<br />
sappiano. Pres . Subj. che io sappia, &c.<br />
Scadere , to decline (in value , health), to come due. Past Part,<br />
scaduto. Past Def. scaddi, &c. Fut. scadrò, &c. 1<br />
** Scegliere (or Scerre), to choose. Past Part, scelto. Pres. Ind.<br />
scelgo, scegli , sceglie ; scegliamo, scegliete, scelgono. Past Def.<br />
scelsi, &c. Fut. sceglierò (or scerrò), &c. Imperative, scegli , scelga<br />
; scegliamo , &c. Pres . Subj. che i o scelga , &c.<br />
*Scendere , to descend. Past Part, sceso . Past Def. scesi , &c.<br />
Sciogliere (or sciorre ), to untie , to unravel. Past Part. Sci olto.<br />
Pres. Ind. sciolgo, sciogli, scioglie ; sciogliamo, sciogliete,<br />
sciolgono. Past Def. sciolsi, &c. Fut. scioglierò (or sciorrò), &c.<br />
Imperative, sciogli, sciolga ; sagliamo, &c. Pres. Subj. che i o<br />
sciolga, &c.<br />
*Scommettere , to bet. Past Part, scommesso. Past Def. scommisi<br />
(or scommessi ), &c.<br />
Scomporre, to discompose , is contracted from " Scomponere ." See<br />
"Porre."<br />
Sconfiggere , to defeat . Past Part, sconfitto. Past Def. sconfissi , &c.<br />
1 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
2 Notice <strong>the</strong> irregularity of " Sapere " in <strong>the</strong> Imperative Mood.<br />
ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 85<br />
109
Sconvolgere, to overturn. Past Part, sconvolto. Past Def. sconvolsi,<br />
&c.<br />
*Scoprire (263), to discover . 1 Past Part, scoperto.<br />
*Scorgere , to perceive, to discern, to guide. Past Part. scorto. Past<br />
Def. scorsi , &c.<br />
Scorrere, to flow, to glide, to run quickly. Past Part, scorso. Past<br />
Def. scorsi , &c.<br />
** Scrivere , to write . Past Part, scritto . Past Def. scrissi , &c.<br />
Scuotere , 2 ! to shake . Past Part. scosso. Past Def. scossi, &c.<br />
** Sedere, to sit down. Past Part, seduto. Pres. Ind. seggo, siedi,<br />
siede ; sediamo, sedete , seggono. Imperative, siedi, segga ;<br />
sediamo , sedete , seggano . Pres . Subj. che i o segga , &c.<br />
Sedersi , to sit down, conjugated like " Sedere ."3<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
Una pianura , a plain L' indiri<strong>zz</strong>o , <strong>the</strong> address<br />
Una collina , a hill Questo colore, this colour<br />
Alia moda, in <strong>the</strong> fashion Benissimo , very well<br />
EXERCISE XXXIII.<br />
Well, have you succeeded (258) in your <strong>under</strong>taking ? No ; I shall<br />
never succeed. I ascend <strong>the</strong> hill every morning. It is necessary<br />
(bisognare)4 to start at once. If I knew Mr. John's address, I would<br />
write (to) him a letter. Can 5 he read ? Yes, he can read <strong>and</strong> write<br />
very well. Why have you chosen this colour ? I chose (180) it<br />
because it is in fashion. I would write to him every day, if (i 12) I<br />
<strong>had</strong> time . Have you written to <strong>the</strong> girl's uncle ? Yes, I wrote (Past<br />
Def.) to him yesterday .<br />
1 In <strong>the</strong> regular forms it is conjugated like " Servire ."<br />
2 When in <strong>the</strong> verb " Scuotere " <strong>the</strong> tonic accent does not fall on<br />
<strong>the</strong> o, <strong>the</strong> letter u may be omitted; as "scotendo," " scotiamo," "<br />
scotete ," instead of "scuotendo," &c.<br />
3 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
307. 4 The verbs " Bisognare ," to be necessary, " Fare ," to make, "<br />
Lasciare ," to allow, " Dovere," to be obliged, " Intendere," to hear, "<br />
Potere," to be able , " Sapere," to know how, " Solere ," to be<br />
accustomed, " Volere," to be willing, " Sentire," to feel, or to hear,<br />
110
<strong>and</strong> " Udire," to hear, do not require any preposition after <strong>the</strong>m,<br />
when <strong>the</strong>y are followed by a verb in <strong>the</strong> Infinitive . Ex.<br />
Bisogna esser forte per lottare con lui.<br />
One must be strong to wrestle with him.<br />
Dovreste comprargli un paio di stivali .<br />
You ought to buy him a pair of boots.<br />
Voglio sapere se il Conte è arrivato .<br />
I want to know if <strong>the</strong> Count has arrived .<br />
308. 5 When can <strong>and</strong> could are used in <strong>the</strong> sense of to know how,<br />
<strong>the</strong>y are translated into Italian by " Sapere ."<br />
86 ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS.<br />
Sedurre, to seduce , is contracted from " Seducere," <strong>and</strong> is,<br />
<strong>the</strong>refore, conjugated thus : Ger. seducendo. Pres. Ind. seduco,<br />
&c.<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, sedotto. Past Def. sedussi, &c.<br />
Fut. sedurrò, &c.<br />
Seppellire , to bury. Past Part, sepolto or seppellito .<br />
Smettere, (263) to leave off. Past Part, smesso. Past Def. smisi (or<br />
smessi ), &c.<br />
Socchiudere, to half shut. Past Part, socchiuso. Past Def.<br />
socchiusi , &c.<br />
*Soccorrere, to succour. Past Part, soccorso. Past Def. soccorsi ,<br />
&c.<br />
Sodisfare , to satisfy, is contracted from " Sodisfacere," <strong>and</strong> is,<br />
<strong>the</strong>refore, conjugated thus : Ger. sodisfacendo. Imp. Ind.<br />
sodisfacevo , &c.<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, sodisfatto. Pres. Ind.<br />
Sodisfaccio (or sodisfo), sodisfi, sodisfa; sodisfacciamo, sodisfate ,<br />
sodisfano. Past Def. sodisfeci, sodisfacesti, sodisfece , &c. Fut.<br />
sodisfarò, &c. Imperative, sodisfa, sodisfaccia ; sodisfacciamo,<br />
sodisfate , sodisfano. Pres . Subj. che i o sodisfaccia , &c.<br />
*Soffrire, to suffer. Past Part, sofferto. Past Def. soffersi (or soffrii),<br />
&c.<br />
*Soggiungere, to add. Past Part, soggiunto. Past Def. soggiunsi ,<br />
&c.<br />
111
Sommergere, to submerge . Past Part, sommerso. Past Def.<br />
sommersi , &c.<br />
** Solere (or Esser solito), to be accustomed. Past Part, solito.<br />
Pres. Ind. Soglio, suoli, suole ; Sogliamo, Solete, sogliono ; or sono<br />
solito, sei solito, &c. Imp. Ind. solevo, &c., or ero solito, &c. Pres.<br />
Subj. che io Soglia, &c., or che i o sia solito, &c. Imp. Subj. che io<br />
Solessi , &c., or che i o fossi solito, &c.<br />
Sommettere , to submit. See " Mettere ."<br />
Sopraggiungere , to come unexpectedly . See " Giungere ."<br />
Soprastare , to be above, to domineer . See " Stare . " 1<br />
Sopravvivere , to survive . See " Vivere ."<br />
Sopprimere , to suppress. Past Part, soppresso. Past Def. soppressi ,<br />
&c.<br />
1 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 87<br />
*Sorgere , to rise . Past Part, sorto, &c. Past Def. sorsi, &c.<br />
*Sorprendere , to surprise. Past Part, sorpreso. Past Def. sorpresi ,<br />
&c.<br />
Sorreggere , to support. Past Part, sorretto. Past Def. sorressi , &c.<br />
Sorridere , to smile . Past Part, sorriso. Past Def. sorrisi , &c.<br />
Sospendere , to suspend. Past Part, sospeso. Past Def. sospesi , &c.<br />
Sospingere , to push. Past Part, sospinto. Past Def. sospinsi , &c.<br />
** Sostenere, to sustain. Pres. Ind. sostengo, sostieni, sostiene ;<br />
sosteniamo, sostenete, sostengono. Past Def. Sostenni, &c. Fut.<br />
sosterrò, &c. Imperative, sostieni, sostenga ; sosteniamo, &c.<br />
Pres . Subj. che io sostenga , &c.<br />
Sottintendere , to be <strong>under</strong>stood. Past Part, sottinteso. Past Def.<br />
sottintesi , &c.<br />
*Sottomettere , to submit. See " Mettere ."<br />
Sottomettersi , to submit, is conjugated like " Sottomettere ." 1<br />
Sottoporre, to subdue. Past Part, sottoposto. Past Def. sottoposi,&c.<br />
*Sottoscrivere , to subscribe. See " Scritto ."<br />
Sottrarre , to draw away, is contracted from " Sottraere." See "<br />
Trarre ."<br />
EXERCISE XXXIV.<br />
112
My fa<strong>the</strong>r is accustomed (307) to get up (alzarsi) every morning at<br />
six o'clock. My uncle spent (Past Def.) too much money in (278)<br />
building his house . What is <strong>the</strong> name of 2 that lady ? I do not<br />
know ; but I believe she is called Mrs. James. You would have<br />
succeeded (258) in your <strong>under</strong>taking, but you have to deal with 3<br />
a rascal , who cheats (ingannare ) everybody.<br />
1 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
309. 2 The expressions What is <strong>the</strong> name of? What is called?<br />
What do you call? are expressed in Italian by <strong>the</strong> verb "<br />
Chiamarsi ." Ex.<br />
Come si chiama ?<br />
What is his name ?<br />
Si chiama il colonello Silvestri .<br />
He is called Colonel Silvestri .<br />
310. 3 To deal with is translated by " Aver da fare con." When <strong>the</strong><br />
preposition to precedes a verb in <strong>the</strong> Infinitive Mood, <strong>which</strong><br />
depends on <strong>the</strong> verbs to have or to be, it is expressed by " da," or<br />
by " a" ; by "da " when an idea of right or duty is to be indicated,<br />
<strong>and</strong> by "a" when no idea of right or duty is to be expressed . Ex.<br />
Avete da fare con un birbante.<br />
You have to deal with a rascal .<br />
È da considerarsi (or considerare ) che...<br />
It is to be considered that. ...<br />
Ho da scrivere tre lettere .<br />
I have three letters to write .<br />
Non è da negarsi che<br />
It is not to be denied that<br />
È facile a capirsi .<br />
It is easily <strong>under</strong>stood.<br />
Questi fiori sono belli a vedersi .<br />
These flowers are beautiful to look at.<br />
ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 88<br />
Sovvenire , to help, is conjugated like " Venire ."<br />
Sovvenirsi , to remember , is conjugated like " Venire . " 1<br />
Sp<strong>and</strong>ere , to spread. Past Part, spanto. Past Def. spansi, &c.<br />
*Spargere , to scatter . Past Part, sparse. Past Def. sparsi, &c.<br />
113
** Spendere , to spend. Past Part, speso. Past Def. spesi , &c.<br />
Spengere (or spegnere), to extinguish. Past Part, spento. Pres.<br />
Ind. spengo, spegni , spegne ; spegnamo, spegnete, spengono. Past<br />
Def. spensi, &c. Imperative, spegni , spenga ; spegnamo, spegnete,<br />
spengano. Pres . Subj. che i o spenga, &c.<br />
Spingere , to push. Past Part, spinto. Past Def. spinsi , &c.<br />
Sporgere , to project. Past Part. sporto. Past Def. sporsi, &c.<br />
** Stare, to be in health (to do], to dwell, to stay. Ger. st<strong>and</strong>o. Pres.<br />
Ind. sto, stai , sta ; stiamo, state , stanno. Past Def. stetti, stesti ,<br />
stette ; stemmo, steste , stettero. Fut. starò, &c. Imperative, sta,<br />
stia ; stiamo, state , stiano (orstieno). Pres. Subj. che i o stia, &c.<br />
Imp. Subj. che i o stessi , che tu stessi , &c. 1<br />
*Stendere , to extend. Past Part, steso. Past Def. stesi , &c.<br />
Storcere , to twist. Past Part, storto. Past Def. storsi , &c.<br />
Stravolgere , (265) to twist, to distort. Past Part. stravolto. Past Def.<br />
stravolsi, &c.<br />
*Stringere , to grasp, to tighten. Past Part, stretto. Past Def.<br />
strinsi , &c.<br />
Struggere, to melt, to dissolve . Past Part, strutto. Past Def.<br />
strussi , &c.<br />
Suddividere, to subdivide . Past Part, suddiviso. Past Def. suddivisi ,<br />
&c.<br />
Svellere , to pluck up. Past Part, svelto. Past Def. svelsi , &c.<br />
Svenire <strong>and</strong> Svenirsi , to faint away. 1 See " Venire ."<br />
Svolgere , to unfold, to develop, to dissuade. Past Part. svolto. Past<br />
Def. svolsi, &c.<br />
*Supporre , to suppose , to guess, is contracted from " Supponere,"<br />
See " Porre."<br />
T<br />
** Tacere, to be silent. Past Part, taciuto. Pres. Ind. taccio, taci ,<br />
tace ; tacciamo, tacete, tacciono. Past Def. tacqui, &c. Imperative,<br />
taci , taccia ; tacciamo , &c.<br />
1 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with " Essere ."<br />
ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 89<br />
114
Tendere, to tend, to incline to, to stretch. Past Part. teso. Past<br />
Def. tesi , &c.<br />
** Tenere, to keep, to hold. Pres. Ind. tengo, tieni, tiene ;<br />
teniamo, tenete, tengono. Past Def. tenni, &c. Fut. terrò, &c.<br />
Imperative, tieni, tenga; teniamo, &c. Pres. Subj. Che io tenga,<br />
&c.<br />
Tergere , to clean , to dry up. Past Part, terso. Past Def. tersi , &c.<br />
Tingere , to dye. Past Part, tinto. Pret. Ind. tinsi , &c.<br />
** Togliere (or Torre), to take away. Past Part, tolto. Pres. Ind.<br />
tolgo, togli , toglie; togliamo, togliete, tolgono. Past Def. tolsi, &c.<br />
Fut. toglierò (or torrò), &c. Imperative, togli, tolga ; togliamo, &c.<br />
Pres . Subj. che i o tolga, &c.<br />
Torcere , to twist. Past Part. torto. Past Def. torsi, &c.<br />
** Tradurre, to translate, is contracted from " Traducere," <strong>and</strong> is,<br />
<strong>the</strong>refore, conjugated thus : Ger. traducendo. Pres. Indo traduco,<br />
&c.<br />
Its irregular forms are : Past Part, tradotto. Past Def. tradussi, &c.<br />
Fut. tradurrò, &c. Cond. tradurrei , tradurresti , tradurrebbe ;<br />
tradurremmo , tradurreste , tradurebbero. 3<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
Buon giorno, good morning Come sta ? how do you do ?<br />
Un villaggio , a village Versi sciolti, blank verse<br />
Un canto, a canto Il vicinato , <strong>the</strong> neighbourhood<br />
EXERCISE XXXV.<br />
Good morning, sir, how do you do (120) ? I am very well to-day,<br />
thank (ringraziare) you (122, 193). Where do you live (stare) now ?<br />
I live in <strong>the</strong> country ; in a small village near Brighton. Have you<br />
been (149) to Paris ? No, I have not been <strong>the</strong>re (239). My bro<strong>the</strong>r<br />
is translating " La Divina Commedia," in blank verse . Yesterday<br />
he translated (Past Def.) two cantos (of it) (240). If I <strong>had</strong> friends in<br />
this neighbourhood, I would remain here (239) for 3 a week .<br />
1 See last note (3) on page 80.<br />
2 Notice that <strong>the</strong> initial e of <strong>the</strong> termination of <strong>the</strong> 1st <strong>and</strong> 3rd<br />
pers. sing, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> 3rd pers. plur. of <strong>the</strong> Conditional has always<br />
<strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> a in <strong>the</strong> word gate .<br />
311. 3 When for precedes a noun indicating time , it is ei<strong>the</strong>r not<br />
translated into Italian , or it is translated by " Durante ." Ex.<br />
115
Parlo tre ore di seguito .<br />
He spoke for three hours consecutively .<br />
Sono stato a Parigi sei giorni .<br />
I have been to Paris for six days.<br />
90 ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS.<br />
** Trarre, to draw, to lead, to live, is contracted from " Traere."<br />
Ger. traendo. Past Part, tratto. Pres. Ind. Traggo, trai , trae ;<br />
traiamo (or traggiamo), traete, traggono. Imp. Ind. traevo, &c. Past<br />
Def. trassi, traesti, &c. Fut. trarrò, &c. Imperative, trai , tragga ;<br />
traiamo , traete , traggano. Imp. Subj. che io traessi , &c.<br />
Trarsi , to betake one's -self. Conjugated like "Trarre ." 1<br />
Trascendere, to go beyond. Past Part, trasceso. Past Def. trascesi,<br />
' &c.<br />
Trascorrere , to elapse , to pass over quickly. Past Part, trascorso.<br />
Past Def. trascorsi , &c.<br />
Trasmettere, to transmit. Past Part, trasmesso. Past Def.<br />
trasmisi (or trasmessi ), &c.<br />
Trattenere , to stop, to entertain . See " Tenere ."<br />
U<br />
*Uccidere , to kill . Past Part, ucciso . Past Def. uccisi , &c.<br />
** Udire, to hear. Pres. Ind. odo, odi, ode ; udiamo, udite, odono.<br />
Fut. udrò (or udirò), &c. Imperative, odi, oda ; udiamo, udite,<br />
odano. Pres . Subj. che i o oda, &c.<br />
Ungere , to anoint . Past Part. unto. Past Def. unsi , &c. 2<br />
** Uscire (or Escire ), to go out. Past Part, uscito. Pres. Ind. esco,<br />
esci, esce ; usciamo, uscite , escono. Imperative, esci, esca;<br />
usciamo , uscite , escano . Pres . Subj. che i o esca , &c. 1<br />
** Valere , to be worth. Pres. Ind. valgo, vali , vale ; valghiamo (or<br />
vagliamo), valete, valgono. Past Def. valsi, &c. Fut. varrò, &c.<br />
Imperative, vali , valga; valghiamo (or vagliamo), &c. Pres. Subj.<br />
che i o valga, &c.<br />
** Vedere , to see. Past Part, visto (or veduto). Pres. Ind. vedo<br />
(veggo, or veggio), vedi, vede ; vediamo, vedete , vedono (or<br />
veggono). Past Def. vidi, &c. Fut. vedrò, &c. Imperative, vedi (or<br />
ve'), veda (or vegga ) ; vediamo , &c. Pres . Subj. che i o vegga , &c.<br />
116
** Venire , to come . Past Part, venuto. Pres. Ind. vengo, vieni,<br />
viene ; veniamo, venite, vengono. Past Def. venni, &c. Fut. verrò,<br />
&c. Imperative, vieni, venga ; veniamo, &c. Pres. Subj. che i o<br />
venga , &c.<br />
1 The compound tenses of this verb are formed with "Essere ."<br />
2 See last note (3) on page 80.<br />
ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 91<br />
Vilipendere , to vilify . Past Part, vilipeso . 1 Past Def. vilipesi , &c. 1<br />
** Vincere, to win, to vanquish. Past Part, vinto. Past Def. vinsi ,<br />
&c.<br />
** Vivere , to live . Past Part, vissuto (or vivuto). Past Def. vissi , &c.<br />
** Volere, to be willing. Pres. Ind. voglio (or vo'), vuoi, vuole;<br />
vogliamo, Volete, vogliono. Past Def. volli, &c. Fut. vorrò, &c.<br />
Imperative, Vogli, Voglia; 1 Vogliate , vogliano. Pres. Subj. che io<br />
Voglia , &c.<br />
*Volgere , to turn. Past Part, volto. Past Def. volsi, &c.<br />
VOCABULARY.<br />
La voce, <strong>the</strong> voice . Una rivista , a mile .<br />
La colazione , Un miglio , <strong>the</strong> dinner . a review ,<br />
il pranzo, <strong>the</strong> breakfast . il mio consiglio , my advice .<br />
Solamente , only Di vista , by sight A mente , by heart<br />
EXERCISE XXXVI.<br />
I hear William's voice ; do you ? (do you hear it ?) My bro<strong>the</strong>r is<br />
gone out ; I do not know when he will return. William will go out<br />
with me on (147) Saturday morning. I go out every morning before<br />
(to make) breakfast. Do not go out, (122, 126) Henry ; your fa<strong>the</strong>r-<br />
in-law wishes (300) to speak to you. Frederick has got <strong>the</strong> book ,<br />
but he will (volere) not give it to me. 3 Do you know Mrs.. James ?<br />
I know her only by sight ; her house is 4 a mile from this village .<br />
I heard him 5 singing Italian songs. He knows <strong>many</strong> of <strong>the</strong>m<br />
(240) by heart. How much is this ring worth ? I could 6 not tell<br />
you. One must have 7 much money, to (225) buy good rings. Your<br />
bro<strong>the</strong>r always comes to see me when he is in London. If you <strong>had</strong><br />
gone out <strong>the</strong>n, you would have seen <strong>the</strong> review. He would (224)<br />
not give me his advice . I like to hear him translating . 5<br />
117
1 Notice that <strong>the</strong> s in Past Participles in " eso " <strong>and</strong> Past Definites<br />
in " esi " has no dot <strong>under</strong> it, <strong>and</strong> is <strong>the</strong>refore pronounced like <strong>the</strong><br />
s in <strong>the</strong> English word spirit .<br />
2 Notice that " Volere " has no first person plural in <strong>the</strong><br />
Imperative .<br />
312. 3 When <strong>the</strong> verbs "dovere ," " potere," " sapere"<strong>and</strong> " volere ,"<br />
followed by ano<strong>the</strong>r verb in <strong>the</strong> Infinitive Mood, are used with any<br />
of <strong>the</strong> Conjunctive Personal Pronouns ("me lo," " glie la," &c.),<br />
<strong>the</strong>se may be placed ei<strong>the</strong>r before or after "dovere ," " potere,"<br />
"sapere" <strong>and</strong> " volere ," thus: "Non me lo vuol dare ," or " Non vuol<br />
darmelo."<br />
313. 4 The Italians say, " My house is at a mile from this village ."<br />
314. 5 When two or three verbs follow one ano<strong>the</strong>r, <strong>the</strong> second<br />
<strong>and</strong> third must be in <strong>the</strong> Infinitive Mood.<br />
315. 6 When can <strong>and</strong> could are used in <strong>the</strong> sense of fa be able<br />
<strong>the</strong>y are translated by " Potere ."<br />
316. 7 The expression One must have is translated into Italian by<br />
" Ci vuole."<br />
92 POETICAL AND DEFECTIVE FORMS OF VERBS.<br />
POETICAL AND DEFECTIVE FORMS OF VERBS. 1<br />
317. Having given on page 17 ( rule in), <strong>the</strong> poetical forms of "<br />
Avere ," on page 25 ( rule 150), <strong>the</strong> poetical forms of " Essere ," on<br />
page 29 ( rule 169), <strong>and</strong> on page 30 ( rule 174), some hints<br />
concerning <strong>the</strong> poetical forms of Regular Verbs of <strong>the</strong> First<br />
Conjugation, on page 47 ( rules 252 <strong>and</strong> 253), some hints<br />
concerning <strong>the</strong> poetical forms of Regular Verbs of <strong>the</strong> Second<br />
Conjugation, on page 50 ( rule 261), some hints concerning <strong>the</strong><br />
poetical forms of Regular Verbs of <strong>the</strong> Third Conjugation, I shall<br />
now give <strong>the</strong> most important forms of <strong>the</strong> Defective Verbs<br />
arranged in alphabetical order.<br />
318. Algere , to freeze, is only used in <strong>the</strong> 2nd <strong>and</strong> 3rd pers. sing,<br />
<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> 3rd pers. plur. of <strong>the</strong> Past Def. " alsi ," " alse ; " " alsero ."<br />
319. Angere, to torment, is only used in <strong>the</strong> 3rd pers. sing, of <strong>the</strong><br />
Pres . Ind. " ange ."<br />
320. Colere, to honour, to worship, is only used in <strong>the</strong> 3rd pers.<br />
sing , of <strong>the</strong> Pres . Ind. " Cole."<br />
118
321. Fiedere (or Fedire), to wound, is only used in <strong>the</strong> three pers.<br />
sing, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> 3rd pers. plur. of <strong>the</strong> Pres. Ind. : " fiedo," " fiedi," "<br />
fiede ; " " fiedono."<br />
322. Gire , to go, is used in <strong>the</strong> Past Part. " gito," in <strong>the</strong> Imperf.<br />
Ind. " givo," " givi," &c., in <strong>the</strong> Past Def. " gii," " gisti," " gi," &c., in<br />
<strong>the</strong> Fut. "girò," &c., in <strong>the</strong> Cond. " girei," <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> Imperf. Subj. "<br />
che or se i o gissi ," &c.<br />
323. Ire, to go, is only used in <strong>the</strong> Past Part. " ito," in <strong>the</strong> Imperf.<br />
Ind. " ivo," " ivi," &c., in <strong>the</strong> 2nd pers. sing, <strong>and</strong> 3rd. Pers. plur. of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Past Def. "isti ," " irono."<br />
324. Licere, to be lawful, is only used in <strong>the</strong> 3rd pers. sing, of <strong>the</strong><br />
Pres . Ind. " lece " (or " lice ").<br />
325. Molcere , to soo<strong>the</strong>, is only used in <strong>the</strong> Gerund " molcendo,"<br />
in <strong>the</strong> 2nd <strong>and</strong> 3rd pers. sing, of <strong>the</strong> Pres. Ind. " molci ," " molce ; "<br />
in <strong>the</strong> Imperf. Ind. " molcevo," &c., <strong>and</strong> in <strong>the</strong> 3rd pers. sing, of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Imperf . Subj. " che or se molcesse ."<br />
326. Olire, to be fragrant, is only used in <strong>the</strong> 2nd <strong>and</strong> 3rd pers.<br />
sing, of <strong>the</strong> Pres. Ind. " olisci," " olisce ," <strong>and</strong> in <strong>the</strong> Imperf. Ind. "<br />
olivo," &c.<br />
327. Riedere (or Redire), to return, is only used in <strong>the</strong> Pres. Ind. "<br />
riedo," " riedi," &c., in <strong>the</strong> Imperf. Ind. " riedevo," &c., <strong>and</strong> in <strong>the</strong><br />
Past Def. " redii ," "redisti ," &c.<br />
1 The student will find <strong>the</strong> idiomatical forms of " Andare," " Dare,"<br />
"Fare ," " Stare ," " Sapere ," " Tenere ," <strong>and</strong> " Venire ," fur<strong>the</strong>r on.<br />
ON THE USE OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 93<br />
LESSON XVIII.<br />
ON THE USE OF THE DEFINITE AND PARTITIVE<br />
ARTICLES.<br />
328. In Italian <strong>the</strong> Definite Article ("il," "lo," or "la;" "I," " gli," or<br />
"le") is used before any noun (concrete or abstract) employed in a<br />
definite sense ; that is to say, employed to express (a) <strong>the</strong> whole of<br />
its genus (b) a whole class (c) an individual . Ex.<br />
Gli animali sono utili all'uomo.<br />
Animals are useful to men.<br />
Gli uomini irosi commettono 1 gravi errori<br />
Hot-tempered men commit grave errors .<br />
L'oro è più caro che l'argento .<br />
119
Gold is dearer than silver .<br />
Persino i cattivi ammirano la virtù<br />
Virtue is admired even by <strong>the</strong> . wicked .<br />
L'amore della verità (69).<br />
The love of truth.<br />
329. In Italian <strong>the</strong> definite article is also used before titles of<br />
persons. Ex.<br />
Il dottor Sangrado.<br />
Doctor Sangrado.<br />
330. In Italian <strong>the</strong> definite article is also used before <strong>the</strong> names<br />
of countries <strong>and</strong> provinces . Ex.<br />
L' Asia è molto gr<strong>and</strong>e.<br />
Asia is very large .<br />
La Borgogna è molto fertile .<br />
Burgundy is very fertile .<br />
331. Notice, however, that if <strong>the</strong> name of a country or province be<br />
preceded by <strong>the</strong> preposition " in," no article is used. Ex.<br />
Egli è <strong>and</strong>ato in Italia .<br />
He is gone to Italy.<br />
332. In Italian <strong>the</strong> definite article is also used before <strong>the</strong> names<br />
of a few towns, <strong>the</strong> most important of <strong>which</strong> are : Il Cairo, l'Aia<br />
(<strong>the</strong> Hague), la Rochelle , la Mecca , la Mir<strong>and</strong>ola.<br />
333. In Italian <strong>the</strong> definite article is also placed before <strong>the</strong> family<br />
names of very distinguished persons, who lived since <strong>the</strong> year<br />
1200. Ex. Il Petrarca, 2 il Milton, il Moliere, il Tiziano, il Biron, il<br />
Manzoni , il Darwin . Ex.<br />
L' Ariosto è il pittore della natura .<br />
Ariosto is <strong>the</strong> painter of nature ,<br />
334. Notice, that no article is used before <strong>the</strong> names of<br />
distinguished persons, when only <strong>the</strong>ir Christian name, or if<br />
more than one word is used to designate <strong>the</strong>m . Ex.<br />
Dante mori a Ravenna .<br />
Dante died in Ravenna .<br />
Carlo Darwin era modesto.<br />
Charles Darwin was modest.<br />
120
1 See rule 63, to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> meaning of <strong>the</strong> letters in <strong>the</strong><br />
darker type.<br />
335. 2 "Il Petrarca," "Il Tiziano," mean "Il poeta Petrarca," "Il<br />
pittore Tiziano." The Italians also say " la Saffo," <strong>the</strong> poetess<br />
Sappho.<br />
94 ON THE USE OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.<br />
336. In Italian <strong>the</strong> definite article is also placed before Adjectives,<br />
Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, Interjections <strong>and</strong> Verbs in<br />
<strong>the</strong> Infinitive Mood, when <strong>the</strong>y are used as nouns. Ex.<br />
Carlo ama l'utile .<br />
Charles is fond of what is useful .<br />
Il saper ascoltare è utile quanto il saper parlare<br />
To know how to listen is as useful - as to know how to<br />
speak .<br />
337- When several nouns follow one ano<strong>the</strong>r in <strong>the</strong> same<br />
sentence (whe<strong>the</strong>r used as subjects or objects), <strong>the</strong> definite<br />
article must be repeated in Italian before each of <strong>the</strong>m, when it<br />
is already expressed before <strong>the</strong> first. Ex.<br />
Il ferro, l' oro e l'argento sono metalli utilissimi .<br />
Iron, gold <strong>and</strong> silver are very useful metals .<br />
338. When two adjectives are united by <strong>the</strong> conjunction " e," <strong>and</strong><br />
one of <strong>the</strong>m is intended to qualify a substantive expressed <strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r a substantive <strong>under</strong>stood, <strong>the</strong> article must be repeated,<br />
in Italian , before each adjective . Ex.<br />
Conosce la storia antica e la moderna<br />
He knows ancient <strong>and</strong> modern . history .<br />
339. But when <strong>the</strong> adjectives, united by " e," <strong>and</strong>, qualify only one<br />
substantive , <strong>the</strong> article is not repeated . Ex.<br />
Anna d'Austria, la bella e altiera regina di Francia .<br />
Anne of Austria , <strong>the</strong> proud <strong>and</strong> beautiful Queen of France .<br />
The Words Required To Compose This And The Following<br />
Exercises Are Given In The Vocabulary At The End Of The<br />
Grammar .<br />
EXERCISE XXXVII.<br />
Necessity (328) is <strong>the</strong> mo<strong>the</strong>r of invention. Flowers (328) are very<br />
dear (in) this season of <strong>the</strong> year. The Alps separate France (330)<br />
from Italy. Drawing (328) owes its origin to chance , sculpture to<br />
121
eligion, <strong>and</strong> painting to <strong>the</strong> progress of <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r arts. Fear <strong>and</strong><br />
ignorance are <strong>the</strong> sources of superstition. The love of (328) music<br />
<strong>and</strong> poetry is universal in Italy. Captain (329) Bravo wishes to<br />
speak to your fa<strong>the</strong>r. Go <strong>and</strong> 1 tell (to) him (198) that my fa<strong>the</strong>r is<br />
in (331) France . Good (328) laws make good men.<br />
340. 1 The preposition " a " is used in Italian instead of <strong>the</strong><br />
English conjunction <strong>and</strong>, after a verb expressing motion . Ex.<br />
Andate a prendere la mia mantellina .<br />
Go <strong>and</strong> fetch my mantle .<br />
ON THE DEFINITE AND PARTITIVE ARTICLES. 95<br />
ON THE OMISSION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.<br />
341. The definite article is not required in Italian before any<br />
noun used adverbially, or preceded by " senza," without, " ne,"<br />
nei<strong>the</strong>r , nor, or " sia," whe<strong>the</strong>r it be. Ex.<br />
Luigi lavora con perseveranza .<br />
Louis works with perseverance .<br />
Il suo socio è un uomo senza merito<br />
His partner is a man without merit .<br />
Essa non ha né belle<strong>zz</strong>a, né talento<br />
She has nei<strong>the</strong>r beauty nor . talent .<br />
Sia superbia, sia timidità , essa non volle parlare .<br />
Whe<strong>the</strong>r through pride or timidity , she would not speak .<br />
342. The definite article is not required in Italian before nouns<br />
used in apposition with preceding words. Ex.<br />
Dublino, capitale dell' Irl<strong>and</strong>a.<br />
Dublin, <strong>the</strong> capital of Irel<strong>and</strong> .<br />
Sposò Margherita , figlia di Enrico Il.<br />
He married Margaret , <strong>the</strong> daughter of Henry Il.<br />
343. The definite article is not required in Italian before nouns<br />
used emphatically . Ex.<br />
Uomini , donne, fanciulli , tutto peri !<br />
Men, women , children , everything perished !<br />
344. The definite article is not required in Italian before <strong>the</strong><br />
ordinal numbers " primo," first, " secondo," second, &c., when <strong>the</strong>y<br />
come after <strong>the</strong> name of a sovereign, or after <strong>the</strong> words "libro,"<br />
122
ook , " capo," or " capitolo," chapter, " atto," act, " scena," scene.<br />
Ex.<br />
Enrico quarto, re di Francia .<br />
Henry IV., King of France .<br />
Atto primo, scena quarta.<br />
Act <strong>the</strong> first, scene <strong>the</strong> fourth.<br />
ON THE USE OF THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE.<br />
345. To <strong>the</strong> rules relating to <strong>the</strong> Partitive Article " del," " dello," "<br />
della," " dei," " degli," " delle," <strong>which</strong> have been given on page 22,<br />
<strong>and</strong> <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong> student should now read over, <strong>the</strong> following must<br />
be added.<br />
346. The preposition " di," only (not "del," "dello," &c.) is required<br />
before a noun or name used adjectively . Ex.<br />
Guarda, sorella mia, che bell'anello d' oro.<br />
Look, sister , what a beautiful gold ring .<br />
Il regno d' Italia è gr<strong>and</strong>e.<br />
The kingdom of Italy is large .<br />
347. The preposition " di," only (not "del," "dello," &c.) is required<br />
before a noun used as a complement to ano<strong>the</strong>r noun. Ex.<br />
Caro fratello dammi 1 un quin- Dear bro<strong>the</strong>r, give me a quire<br />
terno di carta da scrivere . of note paper.<br />
1 Observe that <strong>the</strong> initial letters of "mi," " ti," " lo," "la,""ci," <strong>and</strong> "<br />
vi " is doubled when <strong>the</strong>se words are joined after " va," go (from<br />
"<strong>and</strong>are "), "da," give (from "dare ," <strong>and</strong> in this case <strong>the</strong> accent is<br />
not written), " fa," do, make (from " fare "), <strong>and</strong> " sta," stay (from "<br />
stare ").<br />
96 ON THE DEFINITE AND PARTITIVE ARTICLES.<br />
348. The preposition " di " only (not "del," " dello," &c.) is required<br />
before an adjective or a past participle expressed or <strong>under</strong>stood.<br />
Ex.<br />
La via era adorna di alberi .<br />
The road was lined with trees .<br />
Il baule era coperto di polvere .<br />
The trunk was covered with dust.<br />
Un canestro (pieno) di fiori .<br />
A basket of flowers.<br />
123
349. The preposition " di," only (not "del," " dello," &c.), is required<br />
after <strong>the</strong> words " qualità ," "Sorte," " genere ," "specie ," " corso." Ex.<br />
Egli vende tre qualità di te.<br />
He sells three kinds of tea.<br />
350. Notice, however, that a noun must be preceded by <strong>the</strong><br />
partitive article " del," " dello," &c. (<strong>and</strong> not merely by <strong>the</strong><br />
preposition " di ") when it is taken in a specified sense . Ex.<br />
Un quinterno della carta che comprai ieri .<br />
A quire of <strong>the</strong> paper I bought yesterday .<br />
La via era adorna degli alberi che ho piantati io stesso .<br />
The road was lined with <strong>the</strong> trees I have planted myself .<br />
Egli vende tre qualità del te che viene da Ceylon .<br />
He sells three kinds of <strong>the</strong> tea <strong>which</strong> comes from Ceylon .<br />
EXERCISE XXXVIII.<br />
Glory (328) follows virtue like a s<strong>had</strong>ow. If your bro<strong>the</strong>r studied<br />
with (341) perseverance , he would succeed (258). Eating, (267,<br />
336) drinking, <strong>and</strong> sleeping are necessary to man. Last year we<br />
visited (Past Def.) Cairo, (342) <strong>the</strong> capital of Egypt. His cousin<br />
Margaret married William, (342) <strong>the</strong> son of Colonel Barducci . This<br />
bronze statue was (Imp. Ind.) formerly in <strong>the</strong> Municipal Palace of<br />
Modena. I wish to attend (assistere a) a course of lectures <strong>which</strong><br />
(che) he will begin to- morrow evening. What shall I buy you (for<br />
you) ? (213, 251) Buy me a box of steel pens (347), a dozen of<br />
quills, a quire of (347) foreign paper, <strong>and</strong> three sheets of blotting-<br />
paper. His apartments were adorned (175) with (266) <strong>the</strong> pictures<br />
<strong>which</strong> (che) he <strong>had</strong> himself (189) bought at Padova. The question<br />
is 1 to decide whe<strong>the</strong>r we shall meet again (radunarsi) to- morrow<br />
or on (147, 74) Wednesday next. The <strong>the</strong>atre was (Imperf. Ind.) full<br />
of strangers 2 <strong>and</strong> foreigners. The hall is full (350) of <strong>the</strong> men<br />
who have taken part in <strong>the</strong> strike. It is necessary (bisognare)<br />
(307) to start at once.<br />
351 1 The expressions <strong>the</strong> question is, or was, <strong>the</strong> matter is, or<br />
was are translated into Italian by " Si tratta di," " Si trattava di."<br />
352. 2 Stranger is translated by " forestiere," <strong>and</strong> foreigner, by "<br />
straniero ."<br />
ON THE USE OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 97<br />
LESSON XIX.<br />
ON THE USE OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE.<br />
124
353. The indefinite article is not required in Italian before nouns<br />
used in apposition with preceding words. Ex.<br />
I Rivali , bellissima commedia di Sheridan .<br />
The Rivals , a very fine comedy by Sheridan .<br />
354. The indefinite article is not used in Italian before nouns<br />
expressing nationality, title, profession <strong>and</strong> condition, used<br />
adjectively . Ex.<br />
Sono Sco<strong>zz</strong>ese di nascita .<br />
I am a Scotchman by birth.<br />
Suo nipote è libraio .<br />
His nephew is a bookseller .<br />
Mio nonno era generale .<br />
My gr<strong>and</strong>fa<strong>the</strong>r was a general .<br />
Egli è stato prigioniero . 1<br />
He has been a prisoner .<br />
355. Notice that when nouns expressing nationality, &c., are<br />
qualified , <strong>the</strong> indefinite article is required before <strong>the</strong>m . Ex.<br />
Maria Stuarda era una principessa di sventurata ra<strong>zz</strong>a.<br />
Mary Stuart was a princess of an unfortunate race .<br />
356. The indefinite article is not used in Italian before " cento," a<br />
(one) hundred, <strong>and</strong> " mille ," a (one) thous<strong>and</strong>. Ex.<br />
Hanno comprato cento quadri per mille lire sterline .<br />
They bought a hundred pictures for a thous<strong>and</strong> pounds.<br />
357. The indefinite article is not used in Italian before <strong>the</strong> title of<br />
a book, or <strong>the</strong> heading of a chapter . Ex.<br />
Vita di Lord Macaulay .<br />
A Life of Lord Macaulay .<br />
358. The indefinite article is not used in Italian after "che," "<br />
quale," what a, used exclamatively . Ex.<br />
Guardi, che bel castello !<br />
Look, what a beautiful castle !<br />
359. In Italian <strong>the</strong> indefinite article is placed before, <strong>and</strong> not after<br />
<strong>the</strong> adjective " tale ," such, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> adverb " Così," or " si," so. Ex.<br />
Un tal nomo è odioso.<br />
Such a man is odious.<br />
Una così bella opera !<br />
125
So beautiful a work<br />
360. The indefinite article is not used in Italian in <strong>the</strong><br />
expressions " Far regalo di," 2 to make a present of; " Far segno,"<br />
to make a sign ; " Far fortuna," to make a fortune ; " Metter fine,"<br />
to put an end to.<br />
1 Notice that an e preceded by an i has always <strong>the</strong> broad sound of<br />
<strong>the</strong> a in <strong>the</strong> word gate .<br />
361. 2 When <strong>the</strong> words "regalo," " segno" <strong>and</strong> " fortuna" are<br />
qualified, <strong>the</strong> article is required. Ex. " Fece una gran fortuna," he<br />
made a large fortune .<br />
98 ON THE USE OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE.<br />
ON THE DIFFERENT USE OF THE ARTICLE.<br />
362. Before <strong>the</strong> names of measure, weight, number <strong>and</strong> time , <strong>the</strong><br />
Italians use <strong>the</strong> definite article instead of <strong>the</strong> indefinite article<br />
<strong>which</strong> is employed by <strong>the</strong> English. Ex.<br />
Ho pagato questo panno cinque scellini il braccio.<br />
I have paid five shillings a yard for this cloth.<br />
Queste pere costano due Soldi la libbra.<br />
These pears cost a penny a pound.<br />
Questi aranci si vendono un franco la do<strong>zz</strong>ina.<br />
These oranges are sold a franc a dozen.<br />
Abbiamo lezione di canto tre volte la settimana .<br />
We have singing lessons three times a week .<br />
Egli guadagna due scellini l'ora.<br />
He earns two shillings an hour.<br />
EXERCISE XXXIX.<br />
Michelangelo was (355). a sculptor, a painter, an architect, <strong>and</strong> a<br />
poet of great celebrity. When I made his acquaintance he was a<br />
banker (354) ; now he is a poor workman (355). What are you<br />
reading, Henry ? "I Lombardi alla prima Crociata," a (353)<br />
splendid poem , by (of) Tommaso Grossi. My fa<strong>the</strong>r is a captain<br />
(354) in <strong>the</strong> French army. We bought (180) a hundred (356)<br />
Turkish carpets for a thous<strong>and</strong> (356) guineas. This cloth costs six<br />
shillings a (362) yard. The best coffee comes from Mocha, a (353)<br />
town in (of) Arabia. I give four shillings a day to my gardener.<br />
What is <strong>the</strong> title of Charles' new book ? "A (357) life of Lord<br />
Palmerston." What a (358) beautiful morning! shall we go out for a<br />
walk ? Yes, as soon as (249) I have written my letters. What a<br />
126
eautiful horse ! where did you buy it ? (193) I bought it from<br />
Colonel James. This man works by <strong>the</strong> hour; 1 he earns three<br />
shillings an (362) hour. Her fa<strong>the</strong>r knows 2 a great deal ; he<br />
earns six hundred guineas a year. Captain Cook was a navigator<br />
of great celebrity (355).<br />
363. 1 The expressions to work by <strong>the</strong> hour, by <strong>the</strong> day, by <strong>the</strong> -<br />
week, &c. are translated into Italian by " lavorare all'ora," "al<br />
giorno," "alla settimana ," &c.<br />
364. 2 When to know, means to know through <strong>the</strong> mind, <strong>and</strong> to<br />
know how, it is translated by " Sapere ." Ex.<br />
Mio cugino sa il tedesco .<br />
My cousin knows German .<br />
Voi non sapete la vostra lezione .<br />
You do not know your lessons .<br />
Suo figlio non sa comportarsi .<br />
Your son does not know how to behave .<br />
365. But when to know means to be acquainted with (through <strong>the</strong><br />
senses ), it is translated by " Conoscere ." Ex.<br />
Conosco il Presidente .<br />
I know <strong>the</strong> President (Chairman ).<br />
ON THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS. 99<br />
LESSON XX.<br />
ON THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS.<br />
366. In Italian, nouns are ei<strong>the</strong>r of <strong>the</strong> masculine or of <strong>the</strong><br />
feminine gender <strong>the</strong>re is no neuter <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> gender of Italian<br />
nouns is determined ei<strong>the</strong>r by <strong>the</strong>ir meaning, or by <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
termination .<br />
DETERMINATION OF THE GENDER OF NOUNS BY THEIR<br />
MEANING .<br />
367. Appellations of men, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> names of male animals are<br />
masculine, whilst appellations of women, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> names of<br />
female animals are feminine . 1<br />
ON THIS POINT THE FOLLOWING OBSERVATIONS ARE<br />
NECESSARY :<br />
368. The words " Maestà," majesty, " Santità," holiness, "<br />
Eminenza," Eminence , " Eccellenza," Excellency, <strong>and</strong> " Signoria,"<br />
127
Lordship or Ladyship, are feminine , <strong>and</strong>, <strong>the</strong>refore, <strong>the</strong> Italians<br />
call a king " Sua Maestà ," <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> pope, " Sua Santità ."<br />
369. The Italians apply <strong>the</strong> words " una sentinella," a sentry, "<br />
una recruta," a recruit, "una guardia," a guard, a keeper, "una<br />
guida," a guide, "una spia," a spy, "una vittima," a victim, to a<br />
man as well as to a woman.<br />
370. The appellations " compatriota," compatriot, " artista," artist,<br />
" statista," political economist, " moralista," moralist,<br />
"pessimista," pessimist, " scrittore ," writer, " autore ," author, <strong>and</strong><br />
"testimonio ," witness , are applied to men <strong>and</strong> women alike .<br />
371. Nouns <strong>which</strong> admit of both genders form <strong>the</strong> feminine by<br />
changing <strong>the</strong> final vowel into a. Ex.<br />
Mio cugino, my cousin , mia cugina , my cousin .<br />
Mio Cognato, my bro<strong>the</strong>r-in-law, mia cognata, my sister -in-law.<br />
Il mio maestro ,my teacher , la mia maestra , my teacher .<br />
Un cameriere , a valet , una cameriera , a lady's-maid.<br />
Un ebreo, a Jew, un' ebrea , a Jewess .<br />
Un vedovo, a widower, una vedova, a widow.<br />
372. 1 The names of some animals, as "un coniglio," a rabbit, "un<br />
cammello," a earned "una balena," a whale , "un' aquila," an<br />
eagle , serve both for <strong>the</strong> male <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> female, in Italian; so that,<br />
to be more explicit, <strong>the</strong> word "maschio," male, or <strong>the</strong> word<br />
"femmina ," female , is placed after <strong>the</strong> name of <strong>the</strong> animal . Ex.<br />
" Un coniglio maschio ,"<br />
a buck rabbit,<br />
"un coniglio femmina ,"<br />
a doe rabbit.<br />
100 ON THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS.<br />
373- Words (nouns <strong>and</strong> adjectives) <strong>which</strong> are derived from verbs,<br />
<strong>and</strong> end in ante <strong>and</strong> ente , as well as those derived from a country<br />
or town, ending in ese, are <strong>the</strong> same for both genders . Ex.<br />
Il cantante , <strong>the</strong> singer , la cantante , <strong>the</strong> singer .<br />
Il credente , <strong>the</strong> believer , la credente , <strong>the</strong> believer .<br />
Un Inglese , an Englishman , una Inglese , an Englishwoman .<br />
Un Francese , 1 a Frenchman , una Francese , a Frenchwoman .<br />
374. Nouns <strong>which</strong> have <strong>the</strong> masculine termination in tore, form<br />
<strong>the</strong> feminine in trice . Ex.<br />
L' esecutore , <strong>the</strong> executor , l' esecutrice , <strong>the</strong> executrix .<br />
128
L'imperatore , <strong>the</strong> emperor , l'imperatrice , <strong>the</strong> empress .<br />
Il traditore , <strong>the</strong> traitor , la traditrice , <strong>the</strong> traitress .<br />
375. The following nouns form <strong>the</strong> feminine in essa :<br />
Un abate, an abbot, un' abadessa, an abbess.<br />
Un barone, a baron, una baronessa , a baroness,<br />
Un conte , a count, una contessa , a countess .<br />
Un dottore, a doctor, una dottoressa, a lady doctor,<br />
Un duca, a duke, una duchessa , a duchess,<br />
Un gigante , a giant , una gigantessa , a giantess .<br />
Un leone , a lion, una leonessa , a lioness ,<br />
Un oste, a host, un'ostessa , a hostess ,<br />
Un poeta, a poet, una poetessa , a poetess ,<br />
Un pavone, a peacock , una pavonessa , a pea-hen,<br />
Un principe , a prince , una principessa , a princess ,<br />
Un profeta, a prophet, una profetessa , a prophetess,<br />
Un sacerdote , a priest , una sacerdotessa , a priestess<br />
376. Names of Empires, Kingdoms, Provinces, <strong>and</strong> Rivers ending<br />
in a are feminine . Ex.<br />
" La Russia," Russia, " la Spagna," Spain, "la Calabria," Calabria,<br />
"la Senna," <strong>the</strong> Seine. When <strong>the</strong>y end with any of <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
vowels, <strong>the</strong>y are masculine. Ex. " Il Brasile ," Brazil, " il Tamigi,"<br />
<strong>the</strong> Thames , " il Portogallo," Portugal, "il Perù," Peru.<br />
377. Names of Towns ending in a or in e are feminine . Ex.<br />
" La bella Roma," beautiful Rome ;<br />
" La sapiente Atene ," learned A<strong>the</strong>ns .<br />
If <strong>the</strong>y end in any o<strong>the</strong>r vowel, <strong>the</strong>y are of ei<strong>the</strong>r gender .<br />
378. Names of Isl<strong>and</strong>s are feminine . Ex. "La Sardegna " Sardinia .<br />
379. Names of Lakes are mas. Ex. " Il Ladoga," lake Ladoga.<br />
1 An s, dotted thus s, has <strong>the</strong> soft sound of <strong>the</strong> s in <strong>the</strong> word rose.<br />
ON THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS.101<br />
380. Names of Trees generally end in o, <strong>and</strong> are masculine . Ex.<br />
" Un pero," a pear-tree ; " un ciriegio ," a cherry -tree .<br />
Except " una quercia," an oak; " un' elce," a holm-oak ; " una<br />
palma," a palm-tree , <strong>and</strong> " una vite ," a vine .<br />
381. Names of Fruits generally end in a, <strong>and</strong> are feminine . Ex.<br />
129
"Una pesca," a peach ; "una mela," an apple ; "una castagna," a<br />
chestnut .<br />
Except " un pomo," an apple ; " un fico," a fig; "un arancio," an<br />
orange ; " un limone," a lemon; " un cedro," a citron ; " un dattero,"<br />
a date ; "un pistacchio," a pistache nut, <strong>which</strong> signify <strong>the</strong> tree as<br />
well as <strong>the</strong> fruit.<br />
382. Adjectives, Verbs, Adverbs, <strong>and</strong> Conjunctions, used as<br />
nouns, are masculine . Ex.<br />
" Il bello," <strong>the</strong> beautiful ;<br />
"il cantare ," <strong>the</strong> singing ;<br />
" il perché ," <strong>the</strong> reason why.<br />
383. The following nouns must be noticed :<br />
Un baleno, a flash of lightning , una balena, a whale .<br />
Un colpo, a blow, una colpa, a fault.<br />
Un foglio, a sheet of paper, una foglia , a leaf .<br />
Il Porto, <strong>the</strong> harbour, la Porta, <strong>the</strong> gate , <strong>the</strong> door.<br />
Il Soglio, <strong>the</strong> throne , la Soglia , <strong>the</strong> threshold.<br />
Il velo, <strong>the</strong> veil , la vela , <strong>the</strong> sail .<br />
Il volto, <strong>the</strong> face . la volta, <strong>the</strong> arched ceiling .<br />
EXERCISE XL.<br />
His Holiness (368) Pope Leo <strong>the</strong> tenth (Leone decimo) was a (353)<br />
son <strong>the</strong> celebrated 1 Lorenzo de' Medici. There was (154) a sentry<br />
at each door of <strong>the</strong> palace. If he does not act (Pres. Ind.) with<br />
prudence, he will soon become <strong>the</strong> victim of his companions. He<br />
has (149) been (277) a widower (354) <strong>the</strong>se four years. Last year I<br />
went to Florence with my bro<strong>the</strong>r-in-law <strong>and</strong> my cousin Margaret.<br />
The two sentries 2 were women. When we go to (207) Italy we<br />
meet (239) <strong>many</strong> of our country women. 3 She is French <strong>and</strong> he<br />
is English ; <strong>the</strong>y are both good singers. 4 The emperor (374) <strong>and</strong><br />
empress were (Imperf. Ind.) surrounded by princes (375) <strong>and</strong><br />
princesses , baron <strong>and</strong> baronesses .<br />
384. 1 When <strong>the</strong> word celebrated means famous it is translated<br />
into Italian by " celebre," but when it means solemnized it is<br />
translated by " celebrato ."<br />
385. 2 The words " sentinella," " recruta," &c., (rule 369) form<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir plurals by changing <strong>the</strong> final a into an e, for men <strong>and</strong><br />
women alike .<br />
130
386. 3 The words " compatriota," " artista," &c., (rule 370) form<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir plurals by changing <strong>the</strong> final a into an i when <strong>the</strong>y refer to<br />
men, but by changing <strong>the</strong> final a into an e when <strong>the</strong>y refer to<br />
women .<br />
387. 4 The words " cantante," &c., " inglese," &c. ( rule 373) form<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir plurals by changing <strong>the</strong> final e into an o, both when <strong>the</strong>y<br />
refer to men <strong>and</strong> women .<br />
102 ON THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS.<br />
DETERMINATION OF THE GENDER OF NOUNS BY THEIR<br />
VOWEL ENDINGS, AND FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF<br />
NOUNS.<br />
388. As stated already, nearly all <strong>the</strong> Italian words end with one of<br />
<strong>the</strong> five vowels, a, e, i, o, u 1 <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> gender <strong>and</strong> number of nouns<br />
is generally indicated by <strong>the</strong> ending vowel. Therefore , along with<br />
<strong>the</strong> rules for recognising <strong>the</strong> gender of nouns, will be given <strong>the</strong><br />
rules for <strong>the</strong> formation of <strong>the</strong> plural.<br />
WORDS ENDING IN A.<br />
389. All nouns ending in a are feminine , <strong>and</strong> form <strong>the</strong>ir plural by<br />
changing <strong>the</strong> a into e. Ex.<br />
La grida, <strong>the</strong> edict, le gride, <strong>the</strong> edicts .<br />
390. Of course , names of dignities <strong>and</strong> professions of men, ending<br />
in a, are of <strong>the</strong> masculine gender, <strong>and</strong> form <strong>the</strong>ir plurals in 1 '.<br />
Ex. " Il papa," <strong>the</strong> pope , " i papi ," <strong>the</strong> popes; " il monarca," <strong>the</strong><br />
monarch, "I monarchi," <strong>the</strong> monarchs ; " il duca," <strong>the</strong> duke, " i<br />
duchi," <strong>the</strong> dukes; " il poeta," <strong>the</strong> poet, "i poeti," <strong>the</strong> poets.<br />
ON THIS POINT THE FOLLOWING OBSERVATIONS ARE<br />
NECESSARY :<br />
391. Feminine nouns ending in ea form <strong>the</strong>ir plural by changing<br />
ea into ee. Ex.<br />
La mia idea , my idea , le mie idee , my ideas .<br />
392. Feminine nouns ending in da <strong>and</strong> già may lose <strong>the</strong> i in <strong>the</strong><br />
plural. Ex.<br />
La caccia , <strong>the</strong> chase , le cacce , <strong>the</strong> chases .<br />
La spiaggia , <strong>the</strong> shore , le spiagge , <strong>the</strong> shores .<br />
Except in " le bugie," <strong>the</strong> lies ; <strong>which</strong> is <strong>the</strong> plural of " la bugia,"<br />
<strong>the</strong> lie, because <strong>the</strong> accent falls upon <strong>the</strong> i.<br />
131
393. Feminine nouns ending in ca <strong>and</strong> ga, in <strong>the</strong> singular, take<br />
an h in <strong>the</strong> plural, <strong>and</strong> change <strong>the</strong> a into e. Ex.<br />
La bocca, <strong>the</strong> mouth, le bocche, <strong>the</strong> mouths.<br />
La monaca , <strong>the</strong> nun, le monache , <strong>the</strong> nuns.<br />
La Strega , <strong>the</strong> witch , le streghe , <strong>the</strong> witches .<br />
394. Masculine nouns ending in ca <strong>and</strong> ga, in <strong>the</strong> singular,<br />
require an h in <strong>the</strong> plural, <strong>and</strong> change <strong>the</strong> a into i. Ex.<br />
Il duca, <strong>the</strong> duke, i duchi, <strong>the</strong> dukes.<br />
Il collega , <strong>the</strong> colleague , i Colleghi , <strong>the</strong> colleagues .<br />
395. Un lapis, a pencil, " ribes," currants, " un diesis," a<br />
semitone, are almost <strong>the</strong> only nouns ending with a consonant<br />
used in Italian . They do not change in <strong>the</strong> plural.<br />
103 ON THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS.<br />
396. All nouns ending in " tà " (all " parole tronche ") 1 are<br />
feminine <strong>and</strong> do not change <strong>the</strong> form in <strong>the</strong> plural. Ex.<br />
La città , <strong>the</strong> town, city, le città , <strong>the</strong> towns, cities .<br />
La carità , charity , la sincerità , sincerity .<br />
397. The following nouns (derived from <strong>the</strong> Greek language ),<br />
ending in a, are masculine, in Italian, <strong>and</strong> form <strong>the</strong>ir plural by<br />
changing <strong>the</strong> a into i :<br />
L' anatema , <strong>the</strong> ana<strong>the</strong>ma , gli anatemi , <strong>the</strong><br />
132<br />
ana<strong>the</strong>mas ,<br />
L'assioma , <strong>the</strong> axiom , gli assiomi , <strong>the</strong> axioms ,<br />
Il clima , <strong>the</strong> climate , i climi , <strong>the</strong> climates ,<br />
Il diadema , <strong>the</strong> diadem, i diademi , <strong>the</strong> diadems ,<br />
Il diploma, <strong>the</strong> diploma, i diplomi, <strong>the</strong> diplomas,<br />
Il dogma, <strong>the</strong> dogma, i dogmi, <strong>the</strong> dogmas,<br />
Il dramma , <strong>the</strong> drama, i drammi , <strong>the</strong> dramas,<br />
L' emblema , <strong>the</strong> emblem , gli emblemi , <strong>the</strong> emblems ,<br />
L' enigma , <strong>the</strong> enigma , gli enigmi , <strong>the</strong> enigmas ,<br />
L' epigramma , <strong>the</strong> epigram , gli epigrammi , <strong>the</strong> epigrams ,<br />
Il fantasma , <strong>the</strong> phantom, i fantasmi , <strong>the</strong> phantoms,<br />
L'idioma, <strong>the</strong> idiom , gl'idiomi , <strong>the</strong> idioms ,<br />
Il pianeta , <strong>the</strong> planet, i pianeti , <strong>the</strong> planets.'<br />
Il poema , <strong>the</strong> poem, i poemi , <strong>the</strong> poems,<br />
Il problema, <strong>the</strong> problem, i problemi , <strong>the</strong> problems,<br />
Lo scisma , <strong>the</strong> schism , gli scismi , <strong>the</strong> schisms ,<br />
Il sistema , <strong>the</strong> system , i sistemi , <strong>the</strong> systems ,
Il Sofisma , <strong>the</strong> sophism, I sofismi <strong>the</strong> sophisms ,<br />
Il telegramma , <strong>the</strong> telegram , i telegrammi , <strong>the</strong> telegrams .<br />
Il tema , <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>me , i temi , <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>mes .<br />
Il programma , <strong>the</strong> programme ,<br />
i programmi , <strong>the</strong> programmes ,<br />
Lo stratagemma , <strong>the</strong> stratagem ,<br />
gli stratagemmi , <strong>the</strong> stratagems .<br />
Lo stemma , <strong>the</strong> coat of arms ,<br />
gli stemmi , <strong>the</strong> coats of arms .<br />
WORDS ENDING IN E.<br />
398. Nouns ending in e are some masculine <strong>and</strong> some feminine ,<br />
but for both genders <strong>the</strong> plural is formed by changing <strong>the</strong> e into I.<br />
Ex.<br />
Il cane , <strong>the</strong> dog, i cani , <strong>the</strong> dogs,<br />
La canzone , <strong>the</strong> song, le canzoni , <strong>the</strong> songs.<br />
ON THIS POINT THE FOLLOWING OBSERVATIONS ARE<br />
NECESSARY :<br />
399. Words ending in ore ( <strong>which</strong> are very numerous) are all<br />
masculine . Ex.<br />
" Il fiore ," <strong>the</strong> flower ; " i fiori ," <strong>the</strong> flowers.<br />
400. 1 Notice that <strong>the</strong> following nouns ending in à are<br />
masculine, <strong>and</strong> remain unchanged in <strong>the</strong> plural: " il sofà.," <strong>the</strong><br />
sofa, "i sofà," <strong>the</strong> sofas; " il falbalà," <strong>the</strong> "flounce , i falbalà," <strong>the</strong><br />
flounces ; " il taffetà ," <strong>the</strong> taffety ; " il baccalà," dried cod.<br />
104 ON THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS.<br />
401. Words ending in ente are masculine . Ex.<br />
" Il dente ," 1 <strong>the</strong> tooth ; " i denti ," <strong>the</strong> teeth .<br />
Except "la gente ," <strong>the</strong> people, " le genti ," <strong>the</strong> nations ;<br />
"la lente ," <strong>the</strong> lens , or lentil , " le lenti ," <strong>the</strong> lenses , or lentils ;<br />
" la mente ," <strong>the</strong> mind, " le menti ," <strong>the</strong> minds;<br />
"la corrente ," <strong>the</strong> current , " le correnti ," <strong>the</strong> currents ;<br />
"la sorgente ," <strong>the</strong> source , " le sorgenti ," <strong>the</strong> sources .<br />
402. Words ending in me are masculine. Ex. " il fiume ," <strong>the</strong> river,<br />
" i fiumi ," <strong>the</strong> rivers .<br />
Except " l' arme ," <strong>the</strong> weapon, " le armi ," <strong>the</strong> weapons ;<br />
133
"un'uniforme ," a uniform ; <strong>and</strong> " la fame ," hunger .<br />
403. Words ending in one are masculine . Ex.<br />
" Il balcone," <strong>the</strong> balcony, " i balconi," <strong>the</strong> balconies .<br />
Except " la canzone ," <strong>the</strong> song, " le canzoni ," <strong>the</strong> songs,<br />
" la tenzone ," <strong>the</strong> combat, " le tenzoni ," <strong>the</strong> combats.<br />
404. Concrete nouns (i.e., names of objects) ending in ione (about<br />
twenty) are masculine . Ex.<br />
L'arcione , <strong>the</strong> saddle-bow, gli arcioni , <strong>the</strong> saddle-bows.<br />
Il battaglione , <strong>the</strong> battalion, i battaglioni , <strong>the</strong> battalions.<br />
Il bastione , <strong>the</strong> bastion, i bastioni , <strong>the</strong> bastions.<br />
Il padiglione , <strong>the</strong> pavilion , i padiglioni , <strong>the</strong> pavilions .<br />
405. Abstract nouns (i.e., names of things that have no<br />
substance ) ending in ione (about three hundred) are feminine .<br />
Ex.<br />
L' azione , <strong>the</strong> action , le azioni , <strong>the</strong> actions .<br />
La conversazione , <strong>the</strong> conversation, le conversazioni , <strong>the</strong><br />
conversations .<br />
La discussione , <strong>the</strong> discussion , le discussioni , <strong>the</strong> discussions .<br />
406. Nouns ending in udine (about twenty) are feminine . Ex.<br />
L'abitudine , habit, la solitudine , solitude.<br />
La mansuetudine , meekness , l'incudine , <strong>the</strong> anvil .<br />
WORDS ENDING IN I.<br />
407. Nouns ending in i are masculine, <strong>and</strong> do not change form in<br />
<strong>the</strong> plural. Ex. "Il brindisi," <strong>the</strong> toast, "i brindisi," <strong>the</strong> toasts; " il<br />
dì," <strong>the</strong> day, "i dì," <strong>the</strong> days; " il lunedì," <strong>the</strong> Monday, " i lunedì,"<br />
<strong>the</strong> Mondays ; " un barbagianni ," an owl.<br />
Except a few words (about twelve) derived from <strong>the</strong> Greek, <strong>which</strong><br />
are feminine . Ex.<br />
La metropoli , <strong>the</strong> metropolis , le metropoli , <strong>the</strong> metropolis .<br />
L' analisi , 2 <strong>the</strong> analysis , le analisi , <strong>the</strong> analysis .<br />
La crisi ,' <strong>the</strong> crisis , le crisi , <strong>the</strong> crises .<br />
La diocesi , <strong>the</strong> diocese , le diocesi , <strong>the</strong> diocese .<br />
1 An e, dotted thus e, has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> a in <strong>the</strong> word<br />
gate .<br />
2 An s, dotted thus s, has <strong>the</strong> soft sound of <strong>the</strong> s in <strong>the</strong> word rose.<br />
ON THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS. 105<br />
134
WORDS ENDING IN O.<br />
408. All words ending in o are of <strong>the</strong> masculine gender, <strong>and</strong> form<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir plural by changing <strong>the</strong> o into i. Ex.<br />
Il tempo, <strong>the</strong> time , i tempi , <strong>the</strong> times .<br />
Il trono, <strong>the</strong> throne , i troni, <strong>the</strong> thrones .<br />
Il pala<strong>zz</strong>o, <strong>the</strong> palace, i pala<strong>zz</strong>i, <strong>the</strong> palaces .<br />
Except "la mano," <strong>the</strong> h<strong>and</strong>, "le mani," <strong>the</strong> h<strong>and</strong>s, <strong>and</strong> " eco," 1 <strong>the</strong><br />
echo.<br />
ON THIS POINT THE FOLLOWING OBSERVATIONS ARE<br />
NECESSARY :<br />
409. Nouns ending in co <strong>and</strong> go take an h in <strong>the</strong> plural. Ex.<br />
Il bosco, <strong>the</strong> wood, i boschi, <strong>the</strong> woods.<br />
Il fuoco, <strong>the</strong> fire , i fuochi, <strong>the</strong> fires .<br />
Il manico , <strong>the</strong> h<strong>and</strong>le, i manichi , <strong>the</strong> h<strong>and</strong>les -.<br />
Il castigo , <strong>the</strong> punishment , i castighi , <strong>the</strong> punishments .<br />
410. Notice however that <strong>the</strong> following words do not require any h<br />
in <strong>the</strong>ir plural form. Ex.<br />
Il Greco, <strong>the</strong> Greek , i Greci , <strong>the</strong> Greeks .<br />
Il porco, <strong>the</strong> pig, i Porci, <strong>the</strong> pigs.<br />
L' amico , <strong>the</strong> friend , gli amici , <strong>the</strong> friends .<br />
Il nemico , <strong>the</strong> enemy , i nemici , <strong>the</strong> enemies .<br />
Il medico , <strong>the</strong> doctor, i medici , <strong>the</strong> doctors.<br />
Il portico, <strong>the</strong> portico, i portici, <strong>the</strong> porticoes.<br />
Il mosaico , <strong>the</strong> mosaic , i mosaici , <strong>the</strong> mosaics .<br />
411. As a general rule nouns ending in io form <strong>the</strong>ir plural by<br />
merely cutting off <strong>the</strong> final o. Ex.<br />
L' occhio, <strong>the</strong> eye, gli occhi , <strong>the</strong> eyes .<br />
Il viaggio , <strong>the</strong> voyage, i viaggi , <strong>the</strong> voyages .<br />
Il fornaio, <strong>the</strong> baker , i fornai , 2 <strong>the</strong> bakers .<br />
412. Notice, however, that <strong>the</strong> following words end with two ii in<br />
<strong>the</strong> plural to distinguish <strong>the</strong>m from similar words ending with<br />
one i only in <strong>the</strong> plural, <strong>and</strong> having quite a different meaning : I<br />
tempii , <strong>the</strong> churches , to distinguish it from i tempi , <strong>the</strong> times .<br />
I principii , <strong>the</strong> principles , i principi , <strong>the</strong> princes .<br />
I giudicii , <strong>the</strong> judgments , i giudici , <strong>the</strong> judges.<br />
Gli omicidii , <strong>the</strong> murders , gli omicidi , <strong>the</strong> murderers .<br />
I beneficii , <strong>the</strong> benefices , benifici , benevolent (plur.).<br />
Gli atrii , <strong>the</strong> porches, atri , black (plur.).<br />
135
413. 1 " Eco" was originally <strong>the</strong> name of a girl. Some writers<br />
make " eco " masculine ; in <strong>the</strong> plural, however, it is always "gli<br />
echi ," <strong>the</strong> echoes .<br />
414. 2 Formerly <strong>the</strong> words ending in aio in <strong>the</strong> singular were<br />
made to end in <strong>the</strong> plural in aj, as farnaj.<br />
106 ON THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS.<br />
415. Nouns that have an accent over <strong>the</strong> ì (ìo) in <strong>the</strong> singular,<br />
form <strong>the</strong>ir plural by changing <strong>the</strong> ìo into ii. Ex.<br />
Lo zio, <strong>the</strong> uncle , gli zii, <strong>the</strong> uncles .<br />
Il rio, <strong>the</strong> brook, i rii, <strong>the</strong> brooks.<br />
Il pendio, <strong>the</strong> slope, i pendii , <strong>the</strong> slopes.<br />
Il leggio , <strong>the</strong> reading -desk, i leggii , <strong>the</strong> reading -desks.<br />
WORDS ENDING IN U.<br />
416. There are only a few words in Italian ending in u ; <strong>the</strong>y are<br />
feminine <strong>and</strong> do not change form in <strong>the</strong> plural. Ex.<br />
La virtù , virtue . le virtù , virtues .<br />
Except " il ragù," stewed meat, <strong>which</strong> is masculine, <strong>and</strong> has for<br />
plural " i ragù," stewed meats .<br />
417. The following nouns, indicating parts of <strong>the</strong> human body,<br />
may end in <strong>the</strong> plural ei<strong>the</strong>r in i, <strong>and</strong> be masculine, or in a, <strong>and</strong><br />
be feminine . 1<br />
Il ciglio , <strong>the</strong> eyebrow, i cigli or le ciglia , <strong>the</strong> eyebrows.<br />
Il labbro, <strong>the</strong> lip, i labbri or le labbra, <strong>the</strong> lips.<br />
Il braccio, <strong>the</strong> arm, i bracci or le braccia , <strong>the</strong> arms .<br />
Il gomito, <strong>the</strong> elbow, i gomiti or le gomita , <strong>the</strong> elbows.<br />
Il dito, <strong>the</strong> finger , i diti or le dita, <strong>the</strong> fingers .<br />
Il ginocchio , <strong>the</strong> knee , i ginocchi or le ginocchia , <strong>the</strong> knees .<br />
Il calcagno, <strong>the</strong> heel , i calcagni or le calcagna , <strong>the</strong> heels .<br />
EXERCISE XLI.<br />
Chronology (328) <strong>and</strong> (337) geography are <strong>the</strong> eyes 2 (411) of<br />
history (328). Spain produces lemons, oranges, <strong>and</strong> olives in great<br />
abundance. Poets (328) compare cheeks (392) to roses, eyes to<br />
stars, h<strong>and</strong>s (408) to lilies, <strong>and</strong> teeth to pearls. One must (307)<br />
know (364) ma<strong>the</strong>matics 3 (225) to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> astronomy<br />
thoroughly. I admire <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>atres (408), fountains, statues,<br />
galleries, <strong>and</strong> gardens of this beautiful city. History proves that<br />
(che) philosophers (328) have always been preceded by (269, 270)<br />
poets, <strong>and</strong> (by <strong>the</strong>) painters. The rose is <strong>the</strong> queen of flowers, <strong>and</strong><br />
136
<strong>the</strong> emblem of (328) beauty. We have visited <strong>the</strong> principal cities<br />
(396) of Italy. The earth presents on its surface, heights, (137,<br />
389) hollows, precipices, (411) volcanoes, seas, marshes, rivers,<br />
(402) forests, <strong>and</strong> fields. These men are not (125) French ; <strong>the</strong>y<br />
are German (409) ; three are sailors (411), <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>rs are<br />
workmen .<br />
418. 1 The words "anello," ring, " castello," castle, " filo," thread, "<br />
urlo," howling, <strong>and</strong> a few o<strong>the</strong>rs, may end in <strong>the</strong> plural ei<strong>the</strong>r in i<br />
or in a.<br />
2 The student is advised to look for <strong>the</strong> translations of <strong>the</strong> words<br />
in <strong>the</strong> vocabulary at <strong>the</strong> end of this grammar before applying <strong>the</strong><br />
rules bearing on <strong>the</strong>m in <strong>the</strong> exercises .<br />
419. 3 Ma<strong>the</strong>matics, statistics, politics, are generally translated<br />
into Italian by " La matematica , la statistica , la politica ."<br />
107 ON THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS.<br />
IRREGULARITIES IN THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS.<br />
420. The following nouns have two meanings, <strong>and</strong> for each<br />
meaning <strong>the</strong>re is a different plural :<br />
IL MEMBRO, <strong>the</strong> member .<br />
I MEMBRI, <strong>the</strong> members (of a society) ; <strong>and</strong> LE MEMBRA, <strong>the</strong><br />
limbs of <strong>the</strong> body.<br />
IL GESTO, <strong>the</strong> gesture .<br />
I GESTI, <strong>the</strong> gestures of an orator, of an actor ; <strong>and</strong> LE GESTA, <strong>the</strong><br />
exploits of a hero .<br />
IL FRUTTO, <strong>the</strong> fruit, <strong>the</strong> result . I<br />
I FRUTTI, <strong>the</strong> results ; also <strong>the</strong> fruits of <strong>the</strong> same plants ; <strong>and</strong> LE<br />
FRUTTA, fruits of various kinds (dessert ).<br />
IL MURO, <strong>the</strong> wall.<br />
I MURI, <strong>the</strong> walls of a house , of a garden, of a park ; <strong>and</strong> LE MURA,<br />
<strong>the</strong> walls of a town.<br />
IL CARRO, <strong>the</strong> chariot , <strong>the</strong> cart.<br />
I CARRI, <strong>the</strong> chariots ; <strong>and</strong> LE CARRA, <strong>the</strong> carts, cart-loads.<br />
L' osso, <strong>the</strong> bone.<br />
GLI ossi, <strong>the</strong> bones (any bones) ; <strong>and</strong> LE OSSA, <strong>the</strong> human bones.<br />
IL CORNO, <strong>the</strong> horn.<br />
I CORNI, <strong>the</strong> horns (wind instruments) ; <strong>and</strong> LE CORNA, <strong>the</strong><br />
horns of an animal .<br />
137
IL RISO, <strong>the</strong> rice , <strong>the</strong> laugh.<br />
I Risi ,<strong>the</strong> rice (an Italian dish); <strong>and</strong> LE RISA, <strong>the</strong> plural of laugh.<br />
IL LEGNO, <strong>the</strong> wood, <strong>the</strong> carriage , <strong>the</strong> ship.<br />
I LEGNI , <strong>the</strong> woods, <strong>the</strong> carriages, <strong>the</strong> ships ; <strong>and</strong> LE LEGNA,<br />
firewood.<br />
IL MAGO, <strong>the</strong> magician , or <strong>the</strong> wise man (of <strong>the</strong> East).<br />
I MAGHI, <strong>the</strong> magicians ; <strong>and</strong> I MAGI,<strong>the</strong> wise men (of <strong>the</strong> East) .<br />
421. The following nouns in <strong>the</strong> singular end in o, <strong>and</strong> are<br />
masculine , in <strong>the</strong> plural end in a, <strong>and</strong> are feminine .<br />
L' uovo, 1 <strong>the</strong> egg, le uova, <strong>the</strong> eggs.<br />
Il miglio , <strong>the</strong> mile , le miglia , <strong>the</strong> miles .<br />
Il paio, <strong>the</strong> pair, le paia, <strong>the</strong> pairs.<br />
Lo staio, <strong>the</strong> bushel, le staia , <strong>the</strong> bushels.<br />
Il grido, <strong>the</strong> cry, le grida, <strong>the</strong> cries .<br />
Il centinaio , <strong>the</strong> hundred, le centinaia , <strong>the</strong> hundreds.<br />
Il migliaio , <strong>the</strong> thous<strong>and</strong>, le migliaia , <strong>the</strong> thous<strong>and</strong>s,<br />
1 Notice that an o preceded by a u has always <strong>the</strong> broad sound of<br />
<strong>the</strong> o in <strong>the</strong> word orphan.<br />
108 ON THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS.<br />
422. Words ending in ie 1 are feminine , <strong>and</strong> do not change form<br />
in <strong>the</strong> plural. Ex.<br />
La specie , <strong>the</strong> species , kind, le specie , <strong>the</strong> species , kinds .<br />
La superficie , <strong>the</strong> surface , le superficie , <strong>the</strong> surfaces .<br />
Except " la moglie ," <strong>the</strong> wife , <strong>which</strong> makes in <strong>the</strong> plural " le<br />
mogli ."<br />
423. The following nouns are irregular in <strong>the</strong> plural :<br />
Dio, God, gli dei, <strong>the</strong> gods.<br />
L'uomo, <strong>the</strong> man, gli uomini , <strong>the</strong> men.<br />
Il bue, <strong>the</strong> ox, i buoi, <strong>the</strong> oxen.<br />
424. The following words have two meanings , <strong>and</strong> two genders :<br />
"il tema ," means <strong>the</strong> exercise ; " la tema ," means fear .<br />
" Il fine ," means <strong>the</strong> aim, scope ; " la fine ," means <strong>the</strong> end.<br />
" Un margine ," means a margin ; " una margine ," means a scar.<br />
" Un dramma," means a drama ; " una dramma," means a<br />
drachm. [dram]<br />
138
" Un pianeta," means a planet ; " una pianeta," means a priest's<br />
cope.<br />
425. Observe that <strong>the</strong> words "la fame," hunger; "la sete," thirst;<br />
"la gioventù," youth ; "la servitù," servants, slavery; " l'udito," <strong>the</strong><br />
hearing; " il miele," honey; " il fieno," hay; "la stirpe ," race ,<br />
family, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> names of virtues, vices, <strong>and</strong> metals are only used<br />
in <strong>the</strong> singular. Ex. "La probità," probity, "la modestia," modesty,<br />
"la superbia," pride , "L' oro," gold, " l' acciaio," steel, &c., are only<br />
used in <strong>the</strong> singular .<br />
426. The following words are only employed in <strong>the</strong> plural :<br />
Gli annali , <strong>the</strong> annals . Le molle , <strong>the</strong> tongs.<br />
Le forbici, | , scissors Le stoviglie , <strong>the</strong> crockery -ware .<br />
Le cesoie , | Le spezie , <strong>the</strong> spices .<br />
Le no<strong>zz</strong>e, <strong>the</strong> wedding. L' esequie , <strong>the</strong> obsequies .<br />
EXERCISE XLII.<br />
The fruit (420) for dessert is (are) on <strong>the</strong> side-board. The Jupiter<br />
of Homer was <strong>the</strong> first among <strong>the</strong> gods (88, 423) of mythology. The<br />
games (409) <strong>and</strong> exercises practised by <strong>the</strong> Greeks, were good for<br />
<strong>the</strong> health of <strong>the</strong> body, <strong>and</strong> (for) <strong>the</strong> strength of <strong>the</strong> limbs (420). I<br />
have bought two pairs (421) of boots, one for Mary, <strong>and</strong> one for my<br />
sister Elizabeth. A friend has sent me (193) a basket of eggs (421).<br />
Climate (328, 397) has great influence on <strong>the</strong> character of (328)<br />
men. I have corrected your exercises .<br />
427. 1 Notice that words ending with an accented vowel (see rules<br />
396, 400, <strong>and</strong> 416), words ending in i (see rule 407), <strong>and</strong> words<br />
ending in ie (see rule 422) do not, asa rule , change form in <strong>the</strong><br />
plural. Also that " re," king (<strong>which</strong> was formerly accented) has <strong>the</strong><br />
same form in <strong>the</strong> singular <strong>and</strong> in <strong>the</strong> plural.<br />
ON COMPOUND NOUNS.109.<br />
LESSON XXI.<br />
ON ITALIAN AND ENGLISH COMPOUND NOUNS.<br />
ON ITALIAN COMPOUND NOUNS.<br />
428. The number of Italian compound words is very limited, <strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> order of <strong>the</strong> words in <strong>the</strong>m is seldom reversed. Most of <strong>the</strong>m<br />
are of <strong>the</strong> masculine gender, <strong>and</strong> form <strong>the</strong> plural of <strong>the</strong> words of<br />
<strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong>y are composed according to <strong>the</strong> sense . Ex.<br />
SINGULAR. PLURAL .<br />
Un capolavoro, 1 a masterpiece , dei capilavori .<br />
139
Un capocaccia , a chief hunter , dei capicaccia .<br />
Una ferrovia , a railway , delle ferrovie .<br />
Un bassorilievo , a bas-relief , dei bassirilievi .<br />
Un capogiro, a fit of giddiness , dei capogiri .<br />
Un arcobaleno, a rainbow, degli archibaleno .<br />
Uno spa<strong>zz</strong>acamino , a chimney -sweeper , degli spa<strong>zz</strong>acamini .<br />
Madreperla , mo<strong>the</strong>r -of-pearl, delle madriperle .<br />
429. When <strong>the</strong> first of <strong>the</strong> two words in a compound noun is<br />
Greek or Latin, or has lost <strong>the</strong> vowel ending, <strong>the</strong> second word<br />
alone is inflected . Ex.<br />
SINGULAR. PLURAL .<br />
Un monosillabo, a monosyllabic word, dei monosillabi .<br />
Un viceconsolo , a vice -consul, dei viceconsoli .<br />
Un cavolfiore , a cauliflower , dei cavolfiori ,<br />
ON ENGLISH COMPOUND NOUNS.<br />
430. English Compound Nouns belong to three classes :<br />
The first class contains such nouns as straw hat, schoolmaster,<br />
moonlight, in <strong>which</strong> one of <strong>the</strong> two words qualifies <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r, with<br />
<strong>which</strong> it has affinity or connection. In translating <strong>the</strong>se<br />
compound nouns into Italian, <strong>the</strong> order of words must be reversed<br />
<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> preposition "di," only, or (if <strong>the</strong> article is required, see<br />
pages 22, 93) "del," " dello," &c., is placed between <strong>the</strong> words. Ex.<br />
Un maestro di scuola, a schoolmaster .<br />
Una casa di campagna , a country-house .<br />
Un mercante di vino, a wine -merchant .<br />
I raggi del sole, <strong>the</strong> sunbeams .<br />
Le stelle della mattina , <strong>the</strong> morning -stars.<br />
1 An o, dotted thus o, has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> o in <strong>the</strong> word<br />
orphan.<br />
110 ON COMPOUND NOUNS.<br />
431. The second class of English compound nouns includes such<br />
nouns as writing-paper, dining-room , in <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong> first noun<br />
expresses <strong>the</strong> use or destination of <strong>the</strong> second noun. In<br />
translating <strong>the</strong>se compound nouns into Italian, <strong>the</strong> order of <strong>the</strong><br />
words must be reversed, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> preposition " da " must be placed<br />
between <strong>the</strong> two words. Ex.<br />
Carta da scrivere , writing -paper.<br />
Una sala da pranzo, a dining -room.<br />
140
Una spa<strong>zz</strong>ola da panni, a cloth-brush.<br />
Una bottiglia da vino, a wine -bottle.<br />
Una vesta da camera , a dressing -gown.<br />
432. The third class of English compound nouns includes such<br />
nouns as steam-boat, wind-mill, in <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong> first noun denotes<br />
<strong>the</strong> means by <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong> object expressed by <strong>the</strong> first noun acts.<br />
In translating <strong>the</strong>se compound nouns, <strong>the</strong> order of <strong>the</strong> words is<br />
inverted, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> preposition " a " placed between <strong>the</strong> two words.<br />
Ex.<br />
Un batello a vapore, a steam -boat.<br />
Un mulino a vento , a wind-mill .<br />
Un bastimento a vela , a sailing -vessel .<br />
433. No positive rule can be given for <strong>the</strong> formation of <strong>the</strong><br />
following expressions , <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> like :<br />
L' Ufficio della Posta, <strong>the</strong> post-office .<br />
Il mercato del fieno , <strong>the</strong> hay- market .<br />
Bei campi a frumento , beautiful corn-fields.<br />
EXERCISE XLIII.<br />
Do you (122) like my bro<strong>the</strong>r's works ? I look upon <strong>the</strong>m as<br />
master-pieces (428). Give me pen <strong>and</strong> ink (inkst<strong>and</strong>), a sheet of<br />
writing paper (431), <strong>and</strong> an envelope . I want (volere) (307) to write<br />
to <strong>the</strong> director of this railway. Last night I met (Past Def.) William<br />
at my bro<strong>the</strong>r's ; 1 he seemed (Imperf. Ind.) satisfied with (266)<br />
<strong>the</strong> result of his examination. How do you like your new house ? I<br />
do not like it much ; <strong>the</strong> dining-room (431) is very dark , <strong>the</strong> bed-<br />
rooms are small, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> ground-floor is gloomy. Where did you<br />
buy (have you bought) this chimney-piece ? (430) I bought it (180,<br />
193) at Johnstone's. 1 Where have you been ? (149, 123) I have<br />
been to (<strong>the</strong>) market, to buy three cart-loads (420) of firewood.<br />
Where is <strong>the</strong> pincushion ? It is on <strong>the</strong> work table , (431) near my<br />
sister's lea<strong>the</strong>r bag (430). We went to (207) America in a steam-<br />
boat (432), <strong>and</strong> came back in a sailing -vessel .<br />
434. 1 The expressions at my bro<strong>the</strong>r's, at Charles', meaning at<br />
<strong>the</strong> house of, are translated into Italian "da mio fratello," " da<br />
Carlo," or " a casa di mio fratello," &c. But expressions such as at<br />
Johnstone's, are translated into Italian by " nel negozio, or nella<br />
bottega di Johnstone," when 3 . keeps a shop for selling goods<br />
(linen, furniture, &c.), <strong>and</strong> by " all'Albergo," or " al caffé<br />
Johnstone ," when 3 . keeps a hotel, or a cafe .<br />
141
ON THE ITALIAN SUFFIXES . 111<br />
LESSON XXII.<br />
ON THE ALTERATION IN THE MEANING OF WORDS BY MEANS<br />
OF SUFFIXES .<br />
435. The Italians give <strong>the</strong> names of " Accrescitivi,"<br />
(augmentatives), " Diminutivi," ( diminutives), <strong>and</strong> " Peggiorativi,"<br />
(depreciatives), to certain suffixes, <strong>which</strong>, like <strong>the</strong> English ish,<br />
alter or modify <strong>the</strong> meaning of nouns, adjectives, <strong>and</strong> even<br />
adverbs. The Italian language is very rich in suffixes, <strong>which</strong><br />
modify in a variety of ways <strong>the</strong> idea expressed by <strong>the</strong> primitive<br />
term, <strong>and</strong> are of great use in adding expression to words. Only <strong>the</strong><br />
principal suffixes will be given here .<br />
" ACCRESCITIVI."<br />
436. The principal Italian " accrescitivi " are "one,""ona," " otto "<br />
<strong>and</strong> " otta."<br />
437. The suffixes " one" <strong>and</strong> " ona" denote bigness, as well as<br />
stoutness . Ex.<br />
Un libro, a book, un librone , a big book.<br />
Un Uomo, a man, un omone , 1 a tall, stout man.<br />
Un cane , a dog, un cagnone , 2 a large dog.<br />
438. On this point it is to be observed that when a feminine noun<br />
takes <strong>the</strong> suffix one it becomes masculine . Ex.<br />
Una strada, a street , uno stradone, a large road.<br />
Una donna, a woman, un donnone , a big, stout woman.<br />
439. But adjectives take both <strong>the</strong> forms of <strong>the</strong> suffix, o<strong>the</strong>rwise<br />
<strong>the</strong>y might be ambiguous. Ex.<br />
Una vecchia , an old woman, una vecchiona , a big, old woman.<br />
440. The suffixes " otto," " otta," indicate somewhat of an increase<br />
in <strong>the</strong> ordinary size , as well as vigour. Ex.<br />
Un raga<strong>zz</strong>o, a boy, un raga<strong>zz</strong>otto, a fine strong lad.<br />
441. The Italian " diminutivi " are divided into two classes : <strong>the</strong> "<br />
diminutivi -ve<strong>zz</strong>eggiativi," ( endearing), <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> " diminutivi -<br />
dispregiativi " (depreciating ).<br />
" DIMINUTIVI-VEZZEGGIATIVI."<br />
442. The principal "diminutivi -ve<strong>zz</strong>eggiativi" are " ino," "ina,"<br />
"olino," " olina," " etto," " etta," " ello," " ella," " erello," " erella," "<br />
142
icello," " icella," " oncino," <strong>and</strong> " oncina," 3 <strong>which</strong> indicate<br />
affection , endearment , as well as smallness . Ex.<br />
Un fiume , a river , un fiumicello , a nice little river .<br />
Un pesce , a fish, un pesciolino , a nice little fish.<br />
Un vecchio , an old man, un vecchierello , a dear little old man.<br />
443. 1 The word " uomo " loses its first letter, , when it takes a<br />
suffix.<br />
444. 2 The word " cane " takes an euphonic g before <strong>the</strong> n when it<br />
takes a suffix, except before "ino," when <strong>the</strong> g is not inserted, as "<br />
un canino ," a nice little dog.<br />
3 Discrimination <strong>and</strong> taste must be <strong>had</strong> in using <strong>the</strong> "<br />
ve<strong>zz</strong>eggiativi . "<br />
112 ON THE ITALIAN SUFFIXES .<br />
445. On this point it is to be observed that <strong>many</strong> feminine nouns<br />
become masculine when <strong>the</strong>y take <strong>the</strong> suffix " ino." Ex.<br />
Una tavola, a table, un tavolino, a nice little table.<br />
446. The suffixes in <strong>the</strong> following words are often used but <strong>cannot</strong><br />
be easily classified .<br />
Arboscello 1 (from " albero," tree ), a little tree , a shrub.<br />
" DlMINUTIVI -DISPREGIATIVI."<br />
447. The principal " diminutivi -dispregiativi " are " uccio,"<br />
" uccia," " u<strong>zz</strong>o," " u<strong>zz</strong>a," " onzolo," " onzola," <strong>which</strong> indicate<br />
despicable pettiness . Ex.<br />
Una stanza, a room, una stanzuccia , a small dirty room.<br />
448. On this point it is to be observed that <strong>the</strong> suffixes " uccio," "<br />
uccia," appended to Christian names signify endearment, <strong>and</strong> not<br />
contempt. Ex.<br />
Carluccio mio ! My dear little Charley !<br />
" PEGGIORATIVI."<br />
449. The principal Italian " peggiorativi " are " accio," " accia," "<br />
a<strong>zz</strong>o," "a<strong>zz</strong>a," <strong>which</strong> signify contempt for worthlessness . Ex.<br />
Uno cappello, a hat, un cappellaccio , an ugly, dirty hat.<br />
450. The suffixes " aglia " <strong>and</strong> "ame," signify plenty but of no<br />
value . Ex.<br />
La canaglia (from " cane ," dog), <strong>the</strong> rabble.<br />
143
Gentaglia (from "gente ," people), vulgar people.<br />
Ossame (from " osso," bone), a heap of bones.<br />
451. The suffixes in <strong>the</strong> following words are often used but <strong>cannot</strong><br />
be easily classified .<br />
Un poetastro (from " poeta," poet), a bad poet.<br />
Una casipola (from " casa," house ), a hovel .<br />
Un liberc olo (from "libro," book), a paltry little book.<br />
Una fieruc ola (from " fiera ," fair ), an insignificant fair .<br />
452. Sometimes two suffixes are added to one noun. Ex.<br />
Un librettino , a nice little book, Un violoncello , a violoncello .<br />
Un ruscellettino , a streamlet , Un omaccione , a big, nasty man.<br />
453. Some of <strong>the</strong> above -mentioned suffixes can be added to<br />
adjectives . Ex.<br />
Ricco, rich , riccone , very rich .<br />
Fresco, fresh , freschetto , ra<strong>the</strong>r fresh .<br />
Rosso, red, rossiccio , reddish.<br />
Amaro, bitter , amarastro , bitterish .<br />
454. Some of <strong>the</strong> above -mentioned suffixes can be added to<br />
adverbs. Ex.<br />
Bene , well, benone , very well.<br />
Bene , well, benino , pretty well.<br />
1 An e, dotted thus e, has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> a in <strong>the</strong> word<br />
gate .<br />
ON THE ITALIAN SUFFIXES , AND COLLECTIVE NOUNS. 113<br />
ON COLLECTIVE NOUNS.<br />
455. There are two sorts of collective nouns, <strong>the</strong> collective<br />
general , <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> collective partitive .<br />
456. The collective general represents <strong>the</strong> whole collection, as " il<br />
popolo," <strong>the</strong> people , " l'armata," <strong>the</strong> army, "la flotta," <strong>the</strong> fleet, "la<br />
famiglia," <strong>the</strong> family, &c., <strong>and</strong> verbs, adjectives, <strong>and</strong> pronouns<br />
referring to it are inflected as if <strong>the</strong>y were used with a noun in<br />
<strong>the</strong> singular . Ex.<br />
Il popolo 1 inglese mantiene i suoi diritti politici .<br />
The English people maintain <strong>the</strong>ir political rights .<br />
457. The collective partitive represents only a portion of <strong>the</strong><br />
collection, as " un'armata," an army, " una moltitudine," a<br />
multitude, &c., <strong>and</strong>, as a rule , verbs, adjectives, <strong>and</strong> pronouns<br />
144
used in <strong>the</strong> sentence are inflected according to <strong>the</strong> noun <strong>which</strong><br />
follows <strong>the</strong> collective partitive . 2 Ex.<br />
Una piccola armata di soldati eur opei conquistarono le<br />
Indie .<br />
A small army of European soldiers conquered India.<br />
EXERCISE XLIV.<br />
Where did you buy ( have you bought) that (152) huge book ? (437) I<br />
bought it at Hachette's (434). I caught (180) this pretty little bird<br />
in its nest, in <strong>the</strong> trunk of a large tree, (437) near your uncle's<br />
farm. I am astonished to see you (122, 198) wearing (314) that<br />
horrid Spanish hat (177, 449). I wear it because it is light <strong>and</strong><br />
comfortable. Take 3 (122) <strong>the</strong>se pretty little books, <strong>and</strong> put <strong>the</strong>m<br />
(201) on Elizabeth's little table . This morning we walked (Past<br />
Indef.) four miles (421) ; we went as far as <strong>the</strong> beautiful little<br />
bridge (442) near <strong>the</strong> village inn. Take away this cur ; (444, 447) I<br />
hate it. Every evening we take a walk 3 along a small stream, in<br />
<strong>which</strong> a thous<strong>and</strong> pretty little fishes swim about. How do you do<br />
(see page 89) to-day? Very well! (454) I thank you. The committee<br />
(456) made a report of <strong>the</strong> case , <strong>and</strong> sent it to <strong>the</strong> king. Under his<br />
despotic government <strong>the</strong> people (456) suffered (Past Def.) <strong>many</strong><br />
hardships.<br />
1 See rule 63, to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> meaning of <strong>the</strong> letters in <strong>the</strong><br />
darker type.<br />
458. 2 Notice, however, that when <strong>the</strong> Italians employ a collective<br />
noun, <strong>and</strong> want to express <strong>the</strong> action of <strong>the</strong> collection, as a whole,<br />
all words must be inflected as if <strong>the</strong>y were used with a noun in<br />
<strong>the</strong> singular . Ex.<br />
Una folia, di nemici ci apparve all'improvviso ,<br />
A crowd of enemies appeared suddenly before us.<br />
459 3 To take is translated into Italian by " Prendere." But to<br />
take, in <strong>the</strong> sense of to lead, is translated by " condurre," "<br />
menare." To take away, is translated by " Portar via," "monar via,"<br />
<strong>and</strong> to take off, by "levare." To take a portrait is " Fare un<br />
ritratto ." To take a walk, " Fare una passeggiata ."<br />
114 POETICAL FORMS OF NOUNS.<br />
IMPORTANT POETICAL FORMS OF NOUNS. 1<br />
( Arranged Alphabetically . )<br />
145
"Acciaro" is used in poetry for " acciaio," steel; " aëre " for " aria,"<br />
air; "aura" <strong>and</strong> " auretta " for " venticello," breeze; " agone " for "<br />
combattimento," combat; " aita " for " aiuto," help; " angue " for "<br />
serpente," serpent; " albore " for " alba," dawn; " albore " <strong>and</strong> "<br />
arbore " for " albero," tree ; " alma " for " anima," soul ; " amista "<br />
for " amicizia," friendship ; " aquilone " for " vento settentrionale,"<br />
north-wind ; " ara" for " altare," altar; " augei " for " uccelli," birds;<br />
" austro " for " vento del sud," south-wind; " avello" for " sepoltura,"<br />
tomb ; " avolo " for " nonno," gr<strong>and</strong>-fa<strong>the</strong>r; " belva " for " fiera," wild<br />
beast; " belta " for " belle<strong>zz</strong>a," beauty; " borea " for " vento<br />
settentrionale," north-wind; " br<strong>and</strong>o" for " spada," sword ; " bufera<br />
" for " turbine ," hurricane ; " calle " for " sentiero," path ; " capei "<br />
" chiome " <strong>and</strong> " crine " for " capelli," hair ; " cittade " for " città,"<br />
city ; " clade " for " strage," slaughter; " corsiero " " corridore " "<br />
destriero " <strong>and</strong> " palafreno " for " cavallo," horse ; " desio" for "<br />
desiderio," desire ; " delubro " for " tempio," church ; "die" for " di,"<br />
day; "diva" for " dea," goddess; " dritto " for " diritto," right; " dumi "<br />
for " spini ," thorns; " etere" <strong>and</strong> " etra" for " cielo" sky; "euro" for "<br />
vento dell' est," east-wind; " face " for " fiaccola," torch; " favella " for<br />
"lingua," language ; " Filomela " for " rosignolo," nightingale ; "<br />
gaudio " for " allegre<strong>zz</strong>a," joy; " gioventude " for " gioventù," youth;<br />
"gota" for " guancia," cheek; " guiderdone " for " ricompensa,"<br />
reward; " imago" for " imagine," image; " iri " <strong>and</strong> " iride," for "<br />
arcobaleno," rainbow; " labbia " for " labbra," lips; "lai" for "<br />
lamenti," laments ; " lari " for "dei," gods; " larva" for " spettro,"<br />
spectre ; " lemuri " for " spettri ," hobgoblins; " lena" for " forza,"<br />
strength; " magione" for " casa," house ; " monile " for " Collana,"<br />
necklace ; " motto " for " parola," word ; " nappo " for " ta<strong>zz</strong>a," cup ;<br />
"noto" for " vento del sud," south-wind; " numi " for "dei," gods;<br />
"occaso"for " sera," evening ; " orto " for " mattina," morning; "<br />
ostello " for " albergo," abode; " pelago " for " oceano," ocean ; "<br />
pieta " for " compassione ," pity; " prence" for " principe," prince ; "<br />
Pr ogne " for " rondine ," swallow; " quadrello " for " freccia," arrow ;<br />
" rai " for " raggi ," rays ; " rio " for " ruscello," brook ; " salma"for "<br />
corpo," body; " silva " for " foresta," forest; " speme" for " speranza,"<br />
hope; " spirto " for " spirito," spirit; " stame " for " filo," thread; "<br />
strale" for " freccia," arrow ; " stelo " for " gambo," stem of a plant; "<br />
suora " for " Sorella," sister; " talamo " for " letto," bed; " vallo " for "<br />
fortificazione ," fortification; " veglio " for " vecchio," old man;<br />
"vespero " for "sera ," evening ; <strong>and</strong> " vessillo " for " b<strong>and</strong>iera ," flag.<br />
1 The poetical forms. of verbs are given on page 92.<br />
146
115 ON QUALIFICATIVE ADJECTIVES.<br />
LESSON XXIII.<br />
ON QUALIFICATIVE ADJECTIVES.<br />
460. In Italian, qualificative adjectives agree in gender <strong>and</strong><br />
number with <strong>the</strong> nouns <strong>the</strong>y qualify ; <strong>the</strong>y end ei<strong>the</strong>r in o or in e.<br />
1<br />
461. Adjectives ending in o, become feminine by changing <strong>the</strong> o<br />
into a. They form <strong>the</strong>ir plural by changing <strong>the</strong> o into i for <strong>the</strong><br />
masculine , <strong>and</strong> by changing <strong>the</strong> a into e for <strong>the</strong> feminine . 2 Ex.<br />
Il marito è ricco e generoso , e la moglie e bella è modesta.<br />
The husb<strong>and</strong> is rich <strong>and</strong> generous , <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> wife beautiful<br />
<strong>and</strong> modest.<br />
Questi uomini sono ricchi e generosi , e le loro mogli sono<br />
belle e modeste .<br />
These men are rich <strong>and</strong> generous , <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir wives are<br />
beautiful <strong>and</strong> modest.<br />
462. Adjectives ending in e, serve for both genders. They form<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir plural by changing <strong>the</strong> e into i. Ex.<br />
Il principe è illustre e potente , e la principessa è amabile ,<br />
ed oltremodo intelligente .<br />
The prince is illustrious <strong>and</strong> powerful, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> princess is<br />
amiable <strong>and</strong> exceedingly clever .<br />
Questi nobili sono illustri e potenti, e le loro spose sono<br />
amabili , ed eleganti .<br />
These noblemen are illustrious <strong>and</strong> powerful, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
wives are amiable , <strong>and</strong> elegant .<br />
463. In Italian, when an adjective qualifies two or more nouns, it<br />
is put in <strong>the</strong> plural form , <strong>and</strong> when <strong>the</strong> nouns are of different<br />
gender , <strong>the</strong> plural adjective agrees with <strong>the</strong> masculine . Ex.<br />
Il padre e il figlio sono cattivi ed orgogliosi , mentrechè la<br />
madre e la figlia sono buone e cortesi .<br />
The fa<strong>the</strong>r <strong>and</strong> son are wicked <strong>and</strong> proud, whilst <strong>the</strong> mo<strong>the</strong>r<br />
<strong>and</strong> daughter are good <strong>and</strong> courteous .<br />
Trovammo i contadini e le loro mogli assai industriosi e<br />
civili .<br />
We found <strong>the</strong> peasants <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir wives very industrious <strong>and</strong><br />
civil .<br />
147
464. 1 "Pari ," equal, " impari," unequal, <strong>and</strong> " dispari ," unlike,<br />
uneven, odd, are <strong>the</strong> only Italian adjectives that end in i, in <strong>the</strong><br />
singular ; <strong>the</strong>y have only one termination for both genders <strong>and</strong><br />
numbers . Ex.<br />
" Una vostra pari,"<br />
such a person as you are,<br />
465. 2 Adjectives ending in " co," "go," " ca," "ga," in <strong>the</strong> singular,<br />
as a rule , form <strong>the</strong>ir plural in "chi," "ghi," "che," "ghe," as "antico,"<br />
"antichi ," "antica ," "antiche ," ancient .<br />
466. Adjectives ending in " io" form <strong>the</strong>ir plural by merely cutting<br />
off <strong>the</strong> o ; as "savio," plural " savi ," wise. But when <strong>the</strong> adjective<br />
ends in "io" <strong>the</strong> plural ends in " ii " ; as " rio," plural " rii," wicked .<br />
116 ON QUALIFICATIVE ADJECTIVES.<br />
467. In Italian <strong>the</strong>re is no fixed rule for <strong>the</strong> position of adjectives ;<br />
<strong>the</strong>y are placed before or after <strong>the</strong> nouns <strong>the</strong>y qualify, according<br />
to taste , <strong>and</strong> euphony. Ex.<br />
Un nemico potente , / un potente nemico .<br />
A powerful enemy .<br />
468. Adjectives denoting colour, shape, taste , physical qualities,<br />
or derived from verbs, or names of nations, follow <strong>the</strong> nouns <strong>the</strong>y<br />
qualify. Ex.<br />
Paolo porta un cappello bianco.<br />
Paul wears a white hat.<br />
Le tavole rotonde sono eleganti .<br />
Round tables are elegant .<br />
Mi davano medicine amare .<br />
They gave me bitter medicine .<br />
Un uomo cieco ha l' udito acuto.<br />
A blind man has sharp ears .<br />
Queste sono cose sorprendenti .<br />
These are surprising things .<br />
Leggo un romanzo 1 francese .<br />
I am reading a French novel .<br />
469. When two adjectives qualify <strong>the</strong> same noun, if <strong>the</strong>y are short<br />
adjectives, <strong>the</strong>y may be placed one before <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r after <strong>the</strong><br />
noun; but if <strong>the</strong>y are long words, <strong>the</strong>y sound better after <strong>the</strong> noun.<br />
Ex.<br />
148
Un bel cavallo nero .<br />
A beautiful black horse .<br />
Questa storia è interessante e istruttiva .<br />
This history is interesting <strong>and</strong> instructive .<br />
470. When <strong>the</strong>re are more than two adjectives, <strong>the</strong>y go after <strong>the</strong><br />
noun <strong>the</strong>y qualify. Ex.<br />
Un uomo ricco, intelligente e generoso .<br />
A rich , intelligent , <strong>and</strong> generous man.<br />
471. When <strong>the</strong> adjective is modified by an adverb, both <strong>the</strong> adverb<br />
<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> adjective are placed after <strong>the</strong> noun. Ex.<br />
Sono fanciulli molto intelligent !.<br />
They are very intelligent children .<br />
472. Some adjectives vary <strong>the</strong>ir significance according as <strong>the</strong>y<br />
come before, or after <strong>the</strong> nouns <strong>the</strong>y qualify ; <strong>the</strong> following are<br />
<strong>the</strong> most important :<br />
" Un gentiluomo " means a nobleman .<br />
" Un Uomo gentile " means a kind man.<br />
" Un galantu omo " means a worthy man.<br />
" Un uomo galante " means a polite man.<br />
" Un gr<strong>and</strong>' Uomo " means a great man.<br />
" Un uomo gr<strong>and</strong>e " means a tall man.<br />
" Una certa notizia " means certain news .<br />
" Una notizia certa " means news <strong>which</strong> is au<strong>the</strong>ntic .<br />
1 A z, dotted thus z, has <strong>the</strong> soft sound of <strong>the</strong> z in <strong>the</strong> word zeal<br />
(50, 53).<br />
ON "BELLO," "GRANDE," " BUONO," AND "SANTO." 117<br />
ON THE ADJECTIVES "BELLO," "GRANDE," "BUONO," AND<br />
"SANTO."<br />
473. The adjective " bello," beautiful, pretty, is curtailed of <strong>the</strong><br />
last syllable , before masculine nouns beginning with a<br />
consonant, except an s "impure" ; before a vowel it loses <strong>the</strong> final<br />
letter, <strong>and</strong> takes an apostrophe . The plural of "bello" is "bei,"<br />
before a word beginning with a consonant, <strong>and</strong> " begli," before a<br />
word beginning with a vowel or an s " impure " Ex.<br />
Un bei quadro, a fine picture , bei quadri, fine pictures .<br />
Un bello scudo, a fine shield , begli scudi, fine shields .<br />
Un bell'anello , a fine ring , begli anelli , fine rings .<br />
149
474. The adjective " gr<strong>and</strong>e," great, tall, large , loses <strong>the</strong> final<br />
syllable (de), before masculine nouns, beginning with a<br />
consonant, both in <strong>the</strong> singular <strong>and</strong> plural. 1 This elision does<br />
not take place before an s "impure"; before a vowel, " gr<strong>and</strong>e" drops<br />
<strong>the</strong> final letter <strong>and</strong> takes in its stead an apostrophe. Ex.<br />
Un gran popolo (21), a great people, gran popoli, great nations .<br />
Un gr<strong>and</strong>e scrigno , a large chest , gr<strong>and</strong>i scrigni , large chests .<br />
Un gr<strong>and</strong>' elogio , a great eulogy, gr<strong>and</strong>' elogi . great eulogies .<br />
475. The adjective " buono," good, loses <strong>the</strong> final o, before nouns,<br />
masculine singular, beginning with a vowel, or any consonant,<br />
except an s "impure ." Ex.<br />
Un buon ammiraglio , a good admiral .<br />
Un buon temperino , a good pen-knife .<br />
Un buono scrittoio , a good writing -desk.<br />
476. " Il santo " means <strong>the</strong> saint , <strong>and</strong> is a noun.<br />
477. When "santo" means saint, <strong>and</strong> precedes a proper noun of<br />
<strong>the</strong> masculine gender, beginning with any consonant, except an<br />
5 " impure," it loses <strong>the</strong> last syllable (to). This elision does not<br />
take place when " santo " means holy. Ex.<br />
Ho veduto la chiesa di San Pietro .<br />
I have seen Saint Peter's .<br />
Il martirio di Santo Stefano .<br />
Saint Stephen's martyrdom.<br />
Ho visitato il santo sepolcro.<br />
I visited <strong>the</strong> holy sepulchre .<br />
478. 1 Sometimes "gr<strong>and</strong>e" is also curtailed before feminine<br />
nouns, both in <strong>the</strong> singular <strong>and</strong> plural ; as " Una gran disgrazia,"<br />
a great misfortune .<br />
ON QUALIFICATIVE ADJECTIVES. 118<br />
479. A LIST OF IMPORTANT ADJECTIVES 1<br />
Fresco, fresh , new. Povero, poor.<br />
Giovine , young. Attempato, aged.<br />
Allegro, cheerful . Mesto, sad.<br />
Glorioso, glorious. Eminente , eminent .<br />
Bravo, brave, able. Netto, clean .<br />
Sporco, dirty. Alto, high .<br />
Corto, short. Pieno , full.<br />
Vuoto, empty. Stretto , narrow.<br />
150
Largo, wide, broad. Pigro, lazy.<br />
Leggero , light , clear . Pesante , heavy .<br />
Grosso, large , big. Grasso, fat.<br />
Magro, lean . Abile, clever .<br />
Sordo, deaf. Muto, dumb.<br />
Idoneo 2 suitable . Semplice , simple .<br />
Brutto, ugly. Savio , wise .<br />
Stolto, foolish. Oscuro, dark.<br />
Grigio , grey. Spesso, thick .<br />
Gentile , polite. Ro<strong>zz</strong>o, rude.<br />
Cattivo , bad, wicked . Forte, strong.<br />
Temerario , rash. Avido, greedy .<br />
Rotondo, round. Ovale , oval.<br />
Ve<strong>zz</strong>oso, pretty, charming .<br />
Leggiadro , pretty, charming .<br />
Vago, vague , charming .<br />
Finto, feigned , artificial .<br />
EXERCISE XLV.<br />
Have you seen George's new carriage ? Yes, I have (208) ; it is<br />
strong <strong>and</strong> well made. The glorious productions of <strong>the</strong> eminent<br />
painter Raphael will ever form <strong>the</strong> delight of mankind. Napoleon<br />
I. often wore (Imp. Ind.) a grey (468) coat, <strong>and</strong> a round hat, with (a)<br />
a broad brim. General Garibaldi was riding a beautiful (473, 469)<br />
black horse . A great (474) talker is seldom a great speaker. If we<br />
<strong>had</strong> a good (475) telescope we could (304) see <strong>the</strong> custom-house . A<br />
tall man (472) is not always a great man. There is (154) a great<br />
difference between a polite (472) man <strong>and</strong> an honest man. Go<br />
(340) <strong>and</strong> fetch me a jug of warm (468) water. Here it is, (245) on<br />
<strong>the</strong> oval table . Where are you going, Bertha ? I am going (179) to<br />
Simpson's, (434) to buy some white cotton, <strong>and</strong> some red wool. I do<br />
not like this stair-case ; it is dark , <strong>and</strong> not clean. She writes in a<br />
simple (469) <strong>and</strong> natural style. My aunt has sent me a basket of<br />
flowers (348) ; it contains some red <strong>and</strong> white (465, 468) pinks,<br />
some pretty roses , <strong>and</strong> several kinds (422) of ferns .<br />
1 The above List does not contain <strong>the</strong> adjectives given on <strong>the</strong><br />
previous pages.<br />
480. 2 Adjectives ending in eo form <strong>the</strong>ir feminine by changing<br />
<strong>the</strong> eo into ea, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir plurals end in ei <strong>and</strong> ee. Ex.<br />
151
" Idoneo," " idonea ," "idonei ," suitable .<br />
ON THE WORDS " TUTTO," " MEZZO," AND " OGNI." 119<br />
ON THE WORD "TUTTO."<br />
481. " Tutto," preceded by <strong>the</strong> definite article, means <strong>the</strong> whole,<br />
<strong>and</strong> is a noun. Ex.<br />
Mi dia il tutto, Signore .<br />
Give me <strong>the</strong> whole, Sir.<br />
482. " Tutto," meaning all, every, whole, is an adjective, variable ;<br />
it is, in all cases , followed by <strong>the</strong> definite article . Ex.<br />
Tutti gli ufficiali ricevettero la medaglia .<br />
All <strong>the</strong> officers received <strong>the</strong> medal.<br />
Tutto il paese era lieto .<br />
The whole country was happy.<br />
483. " Tutto " (or ra<strong>the</strong>r " del tutto "), meaning " intieramente,"<br />
altoge<strong>the</strong>r , quite , is an adverb. Ex.<br />
Siamo tutto, or del tutto convinti .<br />
We are quite convinced .<br />
484. " Tutti quanti ," means <strong>the</strong> whole of <strong>the</strong>m . Ex.<br />
Perirono tutti quanti .<br />
The whole of <strong>the</strong>m perished .<br />
ON THE WORD "MEZZO." 1<br />
485. " Me<strong>zz</strong>o " means middle, way, means , <strong>and</strong> is a noun. Ex.<br />
Nel me<strong>zz</strong>o del giardino .<br />
In <strong>the</strong> middle of <strong>the</strong> garden.<br />
Non c'è me<strong>zz</strong>o di uscire .<br />
There is no way to get out.<br />
Non hanno i me<strong>zz</strong>i .<br />
They have not <strong>the</strong> means .<br />
486. When " me<strong>zz</strong>o " means half ; it is an adjective, <strong>and</strong> is<br />
variable when it precedes a noun, but remains invariable when it<br />
follows it. Ex.<br />
Una me<strong>zz</strong>a libbra di te.<br />
Half a pound of tea.<br />
Una libbra e me<strong>zz</strong>o di zucchero .<br />
A pound <strong>and</strong> a half of sugar.<br />
152
487. Half, <strong>the</strong> half is translated into Italian by " la metà ." Ex.<br />
Me ne dia la metà ; il tutto sarebbe troppo.<br />
Give me <strong>the</strong> half ; <strong>the</strong> whole of it would be too much.<br />
Il terremoto distrusse la meta della città .<br />
The earthquake destroyed half of <strong>the</strong> city.<br />
ON THE WORD "OGNI."<br />
488. The adjective " ogni " means each, every ; it is of both<br />
genders <strong>and</strong> can only be used in <strong>the</strong> singular . Ex.<br />
Ogni paese ha i suoi Costumi .<br />
Every country has its own customs.<br />
Ogni signora aveva dei fiori nei capelli .<br />
Every lady <strong>had</strong> flowers in her hair .<br />
1 Two <strong>zz</strong>, dotted thus <strong>zz</strong>, have <strong>the</strong> soft sound of <strong>the</strong> <strong>zz</strong> in <strong>the</strong> word<br />
mu<strong>zz</strong>le (52, 53).<br />
120 ON THE WORDS " ALTRO," " MOLTO," "TANTO," &c.<br />
ON THE WORD "ALTRO."<br />
489. " Altro," meaning o<strong>the</strong>r, is an adjective, <strong>and</strong> agrees in<br />
gender <strong>and</strong> number with <strong>the</strong> word to <strong>which</strong> it relates . Ex.<br />
Ho un altra sorella in Italia .<br />
I have ano<strong>the</strong>r sister in Italy.<br />
Non ha altri libri che questi ?<br />
Have you no o<strong>the</strong>r books but <strong>the</strong>se ?<br />
490. When " altro" is used as a noun, it means one thing,<br />
something else . Ex.<br />
Altro è il parlar di morte , altro è il morire .<br />
It is one thing to speak of death, but ano<strong>the</strong>r to die.<br />
491. " Non. ..altro che" means nothing else but. Ex.<br />
Paolo non fa altro che ciarlare .<br />
Paul does nothing but talk.<br />
492. When " altri " is repeated it signifies some ... o<strong>the</strong>rs . Ex.<br />
Altri <strong>and</strong>avano, 1 altri venivano .<br />
Some were going, o<strong>the</strong>rs were coming .<br />
493. In <strong>the</strong> colloquial style " altri " is sometimes used<br />
pleonastically after " noi " <strong>and</strong> " voi." Ex.<br />
Noi altri Italiani amiamo la musica .<br />
153
We Italians are fond of music .<br />
ON THE WORDS "MOLTO," "TANTO," "ALTRETTANTO,"<br />
"QUANTO," " TROPPO," AND " POCO."<br />
494. The words, " molto," much, very; " tanto," so much; "<br />
altrettanto," as much; " quanto," how much; " troppo," too much; "<br />
Poco," little; are adjectives, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>refore variable , when <strong>the</strong>y<br />
precede a noun. Ex.<br />
V'erano molti uomini e molte donne ,ma pochi fanciulli .<br />
There were <strong>many</strong> men <strong>and</strong> women , but few children .<br />
495. "Molto," " tanto," " altrettanto," " quanto," " troppo," <strong>and</strong> " poco,"<br />
are adverbs when <strong>the</strong>y modify an adjective, a verb or ano<strong>the</strong>r<br />
adverb. Ex.<br />
Queste raga<strong>zz</strong>ine sono molto intelligenti .<br />
These little girls are very intelligent .<br />
496. The expressions " Da quanto tempo," <strong>and</strong> " Da quanto in<br />
qua," mean How long (up till now). Ex.<br />
Da quanto tempo studia la lingua italiana ? (See rule 277.)'<br />
How long have you been studying Italian ?<br />
497. The expression " Un poco di," means A little . Ex.<br />
Antonio ha un poco di danaro.<br />
Anthony has a little money .<br />
1 See rule 63, to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> meaning of <strong>the</strong> letters in <strong>the</strong><br />
darker type.<br />
POETICAL FORMS OF ADJECTIVES. 121<br />
EXERCISE XLVI.<br />
Why do you like <strong>the</strong> Italian (468) language ? I like it because it is<br />
sweet <strong>and</strong> harmonious. The whole (482) country was in a state of<br />
agitation. When <strong>the</strong> clergyman's children saw us, <strong>the</strong>y became<br />
(Past Def.) quite (483) cheerful. Let us go into that shop ; I have<br />
seen <strong>the</strong>re (239, 243) some pretty (473) ribbons <strong>and</strong> French lace .<br />
Here is (245) a pound of good tea ; give (122) half (487) of it (240) to<br />
your sister. He spent an hour <strong>and</strong> a half (486) in writing (314) this<br />
letter. Louisa does nothing else but (491) sew <strong>and</strong> embroider.<br />
These chickens are large <strong>and</strong> fat, but <strong>the</strong> partridges are very<br />
lean. My bro<strong>the</strong>r has made me a (360) present of some beautiful<br />
(473) artificial flowers. How long (496) have you been waiting for<br />
(251) us? I have been waiting half (486) an hour.<br />
154
William began again to speak 2 of his Italian acquaintances .<br />
POETICAL FORMS OF ADJECTIVES. 1<br />
(Arranged AIphabetically .)<br />
" Algente " is used in poetry for " ghiacciante "freezing; " almo" for<br />
"che da animo e vita," reviving; " altrice" for " nutrice," fostering;<br />
"aprico" for " esposto al sole," sunny ; " boreale " for "<br />
settentrionale," nor<strong>the</strong>rn; " arto" for " stretto," narrow; " atro" for "<br />
nero," black ; " baldo " for " coraggioso," courageous; " corrusco" for<br />
"brillantissimo," very brilliant; " diro" for " empio," impious; " diva"<br />
for " come una dea," godlike ; " eburneo " for " come d'avorio," like<br />
ivory ; " edace " for " divoratore ," devourer ; " ermo " for " solitario,"<br />
lonely; " fedo " for " sporco," dirty; " fievole"for " debole ," feeble; "<br />
flavo " for " giallo," yellow; " flebile " for " lacrimabile," tearful; "<br />
ferale " for " funesto," baneful; " frale " for " fragile ," fragile ; "<br />
immane " for " spietato," pitiless; " imo " for " bassissimo," Lowest<br />
; " inulto " for " non vendicato," unavenged ; " irto " for " irsuto,"<br />
shaggy; " lieve " for " leggiero," light; " ole<strong>zz</strong>ante " for " profumato,"<br />
perfumed ; " prisco " for " primitivo," primitive; " protervo" for "<br />
arrogante ," arrogant; " reduce " for "che è di ritorno," returned from<br />
; " repente " for " subitaneo," sudden; " reo " <strong>and</strong> "no" for "<br />
colpevole," guilty ; " romito " for " solitario," solitary; " rorido" for<br />
"rugiadoso," dewy; " truce " for " fiero," fierce; " tumido " for " gonfio,"<br />
swollen <strong>and</strong> bumptious ; " ultrice " for " vendicatrice," avenger; "<br />
venusto " for " leggiadro," charming; <strong>and</strong> " vetusto " for " antico,"<br />
ancient .<br />
1 The poetical forms of verbs <strong>and</strong> nouns are given on pages 92<br />
<strong>and</strong> 114.<br />
498. 2 The expressions to begin again to speak , to begin again to<br />
write, &c., are translated into Italian by " tornare a parlare ," "<br />
tornare a scrivere ," &c.<br />
122 ON THE FORMATION OF ADVERBS.<br />
LESSON XXIV.<br />
ON THE FORMATION OF ADVERBS FROM ADJECTIVES.<br />
499. Adverbs are invariable <strong>and</strong> have no fixed place in a<br />
sentence , in Italian, but <strong>the</strong>y are generally placed after <strong>the</strong> verb<br />
with <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong>y are connected ; when adverbs modify adjectives,<br />
or past participles , <strong>the</strong>y precede <strong>the</strong>m . Ex.<br />
Andrea scrive bene .<br />
155
Andrew writes well.<br />
Matilde parla correttamente .<br />
Matilda speaks correctly .<br />
Questi artisti sono molto bravi.<br />
These artists are very clever .<br />
Filippo era elegantemente vestito .<br />
Philip was elegantly dressed.<br />
Scrive il francese 1 molto bene .<br />
He writes French very well. .<br />
500. Some adverbs consist of a single word, as " qu<strong>and</strong>o," when, "<br />
sempre," always; o<strong>the</strong>rs are formed of two or more words, <strong>and</strong> are<br />
commonly called adverbial expressions, 2 as "all'improvviso,"<br />
unexpectedly ; "d'ora in poi," henceforth .<br />
501. Many adverbs are formed in Italian by adding " mente "<br />
(<strong>which</strong> means manner ], to <strong>the</strong> feminine form of adjectives . Ex.<br />
Generoso , generous , generosamente , generously .<br />
Diligente , diligent , diligentemente , diligently .<br />
Dottissimo , very learned , dottissimamente , very learnedly .<br />
502. When adjectives end in " le " or " re," <strong>the</strong> e must be<br />
suppressed in forming adverbs. Ex.<br />
Facile , easy , facilmente , easily .<br />
Partic olare , particular , particolarmente , particularly .<br />
503. The adjectives "chiaro," clear, " forte ," hard, " felice." happy,<br />
<strong>and</strong> a few o<strong>the</strong>rs , are sometimes used as adverbs. Ex.<br />
Parlate chiaro . Speak clearly .<br />
Egli batte forte. He strikes hard.<br />
Vivete felice ! Live happily !<br />
504. Adjectives <strong>and</strong> adverbs may be used in <strong>the</strong> Positive degree ,<br />
as " bello," pretty, or in <strong>the</strong> Comparative degree , as " più bello,"<br />
prettier, or in <strong>the</strong> Superlative degree , as "il più bello," <strong>the</strong><br />
prettiest .<br />
1 An s, dotted thus s, has <strong>the</strong> soft sound of <strong>the</strong> s in <strong>the</strong> word rose.<br />
2 Fur<strong>the</strong>r on will be found a list of adverbs <strong>and</strong> adverbial<br />
expressions .<br />
ON THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON . 123<br />
COMPARISON OF EQUALITY.<br />
156
505. Comparisons of equality having reference to adjectives,<br />
participles, <strong>and</strong> adverbs are formed, in Italian, in <strong>the</strong> following<br />
ways :<br />
FIRST TERM . SECOND TERM .<br />
Così (or si), as (or so) come , as.<br />
Tanto (or altrettanto ), as, as much quanto, as. Ex.<br />
Egli è così ricco come mio nipote .<br />
He is as rich as my nephew .<br />
Cesare era tanto valoroso quanto Pompeo.<br />
Caesar was as brave as Pompey<br />
Ella scrive così elegantemente come suo fratello .<br />
You write as elegantly as your bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
506. Comparisons of equality having reference to nouns are<br />
formed, in Italian , in <strong>the</strong> following ways :<br />
FIRST TERM . SECOND TERM .<br />
Tanta (or altrettanta ), as, as much | quanta, as.<br />
Tanti (or altrettanti ), | as <strong>many</strong> as. | quanti , | as<br />
Tante (or altrettante | | quante , | Ex.<br />
Non ho tanti amici quanti ne ha mio fratello .<br />
I have not as <strong>many</strong> friends as my bro<strong>the</strong>r has.<br />
507. Comparisons of equality having reference to verbs are<br />
formed, in Italian , in <strong>the</strong> following ways :<br />
FIRST TERM . SECOND TERM .<br />
Più (or quanto più), <strong>the</strong> more più (or tanto più), <strong>the</strong> more .<br />
Meno (or quanto meno ), <strong>the</strong> less meno (or tanto meno ), <strong>the</strong> less .<br />
Tale | such | quale | as<br />
Tali , | | quali, | Ex<br />
Più Carlo studia, più desidera di studiare .<br />
The more Charles studies , <strong>the</strong> more he desires to study.<br />
Ci descrisse la scena tal quale l' aveva veduta.<br />
He described <strong>the</strong> scene to us such as he <strong>had</strong> seen it.<br />
508. The first terms " così," " tanto," " tale ," may be omitted . Ex.<br />
Essa non è bella come sua sorella .<br />
She is not so pretty as her sister .<br />
Egli non è sapiente quanto lo credevamo .<br />
157
He is not as learned as we believed him to be.<br />
509. " Al pari di," or " al pari che," as much- as, <strong>and</strong> " non meno<br />
di," or "non meno che," not less than, may be used instead of<br />
"così. ..come ;" " tanto. ..quanto." Ex.<br />
" Egli fu lodato al par di me."<br />
He -was praised as much as I.<br />
124 ON THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON .<br />
COMPARISONS OF SUPERIORITY AND INFERIORITY.<br />
510. In Italian, <strong>the</strong> comparative degrees of Superiority <strong>and</strong><br />
Inferiority are formed by translating <strong>the</strong> adverbs more , by " più" ;<br />
<strong>and</strong> less , by " meno " ; <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> conjunction than, by " di " or " che."<br />
511. When move than <strong>and</strong> less than indicate comparison, <strong>and</strong> are<br />
placed before nouns or adjectives, <strong>the</strong>y are translated ei<strong>the</strong>r by "<br />
più di " or " più che," <strong>and</strong> " meno di," or "meno che." Ex.<br />
Carlo è più educate di (che) Pietro .<br />
Charles is more educated than Peter .<br />
Nel decimo quarto secolo l' Italia era più colta di (che) tutte<br />
le altre nazioni dell' Europa.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> fourteenth century Italy was more polished than any<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r nation of Europe.<br />
512. When more than <strong>and</strong> less than indicate comparison, <strong>and</strong> are<br />
placed before personal pronouns, <strong>the</strong>y must be translated by " più<br />
di," " meno di," <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> personal pronouns must be in <strong>the</strong><br />
objective form (" me," " te," " lui," &c.). Ex.<br />
Voi siete più ricco di me.<br />
You are richer than I.<br />
Ella è di lunga pe<strong>zz</strong>a più dotta di lui.<br />
She is a great deal more learned than he.<br />
513. Notice, however, that when a personal pronoun is followed by<br />
a verb (not in <strong>the</strong> Infinitive ) of <strong>which</strong> it is <strong>the</strong> subject, than is<br />
rendered by " che non," " di quel," or " di quello che," <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
pronoun is used in <strong>the</strong> subjective form (" io," "tu," " egli," &c.), as<br />
in English. Ex.<br />
Il disegno è più difficile che io n on (di quello che) lo credevo .<br />
Drawing is more difficult than I thought.<br />
514. When more than, less than, do not indicate comparison,<br />
<strong>the</strong>y are expressed by " più di," " meno di." Ex.<br />
158
Egli possiede più di trenta mila lire sterline .<br />
He possesses more than thirty thous<strong>and</strong> pounds sterling .<br />
515. Than must be translated by " che " when <strong>the</strong> comparison<br />
takes place between two verbs in <strong>the</strong> Infinitive Mood, two nouns,<br />
two adjectives , or two adverbs. Ex.<br />
È più difficile saper ascoltare , che saper parlare .<br />
It is more difficult to know how to listen , than to know how<br />
to speak .<br />
A New York s'incontrano più Inglesi che Francesi .<br />
In New York one meets more English people than French .<br />
A parer mio, essa è più 1 ve<strong>zz</strong>osa che bella.<br />
In my opinion, she is ra<strong>the</strong>r attractive than beautiful .<br />
È meglio tardi che mai.<br />
It is better late than never .<br />
516. 1 " Piuttosto" (ra<strong>the</strong>r ) might be used here instead of " più,"<br />
thus :<br />
" Essa è piuttosto ve<strong>zz</strong>osa che bella."<br />
She is attractive ra<strong>the</strong>r than beautiful .<br />
125 ON THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON .<br />
EXERCISE XLVII.<br />
She is as (505) pretty as her sister, but not so (505) clever. The<br />
simplicity of nature is more pleasing than (511) <strong>the</strong><br />
embellishments of art. Do not (122, 128) walk so fast, walk slower.<br />
It is nobler to forgive than (515) to avenge one's self. London has<br />
as <strong>many</strong> (506) inhabitants as Belgium. Shall we go to <strong>the</strong> Crystal<br />
Palace ? I think so (271) ; it is better to go to-day than (515) to-<br />
morrow. Give him two guineas; you are richer (512) than I. The<br />
twilight in <strong>the</strong> south is much shorter than in <strong>the</strong> north. In <strong>the</strong><br />
first centuries <strong>the</strong> Romans were more warlike than (515)<br />
literary. Wrought iron is much stronger than cast iron ; it is less<br />
(510) brittle , <strong>and</strong> much (495) more durable . A feigned peace is<br />
more dangerous than open war. It is better to acquit a criminal<br />
than (515) to condemn an innocent person.<br />
ON THE SUPERLATIVE DEGREES .<br />
517. Adjectives <strong>and</strong> adverbs may be raised to <strong>the</strong> Superlative<br />
Relative , or to <strong>the</strong> Superlative Absolute degree .<br />
ON THE SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE DEGREE.<br />
159
518. The Superlative Relative is formed by placing " il più," " il,<br />
meno ," before <strong>the</strong> adjective , or <strong>the</strong> adverb. Ex.<br />
È il più ricco cittadino di 1 Londra.<br />
He is <strong>the</strong> richest citizen in London.<br />
Adolfo è il meno ingegnoso dei tre fratelli .<br />
Adolphus is <strong>the</strong> least ingenious of <strong>the</strong> three bro<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />
La grazia è la più nobil parte della belle<strong>zz</strong>a.<br />
Grace is <strong>the</strong> noblest part of beauty.<br />
519. The article may be omitted when "più" <strong>and</strong> "meno" follow <strong>the</strong><br />
noun. Ex.<br />
Egli è l'oratore più eloquente dei nostri tempi .<br />
He is <strong>the</strong> most eloquent orator of our day.<br />
520. The following adjectives form <strong>the</strong>ir Comparative, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
Comparative Superlative degrees in two ways :<br />
POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE.<br />
Buono, good.| più buono,|better . |Il più buono,| <strong>the</strong> best.<br />
|or migliore ,| |or il migliore ,<br />
Cattivo , bad.|Più cattivo ,| worse|Il più cattivo ,| <strong>the</strong> worst.|<br />
|or peggiore ,| |or il peggiore ,|<br />
Gr<strong>and</strong>e, great . Più gr<strong>and</strong>e | greater .| il più gr<strong>and</strong>e | <strong>the</strong> greatest .<br />
or maggiore , | or il maggiore ,|<br />
521. 1 Observe that in Italian after a superlative relative <strong>the</strong><br />
preposition "di," not " in," is used before names of places.<br />
126 ON THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON .<br />
POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE<br />
RELATIVE.<br />
Piccolo,<br />
small .<br />
|Più piccolo,<br />
or minore ,<br />
Alto, high . Più alto, or<br />
superiore ,<br />
Basso, low. Più basso, or<br />
EXAMPLES .<br />
inferiore ,<br />
|smaller . Il più piccolo,<br />
160<br />
or il minore ,1<br />
|higher . il più alto, or il<br />
superiore<br />
| lower. il più basso, or<br />
il inferiore<br />
<strong>the</strong><br />
smallest .<br />
<strong>the</strong><br />
highest .<br />
<strong>the</strong><br />
lowest.<br />
Il mio libro è più buono, / migliore di quello di sua sorella .<br />
My book is better than that of your sister .<br />
È il peggior romanzo ch' io abbia letto.
It is <strong>the</strong> worst novel I ever read.<br />
522. The following adverbs form <strong>the</strong> Comparative <strong>and</strong> Superlative<br />
degrees without <strong>the</strong> help of " più " or " meno ."<br />
POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE .<br />
Bene , well, meglio , better , il meglio , <strong>the</strong> best.<br />
Male , badly, peggio, worse, il peggio, <strong>the</strong> worst.<br />
Molto, much, più, more , il più, <strong>the</strong> most.<br />
Poco, little , meno , less , il meno , <strong>the</strong> least .<br />
ON THE SUPERLATIVE ABSOLUTE DEGREE.<br />
523. The Superlative Absolute degree is indicated in several ways<br />
in Italian .<br />
524. Adjectives <strong>and</strong> adverbs can be raised to <strong>the</strong> superlative<br />
absolute degree by changing <strong>the</strong>ir final vowel into " issimo," "<br />
issima ," " issimi ," " issime ." Ex.<br />
POSITIVE. SUPERLATIVE ABSOLUTE.<br />
Buono, good, bonissimo , very good.<br />
Piccolo, little , piccolissimo , very little .<br />
Bene , well, benissimo , very well.<br />
Dottamente , learnedly , dottissimamente , very learnedly .<br />
525. Adjectives ending in " io " lose <strong>the</strong>se two vowels before <strong>the</strong><br />
superlative termination " issimo," <strong>and</strong> those ending in " co" <strong>and</strong> "<br />
go," " ca " <strong>and</strong> " ga," <strong>which</strong> take an h in <strong>the</strong> plural also take it<br />
before " issimo ." Ex.<br />
Savio , wise , savissimo , very wise .<br />
Ricco, rich , ricchissimo , very rich .<br />
Largo, wide, larghissimo , very wide.<br />
526. 1 In speaking of physical size " più gr<strong>and</strong>e," " il più gr<strong>and</strong>e ; "<br />
" più piccolo," "il più piccolo," must be used, <strong>and</strong> not " maggiore," "<br />
il maggiore ; " " minore ," " il minore ." Ex.<br />
La mia casa è più gr<strong>and</strong>e che la vostra.<br />
My house is larger than yours.<br />
527. " Maggiore " <strong>and</strong> " minore " signify also eldest <strong>and</strong> youngest.<br />
Ex.<br />
Mio fratello maggiore .<br />
My eldest bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
ON THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON . 127<br />
161
528. A few adjectives form <strong>the</strong> superlative absolute in " errimo."<br />
Ex.<br />
Misero , miserable , miseprimo , very miserable .<br />
Celebre , celebrated , celebeprimo , very celebrated .<br />
Acre , bitter , acceprimo , very bitter .<br />
Integro , honest , integeprimo , very honest .<br />
Salubre, salubrious, salubeprimo , very salubrious.<br />
529. Sometimes " ottimo," " pessimo," " massimo," " minimo," "<br />
sommo," <strong>and</strong> " infimo," may be employed instead of " bonissimo," "<br />
cattivissimo ," &c.<br />
530. Adjectives <strong>and</strong> adverbs can be raised to <strong>the</strong> superlative<br />
absolute degree by translating very, or most, by <strong>the</strong> adverbs<br />
"molto," " assai ," or " oltrem odo." Ex.<br />
Egli è molto, assai ,/ oltremodo generoso .<br />
He is very generous .<br />
531. Ano<strong>the</strong>r way of raising adjectives <strong>and</strong> adverbs to <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
superlative absolute degree , is to repeat <strong>the</strong>m . Ex.<br />
Ella divenne rossa rossa.<br />
She became very red.<br />
Entrarono pian piano.<br />
They went very softly.<br />
EXERCISE XLVIII.<br />
This tragedy is very interesting, (471) <strong>and</strong> very well Written. She<br />
is taller (512) than you by 1 three inches. The mosaics (410) of<br />
Rome are <strong>the</strong> most famous (518) in Europe . Write to your bro<strong>the</strong>r<br />
<strong>and</strong> tell him (201) to call on me 2 as soon as possible. 3 I want to<br />
go to Paris ; all <strong>the</strong> more so because 4 my sister Is <strong>the</strong>re also<br />
(<strong>the</strong>re is (239) also my sister). She is so kind, amiable , <strong>and</strong> pretty<br />
that 5 everybody admires her. My uncle's friend is <strong>the</strong> richest<br />
man in (521) this village . Gold is <strong>the</strong> purest, <strong>the</strong> most precious,<br />
<strong>the</strong> most ductile , <strong>and</strong> after platinum, <strong>the</strong> heaviest of all metals.<br />
God's power extends from <strong>the</strong> lowest (520) abyss of <strong>the</strong> earth, to<br />
<strong>the</strong> highest (520) parts of <strong>the</strong> heavens. He is <strong>the</strong> bravest (518)<br />
<strong>and</strong> ablest general of his time .<br />
532. 1 The English expressions taller... by, richer... by, are<br />
translated into Italian by "più gr<strong>and</strong>e...di," "più ricco...di." Ex.<br />
"È più ricco di me, di due mila lire sterline ."<br />
He is richer than I am, by two thous<strong>and</strong> pounds.<br />
162
533. 2 The expressions to call on, to go to <strong>the</strong> house of, are<br />
translated into Italian by " <strong>and</strong>are da," " passare da." Ex.<br />
" Andrò da Giovanni ,"<br />
I will call on John.<br />
534. 3 The expression as quick as possible is rendered in Italian<br />
by " il più presto possibile."<br />
535. 4 The expression all <strong>the</strong> more so because is translated into<br />
Italian by " tanto più che."<br />
536. 5 The expressions so kind t)iat, so amiable that, &c., are<br />
translated into Italian by " così buono che," " talmente buono che,"<br />
"buono a segno tale che," " amabile a tal segno che," &c. Ex.<br />
È abile a segno tale che fa la meraviglia di tutti.<br />
He is so exceedingly clever that he excites wonder in<br />
everybody.<br />
128 ON NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.<br />
LESSON XXV.<br />
ON NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.<br />
CARDINAL NUMBERS . ORDINAL NUMBERS .<br />
Uno 1. Primo 1st.<br />
Due 2. Secondo 2nd.<br />
Tre 3. Terzo 3rd.<br />
Quattro 4. Quarto 4th.<br />
Cinque 5. Quinto 5th.<br />
Sei 6. Sesto 6th.<br />
Sette 7. Settimo 7th.<br />
Otto 8. Ottavo 8th.<br />
Nove 9. Nono 9th.<br />
Dieci 10. Decimo 10th.<br />
Undici 11. Decimo primo: 3 11th.<br />
Dodici 12. Decimo secondo 4 12th.<br />
Tredici 13. Decimo terzo 5 13th.<br />
Quattordici 14. Decimo quarto 14th.<br />
Quindici 15. Decimo quinto 15th.<br />
Sedici 16. Decimo sesto 16th.<br />
Diciassette 17. Decimo settimo I7th.<br />
Diciotto 18. Decimo ottavo 18th.<br />
Diciannove 19. Decimo n ono 19th.<br />
Venti 20. Ventesimo 20th.<br />
Ventuno 21. Ventesimo primo 21st.<br />
163
Trenta 30. Trentesimo 30th.<br />
Quaranta 40. Quarantesimo 40th.<br />
Cinquanta 50. Cinquantesimo 50th.<br />
Sessanta 60. Sessantesimo 60th .<br />
Settanta 70. Settantesimo 70th.<br />
Ottanta 80. Ottantesimo 80th.<br />
Novanta 90. Novantesimo 90th.<br />
Cento 1 100. Centesimo 100th.<br />
Centuno 101 . Centesimo primo 101st.<br />
Mille 2 1,000. Millesimo 1,000th.<br />
Un Milione 1,000,000. Milionesimo 1,000,000th .<br />
537. 1 " Cento " does not change in <strong>the</strong> plural. Ex.<br />
" Due cento uomini ," 200 men.<br />
538. 2 " Mille " does not require <strong>the</strong> indefinite article before it. Ex.<br />
"Mille soldati ," 1,000 soldiers, <strong>and</strong> is changed into " mila," in <strong>the</strong><br />
plural. Ex.<br />
"Tre mila scudi," 3,000 crowns.<br />
3 Or " undecimo ."<br />
4 Or " duodecimo."<br />
5 Or " Tredicesimo ."<br />
ON NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 129<br />
ON THE USE OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.<br />
539. A nought (0) in Italian is translated by "zero;" plural "zeri ."<br />
540. The feminine of " uno," one, is " una " ; but <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
cardinal numbers remain invariable . Ex.<br />
Ella ha due libri, ed io ne ho uno.<br />
You have two books, <strong>and</strong> I have one.<br />
541. " Uno," " una," used as nouns signify a man, a woman. Ex.<br />
Ho visto uno che si vanta sempre .<br />
I have seen a man who is always boasting.<br />
542. When <strong>the</strong> noun is placed after "ventuno," " trentuno," &c., it<br />
must be in <strong>the</strong> singular, as it agrees with "uno;" but when it<br />
comes before, it agrees with "venti ," <strong>and</strong> is <strong>the</strong>refore in <strong>the</strong><br />
plural. Ex.<br />
"Ventuno 1 cavallo," or "Cavalli ventuno ," twenty-one horses .<br />
164
543. In stating <strong>the</strong> order in <strong>which</strong> sovereigns, volumes <strong>and</strong><br />
chapters of books, acts <strong>and</strong> scenes of plays, follow one ano<strong>the</strong>r,<br />
<strong>the</strong> ordinal numbers (<strong>which</strong> are variable ) are used in Italian as<br />
in English, but <strong>the</strong> article is omitted ; <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>y must agree in<br />
gender <strong>and</strong> number with <strong>the</strong> noun to <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong>y relate . Ex.<br />
Vittorio Emanuele secondo fu il primo re d' Italia .<br />
Victor Emanuel <strong>the</strong> second was <strong>the</strong> first king of Italy.<br />
Scena prima, atto secondo.<br />
Scene <strong>the</strong> first, act <strong>the</strong> second.<br />
544. The dates of <strong>the</strong> month, except <strong>the</strong> first day, are expressed<br />
in Italian by <strong>the</strong> cardinal numbers, preceded by <strong>the</strong> definite<br />
article in <strong>the</strong> singular or plural; <strong>the</strong> first is expressed by <strong>the</strong><br />
ordinal number. The preposition " di" may be put before <strong>the</strong> day of<br />
<strong>the</strong> month. Ex.<br />
Quanti ne abbiamo del mese ?<br />
What is <strong>the</strong> day of <strong>the</strong> month ?<br />
Oggi è il primo (di) marzo.<br />
To-day is <strong>the</strong> first of March.<br />
Colombo scopri l' America i 2 dodici (di) ottobre, nell'anno or<br />
simply nel mille (e) 3 quattro cento 4 novantadue .<br />
Columbus discovered America on (147) <strong>the</strong> twelfth of<br />
October, in <strong>the</strong> year fourteen hundred <strong>and</strong> ninety -two.<br />
545. 1 The transposition of <strong>the</strong> units after <strong>the</strong> tens is not<br />
admissible in Italian ; for instance , we never say "due e venti ,"<br />
but " venti due."<br />
546. 2 On <strong>the</strong> second, &c., are translated into Italian by " i due,"<br />
or " ai due," or " addì due " (at <strong>the</strong> day two), &c. Ex.<br />
" Londra, addì 20 febbraio, 1892."<br />
3 The Italians do not usually put <strong>the</strong> conjunction " e," <strong>and</strong>,<br />
between "mille " <strong>and</strong> " milione " <strong>and</strong> ano<strong>the</strong>r number .<br />
547. 4 Eleven hundred, twelve hundred, &c., are rendered in<br />
Italian by " mille e cento," " mille e due cento." <strong>and</strong> not by " undici<br />
cento ," &c.<br />
130 ON NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.<br />
EXERCISE XLIX.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> year one (356) thous<strong>and</strong> <strong>and</strong> sixty-six, Engl<strong>and</strong> (330) was<br />
conquered by (270) William of Norm<strong>and</strong>y, an (353; event of <strong>the</strong><br />
165
greatest (520) importance . I have been reading (179) <strong>the</strong> "<br />
Aristodemo," of Monti, <strong>and</strong> have learnt by heart scene (543) <strong>the</strong><br />
fourth, act <strong>the</strong> first. How old 1 is your nephew ? He will be<br />
seventeen on (147) <strong>the</strong> 5th of next month. How long 2 will you<br />
remain in this city ? I shall leave Rome on <strong>the</strong> 15th (546).<br />
Sardinia is (313) one hundred (356) <strong>and</strong> fifty miles (421) from<br />
Italy. Your letter of 3 <strong>the</strong> 25th of February (74) reached me on <strong>the</strong><br />
1st instant (544). Frederick <strong>the</strong> second (543) king of Prussia, was<br />
a great warrior (474). What is <strong>the</strong> day (544) of <strong>the</strong> month ? It is<br />
<strong>the</strong> 9th (546).<br />
548. Expressions having reference to <strong>the</strong> hour of <strong>the</strong> day are<br />
rendered in Italian as follows :<br />
Che ora è ? / che ora abbiamo ?<br />
What o'clock is it ?<br />
È un'ora, / il tocco.<br />
It is one o'clock.<br />
Sono le due e me<strong>zz</strong>o.<br />
It is half-past two.<br />
Saranno presto le tre.<br />
It will soon be three o'clock.<br />
A che ora è partito suo fratello ?<br />
At what o'clock did your bro<strong>the</strong>r leave ?<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>o parti erano le undici antimeridiane , ma il suo<br />
bastimento non fece vela che alle due pomeridiane .<br />
When he left it was eleven o'clock a.m., but his ship did not<br />
set sail before two p.m.<br />
Ora sono le sei meno un quarto, o meno dieci minuti .<br />
Now it wants a quarter , or ten minutes to six.<br />
549. Ago is rendered in Italian by "fa; " this day week, by " oggi a<br />
otto ; " a fortnight, " quindici giorni ; " this day fortnight, " oggi a<br />
quindici : " in a month, " fra un mese ," or " da qui a un mese ." Ex.<br />
Mio fratello lascio Londra dieci giorni fa, e sarà di ritorno<br />
oggi a otto.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r left London ten days ago, <strong>and</strong> will return this day<br />
week .<br />
Credo che le elezioni avranno luogo fra un mese .<br />
I think that <strong>the</strong> elections will take place in a month.<br />
166
550. 1 The expression how old is? is translated into Italian by "<br />
quanti anni ha?" or " che età ha?" ; <strong>and</strong> I am twenty, &c., by "ho<br />
vent' anni ," &c.<br />
551. 2 In speaking of time , how long is translated by " quanto<br />
tempo."<br />
552. 3 Expressions like your letter of <strong>the</strong> 15th instant, &c., are<br />
translated by "La sua (or vostra) lettera del quindici corrente ."<br />
ON NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 131<br />
DISTRIBUTIVE AND COLLECTIVE NUMBERS .<br />
553. Un terzo, one third. Un trimestre , three months .<br />
La meta , <strong>the</strong> half. Un lustro, five years .<br />
Il doppio, <strong>the</strong> double. Una volta, once.<br />
Una coppia, a couple. Due Volte, twice .<br />
Una do<strong>zz</strong>ina, 1 a dozen. Ad uno ad uno, one by one.<br />
Una ventina , 1 a score . A due a due, two by two.<br />
554. Both is translated by " tutti e due," " tutt'e due," " ambo," "<br />
ambidue," or " ambedue ," " entrambo," or " entrambi ; " <strong>and</strong> all<br />
three, all four, &c., are translated by " tutti e tre." " tutti e<br />
quattro," &c. ; <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> substantive <strong>which</strong> follows <strong>the</strong>m takes <strong>the</strong><br />
article . Ex.<br />
Tutti e due i fratelli .<br />
Both bro<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />
Tutt' e tre le Sorelle .<br />
The three sisters .<br />
EXERCISE L.<br />
Send me (201) two dozen (555) of oranges (411), <strong>and</strong> three dozen of<br />
lemons. Neptune, <strong>the</strong> most (518) distant of <strong>the</strong> planets (397)<br />
takes 164 2/3 (164 years <strong>and</strong> 2/3) (553) years to make its<br />
revolution round <strong>the</strong> sun ; Uranus, 84 years <strong>and</strong> a few (494) days ;<br />
Saturn, 29 1/2 (486) years ; Jupiter, nearly 12 years ; Mars, 1<br />
year, 10 months, <strong>and</strong> 21 days ; (542) <strong>the</strong> Earth, 1 year ; Venus, 7<br />
months, <strong>and</strong> 13 days; Mercury, 2 months, <strong>and</strong> 27 days. I have just<br />
(299) sold my horse for (251) thirty pounds, <strong>and</strong> ten shillings.<br />
What is <strong>the</strong> height 2 of this room ? It is about twelve feet high, 2<br />
<strong>and</strong> seventeen feet long. Out of 3 fifteen thous<strong>and</strong> inhabitants,<br />
<strong>the</strong>re were two thous<strong>and</strong> (538) killed. We generally breakfast at<br />
eight (548), have luncheon at one, <strong>and</strong> dine at six o'clock. Dante<br />
167
(334), Petrarca (333) <strong>and</strong> Boccaccio, lived in <strong>the</strong> fourteenth<br />
century , 4 <strong>the</strong>y are <strong>the</strong> most celebrated Italian trecentisti .<br />
555- 1 When <strong>the</strong> words "do<strong>zz</strong>ina," " ventina," " centinaio," "<br />
migliaio " (see rule 421), are used in <strong>the</strong> plural, <strong>the</strong>y are variable .<br />
Ex.<br />
" Sei do<strong>zz</strong>ine di bicchieri ."<br />
Six dozen glasses .<br />
556. 2 The expressions -what is <strong>the</strong> size, height? &c., are<br />
rendered in Italian by " qual' è la gr<strong>and</strong>e<strong>zz</strong>a, l'alte<strong>zz</strong>a," &c. ; <strong>and</strong> it<br />
is twelve feet high, long, &c., are translated into " ha dodici piedi<br />
di alte<strong>zz</strong>a , lunghe<strong>zz</strong>a ," &c.<br />
557- 3 Out of 15,000 men, &c., is translated by " Di quindici mila<br />
uomini ," &c.<br />
558. Instead of "Il decimo quarto," "Il decimo quinto," " Il decimo<br />
sesto secolo," <strong>the</strong> 14th, 15h, 16th centuries, <strong>the</strong> Italians often<br />
use <strong>the</strong> expressions " Il trecento," "il quattrocento," "il<br />
cinquecento ; " so that a personage who lived in <strong>the</strong> fourteenth,<br />
fifteenth centuries, &c., is called " Un trecentista," " un<br />
quattrocentista ," &c.<br />
132 ON POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES.<br />
LESSON XXVI.<br />
ON POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES.<br />
559. In Italian <strong>the</strong> words " mio," " tuo," " suo," " nostro," " vostro,"<br />
<strong>and</strong> " loro," are used both as Possessive Adjectives, <strong>and</strong> as<br />
Possessive Pronouns ; <strong>the</strong>y are possessive adjectives when <strong>the</strong>y<br />
are used with, <strong>and</strong> possessive pronouns when <strong>the</strong>y st<strong>and</strong> for, a<br />
noun .<br />
560. In Italian, possessive adjectives agree with <strong>the</strong> thing<br />
possessed, <strong>and</strong> not with <strong>the</strong> possessor, <strong>and</strong> are generally preceded<br />
by <strong>the</strong> definite article , as follows :<br />
SINGULAR. PLURAL .<br />
MAS. FEM. MAS. FEM.<br />
il mio, la mia, i miei , 1 le mie, my.<br />
il tuo, la tua, i tuoi 2 le tue, thy.<br />
il suo, la sua, i suoi, le sue, his, her, its<br />
il nostro, la nostra, i nostri , le nostre , our.<br />
il vostro, la vostra, i Vostri , le vostre , your.<br />
il loro, la loro, i loro, le loro, <strong>the</strong>ir .<br />
168
EXAMPLES .<br />
Il mio amico vuol vendere la sua casa.<br />
My friend wants to sell his house .<br />
I miei vicini hanno perduto il loro cane .<br />
My neighbours have lost <strong>the</strong>ir dog.<br />
561. When several nouns follow one ano<strong>the</strong>r in <strong>the</strong> same<br />
sentence (whe<strong>the</strong>r used as subjects or objects), <strong>the</strong> possessive<br />
adjective, as well as <strong>the</strong> preposition <strong>which</strong> may accompany it,<br />
must be repeated, in Italian, before each of <strong>the</strong> nouns, if <strong>the</strong>y are<br />
already expressed before <strong>the</strong> first. Ex.<br />
Paolo ha preso i miei colori ed i miei pennelli . 3<br />
Paul has taken my colours <strong>and</strong> brushes.<br />
Parliamo sempre di voi e delle Vostre Sorelle .<br />
We always speak of you <strong>and</strong> your sisters .<br />
1 Notice that an e preceded by an i has always <strong>the</strong> broad sound of<br />
<strong>the</strong> a in <strong>the</strong> word gate .<br />
2 Notice that an o preceded by a u has always <strong>the</strong> broad sound of<br />
<strong>the</strong> o in <strong>the</strong> word orphan.<br />
3 Notice that <strong>the</strong> e in <strong>the</strong> syllable ello, ending nouns <strong>and</strong><br />
qualificative adjectives, has always <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> a in<br />
<strong>the</strong> word gate .<br />
133 ON POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES.<br />
562. When his, her, do not refer to <strong>the</strong> subject of <strong>the</strong> verb, or<br />
when <strong>the</strong>re are two nouns of different genders in <strong>the</strong> same<br />
sentence , in order to avoid ambiguity, <strong>the</strong> pronouns " dilui," of<br />
him, " dilei," of her, of you, replace <strong>the</strong> adjectives " il suo," " la<br />
sua." Ex.<br />
Ella bruciò tutte le di lui lettere .<br />
She burnt all his letters .<br />
Egli condusse seco sua Sorella e i di lei figli .<br />
He took with him his sister , <strong>and</strong> her sons.<br />
563. The article is omitted before " mio," "tuo," " suo," (" nostro," "<br />
Vostro," (not " loro ") when <strong>the</strong>y immediately precede nouns of<br />
kindred, <strong>and</strong> rank, in <strong>the</strong> singular. But when <strong>the</strong> noun of kindred<br />
is in <strong>the</strong> plural or is preceded by an adjective, or modified by a<br />
suffix, <strong>the</strong> article is prefixed to <strong>the</strong> possessive adjective . Ex.<br />
Mia madre e le mie Sorelle partiranno per Venezia domani.<br />
169
My mo<strong>the</strong>r <strong>and</strong> sisters will leave for Venice to-morrow.<br />
Furono presentati a Sua Eccellenza 1 dal Principe .<br />
They were introduced to His Excellency by <strong>the</strong> Prince .<br />
Il loro padre è in villa .<br />
Their fa<strong>the</strong>r is in <strong>the</strong> country.<br />
Fui cortesemente ricevuto dal suo ottimo padre.<br />
I was courteously received by your most excellent fa<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
Ho dato una cassettina di dolci al vostro fratellino .<br />
I have given a box of sweets to your little bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
564. The possessive adjectives require <strong>the</strong> article when <strong>the</strong>y<br />
precede <strong>the</strong> following nouns of kindred :<br />
Il mio genitore , used instead of mio padre, my fa<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
La mia genitrice, " " mia madre, my mo<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
Il mio fanciullo, |" " mio figlio, my son.<br />
Il mio raga<strong>zz</strong>o, |" " .<br />
La mia fanciulla, |" " mia figlia, my daughter.<br />
La mia raga<strong>zz</strong>a, |" " .<br />
Il tuo germane, " " tuo fratello, your bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
La tua germana, " " tua Sorella, your sister.<br />
Il suo sposo, |" " suo marito, her husb<strong>and</strong>.<br />
Il suo consorte, |" " .<br />
La vostra sposa, |" " Vostra moglie, your wife.<br />
La vostra consorte, |" " .<br />
1 Notice that <strong>the</strong> e in <strong>the</strong> termination enza has always <strong>the</strong> broad<br />
sound cf <strong>the</strong> a in <strong>the</strong> word gate .<br />
134 ON POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES.<br />
565. The possessive adjectives may be placed after <strong>the</strong> noun, <strong>and</strong><br />
in this case <strong>the</strong> article is placed before <strong>the</strong> noun. Ex.<br />
Se così piace all' Eccellenza Vostra.<br />
If it is agreeable to your Excellency .<br />
L'onor mio non permette cio.<br />
My honour does not permit this .<br />
566. The expressions, a friend of mine, a sister of yours, &c., are<br />
rendered by " un mio amico," " una vostra Sorella," &c., or " uno<br />
dei miei amici ," " una delle vostre Sorelle ," &c. Ex.<br />
Ho incontrato un Vostro amico , sul ponte di Londra.<br />
170
I met a friend of yours on London Bridge.<br />
567. The relation expressed by <strong>the</strong> possessive adjectives is<br />
elegantly conveyed in Italian by means of <strong>the</strong> conjunctive<br />
pronouns " mi," to me, " ti," to <strong>the</strong>e , " gli," to him, " le," to her, or<br />
to you. Ex.<br />
Egli mi è padre (instead of He is my fa<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
Egli è mio padre).<br />
lo non gli sono amico (instead of io non sono suo amico ).<br />
I am not his friend .<br />
Io le son figlio (instead of io son suo figlio ).<br />
I am her son.<br />
568. When <strong>the</strong> possessive adjectives its <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir relate to<br />
things, <strong>and</strong> are in <strong>the</strong> same clause of a sentence with <strong>the</strong><br />
possessor (noun or pronoun, used as subject), <strong>and</strong> when <strong>the</strong>y are<br />
preceded by any preposition, <strong>the</strong>y are translated into Italian by " il<br />
suo," " la sua," "i suoi," "le sue," "il loro," "la loro," "i loro," " le loro."<br />
Ex.<br />
Parigi ha le sue belle<strong>zz</strong>e ; ammiro lo stile dei suoi pubblici<br />
edifizi .<br />
Paris has its beauties ; I admire <strong>the</strong> style of its public<br />
edifices<br />
569. When <strong>the</strong> possessive adjectives its <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir are not in <strong>the</strong><br />
same clause of a sentence with <strong>the</strong> possessor, <strong>and</strong> are not<br />
preceded by a preposition, <strong>the</strong>y are expressed in Italian by " ne,"<br />
before <strong>the</strong> verb, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> article, "il," "lo," " la," &c., before <strong>the</strong><br />
noun. Ex.<br />
Comprerò questi cavalli , quantunque io non ne conosca la<br />
ra<strong>zz</strong>a, / complessione . 1<br />
I shall buy <strong>the</strong>se horses , although I do not know <strong>the</strong>ir breed<br />
(real constitution ).<br />
570. 1 " Complessione " means constitution, physique,<br />
temperament. Complexion is translated into Italian by "<br />
carnagione ."<br />
ON POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 135<br />
EXERCISE LI.<br />
The rose has its (560) beauty, its freshness <strong>and</strong> its fragrance ;<br />
but it has also its thorns. The lustre of our ancestors' glory<br />
reflects on us, to (225) inspire us (198) to imitate <strong>the</strong>ir (560)<br />
171
virtues. One of our horses is so lame (536) that we <strong>cannot</strong> drive<br />
him to-day. That lady is a relation of mine (566). One of my<br />
favourite studies is botany. She showed him her (562) splendid<br />
picture -gallery, <strong>and</strong> costly jewels. Cornelia, <strong>the</strong> mo<strong>the</strong>r of <strong>the</strong><br />
Gracchi, said to her (562) friends as she ( mentre ) showed <strong>the</strong>m<br />
(211) her sons, " These are (245) my jewels." He is a friend of<br />
mine, (566) <strong>and</strong> has just married one of my cousins. I do not like<br />
to hear cats mewing 1 (314) at night. Your sister is prettier (510)<br />
than my cousin Jane ; she has 2 fair hair, blue eyes, <strong>and</strong> a<br />
beautiful complexion (570).<br />
571. The Italians make use of <strong>the</strong> definite article, <strong>and</strong> not of <strong>the</strong><br />
possessive adjective, when <strong>the</strong> sense clearly points out who is<br />
<strong>the</strong> possessor. Ex.<br />
Oggi mi duole il capo.<br />
My head aches to-day.<br />
Diresse le parole alla moltitudine irritata .<br />
He directed his words to <strong>the</strong> angry multitude .<br />
572. Before a noun indicating mental or physical qualities, or any<br />
part of <strong>the</strong> dress or body, if <strong>the</strong> action expressed by <strong>the</strong> verb falls<br />
on its subject, <strong>the</strong> Italians make use of <strong>the</strong> definite article, <strong>and</strong><br />
not <strong>the</strong> possessive adjective ; <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> verb is used reflectively . Ex.<br />
573. 1<br />
Mi lavo le mani con sapone.<br />
I am washing my h<strong>and</strong>s with soap.<br />
Si è fatto male alla mano destra.<br />
He has hurt his right h<strong>and</strong>.<br />
Essa si levo subito i guanti .<br />
She took off her gloves at once.<br />
Gaddo mi si getto piangendo a piedi. (Dante .)<br />
Gaddo threw himself at my feet weeping .<br />
To mew, like a cat (gatto), is translated by " Miagolare ."<br />
To bark, like a dog (cane ) " Abbaiare."<br />
To growl, like a dog (cane ) " Latrare ."<br />
To neigh , like a horse (cavallo) " Nitrire ."<br />
To bray, like an ass (asino ) " Ragliare ."<br />
lo bellow, like an ox (bue) " Muggire ."<br />
To grunt, like a pig (porcello) " Grugnire ."<br />
To bleat, like a sheep (pecora) " Belare ."<br />
172
To roar, like a lion (leone ) " Ruggire ."<br />
To howl, like a wolf (lupo) " Urlare ."<br />
To crow, like a cock (gallo) " Cantare ."<br />
To sing , like a nightingale (rosignuolo) " Cantare ."<br />
To chirp, like a sparrow (passero) " Garrire ."<br />
To talk, like a parrot (pappagallo) " Parlare ."<br />
To squeak , like a mouse (sorcio) " Squittire ."<br />
574. 2 After <strong>the</strong> verb " Avere " when particular qualities of <strong>the</strong><br />
body are mentioned, <strong>the</strong> definite article is used in Italian. " Ha i<br />
capelli biondi." She has fair hair .<br />
136 ON POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.<br />
575. But when <strong>the</strong> action of <strong>the</strong> verb is not directed to its subject,<br />
<strong>the</strong> English possessive adjective is replaced in Italian by <strong>the</strong><br />
conjunctive pronouns " mi," to me, " ti," to <strong>the</strong>e , " gli," to him, "<br />
le," to her, or to you, &c. Ex.<br />
Mi fate sempre male alla mano.<br />
You always hurt my h<strong>and</strong>.<br />
Il chirurgo gli rimise il braccio, in poco tempo.<br />
The surgeon set his arm, in a very short time .<br />
576. The expression one's own is rendered in Italian by " il<br />
proprio," "la propria," &c., or " il mio proprio," " la mia propria," &c.<br />
Ex.<br />
L'ho veduto coi propri, / co' miei propri occhi . 1<br />
or I saw him with my own eyes ,<br />
577. In <strong>the</strong> following cases <strong>the</strong> definite article is not required<br />
before <strong>the</strong> possessive adjectives " mio," " tuo," " suo," &c.<br />
I. In addressing a person. Ex.<br />
" Mio caro." My dear.<br />
II. In exclamations . Ex.<br />
"Oh! miei Signori ! " Oh gentlemen !<br />
III. In <strong>many</strong> idiomatic expressions , like <strong>the</strong> following :<br />
Ho incontrato una persona di mia conoscenza .<br />
I have met an acquaintance of mine .<br />
Faccio a mio capriccio (voglia / senno ).<br />
I act according to my whim , (will, or mind).<br />
L'ho salutata da parte Vostra.<br />
173
I gave her your compliments .<br />
È colpa Vostra.<br />
It is your fault.<br />
Fabbrico a mie spese .<br />
I am building at my own expense .<br />
ON POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.<br />
578. The Possessive Pronouns, mine, thine, his, hers, ours,<br />
yours, <strong>the</strong>irs, are translated into Italian by <strong>the</strong> Possessive<br />
Pronouns " il mio," "il tuo," &c., " i miei," "i tuoi ," &c., <strong>which</strong> agree<br />
in gender <strong>and</strong> number with <strong>the</strong> noun to <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong>y relate . Ex.<br />
Mi dia il suo libro, e prenda il mio.<br />
Give me your book, <strong>and</strong> take mine .<br />
La nostra casa è più gr<strong>and</strong>e che la loro.<br />
Our house is larger than <strong>the</strong>irs .<br />
579. When possessive pronouns are used simply to indicate<br />
possession, without limiting <strong>the</strong> number of persons, or objects,<br />
possessed, <strong>the</strong> article is not required before <strong>the</strong>m . Ex.<br />
Questo cavallo è suo.<br />
This horse is his.<br />
Dichi è questo sigillo ? È mio.<br />
Whose seal is this ? It is mine .<br />
Aspetto Vostre lettere .<br />
I expect letters from you.<br />
580. 1 The expressions to write with one's own h<strong>and</strong>, to think<br />
with one's own mind, are rendered by " scrivere di propria mano,"<br />
" pensare di proprio senno ."<br />
ON POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 137<br />
581. When, in speaking of several persons, animals, or objects,<br />
reference is made to something of <strong>which</strong> each person, animal, or<br />
object has only one, <strong>the</strong> Italians always use <strong>the</strong> name of that<br />
thing or object in <strong>the</strong> singular . Ex.<br />
S'invigoriscono la mente collo studio della filosofia .<br />
They streng<strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong>ir minds with <strong>the</strong> study of philosophy.<br />
Sacrificarono la vita in un'inpresa inutile .<br />
They sacrificed <strong>the</strong>ir lives in a useless <strong>under</strong>taking .<br />
174
582. The possessive pronouns " il mio," " il tuo," &c., used as<br />
nouns, signify my property, my share, &c. ; <strong>and</strong> " i miei," " i tuoi ,"<br />
&c., mean my friends , relations , supporters, followers, &c. Ex.<br />
Spendete il vostro, se vi piace .<br />
Spend your own, if you like .<br />
Ho veduto i miei un mese fa.<br />
I have seen my people a month ago.<br />
Lascio il paese con molti de' suoi.<br />
He left <strong>the</strong> country with <strong>many</strong> followers.<br />
EXERCISE LII.<br />
Do you like my (560) books ? Yes, I like <strong>the</strong>m (193) ; <strong>the</strong>y are<br />
better (520) than mine. Instead of giving <strong>the</strong> money to his fa<strong>the</strong>r,<br />
he put (mettersi) it (218) in (572) his own pocket. Your garden is<br />
prettier than ours, but our orchard is larger, <strong>and</strong> better (522)<br />
stocked than yours. Henry IV. (543) of France used to play 1 with<br />
his (560) children, carrying <strong>the</strong>m on his (571) back round his<br />
royal apartments. Do you buy your clo<strong>the</strong>s ready made ? 2 No ; I<br />
have <strong>the</strong>m made to order 3 at Johnson's (434). The unfortunate<br />
Charles VI. of France passed his (571) time in (278) playing at<br />
cards with his attendants. The customs of our ancestors were<br />
simpler <strong>and</strong> healthier than ours (578). The books you have sent<br />
to <strong>the</strong> bookbinder are mine (578) <strong>and</strong> not yours. He spoils his<br />
(572) health by studying too much at night .<br />
583. 1 To play (to amuse one's-self) is translated by " Giuocare ," or<br />
" Divertirsi ."<br />
To play a game at, by " Giuocare una partita a," or " Giuocare a."<br />
To play upon <strong>the</strong> violin , &c., by " Suonare il violino ," &c.<br />
To play <strong>the</strong> part, by " Fare ", or "rappresentare la parte. "<br />
To play upon (with guns, &c.), by " Far fuoco su or sopra. "<br />
To play (speaking of a fountain ), by " Zampillare ," or " Gettare ."<br />
To play <strong>the</strong> fool, by " Fare il pa<strong>zz</strong>o," or " Ru<strong>zz</strong>are."<br />
To play a trick , by " Fare una burla," or " celia ."<br />
To play onone, by " Prendersi giuoco di."<br />
To play false , by " Ingannare ."<br />
584. 2 The expressions ready-made, already written, &c., are<br />
translated into Italian by " bello e fatto," " belli e fatti," " bello e<br />
scritto ," &c.<br />
175
585. 3 To have a thing; done (to order], to have a thing written,<br />
&c., are translated into Italian by " farsi fare ," " farsi scrivere,"<br />
&c.<br />
138 ON DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES.<br />
LESSON XXVII.<br />
ON DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES.<br />
586. In Italian <strong>the</strong> words " questo," " cotesto," <strong>and</strong> " quello," are<br />
used both as Demonstrative Adjectives, <strong>and</strong> Demonstrative<br />
Pronouns ; <strong>the</strong>y are demonstrative adjectives when <strong>the</strong>y are used<br />
with a noun, <strong>and</strong> demonstrative pronouns when <strong>the</strong>y st<strong>and</strong> for a<br />
noun.<br />
587. The Demonstrative Adjectives agree in gender <strong>and</strong> number<br />
with <strong>the</strong> noun with <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong>y are used. They are :<br />
SINGULAR. PLURAL .<br />
Mas. Questo, | this | Questi, | <strong>the</strong>se<br />
Fem. Questa, | | Queste, |<br />
Mas. Cotesto, | | Cotesti , |<br />
Fem. Cotesta , | |Coteste , |<br />
Mas. | Quello, |that. |Quegli |those .<br />
|Quel, | |Quei or que |<br />
Fem. |Quella, | | Quelle, ; |<br />
588. " Questo," " questa," 1 " questi," <strong>and</strong> " queste, " 2 precede a<br />
noun indicating a person or a thing near <strong>the</strong> speaker, ei<strong>the</strong>r with<br />
regard to place or time . Ex.<br />
Questo signore e questa signora .<br />
This gentleman <strong>and</strong> this lady.<br />
Questi scrigni e queste cassette .<br />
These chests <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>se boxes.<br />
589. " Cotesto," " cotesta," that, " cotesti," <strong>and</strong> " coteste ," those , 3<br />
precede a noun indicating a person, or an object, near <strong>the</strong> person<br />
spoken to, <strong>and</strong> distant from <strong>the</strong> speaker . Ex.<br />
Dove ha ella comprato cotesto bei quadro ?<br />
Where have you bought that beautiful picture ?<br />
Di chi sono cotesti bei fanciulli ?<br />
Whose are those beautiful children ?<br />
176
590. 1 In <strong>the</strong> colloquial style " stamattina," " stasera," " stanotte,"<br />
are frequently used instead of "questa mattina," " questa sera,"<br />
"questa notte."<br />
591. 2 The poets often use "esto." " esta," " esti," " este," instead of<br />
"questo," &c.<br />
"Maestro , esti tormenti cresceranno ei dopo la gran<br />
sentenza ?" (Dante ).<br />
Master , will <strong>the</strong>se torments increase after <strong>the</strong> great<br />
judgment ?<br />
592. 3 "Cotesto," " cotesta, "&c., are frequently spelt " codesto,"<br />
"codesta," '&c.<br />
ON DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. 139<br />
593. " Quello " <strong>and</strong> " quel," that, are used before a noun indicating<br />
a person or thing distant from <strong>the</strong> person who speaks, <strong>and</strong> also<br />
from <strong>the</strong> person addressed. " Quello " is used before nouns<br />
beginning with a vowel, 1 or an 5 followed by ano<strong>the</strong>r consonant,<br />
<strong>and</strong> " quel " before nouns beginning with a consonant . Ex.<br />
Quello specchio è rotto in due posti.<br />
That looking -glass is broken in two places.<br />
Quel signore canta bene .<br />
That gentleman sings well.<br />
A quel tempo c' era vino in abbondanza.<br />
At that time wine was plentiful .<br />
594. " Quegli " <strong>and</strong> " quei " (or " que ") those , are used before a<br />
noun indicating a person or thing distant from <strong>the</strong> person who<br />
speaks, <strong>and</strong> also from <strong>the</strong> person addressed. " Quegli " is used<br />
before nouns beginning with a vowel, or an 5 followed by ano<strong>the</strong>r<br />
consonant, <strong>and</strong> " quei " before nouns beginning with a consonant.<br />
Ex.<br />
Quegli uccelli sono di rara bele<strong>zz</strong>a.<br />
Those birds are very beautiful .<br />
Quegli schioppi si fabbricano a Woolwich.<br />
Those guns are manufactured at Woolwich.<br />
Quei raga<strong>zz</strong>i giuocano tutto il giorno.<br />
Those boys are playing all day long.<br />
177
595 " Quella " <strong>and</strong> " quelle " are used before feminine nouns<br />
beginning with a consonant ; before a vowel <strong>the</strong>y are very often<br />
changed into " quell'." Ex.<br />
Quella tela si fabbrica in Irl<strong>and</strong>a.<br />
That cloth is manufactured in Irel<strong>and</strong> .<br />
Dove si comprano quelle belle cornici ?<br />
Where are those beautiful frames bought ?<br />
596. Sometimes <strong>the</strong> word <strong>which</strong> ought to follow "questo," "<br />
questa," "quello," " quella," is <strong>under</strong>stood. Ex.<br />
In questo (momento ) egli arrive .<br />
At this moment he arrived .<br />
In quella (ora) essa mori .<br />
At that hour she died.<br />
597. Sometimes "questo" <strong>and</strong> " quello " means this thing, that<br />
thing , <strong>and</strong> are nouns. Ex.<br />
Fate questo, vi dico.<br />
Do this , I tell you.<br />
598. 1 Before a vowel, " quello" is very often changed into " quell'."<br />
Ex.<br />
Quell' arcobaleno è stupendo.<br />
That rainbow is magnificent .<br />
140 ON DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.<br />
599. When several nouns follow one ano<strong>the</strong>r, in <strong>the</strong> same<br />
sentence (whe<strong>the</strong>r used as subjects or objects), <strong>the</strong><br />
Demonstrative Adjective must be repeated before each of <strong>the</strong>m,<br />
when it is expressed before <strong>the</strong> first. Ex.<br />
Comprerò questi pettini e queste spa<strong>zz</strong>ole da capelli .<br />
I will buy <strong>the</strong>se combs <strong>and</strong> hair -brushes.<br />
EXERCISE LIII.<br />
These (588) cherries <strong>and</strong> (599) strawberries are ripe, but those<br />
(595) pears are not. 1 Go <strong>and</strong> (340) fetch me that (593) looking-<br />
glass. How much time 2 did you spend (have you spent) in (to)<br />
painting (314) your sister's portrait ? I could (sapere) not tell (it)<br />
you (198, 218). This money is his (579), <strong>and</strong> not yours. Give me<br />
that (593) thimble, those (594) needles, <strong>and</strong> that thread. Take off<br />
those (589) ugly boots of yours (449, 572) ; <strong>the</strong>y will lame your feet<br />
178
(572). Have you paid much for (251) <strong>the</strong>se jewels ? Yes, I have ; I<br />
paid (180) two pounds ten shillings for this necklace .<br />
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.<br />
600. "Questo," 3 " cotesto," " quello," " questi," " cotesti," " quelli "<br />
(not " quegli ," nor " quei " 4 , are demonstrative pronouns when<br />
<strong>the</strong>y are used instead of nouns, <strong>and</strong>, of course , <strong>the</strong>y agree in<br />
gender <strong>and</strong> number with <strong>the</strong> noun to <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong>y relate . Ex.<br />
Non voglio il Vostro cavallo ; voglio questo.<br />
I don't want your horse ; I want this one.<br />
Se io fossi in Lei, non comprerei queste carte geografiche ;<br />
comprerei quelle .<br />
If I were in your place, I would not buy <strong>the</strong>se maps ; I would<br />
buy those .<br />
601. 1 When <strong>the</strong> word so is <strong>under</strong>stood in English, it must be<br />
translated into Italian by <strong>the</strong> pronoun lo, <strong>which</strong> always remains<br />
invariable .<br />
602. 2 Time, is translated by " tempo." Time (of <strong>the</strong> day), is<br />
translated by " ora ; " as " A che ora arriva il treno ? " At what<br />
time does <strong>the</strong> train arrive ? Time, meaning epoch, is translated<br />
by " allora ; " as, " Allora era ricco." Then he was rich. Time,<br />
meaning season, is translated by " stagione ;" as, "In questa<br />
stagione dell'anno." In this season of <strong>the</strong> year. Time, meaning<br />
occasion, is translated by " volta ; " as, " L'ho visto due volte." I<br />
saw him twice .<br />
603. 3 The adverbs "qui " <strong>and</strong> "la" are sometimes put after <strong>the</strong><br />
demonstrative pronouns, to indicate more forcibly <strong>the</strong> person or<br />
thing referred to. Ex.<br />
Compri questo qui, e non quello la.<br />
Buy this one, <strong>and</strong> not that one.<br />
604. 4 " Quei " is however used as a pronoun in expressions like "<br />
Quei di Milano." The men (people ] of Milan. Dante often uses "<br />
quei " instead of " colui." Ex.<br />
E come quei , che con lena affannata .<br />
And even as he, who, with panting breath.<br />
ON DEMONSTRATIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 141<br />
605 " Questo " <strong>and</strong> " quello," " questa " <strong>and</strong> " quella," " questi " <strong>and</strong><br />
"quegli ," are also used as relative pronouns, meaning <strong>the</strong> latter,<br />
<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> former ; " questo " <strong>and</strong> " quello " should be used with<br />
179
eference to things ; in speaking of persons " questi " <strong>and</strong> " quegli<br />
" are used, but only as subjects, in <strong>the</strong> masculine singular . Ex.<br />
Ho comprato una grammatica francese e un dizionario<br />
tedesco ; quella per Filippo, questo per Guglielmo .<br />
I have bought a French grammar <strong>and</strong> a German dictionary ;<br />
<strong>the</strong> former for Philip, <strong>the</strong> latter for William .<br />
I due più gr<strong>and</strong>i oratori dell' antichità furono Demostene e<br />
Cicerone ; quegli era greco, questi romano.<br />
The two greatest orators of antiquity were Demos<strong>the</strong>nes<br />
<strong>and</strong> Cicero ; <strong>the</strong> former was a Greek , <strong>the</strong> latter a Roman.<br />
ON DEMONSTRATIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.<br />
606. THE ITALIAN DEMONSTRATIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS<br />
ARE:<br />
Costui , this man.<br />
Costei , this woman.<br />
Costoro, | <strong>the</strong>se men<br />
| <strong>the</strong>se women .<br />
Cotestui , 1 | that man<br />
Cotestei , |that woman<br />
Cotestoro, |those men.<br />
Colui, | Colei , | Coloro, | those women .<br />
607. The above pronouns are used for persons only, <strong>and</strong> do not<br />
refer to any antecedent. When <strong>the</strong>y are used in prose, especially<br />
in <strong>the</strong> colloquial style, <strong>the</strong>y often express contempt towards <strong>the</strong><br />
person or persons alluded to ; whilst in poetry <strong>the</strong>y are often used<br />
in <strong>the</strong> sense of highest admiration , <strong>and</strong> even reverence . Ex.<br />
Dimmi , chi è costui ?<br />
Tell me who is this man (fellow)?<br />
Sa ella che costoro sono ladri ? (Pellico ).<br />
Do you know that <strong>the</strong>se fellows are thieves ?<br />
" Qu<strong>and</strong>o vidi costui (Virgilio ) nel gran diserto." (Dante ).<br />
When I beheld him ( Virgil ] in <strong>the</strong> great desert .<br />
ON THE INDEFINITE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.<br />
608. The demonstrative indefinite pronouns that <strong>and</strong> this<br />
(meaning that thing, this thing], are translated into Italian by<br />
"ciò." Ex.<br />
Ciò (69) non mi va a genio .<br />
180
I do not like that.<br />
Non parliam più di ciò.<br />
Let us speak of that no more .<br />
Da ciò capisco il resto.<br />
From that I <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> rest .<br />
609. 1 There is <strong>the</strong> same difference in meaning between<br />
"costui," " cotestui ," <strong>and</strong> " colui," as <strong>the</strong>re is between "questo," "<br />
cotesto," <strong>and</strong> " quello." (See 587-595).<br />
142 ON INDEFINITE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.<br />
610. The indefinite pronouns that, that <strong>which</strong>, what, are<br />
translated into " ciò che," " quel che," or " quello che." Ex.<br />
Ciò che sorprende tutti è l' arrivo del principe .<br />
What surprises everybody is <strong>the</strong> arrival of <strong>the</strong> prince .<br />
Quel che dice è vero.<br />
What he says is true .<br />
Tutto quello che 1 risplende non è oro.<br />
All is not gold that glitters ,<br />
611. The indefinite pronoun what, meaning <strong>which</strong> thing, is<br />
translated into " che," or " che Cosa." Ex.<br />
Che Cosa volete , Francesco ?<br />
What do you want, Francis ?<br />
A che pensa, Signore ?<br />
What are you thinking of, Sir ?<br />
EXERCISE LIV.<br />
What (611) do you think of this country ? 2 I like it almost as<br />
much as (505, 508) my native country. Of <strong>the</strong>se three horses,<br />
this is <strong>the</strong> one (<strong>which</strong>) 3 I should prefer. Modesty (328) is to merit,<br />
what (610) s<strong>had</strong>ows are to <strong>the</strong> figures in (di) a painting. We are<br />
body <strong>and</strong> mind ; <strong>the</strong> former (605) should (224, 397) obey, <strong>the</strong> latter<br />
comm<strong>and</strong>. That <strong>which</strong> (610) is superfluous often costs more than<br />
that <strong>which</strong> is necessary. That man, by (con) his (560)<br />
extravagance, has not only squ<strong>and</strong>ered all his own property, (582)<br />
but also that (600) of his wife . I am influenced by (270) love (328)<br />
<strong>and</strong> (by) anger ; <strong>the</strong> former (605) pleads that I should forgive him,<br />
<strong>the</strong> latter that I should punish him. Dante (334) <strong>and</strong> Shakespeare<br />
(333) were two great poets ; <strong>the</strong> former (605) was (Imp. Ind.) an<br />
(354) Italian, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> latter an Englishman. I will do all that<br />
181
<strong>which</strong> (610, 612) depends upon (from ) me to obtain that (593) post<br />
for you (198). Your sister has just (299) made me a (360) present<br />
of this beautiful bunch 4 of grapes. That (593) clock is fast, 5 <strong>and</strong><br />
my (560) watch is ten minutes slow.<br />
612. 1 " Quanto " is often used instead of " tutto quello che." Ex.<br />
Fa quanto dipende da lui.<br />
He does all he can.<br />
613. 2 Country is translated into Italian by " paese " when it<br />
means a territory occupied by a people. Ex.<br />
" L' Italia è un bel paese ."<br />
Italy is a fine country.<br />
614. Country is translated into Italian by " campagna," when it<br />
means <strong>the</strong> country, <strong>the</strong> fields. Ex.<br />
" Va a passare l' estate alla campagna ."<br />
He is going to spend <strong>the</strong> summer in <strong>the</strong> country.<br />
615. Country is translated into Italian by " patria," when it means<br />
<strong>the</strong> fa<strong>the</strong>rl<strong>and</strong> . Ex.<br />
" Amo la mia patria."<br />
I love my native country.<br />
616. 3 The one (<strong>which</strong>), is translated by " quello che," <strong>and</strong> " quella<br />
che."<br />
617.4 A bunch of grapes is translated by " Un grappolo d'uva ; "<br />
a bunch of keys , by " Un ma<strong>zz</strong>o di chiavi ; "<br />
a bunch of flowers, by " Un ma<strong>zz</strong>o di fiori ."<br />
618. 5 In speaking of a clock, or watch, to be fast is rendered by "<br />
Avanzare ," <strong>and</strong> to be slow, by " Star indietro ," or " Ritardare ."<br />
ON RELATIVE PRONOUNS.<br />
LESSON XXV 143.<br />
ON RELATIVE PRONOUNS.<br />
619. THE ITALIAN RELATIVE PRONOUNS ARE :<br />
|il quale, m. s.|<br />
Subject. Che or |la quale, f. S.| who, <strong>which</strong> , that.<br />
|i quali, m. p|.<br />
|le quali, f. p.|<br />
Dir. Obj. Cui, |or il quale, &c. |whom, <strong>which</strong> .<br />
182
whose<br />
|Di cui, 1 or del quale, &c. |of whom, of <strong>which</strong>,<br />
|A cui, or al quale, &c. |to whom, to <strong>which</strong> ,<br />
Ind. Obj. |Da cui, or dal quale, &c. |from whom, from <strong>which</strong> .<br />
|Per cui, or pel quale, &c. |for whom, for <strong>which</strong> ,<br />
|Con cui, or col quale, &c. |with whom, with <strong>which</strong> ,<br />
|In cui, 2 or nel quale, &c. |.in whom, in <strong>which</strong> .<br />
620. Both <strong>the</strong> pronouns "che" (" cui," " di cui," &c.), <strong>and</strong> " il quale"<br />
("del quale," &c.), are used with reference to persons, animals,<br />
<strong>and</strong> things ; but still, when referring to animals or things, "il<br />
quale," " del quale," &c., is generally used. Ex.<br />
Il giovine che (or il quale) parla.<br />
The young man who is speaking .<br />
Ecco l'albero il quale (or che) produsse tanti fiori l'anno<br />
passato.<br />
There is <strong>the</strong> tree <strong>which</strong> produced so much blossom last<br />
year .<br />
Il signore di cui (or del quale) le ho parlato.<br />
The gentleman of whom I have spoken to you.<br />
Le farò vedere il fiume dal quale (or da cui) tutta questa<br />
valle è irrigata .<br />
I will show you <strong>the</strong> river by <strong>which</strong> all this valley is watered .<br />
621. 1 When reference is made to things, " di che," "a che," &c.,<br />
may be used instead of " di cui," "a cui," &c. Ex.<br />
La materia di che parlar dobbiamo è importantissima .<br />
The matter about <strong>which</strong> we have to speak is most<br />
important .<br />
622. 2 When referring to time " che," instead of " in che," or " in<br />
cui," is used. Ex.<br />
" Lo di che (in cui) hanno detto ai dolci amici addio."<br />
(Dante ).<br />
On <strong>the</strong> day <strong>the</strong>y said good-bye to <strong>the</strong>ir dearest friends .<br />
144 ON RELATIVE PRONOUNS.<br />
623. The relative pronoun must always be expressed in Italian,<br />
even when it is omitted in English. Ex.<br />
Il raga<strong>zz</strong>o che vidi non era così gr<strong>and</strong>e come mio fratello .<br />
183
The boy I saw was not so tall as my bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
624. " Che " as well as " cui " may be used in <strong>the</strong> accusative ; but<br />
when <strong>the</strong>re may be ambiguity between <strong>the</strong> subject <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> object<br />
of <strong>the</strong> phrase, " cui " (<strong>which</strong> is never used as subject) should be<br />
used, <strong>and</strong> not " che." Ex.<br />
L'individuo cui maltrattò Vostro fratello .<br />
The individual whom your bro<strong>the</strong>r ill-treated .<br />
L'eroe , 1 cui tutto il mondo onora.<br />
The hero who is honoured by <strong>the</strong> whole world.<br />
625. When " di cui " corresponds to whose, it is generally placed<br />
between <strong>the</strong> article <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> noun with <strong>which</strong> it is used, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
preposition " di " is omitted . Ex.<br />
La Fiammetta , i cui capelli Fiammetta , erano crespi ,<br />
lunghi ed oro. (Boccaccio).<br />
whose hair was crisp, long, <strong>and</strong> like gold.<br />
626. In poetry, <strong>and</strong> in <strong>the</strong> higher style, " onde" is used instead of "<br />
di cui," " del quale," &c., "da cui," " dal quale," &c. Ex.<br />
" Amor depose la faretra e l'arco,<br />
Onde (di cui) sempre va carco." (Tasso).<br />
Love laid down <strong>the</strong> bow <strong>and</strong> quiver ,<br />
With <strong>which</strong> he is always armed .<br />
" Que' begli occhi ond'escon saette ." (Petrarca ).<br />
Those beautiful eyes whence arrows dart.<br />
627. When referring to persons <strong>the</strong> " a," of " a cui," is often<br />
omitted . Ex.<br />
" Voi, cui (a cui) fortuna ha posto in mano il freno<br />
Delle belle contrade..." (Petrarca ).<br />
You , in whose h<strong>and</strong>s fortune has placed <strong>the</strong> control<br />
Of <strong>the</strong> beautiful l<strong>and</strong>s...<br />
628. When <strong>which</strong>, of <strong>which</strong>, to <strong>which</strong>, &c., have for antecedent a<br />
clause, or <strong>the</strong> whole of a foregoing sentence , <strong>the</strong>y are translated<br />
by " il che," " del che," " al che," &c. Ex.<br />
Il povero vecchio piangeva amaramente , il che mi<br />
commosse oltrem odo.<br />
The poor old man was weeping bitterly , <strong>which</strong> moved me<br />
very much.<br />
184
Lo hanno maltrattato , di che si lagna sempre .<br />
They ill-treated him, of <strong>which</strong> he always complains .<br />
1 An e, dotted thus e, has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> a in <strong>the</strong> word<br />
gale .<br />
ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 145<br />
629. The pronouns he who, she who, <strong>the</strong> one who, those who, <strong>the</strong><br />
one that, <strong>the</strong> one <strong>which</strong>, those <strong>which</strong>, having reference to an<br />
antecedent, are relative pronouns, <strong>and</strong> are expressed by " quello<br />
che," " quella che," " quelli che," or " quelle che." Ex.<br />
Ammiro questi giovinetti , specie quello che ha recitato " Il<br />
Cinque Maggio " del Manzoni . 1<br />
I admire <strong>the</strong>se youths, particularly <strong>the</strong> one who recited<br />
"The Fifth of May" by Manzoni .<br />
630. But when <strong>the</strong> words he who, she who, those who, do not refer<br />
to any antecedent, <strong>the</strong>y are Indefinite Personal Pronouns, <strong>and</strong><br />
are translated by " colui che" (or "il quale"), "colei che" (or "la<br />
quale"), " coloro che " (" i quali," or " le quali "). Ex.<br />
Colui che le ha detto ciò, si è fatto beffe di Lei.<br />
He who said that, was making fun of you.<br />
Coloro che si somigliano si amano .<br />
Birds of a fea<strong>the</strong>r flock toge<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
631. "Che," "quale," <strong>and</strong> " quali" are also used as interrogative<br />
pronouns ; " che " <strong>the</strong>n means what, <strong>and</strong> " quale," <strong>and</strong> " quali "<br />
mean <strong>which</strong> (of two, or several persons or things ). Ex.<br />
Che lavoro c' è da fare ?<br />
What work is <strong>the</strong>re to do ?<br />
Quale preferite di queste case ?<br />
Which of <strong>the</strong>se houses do you prefer ?<br />
632. The exclamations what ! what a! are translated by "che!" or "<br />
quale ! " Ex.<br />
Che bel pala<strong>zz</strong>o ! che peccato che n on sia abitato.<br />
What a beautiful palace ! what a pity it is not inhabited .<br />
633. The expressions " un non so che," " alcun che," mean a<br />
something or o<strong>the</strong>r (indescribable ). Ex.<br />
Ha " un certo non so che," che mi va a genio .<br />
There is something or o<strong>the</strong>r in him that I like .<br />
185
634. " Quale " (or " quali ")..." quale" (or " quali"), mean<br />
one...ano<strong>the</strong>r , some ... o<strong>the</strong>rs . Ex.<br />
Quali <strong>and</strong>avano, quali venivano , tutti erano affaccendati .<br />
Some were going, some were returning , all were busy.<br />
635. " Quale " is sometimes used in <strong>the</strong> sense of such as. Ex.<br />
" E quale è quei che volentieri acquista ." (Dante ).<br />
And as he is who willingly acquires .<br />
1 A z, dotted thus z, has <strong>the</strong> soft sound of <strong>the</strong> z in <strong>the</strong> word zeal.<br />
146 ON THE WORD " CHE."<br />
636. When "che" means that, it is a conjunction, <strong>and</strong> is always<br />
expressed in Italian , even when it is omitted in English. Ex.<br />
Non credo che abbia alcun diritto di parlare .<br />
I do not think he has any right to speak .<br />
637. " Chè " (whe<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong> accent is marked or not) is often used<br />
instead of " perchè ," for, because . Ex.<br />
" ......... che, poder ch'egli abbia,<br />
Non ti torrà lo scender questa roccia ." (Dante ).<br />
for, any power that he may have ,<br />
Shall not prevent thy going down this crag.<br />
638. " Che," preceded by a verb used negatively, means nothing,<br />
nothing but, only. Ex.<br />
Luigi non ha che fare .<br />
Louis has nothing to do.<br />
Non ricevette che lodi ; neppure un Soldo.<br />
He received nothing but praises ; not so much as a half-<br />
penny.<br />
639. " Non che," followed by a verb in <strong>the</strong> Infinitive , is equivalent<br />
to <strong>the</strong> English expression , not only... but. Ex.<br />
Non che scrivermi , venne a vedermi due Volte.<br />
Not only did he write to me, but he came twice to see me.<br />
640. " Che " is sometimes used instead of " qu<strong>and</strong>o," when . Ex.<br />
Pietro venne che avevo già finite .<br />
Peter came when I <strong>had</strong> already finished .<br />
641. " Chè ! " or " ma chè ! " mean <strong>the</strong> same as nonsense ! Ex.<br />
Ma che ! n on sa neanche leggere .<br />
186
Nonsense ! he <strong>cannot</strong> even read.<br />
EXERCISE LV.<br />
Which (631) do you like best of those (594) three books ? The one<br />
that (629) has <strong>the</strong> illustrations, <strong>and</strong> is bound in parchment. That<br />
lady is Mrs. Trivelli, of whom (619) I spoke (Past Def.) to you<br />
yesterday. My sister learns music from <strong>the</strong> gentleman whom<br />
(624) your bro<strong>the</strong>r recommended (180) to me (193). The young<br />
lady (623) we met last night at Mrs. Jones' (434) has just (299)<br />
entered (183) <strong>the</strong> drawing-room . Which one ? (631). The one who<br />
(629) spoke French to you. The watch (623) you bought me is<br />
broken (rompersi). Not only (639) did he send us <strong>the</strong> tickets, but<br />
he took us to <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>atre in his carriage . Historians represent<br />
.men such as (635) <strong>the</strong>y are poets depict <strong>the</strong>m such as <strong>the</strong>y<br />
should be (224).<br />
1? The straight reading of this sentence is " Non dico che spero<br />
trovar perdono ; dico che spero trovar anche pietà." I do not say<br />
that I hope to find pardon ; I say that I hope to find also pity<br />
(sympathy).<br />
ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 147<br />
LESSON XXIX.<br />
ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.<br />
642. THE PRONOUN "CHI."<br />
Chi, who, whom, he who, him who.<br />
Di chi, of whom, whose, of him who.<br />
A chi, to whom, to him who.<br />
Da chi, from whom, from him who.<br />
Per chi, for whom, from him who.<br />
&c. &c. &c.<br />
643. The pronoun " chi " is both an indefinite <strong>and</strong> an<br />
interrogative pronoun ; it is used for persons only, is invariable,<br />
<strong>and</strong> serves for both genders <strong>and</strong> numbers, it has no need of any<br />
antecedent .<br />
Verbs employed with "chi" are used in <strong>the</strong> singular only, except "<br />
essere " 1 <strong>which</strong> is used in both numbers . Ex.<br />
Chi le ha fatto questo regalo ?<br />
Who made you this present ?<br />
Chi sono i di lei corrispondenti ?<br />
187
Who are your correspondents ?<br />
Sappiamo di chi volete parlare .<br />
We know whom you allude to.<br />
A chi ha dato il biglietto ?<br />
To whom did you give <strong>the</strong> ticket ?<br />
Da chi ha ricevuto quest buona 2 notizia ?<br />
From whom did you receive this good news ?<br />
Per chi dipinge questo bellissimo quadro ?<br />
For whom do you paint this beautiful picture ?<br />
644. " Chi "..." chi" mean one... ano<strong>the</strong>r , some ... o<strong>the</strong>rs . Ex.<br />
Chi accorre , chi sgui<strong>zz</strong>a tra Uomo e Uomo, e se la batte.<br />
(Manzoni ).<br />
One runs up, ano<strong>the</strong>r sneaks away between man <strong>and</strong> man,<br />
<strong>and</strong> takes to his heels .<br />
645. " Chi " is often used instead of " colui che," " colei che,"<br />
"coloro che," especially in proverbial expressions . Ex.<br />
Chi legge , regge .<br />
Knowledge is power.<br />
Chi è in difetto, è in sospetto,<br />
He who is in fault, is in suspicion .<br />
Chi si scusa, 3 si accusa .<br />
He who excuses himself , accuses himself .<br />
1 See rule 63, to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> meaning of <strong>the</strong> letters in <strong>the</strong><br />
darker type,<br />
2 Notice that an o, preceded by a u has always <strong>the</strong> broad sound of<br />
<strong>the</strong> o in <strong>the</strong> word orphan.<br />
3 An s, dotted thus s, has <strong>the</strong> soft sound of <strong>the</strong> s in <strong>the</strong> word rose.<br />
148 ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.<br />
"CHIUNQUE," AND "CHICCHESSIA."<br />
646. The Indefinite Pronouns, " chiunque ," <strong>and</strong> " chicchessia "<br />
(plural " chicchessiano ") mean whoever, <strong>and</strong> can only refer to<br />
persons ; " chicchessia " is followed by <strong>the</strong> conjunction " che," <strong>and</strong><br />
a verb in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood. Ex.<br />
Chiunque desiderava parlarle , doveva ottenerne il<br />
permesso dal magistrate .<br />
188
Whoever desired to speak to her, was obliged to get<br />
permission from <strong>the</strong> magistrate .<br />
Ditelo pure a chicchessia che vi piaccia .<br />
Tell it to whomsoever you like ,<br />
"CHECCHESSIA."<br />
647. The pronoun " checchessia ," means anything whatever . Ex.<br />
Datemi checchessia .<br />
Give me anything whatever .<br />
648. "Qualunque ," " qualsisia," " qualsivoglia," <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir plural<br />
forms " qualsisiano," <strong>and</strong> " qualsivogliano," mean whatever,<br />
whatsoever ; <strong>the</strong>y may refer to things or persons, <strong>and</strong> are<br />
adjectives or pronouns, according as <strong>the</strong>y precede , or st<strong>and</strong> for a<br />
noun. Where <strong>the</strong>y are adjectives <strong>the</strong>y are followed by a verb in<br />
<strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood preceded by <strong>the</strong> conjunction "che." Ex.<br />
Dategli un vestito qualunque.<br />
Give him any coat you like .<br />
Qualunque raccom<strong>and</strong>azione ch' egli abbia, non 1 sarà<br />
eletto .<br />
Whatever recommendation he may have , he will not be<br />
elected .<br />
" ALCUNO."<br />
649. " Alcuno," " alcuna," " alcuni," " alcune," " qualcuno," "<br />
qualcheduno," mean some , any, someone, some people ; "<br />
alcuno," &c., are adjectives when <strong>the</strong>y precede a noun, <strong>and</strong><br />
pronouns when <strong>the</strong>y st<strong>and</strong> for a noun ; " qualcuno " <strong>and</strong> "<br />
qualcheduno " are only pronouns. Ex.<br />
Alcuni poemi italiani sono difficili a tradursi.<br />
Some Italian poems are difficult to translate .<br />
Non ho ancor visto alcuno.<br />
I have not seen anybody yet.<br />
"TALE," AND " COTALE."<br />
650. " Tale " <strong>and</strong> " tali ," " cotale " <strong>and</strong> " cotali " mean such a, some<br />
one. These words are adjectives or pronouns, according as <strong>the</strong>y<br />
precede or st<strong>and</strong> for a noun. Ex.<br />
Un tal Uomo non è da compiangersi .<br />
Such a man is not to be pitied,<br />
189
1 An o, dotted thus o, has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> o in <strong>the</strong> word<br />
orphan.<br />
ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 149<br />
"CERTO."<br />
651. " Certo," 1 " certa," " certi ," <strong>and</strong> " certe " mean certain. These<br />
words are adjectives or pronouns, according as <strong>the</strong>y precede or<br />
st<strong>and</strong> for a noun. Ex.<br />
Ho sentito una certa notizia .<br />
I have heard certain news .<br />
652. " Tale," " tali ," <strong>and</strong> " cotale ," " cotali " are also used to begin<br />
<strong>the</strong> second part of a simile , <strong>and</strong> mean such, even so. Ex.<br />
" Quale colui, che gr<strong>and</strong>e inganno ascolta<br />
Che gli sia fatto, e poi se ne rammarca ,<br />
Tal si fe' Flegias nell' ira accolta." (Dante ).<br />
As one who listens to some great deceit<br />
Which has been done to him, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>n sore resents it,<br />
Such grew Phegyas in his ga<strong>the</strong>red rage .<br />
" Cotali uscir dalla schiera ov' è Dido." (Dante ).<br />
So came <strong>the</strong>y from <strong>the</strong> b<strong>and</strong> where Dido is.<br />
"TALUNO" AND "CERTUNI."<br />
653. "Taluno" <strong>and</strong> " certuni" are indefinite pronouns; " taluno"<br />
means some one, <strong>and</strong> is only used in <strong>the</strong> singular; " certuni "<br />
means some people, <strong>and</strong> is only used in <strong>the</strong> plural. Ex.<br />
C'è taluno la che n on mi va molto a genio .<br />
There is some one <strong>the</strong>re I do not much like .<br />
Certuni hanno idee curiose .<br />
Some people have odd ideas .<br />
EXERCISE LVI.<br />
Who (643) is knocking at <strong>the</strong> door ? My little bro<strong>the</strong>r James. To<br />
whom (643) have you told <strong>the</strong> news ? To my sister-in-law. The<br />
road through <strong>which</strong> (619) we passed was (Imp. Ind.) very lonely.<br />
From whom (643) do you expect a letter ? From that lady who (619)<br />
spoke to you at my bro<strong>the</strong>r's house . Children (328) who (619) obey<br />
(to) <strong>the</strong>ir parents 2 deserve to be praised. What (631) is <strong>the</strong> weight<br />
of this shield ? It is about ten pounds. 3 For whom are you<br />
painting that vase ? For my mo<strong>the</strong>r-in-law. The pencil with <strong>which</strong><br />
(619) I was writing (179) is broken. Whose hat is this ? It belongs<br />
190
to that little girl (442). What (611) are you thinking of ? I was<br />
thinking of <strong>the</strong> advice 4 you gave (180) to me.<br />
654. 1 " Un certo tale ," " una certa tale " mean a certain person.<br />
Ex.<br />
Ho incontrato un certo tale .<br />
I have met a certain person.<br />
655. 2 Parents is translated into Italian by " genitori ; " " parenti"<br />
means relations. The word acquaintances is translated by "<br />
conoscenti ,"<strong>and</strong> " conoscenze ."<br />
656. 3 Pound, weight, is translated by " libbra ," pound sterling, by<br />
" lira sterlina ." " Lira ," alone , means tenpence .<br />
657.4 The advice of a friend is translated by " il consiglio di un<br />
amico ; " advice , in <strong>the</strong> sense of opinion, is rendered by " parere ."<br />
150 ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.<br />
"OGNUNO."<br />
658. " Ognuno," " ognuna," mean any man, any woman, any one ;<br />
<strong>the</strong>y are used with or without an antecedent . Ex.<br />
Ognuno che Voglia esser membro di quella società deve<br />
pagare una ghinea .<br />
Any one who wishes to be a member of that society , must<br />
pay one guinea .<br />
"CIASCUNO" AND "CIASCHEDUNO."<br />
659. " Ciascuno," " ciascheduno," <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir feminine forms,<br />
mean every, everyone, each, <strong>and</strong> are adjectives or pronouns ;<br />
<strong>the</strong>y are adjectives when <strong>the</strong>y precede a noun, <strong>and</strong> pronouns<br />
when <strong>the</strong>y st<strong>and</strong> instead of a noun. Ex.<br />
"ALTRI." 2<br />
Ciascuno degli official ! ebbe a subire un esame .<br />
Every officer <strong>had</strong> to pass an examination .<br />
Ricevettero una lira sterlina ciascheduno . 1<br />
Each of <strong>the</strong>m received a pound sterling .<br />
660. The indefinite pronoun " altri " means o<strong>the</strong>rs , Ex.<br />
Gli altri non parleranno .<br />
The o<strong>the</strong>rs will not speak .<br />
Altri non agirebbe così.<br />
Ano<strong>the</strong>r (i) would not act thus.<br />
191
661. The pronoun " altri " is sometimes used in Italian, when in<br />
English <strong>the</strong> verb may be used in <strong>the</strong> passive form. Ex.<br />
" ALTRUI."<br />
" Venite a noi parlar, s' altri nol niega ." (Dante ).<br />
Come <strong>and</strong> speak to us if it is not forbidden.<br />
662. " Altrui " means o<strong>the</strong>r, o<strong>the</strong>rs, <strong>and</strong> only refers to persons ; it<br />
is employed both in <strong>the</strong> singular <strong>and</strong> plural numbers, as <strong>the</strong><br />
direct or indirect object of a verb, but never as its subject. The<br />
prepositions " di," <strong>and</strong> " a," before " altrui ," are often omitted . Ex.<br />
Egli brama l' altrui .<br />
He covets o<strong>the</strong>r people's property.<br />
Vuol sempre aver notizia dei fatti altrui (/ di altrui ).<br />
He always wants to know o<strong>the</strong>r people's business .<br />
" La mia vita che è celata altrui ." (Petrarca ).<br />
My life <strong>which</strong> is hidden to o<strong>the</strong>rs .<br />
1 Instead of "ciascheduno" one could say "per uno," or "a testa."<br />
Ex.<br />
Dateci una ghinea a testa .<br />
Give us a guinea each .<br />
663. 2 " Altri "..." altri " mean one... ano<strong>the</strong>r , some ... o<strong>the</strong>rs . Ex.<br />
Altri veniva , altri <strong>and</strong>ava via, &c.<br />
One came , ano<strong>the</strong>r went away ; &c.<br />
ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 151<br />
"L'UN L'ALTRO."<br />
664. The reciprocal pronouns "l'un l'altro," ("l'una l'altra," " gli uni<br />
gli altri ," &c.) mean one ano<strong>the</strong>r ; <strong>the</strong> second term of <strong>the</strong>se<br />
pronouns (" l'altro," " l'altra," &c.) may be preceded by a<br />
preposition . Ex.<br />
Si aiutano l'un l'altro. 1<br />
They aid one ano<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
Sparlano l'una dell'altra .<br />
They speak ill of one ano<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
"L'UNO E L'ALTRO," &c., " AMBO," &c.<br />
665. The collective pronouns " l' uno e l' altro," " l' una e l' altra,"<br />
"tutti e due," "tutt'e due," "ambo," " ambidue," " entrambi," &c.,<br />
mean both ; " gli uni e gli altri ," " le une e le altre ," mean all of<br />
192
<strong>the</strong>m. They are followed by <strong>the</strong> definite article, when <strong>the</strong>y<br />
precede a noun ; before a verb <strong>the</strong> article is omitted . Ex.<br />
L' uno e l' altro de' miei fratelli erano fuori di casa.<br />
Both my bro<strong>the</strong>rs were out of doors.<br />
" Ambo le mani per dolor mi morsi ." (Dante ).<br />
Both my h<strong>and</strong>s in agony I bit.<br />
Gli uni e gli altri furono puniti .<br />
All of <strong>the</strong>m were punished.<br />
"O L'UNO, L'ALTRO," &c.<br />
666. The pronouns "o l'uno, o l'altro," " o l' una, o l'altra, " 2 &c.,<br />
mean ei<strong>the</strong>r one, or <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r , (or o<strong>the</strong>rs ,) ei<strong>the</strong>r . Ex.<br />
Mi m<strong>and</strong>i l' uno, o l' altro.<br />
Send me ei<strong>the</strong>r one or <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
"NÈ L'UNO NÈ L'ALTRO," &c.<br />
667. The relative pronouns " nè l'uno nè l'altro," " nè l'una nè l'<br />
altra," &c., mean nei<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong> one nor <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r. The verb used<br />
with <strong>the</strong>se pronouns must be accompanied by <strong>the</strong> negation "<br />
non," <strong>and</strong> be in <strong>the</strong> singular or in <strong>the</strong> plural number, according as<br />
<strong>the</strong> action it expresses may be done by one, or both <strong>the</strong> persons<br />
spoken of, or alluded to. Ex.<br />
Non comprerò nè l'uno nè altro.<br />
I shall not buy ei<strong>the</strong>r of <strong>the</strong>m .<br />
Nè Foscolo nè Monti non è l' autore di questo poema,<br />
Nei<strong>the</strong>r Foscolo nor Monti is <strong>the</strong> author of this poem.<br />
Nè l'una nè l'altra non verranno .<br />
Nei<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong> one nor <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r will come .<br />
668. 1 Instead of <strong>the</strong> reciprocal pronouns "l'un l'altro," &c., <strong>the</strong><br />
Italians sometimes use <strong>the</strong> adverbs "scambievolmente,"<br />
mutually , " reciprocamente ," reciprocally .<br />
669. 2 The o<strong>the</strong>r disjunctives used in Italian instead of "o" are "<br />
ovvero," "ossia ," "oppure," " odanche."<br />
152 ON "NIUNO," " NIENTE ," "NULLA ," "QUANTO," &c.<br />
"NIUNO," "NESSUNO ," "VERUNO."<br />
670. " Niuno," " Nessuno," " Veruno," <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir feminine forms<br />
mean nobody, no one, <strong>and</strong> are adjectives, or pronouns, according<br />
as <strong>the</strong>y precede or st<strong>and</strong> for a noun. When <strong>the</strong>y follow <strong>the</strong> verb,<br />
193
<strong>the</strong>y must be preceded by <strong>the</strong> negation " non," but when <strong>the</strong>y<br />
precede it, <strong>the</strong>y do not require any negation before <strong>the</strong>m . Ex.<br />
Niun uomo è senza difetti .<br />
No man is without his defects .<br />
Non ho parlato a nessuno .<br />
I have not spoken to anyone .<br />
Nessuno è profeta nel proprio paese .<br />
No one is a prophet in his own country.<br />
ON THE WORDS "NIENTE ," AND "NULLA ."<br />
671. "Niente" <strong>and</strong> " nulla" used as nouns (preceded by an article)<br />
mean nothing , <strong>the</strong> slightest thing , a trifle , Ex.<br />
Rientrerà presto nel nulla dond' è sortito.<br />
He will soon re-enter into <strong>the</strong> insignificance from whence<br />
he arose .<br />
Per un niente si arrabbia.<br />
A trifle makes him enraged .<br />
672. "Niente" <strong>and</strong> " nulla" are also used as indefinite pronouns, in<br />
<strong>the</strong> sense of nothing ; when <strong>the</strong>y follow a verb, that verb must be<br />
preceded by <strong>the</strong> negation " non." Ex.<br />
Pareva che nulla si potesse far senza di lui.<br />
It seemed as if <strong>the</strong>y could do nothing without him.<br />
Questi raga<strong>zz</strong>i non sanno niente .<br />
These boys do not know anything .<br />
673. " Niente " <strong>and</strong> " nulla " often have <strong>the</strong> meaning of " qualche<br />
cosa," something , anything . Ex.<br />
Non vuol nulla oggi ?<br />
Do you want anything to-day ?<br />
ON THE WORDS " QUANTO," " QUANTUNQUE."<br />
674. " Quanto " is also (494) an adverb, <strong>and</strong> means how much ; it<br />
is always used with a verb in <strong>the</strong> subjunctive mood. Ex.<br />
S' ella sapesse quanto io la stimi !<br />
If you knew how much I esteem you !<br />
675. " Quantunque " 1 is an indefinite pronoun <strong>and</strong> means all<br />
that <strong>which</strong> . Ex.<br />
" Chi vuol veder quantunque può natura ." (Petrarca ).<br />
Whoever wishes to see all what nature can do.<br />
194
1 "Quantunque " is also a conjunction, meaning although. See<br />
rule 740.<br />
ON "PER QUANTO" AND "PER QUANTI." 153<br />
ON THE WORDS " PER QUANTO," AND " PER QUANTI."<br />
676. "Per quanto" is an adverb, <strong>and</strong> means however, however<br />
much; it is used with a verb in <strong>the</strong> subjunctive mood. Ex.<br />
Per quanto abili siano , non riesciranno nell' impresa .<br />
However able <strong>the</strong>y may be, <strong>the</strong>y will not succeed in <strong>the</strong><br />
<strong>under</strong>taking .<br />
677. Instead of " per quanto," " per," followed by <strong>the</strong> conjunction "<br />
che " may be used. Ex.<br />
Per vantaggiose che fossero le sue offerte , non volli<br />
accettarle .<br />
However advantageous his proposals might have been , I<br />
would not accept <strong>the</strong>m .<br />
678. " Per quanti " <strong>and</strong> " per quante " are adjectives <strong>and</strong> mean<br />
whatever ; <strong>the</strong>y are employed with a verb in <strong>the</strong> subjunctive<br />
mood. Ex.<br />
Per quante ragioni adducessimo , non ci fu dato di con<br />
vincerlo .<br />
Whatever reasons we adduced, we were not able to convince<br />
him.<br />
EXERCISE LVII.<br />
They were both (665) students at <strong>the</strong> University of Oxford. Every<br />
one (659) of <strong>the</strong> pupils of <strong>the</strong> Royal College of Music <strong>and</strong> of <strong>the</strong><br />
Royal Academy of Music received (Past Def.) a ticket of admission<br />
to <strong>the</strong> International Concert. Charity rejoices at <strong>the</strong> good fortune<br />
of o<strong>the</strong>rs (662). Nei<strong>the</strong>r my gr<strong>and</strong>fa<strong>the</strong>r nor my aunt (275, 667)<br />
have arrived. Nei<strong>the</strong>r of <strong>the</strong>m (667) is <strong>the</strong> owner of <strong>the</strong> house<br />
(623) we have seen. Rich as <strong>the</strong>y are 1 <strong>the</strong>y will not be admitted<br />
to that society. Let <strong>the</strong>m be ever so clever (however clever <strong>the</strong>y<br />
may be) (676), <strong>the</strong>y will never succeed (258) in such an<br />
<strong>under</strong>taking. Some people (649) are never satisfied, however<br />
(676) prosperous <strong>the</strong>y may be. I shall buy ei<strong>the</strong>r (666) this box 2 or<br />
that trunk . How much capital 3 have you entrusted to him ? I<br />
have entrusted to him about five hundred (537) pounds.<br />
195
679. 1 The expressions rich as <strong>the</strong>y are, determined as <strong>the</strong>y<br />
were, &c., maybe rendered in Italian by " ricchi quali sono," "<br />
risoluti quali erano ," &c.<br />
680. 2 Box, if of a good size, is translated into Italian by " cassa ; "<br />
if a small one, by " cassetta ;" <strong>and</strong> if a very small one, by "<br />
scatola."<br />
Snuff-box is translated by " scatola da tabacco."<br />
A box, at <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>atre, is translated by " un palco," or " un<br />
palchetto."<br />
The box of a carriage , is translated by " il sedile d'una carro<strong>zz</strong>a."<br />
A cartridge -box, is translated by " una giberna ."<br />
Box-wood, is translated by "bosso."<br />
A box on <strong>the</strong> ear, is translated by " uno schiaffo ."<br />
To box, is translated by " fare a pugni."<br />
681. 3 The capital, meaning <strong>the</strong> funds, money , is translated by "<br />
il capitale ."<br />
The capital, meaning <strong>the</strong> chief town, is translated by " la<br />
capitale ."<br />
The capital of a column, is translated by " il capitello di una<br />
colonna."<br />
154 ON THE INFINITIVE MOOD.<br />
LESSON XXX.<br />
ON THE INFINITIVE MOOD.<br />
ON THE USE OF THE PRESENT .<br />
682. The Present of <strong>the</strong> Infinitive is used in Italian, as in<br />
English, to express an action in an indefinite manner, without<br />
any reference to time or person. Ex.<br />
Cantare , / il cantar troppo a digiuno guasta la voce.<br />
To sing too much before breakfast spoils <strong>the</strong> voice .<br />
683. The Present of <strong>the</strong> Infinitive is used in Italian as a noun,<br />
both as subject, <strong>and</strong> object in <strong>the</strong> sentence , <strong>and</strong> is generally<br />
translated into English by a present participle , or by a noun. Ex.<br />
Lo scrivermi ella così spesso, mi fa molto piacere .<br />
Your writing to me so often, gives me much pleasure .<br />
Non mi piace quel suo parlare enigmatico . 1<br />
I do not like his (or her) enigmatic way of speaking .<br />
" Non era l'<strong>and</strong>ar suo cosa mortale ." (Petrarca ).<br />
196
Her gait was not like that of a mortal being .<br />
1 See rule 63, to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> meaning of <strong>the</strong> letters in <strong>the</strong><br />
darker type.<br />
684. As already stated in rule 126, <strong>the</strong> Present of <strong>the</strong> Infinitive is<br />
used in Italian, instead of <strong>the</strong> second person singular of <strong>the</strong><br />
Imperative used negatively . Ex.<br />
Non <strong>and</strong>ar giù, Carlino .<br />
Don't go down, Charlie .<br />
ON THE USE OF THE PAST.<br />
685. The Past of <strong>the</strong> Infinitive is used in Italian as a noun, both<br />
as subject, <strong>and</strong> object in <strong>the</strong> sentence , <strong>and</strong> is generally translated<br />
into English by <strong>the</strong> Past Gerund. Ex.<br />
L'avermi ella parlato, è causa di tutta questa gelosia .<br />
Your having spoken to me, is <strong>the</strong> cause of all this jealousy .<br />
ON THE USE OF THE GERUND.<br />
686. The English Present Participle, preceded by <strong>the</strong> prepositions<br />
by, through, with, on, is translated into Italian by <strong>the</strong> Gerund,<br />
without any preposition before it. Ex.<br />
Scrivendogli ogni giorno, lo forzai a rispondermi .<br />
By writing to him every day, I compelled him to reply.<br />
687. Instead of <strong>the</strong> gerund, <strong>the</strong> present of <strong>the</strong> infinitive, preceded<br />
by <strong>the</strong> preposition " con," with, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> definite article, may be<br />
used. Ex.<br />
Con lo scrivergli ogni giorno lo forzai a rispondermi .<br />
By writing to him every day, I compelled him to reply.<br />
ON THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 155<br />
688. The English Present Participle, preceded by <strong>the</strong> preposition<br />
in, should be translated into Italian, by <strong>the</strong> Present of <strong>the</strong><br />
Infinitive , preceded by " nel " or " nello." Ex.<br />
Nello scriverle , potete palesarle il Vostro progetto.<br />
In writing to her, you can inform her of your plan.<br />
689. As already stated in rule 200, <strong>the</strong> Compound of <strong>the</strong> Gerund<br />
is used in Italian as in English ; except that in Italian <strong>the</strong><br />
auxiliary "avendo," or " essendo," is omitted, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> past<br />
participle alone is expressed, <strong>and</strong> is variable , according to <strong>the</strong><br />
object in <strong>the</strong> sentence (when "avendo" is omitted), or <strong>the</strong> subject<br />
(when "essendo " is omitted ). Ex.<br />
197
Datoci (avendoci dato) il dispaccio, partì a gambe.<br />
Having given us <strong>the</strong> despatch, he ran off.<br />
Sedutasi (essendosi seduta) per terra , si mise a cucire .<br />
Having seated herself on <strong>the</strong> ground, she began to sew.<br />
EXERCISE LVIII.<br />
He kept us waiting (683) in <strong>the</strong> rain till two o'clock (548) in <strong>the</strong><br />
afternoon. Your having told (685) him frankly that we would wait<br />
no longer offended him. Having conducted me (689) into <strong>the</strong> room<br />
destined for (to) me, he wished me a (<strong>the</strong>) good-night, <strong>and</strong> went<br />
away. Princes (328) who (620) in governing (688) <strong>the</strong>ir subjects,<br />
are not guided by (270) principles of justice , excite disaffection.<br />
Having seated herself (689) on a comfortable arm-chair, she<br />
began to narrate <strong>the</strong> scene (623) she <strong>had</strong> witnessed. I admire<br />
those (594) artists, I saw <strong>the</strong>m painting 1 some very fine<br />
pictures. I should like to have one of those pictures; I saw <strong>the</strong>m<br />
being painted. 1 I often heard him speaking (690) against you, but<br />
I never thought! (636) he would dare to cause you any loss. Young<br />
as he is (679) he knows how to make himself feared. 3 I like Miss<br />
Williams' voice, I heard her singing (690) last night. The song<br />
(623) you have composed is very pretty ; I have heard it sung (690)<br />
several times. Having dressed (689) <strong>the</strong>mselves in <strong>the</strong>ir best<br />
clo<strong>the</strong>s, <strong>the</strong>y went out for a walk. I came earlier (510) this<br />
morning, because I thought (691) I should have found 4 you at<br />
home . I do not like to see horses running (683) so fast.<br />
690. 1 Both <strong>the</strong> English expressions "I saw <strong>the</strong>m painting," <strong>and</strong> "I<br />
saw <strong>the</strong>m painted" (being painted), are translated into Italian by "<br />
Gli ho veduti dipingere ."<br />
691. 2 To think, meaning to believe , is translated into Italian by<br />
"Credere." The meanings of " Pensare a," <strong>and</strong> " Pensare di," are<br />
given in rule 248.<br />
692. 3 The expressions to make himself, or herself loved,<br />
respected, feared by, are translated into Italian by " farsi amare ,<br />
rispettare , temere da."<br />
693. 4 Notice that in Italian <strong>the</strong> latter of two verbs is generally<br />
put in <strong>the</strong> Present of <strong>the</strong> Infinitive , when both verbs have <strong>the</strong><br />
same subject. Ex.<br />
Vorrei poter partire subito pel continente .<br />
I wish I could start at once for <strong>the</strong> continent .<br />
198
156 ON THE INDICATIVE MOOD.<br />
LESSON XXXI.<br />
ON THE INDICATIVE MOOD.<br />
ON THE USE OF THE PRESENT .<br />
694. The Present of <strong>the</strong> Indicative is used in Italian, as in<br />
English, to express an action <strong>which</strong> always happens, or <strong>which</strong> is<br />
happening at <strong>the</strong> present time . Ex.<br />
Non lavoriamo per lui.<br />
We do not work for him.<br />
Disegno 1 un ricamo per mia sorella .<br />
I am making 3 a design <strong>which</strong> my sister will embroider .<br />
Carolina coglie 2 fragole per la Colazione .<br />
Caroline is ga<strong>the</strong>ring strawberries for breakfast .<br />
ON THE USE OF THE IMPERFECT .<br />
695. In Italian <strong>the</strong> Imperfect of <strong>the</strong> Indicative is used when <strong>the</strong><br />
verb expresses an action <strong>which</strong> was still in progress when<br />
ano<strong>the</strong>r action was done. Ex.<br />
Leggevo 1 qu<strong>and</strong>o Giorgio entrò nella mia camera .<br />
When George entered my room, I was reading . 3<br />
Le mie cugine Coglievano 2 fiori nel giardino .<br />
My cousins were ga<strong>the</strong>ring 3 flowers in <strong>the</strong> garden.<br />
696. A verb is also used in <strong>the</strong> Imperfect of <strong>the</strong> Indicative when it<br />
describes <strong>the</strong> state or condition of persons <strong>and</strong> things at a past<br />
time , specified or alluded to. Ex.<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>o entrammo , lo specchio era già rotto.<br />
When we entered , <strong>the</strong> looking -glass was already broken.<br />
A quell' epoca gli Spagnuoli erano un gran popolo.<br />
At that time <strong>the</strong> Spaniards were a great people.<br />
697. In Italian, <strong>the</strong> Imperfect Indicative is also used when <strong>the</strong><br />
verb expresses an action often repeated at a past time . Ex.<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>'ero a Milano , <strong>and</strong>avo al teatro tutte le sere .<br />
When I was at Milan , I used to go to <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>atre every night .<br />
698. 1 Expressions like <strong>the</strong>se may also be rendered in Italian by<br />
<strong>the</strong> verb " Stare," when <strong>the</strong> principal verb in <strong>the</strong> sentence , whilst<br />
describing a progressive action , denotes repose , rest . Ex.<br />
Sto disegn<strong>and</strong>o un ricamo per mia sorella .<br />
199
I am making a design <strong>which</strong> my sister will embroider .<br />
Stavo leggendo, qu<strong>and</strong>o Carlo entrò nella mia camera .<br />
I was reading , when Charles entered my room.<br />
699. 2 Expressions like <strong>the</strong>se may also be rendered in Italian by<br />
<strong>the</strong> verb " Andare " when <strong>the</strong> principal verb in <strong>the</strong> sentence<br />
expresses motion <strong>and</strong> progression . Ex.<br />
La Carolina va cogliendo fragole per la colazione .<br />
Caroline is ga<strong>the</strong>ring strawberries for breakfast .<br />
Le mie cugine <strong>and</strong>avano cogliendo fiori nel giardino .<br />
My cousins were ga<strong>the</strong>ring flowers in <strong>the</strong> garden.<br />
700.3 As already stated, <strong>the</strong> English expressions I am making, I<br />
was reading, <strong>the</strong>y were ga<strong>the</strong>ring, &c. , are translated into Italian<br />
as if <strong>the</strong>y were I make , I read, <strong>the</strong>y ga<strong>the</strong>red , &c.<br />
ON THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 157<br />
701. In Italian, <strong>the</strong> Imperfect Indicative is also used when <strong>the</strong><br />
verb denotes <strong>the</strong> qualities (physical or moral), habits, <strong>and</strong><br />
customs of persons <strong>and</strong> nations no longer existing . Ex.<br />
Cesare Borgia aveva il (574) viso , pallido, colle guance<br />
imfossate , con baffi e barba rossetta . (D'Azeglio .)<br />
Caesar Borgia <strong>had</strong> a pale face sunken cheeks , <strong>and</strong> a<br />
moustache <strong>and</strong> beard of a reddish colour.<br />
Francesco primo amava la gloria e il potere .<br />
Francis <strong>the</strong> First loved glory <strong>and</strong> power.<br />
I Greci coronavano i loro famosi poeti di alloro e di edera .<br />
The Greeks used to crown <strong>the</strong>ir famous poets with laurel<br />
<strong>and</strong> ivy.<br />
702. In Italian, <strong>the</strong> Imperfect Indicative is also used when <strong>the</strong><br />
verb denotes <strong>the</strong> qualities (physical or moral), habits, <strong>and</strong><br />
customs possessed or practised at a past time by persons <strong>and</strong><br />
nations still existing . Ex.<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>'era giovine amava lo studio delle scienze .<br />
When he was young he loved <strong>the</strong> study of sciences .<br />
Altrevolte i Greci coltivavano le arti e le scienze con<br />
gr<strong>and</strong>issimo amore .<br />
Formerly <strong>the</strong> Greeks cultivated <strong>the</strong> arts <strong>and</strong> sciences with<br />
very great ardour.<br />
200
703. Notice that if <strong>the</strong> time during <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong> qualities were<br />
possessed, <strong>the</strong> habits <strong>and</strong> customs were practised, is specified,<br />
<strong>the</strong> verb is put in <strong>the</strong> Past Definite . Ex.<br />
Francesco primo amò la gloria durante tutta la sua vita .<br />
Francis <strong>the</strong> First loved glory during <strong>the</strong> whole of his life .<br />
Gl'italiani fecero gran progress durante il decimo -terzo<br />
secolo / il trecento .<br />
The Italians made great progress during <strong>the</strong> fourteenth<br />
century .<br />
ON THE USE OF THE PAST DEFINITE.<br />
704. The Past Definite is used whenever <strong>the</strong> verb expresses an<br />
action <strong>which</strong> was begun <strong>and</strong> entirely completed at a time entirely<br />
past, <strong>and</strong> specified . Ex.<br />
Napoleone entrò in Mosca il 24 agosto, 1812.<br />
Napoleon entered Moscow on <strong>the</strong> 24th of August, 1812.<br />
705. The Past Definite is also used when <strong>the</strong> verb expresses an<br />
action <strong>which</strong> was done to a person or thing at a past specified<br />
time . 1 Ex.<br />
Furono sconfitti una seconda Volta, ai venti luglio, dello<br />
stesso anno.<br />
They were defeated a second time , on <strong>the</strong> 20th July, of <strong>the</strong><br />
same year .<br />
706. 1 Italian poets often use <strong>the</strong> Past Definite, instead of <strong>the</strong><br />
Past Indefinite . Ex.<br />
Ah ! caro Tito , io fui teco ingiusta . (METASTASIO .)<br />
Ah ! dear Titus , I have been unjust towards you.<br />
158 ON THE INDICATIVE MOOD.<br />
ON THE USE OF THE PAST INDEFINITE.<br />
707. The Past Indefinite is used when <strong>the</strong> verb expresses an<br />
action <strong>which</strong> happened at a time past, but not specified . Ex.<br />
Carlo ha trovato questo libro sulla tavola di mio zio.<br />
Charles found this book on my uncle's table.<br />
Abbiamo viaggiato molto.<br />
We have travelled a great deal.<br />
Ho scritto i miei temi .<br />
I have written my exercises .<br />
201
708. The Past Indefinite is used when <strong>the</strong> verb expresses an<br />
action <strong>which</strong> happened at a period of time not entirely past, as "<br />
questa mattina," this morning, " oggi ," to-day, " questa<br />
settimana ," this week , &c. Ex.<br />
L'ho incontrato stamattina .<br />
I met him this morning .<br />
ON THE USE OF THE PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE.<br />
709. The Pluperfect is used to express an action <strong>which</strong> <strong>had</strong><br />
happened, at a time not specified, before ano<strong>the</strong>r action occurred.<br />
Ex.<br />
Avevano già distrutto le mura qu<strong>and</strong>o arrivai .<br />
They <strong>had</strong> already destroyed <strong>the</strong> walls before I arrived .<br />
ON THE USE OF THE PAST ANTERIOR.<br />
710. The Past Anterior is used to express an action <strong>which</strong> has<br />
been done immediately before ano<strong>the</strong>r action occurred. Ex.<br />
Tosto che avemmo scritto 1 i nostri temi , uscimmo .<br />
As soon as we <strong>had</strong> written our exercises , we went out.<br />
711. Notice, however, that if <strong>the</strong> two actions were habitual, <strong>the</strong><br />
Pluperfect should be used. Ex.<br />
Tosto che avevamo preso il tè, <strong>and</strong>avamo a fare un giro.<br />
As soon as we <strong>had</strong> taken tea, we used to go for a walk.<br />
EXERCISE LIX.<br />
When I was (696) in Paris I often met (697) your American friend.<br />
Thomas a Becket was kneeling! 2 (696) before <strong>the</strong> altar when <strong>the</strong><br />
knights struck (704) him. At two clock we were (696) far from <strong>the</strong><br />
batteries, <strong>and</strong> <strong>had</strong> escaped (709) a great danger. The general<br />
assured us that <strong>the</strong> enemy were (696) not sufficiently numerous<br />
to (225) attack us. What (611) did you do (697) in <strong>the</strong> evening<br />
when you were in <strong>the</strong> country ? (614). My bro<strong>the</strong>r <strong>and</strong> I read, <strong>and</strong><br />
my sisters ei<strong>the</strong>r sewed, or played upon (583) <strong>the</strong> piano.<br />
Frederick <strong>the</strong> Great always wore (701) a dark blue uniform. When<br />
he entered (183, 704) <strong>the</strong> room , all <strong>the</strong> servants were asleep<br />
(696). Spain <strong>had</strong> (696) formerly immense possessions in America .<br />
712. 1 Notice that <strong>the</strong> Past Anterior is only used after <strong>the</strong><br />
expressions "tosto che," " appena." " qu<strong>and</strong>o," "quanto prima."<br />
713 2 Was kneeling must be translated by "era inginocchiato. " "<br />
S'inginocchiava " would mean was in <strong>the</strong> action of kneeling .<br />
202
ON THE INDICATIVE AND CONDITIONAL MOODS. 159<br />
FURTHER REMARKS ON MOODS AND TENSES .<br />
ON THE USE OF THE PRESENT INDICATIVE.<br />
714. When <strong>the</strong> verb expresses an action or a state <strong>which</strong> has<br />
lasted for some time past, <strong>and</strong> is still lasting, it must be put in<br />
<strong>the</strong> Present Indicative in one of <strong>the</strong> two following ways :<br />
Son in questa casa da cinque anni . Or<br />
Sono cinque anni che son in questa casa.<br />
I have been living in this house <strong>the</strong>se five years .<br />
ON THE USE OF THE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE.<br />
715. When <strong>the</strong> verb expresses an action or a state <strong>which</strong> <strong>had</strong><br />
lasted for some time , <strong>and</strong> was still lasting when a past action<br />
occurred, it must be put in <strong>the</strong> Imperfect Indicative in one of <strong>the</strong><br />
two following ways :<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>o Giorgio venne , io lavoravo già da due ore. Or<br />
Erano 1 due ore che lavoravo, qu<strong>and</strong>o Giorgio venne .<br />
I <strong>had</strong> already been working for two hours when George<br />
came .<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>o Giacomo disse la nuova, io non ne sapevo nulla.<br />
When James told <strong>the</strong> news , I knew nothing about it.<br />
ON THE USE OF THE FUTURE.<br />
716. A verb preceded by <strong>the</strong> adverbs as soon as, when, &c.,<br />
indicates a future time , <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>refore <strong>the</strong> future , <strong>and</strong> not <strong>the</strong><br />
present tense , must be used in Italian . Ex.<br />
Scriverò qu<strong>and</strong>o avrò tempo.<br />
I will write when I have time .<br />
717. Sometimes in Italian a verb is used in <strong>the</strong> Future when it<br />
expresses a present action accompanied by an idea of doubt. Ex.<br />
Crederà che sia per indifferenza sui dolori altrui . (Pellico .)<br />
Perhaps you think it is through indifference concerning<br />
o<strong>the</strong>r people's misfortune .<br />
ON THE USE OF THE CONDITIONAL.<br />
718. In Italian <strong>the</strong> Conditional is sometimes used instead of <strong>the</strong><br />
English Present of <strong>the</strong> Indicative . Ex.<br />
Saprebbe dirmi dove stia di casa il console inglese ?<br />
Can you tell me where <strong>the</strong> English consul lives ?<br />
No, non saprei dirglielo .<br />
203
No, I can't tell you.<br />
Vorrei ch'ella venisse meco .<br />
I wish you would go with me.<br />
719. The Past Conditional is often used in Italian instead of <strong>the</strong><br />
English Present Conditional . Ex.<br />
Promise che m' avrebbe dato da vivere .<br />
He promised that he would give me wherewith to live .<br />
1 An e, dotted thus e, has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> a in <strong>the</strong> word<br />
gate .<br />
160 ON THE INDICATIVE AND CONDITIONAL MOODS<br />
720. The Conditional, instead of <strong>the</strong> Present Indicative, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
Conditional Past, instead of <strong>the</strong> Imperfect Indicative, are often<br />
used in Italian to express a fact <strong>the</strong> reality of <strong>which</strong> depends upon<br />
a statement contained in a previous sentence . Ex.<br />
I giornali dicono che una battaglia ha avuto luogo fra le<br />
truppe reali ed i ribelli . Aggiungono che mille di questi<br />
sarebbero stati uccisi , e due mila sarebbero prigionieri .<br />
The newspapers say that a battle has been fought between<br />
<strong>the</strong> royal troops <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> rebels , They add that a thous<strong>and</strong> of<br />
<strong>the</strong> latter were killed , <strong>and</strong> two thous<strong>and</strong> are prisoners .<br />
EXERCISE LX.<br />
Her fa<strong>the</strong>r was (701) a h<strong>and</strong>some man, but very proud. Man<br />
formerly lived (701) in forests ; <strong>the</strong> meadows were (696) his walks<br />
; he <strong>had</strong> for his food <strong>the</strong> fruits of <strong>the</strong> earth, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> chirping (683)<br />
of birds delighted (701) his (575) ears. When Croesus showed (704)<br />
to Solon his vast treasures, <strong>the</strong> latter (605) said : " Sire , if anyone<br />
(649) come with better iron than yours, he will be master (146) of<br />
this gold." According to <strong>the</strong> statement of <strong>the</strong> governor, <strong>the</strong>y<br />
escaped (720). My servant behaved (703) very well for <strong>the</strong> first five<br />
years, but afterwards he became (704) very rude , <strong>and</strong> dishonest. I<br />
speak of <strong>the</strong> Normans, because <strong>the</strong>y were (696) <strong>the</strong>n at <strong>the</strong><br />
height of <strong>the</strong>ir glory. Napoleon comm<strong>and</strong>ed (704) <strong>the</strong> artillery at<br />
<strong>the</strong> siege of Toulon, <strong>and</strong> gained (704) brilliant victories in Italy, as<br />
general-in-chief of <strong>the</strong> French republic. We met (704) last year at<br />
Paris. I <strong>had</strong> never seen (709) him before. Louis XIV. lived (703)<br />
seventy-eight years, <strong>and</strong> reigned seventy-two. I wrote (708) to<br />
him this morning, immediately after breakfast. Dante was born<br />
(704) in 1265, <strong>and</strong> died in exile in 1321 (544). When Tasso was<br />
204
(550, 696) twelve years old he composed (701) very good Greek<br />
verses. If (112) I were you, I would not lend him any money. He<br />
was (701) very odd ; he used to tell <strong>the</strong> same story so <strong>many</strong> times,<br />
until it was (696) positively painful to hear him. As soon as <strong>the</strong>y<br />
reached (710) <strong>the</strong> top of <strong>the</strong> mountain, <strong>the</strong>y were killed (705).<br />
Ferdin<strong>and</strong> <strong>and</strong> Isabella reigned (696) in Spain when Columbus<br />
discovered (704) America. In crossing (688) <strong>the</strong> moor, I saw a<br />
flight 1 of ravens , flying (292) towards <strong>the</strong> mountains .<br />
721. 1 A flight of birds is translated by " uno stormo d'uccelli ."<br />
A flock of sheep " un gregge di pecore ."<br />
A herd of cattle " una m<strong>and</strong>ra di bestiame . "<br />
A herd of stags " un branco di cervi . "<br />
A pack of hounds " una muta di cani ."<br />
A swarm of bees "uno sciame di api. "<br />
A gang of thieves "una b<strong>and</strong>a di ladri."<br />
ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 161<br />
LESSON XXXII.<br />
ON THE USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.<br />
722. The Main Rule is this: A VERB SHOULD BE USED IN THE<br />
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD WHENEVER THE ACTION IT EXPRESSES is<br />
NOT POSITIVE ; <strong>the</strong>refore a verb is used in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood<br />
in <strong>the</strong> following cases :<br />
723. A verb is used in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood, when it is governed<br />
by ano<strong>the</strong>r verb expressing doubt, fear, wish, comm<strong>and</strong>,<br />
exhortation , &c. Ex.<br />
Dubito ch'ella possa riuscire .<br />
I doubt whe<strong>the</strong>r you will succeed .<br />
Temiamo che non 1 piova.<br />
We are afraid it will rain .<br />
Amo credere ch'ella stia bene .<br />
I hope that you are well.<br />
Voglio che facciate ciò.<br />
I want you to do this .<br />
Ella desidera ch' egli venga .<br />
She desires that he should come .<br />
Mi sorprende che ciò l'adiri .<br />
I am surprised that this should make you angry.<br />
205
724. A verb is also used in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood when it is<br />
governed by a verb used interrogatively, negatively, 2 or<br />
interrogatively with a negation . 3 Ex.<br />
Cred' ella ch' egli sia uscito ?<br />
Do you think that he has gone out?<br />
Si spera che egli sia eletto ?<br />
Do <strong>the</strong>y hope that he will be elected ?<br />
Non credo che sia ammalato .<br />
I do not think he is ill.<br />
Non crede che sia arrivato ?<br />
Do you not think he has arrived ?<br />
1 The negation in cases like this is explained on pages 174 <strong>and</strong><br />
175.<br />
725. Notice that " Dimenticare," to forget, " Dissimulare," to<br />
dissimulate, <strong>and</strong> " Ignorare ," to ignore, used negatively, govern a<br />
verb in <strong>the</strong> Indicative, because <strong>the</strong> two negatives (one inherent,<br />
<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r added to <strong>the</strong> verb) amount to an affirmative . Ex.<br />
Non dimentico che mi ha parlato.<br />
I do not forget that he has spoken to me.<br />
Non ignoro ch'ella ha talento .<br />
I am aware that you have talent .<br />
726. 2 Notice that a verb may be used negatively, without being<br />
accompanied by any negative particle . Ex.<br />
È impossible che siamo attaccati in questa posizione .<br />
It is impossible that we should be attacked in this position.<br />
727 3 Notice that a verb may have an interrogative form or be<br />
used interrogatively with a negation, without expressing a real<br />
interrogation, <strong>and</strong>, in that case , it is followed by a verb in <strong>the</strong><br />
Indicative . Ex.<br />
Dimentica che siamo qui per vegliare agl'interressi della<br />
nostra patria ?<br />
Do you forget that we are here to watch over <strong>the</strong> interests of<br />
our country ?<br />
Non crede che è arrivato ?<br />
You do not believe (<strong>the</strong> fact) that he has arrived ?<br />
162 ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.<br />
206
728. Notice that in <strong>many</strong> cases instead of <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive , <strong>the</strong><br />
Present Infinitive may be elegantly employed, so long as <strong>the</strong><br />
sense of <strong>the</strong> sentence remains clear . Ex.<br />
Mi permise di <strong>and</strong>are a vedere l' Abbazia di Westminster . 1<br />
He consented that I should go to see Westminster Abbey.<br />
729. A verb is in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood when it is governed by <strong>the</strong><br />
Impersonal verbs " Sembrare," " Parere," " Essere probabile ," "<br />
Bisognare ," " Essere mestieri ," 2 &c. Ex.<br />
Sembra ch'egli abbia ragione .<br />
It seems that he is in <strong>the</strong> right .<br />
Bisogna che me ne vada subito.<br />
I must go away at once.<br />
730. A verb is used in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood when it is preceded<br />
by one of <strong>the</strong> following conjunctions, <strong>which</strong> imply condition, or<br />
uncertainty :<br />
Perché , |<br />
Affinchè , | so that<br />
Acciochè , | in order that.<br />
Purchè , | provided that,<br />
A patto che, | on condition that.<br />
A condizione che, |<br />
Anzi che, |<br />
Innanziche , | before that.<br />
Prima che, |<br />
Avanti che, |<br />
Dato che, |<br />
Posto che, | supposing that.<br />
Supposto che, |<br />
Posto il caso che, |<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>' anche , | even if.<br />
Solo che, | if but.<br />
Se mai, | if ever .<br />
Nel caso che, | in case that.<br />
Come se, | as if.<br />
A meno che, 3 | unless .<br />
Senza che, | without.<br />
Per tema che, | for fear that,<br />
Checche , | whatever .<br />
207
Per paura che, | lest .<br />
EXAMPLES .<br />
Gli parli prima che egli parta.<br />
Speak before he departs.<br />
Purchè agisca a modo mio.<br />
Provided he acts as I like .<br />
731. "Che," when used instead of " perchè," " affinchè," <strong>and</strong> "<br />
acci ochè ," is followed by a verb in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood. Ex.<br />
Venga che ( affinchè ) parliamo della nostre faccende .<br />
Come so that we may talk about our business .<br />
1 Instead of " Permise ch'io <strong>and</strong>assi a vedere l'Abbazia di<br />
Westminster ."<br />
732. 2 But such Impersonal verbs as " Essere certo," " Essere<br />
evidente," &c., are followed by a verb in <strong>the</strong> Indicative Mood,<br />
because <strong>the</strong> latter expresses an action in a positive manner . Ex.<br />
È certo ch'egli è stato eletto .<br />
It is certain that he has been elected .<br />
733 3 Notice that <strong>the</strong> conjunctions " a meno che," " per tema<br />
che," " per paura che," <strong>and</strong> " che," used instead of " senza che,"<br />
are followed by <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive , preceded by "non." Ex.<br />
A meno che Lei non gli parli, egli non lavorerà mai.<br />
Unless you speak to him he will never work.<br />
Si tenea chiuso in castello , per paura che non<br />
l'attaccassero .<br />
He kept himself shut up in <strong>the</strong> castle , for fear of being<br />
attacked .<br />
Non fa mai viaggio , che non sia ammalato .<br />
He never travels without getting ill.<br />
ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 163<br />
734. As stated in rules 674, 676, 677, <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood is<br />
also used after <strong>the</strong> adverbs " quanto," how much, <strong>and</strong> " per<br />
quanto," or " per," however much. Ex.<br />
L'opera umana , per buona che sia, trova sempre critici .<br />
Human work, be it ever so good, always finds critics .<br />
735. The conjunctions " in maniera che," " in modo che," "<br />
talmente che," in such a manner that, " finchè," " sinchè," " sino<br />
208
a che," " fintantochè ," until (in keeping with THE MAIN RULE),<br />
are followed by a verb in <strong>the</strong> Indicative, when <strong>the</strong> action it<br />
expresses is positive, <strong>and</strong> that is when <strong>the</strong> tense used is past or<br />
present . Ex.<br />
Parlo in maniera che fu udito da tutta l'adunanza.<br />
He spoke in such a manner that he was heard by <strong>the</strong> whole<br />
meeting .<br />
736. But <strong>the</strong> above conjunctions are followed by <strong>the</strong> verb in <strong>the</strong><br />
Subjunctive Mood, when <strong>the</strong> verb does not express a positive<br />
action , <strong>and</strong> that is when it has reference to a future time . Ex.<br />
La prego di parlare in modo tale che sia intesa e capita da<br />
tutta l'assemblea 1 (l'adunanza).<br />
I beg of you to speak in such a manner that you may be<br />
heard <strong>and</strong> <strong>under</strong>stood by <strong>the</strong> whole assembly .<br />
1 Notice that <strong>the</strong> e in ea, etc., has always <strong>the</strong> broad sound of a in<br />
<strong>the</strong> word gate .<br />
737. Notice that in <strong>many</strong> sentences a verb may be in <strong>the</strong><br />
Indicative or in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood, according as <strong>the</strong> action it<br />
expresses is certain or doubtful. Ex.<br />
Andrò in un sito dove sarò quieto .<br />
I shall go to a place where I shall be quiet (I know I shall).<br />
Andrò in un sito ove io sia quieto .<br />
I will go to a place where I shall be quiet (I hope I shall).<br />
Cerco un uomo che sa la lingua Chinese .<br />
I am looking for a man who knows <strong>the</strong> Chinese language (I<br />
know he does).<br />
Cerco un uomo che sappia la lingua Chinese .<br />
I am looking for a man who knows <strong>the</strong> Chinese language (I<br />
hope to find one who knows it).<br />
738. Notice that in <strong>many</strong> sentences it is necessary to supply <strong>the</strong><br />
words left out in <strong>the</strong>m, to appreciate correctly <strong>the</strong> use of <strong>the</strong><br />
Subjunctive . Ex.<br />
Voglia il cielo ch' ella sia felice !<br />
Heaven grant that you may be happy.<br />
Which means : " Bramo che il cielo voglia ch'ella sia felice ! "<br />
739. Notice that in all <strong>the</strong> cases hi<strong>the</strong>rto mentioned, <strong>the</strong> verbs<br />
are logically used in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood because <strong>the</strong>y do not<br />
209
express a positive fact ; but <strong>the</strong> Italians indiscriminately employ<br />
<strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood, also, in <strong>the</strong> following cases :<br />
1 Notice that <strong>the</strong> e in ea &c. , has always <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> a<br />
in <strong>the</strong> word gate .<br />
164 ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.<br />
740. The Italians put a verb in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood, also, when<br />
it is preceded by <strong>the</strong> conjunctions " benchè," 1 " ancorchè ," "<br />
sebbene," " contuttochè," " quantunque ," " avvegnachè," <strong>and</strong> "<br />
nonostantechè ," although. Ex.<br />
Voglio <strong>and</strong>are a ballare, quantunque non mi senta bene .<br />
I want to go to dance, although I do not feel well.<br />
"Italia mia, benchè 'l parlar sia indarno." (PETRARCA).<br />
My Italy, although speaking may be in vain .<br />
741. The verb is put in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood, also, when it is<br />
preceded by <strong>the</strong> indefinite pronoun " niente," nothing, or <strong>the</strong><br />
adjectives "solo," 2 only, " primo," first, " ultimo," last, " unico,"<br />
only one, " pochi " "poche ," few, or any adjective in <strong>the</strong><br />
superlative -relative degree ; as " il più gr<strong>and</strong>e," <strong>the</strong> greatest, " il<br />
migliore ," <strong>the</strong> best, &c., followed by a relative pronoun. Ex.<br />
Non c'è niente che mi spiaccia come l'ipocrisia .<br />
There is nothing I dislike so much as hypocrisy.<br />
Il cane è il solo animale la cui fedeltà sia provata.<br />
The dog is <strong>the</strong> only animal whose fidelity has been proved.<br />
742. But when " solo," " il più gr<strong>and</strong>e," &c., are followed by an<br />
indirect object, <strong>the</strong> verb is used in <strong>the</strong> Indicative . Ex.<br />
Londra è la più gr<strong>and</strong>e delle città che ho vedute .<br />
London is <strong>the</strong> largest of <strong>the</strong> towns I have seen .<br />
EXERCISE LXI.<br />
Do you hope that he will be elected (724) a (354) member of<br />
Parliament ? I wish he may succeed (723) in his <strong>under</strong>taking. It<br />
is possible that I may have been (729) imprudent, but I have not<br />
been criminal. I do not like you to go out (724) with that good-for-<br />
nothing fellow. I do not think you have acted (724, 636) prudently.<br />
I take so much care with (of) your education, in <strong>the</strong> hope that you<br />
will profit (723) by it (240). I do not forget that you have invested<br />
(,725) much capital (681) in that speculation. Tell <strong>the</strong> servant to<br />
210
awake (723, 728) me early to- morrow morning. Stop with me until<br />
I receive (730) assistance , I beg of you.<br />
743. 1 Notice that, according to THE MAIN RULE, as stated at <strong>the</strong><br />
beginning of this lesson, <strong>the</strong> verb <strong>which</strong> follows " benchè," "<br />
ancorchè ," &c., should be used in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood only<br />
when <strong>the</strong> action it expresses is not positive ; so in <strong>the</strong> first<br />
example given above Petrarca rightly uses " essere " in <strong>the</strong><br />
Subjunctive Mood, because its action is not positive, but in <strong>the</strong><br />
second example <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive is illogically used, because <strong>the</strong><br />
verb " sentire" expresses a most positive fact. There are,<br />
however, <strong>many</strong> examples of <strong>the</strong> Indicative Mood being used by <strong>the</strong><br />
best Italian authors, after <strong>the</strong> above -mentioned conjunction. For<br />
instance , Tasso in <strong>the</strong> second canto (stanza xxv.) of <strong>the</strong> "<br />
Gerusalemme Liberata , " says :<br />
" Benchè nè furto è il mio, nè ladra sono."<br />
Although my deed is not a <strong>the</strong>ft, nor am I a thief .<br />
744. 2 The above remark holds good with regard to " solo," " il più<br />
gr<strong>and</strong>e, "&c.<br />
ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 165<br />
RULES FOR THE CONCORD BETWEEN THE TENSES OF THE<br />
GOVERNING VERB AND THE GOVERNED VERB.<br />
745. The use of <strong>the</strong> four tenses of <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood depends<br />
upon <strong>the</strong> tense of <strong>the</strong> governing verb in <strong>the</strong> Indicative Mood.<br />
746. When <strong>the</strong> governing verb is in <strong>the</strong> Present or in <strong>the</strong> Future<br />
(Indicative), <strong>the</strong> governed verb is put in <strong>the</strong> Present of <strong>the</strong><br />
Subjunctive , to express a present or a future action, or state , <strong>and</strong><br />
in <strong>the</strong> Imperfect, or in <strong>the</strong> Past Subjunctive , to express a past<br />
action, or state ; in <strong>the</strong> Imperfect, if <strong>the</strong> action or state is alluded<br />
to as having been incomplete at a past time ; in <strong>the</strong> Past, if it is<br />
alluded to as complete . Ex.<br />
Non credo che Giuseppe lavori adesso.<br />
I do not think that Joseph is working now.<br />
Pagherò ,purchè io abbia danaro.<br />
I will pay, if I have money .<br />
Non credo che lavorasse qu<strong>and</strong>o siamo venuti .<br />
I do not think that he was working when we came .<br />
Dubito che abbia ricevuto la lettera di suo padre.<br />
I doubt whe<strong>the</strong>r he has received his fa<strong>the</strong>r's letter .<br />
211
747. Notice that <strong>the</strong> Imperfect, instead of <strong>the</strong> Present<br />
Subjunctive , <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> Pluperfect, instead of <strong>the</strong> Past Subjunctive<br />
are used when some conditional expression follows <strong>the</strong> verb in<br />
<strong>the</strong> subjunctive . Ex.<br />
Dubito ch' ella studiasse , se non ci fosse costretta .<br />
I doubt that you would study, if you were not compelled to do<br />
so.<br />
748. When <strong>the</strong> governing verb is in one of <strong>the</strong> past tenses<br />
(Indicative), or in <strong>the</strong> Conditional, <strong>the</strong> governed verb is put in <strong>the</strong><br />
Imperfect Subjunctive to express a present action, or state , but in<br />
<strong>the</strong> Pluperfect Subjunctive to express a past action , or state . Ex.<br />
Non sapevo che Carlo dimorasse qui.<br />
I did not know that Charles was living here .<br />
Vorrei ch'ella venisse da me domani.<br />
I wish you would call on me to-morrow.<br />
749. Notice that when <strong>the</strong> governing verb is in <strong>the</strong> Past<br />
Indefinite, followed by " perchè," " affinchè" " benchè," "<br />
quantunque ," &c., <strong>the</strong> governed verb is put in <strong>the</strong> Present<br />
Subjunctive , to express a present , or a future action , or state . Ex.<br />
Vi ho dato il denaro perchè possiate <strong>and</strong>are a vedere i<br />
vostri .<br />
I gave you <strong>the</strong> money so that you may go to see your<br />
friends .<br />
750. Notice finally that when <strong>the</strong> governing verb is in <strong>the</strong> Past<br />
Indefinite, it is customary to use <strong>the</strong> Past, instead of <strong>the</strong><br />
Pluperfect Subjunctive . Ex.<br />
Non ho mai conosciuto un uomo che abbia tanto lavorato.<br />
I have never known a man who has worked so hard.<br />
166 ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD AND " SE."<br />
ON THE CONJUNCTION " SE," IF.<br />
751. When " se " is a real Conditional Conjunction, it is followed<br />
in Italian ei<strong>the</strong>r by a verb in <strong>the</strong> Indicative or in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive<br />
Mood, according to <strong>the</strong> following rules :<br />
752. " Se" is followed by a verb in <strong>the</strong> Present Indicative, if <strong>the</strong><br />
condition refers to a future time , not far off. Ex.<br />
Se mio zio viene ditegli di aspettarmi .<br />
If my uncle comes tell him to wait for me.<br />
212
Se fa bel tempo domani, <strong>and</strong>remo alla campagna .<br />
If it is fine to-morrow, we shall go into <strong>the</strong> country.<br />
753. " Se " is followed by a verb in <strong>the</strong> Future, if <strong>the</strong> condition<br />
refers to a future time , far off. Ex.<br />
Se mi pagheranno alla fine dell'anno, vi darò una ghinea .<br />
If <strong>the</strong>y pay me at <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> year , I will give you a<br />
guinea .<br />
754. " Se " is followed by a verb in <strong>the</strong> Imperfect Subjunctive , if<br />
<strong>the</strong> condition refers to <strong>the</strong> present time . Ex.<br />
Se avessi denaro comprerei questo oriuolo.<br />
If I <strong>had</strong> money I would buy this watch.<br />
Se io fossi in Lei non gli scriverei questa sera .<br />
If I were you I would not write to him this evening<br />
755 " Se " 1 is followed by a verb in <strong>the</strong> Pluperfect Subjunctive , if<br />
<strong>the</strong> condition refers to a time past. Ex.<br />
Se avessi conosciuto le sue intenzioni , non gli avrei<br />
parlato.<br />
Had I known his intentions , I should not have spoken to<br />
him .<br />
756. But when " se" is not a real Conditional Conjunction, when<br />
it means, in fact, whe<strong>the</strong>r, as, or when, it requires after it <strong>the</strong><br />
verb in <strong>the</strong> same mood <strong>and</strong> tense as <strong>the</strong> English conjunction if.<br />
Ex.<br />
Essi non sanno se ritorneremo qui, o no.<br />
They do not know if (whe<strong>the</strong>r ) we shall return here , or not.<br />
Se aveva bisogno di me, era amabilissimo .<br />
If (when ) he needed my help, he was very amiable .<br />
757. A verb is used in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood after " qu<strong>and</strong>o," "<br />
ove," <strong>and</strong> " qualora," when <strong>the</strong>se words are used instead of " se,"<br />
meaning in case that. Ex.<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>o (or ove) le piaccia , <strong>and</strong>remo al teatro questa sera .<br />
If you like we will go to <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>atre this evening .<br />
758. A verb is put in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood after " che " used<br />
instead of repeating " se." Ex.<br />
Se è ricca e che voglia aver amici , sia buona e generosa .<br />
213
If you are rich <strong>and</strong> wish to have friends , be good <strong>and</strong><br />
generous .<br />
759. 1 In poetry, by a turn of <strong>the</strong> phrase, "se," if, is often omitted.<br />
Ex.<br />
" Almeno Tito trovar potessi." (METASTASIO ).<br />
If, at least , I could find Titus .<br />
ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 167<br />
EXERCISE LXII.<br />
Unless you invite (733) him yourself, he will not come . The<br />
elephant never attacks, unless he is provoked. I do not think he<br />
was working (724, 746) when I rang <strong>the</strong> bell. It was necessary<br />
(704) that two of our squadrons 1 should advance (729), <strong>and</strong> force<br />
<strong>the</strong> enemy's line. Learn your lessons for to-morrow, lest your<br />
master punish (733) you. If Mr. John comes (752) before dinner,<br />
tell him to wait for (251, 728) me, until I come back (736). I wish<br />
(718) you would (748) play this piece of music slowly <strong>and</strong> with<br />
expression. 2 He wishes (desiderare ) that I should reflect (723) on<br />
that proposal. I wrote (707) to him by post, so that (730) he might<br />
learn <strong>the</strong> news in time . That man has given me a fearful blow<br />
with a stick. 3 If (754) I <strong>had</strong> some paper, I would write to him.<br />
Whatever he <strong>under</strong>takes (730) to do, he does it diligently. Your<br />
fa<strong>the</strong>r will pay all your debts, on condition that (730) you will<br />
execute his orders faithfully. I do not know where little William is<br />
(724). There are few men whose character is (741) better known<br />
(365) than his. It is <strong>the</strong> most interesting book I ever read (741).<br />
However ingenious <strong>the</strong> Greeks <strong>and</strong> Romans were (734), still <strong>the</strong>y<br />
did not discover <strong>the</strong> art of printing books. It seems as if (che)<br />
nothing could (729, 746) save him. I find it 4 difficult to learn<br />
poetry by heart (imparare a mente ).<br />
760. 1 A squadron (of cavalry ), is translated by " uno squadrone."<br />
A squadron (of ships), is translated by "una squadra."<br />
761. 2 " Adagio " is <strong>the</strong> technical expression for slow <strong>and</strong> with<br />
expression .<br />
Ad libitum — at <strong>the</strong> performer's pleasure .<br />
Affettuoso — with tenderness .<br />
Al segno — return to <strong>the</strong> sign .<br />
Allegretto — not so quick as Allegro.<br />
Allegro — quick , lively .<br />
Amoroso — -softty, tenderly .<br />
214
Andante — .slow; <strong>and</strong> distinct .<br />
Andantino — not so slow as Andante .<br />
Bis — twice .<br />
Cal<strong>and</strong>o — gradually slower <strong>and</strong> softer.<br />
Con brio — with spirit <strong>and</strong> brilliancy .<br />
Crescendo — gradually louder.<br />
Da capo — repeat from <strong>the</strong> beginning .<br />
Decrescendo or Diminuendo — gradually softer<br />
Dolce — soft ; dolcissimo — very soft<br />
Forte — loud ; fortissimo — very loud.<br />
Gorgheggi — trills<br />
Legato — smoothly.<br />
Maestoso — majestic .<br />
Moderato — moderately quick .<br />
Piano — soft ; pianissimo — very soft.<br />
Presto — quick , prestissimo — very quick .<br />
Sostenuto — sustain <strong>the</strong> sound.<br />
Vivace or Con vivacità — with vivacity .<br />
Volti subito — turn over quickly .<br />
762. 3 The suffix " ata " signifies a blow from , &c. ; hence " una<br />
bastonata," means a blow from a stick, "una boccata," a mouthful,<br />
or a bite, " un'occhiata ," a glance of <strong>the</strong> eye.<br />
763. 4 The pronoun it is not translated into Italian in sentences<br />
like this .<br />
168 ON THE FORM AND USE OF PASSIVE VERBS.<br />
LESSON XXXIII.<br />
ON THE FORM AND USE OF PASSIVE VERBS.<br />
764. There are three ways of expressing <strong>the</strong> Passive Form of<br />
verbs, in Italian .<br />
765. The first way is to use <strong>the</strong> verb " Essere " as an auxiliary,<br />
followed by <strong>the</strong> Past Participle of any active transitive verb. Ex.<br />
Egli è stimato da tutti.<br />
He is esteemed by everybody.<br />
Ed io dico che gli Egiziani furono sconfitti dai Francesi alla<br />
battaglia delle Piramidi .<br />
And I say that <strong>the</strong> Egyptians were defeated by <strong>the</strong> French at<br />
<strong>the</strong> battle of <strong>the</strong> Pyramids .<br />
215
766. A verb is rendered passive in <strong>the</strong> way indicated above only<br />
when one desires to lay a stress on <strong>the</strong> result of <strong>the</strong> action .<br />
767. Many English sentences are best rendered into Italian by<br />
giving <strong>the</strong>m an active turn, <strong>and</strong> this is done by changing <strong>the</strong><br />
indirect object in <strong>the</strong> sentence into <strong>the</strong> subject, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> subject<br />
into <strong>the</strong> direct object Ex.<br />
Ognuno desidera le ricche<strong>zz</strong>e .<br />
Riches are desired by everybody.<br />
La sua cattiva condotta mi ruinò<br />
I was ruined by his bad conduct.<br />
Gli fecero regalo di un anello .<br />
They presented him with a ring .<br />
I Francesi sconfissero gli Egiziani alla battaglia delle<br />
Piramidi .<br />
The Egyptians were defeated by <strong>the</strong> French at <strong>the</strong> battle of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Pyramids .<br />
768. The second way is by using <strong>the</strong> verb " Venire ," 1 instead of "<br />
Essere " as an auxiliary . Ex.<br />
Venni chiamato agli esami .<br />
I was called to <strong>the</strong> examination .<br />
Vennero dichiarati innocenti .<br />
They were declared innocent .<br />
Sono sicuro che verrà eletto deputato.<br />
I am sure he will be elected a deputy.<br />
769. 1 Notice that <strong>the</strong> verb "Venire " is used instead of " Essere "<br />
only in <strong>the</strong> simple tenses of passive verbs ; for instance , it would<br />
be wrong to say, " Erano venuti dichiarati innocenti." They <strong>had</strong><br />
been declared innocent. The right form is " Erano stati dichiarati<br />
innocenti ."<br />
770. The verb "<strong>and</strong>are " is also used in some cases instead of "<br />
essere " in <strong>the</strong> passive forms of verbs. Ex.<br />
La cosa va fatta così.<br />
The thing is done in this way.<br />
Il vero merito va sempre congiunto alla modestia .<br />
True merit is always accompanied by modesty.<br />
ON THE FORM AND USE OF PASSIVE VERBS. 169<br />
216
771. The third way of forming a Passive Verb <strong>the</strong> way most<br />
congenial to <strong>the</strong> Italian language is to employ <strong>the</strong> word " si," 1<br />
followed by a verb in <strong>the</strong> third person singular, or plural,<br />
according as <strong>the</strong> noun in <strong>the</strong> sentence is in <strong>the</strong> singular, or<br />
plural. Ex.<br />
Si dice che la Regina partirà domani .<br />
It is said that <strong>the</strong> Queen will depart to-morrow.<br />
Il buon vino si vende a caro pre<strong>zz</strong>o in Inghilterra .<br />
Good wine is sold very dear in Engl<strong>and</strong>.<br />
I libri si stampano a buon mercato in Germania .<br />
Books are printed cheaply in Ger<strong>many</strong> .<br />
Vi si parlano tutte le lingue europee .<br />
All <strong>the</strong> European languages are spoken <strong>the</strong>re .<br />
Se ne parla dapertutto.<br />
It is talked of everywhere .<br />
772. The expressions, I am asked, He is promised, They are<br />
ordered, &c., are translated by " Mi si 2 dice," or " Mi si dom<strong>and</strong>a,"<br />
" Gli si promette ," " Si Com<strong>and</strong>ò loro," &c. Ex.<br />
Mi si disse di parlare .<br />
I was told to speak .<br />
Si permise loro di uscire .<br />
They were allowed to go out.<br />
773. Sometimes, <strong>and</strong> more especially when <strong>the</strong> verb is in <strong>the</strong><br />
reflective form , " l'uomo," " uno," " alcuni," or "la gente ," is used,<br />
instead of " si," before <strong>the</strong> verb. Ex.<br />
Uno si avve<strong>zz</strong>a facilmente alla pigrizia .<br />
We easily accustom ourselves to idleness .<br />
774. Whenever "si "would cause any ambiguity in <strong>the</strong> sense of<br />
<strong>the</strong> phrase, <strong>the</strong> passive verb must be formed with "essere," or "<br />
venire ," as explained above. Ex.<br />
Gli uomini virtuosi sono ammirati (not |<br />
si ammirano , <strong>which</strong> might mean <strong>the</strong>y |Wise men are admired .<br />
admire <strong>the</strong>mselves) |<br />
775. 1 Notice that <strong>the</strong> word "si," <strong>which</strong> translates <strong>the</strong> English<br />
words one, <strong>the</strong>y, we, people , has all <strong>the</strong> appearance of always<br />
being an indefinite pronoun, <strong>the</strong> same as <strong>the</strong> French word " on,"<br />
but it is not so ; <strong>the</strong> proof of this assertion is that <strong>the</strong> verb used<br />
217
with " si " must agree in number with <strong>the</strong> noun in <strong>the</strong> sentence .<br />
Nor is " si," as it has often been wrongly stated, a mere reflective<br />
pronoun ; for it would be a very weak way of expressing, to say, for<br />
instance , It says itself that <strong>the</strong> Queen will start to- morrow. " Si<br />
dice che la Regina, &c.," " I libri si stampano, &c.," are really<br />
passive sentences, in <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong> word "uomo" (<strong>which</strong> does <strong>the</strong><br />
action expressed by <strong>the</strong> verb) is <strong>under</strong>stood ; thus " Si dice (dall'<br />
uomo) che la Regina partirà domani."<br />
" I libri si stampano (dall' uomo) a buon mercato in Germania."<br />
This shows that verbs in <strong>the</strong> passive form are used nearly as<br />
often in Italian as in English.<br />
776.2 In this case , when " si " is used with an indirect<br />
complement (see rule 196), it is an indefinite pronoun, like <strong>the</strong><br />
French word " on."<br />
170 ON THE FORM AND USE OF PASSIVE VERBS.<br />
EXERCISE LXIII.<br />
He is greatly loved (765) by (270) his parents. He has been long<br />
considered (714, 765) <strong>the</strong> best poet of <strong>the</strong> age. They were ordered<br />
(772) to keep <strong>the</strong>mselves ready, in case of a sudden attack. The<br />
Austrians were defeated (767) by <strong>the</strong> Prussians at <strong>the</strong> battle of<br />
Sadowa. We went (699, 704) w<strong>and</strong>ering all night through <strong>the</strong><br />
forest. It is generally believed (771) that Rome was founded (723,<br />
765) by Romulus, though <strong>the</strong>re are no proofs in support of <strong>the</strong><br />
tradition. Is it true that your cousin John has married (727) a<br />
Spanish lady ? I think so (271) ; <strong>the</strong>y speak of it (771) everywhere<br />
in town. I have heard 1 <strong>the</strong> report of a gun. I am requested (772)<br />
to tell you not to go away without leave. They were allowed (772)<br />
to enter <strong>the</strong> church after Divine Service. These pictures have<br />
been admired (765), but I am sure (636) <strong>the</strong>y will not be sold (771).<br />
It is reported 2 that he will be made (769) Minister for Foreign<br />
Affairs. I have heard it said 3 that lions can be trained (771) to<br />
perform like dogs. I have not heard from 4 my bro<strong>the</strong>r-in-law<br />
since <strong>the</strong> 15th (546) of January. At country fairs 5 one sees very<br />
curious people . 6 It is said (771) that popular songs reveal (723)<br />
<strong>the</strong> character of a people . They were advised (767) by <strong>the</strong> judge to<br />
confess <strong>the</strong>ir crime. The barbarous sport of <strong>the</strong> bull fight was<br />
introduced (765) into Spain by <strong>the</strong> Arabs, amongst whom it was<br />
celebrated (771) with great pomp. They were promised (772) two<br />
pounds each (659).<br />
218
777. 1 To hear is translated into Italian ei<strong>the</strong>r by " Udire," or by "<br />
Sentire ." Ex.<br />
Ho udito / sentito la voce di mio fratello .<br />
I have heard my bro<strong>the</strong>r's voice .<br />
778. " Sentire " means also to feel . Ex.<br />
" Non mi sento bene ."<br />
I do not feel well.<br />
779. 2 It is said that, it is reported that, people will have it that,<br />
are elegantly translated into " corre la voce che," " corre fama<br />
che," "si vuole che."<br />
780. 3 I have heard it said that, is translated into " ho sentito dire<br />
che."<br />
781. 4 To hear from , in <strong>the</strong> sense of to receive news from , is<br />
translated into " ricevere lettere da," " ricevere notizie da."<br />
782. 5 A fair, meaning a market, is translated into Italian by<br />
"una fiera ."<br />
A fair lady, is translated by " una bella signora ."<br />
A fair complexion , is translated by " una carnagione<br />
bianca."<br />
A fair price , is translated by " un pre<strong>zz</strong>o giusto."<br />
783. 6 The people , meaning <strong>the</strong> inhabitants of a country, is<br />
translated by " il popolo." (21). People , meaning persons, is<br />
translated by "la gente ." Ex.<br />
" È che gent'è che par nel duol si vinta ?" (Dante ).<br />
What folk is this <strong>which</strong> seems by pain so vanquished ?<br />
ON " VOLERE," " DOVERE," " POTERE," AND " SAPERE."171<br />
LESSON XXXIV.<br />
ON "VOLERE," "DOVERE," "POTERE," AND " SAPERE."<br />
784. When do, did, will, shall, would, should, may, might, can,<br />
could, <strong>and</strong> let, are employed as auxiliary verbs, <strong>the</strong>y are not<br />
translated into Italian ; but when <strong>the</strong>y are used as distinct verbs<br />
of <strong>the</strong>m -selves , each of <strong>the</strong>m has its corresponding Italian verb.<br />
785. When do <strong>and</strong> did are not mere auxiliaries, <strong>the</strong>y are<br />
translated by " Fare ." Ex.<br />
Io 1 fatto il mio lavoro.<br />
I have done my work.<br />
219
786. When will, would, <strong>and</strong> shall are not mere auxiliaries, <strong>the</strong>y<br />
are translated by " Volere" or " Dovere," according as will or duty<br />
is to be expressed . Ex.<br />
Voglio parlargli io stesso .<br />
I will speak to him myself ,<br />
Dovrà lavorare .<br />
He shall (he will have to) work.<br />
Voleva sempre parlare .<br />
He would always speak ,<br />
787. The expressions will you have ? will he have ? &c., meaning<br />
do you wish? do you like? or do you choose to have? &c., are<br />
translated by <strong>the</strong> corresponding tenses of <strong>the</strong> verb " Volere ." Ex.<br />
Vuole un biglietto per il concerto di mia sorella ?<br />
Would you like to have a ticket for my sister's concert ?<br />
Quale vuole dei due ?<br />
Which do you choose of <strong>the</strong> two ?<br />
788. The expressions will you have <strong>the</strong> kindness ? will you have<br />
<strong>the</strong> goodness ? will you do me <strong>the</strong> favour to ? are translated into<br />
Italian by " Vuol'avere la bontà di," or " Vuol farmi il piacere di."<br />
Ex.<br />
Vuol' avere la bontà di tradurmi questa lettera in italiano ?<br />
Will you have <strong>the</strong> kindness to translate this letter into<br />
Italian for me ?<br />
789. The expressions I will have him, you would have me, I want<br />
him, are translated into Italian by " volere," followed by "che," <strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> verb in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood. Ex.<br />
voglio che stia a casa finche sia guarito .<br />
I will have him stay at home until he is quite well.<br />
vorrebbe che lavorassimo dalla mattina alla sera .<br />
He would have us work from morning till night .<br />
1 An o, dotted thus o, has <strong>the</strong> broad sound of <strong>the</strong> o in <strong>the</strong> word<br />
orphan.<br />
172 ON "VOLERE," " DOVERE," " POTERE," AND " SAPERE."<br />
790. The verb to have to (to be obliged to, to think it right to), is<br />
translated into Italian by " Dovere ." Ex.<br />
Debbo essere al mio posto a me<strong>zz</strong>ogiorno. 1<br />
220
I am to be at my post at noon.<br />
791. The verbs I ought, you ought, I ought to have, &c., I should,<br />
you should, I should have, &c., are also translated by <strong>the</strong><br />
Conditional , or <strong>the</strong> Conditional Past, of " Dovere ." Ex.<br />
Dovrei <strong>and</strong>are da mio cognato.<br />
I ought to call on my bro<strong>the</strong>r-in-law.<br />
Dovrebbe scrivere a suo padre.<br />
You ought to write to your fa<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
Avrebbero dovuto pagarmi prima di lasciar Londra.<br />
They ought to have paid me before <strong>the</strong>y left London.<br />
792. The verb I must, you must, &c. (I am expected to, I am to,<br />
&c.), is also translated by " Dovere ." Ex.<br />
Debbo parlare al presidente del comitato .<br />
I must speak to <strong>the</strong> chairman of <strong>the</strong> committee .<br />
793. The verb " Dovere " is sometimes used to express probability<br />
that <strong>the</strong> action expressed by <strong>the</strong> chief verb in <strong>the</strong> sentence will<br />
happen (is expected). Ex.<br />
Il mio viaggio deve durare cinque giorni .<br />
My journey is to last five days.<br />
Si sapeva che doveva un giorno governare la Francia .<br />
It was known that he was likely one day to govern France .<br />
794. When <strong>the</strong> verbs can <strong>and</strong> could, may <strong>and</strong> might, are not mere<br />
auxiliaries , <strong>the</strong>y are translated by " Potere ." Ex.<br />
Posso rendervi questo servizio .<br />
I can render you this service .<br />
Potrei <strong>and</strong>are a Parigi .<br />
I could go to Paris .<br />
Potete venir meco .<br />
You may come with me.<br />
Avreste potuto venir prima d'ora.<br />
You might have come before now.<br />
795. When can <strong>and</strong> could are used in <strong>the</strong> sense of to know how,<br />
<strong>the</strong>y are translated into Italian by " Sapere ." Ex.<br />
Sa ella parlar francese ?<br />
Can you speak French ?<br />
Sapeva disegnare , ma non sapeva dipingere .<br />
221
He could draw, but he could not paint.<br />
Sapreste insegnarmi la via che conduce al ponte di Londra<br />
?<br />
Could you tell me <strong>the</strong> way to London Bridge ?<br />
796. When to let is a verb by itself it is translated by " Lasciare ."<br />
Ex.<br />
Lasciatemi <strong>and</strong>ar fuori.<br />
Let me go out.<br />
1 Two <strong>zz</strong>, dotted thus <strong>zz</strong>, have <strong>the</strong> soft sound of <strong>the</strong> <strong>zz</strong> in <strong>the</strong> word<br />
mu<strong>zz</strong>le (52, 53).<br />
ON " VOLERE," "DOVERE," ETC., AND THE NEGATION. 173<br />
EXERCISE LXIV.<br />
I would like (718, 786) to speak to you on (298) a matter of<br />
importance . They are to be (790) here this afternoon at three<br />
o'clock. I ought to (791) write to my mo<strong>the</strong>r. My essay must be<br />
(792) ready for <strong>the</strong> next issue of <strong>the</strong> magazine . Will you have (787)<br />
a steel pen, or a quill ? I prefer a quill, if you have one (144). Will<br />
you be so good as (788) to tell me where you buy your gloves ?<br />
With <strong>the</strong> greatest (520) pleasure; I buy <strong>the</strong>m at Johnstone's (434).<br />
Our cousin Charles is expected (793) to visit us to-morrow, or <strong>the</strong><br />
day after to- morrow. The Queen is expected (793) to leave London<br />
this week. We should (791) encourage <strong>the</strong> beautiful, (336)<br />
because <strong>the</strong> useful is sure to be sought after. They say (771) that<br />
<strong>the</strong> procession is (792) to pass through Piccadilly. It ought to have<br />
passed (791) through Oxford Street. Am I to do (792) all this work<br />
for nothing ? No, you will be paid. She is to write (792) to him<br />
three times a (<strong>the</strong>) week. Will you go (305) with me, or not ? I<br />
want you (789) to make up your mind. 1 I am sorry, but I <strong>cannot</strong> ;<br />
I have to be at my fa<strong>the</strong>r's office before five o'clock (548). You<br />
should have told me (786) that last night ; I could have asked<br />
Charles to come . Do not let (796) him bring those (594) flowers in<br />
your bedroom (431).<br />
LESSON XXXV.<br />
ON THE NEGATION.<br />
797. The Italian negatives are " No," " Non," " Nè."<br />
798. " No " has <strong>the</strong> same meaning in Italian as in English.<br />
799. " non " means not, <strong>and</strong> always precedes <strong>the</strong> verb. Ex.<br />
Egli non parla bene .<br />
222
He does not speak well.<br />
800. "Nè...nè" mean nei<strong>the</strong>r. ..nor, <strong>and</strong> are used when <strong>the</strong>re is no<br />
verb before nei<strong>the</strong>r ... nor. Ex.<br />
Nè leggo, nè scrivo .<br />
I nei<strong>the</strong>r read nor write .<br />
801. But when <strong>the</strong>re is a verb before nei<strong>the</strong>r... nor, <strong>the</strong>y are<br />
translated by " non...nè...nè." (See rule 667). Ex.<br />
Non ha nè danaro nè amici .<br />
He has nei<strong>the</strong>r money nor friends .<br />
802. "non...che," "n on...altro che," mean nothing but, only. Ex.<br />
Paolo non fa che parlare .<br />
Paul does nothing but talk.<br />
Non avevo che un cavallo.<br />
I <strong>had</strong> but one horse .<br />
803. 1 The expression to make up one's mind is translated into<br />
Italian by " prendere il suo partito." Ex.<br />
Ha preso il suo partito.<br />
He has made up his mind.<br />
174 ON THE NEGATION.<br />
804. "No, mai " <strong>and</strong> " non...mai" (in answer to a question), mean<br />
never . Ex.<br />
L'ha mai veduto ? No, mai.<br />
Have you ever seen him? Never .<br />
Non l'io mai veduto.<br />
I have never seen him.<br />
805. The words " mica," " punto," " neppure ," <strong>and</strong> " già," add<br />
strength to <strong>the</strong> negation " non." Ex.<br />
Non io mica danaro.<br />
I have no money at all.<br />
Non credo punto quel che dice.<br />
I do not believe a word that he says.<br />
non ho neppure un soldo.<br />
I have not even a half-penny,<br />
crediate già ch'io voglia sapere i vostri affari .<br />
You must not think that I care to know your affairs .<br />
223
806. The negation " non " is always required after <strong>the</strong> verbs "<br />
impedire," to prevent, " evitare," to avoid, " badare" (followed by a<br />
verb in <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive Mood), mind lest, " guardarsi di," to<br />
beware of. Ex.<br />
La neve impedi che n on venisse .<br />
The snow prevented his coming .<br />
Badi 1 che il cane non le scappi.<br />
Mind <strong>the</strong> dog does not escape you.<br />
Gli dica che si guardi di non credere la notizia .<br />
Tell him to beware of believing <strong>the</strong> news .<br />
807. The negation " non " is always required after <strong>the</strong> compound<br />
conjunctions " a meno che," unless, " per paura che," " per tema<br />
che," for fear that, lest, <strong>and</strong> " che," used instead of " senza che."<br />
Ex.<br />
Verrà per certo, a meno che n on sia partito.<br />
He will certainly come unless he has departed.<br />
Me ne vado per paura che n on m'insulti .<br />
I go away for fear that he should insult me.<br />
808. The verbs "temere" <strong>and</strong> " aver paura," to fear, to apprehend,<br />
require after <strong>the</strong>m <strong>the</strong> negation " non " when <strong>the</strong>y are used<br />
affirmatively, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> realisation of <strong>the</strong> action expressed by <strong>the</strong><br />
verbs <strong>the</strong>y govern is feared . Ex.<br />
Temo 2 che Carlo non venga .<br />
I fear that Charles will come .<br />
" E temo che non sia già sì smarrito ." (Dante ).<br />
And I fear that he is already so far bewildered .<br />
809. 1 Observe that "bada che," " badi che," <strong>and</strong> " badate che,"<br />
followed by a verb in <strong>the</strong> Indicative Mood, means notice that. Ex.<br />
Badate che non ha fatto il suo dovere .<br />
Notice that he has not done his duty.<br />
810. 2 The use of <strong>the</strong> negation in all <strong>the</strong> cases mentioned in this<br />
lesson can be justified on <strong>the</strong> ground that <strong>the</strong> "non " does not<br />
negative <strong>the</strong> verb expressed, but a verb left out ( because of <strong>the</strong><br />
excited state of <strong>the</strong> mind <strong>under</strong> fear, &c.), whose meaning is <strong>the</strong><br />
reverse of <strong>the</strong> meaning of <strong>the</strong> verb expressed. For instance , in<br />
<strong>the</strong> example cited above , " Temo che Carlo non venga," <strong>the</strong> full<br />
meaning of <strong>the</strong> sentence is<br />
224
" Temo che Carlo non (rimanga dov'è, ma che) venga ,"<br />
I fear that Charles will not remain -where he is, but that he<br />
will come .<br />
ON THE NEGATION. 175<br />
811. The verbs " temere," <strong>and</strong> " aver paura," to fear, to apprehend<br />
require "non...mica" " non...punto " when <strong>the</strong>y are used<br />
affirmatively, <strong>and</strong> we fear <strong>the</strong> non-realisation of <strong>the</strong> action<br />
expressed by <strong>the</strong> verbs <strong>the</strong>y govern . Ex.<br />
Temo ch' ei non venga mica .<br />
I fear that he will not come .<br />
812. But when "temere," <strong>and</strong> " aver paura," are used negatively,<br />
<strong>the</strong>y do not require <strong>the</strong> negative after <strong>the</strong>m . Ex.<br />
Non temo che vengano .<br />
I do not fear <strong>the</strong>y will come .<br />
813. The negation " non " is also required after <strong>the</strong> noun "altro,"<br />
ano<strong>the</strong>r thing, <strong>the</strong> adjectives " migliore," better, " peggiore,"<br />
worse, " più gr<strong>and</strong>e," greater, &c., <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> adverbs " altrimenti,"<br />
o<strong>the</strong>rwise , " meglio," better, " peggio," worse, " meno," less, <strong>and</strong> "<br />
più," more , when <strong>the</strong> verb <strong>which</strong> precedes <strong>the</strong>m is used<br />
affirmatively . Ex.<br />
Questo terreno è migliore ch'io non lo credev o- .<br />
This soil is better than I thought<br />
Egli era più ricco che voi non siete .<br />
He was richer than you are now.<br />
Parlano altrimenti che non agiscono .<br />
They speak o<strong>the</strong>rwise than <strong>the</strong>y act.<br />
814. But when <strong>the</strong> verbs preceding <strong>the</strong> above -mentioned<br />
adjectives <strong>and</strong> adverbs are used negatively, no negative is<br />
required after <strong>the</strong>m . Ex.<br />
Non parlano altrimenti che agiscono .<br />
They do not speak o<strong>the</strong>rwise than <strong>the</strong>y act.<br />
815. Many authors put <strong>the</strong> negation "non" after <strong>the</strong> verbs "<br />
negare," to deny, <strong>and</strong> " dubitare ," to doubt, when <strong>the</strong>y are used<br />
negatively , or interrogatively with a negation . Ex.<br />
Non nego che non 1 sia un uomo abile .<br />
I do not deny his being an able man.<br />
EXERCISE LXV.<br />
225
Can (795) that boy write ? No, he can nei<strong>the</strong>r (801) write nor read.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r has (802) only one horse , but it is a good one. They<br />
could (794) not deny <strong>the</strong> accusation we brought against <strong>the</strong>m.<br />
Mind (806) <strong>the</strong>y do not come here ; if (752) <strong>the</strong>y do, I shall never<br />
come to see you again. 2 I recognised him, although (740) I <strong>had</strong><br />
never (804) seen him before. He can (802) only do ma<strong>the</strong>matics<br />
(419). It was <strong>the</strong>y who prevented us from writing (to write.) Unless<br />
you speak to <strong>the</strong>m, <strong>the</strong>y will always prevent us coming. I<br />
apprehend (808) that he will succeed ; I wish (748) he would not. 3<br />
I do not deny (815) his being extremely clever, but he is too<br />
conceited. I am afraid (808) that Frederick will not succeed (258) ;<br />
I wish he would. 3 I have no fear (812) of her speaking .<br />
816. 1 It would be very difficult to justify <strong>the</strong> negation in such<br />
cases as this .<br />
817. 2 Any more , never (verb) again, are translated into " non<br />
(verb) più."<br />
3 Add succeed .<br />
ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 176<br />
LESSON XXXVI.<br />
ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE.<br />
818. The Past Participle is a word <strong>which</strong> partakes of <strong>the</strong> nature of<br />
a verb <strong>and</strong> an adjective ; it is conjugated ei<strong>the</strong>r with " Avere ," 1 or<br />
" Essere ," 2 used as auxiliaries. When a Participle is conjugated<br />
with "Avere ," it is a verb; but when it is conjugated with " Essere ,"<br />
it may be regarded as an adjective .<br />
819. The following rules are adhered to by most Italians at <strong>the</strong><br />
present time .<br />
ON THE PARTICIPLE PRECEDED BY "AVERE."<br />
820. The Past Participle of an Active Transitive verb (see rule<br />
159) is conjugated with " Avere ," <strong>and</strong> remains invariable, that is<br />
to say ends in o, when <strong>the</strong> Direct Object (see rule 195) in <strong>the</strong><br />
sentence follows it. 3 Ex.<br />
Abbiamo comprato tre libri.<br />
We have bought three books.<br />
821. But when <strong>the</strong> Direct Object precedes <strong>the</strong> Past Participle, <strong>the</strong><br />
latter is variable . Ex.<br />
Ecco qui i libri che ho comprati questa mattina .<br />
226
Here are <strong>the</strong> books I bought this morning .<br />
Li ho comprati a buon mercato .<br />
I bought <strong>the</strong>m cheap.<br />
Le io vedute ballare.<br />
I have seen <strong>the</strong>m dancing.<br />
Ho scritto a mia madre , e l' ho pregata di venir qui.<br />
I have written to my mo<strong>the</strong>r , <strong>and</strong> asked her to come here .<br />
822. The Past Participles " potuto," " creduto," " dovuto," <strong>and</strong> "<br />
desiderato," are often invariable because <strong>the</strong> Direct Object in <strong>the</strong><br />
sentence , <strong>which</strong> ought to follow <strong>the</strong>m , is left <strong>under</strong>stood. Ex.<br />
Gli ho reso tutti i servizi che ho potuto (rendergli ).<br />
I did him all <strong>the</strong> services I was able to.<br />
823. 1 All <strong>the</strong> Active Verbs both Transitive <strong>and</strong> Intransitive (see<br />
rules 159 <strong>and</strong> 160) <strong>and</strong> most Neuter verbs (see rule 274), are<br />
conjugated with "Avere ."<br />
824. 2 " Essere " is used to form <strong>the</strong> compound tenses (a) of<br />
Passive Verb (see rule 765) (b) of eighteen Neuter Verbs, (see rule<br />
275) (c) of Reflective Verbs (see rule 280).<br />
825. 3 There are cases when <strong>the</strong> Past Participle, conjugated with<br />
" Avere ," does not express an action, but expresses a quality of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Object in <strong>the</strong> sentence ; when this is <strong>the</strong> case <strong>the</strong> Participle<br />
agrees with <strong>the</strong> noun it qualifies . Ex.<br />
" Un altro, che forata avea la gola." (Dante ).<br />
Ano<strong>the</strong>r one, who <strong>had</strong> his throat pierced through.<br />
ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 177<br />
826. The Past Participle of Active Intransitive Verbs (see rule<br />
160) always remains invariable . Ex.<br />
Ci hanno parlato stamattina .<br />
They spoke to us this morning .<br />
827. The Past Participle of most Neuter Verbs is preceded by "<br />
Avere " (see rule 274), <strong>and</strong> remains invariable . Ex.<br />
Abbiamo passeggiato tutta la mattina .<br />
We have been walking about all <strong>the</strong> morning .<br />
828. With regard to <strong>the</strong> Impersonal Verbs, <strong>the</strong> Past Participle of<br />
those <strong>which</strong>, like " Piovere," 1 can be conjugated ei<strong>the</strong>r with "<br />
227
Essere " or " Avere " (see rule 283), always remains invariable.<br />
Ex.,<br />
È / ha piovuto tutta la notte.<br />
It rained all night .<br />
829. But <strong>the</strong> Past Participle of those Impersonal Verbs <strong>which</strong> are<br />
conjugated like " Bastare " (see rule 283), <strong>and</strong> have " Essere " for<br />
an auxiliary , is variable . Ex.<br />
I suoi libri gli sono bastati.<br />
His books have been sufficient for him.<br />
ON THE PARTICIPLE PRECEDED BY "ESSERE ."<br />
830. The Participle conjugated with " Essere " (or " Venire ," (see<br />
rule 768) always agrees with <strong>the</strong> Subject in <strong>the</strong> sentence ,<br />
whe<strong>the</strong>r it belongs to an active verb, used passively, or to one of<br />
<strong>the</strong> eighteen neuter verbs conjugated with " Essere ," as explained<br />
in rule 275. Ex.<br />
Ella è stimata da tutti.<br />
She is esteemed by everybody.<br />
Essi sono caduti nella rete .<br />
They have fallen into <strong>the</strong> trap.<br />
831. Notice that sometimes <strong>the</strong> auxiliary is not expressed, but<br />
<strong>under</strong>stood, in that case <strong>the</strong> ellipsis must be supplied, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>n<br />
<strong>the</strong> participle will be found to follow <strong>the</strong> rules given above. Ex.<br />
Oh! quante case (sono state ) distrutte !<br />
Oh! how <strong>many</strong> houses (have been ) destroyed !<br />
Le battaglie (che sono state ) vinte dagl' Inglesi .<br />
The battles (<strong>which</strong> have been ) won by <strong>the</strong> English.<br />
832. Instead of " Qu<strong>and</strong>' ebbi veduto," when, or as soon as I <strong>had</strong><br />
seen, " Qu<strong>and</strong>' ebbe sentito," when, or as soon as he <strong>had</strong> heard, "<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>o fui arrivato," when, or as soon as I <strong>had</strong> arrived, " Qu<strong>and</strong>o<br />
fu scoperto," when, or as soon as he was discovered, &c., <strong>the</strong> more<br />
elegant expressions " Veduto che ebbe," " Sentito che ebbe," "<br />
Arrivato che fu," " Scoperti che furono," &c., are used. Ex.<br />
Veduto che ebbi il pala<strong>zz</strong>o, mi venne l'idea di comprarlo.<br />
As soon as I saw <strong>the</strong> palace, I <strong>had</strong> <strong>the</strong> idea of buying it.<br />
1 See rule 63, to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> meaning of <strong>the</strong> letters in <strong>the</strong><br />
darker type.<br />
178 ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE.<br />
228
833. In <strong>the</strong> following cases, <strong>and</strong> in scores of a similar nature, <strong>the</strong><br />
Past Participle in Italian is illogically inflected for <strong>the</strong> sake of<br />
euphony :<br />
Egli ci ha m<strong>and</strong>ati 1 a cercare .<br />
He sent for us.<br />
Questi quadri mi vanno a genio li io veduti 2 dipingere .<br />
I like <strong>the</strong>se pictures very much ; I saw <strong>the</strong>m being painted.<br />
Figliuoli , vi siete dimenticate 3 le mie parole.<br />
Children , you have forgotten my words.<br />
Non mi date più fragole ; ne ho mangiate 4 abbastanza.<br />
Do not give me any more strawberries ; I have eaten<br />
enough .<br />
EXERCISE LXVI.<br />
Have you finished (820) <strong>the</strong> letter (636) I gave you to (310) write ?<br />
The heavy rains, <strong>which</strong> we <strong>had</strong> (704) in <strong>the</strong> spring, have been <strong>the</strong><br />
cause of <strong>many</strong> diseases. We have not slept (827) for <strong>the</strong> last forty-<br />
eight hours. The painter Caracci having been pl<strong>under</strong>ed by some<br />
robbers, drew <strong>the</strong>ir likenesses so well that <strong>the</strong>y were discovered<br />
(704, 830). The hostile army being routed (689), <strong>the</strong>ir camp<br />
pl<strong>under</strong>ed, <strong>the</strong>ir baggage carried away, <strong>the</strong>ir ammunition taken,<br />
<strong>the</strong> French re-entered triumphant. A noble but confused thought<br />
is a diamond covered with (831, 348) dust. The high mountains of<br />
(330) Switzerl<strong>and</strong> are always covered with snow <strong>and</strong> ice. King<br />
Harold <strong>and</strong> his two bro<strong>the</strong>rs were killed (704, 830) at <strong>the</strong> battle of<br />
Hastings. Demetrius, on hearing 5 that <strong>the</strong> A<strong>the</strong>nians <strong>had</strong><br />
overturned (833) his statues, remarked, " They have not<br />
overturned <strong>the</strong> virtues <strong>which</strong> erected (821) <strong>the</strong>m to me." (218).<br />
Look , I have bought this box (680) to put my clo<strong>the</strong>s in (198, 238) ;<br />
do you think it is large enough ? Yes, I think so (271). As soon as<br />
he <strong>had</strong> received (832) his money, he started for America. Before<br />
(730) men possessed <strong>the</strong> art of writing, all deeds worthy of being<br />
preserved were transmitted (701, 769, 830) to posterity in verse<br />
(verses ).<br />
1 " M<strong>and</strong>ati " should be " m<strong>and</strong>ate," because "ci," is governed by "<br />
cercare ," <strong>and</strong> not by " m<strong>and</strong>ati ; " but " m<strong>and</strong>ate," near to " ci,"<br />
would sound inharmonious .<br />
229
2 "Veduti" should be " veduto," because "li," is governed by<br />
"dipingere ," <strong>and</strong> not by " veduti ;" but " veduto," near to " li," would<br />
sound inharmonious .<br />
3 " Dimenticate " should be " dimenticato " because" le mie<br />
parole " is <strong>the</strong> direct object of " dimenticato ; " but " dimenticato "<br />
would make <strong>the</strong> sentence sound inharmonious .<br />
4 " Mangiate " should be " mangiato," because this participle is<br />
not preceded by a direct object ; but "mangiato" would make <strong>the</strong><br />
sentence sound inharmonious .<br />
834. 5 In English when <strong>the</strong>re are two or more verbs, in <strong>the</strong> same<br />
sentence , denoting actions done by <strong>the</strong> same subject, <strong>the</strong> verb<br />
expressing <strong>the</strong> action <strong>which</strong> was done first, is often employed in<br />
<strong>the</strong> Present Participle, but in Italian it must be used in <strong>the</strong><br />
compound of <strong>the</strong> Gerund (as explained in rule 689) thus :<br />
"Demetrio , udito che gli Ateniesi avevano ," &c.<br />
ON THE VERB " AVERE," USED IDIOMATICALLY. 179<br />
LESSON XXXVII.<br />
ON THE VERB "AVERE," USED IDIOMATICALLY.<br />
835. "Avere " is used idiomatically to translate <strong>the</strong> English<br />
expressions, What is <strong>the</strong> matter with you ? What is <strong>the</strong> matter<br />
with him ? &c. Ex.<br />
Non so che cosa abbiano questi fanciulli ; sembrano , molto<br />
addolorati.<br />
I do not know what is <strong>the</strong> matter with <strong>the</strong>se children ; <strong>the</strong>y<br />
seem very grieved .<br />
836. " Avere ," followed by a noun, is used in Italian in <strong>the</strong><br />
following idiomatical expressions, instead of <strong>the</strong> verb to lie,<br />
followed by an adjective , as in English :<br />
(a) Aver caldo to be warm.<br />
(b) Aver freddo to be cold.<br />
(c) Aver fame to be hungry.<br />
(d) Aver sete to be thirsty .<br />
(e) Aver sonno to be sleepy .<br />
(f) Aver ragione to be in <strong>the</strong> right .<br />
(g) Aver torto to be in <strong>the</strong> wrong.<br />
(h) Aver paura to be afraid.<br />
(i) Aver fretta to be in a hurry.<br />
(j) Aver piacere caro to be glad.<br />
230
(k) Aver cura di to be careful of.<br />
(l) Aver giudizio to act sensibly .<br />
EXERCISE LXVII.<br />
Are you (122) warm, (a) Charles ? Yes. I thank you ; when I came<br />
in I was very cold (b). When <strong>the</strong>se men came in (705) <strong>the</strong>y were<br />
(695) very hungry (c) <strong>and</strong> thirsty (d). The children are very sleepy<br />
(e). Do you think (691) that Margaret is in <strong>the</strong> right (f) (724) ? Yes,<br />
<strong>and</strong> that you are in <strong>the</strong> wrong (g). I never thought (691) that you<br />
would be so wicked as 1 to offend her. These little children (442)<br />
are afraid (h) of that big dog (437). Do (126, 128) not detain me,<br />
because I am in a hurry (i). I am very glad (j) to hear that your<br />
bro<strong>the</strong>r is going to Florence . Shut that window ; I feel very cold (b).<br />
Those who (630) think <strong>the</strong>y are always in <strong>the</strong> right (f) are often<br />
wrong. They were very happy (j) to be again with us. I think you<br />
should be (791) more careful of (k) your health. If (754) he would<br />
act sensibly, (l) he would be liked by (270) everybody. If he were<br />
wise , (l) he would be rich .<br />
837. 1 The expressions to be so good as, to be so wicked as, &c. ,<br />
are translated into Italian by " essere abbastanza buono per," "<br />
essere abbastanza cattivo per."<br />
180 ON THE VERB " AVERE " USED IDIOMATICALLY.<br />
ON THE VERB " AVERE " USED IDIOMATICALLY.<br />
838. " AVERE " is USED IDIOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING<br />
EXPRESSIONS :<br />
(a) Aver buona cera , to look well.<br />
(b) Aver cattiva cera , to look ill.<br />
(c) Aver male a, to feel a pain in.<br />
(d) Avere a mano, / in pronto, to have a thing ready.<br />
(e) Aver bisogno di, to need .<br />
(f) Aver l' intenzione di, to intend .<br />
(g) Aver voglia di, to have a wish,<br />
(h) Aver vaghe<strong>zz</strong>a di, to have a great desire to.<br />
(i) Aver di mira , to aim at.<br />
(j) Aver luogo, to take place.<br />
(k) Aver un bel dire, un bel fare , &c., to speak in vain, to act in.<br />
vain , &c.<br />
(l) Aver voce in capitolo, to have much influence .<br />
(m) Aver il capo ai grilli , to be out of temper .<br />
(n) Aver della ruggine con, to bear a grudge to.<br />
231
(o) Averla con, 1 to be angry with.<br />
(p) Aversela a 2 male , to take offence .<br />
EXERCISE LXVIII.<br />
Your bro<strong>the</strong>r looked very well (a) when I saw him a few days ago.<br />
You do not look well (b) ; what (611) is <strong>the</strong> matter with you (835) ?<br />
I feel a pain in (c) my head, <strong>and</strong> in my right arm. She has <strong>the</strong><br />
money ready (d) to pay him if (752) he comes. I intend (f) to buy a<br />
copy of Tennyson's poems for you (213). He has a wish (g) to eat<br />
some French strawberries. She <strong>had</strong> a great desire to (h) see <strong>the</strong><br />
Tower of London. They aim at (i) making money. Now I will tell<br />
you what took place (j) at my bro<strong>the</strong>r's house (434). He may say<br />
what he likes (k), he may do what he likes (k), he will not<br />
succeed (258). Do not pay attention to (216) what (610) he says ;<br />
he has no influence (l). Your bro<strong>the</strong>r Louis is always out of temper<br />
(m). I am afraid (808) he bears you a grudge (n) ; I do not know<br />
why. He is angry with (o) me because I sold (707) <strong>the</strong> horse<br />
without telling him anything. Charles is easily offended (p). It is<br />
true that 3 I intend (f) to go to Florence <strong>and</strong> remain <strong>the</strong>re (239) for<br />
(311) five or six months, but I <strong>cannot</strong> make up my mind (803)<br />
thus in a moment .<br />
839. 1 "Averla con" is conjugated as follows :<br />
L' ho con, I am angry with.<br />
L' hai con, thou art angry with.<br />
L' ha con, he is angry with.<br />
2 "Aversela a male " is conjugated as follows :<br />
Me l' ho a male , I am offended.<br />
Te l' hai a male , thou art offended.<br />
Se l'ha a male , he is offended.<br />
840. 3 The expression "It is true that" is rendered in Italian by<br />
putting "ben" or " bensi " after <strong>the</strong> first verb in <strong>the</strong> sentence . Ex.<br />
Ho ben l' intenzione di viaggiare ma non adesso.<br />
It is true that I intend to travel , but not now.<br />
841. The expressions in a moment, on <strong>the</strong> spur of <strong>the</strong> moment,<br />
are rendered in Italian by " su due piedi," or " in quel subito."<br />
ON THE VERB " ESSERE " USED IDIOMATICALLY. 181<br />
ON THE VERB "ESSERE " USED IDIOMATICALLY.<br />
842. " ESSERE " IS USED IDIOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING<br />
EXPRESSIONS :<br />
232
(a) Essere necessario di, essere d' uopo di, essere mestieri di,<br />
esser forza di, 1 to be necessary or I, you, one, we, <strong>the</strong>y must, or I<br />
have to, &c.<br />
(b) Essere pre<strong>zz</strong>o dell'opera, to be worth while .<br />
(c) Essere in grado di, to have it in one's power.<br />
(d) Esser pago, or soddisfatto di, to be satisfied with.<br />
(e) Essere all'ordine , or pronto, to be ready.<br />
(f) Essere in ritardo, to be late .<br />
(g) Essere d' accordo, to agree .<br />
(h) Essere un poco di buono, to be a good for nothing .<br />
(i) Essere da poco, to be worth necessary , little .<br />
(j) Essere da più di, to be worth more than.<br />
(k) Essere a mal termine , to be in a critical position.<br />
(l) Essere sul punto di, essere in procinto di, essere per,essere lì lì<br />
per, to be on <strong>the</strong> point of.<br />
(m) Essere in buon concetto , to bear a good character .<br />
(n) Essere vago di, to desire .<br />
EXERCISE LXIX.<br />
It is necessary (a) to make all (482) preparations for <strong>the</strong> Prince of<br />
Wales, who will arrive at two o'clock, with <strong>the</strong> Princess of Wales<br />
<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> Prince of Naples. I must (a) make a speech on behalf of<br />
our College. It is worth while (b) to go to (make) some expense on<br />
(650) such an occasion. They have it in <strong>the</strong>ir power (c) to do a<br />
great deal of good to <strong>the</strong> institution. I hope our director will be<br />
satisfied with (d) our endeavours. I am sure he will (208). Well,<br />
boys, are you ready (e) ? Yes, we are quite ready, except Mary ;<br />
she is always late (f). Those two boys never agree (g). To (225) say<br />
<strong>the</strong> truth, that little fellow <strong>the</strong>re, is a good for nothing (h). When I<br />
caught hold of him, he was (695) on <strong>the</strong> point of (l) throwing a<br />
stone at my window. Does that man (606) bear a good character?<br />
(m). No, he does not (208). I should be very glad (n) to know who<br />
that lady is. I have <strong>had</strong> ( dovere ) 2 to grant him all (610) he asked<br />
me. I have <strong>had</strong> ( dovere ) 2 to come alone . He has not been able<br />
(potere) 3 to sleep. He has not been able (potere) 3 to succeed.<br />
They would (volere) 2 (707) not walk. They would (volere ) 3 (707)<br />
not live in (with) dishonour.<br />
1 Rule 287 holds good with <strong>the</strong>se verbs.<br />
843. 2 When <strong>the</strong> verbs "dovere ," " potere," <strong>and</strong> " volere " are<br />
followed by verbs, <strong>which</strong>, in <strong>the</strong>ir compound tenses, are<br />
233
conjugated with " avere," <strong>the</strong>y (" dovere ," " potere," <strong>and</strong> " volere ")<br />
are also conjugated with " avere ."<br />
844. 3 When <strong>the</strong> verbs "dovere ," " potere," <strong>and</strong> " volere " are followed<br />
by verbs, <strong>which</strong>, in <strong>the</strong>ir compound tenses are conjugated with<br />
"essere," <strong>the</strong>y ("dovere ," " potere," <strong>and</strong> " volere ") are conjugated<br />
with " essere ."<br />
182 ON THE VERB " ANDARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY.<br />
ON THE VERB " ANDARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY.<br />
845. " Andare " is used Idiomatically in <strong>the</strong> following expressions :<br />
(a) Andare a genio a to like .<br />
(b) Andare a piede to go on foot.<br />
(c) Andare in carro<strong>zz</strong>a / in legno to ride in a carriage .<br />
(d) Andare a cavallo to ride.<br />
(e) Andare in collera to get into a passion.<br />
(f) Andare in estasi to fall into ecstasies .<br />
(g) Andare altiero di to be proud of.<br />
(h) Andare a vele gonfie to prosper.<br />
(i) Andar di bene in meglio to get better <strong>and</strong> better .<br />
(j) Andar di male in peggio to get worse <strong>and</strong> worse.<br />
(k) Andare a vuoto to fail.<br />
(l) Andare a fondo to sink .<br />
(m) Andar dietro a to follow.<br />
(n) Andar per la mente to be in one's mind.<br />
(o) Andare alle corte to come to a decision .<br />
(p) Andare alla lunga to go on slowly.<br />
(q) Andar di me<strong>zz</strong>o to suffer from.<br />
(r) Andarsene 1 to go away.<br />
(s) Andare a prova, a gara to vie.<br />
EXERCISE LXX.<br />
I do not like (a) to go on foot (b). My sisters are very fond of riding<br />
in a carriage (c) ; <strong>the</strong>y very seldom walk (b). Elizabeth rides (d)<br />
every morning to <strong>the</strong> top 2 of <strong>the</strong> hill with her bro<strong>the</strong>r. Why do you<br />
get into a passion (e) for nothing ? The sound of this instrument<br />
is so (536) melodious that it makes me fall into ecstasies (f). He<br />
is very proud of (g) his (560) riches ; <strong>and</strong> she is very proud of her<br />
beauty. His affairs are very prosperous (h). His business is getting<br />
better <strong>and</strong> better (i). Their condition is getting worse <strong>and</strong> worse<br />
(j). The scheme has failed (k) ; I am afraid (808) he is ruined. I do<br />
not think so (271). The ship sank (l) near <strong>the</strong> harbour, at three<br />
234
o'clock p.m. (548). His dog followed him (m) (697) wherever he<br />
went. Some of his verses are really beautiful, <strong>the</strong>y are always in<br />
my mind (n). Let us come to a decision (o) at once ; I am tired of<br />
arguing (683). He was so slow (p) in making up his mind (803)<br />
that I lost my patience. I do not want to suffer from it (q) (240). I<br />
am going (r) now ; goodbye.<br />
846. 1 "Andarsene " is conjugated thus:<br />
"me ne vo,"<br />
" te ne vai,"<br />
" se ne va," &c.<br />
847. 2 Top (of a mountain, hill) is translated by " sommità,"<br />
"sommo."<br />
Top (of a house , wall), "comignolo ," "vetta ."<br />
Top (of a tree ), "cima ."<br />
Top (of a table), " coperchio ."<br />
A top, " un paleo."<br />
ON THE VERB " DARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY. 183<br />
ON THE VERB "DARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY.<br />
848. " Dare " 1 is used idiomatically in <strong>the</strong> following expressions :<br />
(a) Dare ad intendere a, to make believe .<br />
(b) Dar fede a, to believe .<br />
(c) Dar retta a, to mind, to listen .<br />
(d) Dar del (or di) tu a, to address one in <strong>the</strong> second person<br />
singular ,<br />
(e) Dar del (or di) voi a, to address one in <strong>the</strong> second person plural,<br />
(f ) Dar del (or di) lei a, to address one in <strong>the</strong> third per. sing , (Fem.)<br />
(g) Dar parola a, to promise .<br />
(h) Dar fuoco a, to set on fire to<br />
(i) Dar mano a, to begin .<br />
(j) Dar una mano a, to give some help, to give a, coat of (paint,<br />
varnish , &c.).<br />
(k) Dar conto di, to account for.<br />
(l) Dar nel rosso, to border on red.<br />
(m) Dar del furfante a, to call one a rascal .<br />
(n) Dare sfogo a, to give vent to.<br />
(o) Dar d'occhio a, to look at.<br />
(p) Dare udienza a, to receive .<br />
(q) Dar di piglio a, to seize .<br />
(r) Dar ragione a, to agree that someone is in <strong>the</strong> right .<br />
235
(s) Dar torto a, to say that someone is in <strong>the</strong> wrong.<br />
(t) Dar lo sfratto a, to expel.<br />
(u) Dar volta, to turn back.<br />
(v) Dar carico a, to accuse .<br />
(w) Dar bene (a pen), to write well.<br />
EXERCISE LXXI.<br />
He would make me believe (a) that he was rich. I never believe<br />
(b) flatterers. He does (784) not repent of (184) having listened to<br />
(c) his bad companions. He always addresses everybody in <strong>the</strong><br />
second person singular (d). Italian ladies <strong>and</strong> gentlemen address<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir inferiors in <strong>the</strong> second person plural (e). I always address<br />
him in <strong>the</strong> third person singular (f ), respectfully. He gave me his<br />
word (g) that he would be here again in a week (549). It is said<br />
(771) that he set fire to (h) his house . Why do you not begin (i)<br />
your poem ? You <strong>had</strong> better help me a little (j). They were obliged<br />
to account for (k) <strong>the</strong>ir (560) conduct. This cloth borders on red (l).<br />
I wish I could 2 give vent to (n) my feelings. They looked at me (o)<br />
two or three times. The President received him (p) this morning.<br />
He seized (q) a stick, <strong>and</strong> began to strike me. He agrees that you<br />
are in <strong>the</strong> right (r). This pen writes well (w).<br />
849. 1 The verb "Dare," used unipersonally, with <strong>the</strong> pronoun "si,"<br />
means to be probable. Ex.<br />
Può darsi che non vengano .<br />
It is probable that <strong>the</strong>y will not come .<br />
850. 2 The expressions I wish I could speak , I wish I could have<br />
written, &c. , are translated into Italian by " Vorrei poter parlare ,"<br />
"Vorrei aver potuto scrivere ," &c.<br />
184 ON THE VERB "DARE" USED IDIOMATICALLY.<br />
ON THE VERB "DARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY.<br />
851. "Dare" is used Idiomatically in <strong>the</strong> following expressions :<br />
(a) Dare alla luce , to publish.<br />
(b) Dar nella rete , to fall into a snare .<br />
(c) Dar l' animo a di, to be bold enough to.<br />
(d) Dar luogo a, to give rise to.<br />
(e) Dar la burla, or la baia, to make fun of.<br />
(f) Dar la colpa a, to throw <strong>the</strong> blame on.<br />
(g) Dare in ismanie , to show a great deal of irritation .<br />
(h) Dare in uno scoppio di risa , to burst out laughing .<br />
(i) Dare in uno scoppio di lagrime , to burst out crying .<br />
236
(j) Dare in prestito a, to lend.<br />
(k) Dar di naso da per tutto, to meddle with everything .<br />
(l) Darsi la mano to wed.<br />
(m) Darsi vanto di, to boast.<br />
(n) Darsi allo studio, to apply one self to study.<br />
(o) Darsi bel tempo, or Darsi al dolce far niente, to live in<br />
idleness .<br />
(p) Darsi a conoscere per, to make one's -self known as.<br />
(q) Darsi briga di, to meddle with.<br />
(r) Darsi pensiero di, to worry one 's-self about.<br />
(s) Darsi pace, to be contented .<br />
(t) Darsela a gambe, 1 :to run away<br />
(u) Poter darsi, to be possible.<br />
EXERCISE LXXII.<br />
He has published (a) a good translation of Moliere's Comedies. He<br />
fell (704) into <strong>the</strong> snare (b) like an idiot. I am bold enough (c) to<br />
send him a challenge . His election gave rise to (d) (704) a very<br />
warm discussion. They are making fun of you (e). Mary always<br />
throws <strong>the</strong> blame on (f) her sister. When we accused him, he<br />
showed a great deal of irritation (g). When I told him <strong>the</strong> news, he<br />
burst out laughing (h). I advise you not to lend her (j) your parasol.<br />
That busybody meddles with everything (k). They are leading a<br />
life of idleness (o). He would not make himself known as (p) <strong>the</strong><br />
author of <strong>the</strong> comedy. I wish that she would not (723) meddle with<br />
(q) my affairs. My dear friend, do not worry yourself about (r)<br />
trifles, be contented (s). The thief ran away (t) directly. It is<br />
possible (u) that Frederick <strong>and</strong> his friends will arrive (Pres. Subj.)<br />
this afternoon .<br />
852. 1 The verb " Darsela a gambe " is conjugated as follows :<br />
Me la do a gambe, I run away.<br />
Te la dai a gambe, thou runnest away.<br />
Se la da a gambe, he runs away.<br />
Ve la date a gambe, you run away.<br />
Se la danno a gambe, <strong>the</strong>y run away.<br />
ON THE VERB " FARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY. 185<br />
ON THE VERB "FARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY.<br />
853. " Fare " is used Idiomatically in <strong>the</strong> following expressions :--<br />
(l) Fare il grugno a, to sulk.<br />
(a) Far bel tempo, to be fine wea<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
237
(b) Far cattiv o tempo, to be bad wea<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
(c) Far freddo, to be cold.<br />
(d) Far caldo, to be warm.<br />
(e) Far umido, to be damp.<br />
(f) Far colazione , to breakfast .<br />
(g) Far merenda , to have luncheon ,<br />
(h) Far animo , to encourage ,<br />
(i) Far pompa di, to boast.<br />
(j) Far ala a, to make room for.<br />
(k) Far alto, to halt.<br />
(m)Far mestieri di, or far d'uopo di, to be necessary .<br />
(n) Far vela , to set sail .<br />
(o) Far naufragio , to be shipwrecked .<br />
(p) Far vista , or mostra di, to pretend.<br />
(q) Far piacere a, to please .<br />
(r) Far le veci di, |<br />
(s) Far le parti di, | to act as.<br />
(t) Far da, |<br />
(u) Far brindisi a, to drink <strong>the</strong> health of.<br />
(v) Far il dottore, to lay down <strong>the</strong> law.<br />
EXERCISE LXXIII.<br />
It was fine wea<strong>the</strong>r (a) (704) during <strong>the</strong> whole month we<br />
remained at Brighton. The wea<strong>the</strong>r is very bad (b) just now ; we<br />
<strong>cannot</strong> go out. Sometimes it is very cold (c) in (207) Paris, I<br />
assure you. In summer it is very warm (d) in Italy ; perhaps too<br />
warm. In <strong>the</strong> western part of Irel<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> wea<strong>the</strong>r is very damp (e).<br />
At home we breakfast (f) at seven o'clock (548) in (328) summer,<br />
<strong>and</strong> eight o'clock in winter. We shall have luncheon (g) before we<br />
go out. I encouraged him (h) by promising (686) that I would take<br />
him with me. He was always boasting (i) (701) of his ancestors.<br />
The crowd made room for (j) her. They halted (k) during <strong>the</strong> night.<br />
He is sulking (l) with me, because I would not lend him my horse .<br />
The ship set sail (n) for America three days ago ; she <strong>had</strong> three<br />
hundred passengers on board. They were shipwrecked (o) off <strong>the</strong><br />
coast of Cornwall. He pretended (p) to give <strong>the</strong> money to his<br />
fa<strong>the</strong>r, but instead of that, he put it in his pocket (572). He played<br />
ano<strong>the</strong>r tune to please (q) <strong>the</strong> officers of <strong>the</strong> staff. 1 On (298) that<br />
occasion he acted as (r) chaplain. He acted as (s) a fa<strong>the</strong>r to her.<br />
They drank <strong>the</strong> chairman's health (u). He is always laying down<br />
<strong>the</strong> law (v).<br />
238
854. 1 Staff (military), is translated by " Stato Maggiore ." Staff (of a<br />
newspaper), " redazione ." Staff (stick), " bastone ." Pilgrim's staff,<br />
"bordone."<br />
186 ON THE WORD "FARE" USED IDIOMATICALLY.<br />
ON THE VERB " FARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY<br />
855. " Fare " is used Idiomatically in <strong>the</strong> following expressions :<br />
(a) Fare i conti di, to intend .<br />
(b) Fare una visita , to pay a visit .<br />
(c) Fare una passeggiata , to take a walk.<br />
(d) Fare un bagno, to take a bath.<br />
(e) Far l' orecchio del mercante , to turn a deaf ear.<br />
(f) Far vedere a, to show.<br />
(g) Far male a, to hurt.<br />
(h) Fare attenzione , to pay attention ,<br />
(i) Far parola di, to mention .<br />
(j) Far prova di coraggio, to give proofs of courage .<br />
(k) Far capolino, to peep in.<br />
(l) Far fare , to have made.<br />
(m) Far risaltare , to fetch out.<br />
(n) Farsi fare , to have made for one's -self.<br />
(o) Farsi animo , to take courage .<br />
(p) Farsi nuovo di, to pretend to be ignorant of.<br />
(q) Farsi beffe di, to ridicule .<br />
(r) Farsi innanzi , to put one's -self forward.<br />
(s) Farsi in qua, to draw near .<br />
(t) Farsi in là, or indietro , to draw back.<br />
(u) Far tanto di cappello a, to bow most respectfully to.<br />
(v) Sul far del giorno, at <strong>the</strong> break of day.<br />
(w) Sul far della notte, at sunset .<br />
EXERCISE LXXIV.<br />
I intend (a) to pay him a visit (b). We shall take a walk (c) this<br />
evening after tea. I take a bath (d) every morning before<br />
breakfast. I asked him to lend me his gun, but he turned a deaf<br />
ear (e). I want to show him (f) that I am not easily frightened. Do<br />
not (126) hurt him (g) with that big stick. You never pay attention<br />
(h) to what I tell you. Remember that you have promised me not<br />
to mention it (i) to my bro<strong>the</strong>r. He gave proofs of great courage (j)<br />
in <strong>the</strong> last war. We were busy preparing <strong>the</strong> exhibition 1 when<br />
my fa<strong>the</strong>r peeped in (k). I have <strong>had</strong> two tables made (l) for <strong>the</strong><br />
garden. He <strong>had</strong> a letter written (l) to me by his secretary. This<br />
239
dark tint fetches out (m) <strong>the</strong> colours of <strong>the</strong> flowers. Take courage ,<br />
(o) my dear friend. He pretended to be ignorant of (p) all that (610)<br />
<strong>had</strong> happened. They ridicule (q) everybody. You should not be<br />
afraid ; you should put yourself forward (r). If you draw near (s),<br />
you will see <strong>the</strong> effect. Draw back (t) a little ; I <strong>cannot</strong> see <strong>the</strong><br />
game. When <strong>the</strong>y meet, <strong>the</strong>y bow to one ano<strong>the</strong>r most<br />
respectfully (u). He always gets up to work (225) at <strong>the</strong> break of<br />
day (v), <strong>and</strong> comes home at sunset (w).<br />
856. 1 Exhibition is translated by " esposizione. " " Un'esibizione "<br />
means an offer.<br />
ON THE VERB "FARE" USED IDIOMATICALLY 187<br />
ON THE VERB "FARE" USED IDIOMATICALLY.<br />
857. "FARE" is USED IDIOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING<br />
EXPRESSIONS :<br />
(a) Far caso di, to value .<br />
(b) Far specie a, to be astonished .<br />
(c) Far meno di, far a meno di, to help it, or to do without.<br />
(d) Far senno , to become serious .<br />
(e) Fare spalla, to back.<br />
(f) Fare una dom<strong>and</strong>a, to ask a question .<br />
(g) Far l'indiano, to look as if butter would not melt in one's<br />
mouth,<br />
(h) Fare il bell' umore , fare il gallo, to be impertinent .<br />
(i) Fare il bravo, to brag.<br />
(j) Far rigar dritto, far stare a segno, to take down a peg or two.<br />
(k) Fare il sarto, to be a tailor .<br />
(l) Far crocchio , to form groups.<br />
(m) Far festa a, to greet .<br />
(n) Farsi mallevadore , to st<strong>and</strong> guaranty<br />
(o) Non fa niente , never mind.<br />
(p) Come si fa ? what will you do ?<br />
(q) È un uomo così fatto, that is his character .<br />
(r) C' è un bel da fare , <strong>the</strong>re is plenty to do.<br />
EXERCISE LXXV.<br />
He does not value (a) your friendship ; so much <strong>the</strong> worse 1 for<br />
him. I was astonished (b) to see him dressed in mufti . I could not<br />
help it (c). He promised to become serious (d), <strong>and</strong> I backed him<br />
(e) with all my means. I asked his parents (655) some questions<br />
(f). When I caught <strong>the</strong> pickpocket, at first he looked as if butter<br />
240
would not melt in his mouth (g), <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>n he began to be<br />
impertinent (h). The policeman told him that it was useless to<br />
brag (i), <strong>and</strong> that he would take him down a peg or two (j). What do<br />
<strong>the</strong>se men do ? This one is a tailor (k) <strong>and</strong> that one a carpenter.<br />
The procession broke up (704) <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> people began to form<br />
groups (l). They greeted us (m) warmly. He has promised my<br />
fa<strong>the</strong>r to st<strong>and</strong> guaranty (m) for me. Never mind (o), he will be<br />
compelled to speak . What will you do (p) ? I know him ; that is his<br />
character (q). There is plenty to do (r), <strong>the</strong> members of <strong>the</strong><br />
Commission are coming here to dine . This time <strong>the</strong> secretary<br />
will have something to do for his salary. 2<br />
858. 1 The expressions so much <strong>the</strong> better, so much <strong>the</strong> worse,<br />
are translated into Italian by " tanto meglio ," " tanto peggio."<br />
859. 2 The salary of a secretary is translated by " lo stipendio di<br />
un secretario ."<br />
The wages of a servant " il salario di un servo ."<br />
The wages of a workman "la paga di un operaio."<br />
188 ON THE VERB "STARE" USED IDIOMATICALLY.<br />
ON THE VERB "STARE" USED IDIOMATICALLY.<br />
860. "Stare " is used idiomatically in <strong>the</strong> following expressions :<br />
(a) Stare (di salute ), to be (in health ),<br />
(b) Stare di casa, to reside .<br />
(c) Stare a sedere , to be seated .<br />
(d) Stare in piedi, to st<strong>and</strong>.<br />
(e) Stare a sentire , to listen .<br />
(f) Stare all'erta ., to be on one's guard,<br />
(g) Stare in orecchi , to prick up one's ears .<br />
(h) Star per, to be on <strong>the</strong> point of.<br />
(i) Star in agguato, to lie in wait.<br />
(j) Star sull' avviso , to be prepared,<br />
(k) Star in forse, or Star tra il si e il n o, to hesitate .<br />
(l) Star quieto , fermo , to be quiet .<br />
(m) Star allegro , to be merry .<br />
(n) Stare zitto, cheto , to be silent .<br />
(o) Sta a me di, 1 it is my turn.<br />
(p) Stare a galla, to float.<br />
(q) Star con le mani a cintola , to st<strong>and</strong> idle.<br />
(r) Star fresco, to be in a pickle .<br />
(s) Non istar bene , to be wrong.<br />
241
EXERCISE LXXVI.<br />
How are (a) you to-day ? I am very well, I thank you. Do you reside<br />
(b) in this neighbourhood ? No, I am staying 2 with my sister. The<br />
ladies were allowed to sit down (c), but <strong>the</strong> gentlemen <strong>had</strong> (790) to<br />
st<strong>and</strong> (d) all <strong>the</strong> time . When you came in I was listening (e) to<br />
(698) a very interesting conversation. Be on your guard (f) ; for he<br />
might (794) escape. I saw that <strong>the</strong> stranger was pricking up his<br />
ears (g) when you were speaking to my partner. Lions <strong>and</strong> tigers<br />
lie in wait (i) for <strong>the</strong>ir prey near streams <strong>and</strong> brooks. He wanted<br />
to (786, 307) surprise us, but we were prepared (j). I hesitated (k)<br />
whe<strong>the</strong>r I was to go (756) to Paris. Be quiet (l), John. Let us be<br />
merry, (m) children ; to-day it is little Charlie's (448) birthday. His<br />
being (683) silent (n) gave great advantage to his enemies. Now it<br />
is his turn (o) to speak . Light substances float (q) on water. Write<br />
this exercise, instead of st<strong>and</strong>ing idle (q). Elizabeth, we have<br />
missed our train ; we are in a pickle (r) now. It is wrong (s) to<br />
gamble.<br />
861. 1 The expressions " tocca a me di," "a voi di," &c., are<br />
frequently used instead of " sta a me di," Sec. ; but " tocca a me<br />
di," &c., has more force; it often means it is my duty, it is my<br />
right .<br />
862. 2 The Italian for to stay with, is " essere in visita da."<br />
863. 3? In speaking of dresses, " Star bene " means to suit, to<br />
become , <strong>and</strong> " Star male ," to be unsuitable , to be unbecoming . Ex.<br />
Cotest'abito non le sta bene .<br />
That coat does not suit you.<br />
IDIOMS WITH " SAPERE," " TENERE," " VOLERE," " VENIRE."<br />
189 IDIOMS FORMED WITH "SAPERE," "TENERE," "VOLERE,"<br />
AND "VENIRE."<br />
864. IDIOMS WITH " SAPERE."<br />
(a) Sapere a mente , or a memoria , to know by heart .<br />
(b) Saper male , to be sorry for.<br />
(c) Saper di buono, to have a good taste , or smell .<br />
(d) Saper di cattivo , to have a bad taste , or smell .<br />
(e) Saper di poco, to have little taste , or smell .<br />
(f) Saper di niente , to have not any taste , or smell .<br />
(g) Saper di muschio , to smell of musk .<br />
(h) Saper di pesce , to smell of fish.<br />
865. IDIOMS WITH "TENERE ."<br />
242
(i) Tenere a bada, to trifle with.<br />
(j) Tenere a battesimo , to be god-fa<strong>the</strong>r , or god-mo<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
(k) Tenere da uno, to side with one.<br />
(l) Tener le lagrime , or le risa , to keep from weeping , or laughing ,<br />
(m) Tener uno per galantuomo , to believe one an honest man.<br />
866. IDIOMS WITH " VOLERE."<br />
(n) Voler bene a, to be fond of.<br />
(o) Voler dire, to mean .<br />
867. IDIOMS WITH " VENIRE."<br />
(p) Venir meno , to faint .<br />
(q) Venire in mente a, to remember ,<br />
(r) Venir voglia a, to take a fancy.<br />
(s) Venir fatto a, to succeed .<br />
EXERCISE LXXVII.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r knows by heart (a) <strong>many</strong> Italian sonnets. I am sorry<br />
(b) to see you afflicted ; I hope that 1 you have not received any<br />
bad news. These apples have a good smell (c). I am sure that he is<br />
trifling with (i) you. She has been godmo<strong>the</strong>r (j) to all my children.<br />
I side with (k) you because you are in <strong>the</strong> right (836, f). Camelias<br />
are very beautiful flowers, but <strong>the</strong>y have not any smell (f). All her<br />
clo<strong>the</strong>s smell of musk (g). We could not help weeping (l). I always<br />
believed (707) him to be (m) an honest man. William is very fond<br />
of (n) your cousin Elizabeth. If I <strong>had</strong> known what he meant (o), I<br />
should have spoken to him. When she heard <strong>the</strong> news, she<br />
fainted (p) in her mo<strong>the</strong>r's arms. I remember (q) that I promised<br />
to meet her at my mo<strong>the</strong>r's house , at three o'clock this<br />
afternoon. I took a fancy (r) to go <strong>and</strong> (340) see <strong>the</strong> exhibition<br />
(856). He succeeded (s) (693) in obtaining <strong>the</strong> post.<br />
868. 1 The expressions I hope that, -we hope that, &c., when<br />
referring to a present or past time , are translated by " Amo<br />
credere che," " ci piace credere che," &c. (followed by a verb in <strong>the</strong><br />
Subjunctive ). To hope for a thing that is, or has been , is illogical .<br />
190 ON ADVERBS.<br />
LESSON XXXVIII.<br />
ADVERBS.<br />
869. The rules for <strong>the</strong> formation of adverbs from adjectives, <strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> mode of forming <strong>the</strong> degrees of comparison are given in pages<br />
122, <strong>and</strong> following.<br />
243
870. Adverbs are divided into classes, according to <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
signification .<br />
871. THE PRINCIPAL ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION.<br />
Si, yes.<br />
Certo , certainly .<br />
Sicuramente , surely .<br />
Indubitatamente , |<br />
Senza dubbio, | undoubtedly.<br />
Senz' altro, |<br />
Già, |<br />
Appunto, |<br />
Per l'appunto, | exactly so.<br />
Infatti , |<br />
Davvero , really .<br />
Sia così, be it so.<br />
872. In giving an answer containing <strong>the</strong> verbs " credere ,"<br />
"sperare," " dubitare ," <strong>and</strong> " temere," <strong>the</strong> idioms "di si," <strong>and</strong> "di io,"<br />
are used instead of " si " <strong>and</strong> " ho." Ex.<br />
È in casa mio zio ? Credo di si.<br />
Is my uncle at home ? I think so.<br />
873. THE PRINCIPAL ADVERBS OF NEGATION.<br />
No, |no. Niente affatto, | by no means .<br />
Non (verb), |not, no. In nessun modo |<br />
Non (verb) mica , | not at all Non (verb) mai, | never<br />
Non (verb) punto| Non (verb) giammai , |<br />
874. The negation not is translated into Italian by " non," <strong>and</strong> is<br />
always placed before <strong>the</strong> verb. Ex.<br />
Non vi io chiamato , Enrico.<br />
I did not call you, Henry.<br />
875. THE PRINCIPAL ADVERBS OF ORDER.<br />
Dopo, |after .<br />
Poi, 1 poscia, | <strong>the</strong>n .<br />
Indi, quindi, | next,<br />
Gradualmente , | gradually.<br />
Prima , | first.<br />
244
In prima, | firstly.<br />
Dapprima, | to begin with.<br />
Primieramente , |<br />
Secondariamente , secondly.<br />
Successivamente , successively .<br />
In terzo luogo, in <strong>the</strong> third place.<br />
Finalmente , finally .<br />
876. 1 " Poi," also means besides. Ex. "Aveva poi un modo di<br />
vestire tutto suo." Besides , he <strong>had</strong> a very peculiar way of<br />
dressing himself .<br />
191 ON ADVERBS.<br />
877. THE PRINCIPAL ADVERBS OF PLACE .<br />
Qui, qua, ci, here , In su, upwards.<br />
Costì, costà | In giù, downwards.<br />
Lì, là, colà, |<strong>the</strong>re. Su e giù, up <strong>and</strong> down<br />
vi, ivi, ' |. Vicino, 1 near.<br />
Ove, dove, where. Lontano far.<br />
Onde, donde, | whence Altrove, elsewhere.<br />
di dove, | Da b<strong>and</strong>a, |aside.<br />
Quassù, up here, Da parte, |<br />
Quaggiù, down here, A mano destra, |On <strong>the</strong> right<br />
Lassù, up <strong>the</strong>re, A destra, diritta, |<br />
Laggiù, down <strong>the</strong>re, A sinistra, manca, on <strong>the</strong> left,<br />
Di sopra, |above, Avanti 1 innanzi 1 forward.<br />
|upstairs Da per tutto, |.<br />
Di sotto, |below, Ovunque, |everywhere<br />
Da basso, |downstairs Ognidove, |.<br />
878. " Qui," " qua," <strong>and</strong> " ci " (here ), are used to indicate <strong>the</strong> place<br />
in <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong> speaker is ; " Costì " " costà " (<strong>the</strong>re), <strong>the</strong> place<br />
occupied by <strong>the</strong> person addressed ; " Lì," "là," " colà," " ivi," <strong>and</strong> " vi<br />
" (<strong>the</strong>re), mark a place distant alike from <strong>the</strong> speaker <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
person addressed. " Qui " <strong>and</strong> " costì " are generally used with<br />
verbs expressing state , whereas " qua " <strong>and</strong> " costa " are always<br />
connected with verbs expressing movement .<br />
879. " Ci," " vi," <strong>and</strong> " ivi," can only be used when <strong>the</strong> place to<br />
<strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong>se adverbs refer has been already mentioned in <strong>the</strong><br />
sentence . Ex.<br />
245
Ora che sono in questo posto ci voglio rimanere .<br />
Now that I am in this place I will remain in it.<br />
880. ADVERBS WHICH CAN BE USED INTERROGATIVELY.<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>o ? when ? Ove? where ?<br />
Quanto ? how much ? Dove ? where ?<br />
Mai? 2 ever ? Donde ? whence ?<br />
Giammai ? ever ? Perché ? why?<br />
Come ? how ? Fin dove ? how far ?<br />
Da qu<strong>and</strong>o in qua ? since when ? Fino a qu<strong>and</strong>o ? until when ?<br />
881. " Mai " <strong>and</strong> " giammai," employed without being preceded by "<br />
non," have <strong>the</strong> signification of ever ; but when <strong>the</strong>y are employed<br />
with " non," or " no," <strong>the</strong>y mean never . Ex.<br />
Ha ella mai visto il duomo di Milano ? No, mai.<br />
Have you ever seen <strong>the</strong> ca<strong>the</strong>dral of Milan ? No, I have not.<br />
1 "Vicino," " lontano," " avanti," <strong>and</strong> " innanzi " can also be used as<br />
prepositions .<br />
882. 2 " Unqua " is often used in poetry instead of " mai."<br />
192 ON ADVERBS.<br />
883. SENTENCES CONTAINING ADVERBS OF TIME .<br />
(To be learnt by heart .)<br />
Giuseppe <strong>and</strong>ò al passeggio ieri , ed io v'<strong>and</strong>rò oggi e domani<br />
Joseph went for a walk yesterday , <strong>and</strong> I shall go to-day, <strong>and</strong><br />
tomorrow.<br />
Vidi i miei avantieri (a), e li vedrò ancora fra poco (b).<br />
I saw my family <strong>the</strong> day before yesterday , <strong>and</strong> I shall see<br />
<strong>the</strong>m again very soon.<br />
È difficile di fare utili scoperte al giorno d'oggi (c).<br />
Now-a-days it is difficult to make useful discoveries .<br />
Che faremo ora? (D). Non faremo niente fino a posdomani<br />
(e).<br />
What shall we do now ? We shall do nothing till <strong>the</strong> day after<br />
to-morrow.<br />
Pel momento (f) non posso dar risposta, ma deciderò al più<br />
presto possibile .<br />
For <strong>the</strong> present I <strong>cannot</strong> give an answer , but I will decide as<br />
soon as possible.<br />
Finora (g) egli ha fatto a modo suo ; ormai mi obbedirà.<br />
246
Hi<strong>the</strong>rto he has done what he likes ; now he will obey me.<br />
L'ho visto due ore fa, e lo rivedrò oggi a otto.<br />
I saw him two hours ago, <strong>and</strong> I shall see him again to-day<br />
week .<br />
È ancora (i) prigioniero , ma sarà liberato fra (j) un mese .<br />
He is still a prisoner , but he will be liberated in a month.<br />
Incontrai Carlo poc'anzi (k).<br />
I have just met Charles .<br />
Non l'ho veduto da due mesi in qua.<br />
I have not seen him for <strong>the</strong> last two months .<br />
Pel passato lo vedevo raramente , (l) ma d' ora in avanti (m)<br />
lo vedrò sovente (n).<br />
In past time I seldom saw him, but henceforth I shall see<br />
him often.<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>o partiremo ? Subito 1 (o) ; ho già preparato i miei<br />
bauli.<br />
When shall we start ? At once; I have already prepared my<br />
trunks .<br />
Egli si decise su due piedi (p).<br />
He made up his mind in a moment .<br />
Per l' avvenire verrò a trovarla di qu<strong>and</strong>o in qu<strong>and</strong>o (q).<br />
For <strong>the</strong> future I shall come to see you now <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>n .<br />
Non mancherò di scrivergli subito che (r) arriverò a Parigi .<br />
I shall not fail to write to him as soon as I arrive in Paris .<br />
(a) Or ieri l'altro.<br />
(b) Or tosto, fra breve , quanto prima.<br />
(c) Or oggidi, oggimai .<br />
(d) Or adesso.<br />
(e) Or domani l'altro.<br />
(f) Or per ora, per adesso.<br />
(g) Or infino ad ora.<br />
(i) Or tuttora, tuttavia .<br />
(j) Or da qui a un mese . (o)<br />
(k) Or pur dianzi , pur mo, pur ora, pocofa, teste . (p)<br />
(l) Or di rado.<br />
(m) Or d' ora innanzi, da qui in avanti, da qui (q) innanzi, d' ora in<br />
poi, d'oggi in poi. (r)<br />
(n) Or spesso.<br />
247
(o) Or a momenti , immediatamente .<br />
(p) Or in un attimo , in un batter d' occhio, in menche non si dice.<br />
(q) Or di tempo in tempo, di tratto in tratto.<br />
(r) Or tosto che, appena, come prima.<br />
884. Ratto " is sometimes used in poetry instead of subito."<br />
193 ON ADVERBS.<br />
Non l'ho vista d'allora in poi (a).<br />
I have never seen her since <strong>the</strong>n .<br />
Altre volte era ricca , ma in questi ultimi tempi (b) divenne<br />
povera.<br />
Formerly she was rich , but of late she became poor.<br />
Vi prego di venire per tempo, (c) allorqu<strong>and</strong>o (d) volete<br />
parlarmi .<br />
I beg of you to come early , whenever you wish to speak to<br />
me.<br />
Roberto viene sempre (e) a seccarmi , ora (f) per una cosa,<br />
ora per l' altra.<br />
Robert always comes to bo<strong>the</strong>r me, now for one thing , <strong>the</strong>n<br />
for ano<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
Allora Carlo arrivava per lo più prima di me.<br />
Then Charles generally arrived before me.<br />
Andiamo,si fa tardi; siamo sempre in ritardo ; ciò non va<br />
bene .<br />
Let us go, it is getting late ; we are always late ; that is not<br />
right .<br />
Era fin d'allora all'apice della sua gloria .<br />
He was even <strong>the</strong>n at <strong>the</strong> very height of his glory.<br />
Lo vidi circa sei giorni fa.<br />
I saw him about six days ago.<br />
Qualche volta (g) restava per molto tempo scioperato.<br />
Sometimes he remained for a long while idle.<br />
All'indomani era di gran lunga innanzi dei suoi competitor !.<br />
On <strong>the</strong> morrow he was far ahead of his competitors .<br />
Verrete da me qualora vi piaccia (h).<br />
You will come to me whenever you like .<br />
Agguantò l'agnello addirittura , e, senz' altro, se lo divoro.<br />
He seized <strong>the</strong> lamb, <strong>and</strong> without more ado, devoured it.<br />
248
EXERCISE LXXVIII.<br />
What are you doing here , Mrs. Vincenzi ? I am spending an hour<br />
in <strong>the</strong> fresh air ; I come here almost every morning. Where have<br />
you been? (123) I do not know from whence I came; we lost our<br />
way after (185) crossing <strong>the</strong> little green bridge, near Mr. Prati's<br />
house . We went up <strong>and</strong> down I do not know for how long ; but at<br />
last we have arrived here safe <strong>and</strong> sound. Will you go with me to<br />
see <strong>the</strong> pictures in <strong>the</strong> National Gallery ? Yes, if you will permit<br />
me to take my sister with me. With <strong>the</strong> greatest pleasure. No<br />
doubt you have seen Mascagni's new opera ? No, not yet ; I have<br />
no time at all, just now. Now we will begin this work ; we shall<br />
finish it before midnight. If I were in your place , I would remain<br />
in Nice during <strong>the</strong> winter. I often meet your cousin, Mrs. Alberti ;<br />
sometimes in <strong>the</strong> park , sometimes in <strong>the</strong> Reading Room of <strong>the</strong><br />
British Museum .<br />
(a) Or d'allora in qua.<br />
(b) Or recentemente , non ha guari .<br />
(c) Or di buon ora.<br />
(d) Or ogniqualvolta .<br />
(e) Or ognora.<br />
(f) Or qu<strong>and</strong>o...qu<strong>and</strong>o.<br />
(g) Or talora.<br />
(h) Or qu<strong>and</strong>o che sia.<br />
194<br />
ON ADVERBS.<br />
885. SENTENCES CONTAINING ADVERBS OF QUALITY AND<br />
MANNER .<br />
(To be learnt by heart .)<br />
Ella parla bene , ma parlerebbe meglio (a) se parlasse più<br />
adagio.<br />
You speak well, but you would speak better if you spoke<br />
slower.<br />
Il suo sarto lavora male (b) perché lavora in fretta .<br />
Your tailor works badly because he works in a hurry.<br />
Credo di no ; il fatto sta che lavora malvolentieri (c).<br />
I do not think so ; <strong>the</strong> fact is he works unwillingly .<br />
Davvero lavora alla carlona (d) ; di male in peggio (a) ogni<br />
giorno.<br />
249
Really he works carelessly , worse <strong>and</strong> worse every day.<br />
Si direbbe che lo fa apposta (e), o per burla (f), per mettervi<br />
in collera .<br />
One would say that he does it on purpose, or for fun, to<br />
make you cross.<br />
Vorrei parlarle a quattr' occhi (g) ; io qualcosa da dirle a<br />
bocca (h).<br />
I would like to see you privately ; I have something to tell<br />
you by word of mouth.<br />
Volentieri (i), ecc omi qui, dite presto, sotto voce ma senz'<br />
ambagi .<br />
Willingly , here I am, be quick , in a whisper but to <strong>the</strong> point.<br />
Tutta la casa è a soqquadro (j) e sua moglie piange<br />
dirrottamente (k).<br />
The whole house is in confusion ; <strong>and</strong> your wife is weeping<br />
bitterly .<br />
Parlate sul serio (l) ; non son cose da dirsi alla pa<strong>zz</strong>a.<br />
Speak seriously ; <strong>the</strong>y are not things to be said wantonly.<br />
Vendeva i suoi quadri di mano in mano che li finiva .<br />
He sold his pictures as fast as he finished <strong>the</strong>m .<br />
Lo passò da parte a parte (m), ad onta della (n) maglia che<br />
portava.<br />
He pierced him through <strong>and</strong> through, in spite of <strong>the</strong> coat of<br />
mail he wore.<br />
Tutt'a un tratto (o) si rimisero a lavorare con amore .<br />
All at once <strong>the</strong>y began again to work in good earnest .<br />
Me ne vivo quietamente in questo castello , mercé la bontà<br />
del governatore .<br />
I live quietly in this castle , thanks to <strong>the</strong> kindness of <strong>the</strong><br />
governor .<br />
Agirò comunque ei voglia.<br />
I shall act just as he wishes .<br />
(a) The adverbs "meglio" <strong>and</strong> " peggio" are <strong>the</strong> comparative forms<br />
of "bene " <strong>and</strong> " male." Their superlative forms are " ottimamente,"<br />
" pessimamente ."<br />
(b) Or malamente .<br />
(c) Or a malincuore .<br />
(d) Or alla buona.<br />
250
(e) Or a bello studio.<br />
(f) Or per ischerzo .<br />
(g) Or da solo a solo.<br />
(h) Or a voce, viva voce.<br />
(i) Or buona voglia.<br />
(j) Or sottosopra.<br />
(k) Or a dirotte lagrime . repente .<br />
(l) or da senno .<br />
(m) Or da b<strong>and</strong>a a b<strong>and</strong>a.<br />
(n) Or malgrado.<br />
(o) Or all'improvviso , di<br />
195 ON ADVERBS.<br />
Lavorarono siffattamente (a), che dappoi il terreno produce<br />
fromento a dovizie (b).<br />
They worked in such a manner that since <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> soil has<br />
produced corn in abundance.<br />
In somma (c) volete leggere ad alta voce (or voce alta) o no ?<br />
In short, will you or will you not read louder ?<br />
Sicuro , comincerò da capo.<br />
Certainly , I shall begin over again .<br />
Dove debbo cominciare ? a capo di riga ? Sicuro (d).<br />
Where shall I begin from ? at <strong>the</strong> head of .<strong>the</strong> line ?<br />
Certainly .<br />
Mi chiamo da parte (h) e mi raccontò tutto sotto voce.<br />
He called me aside <strong>and</strong> whispered to me all that <strong>had</strong><br />
happened.<br />
La tratto alla buona (i) cioè (j) come vorrei ch'ella trattasse<br />
me.<br />
I treat you without compliments , that is as I would like you<br />
to treat me.<br />
Usci diverse volte al buio (k) è di soppiatto,(l)ma coll' <strong>and</strong>ar<br />
del tempo fu acchiappato.<br />
He went out several times in <strong>the</strong> dark <strong>and</strong> by stealth , but at<br />
length he was caught.<br />
Guadagna più vendendo all' ingr osso che vendendo a<br />
minuto .<br />
He gains more by selling wholesale than by retail .<br />
Io sto sempre alla larga (h) qu<strong>and</strong>o veggo barruffe.<br />
251
I always keep aloof when I see disturbances .<br />
Egli si veste sempre alla moda, per lo più all'inglese .<br />
He always dresses in <strong>the</strong> fashion , generally in <strong>the</strong> English<br />
style.<br />
Fa sempre al rovescio di quel che gli si dice.<br />
He always does <strong>the</strong> reverse of what he is told.<br />
Egli va sempre a zonzo, scioperato.<br />
He is always sauntering about, wasting his time .<br />
Invece di (m) lì colle mani a cintola , venite ad aiutarmi .<br />
Instead of staying <strong>the</strong>re idle, come <strong>and</strong> help me.<br />
Vorrei morire , piuttosto (n) che servire un tal tiranno .<br />
I would sooner die than serve such a tyrant.<br />
Inoltre , non agi bene .<br />
Besides , he did not act well.<br />
Forse arriveranno questa sera , ma non si sa per certo.<br />
Perhaps <strong>the</strong>y will arrive this evening , but it is not certain .<br />
A che ora arriva il treno ? non saprei precisamente ; forse<br />
alle cinque .<br />
At what time does <strong>the</strong> train arrive ? I could not tell you<br />
exactly ; at about five o'clock.<br />
È così bravo che, per poco che studiasse , farebbe facilmente<br />
il suo esame .<br />
He is so clever that, if he studied ever so little , he would<br />
easily pass his examination .<br />
(a) Or per modo che.<br />
(b) Or a bi<strong>zz</strong>effe .<br />
(c) Or in fine , in breve .<br />
(d) Or sicuramente , già.<br />
(h) Or in disparte.<br />
(i) Or senza complimenti .<br />
(j) Or cioè a dire, vale a dire,<br />
(k) Or all'oscuro.<br />
(I) Or di nascosto.<br />
(m) Or in luogo di.<br />
(n) Or prima che, avanti che, innanzi che.<br />
196 ON ADVERBS.<br />
REMARKS ON "ONDE," 1 " BENE," AND "PURE."<br />
252
886. The adverb " Onde " is used especially in <strong>the</strong> higher style<br />
<strong>and</strong> in poetry instead of " di cui," "del quale," &c., "da cui," " dal<br />
quale," &c., "per cui," " pel quale," &c. Ex.<br />
" Di quei sospiri ond'io nutriva il core." (Petrarca ).<br />
Of those sighs with <strong>which</strong> I nourished my heart .<br />
887. " Onde " <strong>and</strong> " donde " have also <strong>the</strong> meaning of good reason<br />
for. Ex.<br />
" Oimè , bene il conosco ed ho ben donde." (Tasso).<br />
Alas, I know him well <strong>and</strong> I have good reasons for it.<br />
888. " Onde " has also <strong>the</strong> meaning of <strong>the</strong>refore . Ex.<br />
Si fa buio, onde è meglio <strong>and</strong>arsene .<br />
It is getting dark, <strong>the</strong>refore we <strong>had</strong> better go.<br />
889. " Onde " has also <strong>the</strong> meaning of in order to. Ex.<br />
Egli riparò qui, onde salvarsi .<br />
He repaired here , to save himself .<br />
890. " Onde " has also <strong>the</strong> meaning of from whence . Ex.<br />
Onde venite , così tardi ?<br />
Whence do you come so late ?<br />
891. " Bensì " (" bene si ") means it is true . Ex.<br />
Sempre mi prometteva bene 2 (or bensì) del danaro, ma non<br />
ne dava mai.<br />
It is true that he always promises me money , but he never<br />
me gives me any.<br />
892. " Ben altro " means quite ano<strong>the</strong>r matter . Ex.<br />
Ben altro udrai fra poco.<br />
You will soon hear more important news .<br />
893. " Pure " is sometimes used for " solamente ," only. Ex.<br />
Cio accadde non pure una volta, ma cento .<br />
That happened not only once, but a hundred times .<br />
894. " Pure " is sometimes used to give strength to an expression.<br />
Ex.<br />
A che pur pensa ?<br />
What are you still thinking of ?<br />
Dite pure quel che volete .<br />
You may say what you like .<br />
253
895. " E pure," or "eppure," means <strong>and</strong> yet. Ex.<br />
" E pur si move ! " (Galileo ).<br />
It moves though !<br />
896. " Ne pure," or " neppure " means not even . Ex.<br />
Non avevo neppure un soldo.<br />
I <strong>had</strong> not even a half-penny.<br />
897. " Pur troppo " means alas too well, alas too true . Ex.<br />
È vero che Carlo è fuggito ?<br />
Is it true that Charles has fled ?<br />
Pur troppo!<br />
It is but too true !<br />
1 The word " onde," as a noun, means waves .<br />
898. 2 " Bene " <strong>and</strong> "bensì" may be put before <strong>the</strong> verb. Ex.<br />
"Bene (or Bensi ) mi prometteva sempre del danaro, ma," etc.<br />
ON ADVERBS. 197<br />
899. SENTENCES CONTAINING ADVERBS OF QUANTITY.<br />
(To be learnt by heart .)<br />
Ho speso abbastanza (a) denaro ; più (b)di voi; non voglio<br />
spender di più.<br />
I have spent enough money ; more than you; I will not<br />
spend any more .<br />
Studiano poco; meno (b) di noi ; non più di tre ore ogni<br />
giorno.<br />
They study little ; less than we do ; not more than three<br />
hours a day.<br />
Io veduto solamente (c) tre elefanti in vita mia.<br />
I have only seen three elephants in my life .<br />
Non avevo che (d) cento lire sterline , eppure furono<br />
abbastanza.<br />
I <strong>had</strong> only a hundred pounds, <strong>and</strong> yet it was enough ,<br />
Era alquanto (e) spiacente di non essere stato eletto , ma<br />
non molto.<br />
He was somewhat displeased at not having been elected ,<br />
but not much.<br />
Fu quasi (f) ucciso in quella zuffa ; erano tre contr' uno.<br />
254
He was almost killed in that quarrel ; <strong>the</strong>y were three to<br />
one.<br />
Non penso guari , è poi mi com<strong>and</strong>o un poco (g) di danaro in<br />
prestito .<br />
He did not think much, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>n asked me for a little<br />
money as a loan.<br />
Vi erano molti soldati alla rivista ?<br />
Were <strong>the</strong>re <strong>many</strong> soldiers at <strong>the</strong> review ?<br />
A un dipresso (h) ventimila .<br />
About twenty thous<strong>and</strong>.<br />
EXERCISE LXXIX.<br />
At what o'clock must <strong>the</strong>y depart ? At half past seven. Then, I<br />
shall lay <strong>the</strong> cloth at once. The dinner will be ready in half an<br />
hour. Walk slowly, my daughter, I have a pain in my foot ; I<br />
<strong>cannot</strong> walk quickly. Do what I tell you, o<strong>the</strong>rwise I shall dismiss<br />
you. Do you speak in earnest ? Certainly. Why did you break my<br />
penknife ? I did not do it (209) on purpose ; it was a mere<br />
accident. I tell you frankly that you ought to apologise to him, at<br />
once. He started up suddenly (885, o) <strong>and</strong> gave Francis a fearful<br />
blow. The most beautiful flowers last but (802) a short time . The<br />
compass was not invented (799) by a mariner, nor (800) <strong>the</strong><br />
telescope by an astronomer, nor <strong>the</strong> microscope by a philosopher,<br />
nor printing by a man of letters, nor gunpowder by a soldier. The<br />
loadstone always points towards <strong>the</strong> north.<br />
(a) Or a sufficienza .<br />
(b) The adverbs " più " <strong>and</strong> " meno " are <strong>the</strong> comparative forms of<br />
"molto " <strong>and</strong> " poco."<br />
(c) Or soltanto.<br />
(d) When only means but, it is translated into Italian by "non verb<br />
che."<br />
(e) Or un tantino .<br />
(f) Or presso che.<br />
(g) " Poco " is <strong>the</strong> only ad(verb) followed by "di."<br />
(h) Or presso a poco.<br />
198<br />
ON PREPOSITIONS.<br />
LESSON XXXIX.<br />
ON PREPOSITIONS.<br />
255
900. THE PRINCIPAL PREPOSITIONS ARE :<br />
Di, of. Accanto a, beside .<br />
A, after . Ad onta di, | near.<br />
In in within. Presso a, |<br />
Per |for, through, Intorno a, |about,<br />
|in order to. D'intorno a, |- around,<br />
Con with. Attorno a, |near.<br />
Fra, or tra, | Lontano da, |- far.<br />
Infra, or intra, | between. Lungi da, |<br />
In me<strong>zz</strong>o a, | Lungo, | along,<br />
Entro, | Lunghesso, | alongside.<br />
Su, or |on, upon. Stante, |<br />
Sopra, | Secondo, |- according to.<br />
Sotto, <strong>under</strong>, A seconda di, |<br />
Di sotto di, <strong>under</strong>neath. Durante, during.<br />
Dentro, in, Eccetto, | except.<br />
Di dentro di, , within. Salvo, |<br />
Fuori di, outside. Mediante, |by means of,<br />
Di fuori di, | Rispetto a, |concerning.<br />
Prima di, | Tranne, excepting.<br />
Avanti di, 1 | Senza, without.<br />
Davanti a, before. Contro, | against.<br />
Innanzi di, 1 | Contra, |<br />
Dinanzi di, ; | In vece di, instead of.<br />
Dietro a, - behind. Oltre, beyond.<br />
Di dietro a, | Verso, | towards.<br />
In faccia a, | Alla volta di, |<br />
Rimpetto a, |- opposite, Malgrado, in spite of,<br />
Di rimpetto a, | Nonostante, |notwithst<strong>and</strong>ing<br />
Dopo, after. Ad onta di, |<br />
1 " Avanti," " innanzi," " vicino," <strong>and</strong> " lontano " can also be used<br />
as adverbs.<br />
199 ON PREPOSITIONS.<br />
THE PREPOSITION "DI," OF.<br />
901. The preposition " di " is used to denote relation of property,<br />
affinity , <strong>and</strong> connection between one word <strong>and</strong> ano<strong>the</strong>r . Ex.<br />
Il padrone di questa casa.<br />
The master of this house .<br />
Una casa di campagna .<br />
256
A country-house .<br />
Il libro di mio fratello .<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r's book.<br />
La Divina Commedia di Dante .<br />
Dante's Divine Comedy.<br />
Il regno di Spagna.<br />
The kingdom of Spain.<br />
Il duomo di Milano .<br />
The ca<strong>the</strong>dral of Milan .<br />
Un abito d'inverno<br />
A winter coat.<br />
Questo signore è di Napoli.<br />
This gentleman is from Naples.<br />
902. The Preposition " di " is also used to connect two nouns<br />
when <strong>the</strong> second of <strong>the</strong>m is <strong>the</strong> name of <strong>the</strong> material <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
object indicated by <strong>the</strong> first noun is "made of," " full of," or "deals<br />
in." Ex.<br />
Un cappello di paglia.<br />
A straw hat.<br />
Un bicchiere di vino.<br />
A glass of wine .<br />
Mercanti di te.<br />
Tea merchants .<br />
903. The Preposition " di " is also used after an adjective, or a<br />
past participle preceded by a verb, expressing any idea of rest, or<br />
state . Ex.<br />
Il mio cavallo era coperto fango.<br />
My horse was covered with mud<br />
Egli era carico di onori.<br />
He was loaded with honours.<br />
Ella è dotata di bonissimo ingegno .'<br />
She is endowed with very great intelligence .<br />
Parve contento di vedermi .<br />
He appeared pleased at seeing me.<br />
Sono felice di proporle cosa di tanta utilità<br />
I am happy to propose to you a thing so useful .<br />
257
Mio padre mi ha promesso di condurmi a Milano .<br />
My fa<strong>the</strong>r has promised to take me to Milan .<br />
Ho dimenticato di m<strong>and</strong>are queste lettere alla posta.<br />
I have forgotten to send <strong>the</strong>se letters to <strong>the</strong> post.<br />
904. The Preposition " di " is also used in <strong>the</strong> phrases :<br />
Viaggiar di giorno, 1 ; di notte, to travel by day, by night .<br />
Vivere di frutti, di legumi , &c., to live on fruit, on vegetables , &c.<br />
1 That is to say " in tempo di giorno."<br />
200 ON PREPOSITIONS.<br />
THE PREPOSITION "A" TO, AT.<br />
905. The preposition " a " is used to indicate <strong>the</strong> end or object to<br />
<strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong> action of <strong>the</strong> verb is directed . Ex.<br />
Ho parlato a Carlo.<br />
I have spoken to Charles .<br />
Vado sovente a Parigi .<br />
I often go to Paris .<br />
906. The preposition " a " is also used to denote a state . Ex.<br />
Mia sorella è a scuola.<br />
My sister is at school.<br />
Mio padre è a casa di Paolo.<br />
My fa<strong>the</strong>r is at Paul's.<br />
Mio fratello è ancora a Venezia .<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r is still in Venice .<br />
907. The preposition " a " is also used to connect two nouns, <strong>the</strong><br />
first of <strong>which</strong> denotes <strong>the</strong> means by <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong> object expressed by<br />
<strong>the</strong> first noun acts. Ex.<br />
Un battello a vapore.<br />
A steam -boat.<br />
Un mulino a vento .<br />
A windmill .<br />
Un bastimento a vela .<br />
A sailing -vessel .<br />
908. The preposition " a " is also used to indicate <strong>the</strong> form in<br />
<strong>which</strong> an object is made. Ex.<br />
Un abito a coda di rondine .<br />
258
A swallow'-tail coat.<br />
909. The preposition " a " is also used in <strong>the</strong> sense of " with." Ex.<br />
Un campo a luppoli.<br />
A hop-field.<br />
Un cappello a larghe falde.<br />
A hat with a broad brim.<br />
Lucia portava un bel busto di broccato a fiori .<br />
Lucy wore a pretty bodice of flowered brocade.<br />
910. The preposition " a " is also used in <strong>the</strong> following phrases :<br />
Tagliare a fette .<br />
To cut in slices .<br />
Stare a bocca aperta.<br />
To remain open-mou<strong>the</strong>d.<br />
Stare a occhi bassi.<br />
To remain with downcast eyes ,.<br />
Cantare a meraviglia .<br />
To sing wonderfully well.<br />
Darsi a conoscere .<br />
To make one's -self known.<br />
Morire a centinaia .<br />
To die by hundreds.<br />
Andare a due a due, &c.<br />
To go two by two, &c.<br />
Un cannone carico a mitraglia . 1<br />
A cannon loaded with grapeshot.<br />
1 Besides <strong>the</strong> phrases given above , <strong>the</strong> preposition " a " is used in<br />
<strong>the</strong> verbal expressions " <strong>and</strong>are a gara," to vie, "stare a galla," to<br />
float, " tener a bada," (o trifle with, &c. , <strong>which</strong> have been already<br />
given .<br />
ON PREPOSITIONS. 201<br />
911. The preposition " a " is also used in <strong>the</strong> adverbial<br />
expressions "alla francese ," in <strong>the</strong> French fashion , " alla rinfusa ,"<br />
in a confusion , &c., already given , rule 885.<br />
912. The preposition "a" is also used before a verb in <strong>the</strong><br />
Infinitive mood, preceded by ano<strong>the</strong>r verb expressing motion . Ex.<br />
Venga a trovarmi domani.<br />
259
Come to see me to- morrow.<br />
Andate ad impostare queste lettere .<br />
Go to post <strong>the</strong>se letters .<br />
Venga a pranzo con me.<br />
Come <strong>and</strong> 1 dine with me.<br />
THE PREPOSITION "DA," FROM, BY, &c.<br />
913. The preposition " da " is used in <strong>the</strong> sense of " from." Ex.<br />
Arrivai ieri da Vienna .<br />
I arrived yesterday from Vienna .<br />
IO ricevuto regali da lui.<br />
I have received presents from him.<br />
Rafaello da Urbino mori all' eta di trentasette anni .<br />
Raphael (from) Urbino died at <strong>the</strong> age of thirty -seven .<br />
Rimase prigioniero da maggio fino a novembre .<br />
He remained a prisoner from May to November .<br />
914. The preposition "da " is also used in <strong>the</strong> sense of " by," "<br />
near ," "in <strong>the</strong> direction of," " through." Ex.<br />
And<strong>and</strong>o a Costantinopoli passai da Atene .<br />
In going to Constantinople I passed by A<strong>the</strong>ns .<br />
Nell' <strong>and</strong>are a scuola passai da Strada della Croce .<br />
In going to school I went through Cross Street .<br />
915. The preposition " da " is also used in <strong>the</strong> sense of "by" when<br />
preceded by a past participle . Ex.<br />
Egli è stimato da tutti.<br />
He is esteemed by everybody.<br />
Ho comprato un bellissimo quadro dipinto da L<strong>and</strong>seer .<br />
I have bought a beautiful picture painted by L<strong>and</strong>seer .<br />
916. The preposition " da " sometimes means "by myself," " by my<br />
own will," &c., " by yourself," " by your own will," &c. Ex.<br />
L'ha fatto da se.<br />
He did it by himself .<br />
Da me non venni .<br />
I did not come by my own will.<br />
260
1 As already stated, <strong>the</strong> preposition " a" is used in Italian instead<br />
of <strong>the</strong> English conjunction <strong>and</strong>, after a verb expressing motion.<br />
Ex.<br />
Andate a prendermi il mio cappello.<br />
Go <strong>and</strong> fetch my hat.<br />
202 ON PREPOSITIONS.<br />
917. The preposition " da " 1 is also used to connect two nouns,<br />
<strong>the</strong> first of <strong>which</strong> expresses <strong>the</strong> use or destination of <strong>the</strong> second.<br />
Ex.<br />
Carta da scrivere .<br />
Writing paper.<br />
Una bottiglia da vino.<br />
A wine bottle.<br />
Una veste da camera .<br />
A dressing -gown.<br />
Un istrumento da fiato.<br />
A wind instrument .<br />
Un cavallo da corsa.<br />
A race -horse .<br />
918. The preposition " da " is also used in <strong>the</strong> sense of " to,"<br />
"towards." Ex.<br />
Ecco là i vostri amici , <strong>and</strong>ate da loro.<br />
There are your friends , go to <strong>the</strong>m .<br />
919. The preposition " da " is also used in <strong>the</strong> sense of " at <strong>the</strong><br />
house of." Ex.<br />
Passerò da Lei domani, o posdomani .<br />
I will call on you to-morrow, or <strong>the</strong> day after to-morrow.<br />
920. The preposition " da " is also used in <strong>the</strong> sense of " where -<br />
with." Ex.<br />
Questo povero vecchio non ha da mangiare .<br />
This poor old man has nothing to eat.<br />
Datemi da scrivere ; voglio scrivere a mio fratello .<br />
Give me something to write with ; I want to write to my<br />
bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
921. The preposition "da" is also used in <strong>the</strong> sense of " fit for." Ex.<br />
Vi assicuro che non è cosa da ridere .<br />
261
I assure you it is no laughing matter .<br />
Mi ha fatto un azione da mariuolo .<br />
He played me a knavish trick .<br />
922. The preposition "da" is also used in <strong>the</strong> sense of "like a." Ex.<br />
Egli combatte da eroe , e mori da Cristiano .<br />
He fought like a hero , <strong>and</strong> died like a Christian .<br />
L' io sempre trattato da amico .<br />
I always treated him as a friend .<br />
Vi parlo da padrone, e voi dovreste ubbidirmi da servo .<br />
I speak to you as a master , <strong>and</strong> you should obey me as a<br />
servant .<br />
923. The preposition "da" is also used in <strong>the</strong> sense of " on." Ex.<br />
Da una parte c' era un bel praticello , dall' altra un vigneto.<br />
On one side <strong>the</strong>re was a little meadow, on <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r a pretty<br />
vineyard .<br />
924. 1 The expressions " da me," " da te," &c., must not be used<br />
instead of " a casa mia," &c., when ambiguity may be incurred ;<br />
for instance , I am going home , must be translated by " vado a<br />
casa," <strong>and</strong> not " vado da me."<br />
ON PREPOSITIONS. 203<br />
THE PREPOSITION " IN," IN, INTO.<br />
925. The Italian preposition "in" has generally <strong>the</strong> same meaning<br />
as <strong>the</strong> English preposition in, into. Ex.<br />
Sua moglie è in Svi<strong>zz</strong>era .<br />
His wife is in Switzerl<strong>and</strong> .<br />
L'ho tradotto in francese .<br />
I translated it into French .<br />
926. In Italian <strong>the</strong> preposition " in " does not require <strong>the</strong> definite<br />
article after it in sentences like <strong>the</strong> following :<br />
Era in giardino con Giovanni .<br />
He was in <strong>the</strong> garden with John,<br />
non vado mai in cucina .<br />
I never go into <strong>the</strong> kitchen .<br />
Carlo è in cantina a mettere vino in bottiglia.<br />
Charles is in <strong>the</strong> cellar bottling some wine .<br />
Aveva un bastone in mano.<br />
262
He <strong>had</strong> a stick in his h<strong>and</strong>.<br />
Essi discutono in istrada.<br />
They are discussing in <strong>the</strong> street .<br />
927. In sentences like <strong>the</strong> following <strong>the</strong> preposition " in " is not<br />
translated literally into English :<br />
Non posso stare in piedi.<br />
I <strong>cannot</strong> st<strong>and</strong> on my feet .<br />
Tiene il cappello in testa .<br />
He keeps his hat on his head.<br />
Aveva in dito un anello d'oro.<br />
He <strong>had</strong> a gold ring on his finger .<br />
Il pranzo era già in tavola.<br />
The dinner was already served .<br />
Lingua toscana in bocca romana .<br />
The Tuscan language as it is spoken by <strong>the</strong> Romans.<br />
Mi piace molto <strong>and</strong>are in barca.<br />
I am very fond of rowing on <strong>the</strong> river .<br />
Va in chiesa ogni Domenica .<br />
She goes to church every Sunday.<br />
Ando in Austria un mese fa.<br />
He went to Austria a month ago.<br />
Scriverò la mia lettera in un'ora.<br />
It will take me an hour to write my letter .<br />
THE PREPOSITION "PER," FOR, THROUGH, IN ORDER TO.<br />
928. The preposition " per " is also used in <strong>the</strong> sense of " for." Ex.<br />
L'io dipinto apposta per Lei.<br />
I painted it on purpose for you.<br />
929. The preposition "per" is also used in <strong>the</strong> sense of "in order<br />
to." Ex.<br />
Ritornerò presto per compiacervi .<br />
I will return soon to please you.<br />
930. The preposition " per " 1 is also used in <strong>the</strong> sense of<br />
because , on account of. Ex.<br />
Fu espulso per aver osato mettere in caricatura il suo,<br />
maestro .<br />
263
He was expelled because he caricatured his master<br />
1 In this case "per " is used instead of " per causa di," because, on<br />
account of.<br />
204 ON PREPOSITIONS.<br />
931. The preposition "per" is also used in <strong>the</strong> expressions " per<br />
uno," each , <strong>and</strong> " per tempo," early . Ex.<br />
Ricevettero uno scellino per uno, perché vennero per tempo<br />
They received a shilling each , because <strong>the</strong>y came early .<br />
932. The prepositions " su per" are used toge<strong>the</strong>r to express<br />
graphically an upward progress. Ex.<br />
Andammo su per la collina .<br />
We went up <strong>the</strong> hill .<br />
THE PREPOSITION "CON," WITH.<br />
933. The preposition " con " has generally <strong>the</strong> same meaning as<br />
<strong>the</strong> English preposition with. Ex.<br />
Oggi ho pranzato con un vecchio amico di scuola.<br />
To-day I dined with an old schoolfellow.<br />
Dipingo sempre con colori francesi .<br />
I always paint with French colours.<br />
"FRA," AND "TRA," BETWEEN , AMONGST.<br />
934. " Fra " <strong>and</strong> " tra," besides meaning "between," " amongst," "<br />
in <strong>the</strong> midst of," are used in <strong>the</strong> sense of " after <strong>the</strong> space of," "<br />
hence ." Ex.<br />
Scriverò la mia lettera fra un'ora.<br />
I shall write my letter in an hour (in an hour hence ).<br />
Carlo ritornerà fra (or da qui a) due mesi .<br />
Charles will return in two months (two months hence ).<br />
935. " Parlare tra se" means to speak to one's self. Ex.<br />
Egli soleva passeggiar soletto e parlare tra se ad alta voce.<br />
He used to walk alone speaking aloud to himself .<br />
THE PREPOSITIONS " SU," " SOPRA," "SOVRA," 1 ON, UPON.<br />
936. The prepositions " su," <strong>and</strong> " sopra," have generally <strong>the</strong> same<br />
meaning <strong>and</strong> are used in <strong>the</strong> same way as <strong>the</strong> English<br />
preposition on, upon. In <strong>the</strong> following sentences, however, " su "<br />
<strong>and</strong> " sopra " are translated by o<strong>the</strong>r prepositions than on or upon<br />
264
: Egli abitava una villa a venti He inhabited a villa twenty miglia<br />
sopra Firenze . miles beyond Florence .<br />
Partimmo in sull' alba, e ritornammo sulla sera .<br />
We started at break of day, <strong>and</strong> returned at dusk.<br />
Ordinarono un gr<strong>and</strong>issimo esercito per <strong>and</strong>are sopra<br />
nemici . (Boccaccio).<br />
They organised a very numerous army to go against <strong>the</strong><br />
enemy .<br />
1 The o<strong>the</strong>r prepositions given on page 198 do not require any<br />
explanation .<br />
ON THE COMPLEMENTS OF VERBS. 205<br />
LESSON XL.<br />
ON THE COMPLEMENTS OF VERBS.<br />
One of <strong>the</strong> most difficult things for English people learning<br />
Italian, is <strong>the</strong> proper use of <strong>the</strong> complements of verbs, that is to<br />
say, <strong>the</strong> proper use of <strong>the</strong> prepositions <strong>which</strong> ought to follow verbs<br />
to complete <strong>the</strong>ir meaning. In some cases <strong>the</strong> English <strong>and</strong> Italian<br />
languages agree on this point, but in <strong>many</strong> instances <strong>the</strong>re is a<br />
remarkable difference between <strong>the</strong>m, as will be shown in <strong>the</strong><br />
seven following exercises .<br />
937. VERBS WHICH DO NOT REQUIRE ANY PREPOSITION IN<br />
ITALIAN, ALTHOUGH THEY REQUIRE ONE AFTER THEM IN<br />
ENGLISH.<br />
EXERCISE LXXX.<br />
Do not listen to (a) him ; if he begins to 1 talk, he will not stop all<br />
day. I am waiting for (b) (251) my bro<strong>the</strong>r. I have been looking<br />
(714) for (c) some red ink this half hour. I have bought (to buy for)<br />
(d) <strong>the</strong>se steel pens for sixpence a dozen. Charles is well<br />
acquainted with (e) our affairs. We look upon (f) him as your best<br />
friend. She wished for (g) her mo<strong>the</strong>r's return. He puts off (h) his<br />
decision from (di) day to day ; I do not like that (608). I have asked<br />
(to ask for) (i) him for some matches 2 several times (602). They<br />
were (695) ignorant of (j) what we intended to do. I never met with<br />
(I have never met with) (k) a man so witty. Martial music<br />
inspires (inspire with) (I) soldiers with courage <strong>and</strong> confidence.<br />
She set off (m) yesterday morning by (per) <strong>the</strong> first train. I <strong>cannot</strong><br />
bear with (n) his nonsense any longer (817). He sold (to sell for) (o)<br />
his house for two hundred pounds (656).<br />
(a) Ascoltare .<br />
265
(b) Aspettare .<br />
(c) Cercare .<br />
(d) Comprare .<br />
(e) Conoscere .<br />
(f) Considerare .<br />
(g) Desiderate ,<br />
(h) Differire .<br />
(i) Dom<strong>and</strong>are a.<br />
(j) Ignorare .<br />
(k) Incontrare .<br />
(l) Inspirare a.<br />
(m)Partire .<br />
(n) Soffrire .<br />
(o) Vendere .<br />
938. 1 The expressions to begin to, to set about to, are rendered<br />
in Italian by " Mettersi a," " Cominciare a."<br />
939. 2 Match, "zolfanello."<br />
Match (in artillery ), " miccia ."<br />
Match (marriage ), " matrimonio ."<br />
To match , "assortire ."<br />
206 ON THE COMPLEMENTS OF VERBS.<br />
940. VERBS WHICH DO NOT REQUIRE ANY PREPOSITION IN<br />
ENGLISH, ALTHOUGH THEY REQUIRE ONE AFTER THEM IN<br />
ITALIAN.<br />
EXERCISE LXXXI.<br />
He wants (a) money to (225) furnish his house . He was told to<br />
mind (b) <strong>the</strong> horses while we were dining. They mocked (c) him,<br />
because he was poor. I ordered (d) him to leave <strong>the</strong> house , but he<br />
would not. I distrust (e) him. They displease (f) everybody. You will<br />
be punished, because you disobeyed (707) (g) your fa<strong>the</strong>r. We<br />
asked (h) him to take (459) us to <strong>the</strong> opera. She doubted (i) <strong>the</strong><br />
truth of his assertion. Every time (636) he entered (j) (697) <strong>the</strong><br />
drawing-room , he bowed to <strong>the</strong> company. For <strong>many</strong> years we<br />
enjoyed (k) (704) <strong>the</strong> advantages of his friendship. She taught us<br />
(707) (I) <strong>the</strong> art of painting upon china. She <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong>s (m) <strong>the</strong><br />
fine arts. He would not hurt (n) my reputation .<br />
EXERCISE LXXXII.<br />
He was punished, because he would not obey (o) <strong>the</strong> king's order.<br />
I am sure (636) she will never pardon him for (p) (184) having<br />
broken her (562) watch. They permitted (q) him to make sketches<br />
266
of <strong>the</strong> castle. I persuaded (r) him to buy <strong>the</strong> pictures. It pleased (s)<br />
<strong>the</strong>m to make me a (360) present of this pencil-case . He resisted<br />
(t) all <strong>the</strong> entreaties of his poor parents. Those who are not able to<br />
resist (t) temptations, ought (791) to avoid <strong>the</strong>m. He <strong>had</strong> to (790)<br />
renounce (u) his bad companions. They used (707) (v) cement for<br />
<strong>the</strong> foundation of that building. I am sure that he will outlive (w)<br />
his nephew. He sl<strong>and</strong>ers (x) everybody. He ordered (d) <strong>the</strong> waiter<br />
to bring him a glass of wine, <strong>and</strong> a bottle of soda -water. The<br />
rivulet entered (j) a dark cavern on <strong>the</strong> western side of <strong>the</strong> hill .<br />
(a) Abbisognare di.<br />
(b) Aver cura di.<br />
(c) Burlarsi di.<br />
(d) Comm<strong>and</strong>area ...di.<br />
(e) Diffidarsi di.<br />
(f) Dispiacere a.<br />
(g) Disubbidire a. .<br />
(h) Dom<strong>and</strong>are a...di.<br />
(i) Dubitare di.<br />
(I) Insegnare a.<br />
(j) Entrare in.<br />
(k) Godere di.<br />
(m)Intendersi di.<br />
(n) Nuocere a.<br />
(o) Obbedire a.<br />
(p) Perdonare a...di<br />
(q) Permettere a...di.<br />
(r) Persuadere a...di.<br />
(s) Piacere a.<br />
(t) Resist ere a.<br />
(u) Rinunciare a.<br />
(v) Servirsi di.<br />
(w) Sopravvivere a.<br />
(x) Sparlare di.<br />
ON THE COMPLEMENTS OF VERBS. 207<br />
941. VERBS WHICH REQUIRE ONE PREPOSITION IN ITALIAN,<br />
AND A DIFFERENT ONE IN ENGLISH.<br />
EXERCISE LXXXIII.<br />
The garden was embellished with (a) beautiful marble statues.<br />
This country abounds with (b) corn. His sword was adorned with<br />
(c) jewels. He grieved at (d) <strong>the</strong> loss of his property. He was<br />
267
satisfied with (e) (696) <strong>the</strong> little he <strong>had</strong> earned. They were<br />
burning with (f) indignation. When his deceit was (768)<br />
discovered, he blushed with (g) shame . I blame him for (h) having<br />
fled (685). The ship was laden with (i) provisions for <strong>the</strong> besieged<br />
fortress. All <strong>the</strong> guns were loaded with (j) balls. They loaded him<br />
with (k) kindness. He could (767, 695) not be consoled for (I) <strong>the</strong><br />
loss of his child. They all agree (842 , g) that it is a poem to be<br />
(921) greatly admired .<br />
EXERCISE LXXXIV.<br />
They could (704) not agree about (m) <strong>the</strong> price . All <strong>the</strong> furniture<br />
was (696) covered with (n) dust. I took possession of <strong>the</strong> room<br />
destined for (o) me. Everything depends upon (p) what he is going<br />
to say. He parted with (q) (704) his vicious horse as soon as he<br />
could. He was (702) endowed with (r) <strong>the</strong> finest (518) gifts that<br />
nature can give. They <strong>had</strong> filled (with) (s) <strong>the</strong> rooms with <strong>the</strong> old<br />
furniture <strong>the</strong>y <strong>had</strong> taken from <strong>the</strong> castle. He was presented with<br />
(t) a beautiful gold watch (346). I congratulated him upon (u) <strong>the</strong><br />
success he has obtained. He glories in (v) <strong>the</strong> mischief he does.<br />
She wore a beautiful white satin dress trimmed with (w) pearls.<br />
He seized upon (x) our goods.<br />
(a) Abbellire di. 1<br />
(i) Caricare di.<br />
(q) Disfarsi di.<br />
(b) Abbondare cii.<br />
(j) Caricare a.<br />
(r) Dotare di.<br />
(c) Adornare di.<br />
(k) Colmare di.<br />
(s) Empire di. 1<br />
(d) Affliggersi di.<br />
(I) Consolare di.<br />
(t) Far regalo a...di.<br />
(e) Appagarsi di.<br />
(m) Convenire di. 2<br />
(u) Felicitare di.<br />
(f) Ardere di.<br />
(n) Coprire di. 3<br />
(v) Glorificarsi di.<br />
(g) Arrossire di. 1<br />
(o) Destinare a.<br />
268
(w) Guarnire di. 1<br />
(h) Biasimare di.<br />
(p) Dipendere da.<br />
(x) Impadronirsi di. 1<br />
1 This verb is conjugated like " Finire ."<br />
942. 2 " Convenire " (irregular) besides <strong>the</strong> above meaning of to<br />
agree on, or about, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> meaning of to be obliged, or compelled,<br />
explained in rule 136, it has also <strong>the</strong> meaning of to meet by<br />
appointment . Ex.<br />
Convennero nel Teatro della Scala .<br />
They met in <strong>the</strong> Teatro della Scala .<br />
3 This verb is conjugated like " Servire ."<br />
208 ON THE COMPLEMENTS OF VERBS.<br />
943. VERBS WHICH REQUIRE ONE PREPOSITION IN ITALIAN,<br />
AND A DIFFERENT ONE IN ENGLISH.<br />
EXERCISE LXXXV.<br />
He was inflamed with (a) rage , on hearing (686) <strong>the</strong> losses he <strong>had</strong><br />
sustained. .He inquired about (b) <strong>the</strong> state of <strong>the</strong> country. The<br />
table was (696) covered with (c) books <strong>and</strong> papers. He fell in love<br />
with (d) my cousin. He languished from (703) (e) hunger for (311)<br />
three days, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>n died. He praised <strong>the</strong>m for (f) <strong>the</strong>ir honesty.<br />
She wondered at (g) <strong>the</strong> sudden return of my bro<strong>the</strong>r. He was<br />
threatened with (h) (767) death if he would not confess <strong>the</strong> truth.<br />
He meddles with (i) everybody's business. His mind was stored<br />
with (j) useful knowledge. The <strong>the</strong>ft was concealed a long time<br />
from (k) everybody. He was fed on (I) (703) fish <strong>and</strong> fruit for three<br />
weeks. They were oppressed with (m) taxes. I shall call upon (n)<br />
you this evening .<br />
EXERCISE LXXXVI.<br />
What were you thinking of (o) when I met you ? They wept for (p)<br />
joy when <strong>the</strong>y heard that <strong>the</strong>ir fa<strong>the</strong>r <strong>had</strong> arrived. They profited<br />
by (q) <strong>the</strong> ruin of <strong>the</strong>ir friend. He was punished for (r) <strong>the</strong> crime<br />
he <strong>had</strong> committed. They were speaking about (of) politics (419) till<br />
midnight. They rejoiced at (s) <strong>the</strong> good news. He laughed at (t) <strong>the</strong><br />
misfortune of my bro<strong>the</strong>r. He returned thanks for (u) <strong>the</strong> favour<br />
he <strong>had</strong> received. He will have (790) to answer for (v) his bad<br />
conduct. They were surfeited with (w) food. In consequence of his<br />
behaviour at <strong>the</strong> last election he has (is) decreased in (x)<br />
popularity. He used (697) to take (y) <strong>the</strong> money from his sister. He<br />
269
triumphed over (z) his enemies at last. He lives upon (aa) a<br />
pension granted to him by <strong>the</strong> king .<br />
(a) Infiammare di.<br />
(b) Informarsi di.<br />
(c) Ingombrare di.<br />
(d) Innamorarsi di.<br />
(e) Languire di. 1<br />
(f) Lodare di.<br />
(g) Maravigliarsi di.<br />
(h) Minacciare di.<br />
(i) Ingerirsi in. 1<br />
(I) Nutrire di.<br />
(j) Munire di. 1<br />
(k) Nascondere a.<br />
(m) Opprimere di.<br />
(n) Passare da.<br />
(o) Pensare a.<br />
(p) Piangere di.<br />
(q) Profittare di.<br />
(r) Punire di. 1<br />
(s) Rallegrarsi di.<br />
(t) Ridersi di.<br />
(u) Ringraziare di.<br />
(v) Rispondere di.<br />
(w) Satollarsi di.<br />
(x) Scemare di.<br />
(y) Togliere a.<br />
(z) Trionfare di.<br />
(aa)Vivere di.<br />
1 This verb is conjugated like " Finire ."<br />
ON CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS . 209<br />
LESSON XLI.<br />
ON CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS .<br />
1. ON CONJUNCTIONS .<br />
944. The Italian conjunctions are followed by verbs ei<strong>the</strong>r in <strong>the</strong><br />
Indicative , <strong>the</strong> Subjunctive , or <strong>the</strong> Infinitive Mood.<br />
945. THE FOLLOWING CONJUNCTIONS GOVERN THE VERB IN<br />
THE INDICATIVE Mood.<br />
E, <strong>and</strong>. Pure, |<br />
270
E pure, eppure 1 <strong>and</strong> yet. Tuttavia , |<br />
O, or. Tuttavolta , |yet,<br />
O . . .o, ) | Nonostante , |for all that,<br />
Ovvero...ovvero, |ei<strong>the</strong>r ... or. Nondimeno, |never<strong>the</strong>less.<br />
Ossia...ossia, I | Nulladimeno, |<br />
Non (verb)<br />
ne...ne,<br />
nor.<br />
nei<strong>the</strong>r...<br />
271<br />
Ciononpertanto |<br />
Ma, but. Con tutto ciò, |<br />
Però, |however . Anche , |also,<br />
Pertanto , | Altresi , |moreover .<br />
Perché , | Ezi<strong>and</strong>io, |<br />
Perocché , | In fine , |in fact.<br />
Perciocché , |because , In somma , |<br />
Conciossiaché , |since , in as Se non che, |<br />
Poiché , |much as. Salvo che, |except that,<br />
Giacché , | Eccetto che, |<br />
Stanteché , | Tranne che, |<br />
Quindi, | Secondo che, according as.<br />
Laonde, |<strong>the</strong>refore. Cioé<br />
Così, | Cioè a dire, |that is to say.<br />
Anzi, |nay, more, Vale a dire, |<br />
Che dico, |on <strong>the</strong><br />
contrary.<br />
Stante, referring to.<br />
Di più, | Tanto più che, |so much <strong>the</strong><br />
Inoltre, | |more so that<br />
D' altronde, |Besides. Qu<strong>and</strong>' è così, in that case.<br />
Oltracché, | Qu<strong>and</strong>' ecco, when, behold.<br />
Oltracciò, | Ecco perché, that is why.<br />
946. The conjunction "anzi " is very expressive, it means on <strong>the</strong><br />
contrary, fur<strong>the</strong>r , nay, ra<strong>the</strong>r . Ex.<br />
Egli venne a vederci , anzi pranza con noi.<br />
He came to see us, nay more , he dined with us.<br />
" Anzi impediva tanto 'l mio cammino ." (Dante ).<br />
Nay, ra<strong>the</strong>r did impede so much my way.<br />
1 " E pure " has been illustrated in rule 894.<br />
210 ON CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS .
947. NOTE. As <strong>the</strong> Conjunctions <strong>which</strong> govern verbs in <strong>the</strong><br />
Subjunctive Mood were given in rule 730 ( page 162) <strong>and</strong> rule 740<br />
(page 164), <strong>the</strong>y will not be repeated here .<br />
948. THE FOLLOWING CONJUNCTIONS GOVERN THE VERB IN<br />
THE INFINITIVE MOOD :<br />
A fine di, in order to. Per tema di, for fear of<br />
Avanti di before. Per paura di, for fear of<br />
A condizione di, On condition of, A meno di, unless.<br />
Con patto di, On condition of, Lungi dal, far from.<br />
2. ON INTERJECTIONS . 1<br />
949. Besides <strong>the</strong> interjections ah ! oh ! <strong>which</strong> in Italian, as in<br />
most languages, indicate almost any sudden emotion of <strong>the</strong> mind,<br />
<strong>the</strong> following are <strong>the</strong> principal Italian interjections :<br />
950. ADMIRATION.<br />
Buono! good!<br />
Capperi! Affe ! I say !<br />
Bene ! Bravo! well done!<br />
Bis! encore !<br />
Viva ! Evviva ! hurrah !<br />
951. ENCOURAGEMENT .<br />
Su ! Via ! Suvvia ! come now !<br />
Animo ! Coraggio ! courage !<br />
952. ENTREATY.<br />
Deh ! Di grazia ! pray !<br />
Mercè ! mercy !<br />
953. WARNING .<br />
Guai a voi ! woe to you !<br />
Badate ! take care !<br />
Piano ! Adagio! softly!<br />
954. GRIEF AND SURPRISE .<br />
Ahi! Ahi lasso! ay! oh dear!<br />
Aime ! Oime ! oh me!<br />
Lasso! Lasso me! alas!<br />
272
Che peccato ! what a pity !<br />
Povero me! poor me!<br />
O cielo ! O heavens !<br />
955. AVERSION AND INDIGNATION.<br />
Ma che! nonsense !<br />
Le zucche ! twice ! not I !<br />
Via! Oibò! pshaw! fie!<br />
Vergogna ! for shame !<br />
956. CALLING AND SILENCING .<br />
Ehi! Olà! St! oh hey! st!<br />
Silenzio ! silence !<br />
Zitto ! Cheto ! hush ! be still !<br />
Basta! Basta così! enough !<br />
957. 1 The interjection "O...! " is only used, before a noun, in <strong>the</strong><br />
lofty style : it expresses different emotions of <strong>the</strong> mind. Ex.<br />
O crudel destino ! O cruel destiny ! O patria mia ! O my country !<br />
ON PREPOSITIONS, INTERJECTIONS , ETC. 211<br />
EXERCISE LXXXVII.<br />
The eagle rises above <strong>the</strong> clouds. The wise man acts according to<br />
(900) <strong>the</strong> dictates of reason. He has gone to America in spite of<br />
(900) <strong>the</strong> advice of his best friends. The fleet <strong>cannot</strong> sail on<br />
account of (930) contrary winds. On (298) that occasion he acted<br />
like a (925) hero. You were playing, instead of (900) studying.<br />
When I went out, I saw : 1 her leaning against <strong>the</strong> window. Here<br />
is Mrs. Pettegola ; she comes to propose an arrangement between<br />
us two. What a bore ! Why does she not mind her own affairs ; she<br />
has nothing to do with this matter. 2 Margaret wrote me a line 3<br />
<strong>the</strong> day before yesterday, informing me of her intended departure<br />
for Venice , in a week (549), or ten days.<br />
EXERCISE LXXXVIII.<br />
"About that time I walked out into <strong>the</strong> fields towards Bow. Here 4 I<br />
met a poor man walking on <strong>the</strong> bank of <strong>the</strong> river." " On <strong>the</strong><br />
fifteenth of May <strong>the</strong>y were ten miles from Pekin. They <strong>had</strong> now 5<br />
been travelling for six months." The immediate loss of<br />
Constantinople may be ascribed (771) to <strong>the</strong> bullet, or arrow,<br />
<strong>which</strong> pierced <strong>the</strong> gauntlet of John Giustiniani. " Into <strong>the</strong><br />
273
ecclesiastic federation our Saxon ancestors were admitted. 5 A<br />
regular communication was opened between our shores <strong>and</strong> that<br />
part of Europe in <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong> traces of ancient power <strong>and</strong> policy<br />
were yet discernible ." Courage ! (951) soldiers, fear nothing (672).<br />
For shame ! (955) said he, to insult a poor old man. Softly (953), do<br />
not fly into a passion. Pray ! (952) do not make such a noise. We<br />
have arrived at <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> grammar . Hurrah !<br />
958. 1 After <strong>the</strong> verbs " vedere ," to see, <strong>and</strong> "scorgere ," to<br />
perceive, <strong>the</strong> Past Participle is employed to describe a person or<br />
thing in a state . Ex.<br />
L'ho veduta appoggiata alla finestra .<br />
I saw her leaning against <strong>the</strong> window.<br />
959. 2 The expressions to concern, to have something to do with<br />
<strong>the</strong> matter, are translated into Italian by <strong>the</strong> verb "entrare " <strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> adverb " ci," thus: " Io c'entro," " tu c'entri," " egli c'entra," "noi<br />
c'entriamo ," &c. It concerns me, &c.<br />
960. 3 A line in writing is translated by " una riga ; " a line made<br />
with a pencil, or a pen, by " una linea ; " <strong>and</strong> a line of poetry, by "<br />
un verso ."<br />
961. 4 When here is used in English instead of <strong>the</strong>re, it must be<br />
translated into Italian by "là," <strong>the</strong>re .<br />
962. 5 When now is used in English instead of <strong>the</strong>n, it must be<br />
translated into Italian by " allora" <strong>the</strong>n .<br />
963. 6 In a case like this, when, in English <strong>the</strong>re are several<br />
sentences containing verbs in <strong>the</strong> passive form , in Italian, each<br />
sentence should be given a different turn.<br />
In this particular case <strong>the</strong> first phrase should be translated as if<br />
it was, " Our Saxon ancestors were admitted into," &c. The<br />
second should be translated as if it was, "One opened (or<br />
established) a regular communication," &c. The third must be<br />
translated so as to introduce "si," followed by <strong>the</strong> verb in <strong>the</strong><br />
singular , or plural, according to rule 771.<br />
212 TRANSPOSITION OF WORDS IN ITALIAN SENTENCES .<br />
TRANSPOSITION OF WORDS IN ITALIAN SENTENCES .<br />
964. In Italian poetry, words are constantly transposed so as to<br />
add force, <strong>and</strong> impart harmony to <strong>the</strong> verses, but in modern<br />
Italian prose <strong>the</strong> words in sentences preserve, as a rule , <strong>the</strong> most<br />
simple <strong>and</strong> direct order, <strong>and</strong> are arranged in accordance with <strong>the</strong><br />
274
ules explained in this grammar. 1 In some cases, however,<br />
clearness, force, <strong>and</strong> fluency of diction are obtained by inverting<br />
<strong>the</strong> order of words. 2 The following examples may be interesting<br />
<strong>and</strong> instructive to <strong>the</strong> student :<br />
I. " Salirono la scala Don Michele e Boscherino, è vennero alla<br />
camera dov'era il duca," ( D'AzEGLio) instead of " Don Michele e<br />
Boscherino salirono la scala, &c.,"<br />
Don Michele <strong>and</strong> Boscherino mounted <strong>the</strong> stairs, <strong>and</strong> entered <strong>the</strong><br />
room where <strong>the</strong> duke was.<br />
II. " Ventitré o ventiquattro giorni stettero i vostri fuggitivi nel<br />
castello, in me<strong>zz</strong>o a un movimento continue," ( MANZONI) instead<br />
of " I vostri fuggitivi stettero nel castello ventitré o ventiquattro<br />
giorni , in me<strong>zz</strong>o a un movimento continue , "<br />
Our fugitives remained twenty-three or twenty -four days in <strong>the</strong><br />
castle , in <strong>the</strong> midst of a general movement .<br />
III. " Egli solo delle vostre ragioni è della mia fede potrà esser<br />
giudice ," (MONTI) instead of " Egli solo potrà esser giudice , &c.,"<br />
He alone can be <strong>the</strong> judge of your reasons , <strong>and</strong> of my fidelity .<br />
IV. " Alle premure reiterate ed autorevoli , Caterina rispose<br />
sempre con un rifiuto," ( TOMMASEO) instead of " Caterina<br />
rispose sempre con un rifiuto alle premure reiterate ed<br />
autorevoli ,"<br />
Ca<strong>the</strong>rine always answered with a refusal to <strong>the</strong> often repeated<br />
<strong>and</strong> authoritative entreaties .<br />
V. " Ma a nessuno (dei forni) la gente accorse in numero tale da<br />
poter intraprender tutto," ( MANZONI) instead of " Ma la gente non<br />
accorse a nessuno , &c.,"<br />
But to none (of <strong>the</strong> bakers' shops) did <strong>the</strong> people rush in sufficient<br />
numbers to be able to <strong>under</strong>take everything .<br />
VI. " Fin qui può correre il mio servigio," ( MONTI) instead of " Il<br />
mio servigio può correre fin qui,"<br />
Thus far my services may extend.<br />
VII. " La fantasia si rifugio fredda nella mia memoria," ( FoscoLo)<br />
instead of " La fredda fantasia si rifugio nella mia mem oria ,"<br />
My fancy (imagination ] shrank cold into my memory .<br />
275
1 In Manzoni's celebrated novel " I Promessi Sposi," <strong>which</strong> is <strong>the</strong><br />
best written book in modern Italian, upwards of ninety sentences<br />
out of every hundred are written in direct syntax, entirely in<br />
harmony with modern thoughts <strong>and</strong> feelings .<br />
2 This matter belongs ra<strong>the</strong>r to rhetoric than to grammar,<br />
never<strong>the</strong>less it may be acceptable not to leave it wholly unnoticed<br />
here .<br />
213 IDIOMS AND SAYINGS.<br />
IDIOMS AND SAYINGS.<br />
1 Non veggo l' ora di parlargli .<br />
I long to speak to him.<br />
I do not see <strong>the</strong> hour of speaking to him.<br />
2 Costui è nato vestito .<br />
That fellow was born with a silver spoon in his mouth.<br />
That fellow was born dressed.<br />
3 Egli vuol salvar la capra e i cavoli .<br />
He wants to run with <strong>the</strong> hare <strong>and</strong> hunt with <strong>the</strong> hounds.<br />
He wishes to save <strong>the</strong> goat <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> cabbages.<br />
4 Sfido io! sa ben condurre la sua barca.<br />
I ra<strong>the</strong>r think so ; he can paddle his own canoe .<br />
I challenge (any one to do better) ; he knows how to steer his<br />
boat.<br />
5 Oramai siamo a buon porto.<br />
We are now out of danger.<br />
Now we are in a good harbour.<br />
6 Non si può fare un buco nell' acqua.<br />
There's no washing <strong>the</strong> black-a-moor white .<br />
One <strong>cannot</strong> make a hole in <strong>the</strong> water .<br />
7 Questo raga<strong>zz</strong>o ha il cuore in bocca.<br />
This boy is very sincere .<br />
This boy has his heart in his mouth.<br />
8 Suo fratello non ha sale in zucca.<br />
His bro<strong>the</strong>r is weak -minded.<br />
His bro<strong>the</strong>r has no salt in his pumpkin (head).<br />
9 Gli è venuto il grillo di viaggiare .<br />
He has taken a fancy to travel .<br />
The grasshopper (whim ) has come to him to travel .<br />
276
10 È come portar acqua al mare .<br />
It is like carrying coals to Newcastle .<br />
11 Egli ha perduto la tramontana (/ la bussola).<br />
He is quite bewildered (or at his wit's end).<br />
He has lost <strong>the</strong> point marking north (or <strong>the</strong> mariner's compass).<br />
12 Ei cerca sempre il pelo nell' ovo.<br />
He is always very particular .<br />
He always looks for a hair in <strong>the</strong> egg.<br />
13 Costui si compra brighe a denari contanti .<br />
This man wants to get into trouble.<br />
This man buys troubles with cash.<br />
14 Parlate sul serio o per ischerzo ?<br />
Do you speak in earnest or in jest ?<br />
15 Fare un viaggio e due servizi .<br />
To kill two birds with one stone .<br />
16 Questo c'entra come il cavolo a merenda .<br />
This is entirely beside <strong>the</strong> question .<br />
This enters in it like <strong>the</strong> cabbage in a picnic .<br />
LITERAL TRANSLATION.<br />
214 IDIOMS AND SAYINGS.<br />
IDIOMS AND SAYINGS.<br />
1 Ma sapete che ne va la vita ?<br />
But do you know that life is at stake ?<br />
But do you know that for it goes life (life is risked ).<br />
2 Colui fa la gatta morta, ma è molto astuto.<br />
That fellow looks as if butter would not melt in his mouth, but he<br />
is very astute .<br />
That fellow shams <strong>the</strong> dead cat, but he is very astute .<br />
3 Promette mari e monti , per tenermi a bocca dolce.<br />
He is very prodigal of promises with me, in order to keep me<br />
quiet .<br />
He promises seas <strong>and</strong> mountains to keep my mouth sweet .<br />
4 Egli vuol vendere lucciole per lanterne .<br />
He wants to make one believe that <strong>the</strong> moon is made of green<br />
cheese .<br />
He wishes to sell glow-worms for lanterns .<br />
5 Non posso trovare il b<strong>and</strong>olo della matassa .<br />
277
I <strong>cannot</strong> find <strong>the</strong> proper way.<br />
I <strong>cannot</strong> find <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> skein .<br />
6 I paperi vogliono menar a ber le oche.<br />
The goslings try to teach <strong>the</strong> g<strong>and</strong>ers how to swim .<br />
The goslings wish to lead <strong>the</strong> g<strong>and</strong>ers to drink .<br />
7 Camminavano a braccetto.<br />
They were walking arm-in-arm.<br />
8 Non so cosa. abbia nome .<br />
I don't know what his name is.<br />
9 La mia finestra da sur un belli ssimo giardino .<br />
My window looks upon a beautiful garden.<br />
10 La collera ha la meglio della sua ragione .<br />
Passion prevails over his reason .<br />
Anger has <strong>the</strong> better over his reason<br />
11 Non li posso soffrire perché lavorano sempre sott'acqua.<br />
I <strong>cannot</strong> bear <strong>the</strong>m because <strong>the</strong>y always act in an <strong>under</strong>h<strong>and</strong><br />
manner .<br />
"Sott'acqua" literally means <strong>under</strong> water .<br />
12 Essa rende sempre pane per focaccia .<br />
She always gives tit for tat.<br />
She always gives bread for bun.<br />
13 Il bosco si estende oltre il tiro dell'occhio .<br />
The wood extends fur<strong>the</strong>r than <strong>the</strong> eye can see.<br />
The wood extends beyond <strong>the</strong> reach of <strong>the</strong> eye.<br />
14 Egli s'intende di libri.<br />
He is a good judge of books.<br />
He <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong>s books.<br />
15 Ma perché la prende con me ?<br />
Why do you find fault with me ?<br />
But why do you take (up) <strong>the</strong> matter with me ?<br />
16 Auguro a tutti felicissime feste è buon capo d' anno.<br />
I wish you all a merry Christmas <strong>and</strong> a happy new year .<br />
I wish to all very happy feasts , <strong>and</strong> a good head of <strong>the</strong> year .<br />
LITERAL TRANSLATION.<br />
215 PROVERBS.<br />
ITALIAN PROVERBS.<br />
1 Volere , e potere.<br />
278
Where <strong>the</strong>re's a will, <strong>the</strong>re's a way.<br />
2 A chi ha testa , cappello.<br />
A good head is never in want of a hat.<br />
He who has a ( good) head, is never short of a hat.<br />
3 Acqua cheta rovina i ponti.<br />
Still waters run deep.<br />
Quiet water ruins bridges.<br />
4 Batti il ferro qu<strong>and</strong>' è caldo.<br />
Make hay while <strong>the</strong> sun shines .<br />
5 Buon principio è la meta dell' Opera.<br />
Well begun is half-done.<br />
6 Chi è in difetto, è in sospetto.<br />
He that is in fault, is in suspicion .<br />
7 Chi la dura, la vince .<br />
A mouse in time may cut a cable.<br />
He who persists , conquers .<br />
8 Chi parla, semina , chi tace , raccoglie .<br />
The talker sows, <strong>the</strong> listener reaps.<br />
He who speaks , sows, he who listens , reaps.<br />
9 Chi troppo abbraccia, nulla stringe .<br />
Grasp all, lose all.<br />
9- He who embraces (grasps) too much, grasps nothing .<br />
10 Chi va piano, va sano.<br />
Slow <strong>and</strong> sure wins <strong>the</strong> race .<br />
He who goes slow, goes safe .<br />
11 Dal detto al fatto vi è gran tratto.<br />
Easier said than done.<br />
From <strong>the</strong> said to <strong>the</strong> done <strong>the</strong>re is a great distance .<br />
12 Dimmi con chi vai, e ti dirò chi sei.<br />
Birds of a fea<strong>the</strong>r flock toge<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
Tell me whom you go with, <strong>and</strong> I will tell you who you are.<br />
13 È meglio piegare che rompere .<br />
Better bend than break .<br />
14 Meglio è fringuello in man, che tordo in frasca.<br />
A bird in <strong>the</strong> h<strong>and</strong> is worth two in <strong>the</strong> bush.<br />
It is better a chaffinch in <strong>the</strong> h<strong>and</strong>, than a thrush on <strong>the</strong> branch.<br />
15 L'abito non fa il monaco.<br />
279
It is not <strong>the</strong> cowl that makes <strong>the</strong> friar .<br />
16 La bella gabbia non nutre l'uccello .<br />
The fine cage won't feed <strong>the</strong> bird.<br />
17 Oro non è tutto quel che risplende .<br />
All is not gold that glitters .<br />
18 Non v'è cosa senza spina.<br />
No rose without a thorn.<br />
19 Pietra mossa non fa musco.<br />
A rolling stone ga<strong>the</strong>rs no moss.<br />
20 Povertà non ha parenti .<br />
Poverty has no kin.<br />
21 Pattì chiari , amici cari .<br />
Short reckonings make long friends .<br />
Clear arrangements , dear friends .<br />
22 La fine corona l' opera.<br />
All's well that ends well.<br />
LITERAL TRANSLATION.<br />
216 ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES.<br />
ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES.<br />
(To be learnt by heart .)<br />
Buon giorno, come sta? 1<br />
Good morning , how do you do ?<br />
Benissimo , signora , a' suoi com<strong>and</strong>i , è come sta lei ?<br />
Very well, thank you, madam, <strong>and</strong> how are you ?<br />
Benino ; ho avuto una lieve infreddatura di petto, ma oggi sto<br />
meglio .<br />
Pretty well ; I have <strong>had</strong> a slight cold in my chest, but I am better<br />
now.<br />
Godo di vederla ristabilita in salute .<br />
I am glad to see you well again .<br />
Come sta il suo signer fratello ?<br />
How is your bro<strong>the</strong>r ?<br />
Da qualche giorno è ammalato ; deve rimanere in camera .<br />
He has been ill for some days ; he has to keep his room.<br />
Me ne rincresce assai ; amo cre dere che non sia cosa seria .<br />
I am very sorry for that ; I hope it is not anything serious .<br />
280
Credo di no, la a una leggera indisposizione .<br />
I do not think so ; it is only a slight illness .<br />
S'accomodi , la prego, non ha fretta , è vero ?<br />
Pray take a seat ; you are not in a hurry, are you ?<br />
Oh no ; non ho altra occupazione oggi che da fare alcune visite .<br />
Oh no; I have nothing to do to-day, but to make a few calls.<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>' è così, farà meglio di rimanere a fare una seconda<br />
colazione con me.<br />
Then you <strong>had</strong> better stay <strong>and</strong> have luncheon with me.<br />
Non son solito di fare una seconda colazione così per tempo ; però<br />
per farle compagnia , mangerò un boccone.<br />
I do not usually take luncheon so early ; however to keep you<br />
company, I will eat a little .<br />
Andiamo nella sala da pranzo.<br />
Let us go into <strong>the</strong> dining room.<br />
Si segga qui, la prego.<br />
Pray be seated .<br />
Posso offrirle delle ostriche ?<br />
May I offer you some oysters ?<br />
Ne accetterò qualcuna.<br />
I will trouble you for a few.<br />
Lasci che le mesca un bicchiere di vino bianco.<br />
Allow me to pour you out a glass of white wine .<br />
Me ne dia ben poco non ho l'abitudine di ber vino.<br />
Give me very little , I am not accustomed to drink wine .<br />
Preferisce una costoletta di castrato o del pollo ?<br />
Will you take a mutton chop, or some fowl ?<br />
La ringrazio , mi favorisca un' ala od una coscia di pollo.<br />
Thank you, I will take <strong>the</strong> wing or <strong>the</strong> leg of a fowl.<br />
1 These Dialogues are intended as a beginning to speak Italian.<br />
They are all in <strong>the</strong> third person singular, because, as explained<br />
in rule 120 ( page 19), of this grammar, that is <strong>the</strong> mode of<br />
address between people not intimately acquainted, wishing to<br />
show respect to each o<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
217 ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES.<br />
Vuoi prendere un po' di frutta ?<br />
281
Will you have any fruit ?<br />
No, la ringrazio ; preferirei un bocconcino di formaggio (or cacio ).<br />
No, thank you; I would ra<strong>the</strong>r have a small piece of cheese .<br />
Beve te o caffe ?<br />
Do you take tea or coffee ?<br />
Non bevo ne dell'uno ne dell' altro durante la giornata .<br />
I do not take ei<strong>the</strong>r in <strong>the</strong> middle of <strong>the</strong> day.<br />
Well do as you like .<br />
Ebbene faccia a suo genio .<br />
Adesso se vuole usciremo insieme . Benissimo , usciamo .<br />
Now if you like we will go out toge<strong>the</strong>r .Very well, let us go.<br />
Andremo a piedi o in vettura ?<br />
Shall we go on foot or drive ?<br />
Amerei camminare un pochino e poi prendere un calessino .<br />
I should like to walk a little way, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>n take a cab.<br />
Ebbene si farà così.<br />
We can do that.<br />
Fa freddo oggi, non è vero ?<br />
It is cold to-day, is it not ?<br />
Anzi che n o, ma però il cielo è sereno .<br />
Yes, it is ra<strong>the</strong>r cold, but <strong>the</strong> sky is clear .<br />
Preferisco un freddo secco ad un tempo umido e malsano .<br />
I prefer dry cold to damp unhealthy wea<strong>the</strong>r .So do I ;<br />
Ed io pure ; detesto la pioggia, la neve e la nebbia.<br />
I hate rain , snow, <strong>and</strong> fog.<br />
Amo qu<strong>and</strong>o c' è ghiaccio sull' acqua, perché mi piace molto<br />
pattinare .<br />
I like when <strong>the</strong>re is a hard frost, because I am very fond of<br />
skating .<br />
A che ora deve ritornare al suo albergo ?<br />
At what time must you be back to your hotel ?<br />
M'aggradirebbe d'esser di ritorno un po' prima dell' ora del pranzo,<br />
per aver tempo di cambiar vestito .<br />
I should like to be in a little before dinner, so as to have time to<br />
dress.<br />
In questo caso sarà meglio di prendere un cabriolet.<br />
282
Then we <strong>had</strong> better take a cab.<br />
Ehi ! cocchiere siete impegnato ?<br />
I say, cabman, are you engaged ?<br />
No, signore .<br />
No, sir.<br />
Va bene ; guidate (portateci ) Via San Giovanni , No. 43.<br />
Very well, <strong>the</strong>n ; drive us to 43, St. John's Street .<br />
Come parla bene l' italiano, Signorina Field ; è molto tempo che lo<br />
studia ?<br />
How well you speak Italian , Miss Field; have you studied it long ?<br />
Non me ne rammento precisamente ; da circa due anni .<br />
I do not know exactly , I think about two years .<br />
218 ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES.<br />
È ella mai stata in Italia ?<br />
Have you ever been to Italy ?<br />
No, non vi sono mai stata.<br />
No, I have never been <strong>the</strong>re .<br />
Davvero ? io vi sono stata tre volte, eppure non so parlare italiano<br />
così correttamente come lei.<br />
Really? I have been <strong>the</strong>re three times, <strong>and</strong> yet I <strong>cannot</strong> speak<br />
Italian as correctly as you do.<br />
Ciò è perché non lo studia ; non si può imparare una lingua<br />
straniera senza studiarla sul serio .<br />
That is because you do not study it ; you <strong>cannot</strong> learn a foreign<br />
language without studying it.<br />
Ha prese molte lezioni ?<br />
Have you taken <strong>many</strong> lessons ?<br />
Si, ho lezione regolarmente due volte la settimana .<br />
Yes, I take two lessons regularly every week .<br />
Ha ella letti molti libri italiani ?<br />
Have you read <strong>many</strong> Italian books ?<br />
Si ; io letto tre romanzi, la meta della " Divina Commedia," anche<br />
" il Saul," dell' Alfieri, parecchie commedie , e le liriche del<br />
Leopardi.<br />
Yes ; I have read three novels, about half of <strong>the</strong> " Divina<br />
Commedia," also " Saul," by Alfieri, several comedies, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
lyrics of Leopardi.<br />
283
Qual'è il più interessante dei libri italiani che ha letti ?<br />
Which is <strong>the</strong> most interesting of <strong>the</strong> Italian books you have read<br />
?<br />
Dante , non occorre dirlo ; e dei libri moderni preferisco " I<br />
Promessi Sposi " a tutti gli altri .<br />
Dante , of course ; <strong>and</strong> of modern books, " I Promessi Sposi " is <strong>the</strong><br />
one I care most for.<br />
Ha l' intenzione di veder l' Italia ?<br />
Do you intend to visit Italy ?<br />
Altrochè ! faccio i conti di <strong>and</strong>arvi la primavera prossima .<br />
Indeed I do; I intend to go <strong>the</strong>re next spring.<br />
Vorrei ch'ella mi permettesse d' accompagnarvela .<br />
I wish you would allow me to accompany you.<br />
Ne sarò contentissima ; partiremo insieme il prossimo marzo, se<br />
non accadon disgrazie .<br />
I shall be very pleased ; we will start toge<strong>the</strong>r next March, if all<br />
goes well.<br />
Benissimo , siamo d'accordo; addio.<br />
Very well, that is settled ; goodbye.<br />
Ebbene, <strong>and</strong>ò ella al concerto del Signor Well, ieri sera ?<br />
Well, did you go to Mr. Well's concert , last night ?<br />
Si, v'<strong>and</strong>ai ; e mi piacque assai .<br />
Yes, I did ; <strong>and</strong> I liked it very much.<br />
C'erano molte persone ?<br />
Were <strong>the</strong>re <strong>many</strong> people ?<br />
Si ; un vero formic olaio.<br />
Yes ; <strong>the</strong> place was crowded.<br />
Chi vi si produsse?<br />
Who were <strong>the</strong> performers ?<br />
ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES. 219<br />
C'erano molti virtuosi ; ma il più distinto era il celebre pianista<br />
Brook.<br />
There were <strong>many</strong> artistes, but <strong>the</strong> most distinguished was <strong>the</strong><br />
celebrated pianist Brook.<br />
Or bene , questo virtuoso merita veramente la gr<strong>and</strong>e riputazione<br />
che gode ?<br />
Well, is <strong>the</strong> artiste really deserving of his great reputation ?<br />
284
Credo di si. Egli sa cavare dal pianoforte suoni tali che incantano,<br />
e la sua esecuzione è oltre modo espressiva e graziosa .<br />
Yes, I think so. He can draw from <strong>the</strong> piano <strong>the</strong> most exquisite<br />
sounds, <strong>and</strong> his execution is full of expression <strong>and</strong> grace .<br />
Fu eseguita soltanto musica strumentale ?<br />
Did <strong>the</strong> performance consist of instrumental music only ?<br />
Oh no ; la musica vocale non venne dimenticata .<br />
Oh no ; <strong>the</strong>re was plenty of vocal music .<br />
La Signorina Moretti canto un bel duetto col Signer Barnott.<br />
Miss Moretti sang a beautiful duet with Mr. Barnott.<br />
Che voce hanno ?<br />
What sort of voices have <strong>the</strong>y ?<br />
La Signorina Moretti ha tma voce di soprano, forte e vibrata, e sa<br />
renderla dolcissima ed armoniosa .<br />
Miss Moretti has a powerful <strong>and</strong> thrilling soprano voice, <strong>and</strong> she<br />
can make it very soft <strong>and</strong> melodious .<br />
Il Signer Barnott ha una bellissima voce di tenore ; l'ho sentito<br />
cantare parecchie volte, è il miglior tenore che abbiamo.<br />
Mr. Barnott has a fine tenor voice, I have heard him several<br />
times ; he is our best tenor .<br />
La sua voce non è molto forte, ma è chiara e assai simpatica .<br />
His voice is not very powerful, but it is clear <strong>and</strong> very sympathic .<br />
Era ben condotta l'orchestra ?<br />
Was <strong>the</strong> orchestra well managed ?<br />
Non si poteva meglio ; basti dire che ne era conduttore il Signer<br />
Warbling.<br />
As well as it could be ; let it suffice to say that it was conducted by<br />
Mr. Warbling.<br />
Veggo che lei, al par di me, è amantissima della musica .<br />
I see that you are, like myself , passionately fond of music .<br />
Lo sono davvero ; credo che sia il miglior divertimento che ci sia<br />
dato di godere .<br />
I am indeed ; I think it <strong>the</strong> best recreation we can enjoy.<br />
Che ora è, Signer Trench ?<br />
What o'clock is it, Mr. Trench ?<br />
Sono le otto e un quarto.<br />
It is a quarter past eight .<br />
285
Ha fatto colazione ?<br />
Have you <strong>had</strong> your breakfast ?<br />
No ; mi sono appena alzato.<br />
No ; I have only just got up.<br />
A che ora fa i suoi pasti ?<br />
When do you take your meals ?<br />
220 ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES.<br />
Facciamo colazione alle nove, la seconda colazione a un'ora e<br />
me<strong>zz</strong>o, e pranziamo alle sei.<br />
We breakfast at nine , luncheon at half past one, <strong>and</strong> dine at six<br />
o'clock.<br />
Di che cosa si occuperà prima di far colazione ?<br />
What are you going to do before breakfast ?<br />
Voglio scrivere una lettera a mio zio.<br />
I am going to write a letter to my uncle .<br />
Scrive con penne metalliche , o con penne d' oca ?<br />
Do you write with steel pens or quills ?<br />
Scrivo sempre con penne metalliche, ho tant'abitudine di<br />
servirmene , che con altre penne non so quasi più scrivere .<br />
I always write with steel pens, I am so accustomed to write with<br />
<strong>the</strong>m that I can scarcely write with any o<strong>the</strong>rs .<br />
Avrebbe un foglio di carta sugante da prestarmi ?<br />
Have you got a sheet of blotting paper to lend me ?<br />
Si ; ecc ogliene , ma non è di eccellente qualità .<br />
Yes, here is some , but it is not of very good quality.<br />
Perché le sia vieppiù obbligato, mi venda un francobollo.<br />
To complete my obligation to you, sell me a postage-stamp.<br />
Eccogliene uno, glielo do, ma non voglio venderglielo .<br />
Here it is, I give it to you, but will not sell it to you.<br />
Garzone, correte presto ad impostare questa lettera .<br />
Waiter , run <strong>and</strong> take this letter to <strong>the</strong> post Mrs.<br />
Ella disegna , Signorina Barretti ?<br />
Do you draw, Miss Barretti ?<br />
Si, un pochino ; sono una principiante sa ; ma mi piace tanto.<br />
Yes, a little ; I am only a beginner ; but I am very fond of it.<br />
Copia da modelli o dalla natura ?<br />
286
Do you draw from copies or from nature ?<br />
Finora copio soltanto da modelli ; ma non veggo l' ora di poter<br />
ritrarre dalla natura .<br />
As yet I only draw from copies, but I long to copy from nature .<br />
È ella stata a vedere I'esposizione dei quadri all' Accademia<br />
Reale , quest' anno ?<br />
Have you been to <strong>the</strong> Royal Academy , this year ?<br />
Si, v' <strong>and</strong>ai lunedì scorso.<br />
Yes, I went <strong>the</strong>re last Monday.<br />
Ebbene, che gliene pare ?<br />
Well, what do you think of it ?<br />
È una bellissima esposizione ; molto più interessante che quella<br />
dell' anno scorso.<br />
It is a very fine exhibition ; much more interesting than that of<br />
last year .<br />
Ha visitata la Galleria Nuova nella strada del Reggente ?<br />
Have you seen <strong>the</strong> New Gallery in Regent Street ?<br />
Si, l'ho visitata ; mi pare eccellente .<br />
Yes, I have ; I think it excellent .<br />
ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES. 221<br />
Siccome ella si occupa di belle arti , mi permetta, Signorina<br />
Barretti , di presentarle un mio intimo amico , il Signer Trivelli .<br />
As you take an interest in art, allow me, Miss Barretti , to<br />
introduce to you an intimate friend of mine , Mr. Trivelli .<br />
La riverisco , ho molto caro di fare la sua conoscenza .<br />
How do you do, I am very happy to make your acquaintance .<br />
Ella è molto cortese .<br />
You are very kind.<br />
È questa la prima volta che viene in Inghilterra ?<br />
Is this <strong>the</strong> first time you have been in Engl<strong>and</strong> ?<br />
No; ci venni nel 1891, per vedere l' Esposizione Navale .<br />
No; I came here in 1891, to see <strong>the</strong> Naval Exhibition.<br />
Come le piace l' Inghilterra ?<br />
How do you like Engl<strong>and</strong> ?<br />
Mi piace moltissimo, ma non il clima, però, che qualche volta è<br />
veramente cattivo .<br />
287
I like it very much, except <strong>the</strong> climate however, <strong>which</strong> at times<br />
is really very bad.<br />
Oh come sono lieta di vederla Signorina Vestri ; dov' è ella stata<br />
dacchè non l' ho veduta ?<br />
How happy I am to see you, Miss Vestri ; where have you been all<br />
this time ?<br />
Sono stata fuori di citta con tutti i miei ; siamo stati ai bagni di<br />
mare .<br />
I have been out of town with my family ; we have been to <strong>the</strong> sea-<br />
side.<br />
Che bella cera ha ; è come stanno tutti i suoi ?<br />
You look very well ; <strong>and</strong> how are you all ?<br />
Stiamo tutti in ottima salute, la ringrazio, tranne Maria che si è<br />
slogato un piede, appunto qu<strong>and</strong>o si lasciava Folkestone .<br />
We are all very well, thank you, except Mary ; she sprained her<br />
ankle , just before we left Folkestone .<br />
Oh sono stati la ; è un bel sito, non è vero ?<br />
Oh that is where you have been ; it is a pretty place, is it not ?<br />
Bellissimo; l'aria è saluberrima, è quel paese non è ancora<br />
divenuto volgare .<br />
Beautiful ; <strong>the</strong> air is very good, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> place has not become<br />
common yet.<br />
Son ben contenta d'udir cio, perché noi abbiamo l'intenzione<br />
d'<strong>and</strong>arvi il mese prossimo.<br />
I am very glad to hear that, because we ourselves intend to go<br />
<strong>the</strong>re next month.<br />
Oh, qu<strong>and</strong>' è così venga da me qualche giorno della settimana<br />
prossima , e allora le dirò quanto mi sappia del luogo.<br />
Oh, if that is <strong>the</strong> case , you <strong>had</strong> better call on me one day next<br />
week , <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>n I will tell you all about <strong>the</strong> place.<br />
Benissimo non mancherò di venirci ; sia deciso per giovedì.<br />
Very well, I will ; let us say on Thursday. Goodbye, for <strong>the</strong> present .<br />
Per ora, Addio.<br />
222 TITLES AND EXPRESSIONS USED IN ITALIAN LETTERS .<br />
TITLES AND EXPRESSIONS USED IN WRITING LETTERS IN<br />
ITALIAN.<br />
IN WRITING TO MINISTERS, (MINISTRI DI STATO)<br />
AMBASSADORS, (AMBASCIATORI) GENERALS, (GENERALI<br />
288
D'ARMATA) AND CHIEF MAGISTRATES : Commence<br />
Illustrissimo ed Eccellentissimo Signore , or Eccellenza .<br />
In <strong>the</strong> body Of <strong>the</strong> letter Illustrissimo ed Eccellentissimo Signore ,<br />
or Vostra Eccellenza ,<br />
Conclude Coi sensi del più profondo ossequio sono<br />
Or Desider<strong>and</strong>o occasioni per poterle dar prova della mia<br />
devozione , ho l'onore di protestarmi<br />
Or Preg<strong>and</strong>ola di conservarmi la di Lei grazia, mi dico, Di Vostra<br />
Eccellenza ,<br />
umilissimo e devotissimo servitore 1<br />
Address All' Illustrissimo ed Eccellentissimo Signore , il Signor,<br />
&c.<br />
IN WRITING TO MARQUESSES, (MARCHESI) COUNTS, (CONTI)<br />
BARONS, (BARONI), KNIGHTS OF ALL ORDERS, (CAVALIERI)<br />
AND JUDGES :<br />
Commence Illustrissimo Signore .<br />
In <strong>the</strong> body Of <strong>the</strong> letter Illustrissimo Signore , or Vossignoria<br />
illustrissima .<br />
Conclude Colla massima stima ho l 'onore di segnarmi<br />
Or Ossequi<strong>and</strong>ola distintamente , ho l 'onore d' essere ,<br />
Di Vossignoria illustrissima ,<br />
umilissimo e devotissimo servo<br />
Address All' Illustrissimo Signore ,<br />
il Signor Marchese , &c.<br />
IN WRITING TO DOCTORS, (DOTTORI, MEDICI) PROFESSORS,<br />
(PROFESSORI) AND ESQUIRES (SIGNORI) :<br />
Commence Pregiatissimo, or Stimatissimo, or Ornatissimo<br />
Signore .<br />
In <strong>the</strong> body Of <strong>the</strong> letter Pregiatissimo, or Stimatissimo, or<br />
Ornatissimo Signore .<br />
Conclude Sono e sarò sempre, con tutto l' animo, suo devotissimo<br />
ed obbligatissimo servitore<br />
Or Coi sensi del più profondo rispetto (or della più profonda stima)<br />
sono di Lei devotissimo servo<br />
289
Or Mi creda sempre, come sono e sarò di cuore , suo<br />
affezionatissiino amico<br />
Or Mi offro a servirla e mi ripeto di tutto cuore suo<br />
affezionatissimo servitore ed amico<br />
Or Gradisca i miei affetuosi saluti e mi creda suo devotissimo<br />
servo<br />
Or Facendole i miei cordiale saluti, me Le dico devotissimo servo<br />
ed amico<br />
Address Al Riveritissimo , or Pregiatissimo Signor , &c.<br />
1 In Italian, <strong>the</strong> address of <strong>the</strong> writer <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> date of a letter were<br />
formerly always written at <strong>the</strong> end of a letter, except in<br />
commercial letters, <strong>and</strong> sometimes in letters to familiar friends ;<br />
but now-a-days <strong>many</strong> people write address <strong>and</strong> date at <strong>the</strong> top or<br />
at <strong>the</strong> end of letters , as <strong>the</strong>y like .<br />
TITLES AND EXPRESSIONS USED IN ITALIAN LETTERS . 223<br />
IN WRITING TO FRIENDS OF ALL RANKS :<br />
Commence Caro, or Carissimo amico (or <strong>the</strong> name of <strong>the</strong> person,<br />
or his title ).<br />
In <strong>the</strong> body of <strong>the</strong> letter Ella, voi, or tu.<br />
Conclude salut<strong>and</strong>ola affettuosamente con sincera stima, sono<br />
suo devotissimo amico<br />
Or Vogliatemi bene e credetemi il vostro affezionatissimo amico<br />
Or Salutatemi caramente N. N. ; e se mi volete bene , abbiate<br />
cara sopra tutto alla vostra salute . Addio, addio di tutto cuore<br />
Or Salut<strong>and</strong>oti di cuore sono tuo vero amico .<br />
Address Allo Stimatissimo , or Ornatissimo Signor , &c. 1<br />
N.B. In writing to ladies <strong>the</strong> same regard must be paid to rank as<br />
is paid towards gentlemen .<br />
ECCLESIASTICAL DIGNITARIES.<br />
IN WRITING TO ARCHBISHOPS (ARCIVESCOVI), AND BISHOPS<br />
(VESCOVI) :<br />
Commence Monsignore Illustrissimo e Reverendissimo . 2<br />
In <strong>the</strong> body Of <strong>the</strong> letter Monsignore Illustrissimo e<br />
Reverendissimo .<br />
Conclude Ossequi<strong>and</strong>ola rispettosamente , Le bacio la mano.<br />
290
Di Vossignoria Illustrissima e Reverendissima, umilissimo e<br />
devotissimo servitore -<br />
Address- - All' Illustrissimo e Reverendissimo Signore , or<br />
Monsignore , IN WRITING TO DEANS (DECANI), AND<br />
ARCHDEACONS (ARCIPRETI).<br />
Commence Reverendissimo Signore .<br />
In <strong>the</strong> body Of <strong>the</strong> letter Vossignoria Reverendissima .<br />
Conclude Sono colla massima stima ,<br />
Di Vossignoria Reverendissima ,<br />
ubbidientissimo servitore'<br />
Address Al Reverendissimo signore , &c.<br />
To CLERGYMEN .<br />
Commence Molto Reverendo Signore .<br />
In <strong>the</strong> body Of <strong>the</strong> letter Vossignoria Reverenda, or Molto<br />
Referenda .<br />
Conclude Sono col più profondo rispetto ,<br />
Di Vossignoria Reverenda ,<br />
ubbidientissimo servitore , &c.<br />
Address Al Molto Reverendo Padre, or Signore il Signor , &c.<br />
1 In addressing persons who have distinguished <strong>the</strong>mselves in<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir professions or arts, often instead of Pregiatissitno,<br />
Stimabilissimo, &c., <strong>the</strong> titles, Egregio, Esimio, Chiarissimo are<br />
used.<br />
2 Ilmo, Illuma, Revmo, Revma, V.S., Pregiatmo, Stimatmo,<br />
Ornatmo, Umilmo, Devmo, Obbligmo, Sig. Sign, are written<br />
instead of Illustrissimo, Reverendissimo, Pregiatissimo,<br />
Vossignoria, or Vostra Signoria, &c. ; but to write <strong>the</strong> title in full<br />
is an additional mark of respect .<br />
224 A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION .<br />
A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION .<br />
Note. The translations of <strong>the</strong> words occurring in <strong>the</strong>se extracts,<br />
not given in <strong>the</strong> foot notes, are to be found in <strong>the</strong> English-Italian<br />
Vocabulary, beginning at page 246 of this grammar .<br />
THE CONJUGATING DUTCHMAN . 1<br />
291
Two Italian (468) gentlemen once stepped (entered) into a coffee -<br />
house in (di) Paris, where <strong>the</strong>y observed a tall, odd-looking (a)<br />
man, who appeared not to be a native (b), sitting (seated) at one of<br />
<strong>the</strong> tables, <strong>and</strong> looking around with <strong>the</strong> most stone -like gravity of<br />
countenance upon every object (c). Soon after <strong>the</strong> two Italians <strong>had</strong><br />
entered (832), one of <strong>the</strong>m told <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r that a celebrated dwarf<br />
<strong>had</strong> arrived in (207) Paris. At this (d), <strong>the</strong> grave -looking personage<br />
above mentioned (e) opened his mouth (705) <strong>and</strong> said :<br />
" I arrive, thou arrivest, he arrives ; we arrive, you arrive, <strong>the</strong>y<br />
arrive ."<br />
The Italian, whose (625) remark (word) seemed to have suggested<br />
this mysterious speech, stepped up to (f) <strong>the</strong> stranger <strong>and</strong> asked, "<br />
Did you speak (do you speak ) to me (210), sir ? "<br />
" I speak ," replied <strong>the</strong> stranger, " thou speakest, he speaks ; we<br />
speak , you speak , <strong>the</strong>y speak ."<br />
" How is this ? " (g) said <strong>the</strong> Italian much astonished ; " do you<br />
mean (h) to insult me ? "<br />
The o<strong>the</strong>r replied, " I insult, thou insultest, he insults ; we insult,<br />
you insult , <strong>the</strong>y insult ."<br />
1 "L'Ol<strong>and</strong>ese smanioso di coniugare ."<br />
(a) di strano aspetto.<br />
(b) che pareva straniero .<br />
(c) "<strong>and</strong> looking ..." e che guardava ogni oggetto colla massima<br />
impassibilità .<br />
(d) All'udir ciò.<br />
(e) prefato<br />
(f) si mosse verso<br />
(g) "Che vuol dir ciò?"<br />
(h) " avreste l' intenzione " (rule 119).<br />
A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION . 225<br />
"This is too much ! " (a) said <strong>the</strong> enraged Italian. " I will have<br />
satisfaction ! (b). If you have any spirit with your rudeness (c),<br />
come along (come ) with me."<br />
To this defiance <strong>the</strong> stranger replied, "I come , thou comest, he<br />
comes; we come , you come , <strong>the</strong>y come ;" <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>reupon (d) he<br />
rose with great coolness (calm), <strong>and</strong> followed his challenger (e).<br />
In those days, when every gentleman wore (<strong>the</strong>) a sword, duels<br />
were speedily despatched (771) (f). They went into a neighbouring<br />
292
alley, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> Italian, unsheathing (834) his weapon, said to his<br />
antagonist , "Now, sir, you must fight me" (g).<br />
"I fight," replied <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r, " thou fightest, he fights; we fight (here<br />
he made a thrust) (h), you fight, <strong>the</strong>y fight" (<strong>and</strong> here he disarmed<br />
his antagonist ).<br />
"Well," said <strong>the</strong> Italian, "you have <strong>the</strong> best of it (i), <strong>and</strong> I hope<br />
(868, 636) you are satisfied ."<br />
"I am satisfied," said <strong>the</strong> original, " thou art satisfied, he is<br />
satisfied ; we are satisfied , you are satisfied , <strong>the</strong>y are satisfied ."<br />
" I am glad (836, j) everybody is satisfied," said <strong>the</strong> Italian ; " but<br />
pray leave off qui<strong>zz</strong>ing me (j) in this strange manner, <strong>and</strong> tell me<br />
what is your object, if you have any, in doing it " (k).<br />
The grave gentleman now, for <strong>the</strong> first time , became intelligible .<br />
"I am a (354) Dutchman," said he, "<strong>and</strong> am learning your<br />
language . I find it (763) very difficult to remember <strong>the</strong><br />
peculiarities of <strong>the</strong> verbs; <strong>and</strong> my tutor has advised me, in order<br />
to fix <strong>the</strong>m in my mind (l), to conjugate every Italian verb that I<br />
hear spoken (m). This I have made it a rule to do (n). I don't like<br />
to have my plans broken in upon (o) while <strong>the</strong>y are in operation,<br />
or I would have told you this before."<br />
(a) " Cio è troppo."<br />
(b) "Me ne darete ragione ."<br />
(c) " Se avete cuore che basti alla vostra ro<strong>zz</strong>e<strong>zz</strong>a."<br />
(d) cost dicendo.<br />
(e) colui che l'avea sfidato.<br />
(f ) si decidevano presto.<br />
(g) " bisogna battersi in duello meco ."<br />
(h) lanciò una botta.<br />
(i) "mi do per vinto."<br />
(j) " non si faccia più beffe di me, la prego." (rule 120).<br />
(k) " what is your..." " a quale scopo, se pur ne ha uno, agisce<br />
così."<br />
(l) se voglio fissarmeli bene in mente .<br />
(m) che sento pronunciare (rule 690)<br />
(n) "a questa regola aderisco sempre ."<br />
(o) Non amo che si contravenga ai miei disegni .<br />
(p) The Italians laughed ..."Sentito lo schiarimento, gl' Italiani<br />
scoppiarono nelle risa ."<br />
(q) Il che fecero .<br />
293
(r) " it," in cases like this , is not translated .<br />
(s) "whe<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong> Dutchman ate or conjugated..." se l'Ol<strong>and</strong>ese<br />
fosse più perseverante nel coniugare o nel Mangiare .<br />
226 A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION .<br />
The Italians laughed heartily at this explanation (p) <strong>and</strong> invited<br />
<strong>the</strong> conjugating Dutchman to dine with <strong>the</strong>m .<br />
" I will dine ," replied he, " thou wilt dine , he will dine ; we will<br />
dine , you will dine , <strong>the</strong>y will dine , we will all dine toge<strong>the</strong>r ."<br />
This <strong>the</strong>y accordingly did (q), <strong>and</strong> it (r) was difficult to say whe<strong>the</strong>r<br />
<strong>the</strong> Dutchman ate or conjugated with more perseverance (s). (* *<br />
*)<br />
A CLEVER RETORT. 1<br />
A friend of Dean Swift one day sent him (193) a turbot, as a<br />
present (a), by a servant lad (b) who <strong>had</strong> frequently been on<br />
similar err<strong>and</strong>s (c), but who <strong>had</strong> never received <strong>the</strong> most trifling<br />
mark (d) of <strong>the</strong> Dean's generosity. Having gained admission (e),<br />
he opened (704) <strong>the</strong> door of <strong>the</strong> study, <strong>and</strong> abruptly putting down<br />
<strong>the</strong> fish, cried, very rudely, " Master has sent you ( sends you)<br />
(120) a turbot." " Young man," said <strong>the</strong> Dean, rising from his easy<br />
chair, " is that <strong>the</strong> way you deliver your message ? (f). Let me<br />
teach you better manners (g) : sit down in my chair ; we will<br />
change situations (character), <strong>and</strong> I will show you (118, 197) how<br />
to behave in future " (h). The boy sat down, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> Dean, going<br />
(834) to <strong>the</strong> door, came up to <strong>the</strong> table at a respectful pace , <strong>and</strong><br />
making a low bow (i), said, " Sir, my master (146) presents his<br />
kind compliments (j), hopes (868) you are well, <strong>and</strong> requests your<br />
acceptance of (k) a small present." " Does he ?" (l) replied <strong>the</strong> boy ;<br />
" return him my best (m) thanks, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>re's (n) half-a-crown for<br />
yourself."<br />
The Dean, thus drawn (o) into an act of generosity, laughed<br />
heartily , <strong>and</strong> gave <strong>the</strong> boy a crown for his wit. (* *)<br />
1 "Arguta Risposta." come si agisce meno villanamente .<br />
(a) "as a present ," in regalo .<br />
(b) raga<strong>zz</strong>otto.<br />
(c) che aveva sovente eseguito simili ordini.<br />
(d) la minima prova.<br />
(e) Tosto che si trovò nella casa.<br />
(f) è cosi che eseguisci gli ordini che ti son dati?<br />
294
(g) Ti fo veder subito<br />
(h) come dovresti comportarti all'avvenire .<br />
(i) profondo inchino .<br />
(j) "presents his..." la saluta caramente .<br />
(k) la prega di accettare .<br />
(l) " Davvero ? "<br />
(m) ringrazialo pure da parte mia.<br />
(n) ecco.<br />
(o) spinto.<br />
A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION . 227<br />
THE DERVIS. 1<br />
A Dervis, travelling through (a) Tartary, having arrived (689) at<br />
<strong>the</strong> town of Balk , went (704) into <strong>the</strong> king's palace by mistake,<br />
thinking it to be (b) a public inn or caravansary. Having looked<br />
about him for (311) some time , he entered into (c) a long gallery,<br />
where he laid down his wallet <strong>and</strong> spread his carpet, in order to<br />
(932) repose himself upon it (d), after <strong>the</strong> manner of (e) <strong>the</strong><br />
Eastern nations (468). He <strong>had</strong> not been long (f) in this posture<br />
before he was (g) discovered by some of <strong>the</strong> guards, who asked<br />
him what was his business (h) in that place ? The Dervis told<br />
<strong>the</strong>m (636) he intended (838, f) to take up his night's lodging (i) in<br />
that caravansary. The guards let him know (j), in a very angry<br />
manner (k), that <strong>the</strong> house he was in (l) was not a caravansary,<br />
but (m) <strong>the</strong> king's palace. It happened (n) that <strong>the</strong> king himself<br />
passed through <strong>the</strong> gallery during this debate (o), <strong>and</strong> smiling at<br />
(p) <strong>the</strong> mistake of <strong>the</strong> Dervis, asked him how he could possibly be<br />
so dull as (q) not to distinguish a palace from a caravansary ?<br />
"Sire ," said <strong>the</strong> Dervis, " give me leave to ask your majesty (r) a<br />
question (306) or two. Who were <strong>the</strong> persons that lodged in this<br />
house when it was first built ? " The king replied " My ancestors ."<br />
" And who," said <strong>the</strong> Dervis, " was <strong>the</strong> last person that lodged here<br />
? " (s) The king replied, " My fa<strong>the</strong>r." " And who is it," said <strong>the</strong><br />
Dervis, " that lodges here at present ? " The king told him that it<br />
was he himself (t). " And who," said <strong>the</strong> Dervis, " will be here after<br />
you ( your Majesty) (563) ? " The king answered, " The young<br />
prince , my son." " Ah! Sire ," said <strong>the</strong> Dervis, "a house that<br />
changes its inhabitants so often (u) <strong>and</strong> receives such a<br />
perpetual succession of guests, is not a palace, but (m) a<br />
caravansary ." ADDISON.<br />
295
1 "il Dervigio ."<br />
(a) che viaggiava in.<br />
(b) credendolo.<br />
(c) infilò .<br />
(d) " upon it" is not translated .<br />
(e) alla moda di.<br />
(f) Non era stato guari .<br />
(g) "before he was," allorqu<strong>and</strong>o fu.<br />
(h) ciò che venisse fare .<br />
(i) d' alloggiarsi per la notte.<br />
(j) gli fecero sapere .<br />
(k) con gran collera .<br />
(l) in cui si trovava.<br />
(M) ma bensi .<br />
(n) il caso voile .<br />
(o) discussione .<br />
(p) See p. 208, note (t).<br />
(q) abbastanza stupido per.<br />
(r) mi sia permesso difare a Vostra Maestà .<br />
(s) " E chi fu l' ultimo che vi ebbe alloggio ? "<br />
(t) che vi alloggiava egli stesso .<br />
(u) che cambia così spesso di abitanti .<br />
228 A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION .<br />
RABELAIS A TRAITOR. 1<br />
This celebrated wit (a) was once at a great distance from Paris,<br />
<strong>and</strong> without money to bear his expenses thi<strong>the</strong>r (b). The<br />
ingenious author being sharp set (c), got toge<strong>the</strong>r (d) a convenient<br />
quantity of brickdust, <strong>and</strong> having disposed of it (e) into several<br />
papers (f), wrote upon one, Poison for Monsieur (g) ; upon a<br />
second, Poison for <strong>the</strong> Dauphin (h) ; <strong>and</strong> on a third, Poison for <strong>the</strong><br />
King.<br />
Having made this provision for (i) <strong>the</strong> royal family of France, he<br />
laid his papers so that (j) <strong>the</strong> l<strong>and</strong>lord, who was an inquisitive<br />
man <strong>and</strong> a good (faithful) subject, might get a sight of <strong>the</strong>m (k).<br />
The plot succeeded as he desired (l) ; <strong>the</strong> host gave immediate<br />
intelligence to (m) <strong>the</strong> secretary of state . The secretary presently<br />
sent down (n) a special messenger, who brought up <strong>the</strong> traitor to<br />
court, <strong>and</strong> provided him, at <strong>the</strong> king's expense , with proper<br />
accommodation on <strong>the</strong> road (o). As soon as he appeared, he was<br />
known to be (p) <strong>the</strong> celebrated Rabelais, <strong>and</strong> his powder, upon<br />
296
examination, (q) being found very innocent, <strong>the</strong> jest was only<br />
laughed at (r) ; for <strong>which</strong> a less eminent droll would have been<br />
sent to <strong>the</strong> galleys .<br />
BUDGELL .<br />
THE CUNNING CUTLER . 2<br />
There is (154) in London, at a place called Charing Cross, a very<br />
fine statue in bronze of Charles <strong>the</strong> First (543) on horseback (a).<br />
After <strong>the</strong> revolution <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> decapitation of that monarch, <strong>the</strong><br />
statue was taken down (b) <strong>and</strong> sold to a cutler who <strong>under</strong>took to<br />
demolish it. He immediately manufactured great numbers<br />
1 " Rabelais Colpevole di Lesa Maestà ."<br />
(a) bell'ingegno .<br />
(b) "to bear his..."pagar le sue spese , fin là.<br />
(c) ridotto all' ultima risorsa .<br />
(d) raccolse .<br />
(e) messala (rule 689).<br />
(f) " papers," involtini .<br />
(g) A title given to <strong>the</strong> eldest of <strong>the</strong> bro<strong>the</strong>rs of <strong>the</strong> kings o France .<br />
(h) A title given to <strong>the</strong> eldest son of <strong>the</strong> king of France .<br />
(i) Avendo provveduto cosi a' bisogni di.<br />
(j) in modo tale che.<br />
(k) potesse vederli .<br />
(l) come lo desiderava (notice <strong>the</strong> pronoun "lo " referring to plot).<br />
(m) ne avverti immediatamente .<br />
(n) spedì subito.<br />
(o) "<strong>and</strong> provided him..." facendogli dare sulla via, a spese del re,<br />
alloggio e vitto.<br />
(p) riconobbero esser lui.<br />
(q) analisi fatta.<br />
(r) non si fece che ridere della burla.<br />
2 "Il Sagace Coltellinaio ."<br />
(a) a cavallo.<br />
(b) si tirò giù la statua.<br />
(c) li mise in mostra nella bottega dicendoli fatti col bronzo.<br />
(d) ebbero tale smercio .<br />
(e)" by" is translated by "e."<br />
(f ) stante che la vecchia .<br />
(g) posta di bel nuovo.<br />
(h) si vede tuttora.<br />
297
A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION . 229<br />
(quantity) of knives <strong>and</strong> forks with bronze h<strong>and</strong>les, <strong>and</strong> exposed<br />
<strong>the</strong>m (c) in his shop as <strong>the</strong> produce of <strong>the</strong> statue <strong>which</strong> was<br />
supposed (771) to have been melted. They were so rapidly bought,<br />
(d) both by (e) <strong>the</strong> friends <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> enemies of <strong>the</strong> late monarch,<br />
that <strong>the</strong> cutler soon made a (360) fortune <strong>and</strong> retired from<br />
business .<br />
Soon after <strong>the</strong> restoration it was proposed (771) to erect a new<br />
statue to <strong>the</strong> memory of <strong>the</strong> unfortunate king ; <strong>the</strong> cutler hearing<br />
of this, (834) informed <strong>the</strong> government that he could spare <strong>the</strong>m<br />
(456) <strong>the</strong> trouble <strong>and</strong> expense of casting a statue , as <strong>the</strong> old one<br />
(f) was yet in his possession, <strong>and</strong> that he would sell it to <strong>the</strong>m<br />
(456) at a moderate price . The bargain (affair) was concluded<br />
(771), <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> statue , <strong>which</strong> he <strong>had</strong> secretly preserved, was re-<br />
elevated (705) (g) on <strong>the</strong> pedestal at Charing Cross, where it now<br />
st<strong>and</strong>s (h). (* * *)<br />
THE MONKEY AND THE TWO CATS. 1<br />
Two cats, having stolen some cheese, could not agree (842, g)<br />
about dividing <strong>the</strong>ir prize (a). In order, <strong>the</strong>refore, to settle <strong>the</strong><br />
dispute (b), <strong>the</strong>y consented to refer <strong>the</strong> matter (c) to a monkey .<br />
The proposed arbitrator very readily (d) accepted <strong>the</strong> office , <strong>and</strong>,<br />
producing (taking ) a balance , put a part (bit) into each scale .<br />
" Let me see," said he, " ay ! this lump outweighs (e) <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r ; "<br />
<strong>and</strong> immediately he bit off a considerable piece (f) "in order to<br />
reduce it," he observed, "to an equilibrium" (g). The opposite scale<br />
<strong>had</strong> now become <strong>the</strong> heavier, <strong>which</strong> (628) afforded our<br />
conscientious judge an additional (o<strong>the</strong>r) reason for a second<br />
mouthful. " Hold ! hold ! " (h) said <strong>the</strong> two cats, who began to be<br />
alarmed for <strong>the</strong> result (i), " give us our respective shares (j) <strong>and</strong>"<br />
1 "La Scimia è i due Gratti."<br />
(a) quanto nl modo di dividere il bottino.<br />
(b) "In order..." Quindi per decidere la lite .<br />
(c) sottomettere il caso.<br />
(d) con gran premura .<br />
(e) pesa più che. sua<br />
(f) ne levò co'denti un buon boccone.<br />
(g) "in order... "per istabilire , disse , l'equilibrio .<br />
(h) basta ! basta !<br />
(i) temerne il risultato .<br />
298
(j) dacci la nostra parte.<br />
(j) rispose .<br />
(k) non lo è.<br />
(l) "by no..." punto.<br />
(m) Detto cio.<br />
(n) non meno che.<br />
(o) si ficco il resto.<br />
(p) finì l' udienza .<br />
230 A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION .<br />
we are satisfied." " If you are satisfied," returned (j) <strong>the</strong> monkey,<br />
justice is not (k) ; a case of this intricate nature is by no means<br />
(l) so soon determined." Upon this (m) he continued to nibble first<br />
at one piece <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r, till <strong>the</strong> poor cats, seeing (834)<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir cheese gradually diminishing (314), entreated him to give<br />
himself no fur<strong>the</strong>r trouble, but deliver (restore ) to <strong>the</strong>m what<br />
remained. " Not so fast, I beseech you, friends," replied <strong>the</strong><br />
monkey ; " we owe justice to ourselves as well as (n) to you : what<br />
remains is due to me in right of my office ." Upon <strong>which</strong> (m) he<br />
crammed <strong>the</strong> whole into his mouth, (o) (572) <strong>and</strong> with great<br />
gravity dismissed <strong>the</strong> court (p). DODSLEY.<br />
CURIOUS EXPEDIENT . 1<br />
Two Irishmen , blacksmiths by trade (857, k) went to Jamaica .<br />
Finding soon after <strong>the</strong>ir arrival, that <strong>the</strong>y could do nothing<br />
without money to begin with (a), but that, with sixty or seventy<br />
pounds <strong>and</strong> industry, <strong>the</strong>y might be able to do some business,<br />
<strong>the</strong>y hit upon (b) <strong>the</strong> following ingenious expedient .<br />
One of <strong>the</strong>m made <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r black (blackened) from head to foot.<br />
This being done (c), he took him to one of <strong>the</strong> negro-dealers, who,<br />
after viewing (834) <strong>and</strong> approving his stout, athletic appearance ,<br />
made a bargain (d) to pay eighty pounds for (251) him <strong>and</strong> prided<br />
himself on (845, g) <strong>the</strong> purchase , supposing him to be (e) one of<br />
<strong>the</strong> finest negroes on <strong>the</strong> isl<strong>and</strong>. The same evening this newly<br />
manufactured negro (f) made off to (g) his countryman, washed<br />
himself clean, <strong>and</strong> resumed his former appearance . Rewards<br />
were in vain offered in h<strong>and</strong> bills (h), pursuit was eluded, <strong>and</strong><br />
discovery , by care <strong>and</strong> caution , was made impossible (i).<br />
1 "Curioso Spediente ."<br />
(a) per cominciare .<br />
299
(b) immaginarono .<br />
(c) Ciò fatto.<br />
(d) convenne .<br />
(e) credendo che fosse.<br />
(f) negro improvvisato .<br />
(g) scappò e <strong>and</strong>ò dal.<br />
(h) avvisi al pubblico.<br />
(i) Turn "pursuit..."" <strong>the</strong>y eluded pursuit, <strong>and</strong> with care <strong>and</strong><br />
caution made it impossible that any one should discover <strong>the</strong>m ."<br />
(j) si misero a negoziare . ..."<br />
(k) "Previous..." "Però prima di lasciar l'isola .".<br />
(l) "recalled..." " gli rammentarono l'affare del negro ."<br />
(m) Turn " made amends "thanked him, paying him capital <strong>and</strong><br />
interest .<br />
A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION . 231<br />
The two Irishmen with <strong>the</strong> money commenced business (j), <strong>and</strong><br />
succeeded (258) so well, that <strong>the</strong>y returned to Engl<strong>and</strong> with a<br />
fortune of several thous<strong>and</strong> (migliaia di) pounds (656). Previous<br />
however to <strong>the</strong>ir departure from <strong>the</strong> isl<strong>and</strong> (k), <strong>the</strong>y went to <strong>the</strong><br />
gentleman from whom <strong>the</strong>y <strong>had</strong> received <strong>the</strong> money, recalled <strong>the</strong><br />
circumstances of <strong>the</strong> negro to his recollection (l), <strong>and</strong> made<br />
amends , both for principal <strong>and</strong> interest , with thanks (m). (* * *)<br />
NAPOLEON AND THE BRITISH SAILOR. 1<br />
Whilst <strong>the</strong> French troops were encamped at Boulogne , public<br />
attention was much excited by (270) <strong>the</strong> daring attempt at escape<br />
(a) made by an English sailor. This person (man) having escaped<br />
(689) from <strong>the</strong> depot <strong>and</strong> gained (b) <strong>the</strong> borders of <strong>the</strong> sea, <strong>the</strong><br />
woods near <strong>which</strong> served him for concealment (c), constructed,<br />
(704), with no o<strong>the</strong>r instrument than a knife, a boat entirely of<br />
<strong>the</strong> bark of trees. When <strong>the</strong> wea<strong>the</strong>r was fair (853), he mounted<br />
(d) (697) a tree <strong>and</strong> looked out for (e) <strong>the</strong> English flag ; <strong>and</strong> having<br />
at last observed (discovered) (689) a British cruiser, he ran to <strong>the</strong><br />
shore with his boat on his back , <strong>and</strong> was about (842, p) to trust<br />
himself in his frail vessel to <strong>the</strong> waves, when he was (705)<br />
pursued, arrested, <strong>and</strong> loaded with chains. Everybody in <strong>the</strong> army<br />
was anxious (desired) (300) to see <strong>the</strong> boat ; <strong>and</strong> Napoleon, having<br />
at length heard of <strong>the</strong> affair (f), sent for (g) <strong>the</strong> sailor <strong>and</strong><br />
interrogated him. "You must" (h), said Napoleon, " have <strong>had</strong> a<br />
great desire<br />
300
1 " Napoleone è il Marinaro Inglese ."<br />
(a) audace tentativo di evadersi .<br />
(b) pervenuto .<br />
(c) servivano di nascondiglio .<br />
(d) Add " su di."<br />
(e) guardava se potesse Vedere .<br />
(f) "having..." sentito parlare dell'accaduto.<br />
(g) m<strong>and</strong>ò a chiamare .<br />
(h) Dovete , ne son certo.<br />
(i) v'è bastato il cuore .<br />
(j) metterlo in.<br />
(k) e di dargli.<br />
232 A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION .<br />
to see your country again, since you could resolve (i) to trust<br />
yourself on <strong>the</strong> open (full) sea in so frail a bark . I suppose you<br />
have left a swee<strong>the</strong>art <strong>the</strong>re ? " (239) " No," said <strong>the</strong> sailor, " but a<br />
poor infirm mo<strong>the</strong>r , whom I was (695) anxious (I desired ) to see."<br />
" And you shall see her," said Napoleon, giving at <strong>the</strong> same time<br />
orders to set him at (j) liberty, <strong>and</strong> to bestow upon him (k) a<br />
considerable sum of money for his mo<strong>the</strong>r, observing that " she<br />
must be a good mo<strong>the</strong>r who <strong>had</strong> so good a (such a) son." (* *)<br />
DESCRIPTION OF ENGLAND. 1<br />
Few countries exhibit a greater variety of surface than Engl<strong>and</strong>,<br />
or have been more highly favoured by (270) nature . " Although,"<br />
says Dr. Aikin, "its features are moulded on a comparatively<br />
minute scale (a), <strong>the</strong>y are marked with all <strong>the</strong> agreeable<br />
interchange (varieties) <strong>which</strong> constitute picturesque beauty. In<br />
some parts, plains clo<strong>the</strong>d in (covered of) <strong>the</strong> richest verdure,<br />
watered by copious streams, <strong>and</strong> pasturing innumerable cattle ,<br />
extend as far as <strong>the</strong> eye can reach (b) ; in o<strong>the</strong>rs (c) gently rising<br />
hills (d) <strong>and</strong> bending vales (e), fertile in corn (f), waving with<br />
woods (g), <strong>and</strong> interspersed with (266) flowery meadows, offer <strong>the</strong><br />
most delightful l<strong>and</strong>scapes of rural opulence <strong>and</strong> beauty. Some<br />
tracts furnish (offer) prospects of <strong>the</strong> more romantic <strong>and</strong><br />
impressive kind ; lofty mountains, craggy rocks, deep dells,<br />
narrow ravines, <strong>and</strong> tumbling (precipitous) torrents : nor are<br />
<strong>the</strong>re wanting, as a contrast to (h) those scenes in <strong>which</strong> every<br />
variety of nature is a different charm, <strong>the</strong> vicissitude of (i) black<br />
barren moors <strong>and</strong> wide inanimated heaths." Such is (j) a vivid<br />
301
description of <strong>the</strong> general appearance of Engl<strong>and</strong>. But <strong>the</strong> beauty<br />
<strong>and</strong> fertility of <strong>the</strong> country are not <strong>the</strong> only things to excite<br />
(<strong>which</strong> excite ) admiration . The mildness<br />
1 " Descrizione dell' Inghilterra ."<br />
(a) " its features.. " le sue prospettive non siano relativamente<br />
che di piccola proporzione.<br />
(b) fin dove può giunger l' occhio.<br />
(c) altrove .<br />
(d) collinette a dolce clivo.<br />
(e) valloncelli tortuosi.<br />
(f) che producono frumento in abbondanza.<br />
(g) coperti di boschi on deggianti .<br />
(h) "nor are <strong>the</strong>re..." ne mancavi , come per far risaltare .<br />
(i) l'aspetto vicendevole di.<br />
(j) Ecco.<br />
(j) "removed alike..." ne troppo freddo, ne troppo caldo.<br />
(k) che il suolo nasconde .<br />
(l) gr<strong>and</strong>e<strong>zz</strong>a.<br />
(m) tutto ciò dà.<br />
(n) "that are not..." di cui nessun altra nazione gode al medesimo<br />
grado.<br />
A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION 233<br />
of <strong>the</strong> climate , removed alike from <strong>the</strong> extremes of heat <strong>and</strong> cold<br />
(j) ; <strong>the</strong> multitude of rivers ; <strong>the</strong>ir (560) depth, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> facility<br />
<strong>the</strong>y afford to internal navigation ; <strong>the</strong> vast beds of coal <strong>and</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
valuable minerals hid <strong>under</strong> <strong>the</strong> surface (k) ; <strong>the</strong> abundance <strong>and</strong><br />
excellence of <strong>the</strong> fish in <strong>the</strong> rivers <strong>and</strong> surrounding seas ; <strong>the</strong><br />
extent of sea-coast ; <strong>the</strong> number, capaciousness (l), <strong>and</strong> safety of<br />
<strong>the</strong> ports <strong>and</strong> bays ; <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> favourable situation of <strong>the</strong> country for<br />
commerce ; give (m) Engl<strong>and</strong> (330) advantages that are not<br />
enjoyed in an equal degree by any o<strong>the</strong>r nation (n). Dr. AIKEN <strong>and</strong><br />
J. R. M'CULLOCH.<br />
CHARACTER OF RICHARD I.<br />
This renowned prince was (701) tall, strong, straight <strong>and</strong> well-<br />
proportioned. His arms were remarkably long, (574) his eyes blue,<br />
<strong>and</strong> full of vivacity ; his hair was of a yellowish colour ; his<br />
complexion fair (782), his countenance comely, <strong>and</strong> his air<br />
majestic .<br />
302
He was endowed with good natural <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong>ing ; his<br />
penetration was uncommon ; he possessed a fund of manly<br />
eloquence ; his conversation was spirited, <strong>and</strong> he was admired for<br />
his talents of repartee (a) ; as for his courage <strong>and</strong> ability in war,<br />
both Europe <strong>and</strong> Asia resound with his praise. The Saracens<br />
stilled <strong>the</strong>ir children with <strong>the</strong> terror of his name ; <strong>and</strong> Saladine ,<br />
who was an accomplished prince , admired his valour to such a<br />
degree of enthusiasm, that immediately after Richard <strong>had</strong><br />
defeated (710) him on <strong>the</strong> plains of Joppa , he sent him a couple of<br />
fine Arabian horses, in token of his esteem ; a (342) polite<br />
compliment, <strong>which</strong> Richard returned with magnificent presents.<br />
These are <strong>the</strong> shining parts (b) of his character, <strong>which</strong>, however,<br />
<strong>cannot</strong> da<strong>zz</strong>le <strong>the</strong> judicious observer so much, but that he may<br />
perceive a number of blemishes, <strong>which</strong> no historian has been<br />
able (c) to efface from <strong>the</strong> memory of this celebrated monarch. His<br />
ingratitude <strong>and</strong> want of filial affection are unpardonable . He was<br />
proud, haughty, ambitious, choleric, cruel, vindictive, <strong>and</strong> vicious<br />
; nothing could (794)<br />
(a) " for his talents of repartee ," per la sua arguzia .<br />
(b) qualità ammirabili .<br />
(c) "<strong>the</strong> judicious observer ..." un osservatore di senno al punto di<br />
nascondergli i tanti difetti , che niuno storico ha saputo.<br />
(d) verso .<br />
(e) come pure.<br />
(f) a segno tale che.<br />
234 A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION .<br />
equal his rapaciousness but his profusion, <strong>and</strong>, indeed, <strong>the</strong> one<br />
was <strong>the</strong> effect of <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r ; he was a tyrant to (d) his wife , as well<br />
as (e) to his people (456), who groaned <strong>under</strong> his taxations to such<br />
a degree , that (f) even <strong>the</strong> glory of his victories did not exempt<br />
him from <strong>the</strong>ir execrations : in a word, he has been aptly<br />
compared to a lion, a species of animal <strong>which</strong> he resembled not<br />
only in courage , but likewise in ferocity . SMOLLETT.<br />
WILLIAM PITT, EARL OF CHATHAM.<br />
On <strong>the</strong> stage , Pitt would have been <strong>the</strong> finest Brutus or<br />
Coriolanus ever seen (a)... His figure when (b) he first appeared<br />
in Parliament, was strikingly graceful <strong>and</strong> comm<strong>and</strong>ing ; (c) his<br />
features high <strong>and</strong> noble ; his eye full of fire. His voice, even when<br />
it sank to a whisper (d), was heard (771) to <strong>the</strong> remotest benches ;<br />
<strong>and</strong> when he strained it to his full extent (e), <strong>the</strong> sound rose like<br />
303
<strong>the</strong> swell of <strong>the</strong> organ (f) of a great ca<strong>the</strong>dral shook <strong>the</strong> house<br />
with its peal (g) <strong>and</strong> was heard through lobbies (h) <strong>and</strong> down<br />
staircases, to <strong>the</strong> Court of Requests <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> precincts (i) of<br />
Westminster Hall.<br />
He cultivated all <strong>the</strong>se eminent advantages with <strong>the</strong> most<br />
assiduous care . His action is described by a very malignant<br />
observer (j) as equal to that of Garrick . His play of countenance<br />
(k) was wonderful ; he frequently disconcerted a hostile orator by<br />
a single glance of indignation or scorn. Every tone, from <strong>the</strong><br />
impassioned cry (l) to <strong>the</strong> thrilling aside , was perfectly at his<br />
comm<strong>and</strong>. It is by no means improbable (m) that <strong>the</strong> pains <strong>which</strong><br />
he took to improve his great personal advantages <strong>had</strong> in some<br />
respects a prejudicial operation, <strong>and</strong> tended to nourish in him<br />
that passion for <strong>the</strong>atrical effect <strong>which</strong>, as we have already<br />
remarked (n), was one of <strong>the</strong> most conspicuous blemishes<br />
(defects ) in his character . MACAULAY.<br />
(a) che si vedesse mai.<br />
(b) Turn , "When he first appeared...his..."<br />
(c) imponente .<br />
(d) " even " persino qu<strong>and</strong>o parlava sotto voce.<br />
(e) "he strained it..." qu<strong>and</strong>o se ne serviva a più non posso.<br />
(f) "like <strong>the</strong> swell of <strong>the</strong> organ," come quello dell'organo.<br />
(g) ne faceva tremare la sala del senato .<br />
(h) gallerie .<br />
(i)circuito .<br />
(j) critico ostile .<br />
(k) l'espressione del suo volto.<br />
(l) " Every tone..." Tenevo in freno completo ogni emozione dell'<br />
animo ; dal grido della passione , fino all' aparte commovente .<br />
(m) Egli è probabile.<br />
(n) Come si è già fatto osservare .<br />
ITALIAN POETRY. 235<br />
ITALIAN POETRY.<br />
VERSES 1 AND SYLLABLES .<br />
Italian " versi " 1 consist of a fixed number of syllables ; <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
expression <strong>and</strong> harmony depend on <strong>the</strong> words <strong>the</strong>y contain, <strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> manner in <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong>se words are arranged .<br />
In Italian a syllable in poetry is not exactly <strong>the</strong> same as a syllable<br />
in prose ; often a syllable in a verse consists of two prose syllables<br />
304
pronounced toge<strong>the</strong>r so as to require but one emission of <strong>the</strong><br />
voice ; for instance , <strong>the</strong> following verse , <strong>which</strong> contains seven<br />
prose syllables, is counted as a verse of five syllables :<br />
Metrical Syllables 1 2 3 4 5<br />
"Già il cielo indora" 2 (ZENO).<br />
Prose Syllables 1 2 3 4 5 6 7<br />
Italian verses have different names given <strong>the</strong>m, according to <strong>the</strong><br />
number of <strong>the</strong> syllables <strong>the</strong>y contain .<br />
VERSI QUINARI.<br />
Verses of five (metrical ) syllables 3 are called "versi quinari ."<br />
They have generally two rhythmical accents ; one on <strong>the</strong> first, or<br />
second, <strong>and</strong> one (essential ) on <strong>the</strong> fourth syllable.<br />
LA MELANCONIA .<br />
FONTI e colline 4<br />
Chiesi agli dei :<br />
M'udiro al fine , 5<br />
Pago io vivrò :<br />
Ne mai quel fonte<br />
Co' desir miei ,<br />
Ne mai quel monte<br />
Trapasserò .<br />
Gli onor che sono ?<br />
Che val ricche<strong>zz</strong>a ?<br />
Di miglior dono<br />
Vommene altier : 6<br />
D'un' alma pura,<br />
Che la belle<strong>zz</strong>a<br />
Delia Natura<br />
Gusta è del Ver.<br />
1 In <strong>the</strong>se pages <strong>the</strong> word verses is used in <strong>the</strong> sense of lines in<br />
poetry. In Italian <strong>the</strong> word " versi " means lines of poetry.<br />
2 " It (<strong>the</strong> dawn) already gilds <strong>the</strong> sky."<br />
3 There are Italian verses of four syllables, called " versi<br />
quadrisillabi," <strong>which</strong>, though not musical, when used alone , have<br />
a very pretty effect when <strong>the</strong>y are judiciously mixed with verses<br />
of eight syllables. (See " Riso di Bella Donna," page 241.) There<br />
are also verses of three, or even two syllables, but <strong>the</strong>se are very<br />
305
seldom used, except to versify short trifles ; <strong>the</strong>y are utterly<br />
unmusical .<br />
4 For translation see Italian -English Vocabulary (page 260).<br />
5 " Udiro," poetical form for " udirono," <strong>the</strong>y heard me (see rule<br />
261).<br />
6 Vommene =" me ne vo," I am (see rule 194, <strong>and</strong> rules 218 <strong>and</strong><br />
845 r)<br />
236 ITALIAN POETRY.<br />
Ne può di tempre 1<br />
Cangiar mio fato ;<br />
Dipinto sempre<br />
Il ciel sarà ;<br />
Ritorneranno<br />
I fior nel prato<br />
Sin che a me l'anno<br />
Ritornerà .<br />
Melanconia ,<br />
Ninfa gentile<br />
La vita mia<br />
Consegno a te :<br />
I tuoi piaceri<br />
Chi tiene a vile<br />
Ai piacer veri<br />
Nato non è.<br />
PINDEMONTE (1753-1828).<br />
VERSI SENARI.<br />
Verses of six syllables are called "versi senari." They have two<br />
rhythmical accents ; one on <strong>the</strong> second <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r (essential)<br />
on <strong>the</strong> fifth syllable.<br />
A IMELDA .<br />
Nell'ora pietosa<br />
Che assonna ogni cura,<br />
L'affanno sol dura<br />
Che amore destò.<br />
Solingo, scorato,<br />
Disotto al verone<br />
D' Imelda si pone<br />
Spre<strong>zz</strong>ato amator .<br />
306
Mentr' ella tornata<br />
Nell'erma stanzetta<br />
Le vesti s' affretta<br />
Del ballo a spogliar .<br />
È a lei che disdegna<br />
D'amor la parola<br />
Al suon di m<strong>and</strong>ola<br />
Ei dice così :<br />
Nell'ora pietosa<br />
Che addorme ogni cura,<br />
La pena sol dura<br />
Che amore destò.<br />
La notte serena<br />
Che al sonno ti chiama ,<br />
Delgiovin che t'ama<br />
Raddoppia il sospir.<br />
Ah ! solo un istante<br />
M'ascolta, ben mio,<br />
Alonzo son io<br />
Che il core perde.<br />
È tu che il rapivi ,<br />
Ò Imelda crudele ,<br />
D' Alonzo fedele<br />
Non senti pieta !<br />
I. RICCIARDA CAPECELATRO (1800 -1860?).<br />
1 The student is again desired to read over rules 5, 9, 48, 53, <strong>and</strong><br />
63, in order to thoroughly <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> directions for <strong>the</strong><br />
double pronunciation of <strong>the</strong> letters " E," " O," " S " <strong>and</strong> " Z," <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
meaning of <strong>the</strong> letters in darker type.<br />
237 ITALIAN POETRY.<br />
VERSI SETTENARI.<br />
Verses of seven syllables are called " versi settenari ." They have<br />
two or three rhythmical accents. When <strong>the</strong>y have two accents,<br />
<strong>the</strong> first can be on any of <strong>the</strong> first four syllables, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
(essential) on <strong>the</strong> sixth syllable ; when <strong>the</strong>y have three accents,<br />
one is on <strong>the</strong> first or second syllable , <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r on <strong>the</strong> fourth, <strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> last (essential ) on <strong>the</strong> sixth syllable.<br />
IL CINQUE MAGGIO. 1<br />
Ei fu. Siccome immobile , 2<br />
307
Dato il mortal sospiro,<br />
Stette la spoglia immemore<br />
Orba di tanto spiro,<br />
Così percossa, attonita ,<br />
La terra al nunzio sta, 3<br />
Muta pens<strong>and</strong>o all' ultima<br />
O a dell'uom fatale ; 4<br />
Ne sa qu<strong>and</strong>o una simile<br />
Orma di pie mortale<br />
La sua cruenta polvere<br />
A calpestar verra .<br />
Lui sfolgorante in solio<br />
Vide il mio genio e tacque ;<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>o, con vece assidua, 5<br />
Cadde, risorse e giacque ,<br />
Di mille voci al sonito<br />
Mista la sua nn ha :<br />
Vergin di servo enc omio 6<br />
E di codardo oltraggio,<br />
Sorge or commosso al subito<br />
Sparir di tanto raggio ;<br />
È scioglie all' urna un cantico ,<br />
Che forse non morrà.<br />
1 This sublime ode, <strong>the</strong> best Italian lyric of modern times, was<br />
written by Manzoni in commemoration of <strong>the</strong> 5th of May, 1821,<br />
<strong>the</strong> day on <strong>which</strong> Napoleon I. died at St. Helena, where he <strong>had</strong><br />
been kept a prisoner for six years. Manzoni , who <strong>had</strong> always kept<br />
aloof alike from <strong>the</strong> detractors <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> flatterers of <strong>the</strong> great<br />
man, takes a rapid survey of <strong>the</strong> hero's life, but leaves it to<br />
posterity to judge ; <strong>and</strong>, like a true Christian poet, kneels down at<br />
<strong>the</strong> death-bed of <strong>the</strong> dying penitent , <strong>and</strong> prays.<br />
2 Notice that this line consists of eight metrical syllables,<br />
because it ends with a " parola sdrucciola " (see rule 60), but still<br />
it is reckoned as a " verso settenario," for <strong>the</strong> reason that <strong>the</strong> last<br />
(essential ) rhythmical accent falls upon <strong>the</strong> sixth syllable.<br />
3 Notice that this line consists of six metrical syllables only,<br />
because it ends with a " parola tronca " (see rule 62), but still it is<br />
reckoned as a " verso settenario," for <strong>the</strong> reason that <strong>the</strong> last<br />
(essential ) rhythmical accent falls upon <strong>the</strong> sixth syllable.<br />
4 " Fatale ," marked by fate.<br />
308
5 " Vece assidua," rapid vicissitudes (changes ).<br />
6 "Vergin di servo encomio ," pure from servile flattery (praise ).<br />
238 ITALIAN POETRY.<br />
Dall' Alpi alle Piramidi ,<br />
Dal Mansanare al Reno, 1<br />
Di quel secure il fulmine<br />
Tenea dietro al baleno; 2<br />
Scoppiò da Scilla al Tanai , 3<br />
Dall' uno all' altro mar.<br />
Fu vera gloria ? Ai poster!<br />
L'ardua sentenza : nui 4<br />
Chiniam la fronte al Massimo<br />
Fattor, che voile in lui<br />
Del creator suo spirto<br />
Più vasta orma stampar.<br />
La procellosa è trepida<br />
Gioia d'un gran disegno ,<br />
L'ansia d'un cor che indocile<br />
Ferve , pens<strong>and</strong>o al regno ,<br />
È il giunge , e ottiene un premio<br />
Ch' era follia sperar ;<br />
Tutto ei provò : la gloria<br />
Maggior dopo il periglio ,<br />
La fuga è la vittoria ,<br />
La reggia è il tristo esiglio :<br />
Due volte nella polvere , 5<br />
Due volte sull' altar.<br />
Ei si nomò : due sec oli<br />
L' un contro l' altro armato ,<br />
Sommessi a lui si volsero<br />
Come aspett<strong>and</strong>o il fato ;<br />
Ei fe' silenzio , ed arbitro<br />
S'assise in me<strong>zz</strong>o a lor.<br />
Ei sparve, e i di nell' ozio<br />
Chiuse in si breve sponda, 6<br />
Segno d'immensa invidia ,<br />
È di pieta profonda,<br />
D'inestinguibil odio<br />
È d'indomato amor.<br />
Come sul capo al naufrago<br />
309
L' onda s' avvolve e pesa,<br />
L'onda, su cui del misero ,<br />
Alta pur dianzi e tesa ,<br />
Scorrea la vista a scernere<br />
Prode remote invan ;<br />
Tal su quell' alma il cumulo<br />
Delle mem orie scese !<br />
Oh ! quante volte ai posteri<br />
Narrar se stesso imprese ,<br />
È sull'eterne pagine<br />
Cadde la stanca man !<br />
1 From <strong>the</strong> Mansanare (a small river near Madrid) to <strong>the</strong> Rhine .<br />
2 This bold image means : " The th<strong>under</strong>bolt (fulmine) of that<br />
fearless man (Napoleon) followed quickly its flash (baleno) " ; i.e.,<br />
He no sooner appeared on <strong>the</strong> battle -field than he smote down his<br />
enemies .<br />
3 from Scylla (a famous rock in <strong>the</strong> Strait of Messina) to <strong>the</strong><br />
River Don.<br />
4 " Nui " is used, as a poetical licence , instead of " noi."<br />
5 "Due volte...," an allusion to Napoleon's exile at Elba , <strong>and</strong> at St.<br />
Helena .<br />
6 " In si breve sponda," on so narrow a shore (St. Helena ).<br />
ITALIAN POETRY. 239<br />
Oh quante volte al tacito<br />
Morir di un giorno inerte ,<br />
Chinati i rai fulminei ,<br />
Le braccia al sen conserte ,<br />
Stette , e dei di che furono<br />
L' assalse il sovvenir !<br />
È ripensò le mobili<br />
Tende , è i percossi valli ,<br />
È il lampo de' manipoli<br />
È l'onda dei cavalli ,<br />
È il concitato imperio ,<br />
È il celere obbedir.<br />
Ahi ! forse a tanto strazio<br />
Cadde lo spirto anelo ,<br />
E disperò ; ma valida<br />
Venne una man dal cielo ,<br />
310
È in più spirabil acre<br />
Pietosa il trasportò ;<br />
È l' avviò pei floridi<br />
Sender della speranza ,<br />
Ai campi eterni , al premio<br />
Che i desideri avanza , 1<br />
Dov' è silenzio e tenebre<br />
La gloria che passò.<br />
Bella imm ortal ! benefica<br />
Fede ai trionfi avve<strong>zz</strong>a !<br />
Scrivi ancor questo, allegrati ;<br />
Che più superba alte<strong>zz</strong>a<br />
Al disonor del Golgota 2<br />
Giammai nn si chinò .<br />
Tu dalle stanche ceneri<br />
Sperdi ogni ria parola :<br />
Il Dio che atterra e suscita ,<br />
Che affanna e che consola,<br />
Sulla deserta col trice<br />
Accanto a lui posò.<br />
MANZONI (1785-1873 ).<br />
IL POTERE DI DIO.<br />
DOVUNQUE il guardo io giro,<br />
Immense Dio ti vedo :<br />
Nell' opre tue t'ammiro ,<br />
Ti riconosco in me.<br />
La terra , il mar, le sfere<br />
Parian del tuo potere :<br />
Tu sei per tutto, e noi<br />
Tutti viviamo in te.<br />
LA GRATITUDINE.<br />
Benchè di senso privo,<br />
Fin l' arboscello è grato<br />
A quell' amico rivo,<br />
Da cui riceve umor ;<br />
Per lui di fronde ornato,<br />
Bella mercè gli rende ,<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>o dal sol difende<br />
Il suo benefattor .<br />
METASTASIO (1698-1782 ).<br />
311
1 Exceeds all desires .<br />
2 " Al disonor del Golgota," to <strong>the</strong> disgrace of Calvary, <strong>which</strong> by<br />
Christ's death became a sign of salvation : an allusion to <strong>the</strong><br />
Crucifix <strong>which</strong> Napoleon held in his h<strong>and</strong> on his death-bed.<br />
240 ITALIAN POETRY.<br />
VERSI OTTONARI.<br />
Verses of eight syllables are called " versi ottonari." They can<br />
have only two accents ; one on <strong>the</strong> third <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r (essential)<br />
on <strong>the</strong> seventh syllable.<br />
LA RONDINELLA.<br />
RONDINELLA pellegrina<br />
Che ti posi in sul verone ,<br />
Ricant<strong>and</strong>o ogni mattina<br />
Quella flebile canzone ,<br />
Che vuoi dirmi in tua favella ,<br />
Pellegrina rondinella ?<br />
Solitaria nell'oblio,<br />
Dal tuo sposo abb<strong>and</strong>onata,<br />
Piangi forse al pianto mio<br />
Vedovetta sconsolata ?<br />
Piangi , piangi in tua favella ,<br />
Pellegrina rondinella .<br />
Pur di me manco infelice<br />
Tu alle penne almen t' affidi,<br />
Scorri il lago e la pendice ,<br />
Empi l'aria de'tuoi gridi,<br />
Tutto il giorno in tua favella<br />
Lui chiam<strong>and</strong>o , ò rondinella .<br />
Oh se anch'io !...Ma lo contende<br />
Questa bassa, angusta volta,<br />
Dove sole non risplende ,<br />
Dove l'aria ancor m' è tolta,<br />
Donde a te la mia favella<br />
Giunge appena, o rondinella .<br />
Il settembre innanzi viene ,<br />
È a lasciarmi ti prepari :<br />
Tu vedrai lontane arene ,<br />
Nuovi monti , nuovi mari<br />
Salut<strong>and</strong>o in tua favella ,<br />
Pellegrina rondinella :<br />
312
Ed io tutte le mattine<br />
Riaprendo gli occhi al pianto,<br />
Era le nevi e fra le brine<br />
Crederò d'udir quel canto,<br />
Onde par che in tua favella<br />
Mi compianga , o rondinella .<br />
Una croce a primavera<br />
Troverai su questo suolo :<br />
Rondinella , in sulla sera<br />
Sovra lei raccogli il volo :<br />
Dimmi pace in tua favella ,<br />
Pellegrina rondinella .<br />
1 This very pretty song, a masterpiece of harmony <strong>and</strong> elegance,<br />
is taken from " Marco Visconti ," a fine novel by Grossi (1800-<br />
1850). It is very popular in Italy, <strong>and</strong> has been set to music by<br />
several celebrated composers.<br />
241 ITALIAN POETRY.<br />
RISO DI BELLA DONNA.<br />
Se bel rio, se bell' auretta<br />
Tra l'erbetta<br />
Sul mattin mormor<strong>and</strong>o erra ;<br />
Se di fiori un praticello<br />
Si fa bello,<br />
Noi diciam : ride la terra .<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>o avvien che un zeffiretto<br />
Per diletto<br />
Bagni il pie nell'onde chiare ,<br />
Sicche l'acqua in sull' arena<br />
Scherzi appena,<br />
Noi diciam che ride il mare .<br />
Se giammai tra fior vermigli ,<br />
Se tra gigli<br />
Veste l' alba un aureo velo,<br />
È su rote di zaffiro<br />
Move in giro,<br />
Noi diciam che ride il cielo .<br />
Ben e ver, qu<strong>and</strong>'è giocondo<br />
Ride il mondo ;<br />
Ride il ciel qu<strong>and</strong>' è gioioso ;<br />
Ben e ver ; ma n on san poi,<br />
Coqume voi,<br />
313
Fare un riso grazioso.<br />
CHIABRERA (1552-1637).<br />
VERSI NOVENARI.<br />
Verses of nine syllables are called " versi novenari ; " but, as <strong>the</strong>y<br />
are seldom used, <strong>the</strong>y need not be illustrated .<br />
VERSI DECASILLABI.<br />
Verses of ten syllables are called "versi decasillabi ." They have<br />
three rhythmical accents ; one on <strong>the</strong> third, one on <strong>the</strong> sixth, <strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> last (essential ) on <strong>the</strong> ninth syllable.<br />
LA BATTAGLIA DI MACLODIO. 1<br />
S' ode a destra uno squillo di tromba ;<br />
A sinistra risponde uno squillo ;<br />
D'ambo i lati calpesto rimbomba<br />
Da cavalli e da fanti il terren .<br />
Quinci spunta per l' aria un vessillo ;<br />
Quindi un altro s' avanza spiegato :<br />
Ecco appare un drappello schierato ;<br />
Ecco un altro che incontro gli vien .<br />
1 This masterly lyric is a part of <strong>the</strong> chorus in " Il Conte di<br />
Carmagnola, " a fine tragedy by Manzoni . The great poet deplores<br />
<strong>the</strong> intestine warfare <strong>which</strong> desolated Italy in <strong>the</strong> Middle Ages,<br />
<strong>and</strong>, with words breathing <strong>the</strong> greatest humanity <strong>and</strong> purest<br />
patriotism , conjures his countrymen to keep friendly <strong>and</strong> united .<br />
242 ITALIAN POETRY.<br />
Già di me<strong>zz</strong>o sparito e il terreno ;<br />
Già le spade respingon le spade ;<br />
L' un dell' altro le immerge nel seno ;<br />
Gronda il sangue , raddoppia il ferir .<br />
Chi son essi ? Alle belle contrade<br />
Qual ne venne straniero a far guerra ?<br />
Qual è quei che ha giurato la terra<br />
Dove nacque far salva, io morir<br />
D' una terra son tutti ; un linguaggio<br />
Parian tutti ; fratelli li dice<br />
Lo straniero : il comune lignaggio<br />
A ognun d' essi dal volto traspar.<br />
Questa terra fu a tutti nudrice ,<br />
Questa terra di sangue ora intrisa ,<br />
Che natura dall' altre ha divisa ,<br />
314
È recinta coll' Alpe e col mar.<br />
Ahi ! qual d' essi il sacrilege br<strong>and</strong>o<br />
Trasse il primo il fratello a ferire ?<br />
O terror ! del conflitto esecr<strong>and</strong>o<br />
La cagione esecr<strong>and</strong>a qual'è?<br />
Non la sanno : a dar morte , a morire<br />
Qui senz'ira ognun d'essi è venuto ;<br />
È venduto ad un duce venduto,<br />
Con lui pugna, e non chiede il perchè .<br />
Ahi sventura ! Ma spose non hanno,<br />
Non han madri gli stolti guerrieri ?<br />
Perché tutti i lor cari non vanno<br />
Dall' ignobile campo a strappar ?<br />
E i vegliardi , che ai casti pensieri<br />
Della tomba già schiudon la mente ,<br />
Che non tentan la turba furente<br />
Con prudenti parole placar ?<br />
MANZONI (1783 -1873 ).<br />
I very much regret to have no space here to print <strong>the</strong> whole of<br />
this splendid chorus, but I intend to republish it, in full, in my "<br />
Italian Reader." The poetry of Manzoni should be cherished by all<br />
who value heartfelt, religious, <strong>and</strong> patriotic sentiments expressed<br />
by a great poet.<br />
ITALIAN POETRY. 243<br />
MESSINA .<br />
Chi non vide a marina Messina ,<br />
Mai può dir ch' egli vide belta :<br />
Di Triquetra è la figlia , e conchiglia ,<br />
È la perla che pari non ha !<br />
Sei pur vaga supina, ò Messina ,<br />
Sul guancial di tue rose odorose,<br />
Cinta ognor dal monile d' Aprile ,<br />
Circonfusa d' aroma e fulgor !<br />
Mattutina , sei cara, ò Messina ,<br />
Se l' aurora ti bacia e colora,<br />
Se in te cada, e t' imperil rugiada,<br />
S'hai nel grembo un bel nembo di fior!<br />
Sei divina al meriggio , ò Messina ,<br />
Tra palmeti , bei fonti e laureti ,<br />
Tra gli aurati ed olenti cedrati ,<br />
315
Con torrenti di luce e d' ardor !<br />
Vespertina sei maga , ò Messina ,<br />
S' hai pacato, sereno stellato :<br />
Sei portento s' hai luna d' argento ,<br />
Danze, suoni e canzoni d' amor !<br />
Sei regina , ò a<strong>zz</strong>urrina Messina ,<br />
Per giardini di fate beate ,<br />
Per convalli sott' onda in coralli ,<br />
Coronata Sirena del mar !<br />
Chi non vide a marina Messina ,<br />
Mai può dir ch' egli vide brillar<br />
Le beltà che rinserra la terra ,<br />
Chiude il flutto, ed il ciel sa versar !<br />
Pepoli (1801-1881).<br />
VERSI ENDECASILLABI .<br />
Verses of eleven syllables are called "versi endecasillabi," or<br />
"versi eroici." They are <strong>the</strong> principal Italian verses <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> best<br />
wherewith to express great <strong>and</strong> noble thoughts. These verses<br />
may have two, three, four, <strong>and</strong> even five (rhythmical) accents,<br />
arranged in almost every conceivable manner .<br />
244 ITALIAN POETRY.<br />
BEATRICE.<br />
Tanto gentile e tanto onesta pare<br />
La donna mia, qu<strong>and</strong> ella altrui saluta,<br />
Ch'ogni lingua divien trem<strong>and</strong>o muta,<br />
E gli occhi non ardiscon di guardare .<br />
Ella sen va sentendosi laudare , 1<br />
Benignamente d' umiltà vestuta ; 2<br />
E par che sia una cosa venuta<br />
Di cielo in terra a miracol mostrare .<br />
Mostrasi si piacente a chi la mira ,<br />
Che dà per gli occhi una dolce<strong>zz</strong>a al core,<br />
Che intender non la può chi non la prova.<br />
E par che dalle sue labbia si mova 3<br />
Uno spirto soave e pien d' amore ,<br />
Che va dicendo all' anima : sospira.<br />
DANTE (1265-1321 ).<br />
LAURA.<br />
Erano i capei d'oro all' aura sparsi,<br />
316
Che 'n mille dolci nodi gli avvolgea ;<br />
E 'l vago lume oltra misura ardea<br />
Di quei begli occhi , ch' or ne son si scarsi ;<br />
E 'l viso di pietosi color farsi ,<br />
Non so se vero o falso mi parea :<br />
I' che l'esca amorosa al petto avea ,<br />
Qual maraviglia se di subit' arsi ?<br />
Non era l' <strong>and</strong>ar suo cosa mortale ,<br />
Ma d' angelica forma ; e le parole<br />
Suonavan altro che pur voce umana .<br />
Uno spirto celeste , un vivo sole<br />
Fu quel ch' i' vidi : e se non fosse or tale ,<br />
Piaga per allentar d' arco non sana. 4<br />
PETRARCA (1304 -1374 ).<br />
1 In order to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> " sen va," see rule 845, r.<br />
2 " vestuta ," for " vestita ," clo<strong>the</strong>d, full of.<br />
3 " labbia," for " labbra," lips.<br />
4 " Piaga per allentar d'arco non sana," means : " A wound (piaga)<br />
does not get healed (non sana) when <strong>the</strong> bow (arco) relaxes." After<br />
<strong>the</strong> words "<strong>the</strong> bow," <strong>the</strong> words " from <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong> arrow <strong>which</strong><br />
inflicted <strong>the</strong> wound came," are <strong>under</strong>stood. This pretty " concetto<br />
" of Petrarca, one of <strong>the</strong> earliest in <strong>the</strong> Italian language , is now<br />
used as a proverb.<br />
ITALIAN POETRY. 245<br />
SOPRA LA MORTE .<br />
Morte, che se' tu mai ? Primo dei danni<br />
L' alma vile e la rea ti crede e teme ;<br />
E vendetta del ciel scendi ai tiranni ,<br />
Che il vigile tuo braccio incalza e preme .<br />
Ma l' infelice , a cui de' lunghi affanni<br />
Grave è l'incarco , e morta. in cuor la speme ,<br />
Quel ferro implora troncator degli anni ,<br />
E ride all' appressar dell' ore estreme .<br />
Fra la polve di Marte e le vicende<br />
Ti sfida il forte, che ne' rischi indura ;<br />
È il saggio senza impallidir ti attende .<br />
Morte, che se' tu dunque ? Un'ombra oscura,<br />
Un bene , un male , che diversa prende<br />
Dagli affetti dell' uom forma e natura .<br />
317
MONTI (1754-1828 ).<br />
VERSI DODECASILLABI.<br />
Verses of twelve syllables are called " versi dodecasillabi ." They<br />
have four accents ; one on <strong>the</strong> third, one on <strong>the</strong> fifth, one on <strong>the</strong><br />
eighth , <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r (essential ) on <strong>the</strong> eleventh syllable.<br />
UN POPOLO DEGRADATO.<br />
Dai guardi dubbiosi, dai pavidi volti,<br />
Qual raggio di sole da nuvoli folti,<br />
Traluce de'padri la fiera virtù :<br />
Ne' guardi, ne' volti confuso ed incerto<br />
Si mesce e discorda lo spregio sofferto<br />
Col misero orgoglio d'un tempo che fu.<br />
MANZONI (1785-1873 ).<br />
Blank verses are called in Italian " versi sciolti ."<br />
I regret also to have no space here for more than <strong>the</strong>se few lines<br />
taken from one of <strong>the</strong> two beautiful choruses in <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r<br />
excellent tragedy by Manzoni , " Adelchi," but this also I intend to<br />
republish in full in my " Italian Reader ."<br />
246 VOCABULARY.<br />
PART I. ENGLISH ITALIAN.<br />
NOTE. Nouns ending in o are masculine , <strong>and</strong> those in a, as a rule ,<br />
feminine .<br />
The gender of nouns ending in e is given .<br />
A<br />
Accomplish , v. a. compire .<br />
A, an, un, uno, una.<br />
Accomplished , compito.<br />
Ab<strong>and</strong>on, v. a. abb<strong>and</strong>onare.<br />
According, secondo.<br />
Ability, abilità .<br />
Accusation , accusa .<br />
Able, 'bile.<br />
Accuse , v. a. accusare .<br />
About, circa .<br />
Acquaintance , conoscenza ,<br />
Above, al di sopra.<br />
(friend ), conoscente .<br />
mentioned , suddetto.<br />
Acquit, v. a. assolvere .<br />
Abruptly, bruscamente .<br />
Act, atto.<br />
Abundance, abbondanza.<br />
Act, v. a. agire .<br />
Abyss, golfo, abisso.<br />
Action , azione , f.<br />
Academy , accademia .<br />
Address, indiri<strong>zz</strong>o .<br />
Accent , accento .<br />
Admiration , ammirazione ,f.<br />
Accept, v. a. accettare .<br />
Admire , v. a. ammitare .<br />
Accident , accidente .<br />
Admission , entrata .<br />
Accompany, v. a. accompagnare . Admit, v. a. ammettere .<br />
318
Adorn, v. a. adornare .<br />
Advance , v. a. avanzarsi .<br />
Advantage , vantaggio .<br />
Advice ; consiglio .<br />
Advise , v. a. consigliare .<br />
Affair , affare , m.<br />
Affection , affetto.<br />
Afflicted, afflitto.<br />
Afford, v. a. dare, procurare.<br />
After, dopo.<br />
Afternoon , dopo pranzo.<br />
Afterwards, dopo.<br />
Again , ancora, di nuovo.<br />
Against , contro.<br />
Age, età, secolo.<br />
Agitation , agitazione .<br />
Ago, fa.<br />
Agreeable , piacevole .<br />
Air, aria .<br />
Album, album.<br />
All, tutto, tutti.<br />
Allege , v. a. addurre.<br />
Alley, chiasso .<br />
Allow, v. a. permettere .<br />
Almost, quasi.<br />
Alone , solo.<br />
Along, lungo.<br />
Alps, Alpi, f.<br />
Already, già.<br />
Also, anche , ancora, altresi , ezi<strong>and</strong>io<br />
Altar, altare , m.<br />
Although, benchè , sebbene .<br />
Always, sempre .<br />
Ambitious , ambizioso .<br />
America , America .<br />
American , Americano .<br />
Amiable , amabile .<br />
Ammunition , munizione , f.<br />
319<br />
Among, amongst , fra, tra.<br />
Ancestors , antenati , predecessori .<br />
Ancient , antico .<br />
And, e, ed.<br />
Anger , collera .<br />
Animal , animate .<br />
Ano<strong>the</strong>r , un'altra .<br />
Answer , v. n. rispondere .<br />
Antagonist , avversario ,rivale .<br />
Any, chiunque , ognuno,qualunque.<br />
one, alcuno.<br />
thing , qualche cosa.<br />
Any, del, dello, &c., alcuno, &c.<br />
Anyone , alcuno.<br />
Apartment , appartamento .<br />
Apologise, v. a. far delle scuse a.<br />
Appear, v. n. apparire .<br />
Appearance , apparenza.<br />
Apple, mela , pomo.<br />
Apprehend, v. a. temere .<br />
Approve, v. a. approvare.<br />
Aptly, attamente .<br />
Arab, Arabian , Arabo.<br />
Arabia, Arabia.<br />
Arbitrator, arbitro.<br />
Architect , architetto .<br />
Argue , v. n. argomentare , ragionare<br />
discorrere , .<br />
Arm, braccio.<br />
Army, esercito , armata .<br />
Arrangement , accomodamento .<br />
Arrest , v. a. arrestare .<br />
Arrival , arrive .<br />
Arrive , v. n. arrivare .Arrow, freccia .<br />
Art, arte , f.<br />
Artificial , artificiale , finto.<br />
Artillery , artiglieria .<br />
Artist , artista , m., rule 370.
As far as, fino a.<br />
As if, come se.<br />
As soon as, tosto che.<br />
247 ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY.<br />
Asia , Asia .<br />
Baggage, bagaglio.<br />
Ask, v. a. chiedere , dom<strong>and</strong>are.<br />
Asleep , addormentato.<br />
Assembly , adunanza.<br />
Assertion , asserzione , f.<br />
Assiduous, assiduo.<br />
Assistance , aiuto.<br />
Assure , v. a. assicurare .<br />
Astonished , attonito.<br />
Astronomer , astronomo.<br />
At a, all, punto,<br />
last, finalmente .<br />
Once, subito.<br />
present , ora, adesso.<br />
Astronomy, astronomia .<br />
A<strong>the</strong>nian , Ateniese .<br />
Athletic , d'atleta.<br />
Attack , attacco, assalto.<br />
Attack , v. a. attaccare .<br />
Attend, v. a. accudire a (like Finire ).<br />
Attendant , servo .<br />
Attention , attenzione , f.<br />
Aunt, zia.<br />
Austrian , Austriaco .<br />
Author, autore .<br />
Autumn , autunno.<br />
Avenge , (one's -self), v. r. vendicarsi .<br />
Avoid, v. a. evitare .<br />
Awake , v. a. svegliare .<br />
Awfully, terribilmente .<br />
B<br />
Back, dosso, schiena .<br />
Bad, cattivo .<br />
Bag, sacco.<br />
320<br />
As, mentre , come .<br />
Ascribe , v. a. attribuire .<br />
Balance , bilancia .<br />
Ball, palla, (dancing) ballo.<br />
Bank, riva .<br />
Banker , banchiere .<br />
Barbarous, barbaro.<br />
Bark (boat), barca.<br />
Baron, barone.<br />
Baroness , baronessa .<br />
Barren , sterile .<br />
Basket , canestro , paniere .<br />
Battery, batteria .<br />
Battle, battaglia.<br />
Bay, baia.<br />
Be, v. n. <strong>and</strong> auxiliary , essere .<br />
able, potere.<br />
afraid, temere .<br />
Born, nascere .<br />
due, appartenere a. -,<br />
obliged dovere . ,<br />
necessary abbisognare .<br />
sorry,rincrescere .<br />
Willing , volere , esser disposto.<br />
Beat, v. a. battere .<br />
Down, buttar giù.<br />
Beautiful , bello, leggiadro .<br />
Beauty, belle<strong>zz</strong>a.<br />
Because , perché , per causa di.<br />
Become , v. n. divenire .<br />
Bed, letto. room, camera da letto.<br />
Bed (of coal), strato.<br />
Before (prep, of time ), avanti , prima<br />
di, (prep. of place), davanti .<br />
Beg, v. a. pregare .
Begin , v. n. principiare .<br />
Behave , v. n. comportarsi .<br />
Behaviour , condotta.<br />
Behind, indietro , (adv.)<br />
dietro di, (prep.)<br />
Belgium , Belgio.<br />
Believe , v. n. credere .<br />
Bell, campanello .<br />
Belong, v. n. appartenere .<br />
Bench , scranno .<br />
Bertha , Berta.<br />
Beseech , v. a. pregare .<br />
Besiege , v. a. assediare .<br />
Best, migliore .<br />
Betray, v. a. tradire (like Finire ).<br />
Better , meglio , migliore .<br />
Between , betwixt, fra, tra.<br />
Big, grosso, gr<strong>and</strong>e.<br />
Bind, v. a. legare .<br />
Bird, uccello .<br />
Birthday, giorno di nascita .<br />
Bit, pe<strong>zz</strong>o.<br />
Black, nero .<br />
Blacksmith , fabbroferraio.<br />
Blame , v. a. biasimare .<br />
Blotting-paper, carta sugante .<br />
Blow, colpo, botta.<br />
Blue, turchino , a<strong>zz</strong>urro.<br />
Board, asse , f. on , a bor do di.<br />
Boat, barca, battello.<br />
Body, corpo.<br />
Bonnet, cappellino.<br />
Book, libro.<br />
binder, legatore di libri.<br />
Boot, stivale , m.<br />
Border, margine , m. Orlo, spiaggia .<br />
Bore, seccatura .<br />
Botany, botanica.<br />
321<br />
Both, tutti e due, e...e.<br />
Bottle, bottiglia.<br />
Boulogne, Bologna.<br />
Bow, v. a. fare un inchino a.<br />
Box, scatola, cassetta .<br />
Boy, raga<strong>zz</strong>o, fanciullo .<br />
Branch, ramo.<br />
Br<strong>and</strong>y, acquavite .<br />
Brass, lottone.<br />
Brave, bravo, animoso .<br />
Bravely , bravamente .<br />
Bread, pane, m.<br />
Breadth, larghe<strong>zz</strong>a .<br />
Break , v. a. rompere . Up, separarsi .<br />
Breakfast , colazione , f.<br />
Breakfast , v.a. far colazione .<br />
Brick -dust, polvere di mattoni .<br />
Bridge, ponte.<br />
Brilliant , brillante .<br />
Brim (of a hat),<br />
le falde (di un cappello).<br />
Bring, v. a. portare.<br />
Up, menare .<br />
British , Brittanico .<br />
Brittle , fragile .<br />
Broad, ampio, largo.<br />
Bronze, bronzo.<br />
Brook, ruscello .<br />
Bro<strong>the</strong>r, fratello . in-law, cognato.<br />
Browse, v. a. pascersi .<br />
Brutus, Bruto.<br />
Build, v. a. fabbricare .<br />
Building, edifizio , fabbricato.<br />
Bull-fight, combattimento uomini fra<br />
a piedi o a cavallo con un toro.<br />
Bullet, palla di fucile .<br />
Burn, v. a. abbruciare .<br />
Business , affare , affari .
Busy, affaccendato .<br />
Busybody, affannone .<br />
But, ma. still, però, eppure.<br />
Buy, v. a. comprare .<br />
C<br />
Cabbage, cavolo.<br />
248 ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY.<br />
Camp, campo.<br />
Can, I can, posso ; we can, possiamo.<br />
Cannon , cannone .<br />
Canto, canto.<br />
Capital (of a country) la capitale<br />
(funds) il capitale .<br />
Captain , capitano.<br />
Caravansary , caravanseraglio .<br />
Card, carta.<br />
Care , pensiero , cura.<br />
Carpenter , falegname .<br />
Carpet, tappeto.<br />
Carriage , carro<strong>zz</strong>a, vettura .<br />
Carry, v. a. Portare .<br />
Away, portar via.<br />
Cart-load, carro, plural , carra .<br />
Case , caso, soggetto.<br />
Cast, v. a. gettare .<br />
Castle , castello .<br />
Cat, gatto.<br />
Catch, acchiappare .<br />
Hold of, afferrare .<br />
Ca<strong>the</strong>dral , cattedrale .<br />
Cattle , bestiame .<br />
Cause , causa, cagione .<br />
Cause , v. a. cagionare .<br />
Caution , cautela .<br />
Cavern , caverna .<br />
Celebrate , v. a. celebrare .<br />
Celebrated , (famous), celebre .<br />
Celebrity , celebrità .<br />
322<br />
Cage , gabbia.<br />
Cairo , Cairo .<br />
Call, v. a. chiamare .<br />
Calm , calma .<br />
Cambric , cambraia .<br />
Camelia , camelia .<br />
Cement , cemento .<br />
Century , secolo.<br />
Certainly , certamente .<br />
Chain , catena .<br />
Chair , sedia , seggiola .<br />
Arm seggi ola a braccioli .<br />
Easy , sedia d'appoggio.<br />
Chairman , presidente .<br />
Challenge , sfida.<br />
Chance , caso, ventura .<br />
Change , v. a. cambiare .<br />
Chaplain , cappellano.<br />
Character , carattere , m.<br />
Charity , carità .<br />
Charles , Carlo.<br />
Charlotte , Carlotta.<br />
Charm , incanto .<br />
Cheek , guancia , gota.<br />
Cheerful , allegro .<br />
Cheese , cacio , formaggio .<br />
Cherry , ciriegia .<br />
Chicken , pollastro.<br />
Child, fanciullo .<br />
Chimney -piece , quadro di camino .<br />
China , porcellana .<br />
Chirp, v. n. cantare .<br />
Choleric , collerico .<br />
Choose , v. a. scegliere .<br />
Christmas , Natale .<br />
Chronology, cronologia .<br />
Church , chiesa .
Circumstance , circostanza .<br />
City, citta .<br />
Clean , netto, pulito.<br />
Clergyman , parroco, pievano .<br />
Clever , abile , destro.<br />
Climate , clima .<br />
Clock, pendola, orologio.<br />
O'clock (see rule 548).<br />
Cloth (of linen , or cotton) tela ,<br />
(of wool) panno.<br />
Clo<strong>the</strong>s , panni.<br />
Cloud, nube, nuvola.<br />
Coal, carbon fossile .<br />
Coast, costa, spiaggia<br />
Coat, vestito , abito.<br />
Coffee <strong>and</strong> coffee -house , caffe.<br />
College , collegio .<br />
Colonel , colonnello .<br />
Colour, colore.<br />
Columbus, Colombo.<br />
Come , v. n. venire .<br />
Back, ritornare . in ,entrare .<br />
Comedy, commedia .<br />
Comely , piacevole , vago, avvenente .<br />
Comfortable, confortevole , comodo.<br />
Comm<strong>and</strong>, com<strong>and</strong>o.<br />
Comm<strong>and</strong>, v. a. com<strong>and</strong>are .<br />
Commerce , commercio .<br />
Commercial , commerciale .<br />
Commission , commissione .<br />
Commit , v. a. commettere .<br />
Committee , comitato .<br />
Communication , comunicazione .<br />
Companion , compagno.<br />
Company, compagnia .<br />
Compare , v. a. paragonare .<br />
Compass, bussola.<br />
Compel, v. a. forzare.<br />
323<br />
Complexion , carnagione , f.<br />
Compliment , complimento .<br />
Compose, v. a. comporre.<br />
Conceited , vanitoso .<br />
Concert , concerto .<br />
Conclude, v. a. conchiudere .<br />
Condemn , v. a. condannare .<br />
Condition , condizione , f.<br />
Conduct, v. a. condurre.<br />
Conduct, condotta.<br />
Confess , v. a. confessare .<br />
Confidence , confidenza .<br />
Confused, confuso.<br />
Conjugate , v. a. coniugare .<br />
Conquer , v. a. conquistare .<br />
Conscientious , coscienzioso .<br />
Consequence , consequenza .<br />
Consider , v. a. considerare .<br />
Considerable , considerable .<br />
Conspicuous, cospicuo.<br />
Constitute , v. a. Costituire<br />
(like Finire ).<br />
Construct, v. a. Costruire ,<br />
(like Finire ).<br />
Contain , v. a. contenere .<br />
Continue , v. a. continuare .<br />
Contrary, contrario .<br />
Contribute , v. a. contribuire<br />
(like Finire ).<br />
Convenient , conveniente .<br />
Conversation , conversazione , f.<br />
Copious, abbondante.<br />
Copper, rame .<br />
Copy, copia.<br />
Coriolanus , Coriplano.<br />
Corn, frumento .<br />
Cornelia , Cornelia .<br />
Correct , v. a. correggere .
Cost. v. n. costare .<br />
Costly, dispendioso.<br />
Cottage , capanna.<br />
Cotton, cotone, m.<br />
Countenance , viso, aspetto,<br />
carnagione , f.<br />
Country, (in a general sense ) paese ,<br />
(out of town), in campagna ,<br />
(in opposition to <strong>the</strong> capital)<br />
provincia .<br />
ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY. 249<br />
Crime , delitto.<br />
Decapitation , decapitazione , f.<br />
Criminal , criminale .<br />
Croesus , Creso .<br />
Cross, v. a. attraversare .<br />
Crowd, calca, folia.<br />
Crown, corona.<br />
Cruel , crudele .<br />
Cruiser , vascello di corso.<br />
Cry, v. a. gridare.<br />
Crystal, cristallo .<br />
Cultivate , v. a. coltivare .<br />
Cur, cagnuccio .<br />
Curious , curioso.<br />
Custom-house , dogana.<br />
D<br />
Danger , pericolo.<br />
Dangerous , pericoloso.<br />
Dare, v. a. ardire , (like Finire ).<br />
Dark, oscuro, tenebroso .<br />
Daughter , figlia .<br />
Day after -to-morrow, posdomani, m.<br />
Day, giorno, di.<br />
Da<strong>zz</strong>le, v. a. abbagliare .<br />
Dean , decano.<br />
Dear, caro.<br />
Death , morte , f.<br />
Debt, debito.<br />
324<br />
house , casa di campagna .<br />
-Man, paesano, compatriota.<br />
Couple, coppia, paio.<br />
Courage , coraggio.<br />
Course , corso.<br />
Court, corte, f. cortile , m.<br />
Cousin , cugino, cugina .<br />
Cover , v. a. coprire (like Servire ).<br />
Craggy, scosceso ,diroccato.<br />
Deceit , frode, f.<br />
Decide , v. a. decidere .<br />
Decision , decisione , f.<br />
Deed, azione , f. fatto.<br />
Deep, profondo.<br />
Defeat , v. a. sconfiggere .<br />
Defect , difetto.<br />
Defiance , sfida.<br />
Defray, v. a. pagare.<br />
Degree , grado, segno.<br />
Delight , delizia .<br />
Delight , v. a. dilettare .<br />
Delightful , dilettevole .<br />
Dell, valle , f. vallone , m.<br />
Demetrius , Demetrio .<br />
Demolish , v. a. Demolire<br />
(like Finire ).<br />
Deny, v. a. negare .<br />
Depart, v. n. partire<br />
(like Servire ).<br />
Departure , partenza.<br />
Depend, v. n. dipendere .<br />
Depict, v. a. dipingere .<br />
Depot, depòt.<br />
Depth, profondità.<br />
Describe , v. a. descrivere .
Description , descrizione , f.<br />
Deserve , v. n. meritare .<br />
Desire , desiderio .<br />
Desire , v. a. desiderare ,pregare ;<br />
see rule 300.<br />
Despise , v. a. dispre<strong>zz</strong>are .<br />
Despotic, despotico.<br />
Dessert , dopopasto.<br />
Destine , v. a. destinare .<br />
Detain , v. a. ritenere .<br />
Determine , v. a. determinare .<br />
Diamond, diamante , m.<br />
Dictates , precetti .<br />
Dictionary , dizionario .<br />
Die, v. n. morire .<br />
Difference , differenza .<br />
Different , differente .<br />
Difficult , difficile .<br />
Diligently , diligentemente .<br />
Diminish , v. n. Diminuire<br />
(like Finire ).<br />
Dine , v. n. pranzare .<br />
Dining -room, sala da pranzo.<br />
Dinner , pranzo.<br />
Directly , in un subito.<br />
Director , direttore .<br />
Disaffection , scontento .<br />
Disarm , v. a. disarmare .<br />
Discernible , potevansi vedere .<br />
Disconcert , v. a. sconcertare .<br />
Discover , v. a. scoprire (like Servire ).<br />
Discovery , scoperta.<br />
Discussion , discussione , f.<br />
Disease , malattia .<br />
Disguise , travestimento .<br />
Dishonest , disonesto .<br />
Dishonour , disonore .<br />
Dismiss , v. a. dar licenza .<br />
325<br />
Displease , v.a. dispiacerea .<br />
Distance , distanza.<br />
Distant , distante .<br />
Distinguish , v. a. discernere .<br />
Divine , divino.<br />
Do, v. a. fare .<br />
How do you do ? come sta ?<br />
or come state ?<br />
Doctor, dottore.<br />
Dog, cane .<br />
Door, porta.<br />
Down, giù.<br />
Dozen, do<strong>zz</strong>ina.<br />
Draw, v. a. disegnare .<br />
Drawing , disegno .<br />
Dress, abito, veste .<br />
Dress, v. a. Vestire .<br />
One's self, vestirsi (like Servire ).<br />
Drink , v. a. bere .<br />
Drinking , il bere .<br />
Drive , v. a. guidare .<br />
Droll, originale .<br />
Ductile , duttile .<br />
Duel, duello.<br />
Durable, durabile.<br />
During, durante.<br />
Dust, polvere , f.<br />
Duty, dovere , m.<br />
Dwarf, nano.<br />
E<br />
Each, ogni.<br />
Eagle, aquila .<br />
Ear, orecchio .<br />
Early, per tempo.<br />
Earn, v. a. guadagnare .<br />
Earnest, in earnest , sul serio ,<br />
con amore .<br />
Earth, terra .
Easily, facilmente .<br />
Eastern, orientale .<br />
Easy-chair , poltrona.<br />
Eat, va. mangiare .<br />
Eating, il mangiare .<br />
Ecclesiastic , ecclesiastico .<br />
Education, educazione , f.<br />
Edward, Odoardo.<br />
Efface, v. a. cancellare .<br />
Effect, effetto .<br />
Egg, uovo.<br />
Egypt Egitto<br />
Eight, otto.<br />
Eighty, ottanta.<br />
Ei<strong>the</strong>r , o...o, ovvero...ovvero.<br />
250 ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY.<br />
Encourage, v. a. incoraggiare . Escape, v. n. scappare,<br />
End (termination ), fine , f.<br />
Endeavour, sforzo,<br />
Endow, v. a. dotare.<br />
Enemy, nemico .<br />
Engl<strong>and</strong>, Inghilterra .<br />
English <strong>and</strong> Englishman , Inglese .<br />
Enjoy, v. a. godere.<br />
Enough, abbastanza.<br />
Enraged, arrabbiato.<br />
Enrich, v. a. arricchire (like Finire ).<br />
Enter, v. n. entrare .<br />
Enthusiasm , entusiasmo .<br />
Entirely , intieramente .<br />
Entreat, v. a. supplicare .<br />
Entreaty, preghiera .<br />
Entrenchments , fortificazioni , f.<br />
Envelope sopracoperto, busta.<br />
Equal, eguale , simile .<br />
Equal, v. a. pareggiare .<br />
Erect, v. a. erigere , innalzare .<br />
Escape, fuga.<br />
326<br />
Elect, v. a. eleggere .<br />
Election, , f. elezione<br />
Elephant, elefante .<br />
Elizabeth, 'Elisabetta.<br />
Eloquence, eloquenza .<br />
Elude, v. a. sfuggire .<br />
Embark, v. n. imbarcarsi .<br />
Embellishment , abbellimento .<br />
Emblem, emblema , m.<br />
Embroider, v. a. ricamare .<br />
Eminent , eminente .<br />
Emperor, imperatore .<br />
Empress, imperatrice .<br />
Encamp, v. n. accamparsi .<br />
fuggire (like Servire ).<br />
Essay, saggio.<br />
Establish, v. a. Stabilire (like Finire ).<br />
Esteem , stima .<br />
Esteem , v. a. stimare .<br />
Europe, Europa.<br />
Even, persino .<br />
Evening , sera .<br />
Event, evento .<br />
Ever, mai, sempre .<br />
Every, ogni. one, ognuno.<br />
thing , tutto.<br />
Body, tutti.<br />
Everywhere , da per tutto.<br />
Examination , esame , in.<br />
Excellence , eccellenza .<br />
Except, eccetto , tranne .<br />
Excite, v. a. eccitare .<br />
Excuse, scusa.<br />
Execration , esecrazione , f.<br />
Execute, v. a. eseguire (like Finire ).
Exempt, v. a. esentare .<br />
Exercise , esercizio , tema .<br />
Exhibition, esposizione , f.<br />
Exile, esiglio<br />
Expect, v. a. aspettare .<br />
Expense, spesa.<br />
Explain, v. a. spiegare .<br />
Exploit, gesto (rule 420)<br />
Extend, v. a. stendere .<br />
Extent, ampie<strong>zz</strong>a .<br />
Extraordinary, straordinario .<br />
Extravagance , stravaganza .<br />
Extremely , estremamente .<br />
Eye, occhio.<br />
F<br />
Facility , facilità .<br />
Fair, biondo, bello.<br />
Faithful , fedele .<br />
Faithfully , fedelmente .<br />
Family , famiglia .<br />
Famous, famoso.<br />
Far, lontano.<br />
Farm, podere, m.<br />
Far<strong>the</strong>r , più lontano.<br />
Fashion , moda, guisa .<br />
In <strong>the</strong> , alla moda.<br />
Fast, presto.<br />
Fat, grasso.<br />
Fa<strong>the</strong>r , padre. in law, suocero.<br />
Fault (mistake ), sbaglio,<br />
(error ), errore .<br />
Favour, favore .<br />
Favour, v. a. favorire (like Finire ).<br />
Favourable, favorevole .<br />
Favourite , favorito.<br />
Fear , timore .<br />
Fear , v. n. temere .<br />
Fearful , terribile .<br />
327<br />
Features , fatte<strong>zz</strong>e .<br />
February, febbraio.<br />
Federation , federazione .<br />
Feeling , sentimento .<br />
Feigned , finto.<br />
Fellow, compagno.<br />
Little , birichino .<br />
Ferdin<strong>and</strong>, Ferdin<strong>and</strong>o.<br />
Fern, felce , f.<br />
Ferocity , ferocità .<br />
Fertility , fertilità .<br />
Fetch , v. n. <strong>and</strong>are a cercare .<br />
Few, pochi, poche.<br />
Field, campo.<br />
Fifteen , quindici .<br />
Fifth, quinto.<br />
Fifty, cinquanta .<br />
Fight, v. n. combattere .<br />
Figure , figura .<br />
Filial , filiale .<br />
Find, v. a. trovare .<br />
Fine , bello, fino.<br />
Finish , v. a. finire .<br />
Fire , fuoco.<br />
-wood, legna .<br />
First, primo.<br />
Fish, pesce .<br />
Five , cinque .<br />
Flag, b<strong>and</strong>iera .<br />
Flatterer , lusingatori .<br />
Fleet , flotta.<br />
Florence , Firenze .<br />
Flower, fiore , m.<br />
Flowery, fiorito .<br />
Fly,v.n.volare , fuggire (like Servire ).<br />
into a passion, <strong>and</strong>are in collera<br />
Follow, v. a. seguire .<br />
Following, seguente .
Food, cibo, viv<strong>and</strong>a .<br />
Foot, piede, m.<br />
For, per.<br />
Force, v. a. forzare.<br />
Foreigner , straniero .<br />
Forest, foresta .<br />
Forget, v. n. scordarsi di.<br />
Forgive , v. a. perdonare.<br />
Fork, forchetta .<br />
Form, v. a. formare .<br />
Former , d'altrevolte .<br />
Formerly , altre volte.<br />
Fortress , forte<strong>zz</strong>a.<br />
Fortune, fortuna.<br />
Forty, quaranta .<br />
Found, v. a. fondare.<br />
Foundation, fondamento.<br />
Fountain , fontana.<br />
Four, quattro.<br />
Fourteen , quattordici.<br />
Fourteenth , decimo quarto.<br />
Fourth, quarto.<br />
ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY. 251<br />
Gain, v. a. guadagnare .<br />
Gallery , galleria .<br />
Galley, galera .<br />
Gamble, v. a. bisca<strong>zz</strong>are .<br />
Game , giuoco.<br />
Garden, giardino .<br />
Gardener , giardiniere .<br />
Ga<strong>the</strong>r , v. a. cogliere .<br />
Gauntlet , guanto ferrato .<br />
General , generale .<br />
In chief , generalissimo .<br />
Generally , generalmente .<br />
Generosity , generosità .<br />
Gentleman , Signore .<br />
Geography, geografia .<br />
328<br />
Fragrance , fragranza .<br />
Frail, fragile .<br />
Frame , cornice , f.<br />
France , Francia .<br />
Francis , Francesco .<br />
Frankly , francamente .<br />
Frederick , Federico .<br />
Freeze , v. n. gelare .<br />
French , Francese .<br />
Frequently , sovente .<br />
Freshness , fresche<strong>zz</strong>a .<br />
Friday, venerdì .<br />
Friend , amico .<br />
Friendship , amicizia .<br />
From, da.<br />
Fruit, frutto.<br />
Fulfil, v. a. adempire .<br />
Full, pieno.<br />
Fund, fondo.<br />
Furnish , v.a. ammobigliare .<br />
Furniture , mobili .<br />
George , Giorgio.<br />
German , Tedesco .<br />
Get, v. a. guadagnare , ottenere .<br />
dark, v. i. annottare .<br />
Gift, dono, regalo .<br />
Girl, fanciulla , ragga<strong>zz</strong>a.<br />
Give , v. a. dare.<br />
Glance , occhiata .<br />
Glass, bicchiere .<br />
Gloomy, buio, d'apparenza<br />
melanconica .<br />
Glorious, glorioso,<br />
Glory, gloria .<br />
Glove, guanto.<br />
Go, v. n. <strong>and</strong>are .
Out, uscire .<br />
away, <strong>and</strong>ar via.<br />
Goat, capra.<br />
God, Dio, Iddio.<br />
Gold, oro.<br />
Good, buono.<br />
Good-bye, addio. for<br />
Good-for-nothing fellow,<br />
buono a niente .<br />
Goods, beni , roba.<br />
Govern, v. a. governare .<br />
Government , governo.<br />
Governor, governatore .<br />
Graceful , grazioso.<br />
Gradually, più e più, gradualmente .<br />
Grammar , grammatica .<br />
Gr<strong>and</strong>fa<strong>the</strong>r , nonno, avo.<br />
Grant, v. a. accordare .<br />
Grapes, uva.<br />
Grave , grave .<br />
Gravity , gravità .<br />
Great , gr<strong>and</strong>e.<br />
A great deal, moltissimo .<br />
Greatly , moltissimo .<br />
Greek , Greco.<br />
Green , verde .<br />
Grey, grigio .<br />
Groan, v. n. gemere .<br />
Ground-floor, . pianterreno<br />
Guard, guardia.<br />
Guess, v. n. indovinare .<br />
Guest, convitato .<br />
Guide, v. a. guidare .<br />
Guinea , ghinea ; pl. ghinee .<br />
Guitar , chitarra .<br />
Gun, cannone . Fucile , powder<br />
H<br />
polvere da cannone .<br />
329<br />
Hair, capelli .<br />
Half, (noun) meta a.<br />
(Adjective me<strong>zz</strong>o<br />
a crown, me<strong>zz</strong>a corona<br />
Hall, sala.<br />
H<strong>and</strong>, mano, f.<br />
H<strong>and</strong>le, manico .<br />
H<strong>and</strong>some, bello, ve<strong>zz</strong>oso.<br />
Happen, v. n. accadere .<br />
Happy, felice .<br />
Harbour, porto.<br />
Hardship, privazione .<br />
Harmonious , armonioso .<br />
Harold, Aroldo.<br />
Hat, cappello.<br />
Hate, v. a. odiare .<br />
Haughty, altiero .<br />
Have, v. a. avere .<br />
He, egli , esso.<br />
Head, testa , capo.<br />
Health , salute , f.<br />
Hear, v. a., intendere , sentire<br />
(like Servire ).<br />
Heart , cuore<br />
by heart , a mente .<br />
Heartily , di cuore .<br />
Heaven , cielo .<br />
Heavy, pesante .<br />
Height , alte<strong>zz</strong>a .<br />
at <strong>the</strong> all' apice .,<br />
Help, v. a. aiutare .<br />
Henry, Enrico.<br />
Her, lei, essa .<br />
Here is, ecco qui.<br />
Here it is, eccolo, eccola .<br />
Here <strong>the</strong>y are, eccoli , eccole .<br />
Here , qui, qua.<br />
Hero, eroe .
Hide, v. a. nascondere .<br />
High, alto, pronunciato.<br />
Highly, generosamente .<br />
Hill, collina .<br />
Him, lui, lo.<br />
Himself , egli stesso .<br />
His, il suo, la sua.<br />
Historian , storico.<br />
History, storia .<br />
Hollow, cavità .<br />
Home, dimora.<br />
Homer, Omero.<br />
Honest, onesto.<br />
Honesty, onesta .<br />
Hope, v. a. sperare .<br />
Horse, cavallo.<br />
Host, oste.<br />
Hostile , ostile , nemico .<br />
Hour, ora.<br />
House, casa.<br />
How ? come ?<br />
<strong>many</strong> ? quanti ?<br />
much, quanto<br />
However , però, nulladimeno .<br />
Hundred, cento .<br />
Hunger , fame , f.<br />
Hurrah ! Evviva !<br />
I<br />
I, io.<br />
Ice, ghiacco .<br />
252 ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY.<br />
In order to, per, onde.<br />
Inquisitive , curioso.<br />
Ingratitude , ingratitudine , f.<br />
Inhabitant , abitante .<br />
Ink, inchiostro . st<strong>and</strong>, calamaio .<br />
Inn, albergo.<br />
Innocent , innocente .<br />
Innumerable , innumerabile .<br />
330<br />
Idiot, idiota, sciocco.<br />
If, se.<br />
If you please , per piacere .<br />
Ignorance , ignoranza .<br />
Illustration , disegno .<br />
Imitate , v. P. imitare .<br />
Immediate , immediate .<br />
Immediately , immediatemente .<br />
Immense , immenso .<br />
Importance , importanza .<br />
Impossible , impossibile .<br />
Impressive , impressivo .<br />
Improve , v. n. migliorare .<br />
Imprudence , imprudenza .<br />
Imprudent, imprudente .<br />
In, in, ( hence ), fra.<br />
Inanimated , inanimato .<br />
Inch , dito.<br />
Indeed, in verità .<br />
Indignation , indignazione , f.<br />
Induce, v. a. indurre .<br />
Industry, industria .<br />
Inferior , inferiore .<br />
Infirm , infermo .<br />
Influence , influenza .<br />
Influence , v. a. influenzare .<br />
Inform, v. a. istruire (like Finire ).<br />
Ingenious , ingegnoso .<br />
Inspire , v. a. inspirare .<br />
Instead of, in luogo di, in vece di.<br />
Institution , istituzione , f.<br />
Instrument , istrumento .<br />
Insult, v. a. insultare .<br />
Intelligible , intelligibile .
Intend , v. a. aver l'intenzione ,<br />
fare i conti.<br />
Interest , interesse .<br />
Interesting , interessante .<br />
Internal , interne .<br />
International , internazionale .<br />
Interrogate , v. interrogare .<br />
Intersperse , v. a. framescolare .<br />
Into, in.<br />
Intricate , imbrogliato .<br />
Introduce , v. a. introdurre .<br />
Invent , v. a. inventare .<br />
Invention , invenzione , f.<br />
Invest , v. a. investire (like Servire ).<br />
Invitation , invito .<br />
Invite , v. a. invitare .<br />
Irishman , Irl<strong>and</strong>ese .<br />
Iron, ferro.<br />
Wrought , ferro battuto.<br />
Cast , ghisa .<br />
Isabella , Isabella .<br />
Isl<strong>and</strong>, isola.<br />
Issue , successo , impressione , f.<br />
It, esso, lo, la.<br />
Italian , Italiano .<br />
Italy, Italia .<br />
J<br />
Jamaica , Giamaica .<br />
James , Giacomo.<br />
Jane , Giovanna .<br />
January , gennaio .<br />
Jewel , gioia .<br />
John, Giovanni ,<br />
Joppa, Giappa.<br />
Journey , viaggio .<br />
Joy, gioia .<br />
Judge, giudice .<br />
Jug, boccale, m.<br />
331<br />
Jump, v. n. saltare .<br />
Jupiter , Giove .<br />
Just, adj. Giusto,<br />
adv. (just now) questo momento ,<br />
or appunto.<br />
Justice , giustizia .<br />
K<br />
Keep, v. a. tenere .<br />
waiting , far aspettare .<br />
Kill, v. a. uccidere .<br />
Kind, buono.<br />
Kind, qualità , sorte, f.<br />
Kindness , bontà.<br />
King, re.<br />
Kneel v. n. inginocchiarsi .<br />
Knife , coltello.<br />
Knight, cavaliere .<br />
Knock, v. a. picchiare , bussare.<br />
Know, sapere , conoscere .<br />
Knowledge, conoscenze , sapere .<br />
L<br />
Lace , merletto .<br />
Lady, Signora . Young signorina .<br />
Lake , lago.<br />
Lame , v. a. storpiare .<br />
L<strong>and</strong>lord, proprietario , padrone.<br />
L<strong>and</strong>scape, paesaggio .<br />
Language , lingua .<br />
Large , gr<strong>and</strong>e, grosso.<br />
Last, passato.<br />
night (yesterday evening ) ieri<br />
sera .<br />
Last-night , meaning till this<br />
morning , is translated by " La<br />
notte scorsa."<br />
Late , defunto.<br />
Latter , questo, questi .<br />
Laugh, v. n. ridere .
Law, legge , f.<br />
Lay, v. a. mettere . down, deporre.<br />
<strong>the</strong> cloth, Luncheon , la seconda<br />
co-mettere la tovaglia .<br />
Lean , magro.<br />
Learn , v. a. imparare .<br />
by heart , imparare a mente .<br />
Learning , sapere .<br />
Lea<strong>the</strong>r , cuoio.<br />
Leave , permissione , f.<br />
Leave , v. a. lasciare .<br />
Lecture , discorso, lettura .<br />
Lemon , limone , m.<br />
Lend, v. a. prestare .<br />
Length , lunghe<strong>zz</strong>a .<br />
At finalmente .<br />
Less , meno .<br />
Lesson , lezione , f.<br />
Lest , per paura che (see rule 733).<br />
Letter , lettera .<br />
Liberty , libertà .<br />
Life , vita .<br />
Light , leggero .<br />
Light , v. a accendere .<br />
Like , come , simile .<br />
Like , v. a. amare , <strong>and</strong> a re a genio .<br />
Likeness , ritratto .<br />
Likewise , parimente .anche .<br />
Lily, giglio .<br />
Limb, membro .<br />
Line , linea ,<br />
riga (of writing or print).<br />
253 ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY.<br />
Majestic , maestoso .<br />
Man, uomo. of letters , letterato .<br />
Majesty , maestà .<br />
Make , v. a. fare .<br />
Haste, affrettarsi .<br />
up one's mind, deciders !.<br />
332<br />
Lion, leone .<br />
Listen , v. n. ascoltare .<br />
Literary , letterario , letterato .<br />
Little , piccolo.<br />
Live , v. n. vivere .<br />
Load, v. a. caricare .<br />
Loadstone, calamità .<br />
Lodge, v. n. alloggiare .<br />
Lofty, alto, sublime .<br />
London, Londra.<br />
Lonely , isolate .<br />
Long, lungo.<br />
Look, v. a. guardare .<br />
upon, considerare .<br />
out, cercar degli occhi .<br />
Looking -glass, specchio .<br />
Lord, conte , marchese .<br />
Lose, v. a. perdere .<br />
Loss, perdita.<br />
Louis, Luigi .<br />
Louisa , Luigia .<br />
Love, amore , m.<br />
Love, v. a. amare .<br />
Lowest, infimo .<br />
Luncheon la seconda colazione ,<br />
merenda .<br />
Lustre , lustro.<br />
M<br />
Madeline , Maddalena.<br />
Magazine , rivista , maga<strong>zz</strong>ino .<br />
Magnificent , magnifico .<br />
Mankind , genere umano.<br />
Manly, virile .<br />
Manner , maniera , usanza.<br />
Manufacture , v. a. fabbricare .
Many, molti .<br />
Marble, marm o.<br />
Margaret , Margherita .<br />
Mariner , marinaro .<br />
Mark , pegno.<br />
Mark , v. a. marcare .<br />
Market , mercato .<br />
Marry, v. a. sposare.<br />
Mars, Marte .<br />
Marsh, palude, f.<br />
Martial , marziale .<br />
Mary, Maria .<br />
Master , maestro , padrone,<br />
(see rule 146)<br />
piece , capo-lavoro.<br />
Match, zolfanello.<br />
Ma<strong>the</strong>matics , matematica .<br />
Matter , materia .<br />
May, maggio .<br />
Me, mi, me, a me.<br />
Meadow, prato.<br />
Means , me<strong>zz</strong>o.<br />
Measure , misura .<br />
Meet , or meet with, v. a. incontrare .<br />
Meeting , riunione .<br />
Melodious, melodioso.<br />
Melt, v. a. fondere .<br />
Member , membro , pl. membri ,<br />
or membra (rule 420).<br />
Memory , memoria .<br />
Mercury , Mercurio .<br />
Mere , puro, mero .<br />
Merit , merito .<br />
Messenger , messaggiero .<br />
Metal , metallo .<br />
Microscope , microscopic .<br />
Midnight , me<strong>zz</strong>anotte .<br />
Mildness , dolce<strong>zz</strong>a.<br />
333<br />
Mile , miglio , plur. miglia .<br />
Milk jug, boccale da latte .<br />
Mind, spirito, mente , f.<br />
Mind, v. a. badare a.<br />
Mine , il mio, la mia, &c.<br />
Mineral , minerale , m.<br />
Minister , ministro .<br />
For Foreign Affairs , Ministro degli<br />
Affari Esteri.<br />
Minute , minuto .<br />
Mischief , male .<br />
Misfortune , disgrazia .<br />
Miss, v. a. mancare .<br />
Mistake , sbaglio.<br />
Moderate , moderate .<br />
Modesty, modestia .<br />
Moment , momento .<br />
Monarch, monarca .<br />
Monday, lunedì.<br />
Money, danaro, soldi.<br />
Monkey , scimia .<br />
Month, mese , m.<br />
Moor, l<strong>and</strong>a, brughiera .<br />
Moralist , moralista .<br />
More, più.<br />
Morning , mattina .<br />
Mosaic , mosaico (rule 410).<br />
Most, il piii .<br />
Mo<strong>the</strong>r , madre . in-law, suocera .<br />
Motive , motivo.<br />
Mountain , montagna .<br />
Mouth, bocca.<br />
Mouthful, boccata.<br />
Mr., Signore .<br />
Mrs., Signora .<br />
Much, molto.<br />
Mufti, alla borghese .<br />
Multitude , moltitudine , f.
Municipal , municipale .<br />
Museum , museo .<br />
Music , musica .<br />
Must. I must,debbo.<br />
we must, dobbiamo, &c.<br />
My, il mio, la mia, i miei .<br />
Mysterious , misterioso .<br />
Mythology, mitologia .<br />
N<br />
Name , nome .<br />
Naples, Napoli.<br />
Napoleon, Napoleone .<br />
Narrate , v. a. raccontare .<br />
Narrow, stretto .<br />
Nation , nazione .<br />
National , nazionale .<br />
Natural , naturale .<br />
Nature , natura .<br />
Navigation , navigazione .<br />
Navigator , navigatore .<br />
Near , vicino .<br />
Nearly , quasi.<br />
Necessary , necessario .<br />
Necessity , necessità .<br />
Necklace , monile , ve<strong>zz</strong>o.<br />
Needle , ago.<br />
Negro, negro .<br />
dealer , mercante di schiavi .<br />
Neighbourhood, vicinato .<br />
Neighbouring , nel vicinato .<br />
Nei<strong>the</strong>r , ne.<br />
Nephew , nipote.<br />
Neptune Nettuno .<br />
Nest , nido.<br />
Never , non...mai, no, mai.<br />
New, nuovo.<br />
born, pur mo' nato.<br />
News , nuova, notizie .<br />
334<br />
paper, giornale .<br />
Next, prossimo.<br />
Nibble, v. a. morsecchiare .<br />
Nice , Ni<strong>zz</strong>a.<br />
Night , notte, f.<br />
Nine , nove.<br />
Ninth , nono.<br />
No, no. body, nessuno .<br />
doubt, senza dubbio, senz'altro .<br />
longer , non...più.<br />
Noble, nobile.<br />
Noise , rumore , strepito .<br />
Nonsense , sciocche<strong>zz</strong>e , spropositi.<br />
Noon, me<strong>zz</strong>ogiorno .<br />
Nor, ne.<br />
Norman , Normanno .<br />
Norm<strong>and</strong>y, Norm<strong>and</strong>ia .<br />
North, tramontana , settentrione .<br />
Not, non.<br />
Nothing , niente , nulla.<br />
Nourish , nutrire .<br />
Now, adesso, ora.<br />
Number , numero .<br />
Numerous , numeroso .<br />
O<br />
O'clock, dell' orologio<br />
.—Six alle sei (see rule 548).<br />
Obey, v. a. ubbidire (like Finire ).<br />
Observe , v. a. osservare .<br />
Obtain, v. a. ottenere .<br />
Occasion , occasione .<br />
October, ottobre.<br />
Odd, singolare , bi<strong>zz</strong>arro.<br />
Of, di.<br />
Off, in vista di.<br />
Offend, v. a. offendere .<br />
Offer, v. a. offrire (like Servire ).
254<br />
ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY.<br />
Office , carica , officio.<br />
Officer , ufficiale .<br />
Often, sovente , spesso.<br />
Old, vecchio .<br />
Olive , uliva . tree , ulivo.<br />
On, su, sopra.<br />
behalf of, in favore di.<br />
Once, una volta.<br />
At , subito.<br />
One, uno, una.<br />
Only, solo, solamente , non ...che.<br />
Open, aperto.<br />
Open, v. a. aprire (like Servire ).<br />
Opera, Opera.<br />
Operation , operazione , f.<br />
Opposite, opposta.<br />
Opulence , opulenza<br />
Or, o, ovvero, ossia .<br />
Orange <strong>and</strong> orange -tree , arancio .<br />
Orator, oratore .<br />
Orchard, pometo.<br />
Order, ordine , m.<br />
Order, v. a. comm<strong>and</strong>are .<br />
Origin , origine , f.<br />
Original , originale .<br />
O<strong>the</strong>r, altro.<br />
O<strong>the</strong>rwise , altrimenti .<br />
Our, il nostro, &c.<br />
Ourselves , noi stessi .<br />
Oval, ovale .<br />
Over, sopra, di sopra.<br />
Overturn , sovvertere , rovesciare .<br />
Owe, v. n. dovere .<br />
Own, proprio.<br />
P<br />
Pace , passo.<br />
335<br />
Pain , male , dolore, m.<br />
Painful , doloroso.<br />
Paint brush, pennello .<br />
Paint , v. a. dipingere .<br />
Painter , pittore.<br />
Painting , pittura, quadro.<br />
Pair , paio, coppia.<br />
Palace , pala<strong>zz</strong>o.<br />
Paper, carta.<br />
Parasol, ombrellino .<br />
Parchment , pergamena ,<br />
carta pecora.<br />
Pardon, v. a. perdonare a.<br />
Parent , padre, madre , genitore .<br />
Paris , Parigi .<br />
Park, parco.<br />
Parliament (member of),deputato al<br />
parlamento .<br />
Parlour, salotto.<br />
Part, parte, f., porzione , f.<br />
Partner , socio.<br />
Partridge , pernice , f.<br />
Pass, v. n. passare .<br />
Passenger , passaggero.<br />
Passion , passione , f.<br />
Past, passato.<br />
Pasture , v. a. pasturare .<br />
Patience , pazienza .<br />
Paul, Paolo.<br />
Pay, v. a. pagare.<br />
attention to, badare a.<br />
Peace , pace, f.<br />
Pear , pera.<br />
Pearl , perla.<br />
Peculiarities , singolarità .<br />
Pedestal , piedestallo .
Pekin , Pechino .<br />
Pen, penna.<br />
Pencil , lapis, m., matita .<br />
case , porta-lapis.<br />
Penetration , acume .<br />
Penknife , temperino .<br />
Penny , due soldi.<br />
Pension , pensione , f.<br />
People, popolo, gente .<br />
Perfectly , perfettamente .<br />
Perform , v. a. (to fulfil), ad empire .<br />
To perform, (to play) prodursi.<br />
Perhaps, forse.<br />
Perpetual , perpetuo.<br />
Perseverance , perseveranza .<br />
Person , persona.<br />
Personage , personaggio .<br />
Personal , personale .<br />
Philosopher , filosofo.<br />
Piano , pianoforte .<br />
Pickpocket , borsaiuolo.<br />
Picture , quadro, pittura.<br />
Picturesque , pittoresco.<br />
Piece , pe<strong>zz</strong>o.<br />
Pierce , v. a. forare .<br />
Pincushion , cuscinetto per le spille .<br />
Pink , garofano.<br />
Place , luogo, sito, posto.<br />
Place , v. a. porre.<br />
Plain , pianura , chiaro .<br />
Planet , pianeta , m.<br />
Platinum , platino.<br />
Play, v. a. giuocare .<br />
on an instrument , suonare .<br />
Plead, piatire (like Finire ).<br />
Pleasing , piacevole .<br />
Pleasure , piacere .<br />
Plot, congiura , trama .<br />
336<br />
Pl<strong>under</strong>, v. a. (persons) svaligiare<br />
(habitations ), saccheggiare .<br />
Pocket , tasca, scarsella .<br />
Poem , poema, m.<br />
Poet, poeta.<br />
Poetry, poesia .<br />
Point, v. a. indicare .<br />
Poison, veleno .<br />
Policeman , agente di polizia, sbirro.<br />
Policy, politica .<br />
Polite , civile , cortese .<br />
Politics , politica .<br />
Pomp, pompa.<br />
Poor, povero.<br />
Pope, papa.<br />
Popular, popolare.<br />
Popularity, popolarità.<br />
Port, porto.<br />
Portrait , ritratto .<br />
Positively , positivamente .<br />
Possess , v. a. possedere .<br />
Possession , possessione , f.<br />
Possible, possibile.<br />
Post (for letters ), posta ;<br />
(place), posto.<br />
Postage -stamp, francobollo.<br />
Posterity , posterità .<br />
Posture , posizione , f.<br />
Pound, libbra, lira (see rule 656).<br />
Poverty, povertà.<br />
Powder, polvere , f.<br />
Power, potere, m.<br />
Practise , v. a. practicare , esercitarsi .<br />
Praise , lode.<br />
Praise , v. a. lodare.<br />
Precede , precedere .<br />
Precious , prezioso.<br />
Precipice , precipizio .
Precipitous , precipitoso.<br />
Prefer , preferire , v. a. (like Finire ).<br />
Prejudicial , pregiudicativo .<br />
Preparation , preparative .<br />
Prepare , v. a. preparare .<br />
Present , dono, regalo .<br />
Present , v. a. presentare .<br />
255 ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY.<br />
Prey, preda.<br />
Prudence , prudenza.<br />
Price , pre<strong>zz</strong>o, valore .<br />
Pride one's -self, v. r. inorgoglirsi .<br />
Prince , principe .<br />
Princess , principessa .<br />
Principal , principale .<br />
Principle , principio .<br />
Print , v. a. stampare .<br />
Printing , stampa.<br />
Prison , prigione , f.<br />
Probably, probabilmente .<br />
Procession , processione , f.<br />
Produce, prodotto.<br />
Produce, v. a. produrre.<br />
Production, produzione, f.<br />
Profit, v. n. profittare .<br />
Profusion, profusione , f.<br />
Progress , progresso.<br />
Promise , v. a. promettere .<br />
Proof, prova.<br />
Property, proprietà, beni .<br />
Proportioned, proporzionato.<br />
Proposal, proposizione, f.<br />
Propose, v. a. proporre.<br />
Prospect, prospettiva,vista .<br />
Prosperous, prospero.<br />
Proud, orgoglioso.<br />
Prove, v. a. provare.<br />
Provision , provvisione , f.<br />
Provoke , v. a. provocare.<br />
337<br />
Preserve , v. a. preservare .<br />
President , presidente .<br />
Pretty, bello, vago.<br />
Prevent , v. a. evitare , impedire<br />
(like Finire ).<br />
Previous , prima di.<br />
Prudently,prudentemente .<br />
Prussia , Prussia .<br />
Prussian , Prussiano .<br />
Public, pubblico.<br />
Punish , v. a. punire (like Finire ).<br />
Pupil, scolare , allievo .<br />
Purchase , compra.<br />
Pure, puro, semplice .<br />
Purpose, inter .done.<br />
On, a disegno .<br />
Pursue , v. a. inseguire .<br />
Pursuit , incalzo .<br />
Put, v. a. Mettere .<br />
off, indugiare . v. n.<br />
Q<br />
Quantity, quantità .<br />
Queen , regina .<br />
Question (see rule 306).<br />
Quickly, presto.<br />
Quietly, tranquillamente .<br />
Quill, penna d'oca.<br />
Quire, quinterno di carta.<br />
Quite, affatto, interamente .<br />
R<br />
Rage, rabbia.<br />
Rain, pioggia.<br />
Rain, v. i. Piovere .<br />
Rapaciousness , rapacità .<br />
Raphael, Raffaello.
Raven , corvo.<br />
Ravine , burrone, m.<br />
Re-enter , v. n. rientrare .<br />
Reach , v. a. giungere .<br />
Read, v. a. leggere .<br />
Reading -room, sala di lettura .<br />
Ready, pronto.<br />
Really, realmente .<br />
Reason , ragione , f. senno .<br />
Recall , v. a. richiamare .<br />
Receive , v. a. ricevere .<br />
Recognise , v. a. riconoscere .<br />
Recommend , v. a. raccomm<strong>and</strong>are .<br />
Red, rosso.<br />
Reflect , v. a. riflettere .<br />
Regular , regolare .<br />
Reign , v. a. regnare .<br />
Reindeer , cervo (della Lapponia).<br />
Rejoice , v. a. rallegrarsi .<br />
Relation , parente , m.<br />
Religion , religione , f.<br />
Remain , v. n. rimanere , restare .<br />
Remark , v. a. Far osservare , dire.<br />
Remarkably , notevolmente .<br />
Remember , v. n. ricordarsi .<br />
Remote , rimoto .<br />
Renowned, rinomato .<br />
Repent, v. n. pentirsi .<br />
Reply, v. a. rispondere .<br />
Report, rapporto.<br />
of a gun, lo strepito d'un<br />
cannone .<br />
Repose, v. r. riposarsi .<br />
Represent , v. a. rappresentare .<br />
Republic, repubblica.<br />
Reputation , riputazione .<br />
Request , richiesta , dom<strong>and</strong>a.<br />
Request , v. a. dom<strong>and</strong>are.<br />
338<br />
Resemble , v. a. somigliare .<br />
Resist , v. a. resistere .<br />
Resolve , v. a. risolvere .<br />
Resound, v. a. risupnare ,<br />
rimbombare .<br />
Respect, rispetto .<br />
Respectful , rispettoso.<br />
Respectfully , rispettosamente .<br />
Respective , rispettiva .<br />
Restoration , restaurazione .<br />
Restore , v. a. rendere .<br />
Result, risultamento .<br />
Resume , v. a. ripigliare .<br />
Retire , v. n. ritirarsi .<br />
Return , ritorno.<br />
Return , v. n. ritornare , scambiare ,<br />
rispondere .<br />
Reveal , v. a. rivelare .<br />
Review , rivista .<br />
Revolution , rivoluzione , f.<br />
Reward, ricompensa , taglia .<br />
Ribbon, nastro, fettuccia .<br />
Rich, ricco.<br />
Richard, Riccardo.<br />
Riches , ricche<strong>zz</strong>e .<br />
Ride, v. n. cavalcave ,<br />
<strong>and</strong>are a cavallo,<br />
Right, diritto.<br />
Ring, anello .<br />
Ring. v. a. <strong>and</strong> n. suonare .<br />
Ripe, maturo.<br />
Rise , v. n. levarsi .<br />
River , fiume , m. riviera .<br />
Rivulet , ruscellino .<br />
Road, strada, cammino .<br />
Robber, ladro.<br />
Rock, roccia , rupe, balza.<br />
Roman, Romano.
Romantic , romantico .<br />
Rome, Roma.<br />
Romulus, Romolo.<br />
Room, camera , stanza.<br />
Drawing , salone .<br />
Rose, rosa.<br />
Rural, campestre .<br />
Round, adj. rotondo,<br />
S<br />
prep. attorno, intorno .<br />
Sack , v. a. saccheggiare .<br />
Rout, v. a. sfrattare .<br />
Safe , adj. sano.<br />
Royal, reale , regale .<br />
Safety , sicure<strong>zz</strong>a .<br />
Rude, grossolano, zotico,<br />
Sail , v. a. far vela .<br />
impertinente .<br />
256 ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY.<br />
Sailing -vessel , bastimento a vela .<br />
Sailor , marinaio .<br />
Second, secondo.<br />
Saladin , Saladino.<br />
Salary , stipendio .<br />
Same , medesimo , stesso .<br />
Saracen , Saraceno .<br />
Sardinia , Sardegna .<br />
Satin , raso.<br />
Satisfied , soddisfatto, contento .<br />
Satisfy , v. a. soddisfare.<br />
Saturday, sabato.<br />
Saturn , Saturno.<br />
Save , v. a. salvare .<br />
Saxon, Sassone .<br />
Scale , bilancia , guscio.<br />
Scene , scena , teatro .<br />
Scheme , progetto.<br />
School, scuola.<br />
Science , scienza .<br />
Scorn, dispre<strong>zz</strong>o.<br />
Scotl<strong>and</strong>, Scozia .<br />
Sculptor, scultore .<br />
Sculpture, scultura .<br />
Sea, mare . coast, spiaggia del mare .<br />
Season , stagione , f.<br />
Seat -one's -self, v. n. sedersi .<br />
339<br />
Rudely, ro<strong>zz</strong>amente .<br />
Ruin, rovina .<br />
Ruin, v. a. rovinare .<br />
Rule, regola .<br />
Run, v. n. correre .<br />
Secretary , secretario .<br />
Secretly , segretamente .<br />
See, v. a. vedere . again , rivedere .<br />
Seek , or seek for, v. a. cercare .<br />
after , ricercare .<br />
Seem , v. n. parere , sembrare .<br />
Seldom, di rado, raramente .<br />
Sell , v. a. vendere .<br />
Send, v. a. m<strong>and</strong>are .<br />
Sentry , sentinella , m. <strong>and</strong> f.<br />
Separate , v.a. disgiungere .<br />
Servant , servo .<br />
Service , servizio .<br />
Seven , sette .<br />
Seventeen ,diciassette<br />
Seventy ,. settanta .<br />
Several , molti , parecchi .<br />
Severely , severamente .<br />
Sew, v. a. cucire .<br />
again , ricucire .<br />
S<strong>had</strong>ow, ombra.<br />
Shame , vergogna .<br />
Share , parte, f.<br />
She, ella , essa .
Sheep , pecora.<br />
Sheet , foglio.<br />
Shield , scudo.<br />
Shilling , scellino .<br />
Ship, nave , f. vascello .<br />
Shop, bottega.<br />
Shore , spiaggia , lido.<br />
Short, corto.<br />
Show, v. a. mostrare .<br />
Shudder, v. n. tremare .<br />
Shut, shut up, v. a. chiudere .<br />
Side , parte, f.<br />
Side -board, credenza .<br />
Siege , assedio .<br />
Sight , vista , prospettiva.<br />
By , di vista .<br />
Silver , argento .<br />
Simple , semplice .<br />
Simplicity , semplicità .<br />
Since , di poi, dà, poiché .<br />
since that, dacchè.<br />
Sing , v. a. cantare .<br />
Singer , cantante .<br />
Single , solo, semplice .<br />
Sir, Signore .<br />
Sire , Sire .<br />
Sister , sorella .<br />
Sister -in-law, cognata.<br />
Sit, v. n. sedere , sedersi .<br />
Situation , situazione , f.<br />
Six, sei.<br />
Sixth , sesto.<br />
Sixty, sessanta .<br />
Sketch , schi<strong>zz</strong>o.<br />
Skip about, v. n. saltellare .<br />
Slate , lavagna .<br />
Sleep , v. n. dormire (like Servire ).<br />
Slow, slowly, adagio.<br />
340<br />
Small , piccolo.<br />
Smile , v. n. ridere .<br />
Snow, neve .<br />
Snow, v. i. nevicare .<br />
So, così.<br />
Society , società .<br />
Soldier , soldato.<br />
Solon, Solone.<br />
Some , del, dello, &c., alcuno, &c. ,<br />
qualche , poco (po').<br />
Something , qualche cosa..<br />
Sometimes , qualche volta.<br />
Son, figlio .<br />
Song, canzone , f.<br />
Sonnet , sonetto.<br />
Soon, tosto, presto.<br />
Sound, suono, rimbombo.<br />
Source , sorgente , f.<br />
South, me<strong>zz</strong>ogiorno .<br />
Spain, Spagna.<br />
Spanish , spagnuolo.<br />
Spare, v. a. risparmiare .<br />
Speak , v. a. parlare .<br />
Speaker , oratore .<br />
Special , speciale .<br />
Species , spezie .<br />
Speculation , speculazione ,f.<br />
Speech , discorso.<br />
Spend, v. a. spendere .<br />
Spirited , animato .<br />
Spite , rancore , m.<br />
In spite of, ad onta di.<br />
Splendid, magnifico .<br />
Spoil, v. a. guastare .<br />
Sport, divertimento .<br />
Spread, v. a. distendere .<br />
Spring (season ), primavera .<br />
(source ), fonte, sorgente .
Squ<strong>and</strong>er, v. a. scialacquare .<br />
Stage , scena , teatro .<br />
Staircase , scala.<br />
Star, stella .<br />
Start, v. n. partire . up, saltar su.<br />
State , stato.<br />
Statement , dichiarazione , f.<br />
Statue , statua.<br />
Steal , v. a. rulare .<br />
Steam -boat, battello a vapore.<br />
Steel , acciaio .<br />
Steward, castaldo.<br />
Stick , bastone, m.<br />
Still , adv. eppure.<br />
Still , v. a. quietare .<br />
Stock, v. a. fornire .<br />
Stone , pietra , sasso.<br />
Stop, v. a. <strong>and</strong> n. fermare , fermarsi .<br />
257 ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY.<br />
Study, v. a. studiare .<br />
Superfluous, superfluo.<br />
Style , stile , in.<br />
Subject (of a monarch ), suddito.<br />
Substance , materia .<br />
Succeed , v. n. riuscire , succedere<br />
(see rule 258).<br />
Success , successo , esito .<br />
Succession , successione , f.<br />
Such, tale . a, un tale .<br />
as, tale quale.<br />
Sudden, improvviso .<br />
Suddenly, all' improvviso .<br />
Suffer , v. n. soffrire (like Servire ),<br />
patire (like Finire ).<br />
Sufficiently , abbastanza.<br />
Suggest , v. a. suggerire (like Finire ).<br />
Sum, somma .<br />
Summer , estate , f.<br />
Sun, sole, m.<br />
341<br />
Story, storiella .<br />
Stout, grosso.<br />
Straight , diritto.<br />
Strange , strano, bi<strong>zz</strong>arro.<br />
Stranger , forestiero .<br />
Strawberry , fragola.<br />
Stream , ruscello , riviera .<br />
Street , strada, via.<br />
Strength , robuste<strong>zz</strong>a, forza, forte<strong>zz</strong>a,<br />
potere, m.<br />
Strike , sciopero.<br />
Strike , v. a. battere , ferire<br />
(like Finire ).<br />
Strikingly , sorprendentemente .<br />
Strong, forte, potente .<br />
Student, scolare , alunno.<br />
Study, studio.<br />
Superstition , superstizione .<br />
Support, in support, per corroborare.<br />
Support, v. a. sostenere , Sopportare.<br />
Suppose, v. a. supporre.<br />
Sure , sicuro , certo.<br />
Surface , superficie , f.<br />
Surprise , v. a. sorprendere .<br />
Surround, v. a. circondare .<br />
Surrounding , circonvicino .<br />
Sustain , v. n. subire (like Finire ).<br />
Sweet , dolce.<br />
Swee<strong>the</strong>art , amante .<br />
Swim (about), v. n. gui<strong>zz</strong>are .<br />
Switzerl<strong>and</strong> , Svi<strong>zz</strong>era .<br />
Sword, spada.<br />
T<br />
Table , tavola.<br />
Take , v. a. prendere .
a walk, fare una passeggiata .<br />
care , aver cura.<br />
off, levare , or levarsi .<br />
away, condur via.<br />
Talent , talento . le tue.<br />
Talk , v. a. Chiacchierare .<br />
Talker , parlatore, ciarlone .<br />
Tall, gr<strong>and</strong>e, alto.<br />
Tartary , Tartaria .<br />
Tax, taxation , tassa. rule 602).<br />
Tea, te. cup, ta<strong>zz</strong>a da te.<br />
Teach , v. a. insegnare .<br />
Telescope , cannocchiale ,m.<br />
Tell , v. a. dire.<br />
Temptation , tentazione , f.<br />
Ten, dieci .<br />
Tend, v. n. inclinare<br />
Terror , spavento.<br />
Than , che.<br />
Thank , v. a. ringraziare .<br />
That , quello, quel, quella, che.<br />
The, il, lo, la, &c.<br />
Theatre , teatro .<br />
Theatrical , teatrale .<br />
Theft , ladrocinio .<br />
Their , il loro, la loro, &c.<br />
Them , loro, essi , esse .<br />
Then (at that time ), allora.<br />
Then (<strong>the</strong>refore ), dunque.<br />
There are, ci sono, or<br />
There is, c'è, or v'è. vi sono, &c.<br />
There , là, lì.<br />
These , questi , queste .<br />
They , eglino , elleno , essi .<br />
Thief , ladro.<br />
Thimble , ditale , m.<br />
Thing , cosa.<br />
Think (of), v. n. pensare a, credere .<br />
342<br />
Third , terzo.<br />
Thirteen , tredici .<br />
Thirty , trenta .<br />
This , questo, questa.<br />
Thomas , Tommaso .<br />
Thorn , spina.<br />
Thoroughly , completamente .<br />
Those , quelli , quei , quelle .<br />
Thou, tu.<br />
Though , quantunque , sebbene .<br />
Thought , pensiero .<br />
Thous<strong>and</strong>, mille , migliaio .<br />
Thread , filo.<br />
Three , tre.<br />
Throw, v. a. gettare .<br />
Through , per, a traverso .<br />
Th<strong>under</strong> , tuono.<br />
Thursday, giovedi .<br />
Thy, il tuo, la tua, i tuoi,<br />
Ticket , biglietto .<br />
Tiger , tigre , f.<br />
Till , fino, infino .<br />
Time , tempo, volta<br />
(see Twice , due volte.<br />
Tint , tinta , colore, m.<br />
Tired , stanco.<br />
Title , titolo.<br />
To, a verbal prefix, is not translated<br />
(see rules 226 <strong>and</strong> 227)<br />
To, prep, a or onde (see rule 225).<br />
To-day, oggi.<br />
To-morrow, domani.<br />
after , posdomani.<br />
Toge<strong>the</strong>r , insieme .<br />
Token , segno.<br />
Too, anche .<br />
Too (meaning too much), troppo.<br />
Tooth, dente .
Top, sommità , vetta .<br />
Torrent , torrente .<br />
Toulon, Tolone .<br />
Towards, verso .<br />
Tower , torre, f.<br />
Town, citta .<br />
Trace , traccia .<br />
Tract , tratto.<br />
Trade , mestiere , m. Commercio .<br />
By , di mestiere .<br />
Tradition , tradizione , f.<br />
Tragedy , tragedia .<br />
Train , treno , traino .<br />
Train , v. a. allevare , istruire .<br />
Traitor , traditore .<br />
Translate , v. a. tradurre .<br />
Translation , traduzione , f.<br />
Transmit , v.a. trasmettere .<br />
Travel , v. n. viaggiare .<br />
Treasure , tesoro.<br />
Tree , albero.<br />
258 ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY.<br />
U<br />
Unpardonable, imperdonabile .<br />
Ugly, brutto.<br />
Unsheath , v. a. sguainare .<br />
Umbrella , ombrello.<br />
Until, fino.<br />
Uncle , zio.<br />
Up, upon, su, sopra.<br />
Uncommon , straordinario .<br />
up <strong>and</strong> down, su e giù.<br />
Under, sotto.<br />
Uranus, Urano.<br />
Underst<strong>and</strong>, v. a. capire (like Finire ). Us, noi.<br />
Underst<strong>and</strong>ing , ingegno .<br />
Use (to be accustomed ), v. n. solere .<br />
Undertake , v. a. intraprendere .<br />
To use (to make use of), v. a.<br />
Undertaking , impresa .<br />
servirsi di.<br />
Unfortunate , sfortunato.<br />
To use (to wear out), v. a. usare .<br />
Unfortunately , sfortunatamente . Useful, Utile .<br />
Uniform , uniforme , m.<br />
Useless , inutile .<br />
Universal , universale .<br />
V<br />
University , università .<br />
Vain , vano, inutile . In , invano .<br />
Unless , a meno che.<br />
343<br />
Trifles , coserelle .<br />
Triumphant , trionfante .<br />
Troops, truppe, esercito .<br />
Trouble, fatica .<br />
Troy, Troia .<br />
True , vero.<br />
Trunk , tronco, baule.<br />
Trust , v. a. confidare .<br />
one's -self, confidarsi .<br />
Truth , verità .<br />
Tune , aria .<br />
Turbot, rombo.<br />
Turk , Turkish , Turco.<br />
Turmoil , fracasso.<br />
Tutor, precettore , maestro .<br />
Twelve , dodici.<br />
Twenty , venti .<br />
Twilight , crepuscolo.<br />
Two, due.<br />
Tyrant , tiranno .<br />
Valour, valore , m.
Valuable, prezioso.<br />
Variety , varietà .<br />
Vase , vaso.<br />
Vast, vasto.<br />
Venice , Venezia .<br />
Venus , Venere .<br />
Verb, verbo.<br />
Verdure , verdura.<br />
Verse , verso , poesia .<br />
Blank , verso sciolto.<br />
Very, molto, assai .<br />
much, moltissimo .<br />
Soon, presto, fra poco.<br />
Vessel , vascello , nave , f.<br />
Vice , vizio .<br />
Vicious , vizioso .<br />
Victim , vittima .<br />
Victory, vittoria .<br />
View , vista prospettiva.v. a.<br />
esaminare .<br />
Village , villaggio .<br />
Vinditive , vindicativo .<br />
Virtue , virtù , f.<br />
Visit , v. a. visitare .<br />
Vivacity , vivacità .<br />
Vivid, vivido, allegro .<br />
Voice , voce, f.<br />
Volcano, vulcano.<br />
Vote, v. a. votare .<br />
W<br />
Waistcoat , panciotto, sottoveste , gile .<br />
Wait, v. n. aspettare .<br />
Waiter , garzone .<br />
Wales, Gallia .<br />
Walk, passeggiata .<br />
Walk, v. n. camminare .<br />
Wall, muro.<br />
Wallet, valigia .<br />
344<br />
W<strong>and</strong>er, v. a. vagare .<br />
Want, mancanza .<br />
Want, v. n. abbisognare di.<br />
War, guerra .<br />
Warble, v. a. cantare .<br />
Warlike , bellicoso.<br />
Warm, caldo, ardente .<br />
Warmly, affezionatamente .<br />
Warrior , guerriero .<br />
Wash (one's -self), v. r. lavarsi .<br />
Watch, oriuolo.<br />
Water, acqua.<br />
Soda , acqua di seltz.<br />
Water, v. a. annaffiare .<br />
Wave, onda.<br />
Way,strada,modo,maniera .<br />
We, noi.<br />
Weapon, arma .<br />
Wear, v. a. portare.<br />
Wea<strong>the</strong>r , tempo.<br />
Wednesday, mercoledì .<br />
Week , settimana .<br />
Weight , peso.<br />
Well ! Ebbene !<br />
Well, bene .<br />
Western , occidentale .<br />
What, che, che cosa, quale, ciò che.<br />
Whatever , checche .<br />
When, qu<strong>and</strong>o.<br />
Whence , donde.<br />
Where , dove.<br />
Wherever , ovunque.<br />
Whe<strong>the</strong>r , se.<br />
Which , che, quale.<br />
While , whilst , mentre .<br />
White , bianco.<br />
Who, he who, chi.<br />
Whole, tutto.
Whom, cui, quale, &c.<br />
Whose, di che, del quale, &c.<br />
(see rule 619).<br />
Why ? perché ?<br />
Wide, largo.<br />
Widower, vedovo.<br />
Wife , moglie .<br />
William , Guglielmo .<br />
Wind, vento .<br />
Window, finestra<br />
Wine , vino.<br />
Winter , inverno .<br />
Wise , saggio, savio .<br />
Wisely , saviamente .<br />
Wish (to desire ), v. a. bramare ,<br />
desiderare .<br />
To wish (to somebody else ), v. a.<br />
augurare .<br />
Wit, ingegno , spirito, bell' ingegno .<br />
With, con.<br />
Without, senza , fuori.<br />
Witness , v. a. assistere a.<br />
Witty, spiritoso.<br />
Woman, donna.<br />
Wonderful, meraviglioso .<br />
Wood, bosco.<br />
259 VOCABULARY.<br />
PART II. ITALIAN ENGLISH.<br />
A<br />
A, to, at.<br />
Abb<strong>and</strong>onata, ab<strong>and</strong>oned.<br />
Accanto, at <strong>the</strong> side of.<br />
Acqua, water .<br />
Acre , air (see page 114).<br />
Addorme, v. a. lulls to sleep .<br />
Affanna, he afflicts .<br />
Affanno, affanni , sorrow, sorrows.<br />
Affetti , affections .<br />
345<br />
Wool, lana.<br />
Word, parola.<br />
Work, lavoro.<br />
Work, v. a. lavorare .<br />
Workman , operaio.<br />
World, mondo.<br />
Worst, peggiore .<br />
Worthy, degno.<br />
Wound, ferita .<br />
Write , v. a. scrivere<br />
Writing -desk, scrittoio .<br />
Writing -paper, carta da scrivere .<br />
Y<br />
Yard, braccio.<br />
Year , anno.<br />
Yellowish , giallognolo.<br />
Yes, si.<br />
Yesterday , ieri .<br />
Yet, ancora.<br />
Yield, v. a. cedere .<br />
You, voi, ella .<br />
Young, giovane .<br />
man, giovinotto .<br />
Your, vostro.<br />
self, voi, voi medesimo .<br />
Affidi, you trust.<br />
Affretta , she hastens .<br />
Ahi '! alas !<br />
Al, all', alle , ai, to <strong>the</strong>.<br />
Alba, dawn.<br />
Allegrati , rejoice .<br />
Alma, soul, mind (see page 114).<br />
Almen , at least .<br />
Alpe, Alpi, Alps.
Alta, high .<br />
Altar, altar.<br />
Alte<strong>zz</strong>a, height .<br />
Altier , proud.<br />
Altro,o<strong>the</strong>r , ano<strong>the</strong>r . che, more than.<br />
Altrui , o<strong>the</strong>rs .<br />
Ama, he loves.<br />
Amator, lover.<br />
Ambo, ambe, both.<br />
Amico , friendly .<br />
Ammiro , I admire .<br />
Amor, amore , love.<br />
Amorosa, love inspiring .<br />
Anche , anch' , also.<br />
Ancor, also.<br />
Andar, gait.<br />
Anelo , breathless .<br />
Angelica , angelic .<br />
Angusta, narrow.<br />
Anima , soul.<br />
Anno, anni , year , years .<br />
Ansia , anxiety .<br />
Appare, it appears.<br />
Appena, scarcely .<br />
Appressar, approaching.<br />
Aprile , April, spring.<br />
Arbitro, judge.<br />
Arboscello, shrub.<br />
Ardea, it was burning.<br />
Ardiscon, <strong>the</strong>y dare.<br />
Ardor, warmth .<br />
Ardua, difficult.<br />
Arena , arene , s<strong>and</strong>s, shores .<br />
Argento , silver .<br />
Aria , air.<br />
Armato, armed .<br />
Aroma, fragrance .<br />
Arsi , I burnt.<br />
346<br />
Ascolta, listen .<br />
Aspett<strong>and</strong>o, awaiting .<br />
Assalse , it assailed .<br />
Assise (si), placed himself .<br />
Assonna , it lulls to sleep .<br />
Attende , he awaits .<br />
Atterra , he prostrates.<br />
Attonita , astonished .<br />
Aura, breeze (see page 114).<br />
Aurati , golden.<br />
Aureo, golden.<br />
Auretta , gentle breeze<br />
(see page 114).<br />
Aurora, dawn.<br />
Avanza, it advances .<br />
Avea , I <strong>had</strong>.<br />
Avve<strong>zz</strong>a , accustomed .<br />
Avvien , it happens.<br />
Avvio, it sent him.<br />
Avvolgea , twisted.<br />
Avvolve (s') coils up.<br />
A<strong>zz</strong>urrina , azure .<br />
B<br />
Bacia , it kisses .<br />
Bagni, it ba<strong>the</strong>s.<br />
Ballo, ball, dance.<br />
Basso, low.<br />
Battaglia , battle.<br />
Beate , happy.<br />
Bel, bello, bella, bell', bei, begli,<br />
beautiful .<br />
Belle<strong>zz</strong>a , beauty.<br />
Belta, beauty, beauties<br />
(see page 114).<br />
Ben e ver, it is quite true .<br />
Ben, love.<br />
Benchè , although.<br />
Bene , blessing .
Benefattor , benefactor .<br />
Benefica , beneficent .<br />
Benignamente , kindly.<br />
Braccio, braccia , arm, arms .<br />
Br<strong>and</strong>o, sword.<br />
Brillar , to shine .<br />
Brine , hoar-frosts.<br />
C<br />
Cada, it falls.<br />
Cadde, he, it fell.<br />
Cagione , cause .<br />
260 ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.<br />
Caro, cari , dear.<br />
Colline , hills .<br />
Casti , chaste , pure.<br />
Cavalli , horses .<br />
Cedrati , citron trees .<br />
Celere , rapid.<br />
Celeste , heavenly .<br />
Ceneri , ashes .<br />
Che, ch',<br />
who, that, what, <strong>which</strong> , so that.<br />
Che, for, why.<br />
Chi, who, he who, whom.<br />
Chiama , he, it calls.<br />
Chiam<strong>and</strong>o , calling .<br />
Chiare , clear .<br />
Chiede , he asks .<br />
Chiesi , I asked .<br />
Chinati , bent down.<br />
Chiniam , we bend low.<br />
Chino (si), it beni itself .<br />
Chiude , it encircles .<br />
Chiuse , he ended, finished .<br />
Cielo , ciel , sky, heavens .<br />
Cinta , girt.<br />
Circonfusa , ba<strong>the</strong>d.<br />
Codardo, cowardly.<br />
Col, coll', co', with <strong>the</strong>.<br />
347<br />
Calpestar , to trample on.<br />
Calpesto, trodden upon.<br />
Campo, campi, field, fields.<br />
Cangiar , to change .<br />
Cantico , song.<br />
Canto, song.<br />
Canzone , canzoni , song, songs.<br />
Capei , hair (see page 114).<br />
Capo, head.<br />
Color, colours.<br />
Colora, it colours.<br />
Coltrice , bed (lit. coverlet ).<br />
Come , how, as if, like .<br />
Commosso, moved.<br />
Compianga ,you sympathise with.<br />
Comune , common .<br />
Con, with.<br />
Conchiglia , sea shell .<br />
Concitato , rapid.<br />
Conflitto, conflict .<br />
Confuso, confused, intermingled .<br />
Consegno , I consign .<br />
Conserte , crossed.<br />
Consola, gives consolation .<br />
Contende , it objects.<br />
Comrade , countries .<br />
Contro, against .<br />
Convalli , valleys .<br />
Coralli , corals.<br />
Core, cor, heart .<br />
Coronata, crowned.<br />
Cosa, thing , being .<br />
Così, thus, even so.<br />
Creator , creating .
Crede , it believes .<br />
Crederò , I shall think .<br />
Croce , cross.<br />
Crudele , cruel .<br />
Cruenta , blood-stained .<br />
Cui, whom, <strong>which</strong> .<br />
Cumulo, heap.<br />
Cuor, cuore , heart .<br />
Cura, care .<br />
D<br />
Da, from, by.<br />
Da, she gives .<br />
Dal, dall' dai, dagli, from <strong>the</strong>.<br />
Danni , ills, woes.<br />
Danze, dances.<br />
Dar, to give .<br />
Dato, (having ) given .<br />
Degradato, degraded.<br />
Dei, gods.<br />
Del, della, dell', dei, de', degli, of <strong>the</strong>.<br />
Deserta , deserted .<br />
Desir , desires .<br />
Desto, it kindled .<br />
Destra , right .<br />
Di, d', of.<br />
Di, day, days.<br />
Dice , he, she says, names .<br />
Dicendo, saying .<br />
Diciam , we say.<br />
Difende , it defends.<br />
Diletto , delight , pleasure .<br />
Dimmi , tell me, bid me.<br />
Dio, God.<br />
Dipinto, painted.<br />
Dir, v. a. to say.<br />
Dirmi , to tell me.<br />
Discorda, it is out of harmony .<br />
Disdegna , she disdains.<br />
348<br />
Disegno , design .<br />
Disotto, <strong>under</strong>.<br />
Dispero, he lost hope.<br />
Diversa , different .<br />
Divien , it becomes .<br />
Divina , heavenly .<br />
Divisa , divided.<br />
Dolce<strong>zz</strong>a, sweetness .<br />
Dolci, sweet .<br />
Donde, whence .<br />
Donna, woman, lady.<br />
Dono, gift.<br />
Dopo, after .<br />
Dov', dove, where .<br />
Dovunque, wherever .<br />
Drappello, troop of soldiers .<br />
Dubbiosi, anxious .<br />
Duce, duke, leader<br />
Due, two.<br />
Dunque, <strong>the</strong>n .<br />
Dura, it lasts.<br />
E, ed, <strong>and</strong>.<br />
E, he, she, it is.<br />
Ecco, behold.<br />
Egli, he.<br />
Ella, she.<br />
Empi, you fill.<br />
Era, it was.<br />
Erano, <strong>the</strong>y were .<br />
Erbetta, grass.<br />
Erma, secluded.<br />
Erra, it w<strong>and</strong>ers.<br />
Esca, food, bait.<br />
Esecr<strong>and</strong>o, esecr<strong>and</strong>a , execrable .<br />
Esiglio, exile .<br />
Essi, <strong>the</strong>y .<br />
Estreme , last.<br />
Eterne , eterni , eternal .
Fa, makes . Si fa, it makes itself .<br />
Falso, false .<br />
Fanti , foot-soldiers .<br />
Fare , far, to make , to do.<br />
Farsi , to make itself .<br />
Fate, fairies .<br />
Fato, fate, destiny .<br />
Fattor, maker .<br />
Favella , language .<br />
Fe', he did.<br />
Fede, faith , belief .<br />
Fedele , faithful .<br />
Ferire , ferir , to wound, wounding.<br />
Ferro, weapon.<br />
Ferve , it is fervent , boils.<br />
Fiera , fierce , brave.<br />
Figlia , daughter.<br />
261 ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.<br />
Fronde, leaves , branches .<br />
Giocondo, pleasant .<br />
Fronte, brow.<br />
Fu, he, it was.<br />
Fuga, flight.<br />
Fulgor, splendour.<br />
Fulmine , th<strong>under</strong>bolt.<br />
Fulminei , beaming .<br />
Furente , maddened.<br />
Furono, <strong>the</strong>y were , <strong>the</strong>y have gone.<br />
G<br />
Genio , genius .<br />
Gentile , gentle .<br />
Già, already.<br />
Giacque , he laid down, he lay low.<br />
Giammai , ever .<br />
But when " giammai " is used<br />
with a negation , it is translated<br />
by never .<br />
Giardini , gardens.<br />
Gigli , lilies .<br />
349<br />
Fin, even .<br />
Fine , end.<br />
Fior, fiori , flowers.<br />
Fibile , doleful.<br />
Floridi, blooming.<br />
Flutto, waves , sea.<br />
Follia, folly.<br />
Folti, thick .<br />
Fonte, fonti, fountain ,<br />
fountains , springs.<br />
Forma, form.<br />
Forse, perhaps.<br />
Forte, brave man.<br />
Fosse, he was.<br />
Fra, between , amongst .<br />
Fratelli , bro<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />
Gioia , joy.<br />
Gioioso, happy.<br />
Giorno, day.<br />
Giovin , youth.<br />
Giro (noun) turn.<br />
In giro, around.<br />
Move in giro, spans <strong>the</strong> heavens .<br />
Giro, I turn.<br />
Giunge , it arrives at it.<br />
Giurato, sworn.<br />
Gli, <strong>the</strong>, to him, to it, to <strong>the</strong>m .<br />
Gloria, glory.<br />
Gran, great .<br />
Gratitudine , gratitude .<br />
Grato, grateful .<br />
Grave , heavy .<br />
Grazi'oso, graceful .<br />
Grembo, lap.<br />
Gridammo , we cried .
Grido, gridi, cry, cries .<br />
Gronda, pours down.<br />
Guancial , pillow.<br />
Guard<strong>and</strong>o, looking .<br />
Guardare. to look.<br />
Guardo, guardi, look, looks.<br />
Guerra , war.<br />
Guerrieri , warriors .<br />
Gusta, it enjoys .<br />
H<br />
Ha, he, it has.<br />
Hai, you have .<br />
Hanno, <strong>the</strong>y have .<br />
I<br />
I, <strong>the</strong>.<br />
Ignobile , ignoble.<br />
Il, <strong>the</strong>, it.<br />
Immemore , unconscious , uncared<br />
for.<br />
Immense , immense .<br />
Immerge , he plunges.<br />
Immobile , motionless .<br />
Immortal , immortal .<br />
Impalidir , becoming pale.<br />
Imperio , comm<strong>and</strong>.<br />
Imperli , it decks with pearls.<br />
Implora, he implores .<br />
Imprese , he <strong>under</strong>took.<br />
In, on.<br />
Incalza , pursue hotly.<br />
Incarco , burden.<br />
Incerto , uncertain .<br />
Incontro, against .<br />
Indocile , unchecked .<br />
Indomato, unabated.<br />
Indura, he hardens himself .<br />
Inerte , idle.<br />
350<br />
Inestinguibil , unquenched ,<br />
unassuaged .<br />
Infelice , unhappy.<br />
Innanzi , forward.<br />
Intender , to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong>.<br />
Intrisa , soaked.<br />
Invan , in vain .<br />
Invidia , jealousy .<br />
Io, i', I.<br />
Ira, anger .<br />
Istante , instant .<br />
L<br />
La, le, l', <strong>the</strong>, her, it.<br />
Lago, lake .<br />
Lampo, lightning .<br />
Lasciarmi , to leave me.<br />
Lati , sides .<br />
Laudare , v. a. to praise .<br />
Laureti , laurel groves .<br />
Le, <strong>the</strong>, from her.<br />
Lei, her, it.<br />
Li, <strong>the</strong>m .<br />
Lignaggio , race , lineage .<br />
Lingua , tongue.<br />
Linguaggio , language .<br />
Lo, <strong>the</strong>, him, it.<br />
Lontana , distant.<br />
Lor, <strong>the</strong>m , <strong>the</strong>ir .<br />
Luce , light .<br />
Lui, him, he, it.<br />
Lume , light , brilliancy .<br />
Luna, moon.<br />
Lunghi , long.<br />
Ma, but.<br />
Madri, mo<strong>the</strong>rs .<br />
Maga, enchantress .<br />
Maggior, greater .<br />
Mai, badly.
Mai, ever .<br />
Male , ill, woe.<br />
Man, h<strong>and</strong>.<br />
Manco, less .<br />
M<strong>and</strong>ola, m<strong>and</strong>oline .<br />
Manipoli , battalions.<br />
Mar, mari , sea, seas .<br />
Maraviglia , w<strong>and</strong>er.<br />
Marina , sea-shore .<br />
A by <strong>the</strong> sea- shore .<br />
Marte , mars , war.<br />
Massimo , greatest .<br />
Mattin , morning .<br />
Mattine , mornings .<br />
Mattutina , in <strong>the</strong> morning .<br />
Me, m', me, from me.<br />
Melanconia , melancholy .<br />
Memorie , recollection .<br />
Mente , mind, memory .<br />
Mentr' , whilst .<br />
Merce , reward.<br />
Meriggio , mid-day.<br />
Mesce , it mixes itself .<br />
Me<strong>zz</strong>o, middle.<br />
Mi, in', me, to me.<br />
Miei , my.<br />
262 ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.<br />
N<br />
Ninfa , nymph.<br />
Nacque , he was born.<br />
Nodi, curls.<br />
Narrar , to relate .<br />
Noi, we.<br />
Nato, born.<br />
Nomò (si), he named himself .<br />
Natura , nature .<br />
Non, not.<br />
Naufrago, shipwrecked .<br />
Notte, night .<br />
Ne, nor.<br />
Nudrice , mo<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
Ne, of it, to us.<br />
Nunzio, announcement .<br />
Nel, nella , nell' , nei, ne', in <strong>the</strong>. Nuovi; new. Pensieri , thoughts.<br />
Nembo, cloud, shower .<br />
Nuvoli , clouds.<br />
Nevi , snows.<br />
O, O!<br />
351<br />
Miglior , better .<br />
Mille , a thous<strong>and</strong>.<br />
Mio, mia, my, mine .<br />
Mira , he looks.<br />
Miracol , miracle .<br />
Misero , miserable .<br />
Mista , mingled .<br />
Misura , measures .<br />
Mobili, changing .<br />
Mondo, world.<br />
Monile , necklace .<br />
Montagna, mountain .<br />
Monte, monti , hill , hills .<br />
Morir, morire , to die.<br />
Mormor<strong>and</strong>o, murmuring .<br />
Morra, he, it will die.<br />
Morta, dead.<br />
Mortal, mortale , mortal.<br />
Mortalmente , mortally.<br />
Morte, death.<br />
Mostrare , to show.<br />
Mostrasi , she shows herself .<br />
Mova (si), <strong>the</strong>re moves .<br />
Move, it moves .<br />
Muta, dumb-struck .
O, or, ei<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
Obbedir, to obey.<br />
Oblio, oblivion, neglect .<br />
Occhi, eyes .<br />
Ode, s'ode, one hears .<br />
Odio, hatred.<br />
Odorose, perfumed.<br />
Ogni, each , every .<br />
Ognor, always.<br />
Ognun, each one.<br />
Olenti , sweet scented .<br />
Oltra, beyond.<br />
Oltraggio, outrage .<br />
Ombra, s<strong>had</strong>e.<br />
Ombroso, s<strong>had</strong>y.<br />
Onda, onde, wave , waves .<br />
Onde, by <strong>which</strong> .<br />
Onesta , honest , modest.<br />
Onor, honours.<br />
Onorava, he honoured.<br />
Opre, works.<br />
Or, ora, now.<br />
Ora, ore, hour, hours.<br />
Orba, bereaved .<br />
Orgoglio, pride.<br />
Orma, mark , foot-print.<br />
Ornato, adorned.<br />
Oro, gold.<br />
Oscura, dark.<br />
Ottiene , he, it obtains.<br />
Ozio, idleness .<br />
P<br />
Pacato, calm.<br />
Pace , peace .<br />
Padri, fa<strong>the</strong>rs .<br />
Pagine , pages.<br />
Pago, satisfied .<br />
Palmeti , palm groves .<br />
352<br />
Par, pare, it appears.<br />
Parea , it appeared.<br />
Pari , equal.<br />
Parlan , <strong>the</strong>y speak .<br />
Parola, parole, word, words.<br />
Passò, it passed away.<br />
Pavidi , terrified .<br />
Pel, pei, for <strong>the</strong>, through <strong>the</strong>.<br />
Pellegrina , w<strong>and</strong>ering .<br />
Pena , pain.<br />
Pendice , brow of <strong>the</strong> hill .<br />
Penne , fea<strong>the</strong>rs , wings.<br />
Pens<strong>and</strong>o, thinking .<br />
Per, for, through, in order<br />
Perché , why.<br />
Percossa , struck .<br />
Perde , he lost.<br />
Periglio (poet, for pericolo), danger.<br />
Perla , pearl.<br />
Pesa , it weighs .<br />
Petto, breast.<br />
Piacente , charming .<br />
Piacer , piaceri , pleasures .<br />
Piangi , weep.<br />
Pianto , weeping .<br />
Pie, foot.<br />
Pien , full.<br />
Pieta , pity, sympathy.<br />
Pietosa , solemn .<br />
Pietosi , compassionate .<br />
Piramidi , Pyramids .<br />
Più, more , il più, <strong>the</strong> most.<br />
Placar, to pacify.<br />
Poi, <strong>the</strong>n , after .<br />
Polve (poet. ), polvere , dust.<br />
Pone, he places himself .<br />
Popolo, people.<br />
Portento, miracle .
Posi, you rest .<br />
Posò, he rested .<br />
Posteri , posterity.<br />
Potere , power.<br />
Praticello , meadow.<br />
Preme , weighs you down.<br />
Premio , reward.<br />
Prende , it takes .<br />
Preparazione , preparation .<br />
Prepari (ti), you prepare yourself.<br />
Primavera , spring.<br />
Primo , first.<br />
Privo, deprived.<br />
Procellosa , stormy.<br />
Prode, shores .<br />
Profonda, profound.<br />
Prova, he experiences .<br />
Provo, he experienced .<br />
Prudenti , prudent.<br />
Pugna, he fights .<br />
Può, he, it can.<br />
Pur dianzi , just now.<br />
Pur, yet, merely , really .<br />
Pura, pure.<br />
Q<br />
Qual, quale, who, <strong>which</strong> , what, like .<br />
Qu<strong>and</strong>o, when .<br />
Quante, how <strong>many</strong> . to, on account of.<br />
Quei, those , he who.<br />
Quel, quella, quell', that.<br />
Questo, questa, this .<br />
263 ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.<br />
Risorse , he rose again .<br />
Risplende , it shines .<br />
Rose, roses .<br />
Risponde, it answers .<br />
Ritornerà , it will return .<br />
Ritorneranno , <strong>the</strong>y will return .<br />
Rivo, brook.<br />
Rondinella , swallow.<br />
353<br />
Qui, here .<br />
Quinci, on this side.<br />
Quindi, on that side.<br />
R<br />
Raccogli, stay.<br />
Raddoppia, redoubles.<br />
Raggio, ray.<br />
Rai, rays (see page 114).<br />
Rapivi, you stole.<br />
Rea, wicked (see page 121).<br />
Recinta , surrounded, girt.<br />
Reggia , royal abode.<br />
Regina , queen .<br />
Regno, reign , power.<br />
Remote , distant.<br />
Rende, it gives .<br />
Respingon , clash against .<br />
Ria, insulting .<br />
Riaprendo, re-opening .<br />
Ricant<strong>and</strong>o, singing over again .<br />
Ricche<strong>zz</strong>a , riches .<br />
Riceve , it receives .<br />
Riconosco, I recognise .<br />
Ride, he, it smiles .<br />
Rimbomba, re-echoes .<br />
Rinserra , it contains .<br />
Rio, brook.<br />
Ripensò, he thought again .<br />
Rischi , risks , perils .<br />
Riso, smile .<br />
Rote, wheels .<br />
Rugiada, dew.<br />
S<br />
Sa, it knows how to, it can.<br />
Sacrilege , sacrilegious .
Saggio , wise man.<br />
Saluta , she greets , salutes .<br />
Salut<strong>and</strong>o, greeting .<br />
Salva , safe , free .<br />
San, <strong>the</strong>y know.<br />
Sangue , blood.<br />
Sanno, <strong>the</strong>y know.<br />
Sarà, it will be.<br />
Scarsi , scarce , bereft.<br />
Scendi , you descend.<br />
Scernere , to perceive .<br />
Scese , it descended.<br />
Scherzi , it may sport, it may ripple.<br />
Schierato , in battle array.<br />
Schiudon, <strong>the</strong>y open.<br />
Scioglie , it bestows.<br />
Sconsolata , disconsolate .<br />
Scoppio, it burst out.<br />
Scorato, discouraged.<br />
Scorrea , it was looking .<br />
Scorri , you cross over.<br />
Scrivi , write .<br />
Se stesso , himself .<br />
Se, s', if.<br />
Secoli , centuries .<br />
Secure , secure , fearless .<br />
Segno , sign , mark .<br />
Sei, se', you are.<br />
Sempre , always.<br />
Sen, seno, breast.<br />
Senso , sense , sentiment .<br />
Sentendosi , hearing herself .<br />
Sentenza , decision .<br />
Senti , you feel .<br />
Sentier , paths.<br />
Senz' , senza , without.<br />
Sera , evening .<br />
Sereno , serena , cloudless.<br />
354<br />
Serve , he serves .<br />
Settembre , September .<br />
Sfere , spheres .<br />
Sfida, he defies .<br />
Sfolgorante , shining .<br />
Si, s',<br />
himself , herself , itself ,<br />
<strong>the</strong>mselves .<br />
SI, so much.<br />
Sia, she may be.<br />
Sicche , in such a manner that.<br />
Siccome , just as.<br />
Silenzio , silence .<br />
Simile , similar .<br />
Sin che, so long as.<br />
Sinistra , left.<br />
Sirena , syren .<br />
So, I know.<br />
Sofferto, suffered .<br />
Soglio, throne .<br />
Sogno, dream .<br />
Sol, solo.<br />
Sola, alone , only.<br />
Sole, sun.<br />
Solingo, lonely.<br />
Solitaria , solitary .<br />
Sommessi , humbly.<br />
Son, I am.<br />
Sonito, sound, din.<br />
Sonno, sleep .<br />
Sono, I am, <strong>the</strong>y are.<br />
Sopra, on, concerning .<br />
Sorge , it rises .<br />
Sospir, sospiro, sigh .<br />
Sospira, sigh .<br />
Sott' onda, submarine .<br />
Sovra, upon.<br />
Sovvenir , remembrance .
Spade, swords.<br />
Sparir, disappearing .<br />
Sparito, disappeared.<br />
Sparsi, dishevelled .<br />
Sparve, he disappeared.<br />
Speme ,hope (see page 114).<br />
Speranza , hope.<br />
Sperar, to hope.<br />
Sperdi, do thou divert .<br />
Spiegato , unfurled.<br />
Spirabil, breathing .<br />
Spirito, spirto (see page 114), spirit .<br />
Spiro, spirit .<br />
Spoglia, corpse.<br />
Spogliar, to take off.<br />
Spose, wives .<br />
Sposo, husb<strong>and</strong>, mate .<br />
Spregio , contempt, thraldom.<br />
Spre<strong>zz</strong>ato, despised.<br />
Spunta, it appears, looms in <strong>the</strong><br />
distance .<br />
Squillo, blast of a trumpet.<br />
Sta, it remains .<br />
Stampar, to mark .<br />
Stanca , fatigued .<br />
Stanche , fatigued .<br />
Stanzetta , little room.<br />
Stellate , starry sky.<br />
Stesso , himself .<br />
Stette , he, it stood.<br />
Stolti, foolish.<br />
Straniero , foreigner .<br />
Strappar, to snatch away.<br />
Strazio , torture .<br />
Su, upon, on.<br />
Subit', di subit', at once.<br />
Subito, sudden.<br />
Sul, sulla, sull', on <strong>the</strong>, in <strong>the</strong>.<br />
355<br />
Suo, sua, sue, his, hers , its.<br />
Suolo, soil.<br />
Suon, suoni , sound, sounds.<br />
Superba, proud.<br />
Supina, languid.<br />
Supnavan, <strong>the</strong>y sounded.<br />
Suscita , it raises up.<br />
Sventura , misfortune .<br />
T<br />
Tacito , silent .<br />
Tacque , it was silent .<br />
Tale , tal, such, even so.<br />
Tanto, so great .<br />
Te, t', you, to you.<br />
Teme , it fears .<br />
Tempo, time .<br />
Tempre , quality.<br />
Tende , tents .<br />
Tenea dietro, it followed.<br />
Tenebre , darkness .<br />
Terra , earth , l<strong>and</strong>.<br />
Terreno , terren , ground.<br />
Terror , terror .<br />
Tesa , extended , intent .<br />
Ti, t', you, yourself.<br />
Tiene , he holds.<br />
Tiranni , tyrants.<br />
Tolta, taken away.<br />
Tomba, tomb.<br />
Tornata , having returned<br />
(see rule 200).<br />
Torrenti , torrents .<br />
Tra, amongst , between .<br />
Traluce , appears, shines .<br />
Trapassero , I shall outpass.<br />
Traspar, appears.<br />
Trasporto, it transported.<br />
Trasse , unshea<strong>the</strong>d .
Trem<strong>and</strong>o , trembling .<br />
264 ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.<br />
Trepida , anxious .<br />
Sicilia , Sicily .<br />
(poet, for " vecchi "), old men.<br />
Trionfi , triumphs .<br />
Triquetra , ancient name for<br />
Tristo , sad.<br />
Tromba, trumpet.<br />
Troncator , abbreviator<br />
Troverai , you will find.<br />
Tu, thou.<br />
Tua, tue, thy.<br />
Tuo, thy.<br />
Tuoi , thy, your.<br />
Turba, crowd.<br />
Tutte , tutti, all.<br />
Tutto, tutta, all, everything .<br />
U<br />
Ubbidir, v. n. to obey.<br />
Udir, v. a. to hear .<br />
Ultima , last.<br />
Umana , human .<br />
Umilità , humility .<br />
Umor, moisture .<br />
Un,uno, una, un',one,an. a.<br />
Uomo, uom, man.<br />
Urna, urn.<br />
V<br />
Va, he, she, it goes.<br />
Vago,vaga,beautiful ,lovely.<br />
Val, it is worth.<br />
Valida, helping .<br />
Valli , bulwarks.<br />
Vanno, <strong>the</strong>y go.<br />
Vasta, vast, wide.<br />
Vedo, I see.<br />
Vedovetta , little widow.<br />
Vedrai , you will see.<br />
Vegliardi<br />
356<br />
Velo, veil .<br />
Vendetta , vengeance .<br />
Venduto, sold.<br />
Venga , he comes .<br />
Venne , nevenne , he, it came .<br />
Venuto, venuta , come .<br />
Ver, truth.<br />
Vera , true .<br />
Veri , true .<br />
Vermigli , red.<br />
Verone , ver<strong>and</strong>ah .<br />
Verra , it will come .<br />
Versar , to pour down, to bestow.<br />
Verso, towards.<br />
Vespertina , in <strong>the</strong> evening .<br />
Vessiilo , st<strong>and</strong>ard.<br />
Veste , it clo<strong>the</strong>s .<br />
Vesti , clo<strong>the</strong>s .<br />
Vicende , events .<br />
Vide, he, it saw.<br />
Vidi, I saw.<br />
Viene , vien , it comes .<br />
Vigile , vigilant .<br />
Vile , vile . A , in contempt.<br />
Virtù, virtue , valour.<br />
Viso, face .<br />
Vista , sight , view .<br />
Vita, life .<br />
Vittoria , victory.<br />
Viviamo , we live .<br />
Vivo, lively , brilliant .<br />
Vivro, I shall live .<br />
Voce, voice .<br />
Voi, you.<br />
Volle, he willed.
Volo, flight.<br />
Volsero, <strong>the</strong>y turned<br />
<strong>the</strong>mselves .<br />
Volta. vault, dungeon.<br />
Volte, times .<br />
357<br />
Volto, volti, face , faces .<br />
Vuoi ? will you ?<br />
Z<br />
Zaffiro, sapphire.<br />
Zeffiretto , zephyr, breeze .<br />
WORKS BY PROFESSOR N. PERINI.<br />
PUBLISHED BY<br />
MESSRS. HACHETTE & Co., 18, KING WILLIAM STREET,<br />
CHARING CROSS, LONDON, W.C.<br />
" La Vita Nuova," by Dante Alighieri, with Notes <strong>and</strong> Comments<br />
in English. Imperial i6mo, cloth lettered , 2s. 6d.<br />
" A First Italian Reading Book ," containing Prose <strong>and</strong> Poetry, with<br />
Rules for <strong>the</strong> Pronunciation of <strong>the</strong> Italian Language , with Notes,<br />
.Hints on Italian Versification, <strong>and</strong> a Complete Vocabulary of all<br />
<strong>the</strong> words contained in <strong>the</strong> Text, in <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong> "tonic accent" is<br />
marked in darker type , <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> proper pronunciations of <strong>the</strong><br />
Letters " E," " O," " S," <strong>and</strong> " Z " are indicated . Cloth gilt, 2s. 6d.<br />
The First Chapters of "I Promessi Sposi," by Manzoni , followed by<br />
a repetition of <strong>the</strong> <strong>text</strong>, with an English Interlinear Translation.<br />
Cloth gilt, 2s. 6d.<br />
" La Clemenza di Tito," by Metastasio, followed by a repetition of<br />
<strong>the</strong> <strong>text</strong> of <strong>the</strong> First Act, with an English Interlinear Translation,<br />
<strong>and</strong> numbers indicating <strong>the</strong> position of <strong>the</strong> words in <strong>the</strong> Text.<br />
Cloth gilt, 2s. 6d.<br />
Questions <strong>and</strong> Exercises on <strong>the</strong> Grammar <strong>and</strong> Idioms of <strong>the</strong><br />
French Language ; with answers to <strong>the</strong> most Important Questions,<br />
<strong>and</strong> a Repetition of all <strong>the</strong> Questions, for <strong>the</strong> purpose of Class, or<br />
Self-Examination . Ninth edition . Price 2s.<br />
The above work , now in <strong>the</strong> h<strong>and</strong>s of all C<strong>and</strong>idates preparing for<br />
all <strong>the</strong> Competitive Examinations, contains all <strong>the</strong> most<br />
important questions on <strong>the</strong> Grammar <strong>and</strong> Idioms of <strong>the</strong> French<br />
Language .<br />
Each question is followed by a blank for <strong>the</strong> answer <strong>the</strong>reto .<br />
"The Bridge ," or Exercises on Useful English Words, Phrases <strong>and</strong><br />
Proverbs, for translation into o<strong>the</strong>r languages. On <strong>the</strong> same plan<br />
as <strong>the</strong> above-mentioned work. Second edition . Price 9d.<br />
Extracts in English Prose, from <strong>the</strong> Best Authors; arranged<br />
progressively for translation into o<strong>the</strong>r languages, The extracts
are divided into numbered sections, to facilitate translation at<br />
sight , in class. Third edition . Price 2s.<br />
Five-<strong>and</strong>-Twenty Exercises on French Verbs, with an Index for<br />
Examination. Large 8vo, 24 pages, in paper cover. Eighth edition.<br />
Price 6d.<br />
A " Key " to this work, sold to Teachers only. Price 1s.<br />
The above work is intended to meet a want long felt in English<br />
Schools. The plan of <strong>the</strong> book is very simple, <strong>and</strong> yet it goes<br />
thoroughly into <strong>the</strong> subject. It possesses, moreover, <strong>the</strong> great<br />
advantage of entirely relieving <strong>the</strong> teacher of <strong>the</strong> tiresome <strong>and</strong><br />
laborious task of setting verbs to conjugate .<br />
Genealogical <strong>and</strong> Chronological Tables of <strong>the</strong> Kings <strong>and</strong> Princes of<br />
France . Price 1s.<br />
LIBRAIRIE HACHETTE & CIE.,<br />
LONDON : 18, KING WILLIAM STREET, CHARING CROSS.<br />
The Catalogue of <strong>the</strong> firm, containing a complete list of <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
Classical <strong>and</strong> Prize Books will be sent free by book -post on<br />
application.<br />
THE PUBLIC SCHOOL GERMAN GRAMMAR<br />
With Exercises for Translation, Composition <strong>and</strong> Conversation,<br />
BY A. L. MEISSNER, M.A., Ph.D., D.Lit., LIBRARIAN AND<br />
PROFESSOR OF MODERN LANGUAGES IN QUEEN'S COLLEGE,<br />
BELFAST, Mitglied der Gesellschaft, fur das Studium der neueren<br />
Sprachen zu Berlin, I Vol. small 8vo, 384 pages, cloth. Price 33.<br />
6d.<br />
Teachers <strong>and</strong> Students of German are to be congratulated upon<br />
such an acquisition as Professor Meissner's PUBLIC SCHOOL<br />
GERMAN GRAMMAR. It is as thoroughly-well done as <strong>the</strong> name of<br />
its author would lead one to expect.<br />
LONDON. HENRY ATTWELL ,<br />
Die Anlage und Ausstattung gefallen mir sehr .<br />
The Reverend A. L. BECKER.<br />
The general plan of <strong>the</strong> book is so good that it is pretty sure to<br />
have a wide circulation .<br />
LIVERPOOL. E. L. NAFTEL.<br />
A new <strong>and</strong> improved method of learning <strong>the</strong> German language<br />
grammatically <strong>and</strong> conversationally, if simple <strong>and</strong><br />
comprehensive , is certain to be welcomed <strong>and</strong> widely used, <strong>and</strong><br />
358
we have no hesitation in saying that this is <strong>the</strong> best work of <strong>the</strong><br />
kind we have met with. A look at <strong>the</strong> preface will fully explain Dr.<br />
Meissner's system it could scarcely fail to be successful. Practice<br />
in conversation commences once <strong>the</strong> first principles are<br />
mastered, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>. first "conversation lessons are intended to<br />
furnish <strong>the</strong> pupil with <strong>the</strong> most necessary travel talk for a<br />
journey up <strong>the</strong> Rhine <strong>and</strong> into Switzerl<strong>and</strong> ; " anyone who has<br />
travelled being totally ignorant of <strong>the</strong> language will appreciate<br />
this. The new official spelling has been adopted throughout <strong>the</strong><br />
book , but it has been sufficiently compared with <strong>the</strong> old in an<br />
introductory chapter to enable <strong>the</strong> student to read <strong>the</strong> books<br />
printed in <strong>the</strong> old spelling .<br />
The Dublin Evening News .<br />
LE MIE PRIGIONI, BY SILVIO PELLICO .<br />
Adapted for English Schools, with Grammatical <strong>and</strong> Explanatory<br />
Notes , BY REV. A. C. CLAPIN , M.A.<br />
CLOTH, 1s. 6d.<br />
University of California<br />
SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY<br />
405 Hilgard Avenue , Los Angeles , CA 90024-1388<br />
Return this material to <strong>the</strong> library<br />
from <strong>which</strong> it was borrowed.<br />
[ The key to <strong>the</strong> exercises is not available. They are set out here<br />
for anyone who is competent to do so to fill <strong>the</strong>m in if <strong>the</strong>y wish.]<br />
EXERCISE I. 3<br />
The boy's book.<br />
The boy's (92) book.<br />
The girl's exercise.<br />
The girl's exercise.<br />
The branch of <strong>the</strong> tree.<br />
The branch of <strong>the</strong> tree.<br />
The woman in <strong>the</strong> garden.<br />
The woman in <strong>the</strong> garden.<br />
The bird in <strong>the</strong> cage.<br />
The bird in <strong>the</strong> cage.<br />
The woman with <strong>the</strong> bread.<br />
The woman with <strong>the</strong> bread.<br />
359
The book on <strong>the</strong> table.<br />
The book on <strong>the</strong> table.<br />
The birds among <strong>the</strong> branches of <strong>the</strong> trees.<br />
The birds (85) among <strong>the</strong> branches of <strong>the</strong> trees.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> boys' gardens<br />
In <strong>the</strong> boys' gardens<br />
EXERCISE II.<br />
I have <strong>the</strong> dictionary.<br />
I (106) have <strong>the</strong> dictionary.<br />
Charles has <strong>the</strong> paper.<br />
Charles has <strong>the</strong> paper.<br />
Mary <strong>had</strong> <strong>the</strong> pen; she <strong>had</strong> also <strong>the</strong> grammar.<br />
Mary <strong>had</strong> (Imp. Ind.) <strong>the</strong> pen; she <strong>had</strong> also <strong>the</strong> grammar.<br />
We <strong>had</strong> <strong>the</strong> desk of Henry.<br />
We <strong>had</strong> Henry's (92) writing-desk.<br />
William <strong>and</strong> John have <strong>the</strong> inkst<strong>and</strong>.<br />
William <strong>and</strong> John have <strong>the</strong> ink-st<strong>and</strong>.<br />
Yesterday Elizabeth <strong>had</strong> <strong>the</strong> letter <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> penknife ; she <strong>had</strong><br />
already <strong>had</strong> <strong>the</strong> books.<br />
Yesterday Elizabeth <strong>had</strong> (Imp. Ind.) <strong>the</strong> letter <strong>and</strong> 6 <strong>the</strong> penknife ;<br />
she <strong>had</strong> already <strong>had</strong> (Pluperf. Ind.) <strong>the</strong> books.<br />
7 I shall have <strong>the</strong> lesson tomorrow.<br />
7 I shall have <strong>the</strong> lesson to-morrow.<br />
William <strong>and</strong> Charles will have <strong>the</strong> slate <strong>and</strong> inkst<strong>and</strong>.<br />
William <strong>and</strong> Charles will have <strong>the</strong> slate <strong>and</strong> 8 ink-st<strong>and</strong>.<br />
The man has <strong>the</strong> key of <strong>the</strong> house.<br />
The man has <strong>the</strong> key of <strong>the</strong> (102) house.<br />
The men have <strong>had</strong> <strong>the</strong> books from Henry.<br />
The men have <strong>had</strong> (Past Ind.) <strong>the</strong> books from (95, 96) Henry.<br />
We have <strong>the</strong> paint brushes of John in <strong>the</strong> desk, <strong>under</strong> <strong>the</strong> table.<br />
We have John's paint-brushes in <strong>the</strong> (101) writing-desk, <strong>under</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong> table. 8<br />
EXERCISE III.<br />
William has <strong>the</strong> coat of Henry.<br />
William has Henry's (92) coat.<br />
360
Has Elizabeth <strong>the</strong> money ?<br />
Has Elizabeth <strong>the</strong> money ?<br />
Yes.<br />
Yes.<br />
We have nei<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong> newspaper nor <strong>the</strong> postage stamp.<br />
We (106) have nei<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong> newspaper nor <strong>the</strong> postage stamp.<br />
Have you Charles' grammar ?<br />
Have you (122, a) Charles' grammar ?<br />
No, I have not <strong>the</strong> books.<br />
No, I have not (125) <strong>the</strong> books.<br />
When shall we have <strong>the</strong> dictionary ?<br />
When shall we have (124) <strong>the</strong> dictionary ?<br />
Today or tomorrow.<br />
To-day or to-morrow.<br />
Do not have <strong>the</strong> bonnet, but have <strong>the</strong> dress.<br />
Do (4) not have (126) <strong>the</strong> bonnet, but have <strong>the</strong> dress.<br />
EXERCISE IV.<br />
My sister has <strong>the</strong> inkst<strong>and</strong>, but she has not <strong>the</strong> ink.<br />
My sister has <strong>the</strong> ink-st<strong>and</strong>, but she has not (125) <strong>the</strong> ink.<br />
Charles has my money.<br />
Charles has my (131) money.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r has <strong>the</strong> song of Henry.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r has Henry's song.<br />
The woman <strong>had</strong> my mo<strong>the</strong>r's dress.<br />
The woman <strong>had</strong> (Imp. Ind.) my mo<strong>the</strong>r's dress.<br />
We <strong>had</strong> already <strong>had</strong> our uncle's letter.<br />
We <strong>had</strong> already <strong>had</strong> (Pluperf. Ind.) our (129) uncle's letter.<br />
Have you <strong>the</strong> postage stamp, for <strong>the</strong> newspaper ?<br />
Have you (122, 124) <strong>the</strong> postage-stamp, for <strong>the</strong> (100) newspaper ?<br />
Yes, here it is.<br />
Yes, here it is.<br />
Have you William's exercises ?<br />
Have you William's exercises (104) ?<br />
Yes, here <strong>the</strong>y are.<br />
361
Yes, here <strong>the</strong>y are.<br />
Has John my pupil's pens ?<br />
Has John my pupil's pens (100, 131) ?<br />
Yes, here <strong>the</strong>y are.<br />
Yes, here <strong>the</strong>y are.<br />
I shall have time for my lesson today.<br />
I shall have (<strong>the</strong>) time for my lesson to-day.<br />
Their nephew shall have my coat <strong>and</strong> hat after May.<br />
Their (130) nephew shall have my coat <strong>and</strong> 4 hat after May.<br />
5 We shall not have my fa<strong>the</strong>r's writing desk before tomorrow.<br />
5 We shall not have my fa<strong>the</strong>r's writing desk before to-morrow.<br />
We should have <strong>had</strong> <strong>the</strong> ink.<br />
We should have <strong>had</strong> <strong>the</strong> ink.<br />
EXERCISE V.<br />
I have some silver.<br />
I have some (133) silver.<br />
Has your bro<strong>the</strong>r any iron ?<br />
Has your bro<strong>the</strong>r any iron ?<br />
Yes; he has some iron, copper, <strong>and</strong> brass.<br />
Yes; he has some iron, (136) copper, <strong>and</strong> brass.<br />
Mary <strong>had</strong> some paper, but she <strong>had</strong> not any pens.<br />
Mary <strong>had</strong> (Imp. Ind.) some paper, but she <strong>had</strong> not any pens.<br />
Charles has nei<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong> grammar, nor <strong>the</strong> dictionary.<br />
Charles has nei<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong> grammar, nor <strong>the</strong> dictionary.<br />
My fa<strong>the</strong>r has some money.<br />
My fa<strong>the</strong>r has some money.<br />
We have not any ink.<br />
We have not any ink.<br />
Have we any postage stamps?<br />
Have we any postage-stamps?<br />
Yes, we have .<br />
Yes, we have (138).<br />
Yesterday we <strong>had</strong> my uncle's dictionary.<br />
Yesterday we <strong>had</strong> (Imp. Ind.) my uncle's dictionary.<br />
362
Have you any pencils ?<br />
Have you (124) any pencils ?<br />
No, I have not any.<br />
No, I have not any.<br />
Henry <strong>and</strong> William have money, but John has not any .<br />
Henry <strong>and</strong> William have money, but John has not any (138).<br />
EXERCISE VI.<br />
Mary has a pencil.<br />
Mary has a pencil.<br />
We have a desk.<br />
We have a writing-desk.<br />
Have you ever <strong>had</strong> a lesson from my master ?<br />
Have you (124) ever <strong>had</strong> a lesson from my (131) master 4 ?<br />
Never.<br />
Never.<br />
Charles has never <strong>had</strong> a penknife.<br />
Charles has never <strong>had</strong> a penknife.<br />
When shall I have my dictionary ?<br />
When shall I have my dictionary ?<br />
Very soon, on Friday, or Saturday .<br />
Very soon, on (5) Friday, or Saturday (74).<br />
Tomorrow Elizabeth will have a dress, <strong>and</strong> Mary will have a<br />
bonnet.<br />
To-morrow Elizabeth will have a dress, <strong>and</strong> Mary will have a<br />
bonnet.<br />
Henry shall not have my bro<strong>the</strong>r's slate.<br />
Henry shall not have my bro<strong>the</strong>r's slate.<br />
Shall we not have some water ?<br />
Shall we not (127) have some water ?<br />
Yes, we shall .<br />
Yes, we shall (138).<br />
William, d o not have any fire in your room today.<br />
William, do not (126) have (thou) any (133) fire in your (thy) room<br />
to-day.<br />
He <strong>had</strong> his book on a chair, in my cousin's garden.<br />
363
He <strong>had</strong> (Imp. Ind.) his book on 6 a chair, in my cousin's garden.<br />
We shall have <strong>the</strong> book at once.<br />
We shall have <strong>the</strong> book at once.<br />
EXERCISE VII.<br />
John is tall, but his bro<strong>the</strong>r Charles is little.<br />
John is tall, but his bro<strong>the</strong>r Charles is little.<br />
This church is beautiful.<br />
This church is beautiful.<br />
Where is Elizabeth ?<br />
Where is Elizabeth ?<br />
She is here.<br />
She (106, a ) is here.<br />
These tables are small, but <strong>the</strong>y are good.<br />
These tables are small, but <strong>the</strong>y are good.<br />
Where are Henry <strong>and</strong> John ?<br />
Where are Henry <strong>and</strong> John ?<br />
They are not here ; <strong>the</strong>y are in our uncle's garden.<br />
They are not (125) here ; <strong>the</strong>y are in our uncle's garden.<br />
Where shall we be on Thursday?<br />
Where shall we be on (147) Thursday?<br />
We shall be in our cousin's room.<br />
We shall be in our (100, 129) cousin's room.<br />
Where have you been ?<br />
Where have you been (124, 149) ?<br />
I have been in my bro<strong>the</strong>r's room.<br />
I have been in my bro<strong>the</strong>r's room.<br />
Will you be here on Wednesday ?<br />
Will you be here on Wednesday ?<br />
Yes ; I shall be ei<strong>the</strong>r here , or at my sister's house .<br />
Yes ; I shall be ei<strong>the</strong>r here , or at my sister's house .<br />
Where are my pens ?<br />
Where are my pens ?<br />
They are in that writing desk.<br />
They are in that (152) writing desk.<br />
364
Be good, William , <strong>and</strong> you will be happy.<br />
Be (122) good, William , <strong>and</strong> you will be happy.<br />
Do not be proud.<br />
Do (128, 122, 126) not be proud.<br />
EXERCISE VIII.<br />
Charles is <strong>the</strong> first, I. am <strong>the</strong> second, <strong>and</strong> Elizabeth is <strong>the</strong> third.<br />
Charles is <strong>the</strong> first, I. (106 b) am <strong>the</strong> second, <strong>and</strong> Elizabeth is <strong>the</strong><br />
third.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r's house is too large.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r's house is too large.<br />
Where is Mary ?<br />
Where is Mary ?<br />
She is in my sister's room.<br />
She is in my sister's room.<br />
Is <strong>the</strong>re a man in <strong>the</strong> street ?<br />
Is <strong>the</strong>re a man in <strong>the</strong> street ?<br />
Yes ; <strong>the</strong>re is a man <strong>and</strong> a child.<br />
Yes ; <strong>the</strong>re is a man <strong>and</strong> a child.<br />
Is <strong>the</strong>re a table in our parlour ?<br />
Is <strong>the</strong>re a table in our parlour ?<br />
No ; <strong>the</strong>re are three chairs , but <strong>the</strong>re is no table.<br />
No ; <strong>the</strong>re are three chairs , but <strong>the</strong>re is no (125) table.<br />
There was a small inkst<strong>and</strong> in my uncle's room.<br />
There was a small inkst<strong>and</strong> in my uncle's room.<br />
There is too much ink in this pen.<br />
There is too much ink in this pen.<br />
Is <strong>the</strong>re a pencil in my bro<strong>the</strong>r's writing -desk ?<br />
Is <strong>the</strong>re a pencil in my bro<strong>the</strong>r's writing -desk ?<br />
No, <strong>the</strong>re are three pens <strong>and</strong> some paper.<br />
No, <strong>the</strong>re are three pens <strong>and</strong> some paper.<br />
There will be a book for <strong>the</strong> pupil, <strong>and</strong> a writing-desk for <strong>the</strong><br />
master .<br />
There will be a book for <strong>the</strong> pupil, <strong>and</strong> a writing-desk for <strong>the</strong><br />
master (146).<br />
EXERCISE IX.<br />
365
I do not find <strong>the</strong> Italian language difficult.<br />
I do (128) not (125) find (a) <strong>the</strong> Italian 1 language difficult.<br />
William speaks French, but d oes not speak German.<br />
William speaks (b) French, 2 but does not speak German.<br />
I am buying some books for my bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
I am buying 3 some (134) books for my bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
I blame my sister, because she was listening at <strong>the</strong> door.<br />
I blame (c) my sister, because she was listening (d) at <strong>the</strong> door.<br />
Shall you vote tomorrow ?<br />
Shall you (117 122) vote (e) to-morrow ?<br />
Yes.<br />
Yes.<br />
John found this letter on a chair, in my bro<strong>the</strong>r's room.<br />
John found 4 this letter on (148) a chair, in my bro<strong>the</strong>r's room.<br />
I have sent <strong>the</strong> Spanish grammar of Henry to my mo<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
I have sent (f) Henry's Spanish grammar to my mo<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
Charles always studies in our uncle's garden.<br />
Charles always 5 studies (g) in our uncle's garden.<br />
We admire <strong>the</strong> situation of this town.<br />
We admire (h) <strong>the</strong> situation of this town.<br />
I have left William's book on my desk.<br />
I have left (i) William's book on my writing-desk.<br />
Elizabeth will play, I shall sing, <strong>and</strong> Charles will draw .<br />
Elizabeth will play, (j) I (106, b) shall sing, (k) <strong>and</strong> Charles will<br />
draw (l).<br />
EXERCISE X.<br />
I have bought two Italian books, one for Henry, <strong>and</strong> one for<br />
William.<br />
I have bought two Italian (177) books, one (145) for Henry, <strong>and</strong> one<br />
for William.<br />
You were dining , while I was studying.<br />
You (106 b) were dining (179) (a), while I was studying.<br />
Mary will embroider a waistcoat for my fa<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
Mary will embroider (b) a waistcoat for my fa<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
366
The discovery of America caused a revolution in <strong>the</strong> commercial<br />
world.<br />
The discovery of (<strong>the</strong>) America caused (c) (Past Def.) a revolution<br />
in <strong>the</strong> commercial world.<br />
When I entered <strong>the</strong> room he was working .<br />
When I entered (d) 3 <strong>the</strong> room he was working (e).<br />
Did you speak at <strong>the</strong> meeting last night ?<br />
Did you speak (Past Def.) at <strong>the</strong> meeting last night ?<br />
No, I did not speak .<br />
No, I did not (125) speak (Past Def.).<br />
I shall explain this rule this evening.<br />
I shall explain (f) (170) this rule this evening.<br />
I shall have built my house before October .<br />
I shall have built (g) my house before October (74).<br />
Measure <strong>the</strong> length <strong>and</strong> breadth of this room, before buying <strong>the</strong><br />
pianoforte.<br />
Measure (h) (122) <strong>the</strong> length <strong>and</strong> (115) breadth of this room,<br />
before 4 buying <strong>the</strong> pianoforte.<br />
We shall preserve <strong>the</strong>se cherries with in <strong>the</strong> br<strong>and</strong>y.<br />
We shall preserve (i) <strong>the</strong>se cherries with (in <strong>the</strong>) br<strong>and</strong>y.<br />
If I <strong>had</strong> money, I would buy this picture.<br />
If (112) I <strong>had</strong> money, I would buy this picture.<br />
EXERCISE XI<br />
Where did you buy this coffee?<br />
Where did you (120, 122) buy (have you bought) this coffee?<br />
I bought it in London.<br />
I bought it (192, 193) in 1 London.<br />
Does Edward speak Italian ?<br />
Does (128) Edward speak Italian ?<br />
Yes, he does.<br />
Yes, he does.<br />
2 Where did you study <strong>the</strong> French language ?<br />
2 Where did you study (have you studied) <strong>the</strong> French language ?<br />
I studied it in France.<br />
I studied (have studied) it in France.<br />
367
Has Louisa sent today's newspaper to my fa<strong>the</strong>r ?<br />
Has Louisa sent to-day's newspaper to my fa<strong>the</strong>r ?<br />
Yes ; she sent it this morning.<br />
Yes ; she sent (has sent) it this morning.<br />
Charles always speaks to me when he meets me.<br />
Charles always speaks to me (193) when he meets (a) me.<br />
My fa<strong>the</strong>r taught us yesterday, <strong>and</strong> will teach us today.<br />
My fa<strong>the</strong>r taught (b) us yesterday, <strong>and</strong> will teach us to-day.<br />
My mo<strong>the</strong>r never sends us here.<br />
My mo<strong>the</strong>r never (non. . . mai, 181) sends us (193) here.<br />
I shall not speak to him today.<br />
I shall not speak to him (193) to-day.<br />
Have you bought any sugar ?<br />
Have you bought any sugar ?<br />
Yes, I have .<br />
Yes, I have (138, 208).<br />
George has made me a present of some Italian books.<br />
George has made me (193) a present of (c) some Italian books.<br />
If <strong>the</strong>y <strong>had</strong> any money, <strong>the</strong>y would send to him some tea <strong>and</strong> ,<br />
bread.<br />
If (112) <strong>the</strong>y <strong>had</strong> any (133) money, <strong>the</strong>y would send (to) him some<br />
tea <strong>and</strong> (136), bread.<br />
EXERCISE XII.<br />
I condemned him, <strong>and</strong> I pardoned my bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
I condemned (a) (Past Def.) him, <strong>and</strong> I pardoned (b) my (129)<br />
bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
Paul always speaks of himself .<br />
Paul always (181) speaks of himself (212).<br />
Charlotte spoke to me , but she did not speak to my sisters.<br />
Charlotte (113) spoke to me (210), but she did not speak to my<br />
(130) sisters.<br />
I speak to you ; why do you not answer ?<br />
I speak to you (210) ; why do (128) you not answer ?<br />
You never pay attention to me.<br />
You never pay attention (c) to me.<br />
368
He always speaks of me, but I never speak of him.<br />
He always speaks of me, but I never speak of him.<br />
They sent a reading desk to me , <strong>and</strong> a marble statue to my<br />
master.<br />
They sent (Past Def.) a reading-desk to me (210), <strong>and</strong> a marble<br />
statue to my (146) master.<br />
Stephen will speak for me.<br />
Stephen will speak for me.<br />
They built him a marble palace.<br />
They built him (213) a marble palace.<br />
Madeline has sent a gold ring to William, <strong>and</strong> a small watercolor<br />
to my sister-in-law.<br />
Madeline has sent a gold ring to William, <strong>and</strong> a small water-<br />
colour to my sister-in-law.<br />
She sent also a beautiful lookingglass to my sister.<br />
She sent (180) also a beautiful looking-glass to my sister.<br />
I shall place <strong>the</strong> picture before her.<br />
I shall place (d) <strong>the</strong> picture before her.<br />
3<br />
3<br />
EXERCISE XIII.<br />
Speak to me now, because I shall not have time tomorrow.<br />
Speak to me (201) now, because I shall not have time to-morrow.<br />
He was speaking to his master when you called him.<br />
He was speaking (179) to his master (146) when you called (a)<br />
(Past Def.) him.<br />
When will you send her <strong>the</strong> pictures ?<br />
When will you send her (192, 193) <strong>the</strong> pictures ?<br />
I will send <strong>the</strong>m to her this evening.<br />
I will send <strong>the</strong>m to her (219, 220) this evening.<br />
Do not forget .<br />
Do not forget(b) (125, 126).<br />
Will you help me, my dear friend ?<br />
Will 1 you help (c) me, (192) my dear friend ?<br />
Yes, willingly, I will not ab<strong>and</strong>on you in this danger.<br />
369
Yes, willingly, I will not ab<strong>and</strong>on (d) you in this danger.<br />
Will you lend me your penknife ?<br />
Will (224) you lend (e) me your penknife ?<br />
Yes, I will .<br />
Yes, I will (208).<br />
Shall you send him a present for his birthday ?<br />
Shall you send him a present for his birthday ?<br />
Yes, I shall send him an album.<br />
Yes, I shall send him an album.<br />
I have brought <strong>the</strong> books of Henry to show <strong>the</strong>m to you .<br />
I have brought (f) Henry's books to 2 show (g) <strong>the</strong>m to you (122,<br />
218).<br />
They ordered him to speak to <strong>the</strong> people.<br />
They ordered (h) him to (226) speak to <strong>the</strong> people.<br />
EXERCISE XIV.<br />
I have brought my exercise to show it to you ; you will find few<br />
faults in it .<br />
I have brought my exercise to (225) show it to you (122, 218) ; you<br />
will find few (139) faults in it (238).<br />
Henry has brought us a basket of roses.<br />
Henry has brought (167) us (192, 193) a basket of roses.<br />
I should not have spoken to her, if I <strong>had</strong> thought of it .<br />
I should not have spoken to her, if I <strong>had</strong> thought (a) of 2 it (238).<br />
Before speaking to us, speak to my fa<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
Before speaking to us, (210) speak to my fa<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
He was speaking to us, when <strong>the</strong>y called him into <strong>the</strong> garden.<br />
He was speaking to us, (179, 192, 193) when <strong>the</strong>y called (Past<br />
Def.) him into <strong>the</strong> garden.<br />
Have you an English watch ?<br />
Have you an English watch ?<br />
Yes, I have .<br />
Yes, I have (144).<br />
If I <strong>had</strong> thought of it, I should never have lent him my pencilcase.<br />
If I <strong>had</strong> thought of it, I should never have lent him my pencil-<br />
case.<br />
370
When will you take <strong>the</strong>se letters to <strong>the</strong> post ?<br />
When will you take (b) <strong>the</strong>se letters (89) to <strong>the</strong> post ?<br />
I will take <strong>the</strong>m at once, if you will lend me your umbrella.<br />
I will take <strong>the</strong>m (<strong>the</strong>re) (239, 243) at once, if you will (224) lend<br />
me your umbrella.<br />
Have you spoken to William ?<br />
Have you spoken to William ?<br />
No, I have not, but I will speak to him when I have time.<br />
No, I have not, (208) but I will speak to him when 4 I have time.<br />
Why did you burn that letter?<br />
Why did (128) you burn (c) (Past Indef.) that (152) letter?<br />
I burnt it by mistake.<br />
I burnt it (167) by 4 mistake.<br />
Have you paid for your parasol ?<br />
Have you paid (d) for 5 your parasol ?<br />
No, but I will pay for it when Henry returns .<br />
No, but I will pay for it when Henry returns (e).<br />
EXERCISE XV.<br />
I receive letters from Mr. James.<br />
I receive (a) letters from Mr. 1 James.<br />
The soldiers have received <strong>the</strong> order of <strong>the</strong> general.<br />
The soldiers have received <strong>the</strong> general's order.<br />
My sister enjoys good health in this country.<br />
My sister enjoys (b) good health in this country.<br />
He groans at <strong>the</strong> sight of <strong>the</strong> doctor.<br />
He groans (c) at <strong>the</strong> sight of <strong>the</strong> doctor.<br />
Receive this gift as a mark of my confidence.<br />
Receive (122) this gift as a mark of my confidence.<br />
Believe me, general, we shall beat <strong>the</strong>m .<br />
Believe me, (201, 122) general, 2 we shall beat (d) <strong>the</strong>m (236).<br />
Who is knocking at <strong>the</strong> door?<br />
Who (chi) is knocking at (e) (179) <strong>the</strong> door?<br />
Charles; he has already knocked twice, <strong>and</strong> rang <strong>the</strong> bell.<br />
Charles; he has already knocked twice, <strong>and</strong> rang (f) <strong>the</strong> bell.<br />
The cannon beat down <strong>the</strong> fortress.<br />
371
The cannon beat down (g) (180) <strong>the</strong> fortress.<br />
I have received a letter from my fa<strong>the</strong>r ; he thinks that he will be<br />
in London before Christmas.<br />
I have received a letter from my fa<strong>the</strong>r ; he thinks (h) (che) that<br />
he will be in London before Christmas.<br />
I have sold my country house to Mr. John.<br />
I have sold (i) my (131) country-house to Mr. John.<br />
Yesterday he lost his umbrella in <strong>the</strong> crowd.<br />
Yesterday he lost (j) his umbrella in <strong>the</strong> crowd.<br />
We have resolved to yield to him .<br />
We have resolved (k) to yield (l) to him (198).<br />
EXERCISE XVI.<br />
What does this woman sell ?<br />
What does (128) this woman sell ?<br />
She sells , fruit <strong>and</strong> flowers ; yesterday she sold me some<br />
beautiful roses, <strong>and</strong> some good strawberries.<br />
She sells (134-137), fruit (fruits) <strong>and</strong> flowers ; yesterday she sold<br />
me some beautiful roses, <strong>and</strong> some good strawberries.<br />
Who will succeed him in <strong>the</strong> business ?<br />
Who will succeed 2 him (192, 193) in <strong>the</strong> business ?<br />
3 I think his bro<strong>the</strong>r Edward will succeed him.<br />
3 I think (I believe) 4 his bro<strong>the</strong>r Edward will succeed him.<br />
He <strong>and</strong> his sister have left London, <strong>and</strong> are enjoying <strong>the</strong> beauty of<br />
<strong>the</strong> country, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> freshness of <strong>the</strong> air.<br />
He <strong>and</strong> his sister have left London, <strong>and</strong> are enjoying <strong>the</strong> beauty of<br />
<strong>the</strong> country, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> freshness of <strong>the</strong> air.<br />
She shudders at <strong>the</strong> thought of meeting him.<br />
She shudders (a) at <strong>the</strong> thought of meeting (b) (184, 198) him.<br />
Do you believe <strong>the</strong> news he told us ?<br />
Do you believe <strong>the</strong> news (260) he told us ? (c)<br />
No, I do not believe it .<br />
No, I do not believe it (193).<br />
It does not depend upon my sister.<br />
It does not depend upon (d) my sister.<br />
The French fought with bravery, within <strong>the</strong> entrenchments.<br />
372
The French fought (e) bravely, within <strong>the</strong> (102) entrenchments.<br />
The goats browse quietly on <strong>the</strong> mountains in spite of <strong>the</strong> turmoil<br />
of men .<br />
The goats browse (f) quietly on <strong>the</strong> mountains in spite of <strong>the</strong><br />
turmoil of (<strong>the</strong>) men (uomini).<br />
I shall never forget <strong>the</strong> happy days we have enjoyed toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
I shall never forget (g) <strong>the</strong> happy days (260) we have enjoyed (167)<br />
toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
Everything will depend upon <strong>the</strong> success of <strong>the</strong> <strong>under</strong>taking.<br />
Everything will depend upon <strong>the</strong> success of <strong>the</strong> <strong>under</strong>taking.<br />
Shall I pour you out a glass of wine, Mr. John ?<br />
Shall I pour you out (to pour out) (h) a glass of wine, Mr. John ?<br />
Yes, if you please.<br />
Yes, if you please.<br />
EXERCISE XVII.<br />
They punish him too severely.<br />
They punish (a) him (192, 193) too severely.<br />
He has enriched science with new discoveries.<br />
He has enriched (b) (<strong>the</strong>) science with 1 new discoveries.<br />
Does this boy <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> Italian ?<br />
Does this boy <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> (c) Italian ?<br />
Yes he <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong>s it but he d oes not speak it.<br />
Yes he <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong>s it (192, 193) but he does not speak it.<br />
Will you have finished before tomorrow ?<br />
Will you have finished before to-morrow ?<br />
Probably I shall .<br />
Probably I shall (208).<br />
I shall finish this exercise before going to school.<br />
I shall finish this exercise before (184) going to school.<br />
He always fulfils his duty.<br />
He always (181) fulfils (d) his duty.<br />
They will never betray us.<br />
They will never betray (e) us.<br />
He will inform my family of my conduct.<br />
He will inform (f) my family of my conduct.<br />
373
Yesterday my sister was sewing from morning to night.<br />
Yesterday my sister was sewing (g) (Past Def.) from (<strong>the</strong>) morning<br />
to (<strong>the</strong>) night.<br />
The singing of <strong>the</strong> birds, <strong>the</strong> murmuring of <strong>the</strong> springs, <strong>the</strong><br />
fragrance of <strong>the</strong> flowers contribute to <strong>the</strong> pleasures of <strong>the</strong> mind.<br />
The singing 2 of <strong>the</strong> birds, <strong>the</strong> murmuring (h) of <strong>the</strong> springs, <strong>the</strong><br />
fragrance of <strong>the</strong> flowers contribute (i) to <strong>the</strong> pleasures of <strong>the</strong><br />
mind.<br />
He will obey <strong>the</strong> laws of this country.<br />
He will obey (j) <strong>the</strong> laws of this country.<br />
We shall start for <strong>the</strong> country on Thursday.<br />
We shall start (k) for <strong>the</strong> country on (147, 74) Thursday.<br />
EXERCISE XVIII.<br />
She is loved <strong>and</strong> esteemed by everybody.<br />
She is loved (a) 1 <strong>and</strong> esteemed (b) by 2 everybody.<br />
The city of Rome has been sacked several times.<br />
The city of Rome has been sacked (c) several times.<br />
Have you been invited to <strong>the</strong> ball ?<br />
Have you (122) been invited (d) to <strong>the</strong> ball ?<br />
No, but I expect an invitation.<br />
No, but I expect (e) an invitation.<br />
His son <strong>and</strong> his bro<strong>the</strong>r were wounded in <strong>the</strong> battle.<br />
His son <strong>and</strong> his bro<strong>the</strong>r were wounded (f) (Past Definite, passive<br />
form) in <strong>the</strong> battle.<br />
Margaret would have been blamed by my mo<strong>the</strong>r, if she <strong>had</strong><br />
spoken.<br />
Margaret would have been blamed by my mo<strong>the</strong>r, if (112) she <strong>had</strong><br />
spoken.<br />
Will <strong>the</strong>se ladies be presented to <strong>the</strong> Queen by <strong>the</strong> Prince ?<br />
Will <strong>the</strong>se ladies be presented (g) (269) to <strong>the</strong> Queen by <strong>the</strong> Prince<br />
?<br />
I believe <strong>the</strong>y will.<br />
I believe <strong>the</strong>y will.<br />
3 We should be despised if we ab<strong>and</strong>oned him in this danger.<br />
3 We should be despised (h) if we ab<strong>and</strong>oned him (192, 193) in<br />
this danger.<br />
374
EXERCISE XIX.<br />
We have traveled much.<br />
We have travelled (a) (274, 273) much.<br />
I have passed over <strong>the</strong> bridge with my bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
I have passed (276) over <strong>the</strong> bridge with my bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
It was a beautiful sight in <strong>the</strong> park, <strong>the</strong> sheep were browsing, <strong>the</strong><br />
goats were skipping about, <strong>the</strong> birds were warbling, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
children were playing .<br />
It was a beautiful sight in <strong>the</strong> park, <strong>the</strong> sheep were browsing, (b)<br />
(179) <strong>the</strong> goats were skipping about, (c) <strong>the</strong> birds were warbling,<br />
(d) <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> children were playing (e).<br />
This institution has been established <strong>the</strong>se five years.<br />
This institution has been established (f) 1 <strong>the</strong>se five years.<br />
Has your sister arrived ? .<br />
Has your sister arrived ? (275).<br />
Yes, she has .<br />
Yes, she has (208).<br />
He escaped from his prison by jumping from a window.<br />
He escaped (180, 276) from his prison by 2 jumping (g) from a<br />
window.<br />
He slept while we were working .<br />
He slept (274) whilst we were working (Past Indef.).<br />
We lived three years in America, <strong>and</strong> received much kindness<br />
from <strong>the</strong> Americans.<br />
We lived (h) (180) three years in America, <strong>and</strong> received much<br />
kindness from <strong>the</strong> Americans.<br />
Do not travel this winter.<br />
Do not (126, 122) travel this winter.<br />
EXERCISE XX.<br />
I presented myself to <strong>the</strong> assembly.<br />
I presented myself (a) to <strong>the</strong> (103) assembly.<br />
He was arming himself for <strong>the</strong> battle.<br />
He was arming himself (b) for <strong>the</strong> battle.<br />
Elizabeth praises herself too much.<br />
Elizabeth praises herself too much.<br />
375
These two men always praise one ano<strong>the</strong>r .<br />
These two men always praise one ano<strong>the</strong>r (281).<br />
The king surrounded himself with soldiers.<br />
The king surrounded himself (c) (Past Def. ) with (266) soldiers.<br />
She sang two Spanish songs, accompanying herself (d) with <strong>the</strong><br />
guitar.<br />
She sang two Spanish (177, 74) songs, accompanying herself (d)<br />
with <strong>the</strong> guitar.<br />
Are <strong>the</strong> children dressing <strong>the</strong>mselves ?<br />
Are <strong>the</strong> children dressing <strong>the</strong>mselves ? (e) (244).<br />
No, <strong>the</strong>y are not .<br />
No, <strong>the</strong>y are not (208).<br />
When I entered <strong>the</strong> room, <strong>the</strong>y were busying <strong>the</strong>mselves (f) with<br />
<strong>the</strong> preparations for <strong>the</strong> election.<br />
When I entered (183) <strong>the</strong> room, <strong>the</strong>y were busying <strong>the</strong>mselves (f)<br />
with <strong>the</strong> preparations for <strong>the</strong> election.<br />
He has enriched himself at my expense.<br />
He has (280) enriched himself (g) at my expense.<br />
They praise <strong>the</strong>mselves too much.<br />
They praise <strong>the</strong>mselves too much.<br />
EXERCISE XXI.<br />
I rise every morning at six o'clock.<br />
I rise every morning at six o'clock.<br />
Do you remember Charles' birthday ?<br />
Do you remember Charles' birthday ?<br />
Yes, I do .<br />
Yes, I do (208).<br />
They embarked in an English ship.<br />
They embarked (Past Def.) in an English ship.<br />
I shall remember to bring my mo<strong>the</strong>r's umbrella.<br />
I shall remember to bring my mo<strong>the</strong>r's umbrella.<br />
He has not repented of his imprudence.<br />
He has not repented of his imprudence.<br />
Children, make haste, we shall start at noon.<br />
Children, make haste, we shall start (partire) at noon.<br />
376
She does not feel well today.<br />
She does not feel well to-day.<br />
EXERCISE XXII.<br />
I must sell my horse before Saturday.<br />
I must (a) (287) sell (b) my horse before Saturday.<br />
What do you want ?<br />
What (che cosa, mas.) do you (122, 193) want (c) ?<br />
I want some Italian books.<br />
I want some Italian books.<br />
How <strong>many</strong> do you want ? .<br />
How <strong>many</strong> do you want (of <strong>the</strong>m) ? (240).<br />
I want three ; Alfieri's tragedies, Goldoni's comedies, <strong>and</strong> a good<br />
Italian novel.<br />
I want three (of <strong>the</strong>m) ; Alfieri's tragedies, Goldoni's comedies,<br />
<strong>and</strong> a good Italian novel.<br />
It is not necessary to be very wise to guess his motive.<br />
It is not necessary (c) to be very wise to (225) guess (d) his motive.<br />
How do you like this palace ?<br />
How do you like (e) (289) this palace ?<br />
I do not like it much.<br />
I do not like it much.<br />
It is not enough to speak correctly, it is also necessary to speak<br />
prudently.<br />
It is not enough (f) to speak correctly, it is also necessary (a) to<br />
speak prudently.<br />
It appears that you have not attended to <strong>the</strong> business .<br />
It appears (g) that you have not attended (h) to <strong>the</strong> business (259).<br />
No, not yet.<br />
No, not yet.<br />
I have at heart your success.<br />
I have at heart (i) your success.<br />
EXERCISE XXIII.<br />
Does it rain now?<br />
Does it (284) rain now?<br />
No, it does not .<br />
377
No, it does not (208).<br />
It has been raining during <strong>the</strong> night.<br />
It has been raining during <strong>the</strong> night.<br />
The wind blows .<br />
The wind blows (a).<br />
In my country it never snows.<br />
In my country it never (181) snows.<br />
The th<strong>under</strong> re-echoed awfully.<br />
The th<strong>under</strong> re-echoed (b) awfully.<br />
The lake is frozen.<br />
The lake is frozen.<br />
The peasants will sell <strong>the</strong> ice in <strong>the</strong> town.<br />
The peasants will sell <strong>the</strong> ice in <strong>the</strong> town.<br />
If I <strong>had</strong> skates I would skate .<br />
If (112) I <strong>had</strong> skates I would skate (c).<br />
It is getting dark, we must return to <strong>the</strong> castle.<br />
It is getting dark, we must (285, 288) return to <strong>the</strong> castle.<br />
What has happened ?<br />
What (che cosa, mas.) has happened (d) ?<br />
Nothing extraordinary ; it snows, that is all.<br />
Nothing (of) extraordinary ; it snows, that is all.<br />
Has anything happened to George ?<br />
Has anything (qualche cosa, mas.) happened (d) to George ?<br />
Nothing ; he is in <strong>the</strong> garden playing with William.<br />
Nothing ; he is in <strong>the</strong> garden playing 1 with William.<br />
EXERCISE XXIV.<br />
Where is <strong>the</strong> servant ?<br />
Where is <strong>the</strong> servant ?<br />
She is in <strong>the</strong> parlor lighting <strong>the</strong> fire.<br />
She is in <strong>the</strong> parlour lighting (292) <strong>the</strong> fire.<br />
Yesterday morning I lit my lamp at six o'clock.<br />
Yesterday morning I lit my (131) lamp at six o'clock.<br />
Your uncle received me well .<br />
Your uncle received me well (Past Def.).<br />
378
What reason did he allege ?<br />
What (che) reason did he allege ? (has he alleged ?)<br />
He did not allege any reason.<br />
He did not allege any reason.<br />
He seldom fulfils his duty.<br />
He seldom fulfils his duty.<br />
But still he will adduce good excuses.<br />
But still he will adduce good excuses.<br />
EXERCISE XXV.<br />
Where are you going ?<br />
Where are you (122) going (179) ?<br />
I am going to Paris.<br />
I am going to Paris.<br />
Do not go now; wait until <strong>the</strong> autumn <strong>and</strong> we will go toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
Do not (126, 122) go now; wait until <strong>the</strong> autumn <strong>and</strong> we will go<br />
(<strong>the</strong>re) (239) toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
We went <strong>the</strong>re last year.<br />
We went <strong>the</strong>re last year.<br />
If you went <strong>the</strong>re now you would meet my fa<strong>the</strong>r-in-law.<br />
If (112) you went <strong>the</strong>re (239) now you would meet my fa<strong>the</strong>r-in-<br />
law.<br />
This dog belongs to my bro<strong>the</strong>r-in-law.<br />
This dog belongs to my bro<strong>the</strong>r-in-law.<br />
The door is open .<br />
The door is open (269).<br />
They pride <strong>the</strong>mselves on <strong>the</strong>ir wit, <strong>and</strong> learning.<br />
They pride <strong>the</strong>mselves on <strong>the</strong>ir wit, 1 <strong>and</strong> (on <strong>the</strong>ir) learning.<br />
EXERCISE XXVI.<br />
I always drink coffee in <strong>the</strong> morning <strong>and</strong> tea in <strong>the</strong> evening.<br />
I always drink coffee in <strong>the</strong> morning <strong>and</strong> tea in <strong>the</strong> evening.<br />
What do <strong>the</strong> Italians drink?<br />
What do <strong>the</strong> Italians drink?<br />
They drink wine.<br />
They drink wine.<br />
If I <strong>had</strong> money I should always drink good wine.<br />
379
If (112) I <strong>had</strong> money I should always drink good wine.<br />
Henry has fallen from <strong>the</strong> chair.<br />
Henry has fallen from <strong>the</strong> chair.<br />
Who has shut <strong>the</strong> door?<br />
Who (chi) has shut <strong>the</strong> door?<br />
I ; I shut it because all <strong>the</strong> windows are open .<br />
I ; I shut it (180, 193) because all <strong>the</strong> windows are open (269).<br />
Where is Charles ?<br />
Where is Charles ?<br />
He is in <strong>the</strong> garden ga<strong>the</strong>ring flowers for his sister.<br />
He is in <strong>the</strong> garden ga<strong>the</strong>ring (292) flowers for his sister.<br />
When I entered <strong>the</strong> room <strong>the</strong>y were composing a letter.<br />
When I entered (183) <strong>the</strong> room <strong>the</strong>y were composing a letter.<br />
I have just composed an Italian song.<br />
I have just 1 composed an Italian song.<br />
Ga<strong>the</strong>r some flowers for me .<br />
Ga<strong>the</strong>r (122) some flowers for me (213).<br />
EXERCISE XXVII.<br />
I conducted <strong>the</strong>m into <strong>the</strong> house.<br />
I conducted (Past Def.) <strong>the</strong>m (mas. 193) into <strong>the</strong> (102) house.<br />
I do not know my uncle's friend.<br />
I do not know my uncle's friend.<br />
If I knew that lady, I would speak to her .<br />
If (112) I knew that lady, I would speak to her (193).<br />
The castle contains <strong>many</strong> good pictures.<br />
The castle contains <strong>many</strong> good pictures.<br />
I always cover <strong>the</strong> bird's cage <strong>the</strong> evening.<br />
I always cover <strong>the</strong> bird's cage (in) <strong>the</strong> evening.<br />
I corrected his exercises yesterday, <strong>and</strong> I shall correct George's<br />
exercises tomorrow morning.<br />
I corrected (Past Def.) his exercises yesterday, <strong>and</strong> I shall correct<br />
George's exercises to-morrow morning.<br />
When I met him he was running towards <strong>the</strong> church.<br />
When I met (Past Def.) him he was running (179) towards <strong>the</strong><br />
church.<br />
380
Why did you give him your dictionary ?<br />
Why did you give him (why have you given him) (193, 122) your<br />
dictionary ?<br />
I gave it him because he asked me for it .<br />
I gave (Past Def.) it (to) him (219) because he asked (dom<strong>and</strong>are a)<br />
me for it (218, 251).<br />
Give him a watch.<br />
Give him (201) a watch.<br />
I desire to take him to school.<br />
I desire to take (condurre) him 3 to school.<br />
EXERCISE XXVIII.<br />
I have decided to travel during <strong>the</strong> winter.<br />
I have decided to travel during <strong>the</strong> winter.<br />
They defended me bravely.<br />
They defended (Past Def.) me bravely.<br />
He described <strong>the</strong> town correctly.<br />
He described (Past Def.) <strong>the</strong> town correctly.<br />
He desired me to paint him a picture.<br />
He desired 2 (Past Def.) me to paint (for) him (213) a picture.<br />
She always tells <strong>the</strong> truth, <strong>and</strong> yet nobody believes her .<br />
She always tells <strong>the</strong> truth, <strong>and</strong> yet nobody believes (to) her (193).<br />
I will tell it to him again this evening.<br />
I will tell it to him (219) again this evening.<br />
If I told her what you have said, she would get cross .<br />
If I told her what you have said, she would get cross (adirarsi).<br />
He disposes of his money wisely.<br />
He disposes of his money wisely.<br />
Frederick became rich in three years.<br />
Frederick became (Past Def.) rich in three years.<br />
Divide <strong>the</strong>se strawberries between you <strong>and</strong> Elizabeth.<br />
Divide <strong>the</strong>se strawberries between you <strong>and</strong> Elizabeth.<br />
EXERCISE XXIX.<br />
James complains of your conduct.<br />
James complains of your conduct.<br />
381
I am obliged to go to Paris to buy some presents for my cousin<br />
Margaret.<br />
I am obliged to go to Paris to buy some presents for my cousin<br />
Margaret.<br />
We owe him some money for <strong>the</strong> house he built for us .<br />
We owe (to) him some money for <strong>the</strong> house he built for us (213).<br />
If I were obliged to speak before this crowd of people, it would<br />
displease me very much.<br />
If (112) I were obliged to (226) speak before this crowd of people, it<br />
would displease me very much.<br />
What are you doing now, Louisa ?<br />
What (che cosa) are you doing (179) now, Louisa ?<br />
I am making a bonnet for Charlotte.<br />
I am making a bonnet for Charlotte.<br />
Yesterday I made a waistcoat for Frederick.<br />
Yesterday I made a waistcoat for Frederick.<br />
I shall induce Charles to go to Scotl<strong>and</strong>.<br />
I shall induce Charles to go to Scotl<strong>and</strong>.<br />
EXERCISE XXX.<br />
Has your bro<strong>the</strong>r read " La Gerusalemme Liberata ?<br />
Has your bro<strong>the</strong>r read " La Gerusalemme Liberata ?<br />
" Yes, he has ; <strong>and</strong> he is now reading " L' Orl<strong>and</strong>o Furioso."<br />
" Yes, he has (208) ; <strong>and</strong> he is now reading (179) " L' Orl<strong>and</strong>o<br />
Furioso".<br />
" Do not read satires, you will learn little from <strong>the</strong>m .<br />
" Do not read satires, you will learn little from (in) <strong>the</strong>m (238).<br />
Louisa always puts her books on my table.<br />
Louisa always (181) puts her books on my table.<br />
Here is <strong>the</strong> picture ; put a frame to it .<br />
Here is <strong>the</strong> picture ; put a frame to it (238).<br />
Charles was born in Engl<strong>and</strong>.<br />
Charles was born in Engl<strong>and</strong>.<br />
Dante was born in Florence in <strong>the</strong> year 1265.<br />
Dante was born 4 in Florence in <strong>the</strong> (103) year 1265.<br />
Do not offend Henry ; he will not pardon you.<br />
382
Do not offend Henry ; he will not pardon you.<br />
I oppose his election because he d oes not love his native l<strong>and</strong>.<br />
I oppose his election because he does not love his native l<strong>and</strong>.<br />
EXERCISE XXXI.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r always obtains what he desires .<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r always obtains what (ciò che) he desires (300).<br />
EXERCISE XXXII.<br />
Do you not remember that you promised to give me your dog ?<br />
Do you not remember that you promised (180) to give me (198)<br />
your (131) dog ?<br />
Yes, <strong>and</strong> I will give it to you on Saturday.<br />
Yes, <strong>and</strong> I will give it to you (218-220) on (147) Saturday.<br />
Man proposes, God disposes.<br />
Man proposes, God disposes.<br />
We shall protect him against all his enemies.<br />
We shall protect him (193) against all his enemies.<br />
I shall restore to him <strong>the</strong> paint brushes he lent me last week.<br />
I shall restore to him <strong>the</strong> paint-brushes (260) he lent (Past Def.)<br />
(to) me last week.<br />
In spite of his disguise she recognized him at once.<br />
In spite of his disguise she recognised (Past Def.) him at once.<br />
His extravagance will soon reduce him to poverty.<br />
His extravagance will soon reduce him to (<strong>the</strong>) poverty.<br />
Why did you remain behind yesterday ?<br />
Why did you remain (Past Def.) behind yesterday ?<br />
I remained behind to see if I could induce Frederick to go with us.<br />
I remained behind to (225) see if I could induce Frederick to go<br />
(305) with us.<br />
He answered very prudently.<br />
He answered (Past Def.) very prudently.<br />
EXERCISE XXXIII.<br />
Well, have you succeeded in your <strong>under</strong>taking ?<br />
Well, have you succeeded (258) in your <strong>under</strong>taking ?<br />
No ; I shall never succeed.<br />
383
No ; I shall never succeed.<br />
I ascend <strong>the</strong> hill every morning.<br />
I ascend <strong>the</strong> hill every morning.<br />
It is necessary to start at once.<br />
It is necessary (bisognare)4 to start at once.<br />
If I knew Mr. John's address, I would write him a letter.<br />
If I knew Mr. John's address, I would write (to) him a letter.<br />
Can he read ?<br />
Can 5 he read ?<br />
Yes, he can read <strong>and</strong> write very well.<br />
Yes, he can read <strong>and</strong> write very well.<br />
Why have you chosen this color ?<br />
Why have you chosen this colour ?<br />
I chose it because it is in fashion.<br />
I chose (180) it because it is in fashion.<br />
I would write to him every day, if I <strong>had</strong> time.<br />
I would write to him every day, if (i 12) I <strong>had</strong> time.<br />
Have you written to <strong>the</strong> girl's uncle ?<br />
Have you written to <strong>the</strong> girl's uncle ?<br />
Yes, I wrote to him yesterday.<br />
Yes, I wrote (Past Def.) to him yesterday.<br />
EXERCISE XXXIV.<br />
My fa<strong>the</strong>r is accustomed to get up every morning at six o'clock.<br />
My fa<strong>the</strong>r is accustomed (307) to get up (alzarsi) every morning at<br />
six o'clock.<br />
My uncle spent too much money in building his house.<br />
My uncle spent (Past Def.) too much money in (278) building his<br />
house.<br />
What is <strong>the</strong> name of that lady ?<br />
What is <strong>the</strong> name of 2 that lady ?<br />
I do not know ; but I believe she is called Mrs. James.<br />
I do not know ; but I believe she is called Mrs. James.<br />
You would have succeeded in your <strong>under</strong>taking, but you have to<br />
deal with a rascal, who cheats everybody.<br />
384
You would have succeeded (258) in your <strong>under</strong>taking, but you<br />
have to deal with 3 a rascal, who cheats (ingannare) everybody.<br />
EXERCISE XXXV.<br />
Good morning, sir, how do you do ?<br />
Good morning, sir, how do you do (120) ?<br />
I am very well today, thank you .<br />
I am very well to-day, thank (ringraziare) you (122, 193).<br />
Where do you live now ?<br />
Where do you live (stare) now ?<br />
I live in <strong>the</strong> country ; in a small village near Brighton.<br />
I live in <strong>the</strong> country ; in a small village near Brighton.<br />
Have you been to Paris ?<br />
Have you been (149) to Paris ?<br />
No, I have not been <strong>the</strong>re .<br />
No, I have not been <strong>the</strong>re (239).<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r is translating " La Divina Commedia," in blank verse.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r is translating " La Divina Commedia," in blank verse.<br />
Yesterday he translated two cantos (of it) .<br />
Yesterday he translated (Past Def. ) two cantos (of it) (240).<br />
If I <strong>had</strong> friends in this neighbourhood, I would remain here for 3 a<br />
week.<br />
If I <strong>had</strong> friends in this neighbourhood, I would remain here (239)<br />
for 3 a week.<br />
EXERCISE XXXVI.<br />
I hear William's voice ; d o you ? (do you hear it ?)<br />
I hear William's voice ; do you ? (do you hear it ?)<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r is gone out ; I d o not know when he will return.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r is gone out ; I do not know when he will return.<br />
William will go out with me on Saturday morning.<br />
William will go out with me on (147) Saturday morning.<br />
I go out every morning before breakfast.<br />
I go out every morning before (to make) breakfast.<br />
Do not go out, Henry ; your fa<strong>the</strong>r-in-law wishes to speak to you.<br />
Do not go out, (122, 126) Henry ; your fa<strong>the</strong>r-in-law wishes (300)<br />
to speak to you.<br />
385
Frederick has got <strong>the</strong> book, but he will not give it to me.<br />
Frederick has got <strong>the</strong> book, but he will (volere) not give it to me.<br />
3 Do you know Mrs.. James ?<br />
3 Do you know Mrs. James ?<br />
I know her only by sight ; her house is a mile from this village.<br />
I know her only by sight ; her house is 4 a mile from this village.<br />
I heard him singing Italian songs.<br />
I heard him 5 singing Italian songs.<br />
He knows <strong>many</strong> of <strong>the</strong>m by heart.<br />
He knows <strong>many</strong> of <strong>the</strong>m (240) by heart.<br />
How much is this ring worth ?<br />
How much is this ring worth ?<br />
I could not tell you.<br />
I could 6 not tell you.<br />
One must have much money, to buy good rings.<br />
One must have 7 much money, to (225) buy good rings.<br />
Your bro<strong>the</strong>r always comes to see me when he is in London.<br />
Your bro<strong>the</strong>r always comes to see me when he is in London.<br />
If you <strong>had</strong> gone out <strong>the</strong>n, you would have seen <strong>the</strong> review.<br />
If you <strong>had</strong> gone out <strong>the</strong>n, you would have seen <strong>the</strong> review.<br />
He would not give me his advice.<br />
He would (224) not give me his advice.<br />
I like to hear him translating.<br />
I like to hear him translating.<br />
EXERCISE XXXVII.<br />
Necessity is <strong>the</strong> mo<strong>the</strong>r of invention.<br />
Necessity (328) is <strong>the</strong> mo<strong>the</strong>r of invention.<br />
Flowers are very dear this season of <strong>the</strong> year.<br />
Flowers (328) are very dear (in) this season of <strong>the</strong> year.<br />
The Alps separate France from Italy.<br />
The Alps separate France (330) from Italy.<br />
Drawing owes its origin to chance, sculpture to religion, <strong>and</strong><br />
painting to <strong>the</strong> progress of <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r arts.<br />
Drawing (328) owes its origin to chance, sculpture to religion, <strong>and</strong><br />
painting to <strong>the</strong> progress of <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r arts.<br />
386
Fear <strong>and</strong> ignorance are <strong>the</strong> sources of superstition.<br />
Fear <strong>and</strong> ignorance are <strong>the</strong> sources of superstition.<br />
The love of music <strong>and</strong> poetry is universal in Italy.<br />
The love of (328) music <strong>and</strong> poetry is universal in Italy.<br />
Captain Bravo wishes to speak to your fa<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
Captain (329) Bravo wishes to speak to your fa<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
Go <strong>and</strong> tell him that my fa<strong>the</strong>r is in France.<br />
Go <strong>and</strong> 1 tell (to) him (198) that my fa<strong>the</strong>r is in (331) France.<br />
Good laws make good men.<br />
Good (328) laws make good men.<br />
EXERCISE XXXVIII.<br />
Glory follows virtue like a s<strong>had</strong>ow.<br />
Glory (328) follows virtue like a s<strong>had</strong>ow.<br />
If your bro<strong>the</strong>r studied with perseverance, he would succeed .<br />
If your bro<strong>the</strong>r studied with (341) perseverance, he would succeed<br />
(258).<br />
Eating, drinking, <strong>and</strong> sleeping are necessary to man.<br />
Eating, (267, 336) drinking, <strong>and</strong> sleeping are necessary to man.<br />
Last year we visited Cairo, <strong>the</strong> capital of Egypt.<br />
Last year we visited (Past Def.) Cairo, (342) <strong>the</strong> capital of Egypt.<br />
His cousin Margaret married William, <strong>the</strong> son of Colonel<br />
Barducci.<br />
His cousin Margaret married William, (342) <strong>the</strong> son of Colonel<br />
Barducci.<br />
This bronze statue was formerly in <strong>the</strong> Municipal Palace of<br />
Modena.<br />
This bronze statue was (Imp. Ind.) formerly in <strong>the</strong> Municipal<br />
Palace of Modena.<br />
I wish to attend a course of lectures <strong>which</strong> he will begin tomorrow<br />
evening.<br />
I wish to attend (assistere a) a course of lectures <strong>which</strong> (che) he<br />
will begin to-morrow evening.<br />
What shall I buy you ?<br />
What shall I buy you (for you) ? (213, 251)<br />
Buy me a box of steel pens , a dozen of quills, a quire of foreign<br />
paper, <strong>and</strong> three sheets of blotting paper.<br />
387
Buy me a box of steel pens (347), a dozen of quills, a quire of (347)<br />
foreign paper, <strong>and</strong> three sheets of blotting-paper.<br />
His apartments were adorned with <strong>the</strong> pictures <strong>which</strong> he <strong>had</strong><br />
himself bought at Padova.<br />
His apartments were adorned (175) with (266) <strong>the</strong> pictures <strong>which</strong><br />
(che) he <strong>had</strong> himself (189) bought at Padova.<br />
The question is to decide whe<strong>the</strong>r we shall meet again tomorrow<br />
or on Wednesday next.<br />
The question is 1 to decide whe<strong>the</strong>r we shall meet again<br />
(radunarsi) to-morrow or on (147, 74) Wednesday next.<br />
The <strong>the</strong>ater was full of strangers <strong>and</strong> foreigners.<br />
The <strong>the</strong>atre was (Imperf. Ind.) full of strangers 2 <strong>and</strong> foreigners.<br />
The hall is full of <strong>the</strong> men who have taken part in <strong>the</strong> strike.<br />
The hall is full (350) of <strong>the</strong> men who have taken part in <strong>the</strong><br />
strike.<br />
It is necessary to start at once.<br />
It is necessary (bisognare) (307) to start at once.<br />
EXERCISE XXXIX.<br />
Michelangelo was .<br />
Michelangelo was (355).<br />
a sculptor, a painter, an architect, <strong>and</strong> a poet of great celebrity.<br />
a sculptor, a painter, an architect, <strong>and</strong> a poet of great celebrity.<br />
When I made his acquaintance he was a banker ; now he is a<br />
poor workman .<br />
When I made his acquaintance he was a banker (354) ; now he is<br />
a poor workman (355).<br />
What are you reading, Henry ?<br />
What are you reading, Henry ?<br />
"I Lombardi alla prima Crociata," a splendid poem, by Tommaso<br />
Grossi.<br />
"I Lombardi alla prima Crociata," a (353) splendid poem, by (of)<br />
Tommaso Grossi.<br />
My fa<strong>the</strong>r is a captain in <strong>the</strong> French army.<br />
My fa<strong>the</strong>r is a captain (354) in <strong>the</strong> French army.<br />
We bought a hundred Turkish carpets for a thous<strong>and</strong> guineas.<br />
388
We bought (180) a hundred (356) Turkish carpets for a thous<strong>and</strong><br />
(356) guineas.<br />
This cloth costs six shillings a yard.<br />
This cloth costs six shillings a (362) yard.<br />
The best coffee comes from Mocha, a town in Arabia.<br />
The best coffee comes from Mocha, a (353) town in (of) Arabia.<br />
I give four shillings a day to my gardener.<br />
I give four shillings a day to my gardener.<br />
What is <strong>the</strong> title of Charles' new book ?<br />
What is <strong>the</strong> title of Charles' new book ?<br />
"A life of Lord Palmerston.<br />
"A (357) life of Lord Palmerston.<br />
" What a beautiful morning! shall we go out for a walk ?<br />
" What a (358) beautiful morning! shall we go out for a walk ?<br />
Yes, as soon as I have written my letters.<br />
Yes, as soon as (249) I have written my letters.<br />
What a beautiful horse! where did you buy it ?<br />
What a beautiful horse! where did you buy it ? (193)<br />
I bought it from Colonel James.<br />
I bought it from Colonel James.<br />
This man works by <strong>the</strong> hour; he earns three shillings an hour.<br />
This man works by <strong>the</strong> hour; 1 he earns three shillings an (362)<br />
hour.<br />
Her fa<strong>the</strong>r knows a great deal ; he earns six hundred guineas a<br />
year.<br />
Her fa<strong>the</strong>r knows 2 a great deal ; he earns six hundred guineas a<br />
year.<br />
Captain Cook was a navigator of great celebrity .<br />
Captain Cook was a navigator of great celebrity (355).<br />
EXERCISE XL.<br />
His Holiness Pope Leo <strong>the</strong> tenth was a son of <strong>the</strong> celebrated<br />
Lorenzo de' Medici.<br />
His Holiness (368) Pope Leo <strong>the</strong> tenth (Leone decimo) was a (353)<br />
son of <strong>the</strong> celebrated 1 Lorenzo de' Medici.<br />
There was a sentry at each door of <strong>the</strong> palace.<br />
389
There was (154) a sentry at each door of <strong>the</strong> palace.<br />
If he does not act with prudence, he will soon become <strong>the</strong> victim<br />
of his companions.<br />
If he does not act (Pres. Ind.) with prudence, he will soon become<br />
<strong>the</strong> victim of his companions.<br />
He has been a widower <strong>the</strong>se four years.<br />
He has (149) been (277) a widower (354) <strong>the</strong>se four years.<br />
Last year I went to Florence with my bro<strong>the</strong>r-in-law <strong>and</strong> my<br />
cousin Margaret.<br />
Last year I went to Florence with my bro<strong>the</strong>r-in-law <strong>and</strong> my<br />
cousin Margaret.<br />
The two sentries were women.<br />
The two sentries 2 were women.<br />
When we go to Italy we meet <strong>many</strong> of our country women.<br />
When we go to (207) Italy we meet (239) <strong>many</strong> of our country<br />
women.<br />
3 She is French <strong>and</strong> he is English ; <strong>the</strong>y are both good singers.<br />
3 She is French <strong>and</strong> he is English ; <strong>the</strong>y are both good singers.<br />
4 The emperor <strong>and</strong> empress were surrounded by princes <strong>and</strong><br />
princesses, baron <strong>and</strong> baronesses.<br />
4 The emperor (374) <strong>and</strong> empress were (Imperf. Ind.) surrounded<br />
by princes (375) <strong>and</strong> princesses, baron <strong>and</strong> baronesses.<br />
EXERCISE XLI.<br />
Chronology <strong>and</strong> geography are <strong>the</strong> eyes of history .<br />
Chronology (328) <strong>and</strong> (337) geography are <strong>the</strong> eyes 2 (411) of<br />
history (328).<br />
Spain produces lemons, oranges, <strong>and</strong> olives in great abundance.<br />
Spain produces lemons, oranges, <strong>and</strong> olives in great abundance.<br />
Poets compare cheeks to roses, eyes to stars, h<strong>and</strong>s to lilies, <strong>and</strong><br />
teeth to pearls.<br />
Poets (328) compare cheeks (392) to roses, eyes to stars, h<strong>and</strong>s<br />
(408) to lilies, <strong>and</strong> teeth to pearls.<br />
One must know ma<strong>the</strong>matics to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong> astronomy<br />
thoroughly.<br />
One must (307) know (364) ma<strong>the</strong>matics 3 (225) to <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong><br />
astronomy thoroughly.<br />
390
I admire <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>aters , fountains, statues, galleries, <strong>and</strong> gardens<br />
of this beautiful city.<br />
I admire <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>atres (408), fountains, statues, galleries, <strong>and</strong><br />
gardens of this beautiful city.<br />
History proves that philosophers have always been preceded by<br />
poets, <strong>and</strong> painters.<br />
History proves that (che) philosophers (328) have always been<br />
preceded by (269, 270) poets, <strong>and</strong> (by <strong>the</strong>) painters.<br />
The rose is <strong>the</strong> queen of flowers, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> emblem of beauty.<br />
The rose is <strong>the</strong> queen of flowers, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> emblem of (328) beauty.<br />
We have visited <strong>the</strong> principal cities of Italy.<br />
We have visited <strong>the</strong> principal cities (396) of Italy.<br />
The earth presents on its surface, heights, hollows, precipices,<br />
volcanos, seas, marshes, rivers, forests, <strong>and</strong> fields.<br />
The earth presents on its surface, heights, (137, 389) hollows,<br />
precipices, (411) volcanoes, seas, marshes, rivers, (402) forests,<br />
<strong>and</strong> fields.<br />
These men are not French ; <strong>the</strong>y are German ; three are sailors ,<br />
<strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>rs are workmen.<br />
These men are not (125) French ; <strong>the</strong>y are German (409) ; three<br />
are sailors (411), <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>rs are workmen.<br />
EXERCISE XLII.<br />
The fruit for dessert is on <strong>the</strong> sideboard.<br />
The fruit (420) for dessert is (are) on <strong>the</strong> side-board.<br />
The Jupiter of Homer was <strong>the</strong> first among <strong>the</strong> gods of mythology.<br />
The Jupiter of Homer was <strong>the</strong> first among <strong>the</strong> gods (88, 423) of<br />
mythology.<br />
The games <strong>and</strong> exercises practised by <strong>the</strong> Greeks, were good for<br />
<strong>the</strong> health of <strong>the</strong> body, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> strength of <strong>the</strong> limbs .<br />
The games (409) <strong>and</strong> exercises practised by <strong>the</strong> Greeks, were<br />
good for <strong>the</strong> health of <strong>the</strong> body, <strong>and</strong> (for) <strong>the</strong> strength of <strong>the</strong> limbs<br />
(420).<br />
I have bought two pairs of boots, one for Mary, <strong>and</strong> one for my<br />
sister Elizabeth.<br />
I have bought two pairs (421) of boots, one for Mary, <strong>and</strong> one for<br />
my sister Elizabeth.<br />
391
A friend has sent me a basket of eggs .<br />
A friend has sent me (193) a basket of eggs (421).<br />
Climate has great influence on <strong>the</strong> character of men.<br />
Climate (328, 397) has great influence on <strong>the</strong> character of (328)<br />
men.<br />
I have corrected your exercises.<br />
I have corrected your exercises.<br />
EXERCISE XLIII.<br />
Do you like my bro<strong>the</strong>r's works ?<br />
Do you (122) like my bro<strong>the</strong>r's works ?<br />
I look upon <strong>the</strong>m as masterpieces .<br />
I look upon <strong>the</strong>m as master-pieces (428).<br />
Give me pen <strong>and</strong> ink , a sheet of writing paper , <strong>and</strong> an envelope.<br />
Give me pen <strong>and</strong> ink (inkst<strong>and</strong>), a sheet of writing paper (431),<br />
<strong>and</strong> an envelope.<br />
I want to write to <strong>the</strong> director of this railway.<br />
I want (volere) (307) to write to <strong>the</strong> director of this railway.<br />
Last night I met William at my bro<strong>the</strong>r's ; he seemed satisfied<br />
with <strong>the</strong> result of his examination.<br />
Last night I met (Past Def.) William at my bro<strong>the</strong>r's ; 1 he seemed<br />
(Imperf. Ind.) satisfied with (266) <strong>the</strong> result of his examination.<br />
How do you like your new house ?<br />
How do you like your new house ?<br />
I do not like it much ; <strong>the</strong> dining room is very dark, <strong>the</strong> bed rooms<br />
are small, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> ground floor is gloomy.<br />
I do not like it much ; <strong>the</strong> dining-room (431) is very dark, <strong>the</strong> bed-<br />
rooms are small, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> ground-floor is gloomy.<br />
Where did you buy this chimney piece ?<br />
Where did you buy (have you bought) this chimney-piece ? (430)<br />
I bought it at Johnstone's.<br />
I bought it (180, 193) at Johnstone's.<br />
1 Where have you been ?<br />
1 Where have you been ? (149, 123)<br />
I have been to market, to buy three cartloads of firewood.<br />
392
I have been to (<strong>the</strong>) market, to buy three cart-loads (420) of<br />
firewood.<br />
Where is <strong>the</strong> pincushion ?<br />
Where is <strong>the</strong> pincushion ?<br />
It is on <strong>the</strong> worktable, near my sister's lea<strong>the</strong>r bag .<br />
It is on <strong>the</strong> worktable, (431) near my sister's lea<strong>the</strong>r bag (430).<br />
We went to America in a steam boat , <strong>and</strong> came back in a sailing<br />
vessel.<br />
We went to (207) America in a steam-boat (432), <strong>and</strong> came back<br />
in a sailing-vessel.<br />
EXERCISE XLIV.<br />
Where did you buy that huge book ?<br />
Where did you buy (have you bought) that (152) huge book ? (437)<br />
I bought it at Hachette's .<br />
I bought it at Hachette's (434).<br />
I caught this pretty little bird in its nest, in <strong>the</strong> trunk of a large<br />
tree, near your uncle's farm.<br />
I caught (180) this pretty little bird in its nest, in <strong>the</strong> trunk of a<br />
large tree, (437) near your uncle's farm.<br />
I am astonished to see you wearing that horrid Spanish hat .<br />
I am astonished to see you (122, 198) wearing (314) that horrid<br />
Spanish hat (177, 449).<br />
I wear it because it is light <strong>and</strong> comfortable.<br />
I wear it because it is light <strong>and</strong> comfortable.<br />
Take <strong>the</strong>se pretty little books, <strong>and</strong> put <strong>the</strong>m on Elizabeth's little<br />
table.<br />
Take 3 (122) <strong>the</strong>se pretty little books, <strong>and</strong> put <strong>the</strong>m (201) on<br />
Elizabeth's little table.<br />
This morning we walked four miles ; we went as far as <strong>the</strong><br />
beautiful little bridge near <strong>the</strong> village inn.<br />
This morning we walked (Past Indef.) four miles (421) ; we went<br />
as far as <strong>the</strong> beautiful little bridge (442) near <strong>the</strong> village inn.<br />
Take away this cur ; I hate it.<br />
Take away this cur ; (444, 447) I hate it.<br />
Every evening we take a walk along a small stream, in <strong>which</strong> a<br />
thous<strong>and</strong> pretty little fishes swim about.<br />
393
Every evening we take a walk 3 along a small stream, in <strong>which</strong> a<br />
thous<strong>and</strong> pretty little fishes swim about.<br />
How do you do today?<br />
How do you do (see page 89) to-day?<br />
Very well! I thank you.<br />
Very well! (454) I thank you.<br />
The committee made a report of <strong>the</strong> case, <strong>and</strong> sent it to <strong>the</strong> king.<br />
The committee (456) made a report of <strong>the</strong> case, <strong>and</strong> sent it to <strong>the</strong><br />
king.<br />
Under his despotic government <strong>the</strong> people suffered <strong>many</strong><br />
hardships.<br />
Under his despotic government <strong>the</strong> people (456) suffered (Past<br />
Def.) <strong>many</strong> hardships.<br />
EXERCISE XLV.<br />
Have you seen George's new carriage ?<br />
Have you seen George's new carriage ?<br />
Yes, I have ; it is strong <strong>and</strong> well made.<br />
Yes, I have (208) ; it is strong <strong>and</strong> well made.<br />
The glorious productions of <strong>the</strong> eminent painter Raphael will ever<br />
form <strong>the</strong> delight of mankind.<br />
The glorious productions of <strong>the</strong> eminent painter Raphael will ever<br />
form <strong>the</strong> delight of mankind.<br />
Napoleon I.<br />
Napoleon I.<br />
often wore a grey coat, <strong>and</strong> a round hat, with a broad brim.<br />
often wore (Imp. Ind.) a grey (468) coat, <strong>and</strong> a round hat, with (a) a<br />
broad brim.<br />
General Garibaldi was riding a beautiful black horse.<br />
General Garibaldi was riding a beautiful (473, 469) black horse.<br />
A great talker is seldom a great speaker.<br />
A great (474) talker is seldom a great speaker.<br />
If we <strong>had</strong> a good telescope we could see <strong>the</strong> custom house.<br />
If we <strong>had</strong> a good (475) telescope we could (304) see <strong>the</strong> custom-<br />
house.<br />
A tall man is not always a great man.<br />
394
A tall man (472) is not always a great man.<br />
There is a great difference between a polite man <strong>and</strong> an honest<br />
man.<br />
There is (154) a great difference between a polite (472) man <strong>and</strong><br />
an honest man.<br />
Go <strong>and</strong> fetch me a jug of warm water.<br />
Go (340) <strong>and</strong> fetch me a jug of warm (468) water.<br />
Here it is, on <strong>the</strong> oval table.<br />
Here it is, (245) on <strong>the</strong> oval table.<br />
Where are you going, Bertha ?<br />
Where are you going, Bertha ?<br />
I am going to Simpson's, to buy some white cotton, <strong>and</strong> some red<br />
wool.<br />
I am going (179) to Simpson's, (434) to buy some white cotton, <strong>and</strong><br />
some red wool.<br />
I do not like this staircase ; it is dark, <strong>and</strong> not clean.<br />
I do not like this stair-case ; it is dark, <strong>and</strong> not clean.<br />
She writes in a simple <strong>and</strong> natural style.<br />
She writes in a simple (469) <strong>and</strong> natural style.<br />
My aunt has sent me a basket of flowers ; it contains some red<br />
<strong>and</strong> white pinks, some pretty roses, <strong>and</strong> several kinds of ferns.<br />
My aunt has sent me a basket of flowers (348) ; it contains some<br />
red <strong>and</strong> white (465, 468) pinks, some pretty roses, <strong>and</strong> several<br />
kinds (422) of ferns.<br />
EXERCISE XLVI.<br />
Why do you like <strong>the</strong> Italian language ?<br />
Why do you like <strong>the</strong> Italian (468) language ?<br />
I like it because it is sweet <strong>and</strong> harmonious.<br />
I like it because it is sweet <strong>and</strong> harmonious.<br />
The whole country was in a state of agitation.<br />
The whole (482) country was in a state of agitation.<br />
When <strong>the</strong> clergyman's children saw us, <strong>the</strong>y became quite<br />
cheerful.<br />
When <strong>the</strong> clergyman's children saw us, <strong>the</strong>y became (Past Def.)<br />
quite (483) cheerful.<br />
395
Let us go into that shop ; I have seen <strong>the</strong>re some pretty ribbons<br />
<strong>and</strong> French lace.<br />
Let us go into that shop ; I have seen <strong>the</strong>re (239, 243) some pretty<br />
(473) ribbons <strong>and</strong> French lace.<br />
Here is a pound of good tea ; give half of it to your sister.<br />
Here is (245) a pound of good tea ; give (122) half (487) of it (240) to<br />
your sister.<br />
He spent an hour <strong>and</strong> a half in writing this letter.<br />
He spent an hour <strong>and</strong> a half (486) in writing (314) this letter.<br />
Louisa does nothing else but sew <strong>and</strong> embroider.<br />
Louisa does nothing else but (491) sew <strong>and</strong> embroider.<br />
These chickens are large <strong>and</strong> fat, but <strong>the</strong> partridges are very<br />
lean.<br />
These chickens are large <strong>and</strong> fat, but <strong>the</strong> partridges are very<br />
lean.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r has made me a present of some beautiful artificial<br />
flowers.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r has made me a (360) present of some beautiful (473)<br />
artificial flowers.<br />
How long have you been waiting for us?<br />
How long (496) have you been waiting for (251) us?<br />
I have been waiting half an hour.<br />
I have been waiting half (486) an hour.<br />
EXERCISE XLVII.<br />
She is as pretty as her sister, but not so clever.<br />
She is as (505) pretty as her sister, but not so (505) clever.<br />
The simplicity of nature is more pleasing than <strong>the</strong><br />
embellishments of art.<br />
The simplicity of nature is more pleasing than (511) <strong>the</strong><br />
embellishments of art.<br />
Do not walk so fast, walk slower.<br />
Do not (122, 128) walk so fast, walk slower.<br />
It is nobler to forgive than to avenge yourself.<br />
It is nobler to forgive than (515) to avenge one's self.<br />
London has as <strong>many</strong> inhabitants as Belgium.<br />
London has as <strong>many</strong> (506) inhabitants as Belgium.<br />
396
Shall we go to <strong>the</strong> Crystal Palace ?<br />
Shall we go to <strong>the</strong> Crystal Palace ?<br />
I think so ; it is better to go today than tomorrow.<br />
I think so (271) ; it is better to go to-day than (515) to-morrow.<br />
Give him two guineas; you are richer than I.<br />
Give him two guineas; you are richer (512) than I.<br />
The twilight in <strong>the</strong> south is much shorter than in <strong>the</strong> north.<br />
The twilight in <strong>the</strong> south is much shorter than in <strong>the</strong> north.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> first centuries <strong>the</strong> Romans were more warlike than<br />
literary.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> first centuries <strong>the</strong> Romans were more warlike than (515)<br />
literary.<br />
Wrought iron is much stronger than cast iron ; it is less brittle,<br />
<strong>and</strong> much more durable.<br />
Wrought iron is much stronger than cast iron ; it is less (510)<br />
brittle, <strong>and</strong> much (495) more durable.<br />
A feigned peace is more dangerous than open war.<br />
A feigned peace is more dangerous than open war.<br />
It is better to acquit a criminal than to condemn an innocent<br />
person.<br />
It is better to acquit a criminal than (515) to condemn an<br />
innocent person.<br />
EXERCISE XLVIII.<br />
This tragedy is very interesting, <strong>and</strong> very well Written.<br />
This tragedy is very interesting, (471) <strong>and</strong> very well Written.<br />
She is taller than you by three inches.<br />
She is taller (512) than you by 1 three inches.<br />
The mosaics of Rome are <strong>the</strong> most famous in Europe.<br />
The mosaics (410) of Rome are <strong>the</strong> most famous (518) in Europe.<br />
Write to your bro<strong>the</strong>r <strong>and</strong> tell him to call on me as soon as<br />
possible.<br />
Write to your bro<strong>the</strong>r <strong>and</strong> tell him (201) to call on me 2 as soon as<br />
possible.<br />
3 I want to go to Paris ; all <strong>the</strong> more so because my sister Is <strong>the</strong>re<br />
also .(<strong>the</strong>re is also my sister).<br />
397
3 I want to go to Paris ; all <strong>the</strong> more so because 4 my sister Is<br />
<strong>the</strong>re also (<strong>the</strong>re is (239) also my sister).<br />
She is so kind, amiable, <strong>and</strong> pretty that everybody admires her.<br />
She is so kind, amiable, <strong>and</strong> pretty that 5 everybody admires her.<br />
My uncle's friend is <strong>the</strong> richest man in this village.<br />
My uncle's friend is <strong>the</strong> richest man in (521) this village.<br />
Gold is <strong>the</strong> purest, <strong>the</strong> most precious, <strong>the</strong> most ductile, <strong>and</strong> after<br />
platinum, <strong>the</strong> heaviest of all metals.<br />
Gold is <strong>the</strong> purest, <strong>the</strong> most precious, <strong>the</strong> most ductile, <strong>and</strong> after<br />
platinum, <strong>the</strong> heaviest of all metals.<br />
God's power extends from <strong>the</strong> lowest abyss of <strong>the</strong> earth, to <strong>the</strong><br />
highest parts of <strong>the</strong> heavens.<br />
God's power extends from <strong>the</strong> lowest (520) abyss of <strong>the</strong> earth, to<br />
<strong>the</strong> highest (520) parts of <strong>the</strong> heavens.<br />
He is <strong>the</strong> bravest <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> most able general of his time.<br />
He is <strong>the</strong> bravest (518) <strong>and</strong> ablest general of his time.<br />
EXERCISE XLIX.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> year one thous<strong>and</strong> <strong>and</strong> sixty six, Engl<strong>and</strong> was conquered by<br />
William of Norm<strong>and</strong>y, an event of <strong>the</strong> greatest importance.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> year one (356) thous<strong>and</strong> <strong>and</strong> sixty-six, Engl<strong>and</strong> (330) was<br />
conquered by (270) William of Norm<strong>and</strong>y, an (353); event of <strong>the</strong><br />
greatest (520) importance.<br />
I have been reading <strong>the</strong> " Aristodemo," of Monti, <strong>and</strong> have learned<br />
by heart scene <strong>the</strong> fourth, act <strong>the</strong> first.<br />
I have been reading (179) <strong>the</strong> " Aristodemo," of Monti, <strong>and</strong> have<br />
learnt by heart scene (543) <strong>the</strong> fourth, act <strong>the</strong> first.<br />
How old is your nephew ?<br />
How old 1 is your nephew ?<br />
He will be seventeen on <strong>the</strong> 5th of next month.<br />
He will be seventeen on (147) <strong>the</strong> 5th of next month.<br />
How long will you remain in this city ?<br />
How long 2 will you remain in this city ?<br />
I shall leave Rome on <strong>the</strong> 15th .<br />
I shall leave Rome on <strong>the</strong> 15th (546).<br />
Sardinia is one hundred <strong>and</strong> fifty miles from Italy.<br />
398
Sardinia is (313) one hundred (356) <strong>and</strong> fifty miles (421) from<br />
Italy.<br />
Your letter of <strong>the</strong> 25th of February reached me on <strong>the</strong> 1st instant<br />
.<br />
Your letter of 3 <strong>the</strong> 25th of February (74) reached me on <strong>the</strong> 1st<br />
instant (544).<br />
Frederick <strong>the</strong> second king of Prussia, was a great warrior .<br />
Frederick <strong>the</strong> second (543) king of Prussia, was a great warrior<br />
(474).<br />
What is <strong>the</strong> day of <strong>the</strong> month ?<br />
What is <strong>the</strong> day (544) of <strong>the</strong> month ?<br />
It is <strong>the</strong> 9th .<br />
It is <strong>the</strong> 9th (546).<br />
EXERCISE L.<br />
Send me two dozen of oranges , <strong>and</strong> three dozen of lemons.<br />
Send me (201) two dozen (555) of oranges (411), <strong>and</strong> three dozen of<br />
lemons.<br />
Neptune, <strong>the</strong> most distant of <strong>the</strong> planets takes 164 2/3 years to<br />
make its revolution round <strong>the</strong> sun ; Uranus, 84 years <strong>and</strong> a few<br />
days ; Saturn, 29 1/2 years ; Jupiter, nearly 12 years ; Mars, 1<br />
year, 10 months, <strong>and</strong> 21 days ; <strong>the</strong> Earth, 1 year ; Venus, 7<br />
months, <strong>and</strong> 13 days; Mercury, 2 months, <strong>and</strong> 27 days.<br />
Neptune, <strong>the</strong> most (518) distant of <strong>the</strong> planets (397) takes 164<br />
2/3 (164 years <strong>and</strong> 2/3) (553) years to make its revolution round<br />
<strong>the</strong> sun ; Uranus, 84 years <strong>and</strong> a few (494) days ; Saturn, 29 1/2<br />
(486) years ; Jupiter, nearly 12 years ; Mars, 1 year, 10 months,<br />
<strong>and</strong> 21 days ; (542) <strong>the</strong> Earth, 1 year ; Venus, 7 months, <strong>and</strong> 13<br />
days; Mercury, 2 months, <strong>and</strong> 27 days.<br />
I have just sold my horse for thirty pounds, <strong>and</strong> ten shillings.<br />
I have just (299) sold my horse for (251) thirty pounds, <strong>and</strong> ten<br />
shillings.<br />
What is <strong>the</strong> height of this room ?<br />
What is <strong>the</strong> height 2 of this room ?<br />
It is about twelve feet high, <strong>and</strong> seventeen feet long.<br />
It is about twelve feet high, 2 <strong>and</strong> seventeen feet long.<br />
399
Out of fifteen thous<strong>and</strong> inhabitants, <strong>the</strong>re were two thous<strong>and</strong><br />
killed.<br />
Out of 3 fifteen thous<strong>and</strong> inhabitants, <strong>the</strong>re were two thous<strong>and</strong><br />
(538) killed.<br />
We generally breakfast at eight , have luncheon at one, <strong>and</strong> dine<br />
at six o'clock.<br />
We generally breakfast at eight (548), have luncheon at one, <strong>and</strong><br />
dine at six o'clock.<br />
Dante , Petrarca <strong>and</strong> Boccaccio, lived in <strong>the</strong> fourteenth century,<br />
<strong>the</strong>y are <strong>the</strong> most celebrated Italian trecentisti.<br />
Dante (334), Petrarca (333) <strong>and</strong> Boccaccio, lived in <strong>the</strong> fourteenth<br />
century, 4 <strong>the</strong>y are <strong>the</strong> most celebrated Italian trecentisti.<br />
EXERCISE LI.<br />
The rose has its beauty, its freshness <strong>and</strong> its fragrance ; but it<br />
has also its thorns.<br />
The rose has its (560) beauty, its freshness <strong>and</strong> its fragrance ;<br />
but it has also its thorns.<br />
The lustre of our ancestors' glory reflects on us, to inspire us to<br />
imitate <strong>the</strong>ir virtues.<br />
The lustre of our ancestors' glory reflects on us, to (225) inspire<br />
us (198) to imitate <strong>the</strong>ir (560) virtues.<br />
One of our horses is so lame that we <strong>cannot</strong> drive him today.<br />
One of our horses is so lame (536) that we <strong>cannot</strong> drive him to-<br />
day.<br />
That lady is a relation of mine .<br />
That lady is a relation of mine (566).<br />
One of my favorite studies is botany.<br />
One of my favourite studies is botany.<br />
She showed him her splendid picture gallery, <strong>and</strong> costly jewels.<br />
She showed him her (562) splendid picture-gallery, <strong>and</strong> costly<br />
jewels.<br />
Cornelia, <strong>the</strong> mo<strong>the</strong>r of <strong>the</strong> Gracchi, said to her friends as she<br />
showed <strong>the</strong>m her sons, "These are my jewels."<br />
Cornelia, <strong>the</strong> mo<strong>the</strong>r of <strong>the</strong> Gracchi, said to her (562) friends as<br />
she (mentre) showed <strong>the</strong>m (211) her sons, "These are (245) my<br />
jewels."<br />
400
" He is a friend of mine, <strong>and</strong> has just married one of my cousins.<br />
" He is a friend of mine, (566) <strong>and</strong> has just married one of my<br />
cousins.<br />
I do not like to hear cats mewing at night.<br />
I do not like to hear cats mewing 1 (314) at night.<br />
Your sister is prettier than my cousin Jane ; she has fair hair,<br />
blue eyes, <strong>and</strong> a beautiful complexion .<br />
Your sister is prettier (510) than my cousin Jane ; she has 2 fair<br />
hair, blue eyes, <strong>and</strong> a beautiful complexion (570).<br />
EXERCISE LII.<br />
Do you like my books ?<br />
Do you like my (560) books ?<br />
Yes, I like <strong>the</strong>m ; <strong>the</strong>y are better than mine.<br />
Yes, I like <strong>the</strong>m (193) ; <strong>the</strong>y are better (520) than mine.<br />
Instead of giving <strong>the</strong> money to his fa<strong>the</strong>r, he put it in his own<br />
pocket.<br />
Instead of giving <strong>the</strong> money to his fa<strong>the</strong>r, he put (mettersi) it<br />
(218) in (572) his own pocket.<br />
Your garden is prettier than ours, but our orchard is larger, <strong>and</strong><br />
better stocked than yours.<br />
Your garden is prettier than ours, but our orchard is larger, <strong>and</strong><br />
better (522) stocked than yours.<br />
Henry IV. of France used to play with his children, carrying <strong>the</strong>m<br />
on his back round his royal apartments.<br />
Henry IV. (543) of France used to play 1 with his (560) children,<br />
carrying <strong>the</strong>m on his (571) back round his royal apartments.<br />
Do you buy your clo<strong>the</strong>s ready made ?<br />
Do you buy your clo<strong>the</strong>s ready made ?<br />
2 No ; I have <strong>the</strong>m made to order at Johnson's .<br />
2 No ; I have <strong>the</strong>m made to order 3 at Johnson's (434).<br />
The unfortunate Charles VI.<br />
The unfortunate Charles VI.<br />
of France passed his time in playing at cards with his attendants.<br />
of France passed his (571) time in (278) playing at cards with his<br />
attendants.<br />
401
The customs of our ancestors were simpler <strong>and</strong> healthier than<br />
ours .<br />
The customs of our ancestors were simpler <strong>and</strong> healthier than<br />
ours (578).<br />
The books you have sent to <strong>the</strong> bookbinder are mine <strong>and</strong> not<br />
yours.<br />
The books you have sent to <strong>the</strong> bookbinder are mine (578) <strong>and</strong><br />
not yours.<br />
He spoils his health by studying too much at night.<br />
He spoils his (572) health by studying too much at night.<br />
EXERCISE LIII.<br />
These cherries <strong>and</strong> strawberries are ripe, but those pears are<br />
not.<br />
These (588) cherries <strong>and</strong> (599) strawberries are ripe, but those<br />
(595) pears are not.<br />
1 Go <strong>and</strong> fetch me that looking glass.<br />
1 Go <strong>and</strong> (340) fetch me that (593) looking-glass.<br />
How much time did you spend in painting your sister's portrait ?<br />
How much time 2 did you spend (have you spent) in (to) painting<br />
(314) your sister's portrait ?<br />
I could not tell you .<br />
I could (sapere) not tell (it) you (198, 218).<br />
This money is his , <strong>and</strong> not yours.<br />
This money is his (579), <strong>and</strong> not yours.<br />
Give me that thimble, those needles, <strong>and</strong> that thread.<br />
Give me that (593) thimble, those (594) needles, <strong>and</strong> that thread.<br />
Take off those ugly boots of yours ; <strong>the</strong>y will lame your feet .<br />
Take off those (589) ugly boots of yours (449, 572) ; <strong>the</strong>y will lame<br />
your feet (572).<br />
Have you paid much for <strong>the</strong>se jewels ?<br />
Have you paid much for (251) <strong>the</strong>se jewels ?<br />
Yes, I have ; I paid two pounds ten shillings for this necklace.<br />
Yes, I have ; I paid (180) two pounds ten shillings for this<br />
necklace.<br />
EXERCISE LIV.<br />
What do you think of this country ?<br />
402
What (611) do you think of this country ?<br />
2 I like it almost as much as my native country.<br />
2 I like it almost as much as (505, 508) my native country.<br />
Of <strong>the</strong>se three horses, this is <strong>the</strong> one I should prefer.<br />
Of <strong>the</strong>se three horses, this is <strong>the</strong> one (<strong>which</strong>) 3 I should prefer.<br />
Modesty is to merit, what s<strong>had</strong>ows are to <strong>the</strong> figures in a<br />
painting.<br />
Modesty (328) is to merit, what (610) s<strong>had</strong>ows are to <strong>the</strong> figures in<br />
(di) a painting.<br />
We are body <strong>and</strong> mind ; <strong>the</strong> former should obey, <strong>the</strong> latter<br />
comm<strong>and</strong>.<br />
We are body <strong>and</strong> mind ; <strong>the</strong> former (605) should (224, 397) obey,<br />
<strong>the</strong> latter comm<strong>and</strong>.<br />
That <strong>which</strong> is superfluous often costs more than that <strong>which</strong> is<br />
necessary.<br />
That <strong>which</strong> (610) is superfluous often costs more than that <strong>which</strong><br />
is necessary.<br />
That man, by his extravagance, has not only squ<strong>and</strong>ered all his<br />
own property, but also that of his wife.<br />
That man, by (con) his (560) extravagance, has not only<br />
squ<strong>and</strong>ered all his own property, (582) but also that (600) of his<br />
wife.<br />
I am influenced by love <strong>and</strong> anger ; <strong>the</strong> former pleads that I<br />
should forgive him, <strong>the</strong> latter that I should punish him.<br />
I am influenced by (270) love (328) <strong>and</strong> (by) anger ; <strong>the</strong> former<br />
(605) pleads that I should forgive him, <strong>the</strong> latter that I should<br />
punish him.<br />
Dante <strong>and</strong> Shakespeare were two great poets ; <strong>the</strong> former was an<br />
Italian, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> latter an Englishman.<br />
Dante (334) <strong>and</strong> Shakespeare (333) were two great poets ; <strong>the</strong><br />
former (605) was (Imp. Ind.) an (354) Italian, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> latter an<br />
Englishman.<br />
I will do all that <strong>which</strong> depends upon me to obtain that post for you<br />
.<br />
I will do all that <strong>which</strong> (610, 612) depends upon (from) me to<br />
obtain that (593) post for you (198).<br />
403
Your sister has just made me a present of this beautiful bunch of<br />
grapes.<br />
Your sister has just (299) made me a (360) present of this<br />
beautiful bunch 4 of grapes.<br />
That clock is fast, <strong>and</strong> my watch is ten minutes slow.<br />
That (593) clock is fast, 5 <strong>and</strong> my (560) watch is ten minutes<br />
slow.<br />
EXERCISE LV.<br />
Which do you like best of those three books ?<br />
Which (631) do you like best of those (594) three books ?<br />
The one that has <strong>the</strong> illustrations, <strong>and</strong> is bound in parchment.<br />
The one that (629) has <strong>the</strong> illustrations, <strong>and</strong> is bound in<br />
parchment.<br />
That lady is Mrs. Trivelli, of whom I spoke to you yesterday.<br />
That lady is Mrs. Trivelli, of whom (619) I spoke (Past Def. ) to you<br />
yesterday.<br />
My sister learns music from <strong>the</strong> gentleman whom your bro<strong>the</strong>r<br />
recommended to me .<br />
My sister learns music from <strong>the</strong> gentleman whom (624) your<br />
bro<strong>the</strong>r recommended (180) to me (193).<br />
The young lady we met last night at Mrs. Jones' has just entered<br />
<strong>the</strong> drawing-room.<br />
The young lady (623) we met last night at Mrs. Jones' (434) has<br />
just (299) entered (183) <strong>the</strong> drawing-room.<br />
Which one ?<br />
Which one ? (631).<br />
The one who spoke French to you.<br />
The one who (629) spoke French to you.<br />
The watch you bought me is broken (rompersi).<br />
The watch (623) you bought me is broken (rompersi).<br />
Not only did he send us <strong>the</strong> tickets, but he took us to <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>atre<br />
in his carriage.<br />
Not only (639) did he send us <strong>the</strong> tickets, but he took us to <strong>the</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong>atre in his carriage.<br />
Historians represent men such as <strong>the</strong>y are poets depict <strong>the</strong>m<br />
such as <strong>the</strong>y should be .<br />
404
Historians represent men such as (635) <strong>the</strong>y are poets depict<br />
<strong>the</strong>m such as <strong>the</strong>y should be (224).<br />
EXERCISE LVI.<br />
Who is knocking at <strong>the</strong> door ?<br />
Who (643) is knocking at <strong>the</strong> door ?<br />
My little bro<strong>the</strong>r James.<br />
My little bro<strong>the</strong>r James.<br />
To whom have you told <strong>the</strong> news ?<br />
To whom (643) have you told <strong>the</strong> news ?<br />
To my sister-in-law.<br />
To my sister-in-law.<br />
The road through <strong>which</strong> we passed was very lonely.<br />
The road through <strong>which</strong> (619) we passed was (Imp.<br />
Ind.<br />
) very lonely.<br />
From whom do you expect a letter ?<br />
From whom (643) do you expect a letter ?<br />
From that lady who spoke to you at my bro<strong>the</strong>r's house.<br />
From that lady who (619) spoke to you at my bro<strong>the</strong>r's house.<br />
Children who obey <strong>the</strong>ir parents deserve to be praised.<br />
Children (328) who (619) obey (to) <strong>the</strong>ir parents 2 deserve to be<br />
praised.<br />
What is <strong>the</strong> weight of this shield ?<br />
What (631) is <strong>the</strong> weight of this shield ?<br />
It is about ten pounds.<br />
It is about ten pounds.<br />
3 For whom are you painting that vase?<br />
3 For whom are you painting that vase?<br />
For my mo<strong>the</strong>r-in-law.<br />
For my mo<strong>the</strong>r-in-law.<br />
The pencil with <strong>which</strong> I was writing is broken.<br />
The pencil with <strong>which</strong> (619) I was writing (179) is broken.<br />
Whose hat is this ?<br />
Whose hat is this ?<br />
405
It belongs to that little girl .<br />
It belongs to that little girl (442).<br />
What are you thinking of ?<br />
What (611) are you thinking of ?<br />
I was thinking of <strong>the</strong> advice you gave to me.<br />
I was thinking of <strong>the</strong> advice 4 you gave (180) to me.<br />
EXERCISE LVII.<br />
They were both students at <strong>the</strong> University of Oxford.<br />
They were both (665) students at <strong>the</strong> University of Oxford.<br />
Every one of <strong>the</strong> pupils of <strong>the</strong> Royal College of Music <strong>and</strong> of <strong>the</strong><br />
Royal Academy of Music received a ticket of admission to <strong>the</strong><br />
International Concert.<br />
Every one (659) of <strong>the</strong> pupils of <strong>the</strong> Royal College of Music <strong>and</strong> of<br />
<strong>the</strong> Royal Academy of Music received (Past Def.<br />
) a ticket of admission to <strong>the</strong> International Concert.<br />
Charity rejoices at <strong>the</strong> good fortune of o<strong>the</strong>rs .<br />
Charity rejoices at <strong>the</strong> good fortune of o<strong>the</strong>rs (662).<br />
Nei<strong>the</strong>r my gr<strong>and</strong>fa<strong>the</strong>r nor my aunt have arrived.<br />
Nei<strong>the</strong>r my gr<strong>and</strong>fa<strong>the</strong>r nor my aunt (275, 667) have arrived.<br />
Nei<strong>the</strong>r of <strong>the</strong>m is <strong>the</strong> owner of <strong>the</strong> house we have seen.<br />
Nei<strong>the</strong>r of <strong>the</strong>m (667) is <strong>the</strong> owner of <strong>the</strong> house (623) we have<br />
seen.<br />
Rich as <strong>the</strong>y are <strong>the</strong>y will not be admitted to that society.<br />
Rich as <strong>the</strong>y are 1 <strong>the</strong>y will not be admitted to that society.<br />
Let <strong>the</strong>m be ever so clever , <strong>the</strong>y will never succeed in such an<br />
<strong>under</strong>taking.<br />
Let <strong>the</strong>m be ever so clever (however clever <strong>the</strong>y may be) (676),<br />
<strong>the</strong>y will never succeed (258) in such an <strong>under</strong>taking.<br />
Some people are never satisfied, however prosperous <strong>the</strong>y may<br />
be.<br />
Some people (649) are never satisfied, however (676) prosperous<br />
<strong>the</strong>y may be.<br />
I shall buy ei<strong>the</strong>r this box or that trunk.<br />
I shall buy ei<strong>the</strong>r (666) this box 2 or that trunk.<br />
How much capital have you entrusted to him ?<br />
406
How much capital 3 have you entrusted to him ?<br />
I have entrusted to him about five hundred pounds.<br />
I have entrusted to him about five hundred (537) pounds.<br />
EXERCISE LVIII.<br />
He kept us waiting in <strong>the</strong> rain till two o'clock in <strong>the</strong> afternoon.<br />
He kept us waiting (683) in <strong>the</strong> rain till two o'clock (548) in <strong>the</strong><br />
afternoon.<br />
Your having told him frankly that we would wait no longer<br />
offended him.<br />
Your having told (685) him frankly that we would wait no longer<br />
offended him.<br />
Having conducted me into <strong>the</strong> room destined for me, he wished<br />
me a goodnight, <strong>and</strong> went away.<br />
Having conducted me (689) into <strong>the</strong> room destined for (to) me, he<br />
wished me a (<strong>the</strong>) good-night, <strong>and</strong> went away.<br />
Princes who in governing <strong>the</strong>ir subjects, are not guided by<br />
principles of justice, excite disaffection.<br />
Princes (328) who (620) in governing (688) <strong>the</strong>ir subjects, are not<br />
guided by (270) principles of justice, excite disaffection.<br />
Having seated herself on a comfortable armchair, she began to<br />
narrate <strong>the</strong> scene she <strong>had</strong> witnessed.<br />
Having seated herself (689) on a comfortable arm-chair, she<br />
began to narrate <strong>the</strong> scene (623) she <strong>had</strong> witnessed.<br />
I admire those artists, I saw <strong>the</strong>m painting some very fine<br />
pictures.<br />
I admire those (594) artists, I saw <strong>the</strong>m painting 1 some very fine<br />
pictures.<br />
I should like to have one of those pictures; I saw <strong>the</strong>m being<br />
painted.<br />
I should like to have one of those pictures; I saw <strong>the</strong>m being<br />
painted.<br />
1 I often heard him speaking against you, but I never thought! he<br />
would dare to cause you any loss.<br />
1 I often heard him speaking (690) against you, but I never<br />
thought! (636) he would dare to cause you any loss.<br />
Young as he is he knows how to make himself feared.<br />
407
Young as he is (679) he knows how to make himself feared.<br />
3 I like <strong>the</strong> voice of Miss Williams , I heard her singing last night.<br />
3 I like Miss Williams' voice, I heard her singing (690) last night.<br />
The song you have composed is very pretty ; I have heard it sung<br />
several times.<br />
The song (623) you have composed is very pretty ; I have heard it<br />
sung (690) several times.<br />
Having dressed <strong>the</strong>mselves in <strong>the</strong>ir best clo<strong>the</strong>s, <strong>the</strong>y went out<br />
for a walk.<br />
Having dressed (689) <strong>the</strong>mselves in <strong>the</strong>ir best clo<strong>the</strong>s, <strong>the</strong>y went<br />
out for a walk.<br />
I came earlier this morning, because I thought I should have<br />
found you at home.<br />
I came earlier (510) this morning, because I thought (691) I<br />
should have found 4 you at home.<br />
I do not like to see horses running so fast.<br />
I do not like to see horses running (683) so fast.<br />
EXERCISE LIX.<br />
When I was in Paris I often met your American friend.<br />
When I was (696) in Paris I often met (697) your American friend.<br />
Thomas a Becket was kneeling! before <strong>the</strong> altar when <strong>the</strong><br />
knights struck him.<br />
Thomas a Becket was kneeling! 2 (696) before <strong>the</strong> altar when <strong>the</strong><br />
knights struck (704) him.<br />
At two clock we were far from <strong>the</strong> batteries, <strong>and</strong> <strong>had</strong> escaped a<br />
great danger.<br />
At two clock we were (696) far from <strong>the</strong> batteries, <strong>and</strong> <strong>had</strong> escaped<br />
(709) a great danger.<br />
The general assured us that <strong>the</strong> enemy were not sufficiently<br />
numerous to attack us.<br />
The general assured us that <strong>the</strong> enemy were (696) not<br />
sufficiently numerous to (225) attack us.<br />
What did you do in <strong>the</strong> evening when you were in <strong>the</strong> country ? .<br />
What (611) did you do (697) in <strong>the</strong> evening when you were in <strong>the</strong><br />
country ? (614).<br />
408
My bro<strong>the</strong>r <strong>and</strong> I read, <strong>and</strong> my sisters ei<strong>the</strong>r sewed, or played<br />
upon <strong>the</strong> piano.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r <strong>and</strong> I read, <strong>and</strong> my sisters ei<strong>the</strong>r sewed, or played<br />
upon (583) <strong>the</strong> piano.<br />
Frederick <strong>the</strong> Great always wore a dark blue uniform.<br />
Frederick <strong>the</strong> Great always wore (701) a dark blue uniform.<br />
When he entered <strong>the</strong> room, all <strong>the</strong> servants were asleep .<br />
When he entered (183, 704) <strong>the</strong> room, all <strong>the</strong> servants were<br />
asleep (696).<br />
Spain <strong>had</strong> formerly immense possessions in America.<br />
Spain <strong>had</strong> (696) formerly immense possessions in America.<br />
EXERCISE LX.<br />
Her fa<strong>the</strong>r was a h<strong>and</strong>some man, but very proud.<br />
Her fa<strong>the</strong>r was (701) a h<strong>and</strong>some man, but very proud.<br />
Man formerly lived in forests ; <strong>the</strong> meadows were his walks ; he<br />
<strong>had</strong> for his food <strong>the</strong> fruits of <strong>the</strong> earth, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> chirping of birds<br />
delighted his ears.<br />
Man formerly lived (701) in forests ; <strong>the</strong> meadows were (696) his<br />
walks ; he <strong>had</strong> for his food <strong>the</strong> fruits of <strong>the</strong> earth, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
chirping (683) of birds delighted (701) his (575) ears.<br />
When Croesus showed to Solon his vast treasures, <strong>the</strong> latter said<br />
: " Sire, if anyone come with better iron than yours, he will be<br />
master of this gold.<br />
When Croesus showed (704) to Solon his vast treasures, <strong>the</strong><br />
latter (605) said : " Sire, if anyone (649) come with better iron<br />
than yours, he will be master (146) of this gold.<br />
" According to <strong>the</strong> statement of <strong>the</strong> governor, <strong>the</strong>y escaped .<br />
" According to <strong>the</strong> statement of <strong>the</strong> governor, <strong>the</strong>y escaped (720).<br />
My servant behaved very well for <strong>the</strong> first five years, but<br />
afterwards he became very rude, <strong>and</strong> dishonest.<br />
My servant behaved (703) very well for <strong>the</strong> first five years, but<br />
afterwards he became (704) very rude, <strong>and</strong> dishonest.<br />
I speak of <strong>the</strong> Normans, because <strong>the</strong>y were <strong>the</strong>n at <strong>the</strong> height of<br />
<strong>the</strong>ir glory.<br />
I speak of <strong>the</strong> Normans, because <strong>the</strong>y were (696) <strong>the</strong>n at <strong>the</strong><br />
height of <strong>the</strong>ir glory.<br />
409
Napoleon comm<strong>and</strong>ed <strong>the</strong> artillery at <strong>the</strong> siege of Toulon, <strong>and</strong><br />
gained brilliant victories in Italy, as general-in-chief of <strong>the</strong><br />
French republic.<br />
Napoleon comm<strong>and</strong>ed (704) <strong>the</strong> artillery at <strong>the</strong> siege of Toulon,<br />
<strong>and</strong> gained (704) brilliant victories in Italy, as general-in-chief of<br />
<strong>the</strong> French republic.<br />
We met last year at Paris.<br />
We met (704) last year at Paris.<br />
I <strong>had</strong> never seen him before.<br />
I <strong>had</strong> never seen (709) him before.<br />
Louis XIV.<br />
Louis XIV.<br />
lived seventy eight years, <strong>and</strong> reigned seventy two.<br />
lived (703) seventy-eight years, <strong>and</strong> reigned seventy-two.<br />
I wrote to him this morning, immediately after breakfast.<br />
I wrote (708) to him this morning, immediately after breakfast.<br />
Dante was born in 1265, <strong>and</strong> died in exile in 1321 .<br />
Dante was born (704) in 1265, <strong>and</strong> died in exile in 1321 (544).<br />
When Tasso was twelve years old he composed very good Greek<br />
verses.<br />
When Tasso was (550, 696) twelve years old he composed (701)<br />
very good Greek verses.<br />
If I were you, I would not lend him any money.<br />
If (112) I were you, I would not lend him any money.<br />
He was very odd ; he used to tell <strong>the</strong> same story so <strong>many</strong> times,<br />
until it was positively painful to hear him.<br />
He was (701) very odd ; he used to tell <strong>the</strong> same story so <strong>many</strong><br />
times, until it was (696) positively painful to hear him.<br />
As soon as <strong>the</strong>y reached <strong>the</strong> top of <strong>the</strong> mountain, <strong>the</strong>y were killed<br />
.<br />
As soon as <strong>the</strong>y reached (710) <strong>the</strong> top of <strong>the</strong> mountain, <strong>the</strong>y were<br />
killed (705).<br />
Ferdin<strong>and</strong> <strong>and</strong> Isabella reigned in Spain when Columbus<br />
discovered America.<br />
Ferdin<strong>and</strong> <strong>and</strong> Isabella reigned (696) in Spain when Columbus<br />
discovered (704) America.<br />
410
In crossing <strong>the</strong> moor, I saw a flight of ravens, flying towards <strong>the</strong><br />
mountains.<br />
In crossing (688) <strong>the</strong> moor, I saw a flight 1 of ravens, flying (292)<br />
towards <strong>the</strong> mountains.<br />
EXERCISE LXI.<br />
Do you hope that he will be elected a member of Parliament ?<br />
Do you hope that he will be elected (724) a (354) member of<br />
Parliament ?<br />
I wish he may succeed in his <strong>under</strong>taking.<br />
I wish he may succeed (723) in his <strong>under</strong>taking.<br />
It is possible that I may have been imprudent, but I have not<br />
been criminal.<br />
It is possible that I may have been (729) imprudent, but I have<br />
not been criminal.<br />
I do not like you to go out with that good-for-nothing fellow.<br />
I do not like you to go out (724) with that good-for-nothing fellow.<br />
I do not think you have acted prudently.<br />
I do not think you have acted (724, 636) prudently.<br />
I take so much care with your education, in <strong>the</strong> hope that you<br />
will profit by it .<br />
I take so much care with (of) your education, in <strong>the</strong> hope that you<br />
will profit (723) by it (240).<br />
I do not forget that you have invested much capital in that<br />
speculation.<br />
I do not forget that you have invested (,725) much capital (681) in<br />
that speculation.<br />
Tell <strong>the</strong> servant to awake me early tomorrow morning.<br />
Tell <strong>the</strong> servant to awake (723, 728) me early to-morrow morning.<br />
Stop with me until I receive assistance, I beg of you.<br />
Stop with me until I receive (730) assistance, I beg of you.<br />
EXERCISE LXII.<br />
Unless you invite him yourself, he will not come.<br />
Unless you invite (733) him yourself, he will not come.<br />
The elephant never attacks, unless he is provoked.<br />
The elephant never attacks, unless he is provoked.<br />
I do not think he was working when I rang <strong>the</strong> bell.<br />
411
I do not think he was working (724, 746) when I rang <strong>the</strong> bell.<br />
It was necessary that two of our squadrons should advance , <strong>and</strong><br />
force <strong>the</strong> enemy's line.<br />
It was necessary (704) that two of our squadrons 1 should advance<br />
(729), <strong>and</strong> force <strong>the</strong> enemy's line.<br />
Learn your lessons for tomorrow, lest your master punish you.<br />
Learn your lessons for to-morrow, lest your master punish (733)<br />
you.<br />
If Mr.<br />
John comes before dinner, tell him to wait for me, until I come<br />
back .<br />
If Mr.<br />
John comes (752) before dinner, tell him to wait for (251, 728)<br />
me, until I come back (736).<br />
I wish you would play this piece of music slowly <strong>and</strong> with<br />
expression.<br />
I wish (718) you would (748) play this piece of music slowly <strong>and</strong><br />
with expression.<br />
2 He wishes that I should reflect on that proposal.<br />
2 He wishes (desiderare) that I should reflect (723) on that<br />
proposal.<br />
I wrote to him by post, so that he might learn <strong>the</strong> news in time.<br />
I wrote (707) to him by post, so that (730) he might learn <strong>the</strong> news<br />
in time.<br />
That man has given me a fearful blow with a stick.<br />
That man has given me a fearful blow with a stick.<br />
3 If I <strong>had</strong> some paper, I would write to him.<br />
3 If (754) I <strong>had</strong> some paper, I would write to him.<br />
Whatever he <strong>under</strong>takes to d o, he does it diligently.<br />
Whatever he <strong>under</strong>takes (730) to do, he does it diligently.<br />
Your fa<strong>the</strong>r will pay all your debts, on condition that you will<br />
execute his orders faithfully.<br />
Your fa<strong>the</strong>r will pay all your debts, on condition that (730) you will<br />
execute his orders faithfully.<br />
I do not know where little William is .<br />
I do not know where little William is (724).<br />
412
There are few men whose character is better known than his.<br />
There are few men whose character is (741) better known (365)<br />
than his.<br />
It is <strong>the</strong> most interesting book I ever read .<br />
It is <strong>the</strong> most interesting book I ever read (741).<br />
EXERCISE LXIII.<br />
He is greatly loved by his parents.<br />
He is greatly loved (765) by (270) his parents.<br />
He has been long considered <strong>the</strong> best poet of <strong>the</strong> age.<br />
He has been long considered (714, 765) <strong>the</strong> best poet of <strong>the</strong> age.<br />
They were ordered to keep <strong>the</strong>mselves ready, in case of a sudden<br />
attack.<br />
They were ordered (772) to keep <strong>the</strong>mselves ready, in case of a<br />
sudden attack.<br />
The Austrians were defeated by <strong>the</strong> Prussians at <strong>the</strong> battle of<br />
Sadowa.<br />
The Austrians were defeated (767) by <strong>the</strong> Prussians at <strong>the</strong> battle<br />
of Sadowa.<br />
We went w<strong>and</strong>ering all night through <strong>the</strong> forest.<br />
We went (699, 704) w<strong>and</strong>ering all night through <strong>the</strong> forest.<br />
It is generally believed that Rome was founded by Romulus,<br />
though <strong>the</strong>re are no proofs in support of <strong>the</strong> tradition.<br />
It is generally believed (771) that Rome was founded (723, 765) by<br />
Romulus, though <strong>the</strong>re are no proofs in support of <strong>the</strong> tradition.<br />
Is it true that your cousin John has married a Spanish lady ?<br />
Is it true that your cousin John has married (727) a Spanish lady<br />
?<br />
I think so ; <strong>the</strong>y speak of it everywhere in town.<br />
I think so (271) ; <strong>the</strong>y speak of it (771) everywhere in town.<br />
I have heard <strong>the</strong> report of a gun.<br />
I have heard 1 <strong>the</strong> report of a gun.<br />
I am requested to tell you not to go away without leave.<br />
I am requested (772) to tell you not to go away without leave.<br />
They were allowed to enter <strong>the</strong> church after Divine Service.<br />
They were allowed (772) to enter <strong>the</strong> church after Divine Service.<br />
413
These pictures have been admired , but I am sure <strong>the</strong>y will not<br />
be sold .<br />
These pictures have been admired (765), but I am sure (636) <strong>the</strong>y<br />
will not be sold (771).<br />
It is reported that he will be made Minister for Foreign Affairs.<br />
It is reported 2 that he will be made (769) Minister for Foreign<br />
Affairs.<br />
I have heard it said that lions can be trained to perform like dogs.<br />
I have heard it said 3 that lions can be trained (771) to perform<br />
like dogs.<br />
I have not heard from my bro<strong>the</strong>r-in-law since <strong>the</strong> 15th of<br />
January.<br />
I have not heard from 4 my bro<strong>the</strong>r-in-law since <strong>the</strong> 15th (546) of<br />
January.<br />
At country fairs one sees very curious people.<br />
At country fairs 5 one sees very curious people.<br />
6 It is said that popular songs reveal <strong>the</strong> character of a people.<br />
6 It is said (771) that popular songs reveal (723) <strong>the</strong> character of a<br />
people.<br />
They were advised by <strong>the</strong> judge to confess <strong>the</strong>ir crime.<br />
They were advised (767) by <strong>the</strong> judge to confess <strong>the</strong>ir crime.<br />
The barbarous sport of <strong>the</strong> bull fight was introduced into Spain by<br />
<strong>the</strong> Arabs, amongst whom it was celebrated with great pomp.<br />
The barbarous sport of <strong>the</strong> bull fight was introduced (765) into<br />
Spain by <strong>the</strong> Arabs, amongst whom it was celebrated (771) with<br />
great pomp.<br />
They were promised two pounds each .<br />
They were promised (772) two pounds each (659).<br />
EXERCISE LXIV.<br />
I would like to speak to you on a matter of importance.<br />
I would like (718, 786) to speak to you on (298) a matter of<br />
importance.<br />
They are to be here this afternoon at three o'clock.<br />
They are to be (790) here this afternoon at three o'clock.<br />
I ought to write to my mo<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
I ought to (791) write to my mo<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
414
My essay must be ready for <strong>the</strong> next issue of <strong>the</strong> magazine.<br />
My essay must be (792) ready for <strong>the</strong> next issue of <strong>the</strong> magazine.<br />
Will you have a steel pen, or a quill ?<br />
Will you have (787) a steel pen, or a quill ?<br />
I prefer a quill, if you have one .<br />
I prefer a quill, if you have one (144).<br />
Will you be so good as to tell me where you buy your gloves ?<br />
Will you be so good as (788) to tell me where you buy your gloves ?<br />
With <strong>the</strong> greatest pleasure; I buy <strong>the</strong>m at Johnstone's .<br />
With <strong>the</strong> greatest (520) pleasure; I buy <strong>the</strong>m at Johnstone's (434).<br />
Our cousin Charles is expected to visit us tomorrow, or <strong>the</strong> day<br />
after tomorrow.<br />
Our cousin Charles is expected (793) to visit us to-morrow, or <strong>the</strong><br />
day after to-morrow.<br />
The Queen is expected to leave London this week.<br />
The Queen is expected (793) to leave London this week.<br />
We should encourage <strong>the</strong> beautiful, because <strong>the</strong> useful is sure to<br />
be sought after.<br />
We should (791) encourage <strong>the</strong> beautiful, (336) because <strong>the</strong><br />
useful is sure to be sought after.<br />
They say that <strong>the</strong> procession is to pass through Piccadilly.<br />
They say (771) that <strong>the</strong> procession is (792) to pass through<br />
Piccadilly.<br />
It ought to have passed through Oxford Street.<br />
It ought to have passed (791) through Oxford Street.<br />
Am I to do all this work for nothing ?<br />
Am I to do (792) all this work for nothing ?<br />
No, you will be paid.<br />
No, you will be paid.<br />
She is to write to him three times a week.<br />
She is to write (792) to him three times a (<strong>the</strong>) week.<br />
Will you go with me, or not ?<br />
Will you go (305) with me, or not ?<br />
I want you to make up your mind.<br />
I want you (789) to make up your mind.<br />
415
1 I am sorry, but I <strong>cannot</strong> ; I have to be at my fa<strong>the</strong>r's office before<br />
five o'clock .<br />
1 I am sorry, but I <strong>cannot</strong> ; I have to be at my fa<strong>the</strong>r's office before<br />
five o'clock (548).<br />
You should have told me that last night ; I could have asked<br />
Charles to come.<br />
You should have told me (786) that last night ; I could have asked<br />
Charles to come.<br />
Do not let him bring those flowers in your bedroom .<br />
Do not let (796) him bring those (594) flowers in your bedroom<br />
(431).<br />
EXERCISE LXV.<br />
Can that boy write ?<br />
Can (795) that boy write ?<br />
No, he can nei<strong>the</strong>r write nor read.<br />
No, he can nei<strong>the</strong>r (801) write nor read.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r has only one horse, but it is a good one.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r has (802) only one horse, but it is a good one.<br />
They could not deny <strong>the</strong> accusation we brought against <strong>the</strong>m.<br />
They could (794) not deny <strong>the</strong> accusation we brought against<br />
<strong>the</strong>m.<br />
Mind <strong>the</strong>y do not come here ; if <strong>the</strong>y do, I shall never come to see<br />
you again.<br />
Mind (806) <strong>the</strong>y do not come here ; if (752) <strong>the</strong>y do, I shall never<br />
come to see you again.<br />
2 I recognized him, although I <strong>had</strong> never seen him before.<br />
2 I recognised him, although (740) I <strong>had</strong> never (804) seen him<br />
before.<br />
He can only do ma<strong>the</strong>matics .<br />
He can (802) only do ma<strong>the</strong>matics (419).<br />
It was <strong>the</strong>y who prevented us from writing<br />
It was <strong>the</strong>y who prevented us from writing (to write.<br />
)<br />
Unless you speak to <strong>the</strong>m, <strong>the</strong>y will always prevent us coming.<br />
Unless you speak to <strong>the</strong>m, <strong>the</strong>y will always prevent us coming.<br />
I apprehend that he will succeed ; I wish he would not.<br />
416
I apprehend (808) that he will succeed ; I wish (748) he would not.<br />
3 I do not deny his being extremely clever, but he is too<br />
conceited.<br />
3 I do not deny (815) his being extremely clever, but he is too<br />
conceited.<br />
I am afraid that Frederick will not succeed ; I wish he would.<br />
I am afraid (808) that Frederick will not succeed (258) ; I wish he<br />
would.<br />
3 I have no fear of her speaking.<br />
3 I have no fear (812) of her speaking.<br />
EXERCISE LXVI.<br />
Have you finished <strong>the</strong> letter I gave you to write ?<br />
Have you finished (820) <strong>the</strong> letter (636) I gave you to (310) write ?<br />
The heavy rains, <strong>which</strong> we <strong>had</strong> in <strong>the</strong> spring, have been <strong>the</strong><br />
cause of <strong>many</strong> diseases.<br />
The heavy rains, <strong>which</strong> we <strong>had</strong> (704) in <strong>the</strong> spring, have been <strong>the</strong><br />
cause of <strong>many</strong> diseases.<br />
We have not slept for <strong>the</strong> last forty eight hours.<br />
We have not slept (827) for <strong>the</strong> last forty-eight hours.<br />
The painter Caracci having been pl<strong>under</strong>ed by some robbers,<br />
drew <strong>the</strong>ir likenesses so well that <strong>the</strong>y were discovered .<br />
The painter Caracci having been pl<strong>under</strong>ed by some robbers,<br />
drew <strong>the</strong>ir likenesses so well that <strong>the</strong>y were discovered (704,<br />
830).<br />
The hostile army being routed , <strong>the</strong>ir camp pl<strong>under</strong>ed, <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
baggage carried away, <strong>the</strong>ir ammunition taken, <strong>the</strong> French re-<br />
entered triumphant.<br />
The hostile army being routed (689), <strong>the</strong>ir camp pl<strong>under</strong>ed, <strong>the</strong>ir<br />
baggage carried away, <strong>the</strong>ir ammunition taken, <strong>the</strong> French re-<br />
entered triumphant.<br />
A noble but confused thought is a diamond covered with dust.<br />
A noble but confused thought is a diamond covered with (831, 348)<br />
dust.<br />
The high mountains of Switzerl<strong>and</strong> are always covered with snow<br />
<strong>and</strong> ice.<br />
417
The high mountains of (330) Switzerl<strong>and</strong> are always covered with<br />
snow <strong>and</strong> ice.<br />
King Harold <strong>and</strong> his two bro<strong>the</strong>rs were killed at <strong>the</strong> battle of<br />
Hastings.<br />
King Harold <strong>and</strong> his two bro<strong>the</strong>rs were killed (704, 830) at <strong>the</strong><br />
battle of Hastings.<br />
Demetrius, on hearing that <strong>the</strong> A<strong>the</strong>nians <strong>had</strong> overturned his<br />
statues, remarked, " They have not overturned <strong>the</strong> virtues <strong>which</strong><br />
erected <strong>the</strong>m to me.<br />
"<br />
Demetrius, on hearing 5 that <strong>the</strong> A<strong>the</strong>nians <strong>had</strong> overturned (833)<br />
his statues, remarked, " They have not overturned <strong>the</strong> virtues<br />
<strong>which</strong> erected (821) <strong>the</strong>m to me.<br />
" (218).<br />
Look, I have bought this box to put my clo<strong>the</strong>s in ; do you think it<br />
is large enough ?<br />
Look, I have bought this box (680) to put my clo<strong>the</strong>s in (198, 238) ;<br />
do you think it is large enough ?<br />
Yes, I think so .<br />
Yes, I think so (271).<br />
As soon as he <strong>had</strong> received his money, he started for America.<br />
As soon as he <strong>had</strong> received (832) his money, he started for<br />
America.<br />
Before men possessed <strong>the</strong> art of writing, all deeds worthy of being<br />
preserved were transmitted to posterity in verse .<br />
Before (730) men possessed <strong>the</strong> art of writing, all deeds worthy of<br />
being preserved were transmitted (701, 769, 830) to posterity in<br />
verse (verses).<br />
EXERCISE LXVII.<br />
Are you warm, Charles ?<br />
Are you (122) warm, (a) Charles ?<br />
Yes.<br />
Yes.<br />
I thank you ; when I came in I was very cold .<br />
I thank you ; when I came in I was very cold (b).<br />
When <strong>the</strong>se men came in <strong>the</strong>y were very hungry <strong>and</strong> thirsty .<br />
418
When <strong>the</strong>se men came in (705) <strong>the</strong>y were (695) very hungry (c)<br />
<strong>and</strong> thirsty (d).<br />
The children are very sleepy .<br />
The children are very sleepy (e).<br />
Do you think that Margaret is in <strong>the</strong> right ?<br />
Do you think (691) that Margaret is in <strong>the</strong> right (f) (724) ?<br />
Yes, <strong>and</strong> that you are in <strong>the</strong> wrong .<br />
Yes, <strong>and</strong> that you are in <strong>the</strong> wrong (g).<br />
I never thought that you would be so wicked as to offend her.<br />
I never thought (691) that you would be so wicked as 1 to offend<br />
her.<br />
These little children are afraid of that big dog .<br />
These little children (442) are afraid (h) of that big dog (437).<br />
Do not detain me, because I am in a hurry .<br />
Do (126, 128) not detain me, because I am in a hurry (i).<br />
I am very glad to hear that your bro<strong>the</strong>r is going to Florence.<br />
I am very glad (j) to hear that your bro<strong>the</strong>r is going to Florence.<br />
Shut that window ; I feel very cold .<br />
Shut that window ; I feel very cold (b).<br />
Those who think <strong>the</strong>y are always in <strong>the</strong> right are often wrong.<br />
Those who (630) think <strong>the</strong>y are always in <strong>the</strong> right (f) are often<br />
wrong.<br />
They were very happy to be again with us.<br />
They were very happy (j) to be again with us.<br />
I think you should be more careful of your health.<br />
I think you should be (791) more careful of (k) your health.<br />
If he would act sensibly, he would be liked by everybody.<br />
If (754) he would act sensibly, (l) he would be liked by (270)<br />
everybody.<br />
If he were wise, he would be rich.<br />
If he were wise, (l) he would be rich.<br />
EXERCISE LXVIII.<br />
Your bro<strong>the</strong>r looked very well when I saw him a few days ago.<br />
Your bro<strong>the</strong>r looked very well (a) when I saw him a few days ago.<br />
You do not look well ; what is <strong>the</strong> matter with you ?<br />
419
You do not look well (b) ; what (611) is <strong>the</strong> matter with you (835) ?<br />
I feel a pain in my head, <strong>and</strong> in my right arm.<br />
I feel a pain in (c) my head, <strong>and</strong> in my right arm.<br />
She has <strong>the</strong> money ready to pay him if he comes.<br />
She has <strong>the</strong> money ready (d) to pay him if (752) he comes.<br />
I intend to buy a copy of Tennyson's poems for you .<br />
I intend (f) to buy a copy of Tennyson's poems for you (213).<br />
He has a wish to eat some French strawberries.<br />
He has a wish (g) to eat some French strawberries.<br />
She <strong>had</strong> a great desire to see <strong>the</strong> Tower of London.<br />
She <strong>had</strong> a great desire to (h) see <strong>the</strong> Tower of London.<br />
They aim at making money.<br />
They aim at (i) making money.<br />
Now I will tell you what took place at my bro<strong>the</strong>r's house .<br />
Now I will tell you what took place (j) at my bro<strong>the</strong>r's house (434).<br />
He may say what he likes , he may do what he likes , he will not<br />
succeed .<br />
He may say what he likes (k), he may do what he likes (k), he will<br />
not succeed (258).<br />
Do not pay attention to what he says ; he has no influence .<br />
Do not pay attention to (216) what (610) he says ; he has no<br />
influence (l).<br />
Your bro<strong>the</strong>r Louis is always out of temper .<br />
Your bro<strong>the</strong>r Louis is always out of temper (m).<br />
I am afraid he bears you a grudge ; I d o not know why.<br />
I am afraid (808) he bears you a grudge (n) ; I do not know why.<br />
He is angry with me because I sold <strong>the</strong> horse without telling him<br />
anything.<br />
He is angry with (o) me because I sold (707) <strong>the</strong> horse without<br />
telling him anything.<br />
Charles is easily offended .<br />
Charles is easily offended (p).<br />
It is true that I intend to go to Florence <strong>and</strong> remain <strong>the</strong>re for five<br />
or six months, but I <strong>cannot</strong> make up my mind thus in a moment.<br />
420
It is true that 3 I intend (f) to go to Florence <strong>and</strong> remain <strong>the</strong>re<br />
(239) for (311) five or six months, but I <strong>cannot</strong> make up my mind<br />
(803) thus in a moment.<br />
EXERCISE LXIX.<br />
It is necessary to make all preparations for <strong>the</strong> Prince of Wales,<br />
who will arrive at two o'clock, with <strong>the</strong> Princess of Wales <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />
Prince of Naples.<br />
It is necessary (a) to make all (482) preparations for <strong>the</strong> Prince of<br />
Wales, who will arrive at two o'clock, with <strong>the</strong> Princess of Wales<br />
<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> Prince of Naples.<br />
I must make a speech on behalf of our College.<br />
I must (a) make a speech on behalf of our College.<br />
It is worth while to go to some expense on such an occasion.<br />
It is worth while (b) to go to (make) some expense on (650) such<br />
an occasion.<br />
They have it in <strong>the</strong>ir power to do a great deal of good to <strong>the</strong><br />
institution.<br />
They have it in <strong>the</strong>ir power (c) to do a great deal of good to <strong>the</strong><br />
institution.<br />
I hope our director will be satisfied with our endeavors.<br />
I hope our director will be satisfied with (d) our endeavours.<br />
I am sure he will .<br />
I am sure he will (208).<br />
Well, boys, are you ready ?<br />
Well, boys, are you ready (e) ?<br />
Yes, we are quite ready, except Mary ; she is always late .<br />
Yes, we are quite ready, except Mary ; she is always late (f).<br />
Those two boys never agree .<br />
Those two boys never agree (g).<br />
To say <strong>the</strong> truth, that little fellow <strong>the</strong>re, is a good for nothing .<br />
To (225) say <strong>the</strong> truth, that little fellow <strong>the</strong>re, is a good for nothing<br />
(h).<br />
When I caught hold of him, he was on <strong>the</strong> point of throwing a<br />
stone at my window.<br />
When I caught hold of him, he was (695) on <strong>the</strong> point of (l)<br />
throwing a stone at my window.<br />
421
Does that man bear a good character? .<br />
Does that man (606) bear a good character? (m).<br />
No, he does not .<br />
No, he does not (208).<br />
I should be very glad to know who that lady is.<br />
I should be very glad (n) to know who that lady is.<br />
I have <strong>had</strong> to grant him all he asked me.<br />
I have <strong>had</strong> (dovere) 2 to grant him all (610) he asked me.<br />
I have <strong>had</strong> to come alone.<br />
I have <strong>had</strong> (dovere) 2 to come alone.<br />
He has not been able to sleep.<br />
He has not been able (potere) 3 to sleep.<br />
He has not been able to succeed.<br />
He has not been able (potere) 3 to succeed.<br />
They would not walk.<br />
They would (volere) 2 (707) not walk.<br />
They would not live in dishonor.<br />
They would (volere) 3 (707) not live in (with) dishonour.<br />
EXERCISE LXX.<br />
I do not like to go on foot .<br />
I do not like (a) to go on foot (b).<br />
My sisters are very fond of riding in a carriage ; <strong>the</strong>y very seldom<br />
walk .<br />
My sisters are very fond of riding in a carriage (c) ; <strong>the</strong>y very<br />
seldom walk (b).<br />
Elizabeth rides every morning to <strong>the</strong> top of <strong>the</strong> hill with her<br />
bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
Elizabeth rides (d) every morning to <strong>the</strong> top 2 of <strong>the</strong> hill with her<br />
bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
Why do you get into a passion for nothing ?<br />
Why do you get into a passion (e) for nothing ?<br />
The sound of this instrument is so melodious that it makes me<br />
fall into ecstasies .<br />
The sound of this instrument is so (536) melodious that it makes<br />
me fall into ecstasies (f).<br />
422
He is very proud of his riches ; <strong>and</strong> she is very proud of her<br />
beauty.<br />
He is very proud of (g) his (560) riches ; <strong>and</strong> she is very proud of<br />
her beauty.<br />
His affairs are very prosperous .<br />
His affairs are very prosperous (h).<br />
His business is getting better <strong>and</strong> better .<br />
His business is getting better <strong>and</strong> better (i).<br />
Their condition is getting worse <strong>and</strong> worse .<br />
Their condition is getting worse <strong>and</strong> worse (j).<br />
The scheme has failed ; I am afraid he is ruined.<br />
The scheme has failed (k) ; I am afraid (808) he is ruined.<br />
I do not think so .<br />
I do not think so (271).<br />
The ship sank near <strong>the</strong> harbor, at three o'clock p.m.<br />
The ship sank (l) near <strong>the</strong> harbour, at three o'clock p.m. (548).<br />
His dog followed him wherever he went.<br />
His dog followed him (m) (697) wherever he went.<br />
Some of his verses are really beautiful, <strong>the</strong>y are always in my<br />
mind .<br />
Some of his verses are really beautiful, <strong>the</strong>y are always in my<br />
mind (n).<br />
Let us come to a decision at once ; I am tired of arguing .<br />
Let us come to a decision (o) at once ; I am tired of arguing (683).<br />
He was so slow in making up his mind that I lost my patience.<br />
He was so slow (p) in making up his mind (803) that I lost my<br />
patience.<br />
I do not want to suffer from it .<br />
I do not want to suffer from it (q) (240).<br />
I am going now ; goodbye.<br />
I am going (r) now ; goodbye.<br />
EXERCISE LXXI.<br />
He would make me believe that he was rich.<br />
He would make me believe (a) that he was rich.<br />
I never believe flatterers.<br />
423
I never believe (b) flatterers.<br />
He does not repent of having listened to his bad companions.<br />
He does (784) not repent of (184) having listened to (c) his bad<br />
companions.<br />
He always addresses everybody in <strong>the</strong> second person singular .<br />
He always addresses everybody in <strong>the</strong> second person singular (d).<br />
Italian ladies <strong>and</strong> gentlemen address <strong>the</strong>ir inferiors in <strong>the</strong><br />
second person plural .<br />
Italian ladies <strong>and</strong> gentlemen address <strong>the</strong>ir inferiors in <strong>the</strong><br />
second person plural (e).<br />
I always address him in <strong>the</strong> third person singular , respectfully.<br />
I always address him in <strong>the</strong> third person singular (f ), respectfully.<br />
He gave me his word that he would be here again in a week .<br />
He gave me his word (g) that he would be here again in a week<br />
(549).<br />
It is said that he set fire to his house.<br />
It is said (771) that he set fire to (h) his house.<br />
Why do you not begin your poem ?<br />
Why do you not begin (i) your poem ?<br />
You <strong>had</strong> better help me a little .<br />
You <strong>had</strong> better help me a little (j).<br />
They were obliged to account for <strong>the</strong>ir conduct.<br />
They were obliged to account for (k) <strong>the</strong>ir (560) conduct.<br />
This cloth borders on red .<br />
This cloth borders on red (l).<br />
I wish I could give vent to my feelings.<br />
I wish I could 2 give vent to (n) my feelings.<br />
They looked at me two or three times.<br />
They looked at me (o) two or three times.<br />
The President received him this morning.<br />
The President received him (p) this morning.<br />
He seized a stick, <strong>and</strong> began to strike me.<br />
He seized (q) a stick, <strong>and</strong> began to strike me.<br />
He agrees that you are in <strong>the</strong> right .<br />
He agrees that you are in <strong>the</strong> right (r).<br />
424
This pen writes well .<br />
This pen writes well (w).<br />
EXERCISE LXXII.<br />
He has published a good translation of Moliere's Comedies.<br />
He has published (a) a good translation of Moliere's Comedies.<br />
He fell into <strong>the</strong> snare like an idiot.<br />
He fell (704) into <strong>the</strong> snare (b) like an idiot.<br />
I am bold enough to send him a challenge.<br />
I am bold enough (c) to send him a challenge.<br />
His election gave rise to a very warm discussion.<br />
His election gave rise to (d) (704) a very warm discussion.<br />
They are making fun of you .<br />
They are making fun of you (e).<br />
Mary always throws <strong>the</strong> blame on her sister.<br />
Mary always throws <strong>the</strong> blame on (f) her sister.<br />
When we accused him, he showed a great deal of irritation .<br />
When we accused him, he showed a great deal of irritation (g).<br />
When I told him <strong>the</strong> news, he burst out laughing .<br />
When I told him <strong>the</strong> news, he burst out laughing (h).<br />
I advise you not to lend her your parasol.<br />
I advise you not to lend her (j) your parasol.<br />
That busybody meddles with everything .<br />
That busybody meddles with everything (k).<br />
They are leading a life of idleness .<br />
They are leading a life of idleness (o).<br />
He would not make himself known as <strong>the</strong> author of <strong>the</strong> comedy.<br />
He would not make himself known as (p) <strong>the</strong> author of <strong>the</strong><br />
comedy.<br />
I wish that she would not meddle with my affairs.<br />
I wish that she would not (723) meddle with (q) my affairs.<br />
My dear friend, do not worry yourself about trifles, be contented .<br />
My dear friend, do not worry yourself about (r) trifles, be contented<br />
's).<br />
The thief ran away directly.<br />
The thief ran away (t) directly.<br />
425
It is possible that Frederick <strong>and</strong> his friends will arrive this<br />
afternoon.<br />
It is possible (u) that Frederick <strong>and</strong> his friends will arrive (Pres.<br />
Subj. ) this afternoon.<br />
EXERCISE LXXIII.<br />
It was fine wea<strong>the</strong>r during <strong>the</strong> whole month we remained at<br />
Brighton.<br />
It was fine wea<strong>the</strong>r (a) (704) during <strong>the</strong> whole month we<br />
remained at Brighton.<br />
The wea<strong>the</strong>r is very bad just now ; we <strong>cannot</strong> go out.<br />
The wea<strong>the</strong>r is very bad (b) just now ; we <strong>cannot</strong> go out.<br />
Sometimes it is very cold in Paris, I assure you.<br />
Sometimes it is very cold (c) in (207) Paris, I assure you.<br />
In summer it is very warm in Italy ; perhaps too warm.<br />
In summer it is very warm (d) in Italy ; perhaps too warm.<br />
In <strong>the</strong> western part of Irel<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> wea<strong>the</strong>r is very damp .<br />
In <strong>the</strong> western part of Irel<strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> wea<strong>the</strong>r is very damp (e).<br />
At home we breakfast at seven o'clock in summer, <strong>and</strong> eight<br />
o'clock in winter.<br />
At home we breakfast (f) at seven o'clock (548) in (328) summer,<br />
<strong>and</strong> eight o'clock in winter.<br />
We shall have luncheon before we go out.<br />
We shall have luncheon (g) before we go out.<br />
I encouraged him by promising that I would take him with me.<br />
I encouraged him (h) by promising (686) that I would take him<br />
with me.<br />
He was always boasting of his ancestors.<br />
He was always boasting (i) (701) of his ancestors.<br />
The crowd made room for her.<br />
The crowd made room for (j) her.<br />
They halted during <strong>the</strong> night.<br />
They halted (k) during <strong>the</strong> night.<br />
He is sulking with me, because I would not lend him my horse.<br />
He is sulking (l) with me, because I would not lend him my horse.<br />
The ship set sail for America three days ago ; she <strong>had</strong> three<br />
hundred passengers on board.<br />
426
The ship set sail (n) for America three days ago ; she <strong>had</strong> three<br />
hundred passengers on board.<br />
They were shipwrecked off <strong>the</strong> coast of Cornwall.<br />
They were shipwrecked (o) off <strong>the</strong> coast of Cornwall.<br />
He pretended to give <strong>the</strong> money to his fa<strong>the</strong>r, but instead of that,<br />
he put it in his pocket .<br />
He pretended (p) to give <strong>the</strong> money to his fa<strong>the</strong>r, but instead of<br />
that, he put it in his pocket (572).<br />
He played ano<strong>the</strong>r tune to please <strong>the</strong> officers of <strong>the</strong> staff.<br />
He played ano<strong>the</strong>r tune to please (q) <strong>the</strong> officers of <strong>the</strong> staff.<br />
1 On that occasion he acted as chaplain.<br />
1 On (298) that occasion he acted as (r) chaplain.<br />
He acted as a fa<strong>the</strong>r to her.<br />
He acted as 's) a fa<strong>the</strong>r to her.<br />
They drank <strong>the</strong> chairman's health .<br />
They drank <strong>the</strong> chairman's health (u).<br />
He is always laying down <strong>the</strong> law .<br />
He is always laying down <strong>the</strong> law (v).<br />
EXERCISE LXXIV.<br />
I intend to pay him a visit .<br />
I intend (a) to pay him a visit (b).<br />
We shall take a walk this evening after tea.<br />
We shall take a walk (c) this evening after tea.<br />
I take a bath every morning before breakfast.<br />
I take a bath (d) every morning before breakfast.<br />
I asked him to lend me his gun, but he turned a deaf ear .<br />
I asked him to lend me his gun, but he turned a deaf ear (e).<br />
I want to show him that I am not easily frightened.<br />
I want to show him (f) that I am not easily frightened.<br />
Do not hurt him with that big stick.<br />
Do not (126) hurt him (g) with that big stick.<br />
You never pay attention to what I tell you.<br />
You never pay attention (h) to what I tell you.<br />
Remember that you have promised me not to mention it to my<br />
bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
427
Remember that you have promised me not to mention it (i) to my<br />
bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
He gave proofs of great courage in <strong>the</strong> last war.<br />
He gave proofs of great courage (j) in <strong>the</strong> last war.<br />
We were busy preparing <strong>the</strong> exhibition when my fa<strong>the</strong>r peeped in<br />
.<br />
We were busy preparing <strong>the</strong> exhibition 1 when my fa<strong>the</strong>r peeped<br />
in (k).<br />
I have <strong>had</strong> two tables made for <strong>the</strong> garden.<br />
I have <strong>had</strong> two tables made (l) for <strong>the</strong> garden.<br />
He <strong>had</strong> a letter written to me by his secretary.<br />
He <strong>had</strong> a letter written (l) to me by his secretary.<br />
This dark tint fetches out <strong>the</strong> colors of <strong>the</strong> flowers.<br />
This dark tint fetches out (m) <strong>the</strong> colours of <strong>the</strong> flowers.<br />
Take courage, my dear friend.<br />
Take courage, (o) my dear friend.<br />
He pretended to be ignorant of all that <strong>had</strong> happened.<br />
He pretended to be ignorant of (p) all that (610) <strong>had</strong> happened.<br />
They ridicule everybody.<br />
They ridicule (q) everybody.<br />
You should not be afraid ; you should put yourself forward .<br />
You should not be afraid ; you should put yourself forward (r).<br />
If you draw near , you will see <strong>the</strong> effect.<br />
If you draw near 's), you will see <strong>the</strong> effect.<br />
Draw back a little ; I <strong>cannot</strong> see <strong>the</strong> game.<br />
Draw back (t) a little ; I <strong>cannot</strong> see <strong>the</strong> game.<br />
When <strong>the</strong>y meet, <strong>the</strong>y bow to one ano<strong>the</strong>r most respectfully .<br />
When <strong>the</strong>y meet, <strong>the</strong>y bow to one ano<strong>the</strong>r most respectfully (u).<br />
He always gets up to work at <strong>the</strong> break of day , <strong>and</strong> comes home<br />
at sunset .<br />
He always gets up to work (225) at <strong>the</strong> break of day (v), <strong>and</strong> comes<br />
home at sunset (w).<br />
EXERCISE LXXV.<br />
He does not value your friendship ; so much <strong>the</strong> worse for him.<br />
428
He does not value (a) your friendship ; so much <strong>the</strong> worse 1 for<br />
him.<br />
I was astonished to see him dressed in mufti.<br />
I was astonished (b) to see him dressed in mufti.<br />
I could not help it .<br />
I could not help it (c).<br />
He promised to become serious , <strong>and</strong> I backed him with all my<br />
means.<br />
He promised to become serious (d), <strong>and</strong> I backed him (e) with all<br />
my means.<br />
I asked his parents some questions .<br />
I asked his parents (655) some questions (f).<br />
When I caught <strong>the</strong> pickpocket, at first he looked as if butter would<br />
not melt in his mouth , <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>n he began to be impertinent .<br />
When I caught <strong>the</strong> pickpocket, at first he looked as if butter would<br />
not melt in his mouth (g), <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>n he began to be impertinent<br />
(h).<br />
The policeman told him that it was useless to brag , <strong>and</strong> that he<br />
would take him down a peg or two .<br />
The policeman told him that it was useless to brag (i), <strong>and</strong> that he<br />
would take him down a peg or two (j).<br />
What do <strong>the</strong>se men d o ?<br />
What do <strong>the</strong>se men do ?<br />
This one is a tailor <strong>and</strong> that one a carpenter.<br />
This one is a tailor (k) <strong>and</strong> that one a carpenter.<br />
The procession broke up <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> people began to form groups .<br />
The procession broke up (704) <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong> people began to form<br />
groups (l).<br />
They greeted us warmly.<br />
They greeted us (m) warmly.<br />
He has promised my fa<strong>the</strong>r to st<strong>and</strong> guaranty for me.<br />
He has promised my fa<strong>the</strong>r to st<strong>and</strong> guaranty (m) for me.<br />
Never mind , he will be compelled to speak.<br />
Never mind (o), he will be compelled to speak.<br />
What will you do ?<br />
What will you do (p) ?<br />
429
I know him ; that is his character .<br />
I know him ; that is his character (q).<br />
There is plenty to do , <strong>the</strong> members of <strong>the</strong> Commission are<br />
coming here to dine.<br />
There is plenty to do (r), <strong>the</strong> members of <strong>the</strong> Commission are<br />
coming here to dine.<br />
This time <strong>the</strong> secretary will have something to d o for his salary.<br />
This time <strong>the</strong> secretary will have something to do for his salary.<br />
EXERCISE LXXVI.<br />
How are you today ?<br />
How are (a) you to-day ?<br />
I am very well, I thank you.<br />
I am very well, I thank you.<br />
Do you reside in this neighborhood ?<br />
Do you reside (b) in this neighbourhood ?<br />
No, I am staying with my sister.<br />
No, I am staying 2 with my sister.<br />
The ladies were allowed to sit down , but <strong>the</strong> gentlemen <strong>had</strong> to<br />
st<strong>and</strong> all <strong>the</strong> time.<br />
The ladies were allowed to sit down (c), but <strong>the</strong> gentlemen <strong>had</strong><br />
(790) to st<strong>and</strong> (d) all <strong>the</strong> time.<br />
When you came in I was listening to a very interesting<br />
conversation.<br />
When you came in I was listening (e) to (698) a very interesting<br />
conversation.<br />
Be on your guard ; for he might escape.<br />
Be on your guard (f) ; for he might (794) escape.<br />
I saw that <strong>the</strong> stranger was pricking up his ears when you were<br />
speaking to my partner.<br />
I saw that <strong>the</strong> stranger was pricking up his ears (g) when you<br />
were speaking to my partner.<br />
Lions <strong>and</strong> tigers lie in wait for <strong>the</strong>ir prey near streams <strong>and</strong><br />
brooks.<br />
Lions <strong>and</strong> tigers lie in wait (i) for <strong>the</strong>ir prey near streams <strong>and</strong><br />
brooks.<br />
He wanted to surprise us, but we were prepared .<br />
430
He wanted to (786, 307) surprise us, but we were prepared (j).<br />
I hesitated whe<strong>the</strong>r I was to go to Paris.<br />
I hesitated (k) whe<strong>the</strong>r I was to go (756) to Paris.<br />
Be quiet , John.<br />
Be quiet (l), John.<br />
Let us be merry, children ; today it is <strong>the</strong> birthday of little Charlie<br />
.<br />
Let us be merry, (m) children ; to-day it is little Charlie's (448)<br />
birthday.<br />
His being silent gave great advantage to his enemies.<br />
His being (683) silent (n) gave great advantage to his enemies.<br />
Now it is his turn to speak.<br />
Now it is his turn (o) to speak.<br />
Light substances float on water.<br />
Light substances float (q) on water.<br />
Write this exercise, instead of st<strong>and</strong>ing idle .<br />
Write this exercise, instead of st<strong>and</strong>ing idle (q).<br />
Elizabeth, we have missed our train ; we are in a pickle now.<br />
Elizabeth, we have missed our train ; we are in a pickle (r) now.<br />
It is wrong to gamble.<br />
It is wrong 's) to gamble.<br />
EXERCISE LXXVII.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r knows by heart <strong>many</strong> Italian sonnets.<br />
My bro<strong>the</strong>r knows by heart (a) <strong>many</strong> Italian sonnets.<br />
I am sorry to see you afflicted ; I hope that you have not received<br />
any bad news.<br />
I am sorry (b) to see you afflicted ; I hope that 1 you have not<br />
received any bad news.<br />
These apples have a good smell .<br />
These apples have a good smell (c).<br />
I am sure that he is trifling with you.<br />
I am sure that he is trifling with (i) you.<br />
She has been godmo<strong>the</strong>r to all my children.<br />
She has been godmo<strong>the</strong>r (j) to all my children.<br />
I side with you because you are in <strong>the</strong> right .<br />
431
I side with (k) you because you are in <strong>the</strong> right (836, f).<br />
Camelias are very beautiful flowers, but <strong>the</strong>y have not any smell .<br />
Camelias are very beautiful flowers, but <strong>the</strong>y have not any smell<br />
(f).<br />
All her clo<strong>the</strong>s smell of musk .<br />
All her clo<strong>the</strong>s smell of musk (g).<br />
We could not help weeping .<br />
We could not help weeping (l).<br />
I always believed him to be an honest man.<br />
I always believed (707) him to be (m) an honest man.<br />
William is very fond of your cousin Elizabeth.<br />
William is very fond of (n) your cousin Elizabeth.<br />
If I <strong>had</strong> known what he meant , I should have spoken to him.<br />
If I <strong>had</strong> known what he meant (o), I should have spoken to him.<br />
When she heard <strong>the</strong> news, she fainted in her mo<strong>the</strong>r's arms.<br />
When she heard <strong>the</strong> news, she fainted (p) in her mo<strong>the</strong>r's arms.<br />
I remember that I promised to meet her at my mo<strong>the</strong>r's house, at<br />
three o'clock this afternoon.<br />
I remember (q) that I promised to meet her at my mo<strong>the</strong>r's house,<br />
at three o'clock this afternoon.<br />
I took a fancy to go <strong>and</strong> see <strong>the</strong> exhibition .<br />
I took a fancy (r) to go <strong>and</strong> (340) see <strong>the</strong> exhibition (856).<br />
He succeeded in obtaining <strong>the</strong> post.<br />
He succeeded 's) (693) in obtaining <strong>the</strong> post.<br />
EXERCISE LXXVIII.<br />
What are you doing here, Mrs.<br />
What are you doing here, Mrs.<br />
Vincenzi ?<br />
Vincenzi ?<br />
I am spending an hour in <strong>the</strong> fresh air ; I come here almost every<br />
morning.<br />
I am spending an hour in <strong>the</strong> fresh air ; I come here almost every<br />
morning.<br />
Where have you been?<br />
Where have you been? (123)<br />
432
I do not know from whence I came; we lost our way after crossing<br />
<strong>the</strong> little green bridge, near Mr.<br />
.<br />
Prati's house.<br />
I do not know from whence I came; we lost our way after (185)<br />
crossing <strong>the</strong> little green bridge, near Mr.<br />
.<br />
Prati's house.<br />
We went up <strong>and</strong> down I do not know for how long ; but at last we<br />
have arrived here safe <strong>and</strong> sound.<br />
We went up <strong>and</strong> down I do not know for how long ; but at last we<br />
have arrived here safe <strong>and</strong> sound.<br />
Will you go with me to see <strong>the</strong> pictures in <strong>the</strong> National Gallery ?<br />
Will you go with me to see <strong>the</strong> pictures in <strong>the</strong> National Gallery ?<br />
Yes, if you will permit me to take my sister with me.<br />
Yes, if you will permit me to take my sister with me.<br />
With <strong>the</strong> greatest pleasure.<br />
With <strong>the</strong> greatest pleasure.<br />
No doubt you have seen Mascagni's new opera ?<br />
No doubt you have seen Mascagni's new opera ?<br />
No, not yet ; I have no time at all, just now.<br />
No, not yet ; I have no time at all, just now.<br />
Now we will begin this work ; we shall finish it before midnight.<br />
Now we will begin this work ; we shall finish it before midnight.<br />
If I were in your place, I would remain in Nice during <strong>the</strong> winter.<br />
If I were in your place, I would remain in Nice during <strong>the</strong> winter.<br />
I often meet your cousin, Mrs. Alberti ; sometimes in <strong>the</strong> park,<br />
sometimes in <strong>the</strong> Reading Room of <strong>the</strong> British Museum.<br />
I often meet your cousin, Mrs. Alberti ; sometimes in <strong>the</strong> park,<br />
sometimes in <strong>the</strong> Reading Room of <strong>the</strong> British Museum.<br />
EXERCISE LXXIX.<br />
At what o'clock must <strong>the</strong>y depart ?<br />
At what o'clock must <strong>the</strong>y depart ?<br />
At half past seven.<br />
At half past seven.<br />
433
Then, I shall lay <strong>the</strong> cloth at once.<br />
Then, I shall lay <strong>the</strong> cloth at once.<br />
The dinner will be ready in half an hour.<br />
The dinner will be ready in half an hour.<br />
Walk slowly, my daughter, I have a pain in my foot ; I <strong>cannot</strong> walk<br />
quickly.<br />
Walk slowly, my daughter, I have a pain in my foot ; I <strong>cannot</strong> walk<br />
quickly.<br />
Do what I tell you, o<strong>the</strong>rwise I shall dismiss you.<br />
Do what I tell you, o<strong>the</strong>rwise I shall dismiss you.<br />
Do you speak in earnest ?<br />
Do you speak in earnest ?<br />
Certainly.<br />
Certainly.<br />
Why did you break my penknife ?<br />
Why did you break my penknife ?<br />
I did not do it on purpose ; it was a mere accident.<br />
I did not do it (209) on purpose ; it was a mere accident.<br />
I tell you frankly that you ought to apologize to him, at once.<br />
I tell you frankly that you ought to apologise to him, at once.<br />
He started up suddenly <strong>and</strong> gave Francis a fearful blow.<br />
He started up suddenly (885, o) <strong>and</strong> gave Francis a fearful blow.<br />
The most beautiful flowers last but a short time.<br />
The most beautiful flowers last but (802) a short time.<br />
The compass was not invented by a mariner, nor <strong>the</strong> telescope by<br />
an astronomer, nor <strong>the</strong> microscope by a philosopher, nor printing<br />
by a man of letters, nor gunpowder by a soldier.<br />
The compass was not invented (799) by a mariner, nor (800) <strong>the</strong><br />
telescope by an astronomer, nor <strong>the</strong> microscope by a philosopher,<br />
nor printing by a man of letters, nor gunpowder by a soldier.<br />
The loadstone always points towards <strong>the</strong> north.<br />
The loadstone always points towards <strong>the</strong> north.<br />
EXERCISE LXXX.<br />
Do not listen to him ; if he begins to talk, he will not stop all day.<br />
434
Do not listen to (a) him ; if he begins to 1 talk, he will not stop all<br />
day.<br />
I am waiting for my bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
I am waiting for (b) (251) my bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
I have been looking for some red ink this half hour.<br />
I have been looking (714) for (c) some red ink this half hour.<br />
I have bought <strong>the</strong>se steel pens for sixpence a dozen.<br />
I have bought (to buy for) (d) <strong>the</strong>se steel pens for sixpence a dozen.<br />
Charles is well acquainted with our affairs.<br />
Charles is well acquainted with (e) our affairs.<br />
We look upon him as your best friend.<br />
We look upon (f) him as your best friend.<br />
She wished for her mo<strong>the</strong>r's return.<br />
She wished for (g) her mo<strong>the</strong>r's return.<br />
He puts off his decision from day to day ; I do not like that .<br />
He puts off (h) his decision from (di) day to day ; I do not like that<br />
(608).<br />
I have asked him for some matches several times .<br />
I have asked (to ask for) (i) him for some matches 2 several times<br />
(602).<br />
They were ignorant of what we intended to do.<br />
They were (695) ignorant of (j) what we intended to do.<br />
I never met with a man so witty.<br />
I never met with (I have never met with) (k) a man so witty.<br />
Martial music inspires soldiers with courage <strong>and</strong> confidence.<br />
Martial music inspires (inspire with) (I) soldiers with courage <strong>and</strong><br />
confidence.<br />
She set off yesterday morning by <strong>the</strong> first train.<br />
She set off (m) yesterday morning by (per) <strong>the</strong> first train.<br />
I <strong>cannot</strong> bear with his nonsense any longer .<br />
I <strong>cannot</strong> bear with (n) his nonsense any longer (817).<br />
He sold his house for two hundred pounds .<br />
He sold (to sell for) (o) his house for two hundred pounds (656).<br />
EXERCISE LXXXI.<br />
He wants money to furnish his house.<br />
435
He wants (a) money to (225) furnish his house.<br />
He was told to mind <strong>the</strong> horses while we were dining.<br />
He was told to mind (b) <strong>the</strong> horses while we were dining.<br />
They mocked him, because he was poor.<br />
They mocked (c) him, because he was poor.<br />
I ordered him to leave <strong>the</strong> house, but he would not.<br />
I ordered (d) him to leave <strong>the</strong> house, but he would not.<br />
I distrust him.<br />
I distrust (e) him.<br />
They displease everybody.<br />
They displease (f) everybody.<br />
You will be punished, because you disobeyed your fa<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
You will be punished, because you disobeyed (707) (g) your fa<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
We asked him to take us to <strong>the</strong> opera.<br />
We asked (h) him to take (459) us to <strong>the</strong> opera.<br />
She doubted <strong>the</strong> truth of his assertion.<br />
She doubted (i) <strong>the</strong> truth of his assertion.<br />
Every time he entered <strong>the</strong> drawing room, he bowed to <strong>the</strong><br />
company.<br />
Every time (636) he entered (j) (697) <strong>the</strong> drawing-room, he bowed<br />
to <strong>the</strong> company.<br />
For <strong>many</strong> years we enjoyed <strong>the</strong> advantages of his friendship.<br />
For <strong>many</strong> years we enjoyed (k) (704) <strong>the</strong> advantages of his<br />
friendship.<br />
She taught us <strong>the</strong> art of painting upon china.<br />
She taught us (707) (I) <strong>the</strong> art of painting upon china.<br />
She <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong>s <strong>the</strong> fine arts.<br />
She <strong>under</strong>st<strong>and</strong>s (m) <strong>the</strong> fine arts.<br />
He would not hurt my reputation.<br />
He would not hurt (n) my reputation.<br />
EXERCISE LXXXII.<br />
He was punished, because he would not obey <strong>the</strong> king's order.<br />
He was punished, because he would not obey (o) <strong>the</strong> king's order.<br />
I am sure she will never pardon him for having broken her<br />
watch.<br />
436
I am sure (636) she will never pardon him for (p) (184) having<br />
broken her (562) watch.<br />
They permitted him to make sketches of <strong>the</strong> castle.<br />
They permitted (q) him to make sketches of <strong>the</strong> castle.<br />
I persuaded him to buy <strong>the</strong> pictures.<br />
I persuaded (r) him to buy <strong>the</strong> pictures.<br />
It pleased <strong>the</strong>m to make me a present of this pencil case.<br />
It pleased 's) <strong>the</strong>m to make me a (360) present of this pencil-case.<br />
He resisted all <strong>the</strong> entreaties of his poor parents.<br />
He resisted (t) all <strong>the</strong> entreaties of his poor parents.<br />
Those who are not able to resist temptations, ought to avoid<br />
<strong>the</strong>m.<br />
Those who are not able to resist (t) temptations, ought (791) to<br />
avoid <strong>the</strong>m.<br />
He <strong>had</strong> to renounce his bad companions.<br />
He <strong>had</strong> to (790) renounce (u) his bad companions.<br />
They used cement for <strong>the</strong> foundation of that building.<br />
They used (707) (v) cement for <strong>the</strong> foundation of that building.<br />
I am sure that he will outlive his nephew.<br />
I am sure that he will outlive (w) his nephew.<br />
He sl<strong>and</strong>ers everybody.<br />
He sl<strong>and</strong>ers (x) everybody.<br />
He ordered <strong>the</strong> waiter to bring him a glass of wine, <strong>and</strong> a bottle of<br />
soda water.<br />
He ordered (d) <strong>the</strong> waiter to bring him a glass of wine, <strong>and</strong> a bottle<br />
of soda-water.<br />
The rivulet entered a dark cavern on <strong>the</strong> western side of <strong>the</strong> hill.<br />
The rivulet entered (j) a dark cavern on <strong>the</strong> western side of <strong>the</strong><br />
hill.<br />
EXERCISE LXXXIII.<br />
The garden was embellished with beautiful marble statues.<br />
The garden was embellished with (a) beautiful marble statues.<br />
This country abounds with corn.<br />
This country abounds with (b) corn.<br />
His sword was adorned with jewels.<br />
437
His sword was adorned with (c) jewels.<br />
He grieved at <strong>the</strong> loss of his property.<br />
He grieved at (d) <strong>the</strong> loss of his property.<br />
He was satisfied with <strong>the</strong> little he <strong>had</strong> earned.<br />
He was satisfied with (e) (696) <strong>the</strong> little he <strong>had</strong> earned.<br />
They were burning with indignation.<br />
They were burning with (f) indignation.<br />
When his deceit was discovered, he blushed with shame.<br />
When his deceit was (768) discovered, he blushed with (g) shame.<br />
I blame him for having fled .<br />
I blame him for (h) having fled (685).<br />
The ship was laden with provisions for <strong>the</strong> besieged fortress.<br />
The ship was laden with (i) provisions for <strong>the</strong> besieged fortress.<br />
All <strong>the</strong> guns were loaded with balls.<br />
All <strong>the</strong> guns were loaded with (j) balls.<br />
They loaded him with kindness.<br />
They loaded him with (k) kindness.<br />
He could not be consoled for <strong>the</strong> loss of his child.<br />
He could (767, 695) not be consoled for (I) <strong>the</strong> loss of his child.<br />
They all agree that it is a poem to be greatly admired.<br />
They all agree (842 , g) that it is a poem to be (921) greatly<br />
admired.<br />
EXERCISE LXXXIV.<br />
They could not agree about <strong>the</strong> price.<br />
They could (704) not agree about (m) <strong>the</strong> price.<br />
All <strong>the</strong> furniture was covered with dust.<br />
All <strong>the</strong> furniture was (696) covered with (n) dust.<br />
I took possession of <strong>the</strong> room destined for me.<br />
I took possession of <strong>the</strong> room destined for (o) me.<br />
Everything depends upon what he is going to say.<br />
Everything depends upon (p) what he is going to say.<br />
He parted with his vicious horse as soon as he could.<br />
He parted with (q) (704) his vicious horse as soon as he could.<br />
He was endowed with <strong>the</strong> finest gifts that nature can give.<br />
438
He was (702) endowed with (r) <strong>the</strong> finest (518) gifts that nature<br />
can give.<br />
They <strong>had</strong> filled <strong>the</strong> rooms with <strong>the</strong> old furniture <strong>the</strong>y <strong>had</strong> taken<br />
from <strong>the</strong> castle.<br />
They <strong>had</strong> filled (with) 's) <strong>the</strong> rooms with <strong>the</strong> old furniture <strong>the</strong>y <strong>had</strong><br />
taken from <strong>the</strong> castle.<br />
He was presented with a beautiful gold watch .<br />
He was presented with (t) a beautiful gold watch (346).<br />
I congratulated him upon <strong>the</strong> success he has obtained.<br />
I congratulated him upon (u) <strong>the</strong> success he has obtained.<br />
He glories in <strong>the</strong> mischief he does.<br />
He glories in (v) <strong>the</strong> mischief he does.<br />
She wore a beautiful white satin dress trimmed with pearls.<br />
She wore a beautiful white satin dress trimmed with (w) pearls.<br />
He seized upon our goods.<br />
He seized upon (x) our goods.<br />
EXERCISE LXXXV.<br />
He was inflamed with rage, on hearing <strong>the</strong> losses he <strong>had</strong><br />
sustained.<br />
He was inflamed with (a) rage, on hearing (686) <strong>the</strong> losses he <strong>had</strong><br />
sustained.<br />
He inquired about <strong>the</strong> state of <strong>the</strong> country.<br />
He inquired about (b) <strong>the</strong> state of <strong>the</strong> country.<br />
The table was covered with books <strong>and</strong> papers.<br />
The table was (696) covered with (c) books <strong>and</strong> papers.<br />
He fell in love with my cousin.<br />
He fell in love with (d) my cousin.<br />
He languished from hunger for three days, <strong>and</strong> <strong>the</strong>n died.<br />
He languished from (703) (e) hunger for (311) three days, <strong>and</strong><br />
<strong>the</strong>n died.<br />
He praised <strong>the</strong>m for <strong>the</strong>ir honesty.<br />
He praised <strong>the</strong>m for (f) <strong>the</strong>ir honesty.<br />
She wondered at <strong>the</strong> sudden return of my bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
She wondered at (g) <strong>the</strong> sudden return of my bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
He was threatened with death if he would not confess <strong>the</strong> truth.<br />
439
He was threatened with (h) (767) death if he would not confess<br />
<strong>the</strong> truth.<br />
He meddles with <strong>the</strong> business of everybody .<br />
He meddles with (i) everybody's business.<br />
His mind was stored with useful knowledge.<br />
His mind was stored with (j) useful knowledge.<br />
The <strong>the</strong>ft was concealed a long time from everybody.<br />
The <strong>the</strong>ft was concealed a long time from (k) everybody.<br />
He was fed on fish <strong>and</strong> fruit for three weeks.<br />
He was fed on (I) (703) fish <strong>and</strong> fruit for three weeks.<br />
They were oppressed with taxes.<br />
They were oppressed with (m) taxes.<br />
I shall call upon you this evening.<br />
I shall call upon (n) you this evening.<br />
EXERCISE LXXXVI.<br />
What were you thinking of when I met you ?<br />
What were you thinking of (o) when I met you ?<br />
They wept for joy when <strong>the</strong>y heard that <strong>the</strong>ir fa<strong>the</strong>r <strong>had</strong> arrived.<br />
They wept for (p) joy when <strong>the</strong>y heard that <strong>the</strong>ir fa<strong>the</strong>r <strong>had</strong><br />
arrived.<br />
They profited by <strong>the</strong> ruin of <strong>the</strong>ir friend.<br />
They profited by (q) <strong>the</strong> ruin of <strong>the</strong>ir friend.<br />
He was punished for <strong>the</strong> crime he <strong>had</strong> committed.<br />
He was punished for (r) <strong>the</strong> crime he <strong>had</strong> committed.<br />
They were speaking about politics till midnight.<br />
They were speaking about (of) politics (419) till midnight.<br />
They rejoiced at <strong>the</strong> good news.<br />
They rejoiced at 's) <strong>the</strong> good news.<br />
He laughed at <strong>the</strong> misfortune of my bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
He laughed at (t) <strong>the</strong> misfortune of my bro<strong>the</strong>r.<br />
He returned thanks for <strong>the</strong> favor he <strong>had</strong> received.<br />
He returned thanks for (u) <strong>the</strong> favour he <strong>had</strong> received.<br />
He will have to answer for his bad conduct.<br />
He will have (790) to answer for (v) his bad conduct.<br />
They were surfeited with food.<br />
440
They were surfeited with (w) food.<br />
In consequence of his behavior at <strong>the</strong> last election he has<br />
decreased in popularity.<br />
In consequence of his behaviour at <strong>the</strong> last election he has (is)<br />
decreased in (x) popularity.<br />
He used to take <strong>the</strong> money from his sister.<br />
He used (697) to take (y) <strong>the</strong> money from his sister.<br />
He triumphed over his enemies at last.<br />
He triumphed over (z) his enemies at last.<br />
He lives upon a pension granted to him by <strong>the</strong> king.<br />
He lives upon (aa) a pension granted to him by <strong>the</strong> king.<br />
EXERCISE LXXXVII.<br />
The eagle rises above <strong>the</strong> clouds.<br />
The eagle rises above <strong>the</strong> clouds.<br />
The wise man acts according to <strong>the</strong> dictates of reason.<br />
The wise man acts according to (900) <strong>the</strong> dictates of reason.<br />
He has gone to America in spite of <strong>the</strong> advice of his best friends.<br />
He has gone to America in spite of (900) <strong>the</strong> advice of his best<br />
friends.<br />
The fleet <strong>cannot</strong> sail on account of contrary winds.<br />
The fleet <strong>cannot</strong> sail on account of (930) contrary winds.<br />
On that occasion he acted like a hero.<br />
On (298) that occasion he acted like a (925) hero.<br />
You were playing, instead of studying.<br />
You were playing, instead of (900) studying.<br />
When I went out, I saw : her leaning against <strong>the</strong> window.<br />
When I went out, I saw : 1 her leaning against <strong>the</strong> window.<br />
Here is Mrs.. Pettegola ; she comes to propose an arrangement<br />
between us two.<br />
Here is Mrs.. Pettegola ; she comes to propose an arrangement<br />
between us two.<br />
What a bore ! Why does she not mind her own affairs ; she has<br />
nothing to do with this matter.<br />
What a bore ! Why does she not mind her own affairs ; she has<br />
nothing to do with this matter.<br />
441
2 Margaret wrote me a line <strong>the</strong> day before yesterday, informing<br />
me of her intended departure for Venice, in a week , or ten days.<br />
2 Margaret wrote me a line 3 <strong>the</strong> day before yesterday, informing<br />
me of her intended departure for Venice, in a week (549), or ten<br />
days.<br />
EXERCISE LXXXVIII.<br />
"About that time I walked out into <strong>the</strong> fields towards Bow.<br />
"About that time I walked out into <strong>the</strong> fields towards Bow.<br />
Here I met a poor man walking on <strong>the</strong> bank of <strong>the</strong> river.<br />
Here 4 I met a poor man walking on <strong>the</strong> bank of <strong>the</strong> river.<br />
" " On <strong>the</strong> fifteenth of May <strong>the</strong>y were ten miles from Pekin.<br />
" " On <strong>the</strong> fifteenth of May <strong>the</strong>y were ten miles from Pekin.<br />
They <strong>had</strong> now been travelling for six months.<br />
They <strong>had</strong> now 5 been travelling for six months.<br />
" The immediate loss of Constantinople may be ascribed to <strong>the</strong><br />
bullet, or arrow, <strong>which</strong> pierced <strong>the</strong> gauntlet of John Giustiniani.<br />
" The immediate loss of Constantinople may be ascribed (771) to<br />
<strong>the</strong> bullet, or arrow, <strong>which</strong> pierced <strong>the</strong> gauntlet of John<br />
Giustiniani.<br />
" Into <strong>the</strong> ecclesiastic federation our Saxon ancestors were<br />
admitted.<br />
" Into <strong>the</strong> ecclesiastic federation our Saxon ancestors were<br />
admitted.<br />
5 A regular communication was opened between our shores <strong>and</strong><br />
that part of Europe in <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong> traces of ancient power <strong>and</strong><br />
policy were yet discernible.<br />
5 A regular communication was opened between our shores <strong>and</strong><br />
that part of Europe in <strong>which</strong> <strong>the</strong> traces of ancient power <strong>and</strong><br />
policy were yet discernible.<br />
" Courage ! soldiers, fear nothing .<br />
" Courage ! (951) soldiers, fear nothing (672).<br />
For shame ! said he, to insult a poor old man.<br />
For shame ! (955) said he, to insult a poor old man.<br />
Softly , do not fly into a passion.<br />
Softly (953), do not fly into a passion.<br />
Pray ! do not make such a noise.<br />
442
Pray ! (952) do not make such a noise.<br />
We have arrived at <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> grammar.<br />
We have arrived at <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> grammar.<br />
Hurrah !<br />
Hurrah !<br />
443